l^i^tii ? 




Glass li \ 1 ^ 
Book- - fa^ 4 



MANUAL OF INSTRUCTION 

F O 11 THE 

VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 



UNITED STATES 




BY 



MAJOR WILLIAM GILHAM,, 

Instruct OR of tactics, and commandant of cadets of the 

VIRGINIA military INSTITUTE, 



PHILADELPHIA: 

CHARLES J3ESII.VER, 

1229 CHESTNUT STREET. 

CUSHINGS & BAILEY, BALTIMORE, MD. 

18 1. 



U//3 



Entcredj according to Act of Congress, in the year 1860, by 

CHARLES DESILVEJ-i 

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United Stales lor the i^aatern District 
of Pennsylvania. 



PREFACE 



The following work was undertaken with the hope of meeting, to some 
extent at least, a long-felt want among the volunteers and militia ; that is, a 
manual, which, besides containing every thing which may be necessai^y for 
mere tactical instruction, should also embrace more or less instruction on 
various other subjects of equal importance with tactics ; subjects that few 
men who have not been regularly trained in the military service, have much 
familiarity with. In the regular service the necessity for such a work is not 
felt, at least not to the same extent as among the volunteers and militia, from 
the fact that the militai'y system being in constant operation, and each indi- 
vidual, no matter what his present rank maybe, having gradually risen from 
a low, or perhaps the very lowest grade, has abundant opportunities for 
becoming familiar with it in all its details, before he is called upon for any 
extensive exercise of his professional knowledge. "With the volunteers and 
militia, however, where no such process for the acquisition of important 
practical knowledge is attainable, the case is very diflferent. Called suddenly 
into active service, from the various pursuits of civil life, all, even the highest in 
rank, and the best informed, meet with difficulties on every side ; what would 
seem to be comparatively plain and simple to the old campaigner, must of 
necessity be more or less obscure to the volunteer or militia officer, whose 
opportunities for the attainment of military knowledge have been limited. 

It is not intended, nor indeed would it be desirable, that the present work 
should embrace every thing which is proper to be known by our citizen sol- 
diery ; its aim is, simply to aid the inexperienced so far as to enable them 
to become familiar with such principles, and practical details of the military 
service, as are absolutely essential to those who would be competent officers, 
whether in the line, or in the staff. If it accomplishes this, it will not have 
beeu compiled in vain. 

The Introduction, or •' Glossary," will, it is hoped, be found useful to the 
student of military art or science, and to the reader of military history. 

(iii) 



IV PREFACE. 

Article L, on Army Organization, commences with a general account of 
the four arms of the service, — Infantry, Cavalry, Artillery, and Engineers,— 
the duties of each in the conduct of a campaign, and the proportion they 
should bear to each other in an army. The latter part of the lirticle enters 
more fully into the details of the organization of each of the three leading 
arms, and closes with a short account of the duties of the various depart- 
ments of the staflF. 

In Article II., upon Arms and Ammunition, will be found a condensed ac- 
count of the various arms and kinds of ammunition used by infantry, cavalry, 
and artillery, together with the manner of preparing and using the latter. 

From Article III. to Article XL, inclusive, will be found the tactical por- 
tion of the work; it embraces very full instructions for every kind of Infantry 
troops, from the School of the Soldier to that of the Battalion ; Cavalry tac- 
tics, from the School of the Trooper to the Instruction of the Regiment ; and 
Artillery tactics, from the School of the Piece to the Evolutions of a Battery. 
The whole will be found to be in strict conformity with the requirements of 
the United States service. 

Article XII. embraces directions and forms for the conduct of every form 
of parade ; the kinds and duties of guards ; together with much other matter 
of a kindred nature. 

In Article XIII. the duties of captains, and other company ofBcers, in 
regard to the internal management, police, and morale of their companies ; 
together with the proper equipment of officers and men, to secure efficiency as 
well as comfort, when in the field, camps, marches, etc., are discussed. 

Article XIV. is devoted to the Staff, and embraces such directions for the 
conduct of those departments of the staff upon which the efficiency of aa 
army in the field must mainly depend, as seemed most necessary. In this 
Article will also be found directions and forms for the preparation of the 
morning reports of Companies, Regiments, Brigades, and Divisions, together 
with such forms for requisitions, returns, etc., as are in most frequent use. 

In Article XV. will be found some account of the various orders of battle, 
together with an outline of the manner in which the different kinds of troops 
should be handled in action. 

Article XVI. contains directions for the organization and conduct of 
INIilitary Courts; and lastly, the Appendix, containing the Articles of War, 
presents us with the Miliiary Law now in force. 

W. G. 

Virginia Military Institute. December, 1860. 



CONTENTS. 



[ The numbers refer to paragraphs and not to pages.] 



ARTICLE I. 
ARMY ORGANIZATION. 

Army corps; 2. Infantry — Proportion of infantry to the other arm? — 
Dis^ction between heavy and light troops — The musket — Uses and for- 
ma^n of infantry of the line ; 3. Light infantry and riflemen — The riiie 
and sword-bayonet — Duties, and mode of formation of light troops; 4. 
Cavalry — Its rank, and the proportion it should bear to the infantry — 
Distinguishing qualities and uses; 5. Artillery and its rank — Proportion 
to other arms — Light and heavy artillery — Distinction between mounted 
and horse artillery — Uses of artillery; 6, Engineer troops. 

ORGANIZATION OF INFANTRY. 

, The company and its officers — The platoon — Formation of the company 
— Comrades in battle ; 8. Posts of officers, etc. ; 9. The regiment — Its 
officers; 10. Posts of the field and staff of the regiment; IL Pioneers, 
field music, and band ; 12. Color guard ; 13, General guides and markers ; 
14. Battalion in column ; 15. Posts of officers in column; 16. Brigades 
and divisions — Posts of general officers in line and in column. 



ORGANIZATION OF CAVALRY. 

17. The company — Posts of officers, etc. ; 18. The squadron — Posts of 
officers and file-closers ; 19. The regiment in line — Posts of the field and 
staff, etc. ; 20. The regiment in column by twos and fours ; 21. In column 
of platoons ; 22. In column by division ; 23. Order in close column of 
squadron, cavalry brigades and divisions. 

ORGANIZATION OF FIELD ARTILLERY. 

25. Batteries — Guns and howitzers — Relative proportions of these — Cais- 
sons ; 26. Complement of officers and men necessary to man the battery ; 
27. The order in line ; 28. The order in column ; 29. The order in bat- 
tery ; 30. Two or more batteries united : 31. The position of artillery. 

1* Cv) 



CONTENTS 



THE STAFF, 



32. The different departments of the staff; 33. Adjutant-geueral's depart- 
ment; 34. The inspector-general's department; 35. The quartermaster's 
department; 3G. The commissary department ; 37. The engineer depart- 
ment; 38. The ordnance department; 39. The pay department ; 40. The 
medical department. 

ARTICLE II. 

ARMS AND AMMUNITION. 

41. Small arms now in use ; 42. The smooth bore musket; 43. The rifled 
musket — The cylindro-conical ball; 44. The " altered musket" ; 45. The 
rifle (Minie) ; 46. Rifled carbines, and breech-loading rifles; 47. Pistols, 
and pistol-carbines ; 48. Sabres; 49. Artillery — Guns — Howitzers — Mor- 
tars — The different calibres of each in use ; 50. Field guns — Siege and 
garrison guns — Sea-coast guns ; 51. Howitzers — Field — Mountain — Siege 
and garrison — Sea-coast; 52. Field howitzers; 53. Mortars; 54. Trun- 
nions ; 55. Field gun carriages ; 56. Caissons ; 57, 58. Cartridges for 
small arms, and how to prepare them ; 59. Ball, and ball and bucJc-sho' 
cartridges; 60. To fill cartridges ; 61,62. Cartridges for elongatwd pro 
jectiles; 63. How to use them; 64. Cartridges for artillery — Fixed am 
munition; 65. Dimensions, and how made; 66. The charges of powder, 
67, 68. Sabots; 69, Canister shot, and how prepared ; 70. To attach thf 
cartridge to the projectile ; 71, 72. Cartridge blocks, and paper caps ; 73, 
74. Shells and their charges ; 75. Spherical-case shot; 76. To load sphe- 
rical-case; 77. The fuze; 78,79. The Boarman fuze, and how to use it, 
80, Priming and friction tubes ; 81. Port-fires and their uses. 



ARTICLE III. 

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 

82. General directions; 83. Position of soldier ; 84-86. The facings; 87. 
Balance step — Direct step ; 88-92. Common time — Quick time — Double 
quick step — Double quick time; 93. General directions for manual; 94— 
141. Manual for the musket; 142-190. Manual for the rifle; 191-196. 
The firings ; 197. Bayonet exercise ; 198. Salute with the sword or sabre : 
199. Color Salute; 200-203. The alignments ; 204. To march to front ; 
205. The oblique; 206, 207. The double quick and the about; 208-210. 
To march by a flank ; 211-215. Wheeling and turning. 

ARTICLE IV. 

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 

216. To form the company; 217. To open and close ranks ; 218-221. The 
alignments; 222,223. To stack arms; 225-230. The firings; 231-236. To 
advance in line — The oblique — Mark time — March in retreat — The about ; 
237-239. To march by flank ; 240. On right by file into line ; 241. March- 



CONTENTS. Vll 

iug by llie flank to form company or platoon^ ; 242-245. Breaking into, and 
the march of, a column of platoons ; 246-248. To form a column of pla- 
toons into line to the left or right ; 249, 250. A company marching in. 
line, to break it into column of platoons, and to re-form company; 251. In 
column of platoons, to break files to the rear; 252-255. The route step; 
256. The countermarch ; 257. In column of platoons, to form line on the 
right; 258-261, To form from two to four ranks, and reciprocally ; 262. 
General directions for skirmishers ; 263. Deployments ; 264. To deploy 
forward; 265. To deploy by a flank ; 266. To deploy on the centre ; 267, 
268. To extend and close intervals ; 269. To relieve a company deployed 
as skirmishers ; 270-273. The advance, retreat, changes of directions, 
etc.; 274-276. The firings; 277-282. The rally ; 283. The assembly. 



ARTICLE V. 

TARGET PRACTICE. 

284-296. The various rules for securing accuracy of aim, and skill in the use 
of small arms. 

ARTICLE yi. 

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

297. To form the regiment or battalion ; 298. To open and close ranks ; 299. 
The firings ; 300. To break to the right into column ; 301, 302. To break 
to the right and rear into column ; 303-305. To form close column ; 
306-308. The march in column at full distance; 309-312. To close the 
column to half distance, or in mass ; 313, 314. In column at half distance, 
or closed in mass, to take distances; 315-317. In column closed in mass, 
to change direction; 318-320. In column by company, to form divisions; 
321. The countermarch; 322. Manner of determining the line of battle; 
323-325. A column at full distance formed into line of battle to the left, 
or right ; 327. Successive formations ; 328. On the pight into line ; 329, 330. 
Column at full distance forward into line ; 331, 332. Into line faced to the 
rear; 333-335. Formation of the line of battle by two movements; 
336-339. Different modes of passing from a column at half distance into 
line of battle ; 340-343. Deployments of columns closed in mass ; 344-347. 
The advance and retreat in line of battle, and the movements incident 
thereto; 348-350. The passage of obstacles; 351. To pass a defile in 
retreat ; 352, 353. To march by a flank ; 3.54. To form the battalion on 
the right or left, by file, into line ; 355-357. Changes of front ; 358, 359. 
To form the battalion into double column ; 360-363. The deployment of 
the double column ; 364-379. Dispositions against cavalry, or the forma- 
tion of squares; 380. To deploy the battalion as skirmishers; 381. The 
rally. 

ARTICLE VII. 

SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 

382-384. Directions for, and position of trooper before mounting; 385. To 
mount; 386. Position of trooper mounted : 387-389. The use of the arms 
and legs; 390. To march; 391. To turn to the right or left ; 392. To the 



VUl CONTENTS. 

right or left about; 893. To* make a quarter turn to the right or left ; 
894. To rein back; 395. To dismount: 396. To file off; 397-429. Exer- 
cises in the riding house in single and in double ranks ; 430-432. Princi- 
ples of the gallop ; 433-438. The wheelings in single and double ranks, 
and on fixed and movable pivots; 439-461. Sabre exercise; 462-466. 
Manual of carbine, or breech-loading rifle for horsemen ; 467-469. 
Manual for Colt's revolvers. 

ARTICLE YIII. 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP 

470, 471. General directions — Mounting and forming ranks; 472-476. The 
alignments; 477. To open and close ranks ; 478. To rein back ; 479,480. 
To break the troop by file, and the direct march in file; 481. The oblique 
march ; 482-484. The troop marching in column, by file, to form it into 
line to the front, to the left, or on the right; 485-487. To break the troop 
by twos and by fours, and the direct and oblique march ; 488-490. The 
troop marching in column by twos or by fours, to form it to the front, to 
the left, or on the right into line ; 491. To break the troop by the left ; 
492. To break by twos and fours at the trot, and at the gallop ; 493, 494. 
To form the troop to the left into one rank, and to the right into two 
ranks ; 495-499. To form twos and fours at the same gait, and to break 
by twos and by fours at the same gait; 500-504. To form twos and fours 
in doubling the gait, and to break by twos and fours in doubling the 
gait ; 505, 506. Sabre exercise ; 507, 508. Direct march of the troop in 
line; 509. The countermarch; 510-512. The troop being in line, to 
form it into column with distance, and the march of this column ; 518. 
The oblique march in column; 514-521. In column, to break by fours, 
by twos, and by file, and to form twos, fours, and platoons at the same 
gait; 522-527. The same movements in doubling the gait; 528, 529. 
The about in column, and the halt; 530-532. To form line to left, and 
right; 533, 534. To form line on the right, and on the left; 535. To form 
front into line; 536, 537. The formation of lines faced to the rear; 538- 
542. Movements by fours, the troop being in column with distance ; 543- 
547. The changes of direction of a troop marching in line; 548. Move- 
ment by fours, the troop in line ; 549. The troop marching in line, to 
break it by platoons to the right, and to re-form it; 550. 551. The troop 
marching in line, to break it to the front by platoons, and to re-form it ; 
552-557. The charge ; 558. Rallying ; 559. Skirmishing. 

ARTICLE IX. 

SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 

560, 561. The movements of the squadron ; 562. Successive alignments of 
platoons in the squadron ; 563, 564. To break from the right to march to 
the left; 565, To break by platoons to the right, and to advance; 566, To 
form line to the front by inversion ; 567. Break to the right by platoons, 
head of column to the left or half left ; 568, To form line faced to the rear 
by inversion, on the rear of the column; 569. By platoons to the right, 
head of column to the right, or half right ; 570, To form line face to the 
rear, by inversion, on the head of the column ; 571. The oblique ; 572, The 



CONTENTS. IX 

oblique by platoons ; 573. By fours about, and to face to the front again ; 
674. The about by platoons ; 575. To break the squadron to the front by 
platoon, and to re-form it; 576, 577. The passage of obstacles ; 578-581. 
Skirmishing; 582-587. The column by division. 

ARTICLE X. 

EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 

688. Positions of the guides in column; 589, 590. The alignments; 591. To 
break the regiment by fours; 692, S'QS. Form platoons, and to break the 
platoons by fours ; 594, 595. The same movements in doubling the gait ; 
696-598. To form the regiment to the front, to the left, and upon the right 
into line; 599. To form the regiment into column with distance; 600, 601. 
To break from the right, to march to the left ; 602-605. To form the regi- 
ment into close column ; 606, 607. The march, and change of direction in 
column ; 608. Platoons left about wheel ; 609, 610. By fours to the right, 
and right or left about ; 611. The oblique ; 612-620. Various methods of 
forming a regiment into line of battle; 621, 622. The deployments of a 
close column ; 623. The march in Hne ; 624. The regiment marching in 
line to oblique by platoons ; 625, To gain ground to the right; 626. To 
march in retreat ; 627, 628. The changes of front of the line ; 629, 630. 
The passage of defiles ; 631, 632. The charge. 

ARTICLE XI. 

LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 

633, 635. Manner of forming the gun detachments, and posting the can- 
noneers ; 636-643. Loading and firing the piece ; 644, 645. Moving the 
piece by hand; 646, 647. Changing posts, and equipments; 648-650. 
Limbering; 661. Posts of cannoneers, the piece limbered; 652-656. To 
form the detachments, their posts, and changing posts ; 667. Moving the 
piece by hand, when limbered; 658-660. Unlimbered and coming into 
action; 661. Movements with the prolonge ; 662. Service of the gun with 
diminished numbers ; 663. Supply of ammunition when in action ; 664-666. 
Pointing and ranges; 667. Composition of the battery — The officers and 
men necessary to man it ; 668. Posts of officers, etc. ; 669. Manning, the 
battery ; 670, 671. To mount and dismount the cannoneers ; 672-684. To 
unpack, and to perform various movements in column ; 685-687. Various 
ways of passing from the order in column to the order in line ; 688—695. 
To pass from the order in line to the order in column; 696, 697. To form 
the double column into line ; 698-700. To advance, to change direction in 
line, and to halt; 701-717. Formations in battery; 718. To pass from the 
order in battery to the order in column; 719-723. The firings ; 724-727 
The changes of front in battery ; 728-729. The passage of defiles. 

ARTICLE XII. 

730. Honors paid by troops to the President, Governor, General-in- chief. 
Major General, Brigadier General, etc.. Members of the Cabinet, etc.. 
Foreign Ministers, Officers, etc.; 731. Compliments paid by guards — Com- 



CONTENTS. 

pliments paid by officers and soldiers to their superiors ; 732. Artillery 
salutes; 733, Escorts of honor, how formed and conducted; 734. Funeral 
honoi-s — the escort for yarious grades, the manner of conducting the 
march, etc.; 735, 736. Manner of inspecting infantry and cavalry ; 737- 
741. Forms of parade — Dress pai-ade — Review of infantry — Review of 
cavalry — Review of artillery ; 742. Guard mounting — Relieving sentinels 
and guards ; 743. Method of escorting and receiving the color of an in- 
fantry regiment ; 744. Method of escorting and receiving the standard of a 
cavalry regiment ; 745. Method of receiving one body of troops by another ; 
746. Manner in which orders should be written and communicated ; 747. 
The manner of conducting musters of the troops ; 748. The roster, or de- 
tails for service, how made; 749. Sentinels are relieved, how often — The 
countersign and parole — Duties of officers, non-commissioned officers, and 
privates of guards — Manner of challenging — Receiving the "grand 
rounds," etc., etc ; 750. General arrangement of the guards of a camp or 
position; 751. The different kinds of guards — Police guards — Pickets — 
Grand guards — Outposts — Patrols; 752. Strength and duties of the police 
guard — Duties of the regimental officer of the day ; 753. Strength and 
duties of the pickets; 754-757. Strength and duties of the grand guards 
and outposts — Manner of posting them, etc., etc. 



ARTICLE XIII. 

DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES — DUTIES IN CAMP AND 
GARRISONS, ETC. 

758. Responsibility of captains ; 759. Manner of issuing arms to volunteer 
companies ; 760. The uniform and equipment of volunteers and militia — 
The knapsack — Haversack — Bedsack — Blankets, etc.; 761. Tents — The 
Sibley tent — The shelter tent — Tent knapsack — Half-faced camp ; 762. 
The "kit," or necessary equipment for the field ; 763. Interior police of 
companies — Method of keeping the arms, etc., in order — The ration, how 
cooked and served ; 764, 765. Duties in camp and garrison — The reveille 
— Breakfast call — Troop — Surgeon's call — Dinner call — Retreat — Tattoo — 
Stable-call — Drummers' call; 765. Daily duties — General officers of the 
day — Field officers of the day — Regimental officers of the day — Their 
duties; 766. Camp of infantry; 767. Camp of cavalry; 768. Camp of 
artillery; 769. Bivouacs; 770, Cantonments; 771. Preliminaries for the 
inarch — The general — Long roll — Directions for the conduct of the march ; 
772. The camping party — Going into camp — Details for duty. 



ARTICLE XIY. 

THE STAFF. 

773-778. Duties of the adjutant-general's department — Adjutant-generals 
and assistant adjutant-generals — Morning reports of brigades and divisions 
— Orders, how distributed — The parole and countersign how issued, and 
to whom sent — Manner of folding the countersign — Brigade and division 
inspectors — Adjutants of regiments — Morning report of regiment; 779- 



CONTENTS. XI 

785. Quartermaster's department — Quarters, and the allowance of — ■ 
Transportation — The forage ration — Stationery — Camp and garrison 
equipage — Depot quartermasters, etc.; 786-789. Subsistence depart- 
ment — The ration — Provision returns — Issues; 790, 791. The medical 
department — Surgeon's call, and morning sick report; 792. The pay 
department. 

ARTICLE Xy. 

BATTLES. 

793. The different kinds of battles ; 794. When a defensive battle should 
be given ; 795. Conditions to be satisfied in a defensive position ; 796. 
Offensive battles; 797. The meeting of two armies; 798, 799. The dif- 
ferent orders of battle ; 800-808. The infantry— The defence— Attack- 
Pursuit — Retreat — Means of prolonging the engagement — Defence against 
cavalry — Against artillery — Attack on artillei-y; 809-812. The position 
of cavalry — The defence — Its attack upon infantry — Upon artillery ; 813- 
815. Position of artillery — Defence — Attack. 



ARTICLE XYL 

COURTS MARTIAL. 

816. Courts martial defined; 817. What officers eligible as members ; 818. 
Kinds and powers of courts martial : 819. Who may assemble general 
courts martial, and manner of assembling them ; 820. Number of officers 
necessary to compose a court; 821. Revision of the proceedings, etc.; 
822. Regimental and garrison courts; how convened, etc.; 823-828. The 
trial— Challenges— The oath of the members, and of the judge advocate — 
The plea of the prisoner — The examinations of the witnesses — The de- 
fence ; 829-831. The findings; 832-834. The sentence ; 835, 836. Duties 
of the judge advocate; 837. Form of order convening a court ; 838. Form 
of proceedings. 

ARTICLE XYIL 

MUSIC. 
Reveille, Tattoo, etc., etc. 



APPENDIX. 
THE ARTICLES OF WAR. 



INTRODUCTION. 



GLOSSARY. 
A. 

Abatis. A species of intrenchment ; it consists of trees felled, and lai('l 
with their branches sharpened and interwoven, so as to present a thick 
row of pointed stakes towards the enemy. They are generally used in 
front of field works ; while the enemy is removing them, he is exposed to 
a destructive fire from the defenders. 

About. A teclanical word to express tlie movement by which a body of 
troops reverses its front. In infantry the about is always to the right ; iq 
cavalry it is either to the right or left ; and in artillery it is to the left. 

Accessible. A place is said to be accessible, by land or sea, when it can 
be approached by a hostile force on either of these sides. 

Accoutrements. A term denoting the belts^ cartridge-box, scabbard, etc., 
of a soldier. 

Action, in military language, is an engagement between two armies, or any 
smaller bodies of troops. 

Adjutant. A regimental staff-officer, who discharges all the duties of detail 
of a regiment or military post, communicates all orders, forms the battalion 
for drills, parades, etc., mounts the guards, and in the manoeuvres assists 
the lieutenant-colonel. 

Adjutant-General is the chief staff-officer of the army, division, or brigade 
to which he belongs, and assists the general in the discharge of his duties ; 
he keeps the roster of the officers ; makes details for duty ; makes up 
morning reports, returns, etc. ; publishes the orders of the general ; and 
is the channel through which all reports to, and correspondence with the 
general, pass. 

Advanced. Signifies some part of the army in front of the rest, as in ad-, 
vanced-guards, which always precede the main body ; it applies also to any 
portion of the command which is thrown in front of the first line. 
2 (xiii) 



XIV GLOSSARY. 

Advantage-Ground. A ground that gives superiority, or an opportunity 
for annoyance or resistance. 

Affair. An action or engagement; generally between small bodies of 
troops. 

Aid-de-Camp. An officer appointed to attend a general officer : he receives 
and carries orders, and discharges such other duties as may be necessary. 
A Brigadier-General is entitled to one, and a Major-General to two aides- 
de-camp. 

Aim. The act of bringing the firearm to its proper line of direction with 
the object to be struck. 

Alarm is a sudden apprehension of an attack, by which men take to their 
arms, and stand upon their guard. 

Alarbi-Post is the place appointed for every regiment or detachment to 
assemble, in case of alarm. 

Alert. Vigilant, 

Alignment is the placing of men on the same line. In artillery it applies 
to the gun carriages, caissons, etc. 

Ally, in a military sense, implies a nation united to another, under treaty, 
either offensive or defensive. 

Ambuscade. A body of men posted in some secret or concealed place, for 
the purpose of falling upon an enemy by surprise. 

Ambush. A place of concealment for a body of troops intended for a sur- 
prise. 

Ammunition implies everything in the way of powder, balls, shells, car- 
tridges, canister and grape shot, etc. etc. 

Appointments. Warlike habiliments, accoutrements, etc. 

Apprehend. Seizing or confining any person. 

Approaches. The works that are carried on towards a work that is besieged. 

Counter- Av-pno ACRES. The works carried on by the besieged against those 
of the besiegers. 

Apron. In gunnery, a piece of leather to cover the vent of a piece of ord- 
nance. 

Arm, a term used to signify a particular kind of troops, as the infantry 
arm, cavalry arm,, etc. 

To Arm. To take arms, or prepare to meet an enemy. 

Armed. Something provided with, or carrying arms. 

An Armed body of 'men denotes a corps or detachment ready for an engage- 
ment. 

Armistice. A temporary truce. 

Armory. A place for the construction of arms; also a place of deposit for 
arms. 

Arms. All weapons whether of offence or defence. 



GLOSSARY. XV 

FiVe-AnMS. Any macliine discharged by inflamed gunpowder. 

Place of Arms. A part of the covered way of a fortification. (See Fortifi- 
cation.) 

Arbiy. An organized body of armed men commanded by a general. In 
time of peace, the whole organized military force of the State is intended 
when we speak of the army ; in time of war this force is broken up into 
several distinct bodies, each of which is an army. These armies are named 
from the particular duty assigned them, as the army of invasion, army of 
occupation, etc. ; or from the country or direction in which they operate — 
as, army of the North, army of Mexico, etc. ; or from the general who com- 
mands it — as, army of Scott, etc. An army is made up of a staff and 
administrative departments, and four distinct arms — Infantry, Cavalry, 
Artillery, and Engineers ; each having distinct duties, but all combining 
to form one and the same military body. 

Arrest. The depriving an ofiicer of his sword, preparatory to trial, for an 
offence against military law. The order for arrest usually designates the 
particular limits within which the officer is required to confine himself. 
An officer under arrest must not call upon his commanding officer without 
permission, and then it must be upon business. 

Breach of Arrest. Going beyond the limits prescribed in the order of 
an-est of an officer. It is a grave offence. 

Arsenal, A place of deposit for arms and other implements. Arsenals are 
sometimes arsenals of construction, a term which signifies that it is a place 
of construction as well as deposit. 

Articles of War. Rules for the better government of the army. 

Artillery. Every sort of fire-arms of large calibre, as guns, mortars, 
howitzers, etc., together with everything necessary for serving them in the 
field, at sieges, etc. Also a term applied to the science which treats of 
the construction and service of artillery. Also a name given to the troops 
which serve artillery. 

Assault. A furious effort to carry a fortified post, camp, or fortification. 

Assembly. The signal to form by company. 

Attack. An onset upon the enemy, either to gain a post, or break his ranks ; 
or to divert his attention and make him divide his forces, when it becomes 
n false attack. 

B. 

Baggage. The clothing, tents, utensils, provisions, etc., of an army or corps. 
Band. A body of musicians attached to any regiment or battalion. 
Banquette. A small elevation of earth three or four feet wide, and four 

feet nine inches below the crest of the parapet, to enable the shortest men 

to ■^^ « over it with facility. 



XVI G L S S A R Y. 

Barbette-eattekies are platforms raised behind a parapet to enable the 
guns mounted on them to fire over the parapet, and sweep the surround- 
ing country. They are usually placed in the saliejii points of works. 
Barracks. Permanent buildings for the quartering of troops. 

Barricade. To barricade, is to block up the avenues by which an enemy 
might have access to any position. This is done by abatis, wagons, etc. 

Barrier, A passive obstacle. 

Bastion, in fortification, is a work constructed at one of the angles of a 
polygon, consisting of two faces and two flanks. It is so constructed, that 
every part of it is defended by the flanking fire of some other part of the 
works. 

Battalion. Any body of infantry from two companies to ten, and serving 
under the same commander. 

Batter. A cannonade of heavy ordnance. 

To Batter in breach is a heavy cannonade of many pieces directed to a single 
point in the walls of a fortification. 

Batteries. The name given to any place where guns, howitzers, or mor- 
tars, are mounted, either for the purpose of attacking the enemy, or of 
battering a fortification. When a number of pieces of artillery are thrown 
together they also constitute a battery, as a mounted battery, where from 
four to six, or eight pieces are together, the cannoneers serving on foot; 
or a horse artillery battery, where the same number of pieces constitute the 
battery, the cannoneers being mounted on horses. 

Battle. An action in which the forces of two contending armies are 
engaged. 

Bayonet. A kind of triangular dagger, with a hollow shank, which fits 
over the muzzle of the musket, rifle, or carbine. It is principally used by 
infantry troops. A new form of bayonet has of late years been introduced 
for use on the rifle; this bayonet is in the form of a short sabre. It is 
called the sabre-bayonet, and is intended for use in the hand as vfell as on 
the rifle. 

Berm. a narrow space between the ditch and parapet of a woik, to keep 
the parapet from falling into the ditch. 

To Besiege. To lay siege to, or invest any place with an armed force. 

Besieged. The garrison that defends a place. 

Besiegers. The troops that lay siege to a fortified place. 

Bivouac. An army is said to bivouac, when, instead of camping in tents, the 
men sleep around the fires, or make temporary shelters of branches of 
trees, etc. 

Body. Any number of men serving under one commander, as the main 
body, etc. 

Bombard. To throw shells from mortars. 



GLOSSARY. XVU 

Brkacii. An opening in tlie works of a fortified place, made by the artil- 
lery or mines of the besiegers, preparatory to making an assault 

Breech of a gun. The portion from the vent to the cascable. 

Brigade. Two or more regiments of infantry or cavalry, or both, under 
the command of a Brigadier-General. 

Brigadier-General. The commander of a brigade ; an officer whose rank 
is next above that of a colonel. 



C. 

Cadence. Uniform time and^ace in marching, an indispensable requisite in 

the manoeuvres of troops. 
Calibre, in gunnery, is the diameter of the bore of any piece of ord- 
nance. 
Caisson. A carriage for artillery ammunition ; each piece of field artillery 

is followed by its caisson. 
Camp is the extent of ground occupied by an army when under canvass. 
Campaign. The period of each year that an army is in the field. 
Cannon. A general term for every form of artillery. 
Cannoneers. Soldiers who serve or manage pieces of artillery. 
Canteen. A small vessel used by soldiers to carry water, etc. 
Cantonments. Troops are in cantonments when quartered in towns and 

villages, lying as near as possible to each other. 
To Capitulate is to surrender any place or body of troops to the enemy, on 

certain stipulated conditions. 
Capitulation. The conditions on which the garrison of a besieged place 

agrees to give it up. 
Caponniebb, in fortification, is a passage from one part of the worK to 

another. 
Captain. The commander of a company. 
Carbine. A species of fire-arms smaller than the musket, and used mainly 

by cavalry. 
Cartel. An agreement between two States at war, for an exchange of 

prisoners of war. 
Cartridge. A case of paper, or flannel, fitted to the bore of a piece, and 

holding the exact charge of gunpowder. Cartridges for small arms are 

made of strong paper, those for artillery arc made of flannel, or some 

other woollen goods. 
Cartridge-box. A box made of stout leather, attached to a belt which is worn 

over the shoulder, or around the waist, and used to hold cartridges for 

small arms. 
Cascable, in artillery, is the knob attached to the breech of a gun. 
2^ B 



XVIU GLOSSARY. 

Casemate. A chamber covered witli a bomb-proof arch, in a fortification, 

having an embrasure cut through the wall, through which the gun is fired. 

Used in fortifications on the sea coast. 
Cavalier. A work constructed in the interior of a bastion. 
Cavalry. That portion of an army which serves and fights on horseback. 
Chamber, of a mortar or howitzer. A cavity at the bottom of the mortar or 

howitzer, intended to receive the cartridge. 
Charge. In gunnery, denotes the quantity of powder with which the piece 

is loaded. 

In the evolutions, the charge expresses the advance of a body of infantry 

to attack the enemy with bayonets fixed ; or the rapid attack of cavalry. 
Chase of a gun. The length from the trunnions to the muzzle. 
Cheek. The pieces of timber which form the sides of gun-carriages, and 

upon which the trunnions rest. 
Chevaux-de-freize. a piece of timber some six inches square, pierced 

with many holes, through which pass pieces of wood some six feet long, 

crossing each other at right angles, and pointed at the ends. They are 

used to stop up breaches, to block up the avenues of approach, etc. 
Line of Circumvallation. An earthen work consisting of a low parapet 

and trench, made around a place which it is intended to besiege. 
Colonel. The commander of a regiment. 
Color. Large silk flags fixed on wooden poles. 
Camp- Colors. Small flags eighteen inches square, and used to mark the 

color line, points of wheeling, etc. ; they are also carried by the markers 

in the evolutions. 
Combat. A battle. 
Commissary. An officer charged with the purchase and issue of provisions 

for the troops. 
CoBiPANY. A small body of from 50 to 100 men, and commanded by a 

captain. 
Convoy. A detachment of troops employed to guard any supply of men, 

money, ammunition, provisions, etc., conveyed in time of war to a town or 

army. 
Corporal. A non-commissioned officer of the lowest grade. 
Corps. A body of troops acting together under one commander. 
Countersign. A particular word which is exchanged between guards, and 

entrusted to those employed on duty in camp or garrison. 
Court-Martial. a military court, for the investigation and punishment 

of all offences committed by officers and soldiers, in resistance of military 

law. 
Cuirassiers. Heavy cavalry armed with breastplates of metal, or cuirasses 
A Curtain, in fortification, connects two contiguous bastions. 



GLOSSARY. XIX 

D. 

Defence, in fortification, consists of all sorts of works that cover and 

defend an army or place. 
Defile. A narrow passage, or road, through which troops can only march 

by flank, or with a very small front. 
Deploy. To display, or spread out troops. 
Depot. A place of deposit for military stores. 
Detachment. A body of troops taken from an army for a particular 

service. 
Discipline. The instruction and government of soldiers. 
Dislodge. To drive an enemy from his position. 
Dismantle. To strip a town or fortress of its outworks. 
Ditch. An excavation or trench made around the works of a fortification, 

from whence the earth necessary for the construction of the parapet is 

raised. Ditches are of two kinds — wet and dry. 
Dragoons. Are a kind of cavalry, who serve both on horseback and on foot. 

E. 

Echelon. A position in tactics, when different bodies, whether the divisions 

of a battalion, battalions, or brigades, follow each other on different lines. 

By this arrangement both the front and one or both flanks may be pro- 
tected at once. 
Elevation. In gunnery, the angle included between the horizon and the axis 

of any piece of artillery. 
Embrasure. In fortification, an opening, or aperture in the parapet of a 

work through which pieces of artillery are fired at the enemy. 
Enciente, in fortification, is the interior wall or rampart which surrounds a 

place. 
Encounter. Combat. Fight. 
Enemy. One who is on the opposite side in war. 

To Enfilade is to throw shot along the whole length of the enemy's line. 
Engineers. Officers charged with planning, constructing, and repairing 

all fortifications and all defensive works ; with planning the attack and 

defence of military works, etc., etc. 
Epaulement. a kind of breastwork to cover troops in front, or on the 

flank. 
Epaulettes. Shoulder-knots worn by officers. 

Eprouvette. a small mortar for trying the strength of gunpowder. 
Equipage. All kinds of furniture made use of by an army. 
Establishment implies the quota of officers and men in an army, regiment, 

troop, or company. 



XX GLOSSARY. 

Evolution. The movement made by a body of troops when they change 

their disposition. 
Exempts. Men who, from their age or occupation, are not liable to be 

called upon for military service. 
Expedition. A voyage or march against an enemy. 

F. 

FALSE-alarm. An alarm either designedly or unintentionally created by 

noise, reports, etc., without being dangerous. 
FALSK-attack. An approach which is made for the purpose of diverting an 

enemy from the real point of attack. 
Fascines. Long cylindrical bundles of twigs intended to support the earth 

in the parapets of field fortifications, etc. 
Feint. A mock attack, made to conceal the true one. 
Field. The place of battle. A campaign, or the action of an army while 

it is in the field. 
FiBiiD-officers. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major of a regiment. 
Fight. Battle. 
File. A line of soldiers drawn up behind each other. As a general thing, 

a file means two soldiers, the front and rear rank man. 
Fire-arms. Every description of arms charged with powder and ball. 
Flanks. The right and left of an army, encampment, battalion, company, etc. 
Flank. In fortification, any part of a work defending another, by a fire 

along the outside of the parapet. 
Foil. A blunt sword used in fencing. 
Forage. The hay, straw, and oats required for the subsistauce of the horses 

of an army. 
Force. Any body of troops assembled for military purposes. 
Forlorn-hope. Men appointed to make the first attack in the day of battle, 

or to be the first to storm in a siege. 
Fort. A fortified place surrounded by a ditch, etc. 
Fortification. The art of surrounding a place by works so disposed as to 

render it capable of a lasting defence against a besieging army. 
i^«>Zc?-FoRTiFiCATiON is the art of constructing all kinds of temporary works 

in the field. 
Front. A word of command signifying that the men are to turn to their 

proper front. 
Fugle-bian. a well-drilled, intelligent soldier, advanced in front of the 

line, to give the time in the manual, etc. 
Furlough. A leave of absence. 
Fuse. A tube fixed into a shell filled with combustible materials, which, 

when the shell is fired, burns and causes the shell to explode. 



(JLOss arY"; xlt 



Gabion. A cylindrical basket without bottom, and employed in throwing 
up intrenchments, etc. 

Gallery. A passage in a mine. 

Garrison. A place where troops are quartered. 

General-officers. All otficers above the rank of colonel. The only grades 
in the U. S. service are brigadier-general, major-general, and lieutenant- 
general. 

Glacis. In permanent fortifications, the parapet of the covered way. 

Grenade. A small shell thrown from the hand upon the enemy. Used in 
defending a work. 

Grape. A kind of shot. 

Guard. A body of men whose duty it is. to protect an army or place from 
surprise. It also applies to troops kept to guard generals and other per- 
sons, or public property, etc. 

Guidons. Small silk standards for cavalry. 

Gunpowder. A composition of sulphur, nitre, (or saltpetre), and charcoal, 
mixed together and granulated, to which, if fire be applied, it burns v/ith 
an explosion. 

H. 

Harass. To annoy, perplex, hang upon the rear or flanks of a body of men, 

or an array, or to interrupt the operations of a siege by repeated 

attacks. 
Haversack. A linen bag to carry a soldier's rations on the march. 
Head-quarters. The place where the officer commanding an army or 

independent body of troops, takes up his residence. 
Hilt. The handle of a sword. 

Holsters. Cases for a horseman's pistols, fixed in the pommel of the saddle. 
Hospital. A place appointed for the sick and wounded. 
Host. An army. 

Hostility. Denotes a state of war between two nations. 
Howitzer. A piece of artillery, chambered at the bottom of the bore, and 

intended for firing hollow shot, canister, etc. 

I. 

[nfantry. Foot soldiers armed with the musket, or rifle. 
Inroad. Sudden and desultory invasion. 

Inspector-General. An officer whose duty it is to inspect the troops at 
stated times, and report the state of their discipline, efficiency, etc. 



XXll GLOSSARY. 

Intrenciibient. Any work intended to fortify a post against the attack of 
an enemy. 

Invasion. The entrance or attack of the troops of a nation on the domi- 
nions of another. 

To Invest. To seize upon all the avenues of approach to a place or town, 
so as to cut it off from succor. 

K. 

Knapsack. A leather or canvas bag, worn on the backs of infantry sol- 
diers, and which contains his clothing and other necessaries. 



L. 

Laboratory. A place where all sorts of fire-works are prepared, whether 

for actual service or for display. 
Lieutenant. The lowest grade of commissioned officers. 
Line of Battle is the disposition of the troops for battle. 
Links. Thongs of leather used by cavalry to fasten their horses together. 
Litter, A sort of bed on which wounded officers and men are carried off 

the field. 
LoDGMKNT. Possession of the whole or a part of the enemy's works. 
Lunette. A small field work. 

M. 

Magazine. A place in which stores, arms, ammunition, or provisions, are 

kept. 
Major. An officer next in rank to lieutenant-colonel. 
Martial Law. The law of war. 

Match. A preparation to communicate fire to guns, mortars, mines, etc. 
Mines. Subterranean passages dug under the walls of a fortification, or 

under the works of a besieging army, for the purpose of blowing them up 

by means of gunpowder. 
Mortars. Short cannon with large bores fitted with chambers, and used 

for throwing shells, stones, etc. 
Muster, A parade of troops for the purpose of inspection, and taking an 

account of their numbers, presence, etc. 
Mutiny. Any seditious or refractory conduct among soldiers. 

N. 

Nitre. A compound of nitric acid and potash, used in the manufacture of 
gunpowder. 



G L s s A R 1 xxm 



0. 



Orders. All such lawful directions as may oe issued by a superior officer. 
Ordnance. A general term for all guns, howitzers, and mortars. 
Out-posts. Bodies of troops posted beyond the bounds or limits of the 

encampment. 
OuT-woTtKS, in fortification, are the works constructed beyond the principal 

works. 

P. 

Palisades. In fortification, stakes made of strong pieces of wood, and set 

in the gr ,und. 
Parallels The trenches or lines made by the besiegers around the works 

of the besieged. 
Parapet. In fortification, an elevation of earth designed for covering the 

soldiers from the fire of the enemy. 
Park of Artillery. The place appointed for the artillery. 
Parley. A conference with the enemy. 
Parole. The promise or word of honor given by a prisoner of war when 

permitted to be at large, that he will return at the time appointed. 
Parole is also a word given out in orders for the purpose of distinguishing 

friends from foes. 
Party. A small detachment of troops employed upon any duty, as fatigue 

party, etc. 
Patrol. A small party under a non-commissioned officer detached from 

one of the guards, to move from post to post, through streets, along roads, 

etc., to ensure vigilance, order, etc. 
Paybiaster. An officer charged with the payment of the troops. 
Pickets. Out-guards occupying the first line beyond the police guards; 

when attacked the outposts and grand guards fall back upon the pickets 

for support. 
Pillage. Plunder. 
Pioneers. A small body of soldiers, provided with saws, axes, etc., and 

intended to clear the way for troops on the march, to work on the in- 

trenchments, etc. 
Platoon. Half a company. 
Pontoons. Small boats used to sustain the bridges across streams for the 

passage of troops. 
Portfire, A sort of match for firing guns, etc. 
Provost-martial. An officer whose duty it is to see punishments put in 

force, secure prisoners, etc. 
Pyrotephny. Every kind of artificial fireworks. 



XXIV GLOSSARY. 

Q. 

QuAKTER. To give quarter is to spare the life of a vanquished enemy. 
Quartermaster. An officer whose duty it is to supply the quarters, fuel, 
clothing, transportation, etc., to the troops. 

R. 

Eally. To re-form disordered or dispersed troops into regular order. 
Rampart. A bank of earth raised about a place to resist the enemy's shot, 

cover the buildings, etc. 
Range. The distance from the gun to the place where the projectile touches 

the ground. 
Rank. A line of soldiers drawn up side by side. 
Rank and File. Non-commissioned officers and privates. 
Ration. The daily allowance of bread, meat, etc., to the soldiers. 
Rear-guard. A detachment of troops which brings up and protects the 

rear of an army. 
Reconnoitre. To view and examine the country in which an enemy is 

operating ; to examine the approaches to an enemy's works ; ascertain his 

position, strength, etc., etc. 
Redoubt. A small work in fortification. 
Regiment. A body of troops composed of ten or twelve companies, and 

commanded by a colonel. 
Reserve. A body of troops so posted as not to come into action until near 

its close, or until a critical moment in the battle. 
Retreat. To retreat is to make a retrograde movement. 
Retrenchment. Any work raised to cover a point, and fortify it against an 

enemy. 
Ricochet. The rebounding of shot or shells after striking the ground. 
Rosters are lists or tables by which the details of officers, non-commissioned 

officers and privates, for various duties, are regulated. 
Round. A general discharge of cannon or small arms. 
Rounds. A visiting or personal inspection of the guards and sentinels on 

duty. 
Rout. The confusion created in an army or body of troops when defeated 

or dispersed. 

S. 

Sabre. A species of sword with a broad and heavy blade, curved towards 

the point. 
Sack. An expression used when a town has been taken by storm, and given 

up to pillage. 



GLOSSARY. XXV 

Safeguard. A protection granted by the general of an army, for some of 

the enemy's lands or persons, to preserve them from being insulted or 

plundered. 
Sally. A sally, or sortie, is a secret movement of attack made by strong 

detachments of troops from a besieged place, for the purpose of destroying 

the enemy's works. 
Salute. A discharge of artillery in compliment of some individual. It 

also means the ceremony of presenting arms. 
Sand-bags. Bags filled with earth for the purpose of repairing breaches, etc. 
Scouts. Horsemen sent in advance or on the wings of an army to discover 

the enemy. 
Sentinel. A private soldier placed upon a post, whose duty it is to watch 

the motions of the enemy, prevent surprise, and in general to enforce any 

specific order with which he may be entrusted. 
Sergeant. A non-commissioned officer. 
Sergeant-Major. The first non-commissioned officer of his regiment, and 

assists the adjutant in the discharge of his duties. 
Service. Every kind of duty which a military man may be called upon to 

perform. 
Shells. Hollow iron balls thrown among the enemy from mortars and 

howitzers. Being filled with powder, and provided with a fuse which sets 

fire to the contents, the shell explodes. 
Siege. The art of surrounding a fortified place with an army, and attacking 

it by means of batteries, mines, and trenches. 
Skirmish. A loose desultory kind of combat in presence of two armies. 
Sorties. Parties that sally out of a place secretly to annoy the besiegers. 
Spheblcal-cone Shot. Thin shells filled with musket-balls, and fired from 

a howitzer. 
Storm. A vigorous assault on a fortified place. 
Stratagem. A scheme or plan devised by a general to cover his designs 

during a campaign. 
Strategy. The hostile movements of armies beyond the range of each 

other's cannon. 
Surprise. To fall upon an enemy unexpectedly. 

T. 

Tliaverses. Parapets of earth raised to cover troops from the enfilading 

fire of an enemy. 
Trenches. Ditches made dui-ing a siege, to enable the assailants to approach 

more securely. 
Troop. A company of cavalry. 
Trophy. Anything captured from an enemy. 

3 



GLOSSARY. 



V. 



Vedettes. Sentries on horseback upon out-posts. 

Vent. The opening in fire-arms through which the fire is communicated to 

the charge. 
VoLLET. The simviltaneous discharge of a number of fire-arms. 

Windage. The difi'erence between the diameter of the bore, and the diameter 

of the shot or shell. 
Wings. The right or left divisions of an army or battalion. 
Works. Fortifications. 



MANUAL 



VOLUNTEEES AND MILITIA 



AETICLE I. 

ARMY ORaANIZATION. 

1. Every thorouglily-organized army consists of one or more 
army corps, made up of infantry and cavalry, witli an artillery 
equipage of one or more batteries, depending upon tlie strength of 
the corps, engineer troops, bridge trains, etc. 

2. The infantry, from its powers of endurance, its capability of 
operating successfully in almost every position, its entire indepen- 
dence of the various casualties wbicli sometimes completely paralyze 
cavalry and artillery, ranks first in importance in the organization 
of any army. The strength of the other arms is always based upon 
that of the infantry, which long experience has shown should be 
dhoMi four-fifths of the entire force. 

The troops which compose the infantry are usually divided into 
heavy and light ; these distinctions arise partly from the nature of 
the weapons, and partly from their different destination on the field 
of battle. The former is known as the infantry of the line, the 
latter as light infantry and rifles. 

The only arm of the infantry of the line of the present day is 
the musket, usually the rifled musket, provided with the bayonet, 
which, in all the manoeuvres, is fixed to the piece. This arm pos- 
sesses all the essential qualities of the rifle, together with the 

(27) 



28 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

advantages peculiar to fhe musket, making it a most efficient 
weapon in the hands of well-disciplined troops. 

The infantry of the line should he so disciplined as to act as one 
mass, which knows no breaking ; it should be prepared to deliver 
its fire in line, in the face of an opposing foe; to form in columns 
to attack with the bayonet; form into square to resist the charge 
of cavalry; or stand unmoved under the fire of artillery. To it 
must be confided everything in the conduct of a battle which 
requires unyielding firmness — as the attack and defence of strong 
points, the formation of attacking or supporting columns, the re- 
serves, etc. 

The habitual formation of the infantry of the line of our service 
is in two ranks ; the men of each rank being side by side, with an 
interval of thirteen inches between the backs of the men of the 
front rank and the breasts of those of the rear rank. 

3. Light infantry may be armed with the musket, the same as 
the infantry of the line, the bayonet being worn by the side, except 
upon rare occasions, when it is fixed; or, it may be armed with 
rifles, when light infantry-men become riflemen. The rifle now 
used is short, light, easily carried on long or rapid marches, and 
possesses the additional advantage of the sword-hayonet, which, in 
a charge, may be used like the ordinary bayonet, or as a sword in a 
hand-to-hand engagement. 

The duties of light troops are to open an engagement, and to do 
their part during its continuance. They should cover the front 
and flanks of the infantry of the line, in the advance of the latter, 
driving the enemy out of all covers, etc., only retiring upon the 
main body when too strongly pressed to maintain their position. 
Upon them usually devolve advance post, detachment, and advance 
and rear-guard service. 

Light troops form as other infantry when occasion requires, but 
the habitual order of battle is the dispersed order, in which each 
man is separated some distance from his neighbor, and must depend 
in a great degree upon himself. 

They should be expert marksmen, cool, circumspect, skilful in 
taking advantage of their position to secure cover, etc., and should 



ARMY ORGANIZATION. 29 

be prepared to keep an enemy occupied for many hours at once, 
and maintain their ground inch by inch. 

All infantry now receives very nearly the same instruction, so as 
to enable it to perform all the duties that may be required of the 
infantry soldier, making the distinction between heavy and light 
troops much less. 

The volunteers and militia of our country possess, in an eminent 
degree, all the qualities requisite for both heavy and light troops, and 
were they disciplined and well instructed, as all must be to be truly 
formidable, might serve in either capacity with as much efficiency 
as any other troops, let them come from whatever quarter they may. 

4. " In all countries where military art is justly appreciated, the 
cavalry arm is placed in the second rank to infantry. To it an army 
is often indebted for turning the scales of victory, and giving a 
decisive character to the issue. To it the infantry, when exhausted 
by fatigue, or broken, often owes its safety, and through the respite 
gained by its charges, finds time to breathe and re-form. Without it, 
much of advanced-post duty, patrols, and detachment service re- 
quiring great activity, would be but badly performed. 

" But the arm of cavalry by itself can effect but little ; and, in 
many circumstances, does not suffice for its own safety. The 
smallest obstacles are sufficient to render it powerless ; it can neither 
attack nor hold a post without the aid of infantry ; and at night is 
alarmed, and justly so, at every phantom. The proportion borne 
by the cavalry to the infantry should vary with the features of the 
seat of war ; being greater in a champaign than in a broken, or 
mountainous country. The proportion of one-fourth of the infantiy 
for the first, and one-sixth for the last, is generally admitted by 
received military authority as the best.^' — (Maiian.) 

The essential qualities of cavalry, which distinguish it from all 
other troops, are that of celerity, and the irresistible force with 
which, under favorable circumstances, it bears down all opposition ; 
making it, when properly handled, a truly formidable arm. 

Cavalry, to be efficient, should unite several essential conditions; 
horses and weapons in good condition ; sufficient ground to gather 
speed for the charge, and space for rallying; to have its flanks 



60 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND I\I T L T T I A . 

covered to prevent a surprise ; to be led boldly into action ; and to 
be followed by a support or reserve sufficient to cover a retreat, oi 
secure it from confusion if brought up unexpectedly by tbe enemy. 

In European armies there is a marked distinction between hcav?/ 
and light cavalry, but in ours the distinction is more nominal than 
real ; all cavalry being called upon alike for the discharge of the 
duties of both heavy and light troops. 

When acting as heavy cavalry its duties are usually confined to 
the field of battle ; there, placed in reserve, it is held in hand until 
the decisive moment arrives, when it is sent forth to achieve vic- 
tory, or prevent defeat. 

To the light cavalry are entrusted the duties of securing the 
heavy cavalry from surprise ; to watch over the safety of the field 
artillery; to perform the services required of them by infantry 
divisions ; and those pertaining to out-post and detachment service 
in general. 

In our service all cavalry is armed with the sahre, with Colt's re- 
volving pistols, and with breech loading rifles, or carhines, of which 
there are several difi'erent patterns now in use, as Sharp's rifle and 
sarbine, Burnside's and Maynard's rifles, etc. 

5. " The artillery is placed third in rank among the arms. Its 
duties are, to support and cover the other arms ; keep the enemy 
from approaching too near ; hold him in check as he advances ; and 
prevent his debouching at particular points. To perform these 
duties it is considered that an allowance of one piece for each thou- 
sand men^ of the other arms, and one in reserve from the proper 
quota of this arm. It is to be remarked, however, that this pro- 
portion supposes the other arms in an excellent state of organization 
and discipline. In the contrary case, the quota of artillery must be 
increased ; for it inspires poor troops with confidence, as they rely 
upon it to keep ofl* the enemy, and cover their retreat." — (Mahan.) 

Artillery is incapable of defending itself, and must always be 
protected by a sufficient force of cavalry or infantry. 

Field artillery, like the other arms, is divided into light and 

' The proportion in the U. S. service is tioo pieces to every thousand men, 
and one in reserve. 



ARMY ORGANIZATION. 31 

heavy ; a division which results from differences in the calibre of 
the pieces, and the manner in which they are used. The heavy 
field artillery comprises the 12-pounder gun, and the 24 and 32- 
pounder howitzer; they are generally reserved for batteries in 
position, and are seldom shifted during an action. 

The light-field artillery is composed of the 6-pounder field gun, 
and the 12-pounder howitzer. When the cannoneers are mounted 
upon horses during the evolution, it is called horse artillery ; when 
they follow the pieces on foot, it becomes mounted artillery. 

To the heavy artillery are assigned the duties of occupying posi- 
tions for strengthening the weak points of the field of battle ; for 
securing the retreat of the army; for defending all objects whose 
possession might be of importance to the enemy, as villages, defiles, 
etc. ) and for breaking down all obstacles that protect the enemy, or 
check the progress of the other's arms. 

The light pieces, serving as mounted artillery, follow the move- 
ments of the infantry ; covering the flanks of its position, preparing 
the way for its advance, and arresting that of the enemy. When 
well disciplined and skilfully handled, mounted artillery, by having 
the cannoneers mounted upon the ammunition boxes, may be moved 
with great celerity, and made almost, if not quite, as efiicient as 
horse-artillery. 

The horse-artillery, besides performing the same duties as the 
mounted batteries, may be used with great effect at the decisive 
moments of an action. ^' When launched forth, its arrival and exe- 
cution should be unexpected and instantaneous. Ready to repair 
all disasters and partial reverses, it, at one moment, temporarily re- 
places a battery of foot, and at the next in another point of the field, 
to force back an enemy's column. In preparing the attacks of 
cavalry, this arm is often indispensable, and always invaluable ) 
brought with rapidity in front of a line, or opposite to squares of 
infantry, within the range of canister, its well-directed fire, in a few 
discharges, opens a gap, or so shakes the entire mass, that the cava- 
lier finds but a feeble obstacle, where, without this aid, he would in 
vain have exhausted all his powers." 

6. Engineer troops constitute a fourth arm of service ; as, com- 



82 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

pared with artillery, their relative numbers are about as two to 
three. They are divided into the staff, guards, or fort-keepers, arti- 
ficers, sappers and pioneers, miners and pontoneers. 

The officers constituting the staff are charged in time of peace 
with planning, constructing, and repairing all fortifications and other 
defensive works, etc. ; in time of war, engineer troops are charged 
with the attack and defence of military works, the laying out and 
construction of field defences, redoubts, intrenchments, roads, etc. ) 
in the attack they form a part of the advanced guard, to remove 
obstructions ; and in retreat they form a part of the rear-guard, to 
erect obstacles, destroy roads, bridges, etc., so as to retard an enemj^'s 
pursuit. 

ORGANIZATION OF INFANTRY. 

7. In the organization of inf\intry, the smallest number complete 
in itself, is the comjtamj^ which varies in number from 50 to 100 
rank and file. 

A captain, two or more lieu tenants, from four to six sergeants, and 
as many co-jjorals, are attached to every company. The captain 
and lieutenants are the officers, and the sergeants and corporals the 
non-commissioned officers of the company. 

The captain is responsible for the instruction, discipline, general 
efficiency, and moral tone of the company. 

The lieutenants assist the captain in the maintenance of disci- 
pline, and in the instruction. 

The company is divided into two equal parts, which are desig- 
nated as the first and second platoon, counting from the right ; and 
each platoon is, in like manner, divided into two sections. 

The company is formed into two ranks in the following manner : 
the corporals on the right and left of platoons, according to height ; 
the tallest corporal and the tallest man from the first file on the 
right, the next two tallest men from the second file, and so on to 
the last file, which is composed of the shortest corporal and the 
shortest man. 

The odd and even files, numbered as one, tu-o, in the company, 
from right to left, form groups of four men, who, when they act as 
light troops, are designated comrades in battle. 



ARMY ORGANIZATION. 83 

8. The officers and non-commissioned officers of the company are 
posted in the following manner : 

The captain on the right of the company, touching with the left 
elbow. 

The first sergeant, in the rear rank, touching with the left elbow, 
and covering the captain. In the manoeuvres he is denominated 
covering sergeant, ov right guide of the company. 

The remaining officers and sergeants are posted as file-closers, in 
the ranh of file-closers, two paces behind the rear rank. 

Th-Q, first lieutenant, opposite the centre of the fourth section. 

The second lieutenant, opposite the centre of the first platoon. 

The third lieutenant, opposite the centre of the second platoon. 

The second sergeant, opposite the second file from the left of the 
company. In the manoeuvres he is called the left guide of the 
company. 

The third sergeant, opposite the second file from the right of the 
second platoon. " ^ 

The fourth sergeant, opposite the second file from the left of the 
first platoon. 

The fifth sergeant, opposite the second file from the right of the 
first platoon. 

The corporals are posted in the front rank, as directed in No. 7. 
(See Fig. 1.) 

The Regiment. 

9. A REGIMENT is composcd of ten companies, which are habit- 
ually posted from right to left, in the following order : first, sixth, 
fourth, ninth, eighth, third, fifth, tenth, seventh, second, according to 
the rank of the captain. With a less number of companies the 
same principle will be observed, viz. : the first captain commands 
the right company, the second captain the left company, the third 
captain the right centre company, and so on. 

The companies thus posted are designated from right to left, first 
company, second company, etc. This designation is observed in all 
the manoeuvres. 

The first two companies on the right, whatever their denomina* 

c 



84 



MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 








II 

. I -a 

.~ I— I 13 



-t^ a "S "S ja 

PM M H P^ PM 



oQ^ HD <a S0 Q] S D 






- ^ 

] - ° 

: : 


: : [I] 
: r ^ 

: : 



a 










^ 










OQ 










C^ 






1 




.2. 




03 


ja 




n' M 




tD 


1 


*5 
1 


^:i 
^ ^ 




1 
OS 


.= s 


a 


?o -=! 




o 












1^ C 


<! 


c^ ^ 


p 


o 


S^ 


-< 


s ^. 


F^ 


^ 



-w to 



oQ «€ 



A 11 M Y R G A N I Z A T I N . 35 

tion, form the Jirst divido7i ; the next two companies tlae second 
division ; and so on to tlie left. 

In all exercises and manoeuvres, every regiment, or part of a 
regiment, composed of two or more companies, is called a hattalion. 

Every regiment is provided with a color, which is posted with its 
guard, to be designated hereafter, on the left of the right centre 
company; that company, and all on its right belong to the right 
iving of the regiment, or battalion ; the remaining companies con- 
stitute the left iving. 

To each regiment are attached a colonel, who commands it, and 
is responsible for its general discipline and instruction, a lieutenant- 
colonel, two majors, a quartermaster, commissary, paymaster, surgeon, 
and frequently an assistant surgeon, an adjutant, sergeant major, 
quartermaster sergeant, and commissary sergeant. The four first 
named of these officers are the Jield officers of the regiment; the 
others constitute its commissioned and non-commissioned staff. 

Posts of Field Officers and Regimental Staff. 

10. The field officers are supposed to be mounted, and on active 
service must be on horseback. The adjutant, when the battalion is 
manoeuvring, is on foot; when on the march, or in action, he is 
mounted. 

The colonel's post is thirty paces in rear of the file-closers, and 
opposite the centre of the battalion. The lieutenant-colonel and 
senior major are behind the centres of the right and left wings re- 
spectively, the junior major behind the centre of the battalion, aL 
twelve paces in rear of the file-closers. 

The adjutant and sergeant major are opposite the right and left 
of the battalion respectively, and eight paces in rear of the file- 
closers. They assist the lieutenant-colonel, and major, respectively 
in the manoeuvres. 

The quartermaster, surgeon, and other staff-officers, are in one 
rank on the left of the colonel, and three paces in his rear. The 
quarter-master sergeant is on a line with the front rank of the field 
music, and two paces on its right. (See Fig. 2.) 



36 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Pioneers, Field Music, and Band. 

11. The pioneers (one for each company) are drawn np in two 
ranks^ and posted on the right, having their left four paces from tho 
right of the first company. A corporal of pioneers, selected from 
the corporals by the colonel, is posted on the right of the pioneers. 

The field music (two musicians to each company) is drawn up in 
four ranks, and posted twelve paces in rear of the file closers, the 
left opposite the centre company. The principal musician is two 
paces in front of the field music. The regimental band (not to 
exceed sixteen musicians), if there be one, is drawn up in two or 
four ranks, according to its numbers, and posted five paces in rear 
of the field music, having a principal musician at its head. 

Color- Guard. 

12. The color-guard of a regiment or battalion is composed of 
eight corporals, posted on the left of the right centre company, of 
which company, for the time being, the guard forms a part. 

The front rank is composed of a sergeant selected by the colonel, 
who is called the color-hearer , with the two ranking corporals on his 
right and left; the rear rank is composed of the three corporals next 
in rank ; the three remaining corporals are posted in rear in the 
rank of file-closers. The left guide of the color company, when 
the three last named corporals are in the rank of file-closers, is im- 
mediately on their left. 

In battalions of less than five companies, there should be no color- 
guard, and no display of colors, except at reviews. 

General Guides and Markers. 

13. There should be two general guides in each battalion, selected 
by the colonel from among the sergeants (other than first sergeants) 
for their accuracy in marching. These sergeants are denominated 
right and left general guide, respectively, and are posted in the line 
of file-closers ; the first in rear of the right, and the second in rear 
of the left flank of the battalion. 

Three markers are required to every battalion ; they are posted 



A R JI Y R G A N I Z A T I N . u i 

Tbehind the first company in tlie rank of file-closers, wlien the bat- 
talion is in line, and behind the leading company or division when- 
ever it is in column. 

The Battalion in Column. 

14. For the march, in many of the manoeuvres, etc., the battalion 
is in column. The column may be one of companies, or of divisions, 
in rare instances it is one of platoons. It may be a column right in 
front, in which case the first company, or division, is in front, all 
the others being behind it in regular succession ; or it may be a 
column left in front, in which the last company or division leads, 
the others following in the inverse order of their numbers. 

When the right is in front, the guides of the column are habitu- 
ally to the left, and to the right when the column is left in front. 

The column may be one at fuU distance, at half distance, or closed 
in mass ; in the first case the distance between the guides of any 
two consecutive companies of the column is equal to the width of 
one of the companies or divisions ; in the second case it is one-half 
the width of the company or division ; and in the last case, that 
of the column closed in mass, the distance between the guides is 
six paces. 

Posts of the Officers when the Battalion is in Column. 

15. The colonel is on the directing flank, fifteen or twenty paces 
from the guides, and abreast the centre of his battalion ; the lieu- 
tenant colonel is on the directing flank, abreast with the leading 
company or division, and six paces from the guide; the majors are 
on the same flank, the senior abreast with the rearmost company or 
division, and six paces from the guide, the junior in a correspond- 
ing position abreast the centre company; the adjutant is near the 
lieutenant-colonel, and the sergeant major near the senior major. 

In a column of companies, the captains are two paces in front of 
the centres of their companies; the right guide of each company 
is on the right of the front rank, the left guide in a corresponding 
position on the left; the lieutenants, and remaining sergeants, are 
in the rank of file-closers. 
4 



88 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

In a column of divisions, the senior captain of eacli division is 
two paces in front of the centre of his division^ the junior captain 
in the interval between the two companies; the right guide of the 
right company is on the right of the front rank of the division, the 
left guide of the left company is in a corresponding position on the 
left; the right guide of the left company is in the rear rank, he- 
hind the junior captain, and the left guide of the right company 
is in the rank of the file-closers. 

Brigades and Divisions. 

16. Two or more regiments serving together constitute a brigade, 
under the command of a hrigad ler-general. 

Two or more brigades serving together constitute a division, com- 
manded by a major-general. 

Two divisions serving together constitute an army corps. 

The army corps, when supplied with a due proportion of cavalry, 
artillery, etc., comprises within itself all the elements of a complete 
army, ready for any emergency. 

The interval between two contiguous regiments in the same 
brigade, division, or army corps, is twenty-two paces. 

As often as one or more brigades or divisions, united in the same 
line, manoeuvre together, each battalion will be designated by its 
number, according to its position in the line. The battalion on the 
right of the whole is denominated yirsi?, that next on its left second, 
the following one third, and so on to the battalion that closes the 
left of the line. 

In line of battle, the general (the senior major-general present) 
has no fixed position; he goes whithersoever he may judge his 
presence necessary. 

In column, he will hold himself habitually at its head, in order 
to direct it according to his views. In the evolutions, he will place 
himself at the point whence he can best direct the general execu- 
tion of the movement. 

In line of battle, generals of division place themselves at about 
seventy paces in rear of the centres of their divisions. 

In column they hold themselves on the directing flank, abreast 



ARMYORGANIZATION. 89 

"vrith the centres of their divisions^ and at thirty or forty paces from 
the guides. 

In line of battle^ generals of brigade place themselves at about 
forty paces in rear of the centre of their brigades. 

In column, they hold themselves at fifteen or twenty paces out- 
sides the guides, and abreast with the centre of their brigades. 

ORGANIZATION OF CAVALRY. 

The Company. 

17. The company in cavalry is denominated the troop; it is or- 
ganized upon the same principles as that of infantry ; its habitual 
formation is in two ranks. 

When the company is in line, and acting singly, the officers and 
non-commissioned officers are posted as follows : 

The captain in front of the centre, one pace from the front rank. 

Hh.Q first lieutenant in rear of the centre, in the rank of file-closers. 

The second lieutenant commands the first platoon ) in the absence 
of a third lieutenant^ the second platoon is commanded by the senior 
sergeant. The chiefs of platoons are posted one pace in front of the 
centres of their respective platoons. 

The, first sergeant in rear of the right, in the rank of file-closers. 

The second and third sergeants on the right and left of the com- 
pany, and denominated the guide of the right, and guide of the left, 
respectively. 

l^\iQ fourth sergeant is on the left of the first platoon, in the front 
rank, and counted in the rank; th.^ fifth sergeant h in a correspond- 
ing position on the right of the second platoon. 
Corporals on the flanks of platoons. 

Buglers twenty paces in rear of the centre. 

The Squadron. 

18. Two companies united constitute the squadron. Each squad- 
ron is composed of four platoons, distinguished by the denomination 
of first, second, third, and fourth, commencing on the right. 

The first and second platoons form the j^rs^ division, the third and 
fourth form the second division. 



40 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The senior captain of the squadron is denominated the captain 
commanding, the junior captain the second captain. 

When the squadron is in line, the officers and non-commissioned 
officers are posted as follows : 

The captain commanding at the centre of the squadron, the croup 
of his horse one pace in front of the heads of the horses of the 
front rank. 

The second captain three paces in rear of the centre of the squad- 
ron. He is charged with the alignment of the rear rank and line 
of file-closers. 

The senior jivst lieutenant commands the first platoon j the junioi' 
first lieutenant commands the fourth platoon. 

The senior second lieutenant commands the second platoon ] the 
junior second lieutenant commands the third platoon. 

Each of these officers is posted at the centre of his platoon, with 
the croup of his horse one pace in front of the heads of the horses 
of the front rank. 

The senior sergeant is posted behind the first file from the right 
of the first platoon ; he is the principal guide when the column of 
squadrons is left in front. 

The second sergeant is behind the third file from the left of the 
fourth platoon ; he is principal guide when the column of squadrons 
is right in front. 

The third sergeant is posted on the right of the front rank of the 
squadron ) he is the guide of the right, and is not counted in the rank. 

The fourth sergeant on the left of the front rank ; he is guide of 
the left, and npt counted in the rank. 

The fifth sergeant on the left of the first platoon, and counted in 
the rank. 

The sixth sergeant on the right of the second platoon, also counted 
in the rank. 

The seventh sergeant on the right of the third platoon ; the eighth 
sergeant on the right of the fourth platoon —- both are counted in 
the rank. 

The heads of the horses of the file-closers are at one pace from 
the croup of those of the rear rank. 



ARMY ORGANIZATION. 41 

The corporals are in the front rank/ on tlie right and left of their 
respective platoons^ and supply the places of sergeants when 
necessary. 

When guidons are used they are carried by the non-commissioned 
officers on the left of the first and third platoons. 

The Regiment in Line. 

19. The Regiment is made up of five squadrons, distinguished 
by the denomination, yzrs;^, second, tliird^ fourth, and Ji/th ; they are 
formed on the same line, in the order of these numbers, commencing 
on the right, and with an interval of twelve paces. 

This is the primitive and habitual order of the squadrons in 
regiments. 

When a regiment is to mount, hoots and saddles is sounded ; at 
this signal the horses are saddled, bridled, and prepared to be led 
out. 

At the signal to Jiorse ! the first sergeants direct the men to lead 
out. 

The sergeants, corporals, and privates being in two ranks, in the 
order of their platoons, at the head of their horses, the orderly 
sergeant calls the roll. 

The captain directs them to call ofi" by fours and to mount (see 
No. 354), and on reaching the regimental parade, reports all absentees 
to the adjutant through the orderly sergeant. 

In case of alarm, or surprise, to horse is sounded ; the men then 
saddle, bridle, and mount with the utmost celerity, and repair to 
the place of assembly, which is always previously designated. 

The officers and non-commissioned officers of the field and staff 
of the regiment are posted as follows : 

The colonel twenty-five paces in front of the centre of the regi- 
ment, having a chief bugler behind him. 

The lieutenant-colonel twelve paces in advance of the centre of 
the right vang. 

The major twelve paces in advance of the centre of the left wing. 

"YhQ junior major, when there is one, twelve paces in front of the 
centre of the resriment. 

o 

4* 



42 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The colonel moves wliere his presence may be necessary. 

The adjutant on a line with the front rank, two paces from the 
right of the regiment. When the regiment marches in line with 
the guide right, it is his duty to give the points of direction, and 
superintend the guides and the direction of the march. 

The sergeant major on a line with the front rank, two paces from 
the left of the regiment. He is charged with the same functions 
as the adjutant, when the march is in line with the guide left. 

The adjutant, assisted by the sergeant major, is also charged with 
tracing the lines. 

The standard-hearer is placed at the last file but one from the 
left of the front rank of the platoon on the right of the centre of 
the regiment. 

General staff-officers (surgeon, paymaster, etc.), serving with the 
regiment, twenty-five paces in rear of the right of the first squadron, 
according to rank. 

The quarter -master sergeant behind the adjutant, on the line of 
the rear rank. 

The general guides of the right and left are placed in the rank 
of file-closers, in rear of the Sergeant-major, and Quartermaster 
sergeant. 

The trumpeters, formed in two ranks, are twenty-five paces in rear 
of the centre of the regiment. 

The trumpeters of a squadron acting separately, are posted in the 
same manner, but in one rank. (See Fig. 3.) 

Order of the Regiment in Column. 

By Two or hy Four. 

20. In this order the squadrons preserve an interval of twelve 
paces between each other ; the same as in line. This distance is 
measured from the croups of the horses of the last files of one squad- 
ron, to the heads of the horses of the first files of the next squadron. 

The colonel marches at the centre of the regiment, on the side 
of the guides, twenty-five paces from the flank of the column, having 
behind him a chief buoler. 






1. Squadron 



'V 



i>r DiVtS/ON 



JV Division 



4?Pl. 



S^'Platoo/^ 2"'PLAruoN r'Po 






Q@5 



(4-) 
S S'^ „ .. 

I klllMllJirdiril 1:11 1;|| 1:111:11 1:11 MKinil I'll Ull-llkll 1:11 SlIRU HIM l^lUiilhlll;!! 1:11 r^l-llMi;^ n;i 



:iaiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii^iiiiii; i iiiiii!^^^^^ 



>AA/»-/V^AAA<sAA^AsAAAA<-v//^/\'\A/Ktfs/;\/\^\/:.sA 



lWi/ll/||/1I^IM/iMI/1l/1l/ll/ll/rMi/M/ll/ll/ll/ilW^^^^^ 



S^(^ 



.sy\c 



^t') 



11 

S M 

{To face -page 42.) 



Gf^Of: 



B^VSIS OF INSTRUOTION. 



tXPLANATIONS OF IHE SIGNS. 

C(J ColonciL 

l^C Lieutenant-Colonel. 

Mi "*'■ 

Ai ^«"''-'- 

qiM an"le^MMle^. 

J 8 Boigeon. 

ills AMi.tant Sutgeon. 

C^C Ceptiiin CommandiDg. 

H^C 5o«>nl C«pl«lo. 

ift L,....o..., 
Sil 8.C011U Ll.ulment. 

'sAm Eergrant-MAJor. 

gg^ <!„,lcr.!<^.er&,g..nt. 

J a S.rEe.nt. 

C8e Q.».r.lGolde. 

7.JiW Prloclpel M».ld.o. 

Cij Chl.r Busier. 

JO St.indsrd-Be>rer. 

ffl Corporal. 



FORMATION OF A REGIMENT OF FIVE SQUADRONS IN ORDER OF BATTLE, 
rig- 3. 



5 . Squadron. 



Ti Si 

y ^i 






^'^mimmw 



miVmmmmimjnv. 



_ m 




ARMYORGANIZATION. 43 

The lieutenant-colonel on the side of the guides^ twelve paces from 
the flank of the column ; he marches on a line with the lieutenants 
commanding the first platoon of the first squadron. 

The major marches in the same direction of the lieutenant-colonel, 
and on a line with the guide of the left of the fifth squadron. 

The adjutant marches on the side of the guides, two paces from 
the flank, and on a line with the leading files of the column, to 
observe the guides and the direction of the march. 

The sergeant-major marches on the side of the guides, two paces 
from the flank of the column, and on a line with the guide of the 
left of the fifth squadron ; if the left is in front, he executes on the 
side of the guides what is prescribed for the adjutant when the right 
is in front. 

The quartermaMer sergeant having the right general guide behind 
him, marches on the side opposite the guides, two paces from the 
flank, and on a line with the first files of the column. 

The captains commanding march on the side of the guides, and 
four paces from the flank, and abreast of the centre of their squadrons. 

The second captains march on the side opposite the guides, four 
paces from the flank, and abreast of the centre of their squadrons. 

The first lieutenant of each squadron marches at the head of the 
first platoon, one pace in advance of the first files, having the guide 
of the right on his right. 

The chiefs of the other platoons march on the side of the guides, 
one pace from the flank of the column, and abreast of their first 
files ; the file-closers march on the side opposite the guides, one pace 
from the flank, and on a line with the centre of their platoons. 

They all march in a similar manner on the flanks of the column 
when the left is in front; and, in this case, it is the junior first 
lieutenant who marches in the column at the head of the fourth 
platoon of each squadron. 

The guide, who in line is posted on the left of the squadron, 
marches behind the last file of the squadron ; when the column is 
left in front, he takes post on the left of the officer commanding 
the fourth platoon, one pace in front of the left file. 



44 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Order in Column of Platoons. 

21. In tliis order, the distance from one platoon to another, 
measured from the men of one front rank to those of another front 
rank, is equal to the front of a platoon ; that is to say, it is twelve 
paces if the platoons are of twelve files, subtracting the depths of 
two ranks, which is six paces, there remains six paces from the 
croup of the horses of the rear rank of one platoon, to the heads 
of the horses of the front rank of the next platoon, a distance 
which is equal to half of the front of a platoon. 

The colonel marches at the centre of the regiment, on the side 
of the guides, twenty-five paces from the flank of the column. 

The lieutenant-colonel marches on the side of the guides, twelve 
paces from the flank of the column, and on a line with the lieutenant 
commanding the first platoon of the first squadron. 

The major marches in the direction of the lieutenant-colonel, and 
abreast of the file-closers of the last platoon of the column. 

The adjutant marches behind the left file of the first platoon, to 
direct the guide of the column ; he should occasionally place him- 
self in front of this file, to satisfy himself that the guides of each 
platoon preserve the same direction. 

The sergeant-major marches on the side of the guides, two paces 
from the flank of the column, and abreast of the file-closers of the 
fourth platoon of the fifth squadron ; and, if the left is in front, he 
executes on the side of the guides that which is prescribed for the 
adjutant when the right is in front. 

The quartermaster sergeant having the right general guide behind 
him, marches on the side opposite to the guides, two paces from the 
flank of the column, and on a line with the front rank of the first 
platoon. 

The captains commandiug march on the side of the guides, four 
paces from the flank of the column, and habitually abreast of the 
centre of their squadrons. 

The second captains march on the side opposite to the guides, 
four paces from the flank of the column, and abreast of the centre 
of their squadrons. 



ORDER IN COLUMN OF PLATOONS. 



ilJfi 






d'" Squadron, 



4"> Squadi-on, 



3'' Squadron, 



a* Squadron, 



1" Squadron. ci./««p.«h 




■■(20j^ 



y 




1^^ Sq,iiadron. (jofaa^gt^^:. 



ARMY ORGANIZATION. 45 

Tlie first and second lieutenants marcli at the centre of their pla- 
toons, one pace from the front rank; those who command the 
platoons at the head of squadrons, preserve, besides their distance, 
the ground necessary to enable each squadron, in wheeling into line, 
to maintain its interval. 

The sergeants, who are file-closers, march on the side opposite to 
the guides, behind the third file of their platoons. 

When the column marches right in front, the guide at the right 
of each squadron marches on the right of the first platoon ; and the 
guide of the left places himself as file-closer behind the second file 
from the left of the fourth platoon. 

The post of these sergeants is the reverse when the left is in 
front. (See Fig. 4.) 

Order in Column of Division. 

22. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, major, and adjutant, are posted 
as in the column of platoons. 

It is the same for the captains commanding, and the second 
captains. 

The senior jirst liuetenant commands the first division, the other 
first lieutenant the second; they remain, however, at the centre of 
their platoons. 

All the other officers and sergeants of each division are posted 
as prescribed in the order in column of platoons, the file-closers re- 
maining in their places, on whatever side the guide may be. (Fig. 5.) 

Order in close Column of Squadrons. 

23. In this order, the distance from one squadron to another is 
twelve paces, measured from the croup of the horses of the rear 
rank of one squadron, to the heads of the horses of the front rank 
of the next squadron. 

The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major, are posted as in column 
of platoons. 

The adjutant marches behind the left guide of the first squadron, 
on the alignment of the file-closers, to superintend the direction of 
the march. 



46 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The sergeant-major is posted as in column of platoons, and wlien 
the left is in front, he performs the same duties as the adjutant when 
the right is in front. 

The quartermaster sergeant marches on the side opposite the 
guides, as in column of platoons. 

The guide of the left of the left wing of the first squadron moves 
to the front on the alignment of the ofiicers ; he is replaced by the 
sergeant file-closers of the fourth platoon. If the left is in front, 
the guide of the right of the fifth squadron places himself on the 
alignment of the officers to serve as guide ; he is replaced by the 
sergeant file-closer of the first platoon. 

All the officers of the squadron, and the file-closers, remain posted 
as in the order of battle, except the captains commanding, who 
march on the sides of the guides, four paces from the flank, and on 
a line with the officers of their squadrons. (Fig. 6.) 

Cavalry Brigades and Divisions. 

24. Two or more regiments of cavalry constitute a brigade ; and 
two or more brigades constitute a division. They are officered in 
the same manner as infantry brigades and divisions. 

Mixed brigades and divisions, composed of regiments of infantry 
and cavalry, are sometimes formed. 

OEaANIZATION OF FIELD ARTILLERY. 

25. Field artillery is always formed into batteries. A battery may 
be composed of four, six, or eight pieces ; the pieces may be all 
6-pounder or 12-pounder guns, or it may be composed of 6-pounder 
guns and 12-pounder howitzers, or 12-pounder guns and 24 or 
32-pounder howitzers. 

The number of guns should be double that of the howitzers; for 
a defensive war, from | to 4 of the pieces should be 12-pounder 
guns, and 24 or 32-pounder howitzers. For an ofi"ensive war, from 
4 to ^ only should be of these calibres, otherwise the batteries could 
not be moved with sufficient celerity. 

Each piece is followed by a caisson for ammunition ; each piece 
and caisson is drawn by four or six horses. 



ARMY ORGANIZATION. 



47 









z 


e^ 


1 to 







1 «o 






^1 


d 




il 


^^ 




i^ 


^ 




!V- 






^wwv^/*'^*^/ W^^^WvvW 



48 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA, 




ARMY ORGANIZATION. 49 

26. A battery of six pieces will be supposed ; it is divided into 
three sections, the right, centre, and left ; each containing two pieces 
and two caissons. In each section, the pieces are denominated right 
pieces and left pieces. 

The battery is also divided into half batteries, denominated right 
and left half batteries. 

The word piece applies to the gun or howitzer, either with or 
without its limber; and sometimes to the piece and caisson to- 
gether. 

The officers and men required for the service of the battery, are 
as follows : 

One captain, who commands the battery. 

Four lieutenants ; the first in rank commanding the right section 
(of two pieces), the second the left, tlie third the centre, and the 
fourth the line of caissons. When half batteries are formed, the 
first commands the right, and the second the left. 

Six mounted sergeants ; each charged with guiding and superin- 
tending a piece. 

Twenty-four or thirty-six drivers, being one to each pair of 
horses. 

Six detachments of cannoneers ; each containing nine men in 
mounted batteries, and eleven in horse artillery, including the chief 
of the caisson, and the gunner who commands the detachment. In 
each detachment of horse artillery, the two last extra men are horse- 
holders, who hold the horses of the detachment while it is serving 
the piece. 

Two trumpeters or buglers. One guidon. 

Order in Line. 

27. The order in line is that in which the carriages are formed 
in two lines; the horses all facing the same direction (to the 
front), the pieces limbered, and each followed or preceded by its 
caisson. 

The interval between the carriages in a mounted battery is four- 
teen yards ; in a horse-artillery battery it is seventeen yards, 
5 D 



50 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The distance between tlie two lines, in a mounted battery, mea- 
sured from tbe rear of the carriages of one line to tbe beads of tbe 
horses of the second, is two yards ; in horse artillery the detach- 
ments being two yards in rear of their pieces, the second line is two 
yards in rear of them. 

In a mounted battery the cannoneers are at their posts. 

The captodn is four yards in front of the centre ; but, during the 
manoeuvres, he goes wherever his presence may be most necessary, 
and where his commands may be best heard. 

Each chief of section is in line with his leading drivers, and mid- 
way between the leading carriages of his section. 

The chief of the line of caissons is opposite the centre, four yards 
behind the rear line of carriages. 

Each chief of piece is on the left, and near the leading driver of 
his leading carriage. In horse artillery, when the chiefs of caissons 
are mounted, each chief of carriage is near its leading driver on the 
left. 

The trumpeter is near the captain. (See Fig. 7.) 

Order in Column. 

28. The order in column is that in which the battery is formed 
by sections ; the carriages being in two files, and each piece being 
followed or preceded by its caisson. 

In a mounted battery, the interval between the two pieces of each 
gection of the column is fourteen yards ; the distance between the 
carriages is two yards. The cannoneers are in file, on each side of 
their pieces. 

In horse artillery, the interval between carriages is seventeen 
yards. The distance between the carriages and detachments is two 
yards. The detachments formed in two ranks, are two yards in rear 
of their pieces. 

The captain is generally fourteen yards from the column, and 
opposite the centre. 

Each chief of section is in line with his leading drivers, and mid-* 
way between his leading carriages. 

The chief of the line of caissons is in line with the captain, on the 



ARMY ORGANIZATION. 



51 



ORDER IN LINE. 



MOUfllTED BATT£RY\ 

1 



*<fi It will wai 71""" 



i 



:?: i;L_, 



fT 



fe 



L..7.. 



Ill 






H 



^ 
^ 







r§ 



i 






«^-^- 



5-^1 



S2 g^SKl-f 



■^ --f«f vj-l^w^— "^— 









^sm^ 35 i^g-t 



52 MANUAL FOR Y O L U N T E E U S AND MILITIA 



ORDER IN COLUMN. 



MOUNTED BATTERY 



f/ORSE ARTHLEE7 



III ■?! ncl 



III 









'11 ,7| ^iii !' 
Hill t^ii t 



^ /''ii 



r - H 






14^= 



^1 






/f; 

1 — 



jc cc| 



f «' 



?l ^i Hi 






.1. 



•7-^-Y-^ 



mil 
Hill 

"IS 






iilll 
tills 



rij- 5, 



lll^l 



i4i«"-^i:-5t-*|-">»Qi' 



ARMY ORGANIZATION. 53 

same side of the column^ and four yards from it; but lie does not 
change his position to conform to that of the captain. 

The chiefs of pieces and caissons are posted as in line. (See Fig. 8.) 

Order' in Battery. 

29. The order in battery is that in which the pieces are prepared 
for firing; the pieces, limbers, and caissons being turned towards the 
enemy, and formed in three parallel lines. 

In a mounted battery the interval between the carriages is fourteen 
yards. The distance between the lines of pieces and limbers is six 
yards, measured from the end of the handspike to the heads of the 
leading horses. The distance between the lines of limbers and 
caissons is eleven yards, measuring from the rear of the limbers to 
the heads of the leading horses of the caissons. The cannoneers 
are at their posts. 

In horse artillery the interval between the pieces is seventeen 
yards. The distances between the lines are the same as for the 
mounted battery. The cannoneers are at their posts, and the de- 
tachments of horses are four yards in rear of the limDerd. 

The captain is generally on the left of the chief of the centre 
lection ; but he may go wherever his presence is required. 

Each chief of section is habitually in the centre of his section, 
lalf way between the lines of pieces and limbers. 

The chief of the line of caissons is opposite the centre, four yards 
.n rear of the line of caissons. 

Each chief of piece is outside the file on the left of his piece ; 
but near it, and opposite the middle of the trail handspike. During 
the executions of the firings, he habitually dismounts and gives the 
reins of his horse to the driver of the wheel horses of the limber. 

Each chief of caisson is on the left, and four yards in rear of the 
limber of the piece. In horse artillery he gives the reins of his 
horse to the driver of the wheel horses of the caissons. (See Fig. 9.) 

Two or more Batteries united. 

30. When necessary, two or more batteries may be united; they 
may be formed by sections in one or more parallel columns^ or in 

5* 



54 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



J.y9. 



- i-CVmER . 1 



MOUNTED BATTERY 

m n 






■wQli Ticfil 



Zl 



I 



irt 









«a» ■=s> ■ 



^ 



» 



u 



oc 

I— I to 

c 



•«-' . 






IS-. 












■s-ifr 






ARMYORGANIZATION. 55 

two columns joined, and presenting a front of four pieces with the 
same intervals as in line. Sometimes they are formed in close 
column with a front of four or six pieces, and the batteries being 
spaced a distance apart equal to the interval between two pieces. 
When the batteries are in line, the intervals between them are 
twice the intervals between the pieces. 

The position of Artillery. 

81. Artillery seldom or never acts in an independent capacity, 
but in conjunction with either infantry or cavalry, or both. 

The positions usually assigned batteries, are on the flanks, or in 
the intervals between regiments and brigades, these intervals being 
increased sufficiently to admit them. When a battery is brought 
into action, it is usually thrown forward some 60 paces in front of 
the main line. 

Two mounted batteries are usually assigned to each division of 
infantry, and one of horse artillery to every division of cavalry. 
Besides for each army corps of infantry there is a reserve of several 
batteries. 

THE STAFF. 

32. The well being and efficiency of an army must depend in a 
large degree upon the thorough organization of the various depart- 
ments of the Sitaff. 

These are : 

An Adjutant- GeneraTs Department. 
An Inspector- General^ & Department. 
A Quartermaster's Department. 
A Commissary Department. 
An Engineer Department. 
An Ordnance Department. 
A Pay Department. 
A Medical Department. 

33. The officers of the Adjutant-General's Department are, an 
adjutant-general^ with such rank as may be assigned him by legisla- 



56 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

tive enactment, usually that of ^lonel or brigadier-general, witli as 
many assistant adjutant-generals as the exigencies of the service 
may require. 

The adjutant-general should be the chief of the staff of the com- 
mander-in-chief. He is the regular channel through which com- 
manders of corps and chiefs of departments communicate with the 
commander-in-chief; and all orders, special instructions, and general 
regulations, issued by the commander-in-chief relative to the organi- 
zation, discipline, and instruction of the forces, are prepared and 
published by the adjutant-general, conformably to the direction of 
the commander-in-chief. 

When the commander-in-chief takes the field the adjutant- 
general should accompany him ; when an army in the field is in 
command of any general not the general-in-chief, an assistant 
adjutant-general is assigned to him as chief of his staff. 

An assistant adjutant-general, with the rank of captain, is assigned 
to the commander of each brigade, and one with the rank of major 
is assigned to the general of every division. In each case the 
assistant adjutant-general is the chief of staff of his general, and 
his duties are of the same general nature as those of the adjutant- 
general. 

An adjutant is the chief of staff of his regiment. 

34. The officers of the Inspector-General's Department are one 
or more inspector -gener ah, with a division inspector for each division, 
and a hrigade inspector for each brigade. 

To the inspector-general, and the division and brigade inspectors, 
are assigned the duties of inspecting the troops, fortifications, camps, 
etc., at stated times ) and division and brigade inspectors are specially 
entrusted with the instruction of regimental officers. The militia 
laws of Virginia, and some of the other States, impose all the duties 
of this department upon that of the adjutant-general, in which case 
the division and brigade inspectors become the chiefs of staff of 
their divisions and brigades, and discharge all the duties which 
usually devolve upon the assistant adjutant-general. 

35. The officers of the Quartermaster's Department are, a quar- 
termaster-general, who has the control of the department; one or 



ARMY ORGANIZATION. 0/ 

more assistant quartermaster-generals, quartermasters, and assistant 
quartermasters. 

The duties of this department are, to provide quarters and trans- 
portation for the troops; storage and transportation for all army 
supplies; clothing for the troops; camp and garrison equipage; 
cavalry and artillery horses; fael; forage; straw, and stationery. 

36. The officers of the commissary department are, a commissary 
general, one or more assistant commissary generals, and as many 
commissaries and assistant commissaries as the exigencies of the 
service may require. 

To this department are assigned the duties of providing all the 
suj)plies necessary for the subsistence of the troops. 

37. The officers of the engineer department are, a chief engineer, 
and as many officers of engineers as may be necessary to give effi- 
ciency to the department. 

The duties of this department usually relate to the construction 
of permanent arid field fortifications ; works for the attack and de- 
fence of places ; for the passage of rivers ; for the movements and 
operations of troops in the field; and such reconnaissances and 
surveys as may be required for these objects. 

38. The ordnance department is officered in the same manner as 
that of the engineers. 

This department has charge of all arsenals and armories; all 
cannon and artillery carriages and equipments; all apparatus and 
machines for the service and manoeuvres of artillery; all small arms 
and accoutrements and horse equipments; all ammunition; and all 
materials for the construction of munitions of war. 

39. The officers of the pay department are, a paymaster general, 
one or more deputy paymaster generals, and one paymaster, ordi- 
narily, to every regiment. When large bodies of troops are serving 
together, the number of paymasters may be very much reduced 
without detriment to the service. 

To this department belong all the duties pertaining to the pay- 
ment of the troops when they are in the service of the State. 

40. The officers of the medical department are a surgeon general, 
with one surgeon to each regiment^ and such other surgeons and 



58 JIANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

assistant surgeons as a proper attention to the health of the troops 
may require. 

The senior medical officer, on duty with any corps in the field, 
unless otherwise specially ordered by the commanding officer, will 
he, ex-officio, the medical director ; and will have the general con- 
trol of the medical officers, and the supervision of the hospitals 
under their charge. 



ARMS. 59 



ARTICLE II. 

ARMS. 

41. The principal small arms used in warfare at the present day, 
are the common or smooth bore musket with percussion lock, the 
rifled musket, the rifle with elongated ball, rifled carbines, pistols 
and sabres. 

42. The smooth bore musket (U. S. service pattern), is four feet 
ten inches in length from the butt to the muzzle ; is provided with 
a bayonet eighteen inches in length, which fits upon the outside of 
the muzzle, and locks, so as to prevent its removal by an adversary ; 
it has a bore of 0.69 of an inch in diameter, and carries a leaden 
ball running 32 to the pound. The musket with its bayonet weighs 
ten pounds nearly. The fire of the musket is inaccurate, but in a 
general action, where accuracy of fire is not attainable, it may be 
made efiective up to 300 yards ; beyond 400 yards it is useless. 

This arm is being rapidly superseded by the rifled musket, or 
Minie musket, as it is sometimes called. 

43. The rifled musket is nothing but the common musket ^' rifled;^' 
the grooves are three in number, they are of equal width, and equal 





in width to the '^ lands f' the twist of the grooves is a uniform 
' spiral of one turn to six feet in length ; the grooves are very shallow 



60 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

at the muzzle (0.005 of an inch), and deepen slightly as they go 
down to the breech. The projectile, instead of being round, as in 
the common musket, is made cylindro-conical, the cylindrical por- 
tion having three grooves around it, and the base or bottom being 
hollowed out in a conical form. Fig. 10 is a representation of the 
exterior of the ball, and Fig. 11 is a section through it showing the 
shape of the grooves, and the cone at the base. The object of 
giving the ball a pointed form, is that it may meet with the least 
possible resistance in its flight through the air; the effect of the 
grooves is, by the action of the air upon them, to keep the point of 
the ball in front, and cause it to strike first; the object of making 
it hollow at the base is, to make it expand when the piece is fired, 
thereby causing it to fill the grooves, and follow them in its pas- 
sage out of the piece. 

The dimensions of the rifled musket (U. S. pattern) are as fol- 
lows : length, without bayonet, four feet eight inches; with bayo- 
net fixed, six feet two inches; weight ten pounds; diameter of 
bore 0-58 of an inch; weight of ball 500 grains. 

44. The " altered musket" of the U. S. service, is the old pat- 
tern musket rifled ; the principal difference between this and the 
new rifled musket being, that the altered musket has a larger bore, 
its diameter being 0-69 of an inch. The ball carried by it ia 
heavier, weighing 730 grains, and a heavier charge of powder is 
necessary. 

45. The rifle, or Minie rifle, as it is generally called, is rifled in 
the same manner as the muskets ; the diameter of the bore is 0-58 of 
an inch, the same as the new musket, and the same ball is used ; it 
is shorter than the musket, being but four feet one inch in length, 
without the bayonet, and not quite six feet with the bayonet fixed ; 
its weight is greater than that of the musket, it being, without the 
bayonet, ten pounds, within a small fraction, and thirteen with it. 
The bayonet is not quite twenty-two inches in length ; it is made 
in the form of a heavy sabre, but slightly curved near the point. 
It is usually worn at the side, and is only fixed when pressed by 
cavalry, or in a charge. 

46. There are several forms of rifles and carbines which are 



ARMS. 61 

more or less in use by mounted troops, as Colt's repeating carbines 
and repeating rifles, Maynard's, Burnside's, and Sharp's rifles, and 
Sharp's carbine, all of which are breech-loading arms. Colt's arms 
are intended for both round and elongated balls ; in the others, the 
elongated ball is alone used. 

47. The pistols in general use at this time are the largest size of 
Colt's repeaters ; they are rifled, and may be used as carbines by 
the attachment of an ^^ adjustable breech.^' 

There is also a '^ pistol carbine'^ manufactured by the U. S. ord- 
nance department; it is rifled, has the same bore as the rifle and 
rifle musket, and the same ball may be used, although a ball with a 
larger cavity than that of the rifle ball is preferable. This arm 
maybe used as a pistol or carbine— -in the latter case an adjustable 
breech becomes necessary. 

48. All cavalry and artillery troops are armed with sabres, the 
TJ. S. cavalry and artillery sabres have steel scabbards, are forty- 
three and thirty-eight inches long respectively, and are attached to 
"sling" belts, which are worn around the waist. 

49. The fire-arms used in artillery are divided into three classes, 
guns, howitzers, and mortal's. Guns are used to throw solid shot, 
which cut by their force of percussion, hence they are always fired 
with large charges of powder, say from one-fifth to one-half the 
weight of the ball. They are used to strike an object direct, and 
at a distance; or by their ricochet fire for reaching objects not at- 
tainable by direct fire. They are also used to batter down the walls 
of fortifications. They are always designated by the weight of 
solid shot which they carry. 

There are six difierent calibres, which are divided into three 
classes, according to the position in which they are to be used ; 
they are 6, 12, 18, 24, 82, and 42-pounders. 

50. The 6 and 12-pounders, usually made of bronze, but some- 
times of cast iron, constitute one class called Jield guns; the 12, 
18, and 24-pounders, made of cast iron, constitute a second known 
as siege and garrison guns ; and the 32 and 42-pounders, also cast 
iron, make the tbird, denominated sea-coast guns. 

Field guns are used in the field as light artiUery; siege and gar- 
6 



62 



MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 




Si 





f1 


U 
CD 



ft 

6 

ij 
1—1 



<^m ^ 



A R M S . 



G3 




01 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
6-po-u.rLd.er. 




ARMS. 65 

rison guns are used in permanent and field fortifications, and in 
sieges, to batter down the walls, etc.; sea-coast guns are principally 
used in permanent fortifications, on the sea hoard. 

51. A hoiDitzer is a gun with a chamber in it. It is used prin- 
cipally for firing hollow projectiles, or shells; in order to prevent 
breaking the shell, and at the same time to give the projectile suffi- 
cient velocity, a small charge of powder is fired from a cylindrical 
chamber at the bottom of the base. 

The calibre of howitzers is designated by the weight of the solid 
shot which they would carry, or by the number of inches that the 
bore is in diameter. They are divided into Jield Iwwitzers, moun- 
tain liowiizers, siege and garrison, and sea-coast Jiowifzers ; field 
howitzers are 12, 24, and 32-pounders ; mountain howitzers are 
12-pounders, siege and garrison howitzers are 24-pounders and 
8-inch, and sea-coast howitzers are 8 and 10-inch. 

52. Field howitzers are used with light batteries in the field; the 
mountain howitzer is for service in countries too rough to admit the 
passage of wheeled carriages ; siege and garrison howitzers are used 
in the trenches at sieges, and in the defence of permanent fortifica- 
tions ; and sea-coast howitzers are used in permanent fortifications 
on the sea-board. 

53. There are several kinds of mortars ranging from six to six- 
teen inches in calibre ; the heavy mortars are principally used on 
the sea-coast ; the others are for use in the trenches at sieges, and 
in the defence of fortifications of all kinds. 

54. Pieces of artillery are mounted on their carriages by means 
of trunnions ; they are cylinders cast with the gun, having a common 
axis perpendicular to that of the gun. The trunnions of the 
6-pounder gun, and 12-pounder howitzer have the same diameter, 
so that guns and howitzers may be mounted on the same sized car- 
riages, and serve together in the same battery; the trunnions of 
the 12-pounder gun, and 24 and 32-pounder howitzer, are also of 
the same size, so that they may be thrown together in the same bat- 
tery. Fig. 12 gives the form of the 6-pounder gun, with the names 
of the parts, and Fig. 13 represents a 12 and 24-pounder howitzer 

55. The field gun carriage is composed of two parts ; the portion on 

G^ E 



66 MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

whidi the piece rests when it is fired, and the limher. The first part, 
or carriage proper, is two-wheeled ; from the axle proceeds the stoch^ 
to which are fastened two upright pieces called cheeks, upon which 
the trunnions rest. The end of the stock designated the trail, rests 
on the ground during the firings ; at other times it is attached to the 
limher -, the piece gets its proper elevation by means of the elevating 
screw, which works through a plate on the stock. Fig. 14 repre- 
sents the gun and carriage with the names of the parts, one wheel 
being removed to show them the better. The limber is the part of 
the carriage to which the horses are attached ; on the end of the 
trail is an iron plate called the lunette, through which there is an 
opening, which goes over a hook on the axle of the limber called 
the pintle-liooh, and is secured in its place by a bolt called the pintle- 
holt. The limber also carries an ammunition-box, which may be 
removed at pleasure. 

56. Each piece is followed by its caisson or carriage, for ammu- 
nition. The wheels of the carriage, limber and caisson, are all of 
the same size ; and may, when necessary, replace each other, and a 
spare wheel is carried on the rear of every caisson. The caisson 
carries three ammunition boxes, of the same size as the one on the 
limber, and movable, so that when the box on the limber is empty, 
it may be exchanged for a full one from the caisson. The boxes are 
partitioned off into small compartments, each compartment being 
the receptacle for a charge of ammunition. 

Every artillery carriage is drawn by from four to six horses, a 
driver being required for each pair of horses. 



AMMUNITION 



57. When troops are in the field it is not only necessary that they 
should go with a sufficient supply of ammunition, but that it should 
be put up in such form as to be convenient for use, and at the same 
time as well protected as possible from the effects of the weather, 
etc. Cartridges made of paper or flannel, or some other woollen 



AMMUNITION 



6T 



rroods, are in general use ; the former for small arms, and tlie latter 
for artillery. 

58. To make tlie cylinders for blank cartridges, the paper is cut 
ia the form represented in 



Fig. 15, "with a pattern. 



Tiglo. 



Ball Cartridge. 



€.33' 



The former is a cylinder 
of hard wood of the same 
diameter as the ball, con- 
cave at one end, and con- 
vex at the other. The 
paper is laid on a table with 
the side perpendicular to 
the bases next the work- 
man, the broad end to the 
left, the former laid on it 
with the concave end half 
an inch from the broad 
edge of the paper, and en- 
veloped in it once. The 
right hand is then laid flat 
on the former, and all the 

paper rolled on it. The projecting end of the paper is now neatly 
folded down into the concavity of the former, pasted, and pressed 
on a ball imbedded in the table for the purpose. 

Instead of being pasted, these cylinders may be closed by choking 
with a string tied to the table, and having at the other end a stick 
by which to hold it. The convex end of the former is placed to 
the left, and after the paper is rolled on, the former is taken in the 
left hand, and a turn made around it with the choking string half 
an inch from the end of the paper. Whilst the string is drawn 
tight with the right hand the former is held in the left with the 
forefinger resting on the end of the cylinder, folding it neatly down 
upon the end of the former. The choke is then firmly tied with 
twine. 

59. For ball cartridges, the cylinders are made and choked as 
above, and the choke tied without cutting the twine. The former 
6* E 



68 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

is then withdrawn, the hall inserted, and followed hy the concave 
end of the former. Two half-hitches are made just above the ball^ 
and the twine cut off. 

For ball and buck-shot cartridges make the cylinder as before, 
insert three buck-shot; fasten them with a half-hitch, and insert 
and secure the ball as before. 

For buck-shot cartridges make the cylinder as before, insert four 
tiers of three buck-shot each, as at first, making a half-hitch between 
the tiers, and ending with a double hitch. 

GO. To fill the cartridges, the cylinders are placed upright in a 
box, and the charge poured into each from a conical charger of the 
appropriate size ; the mouths of the cylinders are now folded down 
on the powder by two rectangular folds, and the cartridges bundled 
in packages of ten. For this a folding-box is necessary ; it is made 
with but two vertical sides, at a distance from each other equal to 
five diameters of the ball, and two diameters high. 

Put a wrapper in the folding-box, and place in it two tiers of five 
cartridges each, parallel to each other and to the short sides of the 
wrapper, the balls alternating; wrap the cartridges whilst in the 
folding-box, by folding the paper over them, and tie them. A 
package of twelve percussion cajps is placed in each bundle of ten 
cartridges. 

The bundles are marked with the number and kind of cartridge. 

61. The cartridges for elongated projectiles difi"er so much from 
those used with the spherical bullet, that a separate description is 
necessary. 

Each cartridge is made of three pieces of paper, the larger piece 
or cartridge proper, (see Fig. 16, No. 1,) is made of what is known 
as cartridge paper, but it should not be too strong; the second 
piece, No. 2, is made of the same or stronger paper, and the third. 
No. 3, is made of the stoutest rocket paper. 

Before enveloping the balls in the cartridges, their cylindrical 
parts should be covered with a melted composition of one part bees- 
wax, and three parts tallow ; it should be applied hot, in which case 
the superfluous part would run ofi". Care should be taken to remove 
all the grease from the bottom of the ball, lest by coming in contact 



AMMUNITION. 



G9 



witli the bottom of tlie case it penetrate the paper and injure the 
powder. 

62. The sticks on which the cartridges are rolled are made of 
the same diameter as the bore of the piece; the dimensions given 





Fi^m. 




&9 















^'A' \\ 


3 

2' 


V>s 


c 


a 


2 \ \ 

j \ 






""" . \ 



are for the U. S. musket or rifle of 0-58 bore. The piece of stiff 
paper No. 3, is laid upon No. 2, as shown in the dotted line of the 
figure; the stick is laid down on the side a, h, c, the end being at 
h, and the paper rolled around it; the projecting end is then folded 
down and pasted. After the cylinder thus made is dry, it is again 
put on the stick ; the stick is then taken in the left hand and laid 
upon the outer wrapper, the end not far from the middle of the 
wrapper, (the oblique edge of the wrapper turned from the work- 
man^ the longer vertical edge towards his left hand,) and snugly 



70 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

rolled up. Tlie ball is then inserted in the open end of the cart- 
ridge^ the base resting on the cylinder case, the paper neatly choked 
around the point of the hall and fastened by tying with cartridge 
thread. The stick is then withdrawn, sixty grains of powder poured 
into the case, and the mouth of the cartridge is "pinched" or folded 
in the usual way. The cartridge is shown in Fig. 17. 

63. To use this cartridge, tear the fold and pour out the powder; 
then seize the ball end firmly between the thumb and forefinger of 
the right hand, and strike the cylinder a smart blow across the 
muzzle of the piece ; this breaks the cartridge and exposes the 
bottom of the ball ; a slight pressure of the thumb and forefinger 
forces the ball into the bore clear of all cartridge paper. In striking 
the cartridge the cylinder should be held square across, or at right 
angles to the muzzle ; otherwise, a blow given in an oblique direc- 
tion would only bend the cartridge without breaking it. 

64. The ammunition for artillery consists of a charge of powder 
contained in a cartridge-bag, and the projectile, which may be either 
fixed to, or separate from the cartridge. When the two are fastened 
together, the whole constitutes a charge of fixed ammunition. 

65. The cartridge-bag should be made of merino, bombazette, or 
flannel, which should be all wool, otherwise fire might be left in the 
piece after its discharge. The texture and sewing should be close 
enough to prevent the powder sifting through. Untwilled stuiF is 
preferable. The bag is formed of two pieces, a rectangle, which 
forms the cylinder, and a circular piece which forms the bottom. 
As the stuff does not stretch in the direction of its length, the long 
side of the rectangle should be taken in that direction, otherwise 
the cartridge might become too large for convenient use with its 
piece. The material is laid sometimes several folds thick, on a table, 
and the rectangles and circles marked out on it with chalk, using, 
for the purpose, patterns made of hard, well-seasoned wood, sheet 
iron, or tin. The pieces are then cut with the scissors. For a 
6-pounder gun and 12-pounder howitzer, the rectangle is 11.4 inches 
long by 7.25 inches in height, the diameter of the bottom being 
4.37 inches — the seam is half an inch wide. For the 12-pounder 
gun, and 24 and 32-pounder howitzer, the rectangle is 14.2 inches 



A M 31 U N I T 1 N 



71 








7*2 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 









AMMUNITION. 7$ 

by lOj and the diameter of the bottom is 5.25 inches. The short 
sides of the rectangle are sewed together, and the bottom sewed in. 
The sewing is done with woollen yarn, twelve stitches to the inch. 
The two edges of the seam are turned down on the same side, and 
basted, to prevent the powder from sifting through. 

Blank cartridge-bags, or those intended for immediate use, may 
be made of two rectangular pieces with semi-circular ends sewed 
together. 

66. When special accuracy is required, charges are carefully 
weighed in delicate scales ; but usually the bags are filled by measure- 
ment. The powder measures are made of sheet copper ; they are 
cylindrical, and their diameters and height are equal. A measure 
3.628 inches in diameter and height, holds one and a quarter pounds 
of powder, the charge for a 6-pounder gun when it fires solid shot ; 
one of 3.368 inches holds one pound of powder, the charge for the 
same gun when it fires spherical case or canister; it is also the 
charge for the 12-pounder howitzer. A measure of 4.24 inches in 
diameter and height, holds two pounds of powder, the light charge 
for a 24-pounder howitzer; one of 4.57 inches holds two and a 
half pounds of powder, the heaviest charge for the 24-pounder 
howitzer, and the light charge for the 32-pounder. The one pound 
and a quarter measure, and the two pound measure, making three 
and a quarter pounds, will be the heavy charge for the 32-pounder 
dowitzer. 

67. Blank cartridges, and those for the 12-pounder gun, are, 
♦ifter being filled, simply tied firmly about the neck with twine. 
Those for fixed ammunition are attached to pieces of wood called 
sabots, by tying them with strong twine ; before attaching them to 
the sabots, however, the sabot must be fastened in the projectile. 

The sabot (Fig. 18), for guns, is cylindrical, or nearly so, in 
shape, and for howitzers, conical. For shot and spherical case for 
guns, they have one groove for attaching the cartridge; those for 
gun canisters, and for 12-pounder howitzer shells, spherical case, 
and canister, have two grooves. Sabots for 32-pounder and 
24-pounder howitzers have no grooves, but are furnished with han- 
7 



74 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



Fia 20. 



dies made of a piece of cord, passing through two holes, and fastened 
by knots countersunk on the inside. 

68. The sabots are fastened to shot and shell with strips of sheet 
tin. For shot there are two straps crossing at right angles (Fig. 19), 
one passing through a slit in the middle of the other. For shells 
there are four straps soldered to a ring of tin ; the straps are nailed 
to the sabot. If tin cannot be procured, straps may be made of 
strong canvass, one inch wide, sewed at the point of crossing. The 
part of the ball which is to be inserted into the socket is dipped in 
glue ; the straps are glued to the ball, and nailed to the sabot. 

69. A canister shot is a cylinder of tin, of the same diameter as 
the bore of the piece, filled with small balls. (See Fig. 20.) The 
cylinder is left open at both ends; after being soldered, it is nailed 

to the sabot, and a plate of rolled iron placed 
at the bottom of the sabot. To prevent rust- 
ing, the cylinder before filling should be 
covered with beeswax dissolved in spirits of 
turpentine, and the balls should be painted or 
lacquered. 

To fill the canister place it upright on its 
sabot; put in a tier of balls, filling the inter- 
stices with dry sawdust, packing it with a 
pointed stick, so that the balls will hold by 
themselves when the case is turned over, and 
throw out the loose sawdust. Place another 
tier of balls, and proceed in the same manner 
until the canister is filled ; cover the top tier 
with a layer of sawdust, and put on the cover, 
which is a circular plate of sheet iron, settling 
it well with a mallet in order to compress the 
sawdust. The top of the cylinder is cut into slits about half an 
inch long, which are turned down over the cover to secure it. 

70. The shot, shell, or canister being secured to the sabot, the 
cartridge is tied to it, making the charge complete. The mouths 
of the bag are first twisted and pressed down, so as to settle the 
powder; they are then opened and the powder smoothed. Tlie 




A M M U N I T I N . 



75 



sabot is introduced, and the cartridge drawn up around it, until it 
reaches the powder; the cartridge is then secured by passing several 
turns of strong twine around it in the grooves, and tying it, after 
which the excess of the bag is cut off. (See Fig. 21.) 






Fig 21. 



Fixed Ammunition. 

71. The cartridge and projectile for the 24 and 32-pounder how- 
itzers are kept separate; the projectile is attached to the sabot as 
has been shown (see No. 68, 
and Fig. 19), and the cartridge 
to a cylindrical piece of light 
wood called a cartridge block. 
(Fig. 22.) 

These blocks srive a better 



Fiq 22. 





finish to the cartridge, help to 
fill the chamber, and keep the 

cartridge from turning in the Cartridge Block and Cartridge. 

bore while the piece is being loaded. They have but one groove : 
the grooved end is inserted in the mouth of the cartridge, and 
pressed down upon the powder; the bag is pulled over it and tied 
with twine in the groove. The mouth of the bag is then turned 
down, and another tie made over it, which keeps the powder from 
working up between the block and the bag. The superfluous part 
of the bag is then cut off. 



ib MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

72. For the greater security of field ammunition, the cartridges 
are covered with paper cylinders and caps. They are both made 
together, on the same former, which is a piece of board with slightly 
inclined sides, and rounded edges. The paper is pasted around this. 
The requisite length for the cylinder is cut from the smaller end, 
the rest forming the cap, which is choked at the end from which 
the cylinder is cut. For choking, a cylindrical former of wood, 
with a hemispherical end, is used, which should be bored through 
the end to facilitate the drawing off of the cap. The cylinder fits 
over the body of the cartridge and a part of the sabot to which it 
is tied, while the cap fits over the end. When the cap is drawn off, 
which is always done when the cartridge is placed in the piece, the 
lower end is left exposed so that the priming wire, or fire from the 
friction tube, can reach it without going through any paper. 

73. Shells are hollow shot, the interior space being formed of a 
sphere concentric with the outer surface, making the sides of equal 
thickness. They have a conical opening or ci/e, used to load the 
shell, and in which is inserted the fuze to communicate fire to the 
charge. 

74. To load shells, they are set upon their sabots, the charges 
measured out in the proper powder measure, and poured in through 
a copper funnel. The 32-pounder requires a charge of one pound 
of powder (rifle or musket powder) to burst it, the 24-pounder 
twelve ounces, and the 12-pounder seven ounces. If now the shell 
is to be fired by an ordinary fuze, (see article on fuzes,) a conical 
piece of dry beech is firmly driven into the eye, and then a hole is 
reamed out through it to receive the fuze, and stopped with a wad 
of tow, the fuze not to be driven in until the shell is to be fired. 

75. Spherical case, or Schi^apnel shot, as they are called, after 
the English officer who brought them to perfection, are thin-sided 
shells in which, besides the bursting charge, are placed a number 
of musket balls. Their sides are much thinner than those of the 
ordinary shell, in order that they may contain a greater number of 
bullets ; and these acting as a support to the sides of the shell pre- 
vent it from being broken by the force of the discharge. The 
weight of the empty case is about one-half that of the solid shot 



AMMUNITION. 77 

of the same diameter. Lead being much more dense than iron, 
the schrapnell is, when loaded, nearly as heavy as the solid shot of 
the same calibre; but on account of the less charge which it is 
necessary to use to prevent breaking the case, their fire is neither 
so accurate nor the range so great as with the solid shot. But 
when the schrapnell bursts just in front of an object the effect is 
terrible, being as great as the discharge of grape from a piece at a 
very short range. 

76. To load a schrapnell shot, the requisite number of balls are 
placed in ; the shell for a 6-pound gun requires thirty-eight balls, 
that for the 12-pound gun and howitzer seventy-eight, the 24-pound 
howitzer one hundred and seventy-five, and the 32-pound howitzer 
two hundred and twenty-five. The balls being inserted, a stick a 
little less in diameter than the fuze-hole, and having a groove on 
each side of it, is inserted and pushed to the bottom of the cham- 
ber by working the balls aside. The shell is then heated to about 
the melting point of sulphur, and melted sulphur is poured in to 
fill up the interstices between the balls. When the shell is cool 
the stick is withdrawn, and any adhering sulphur is removed. 

If a fuze-plug and common fuze are to be used, the charge is 
placed in and the plug inserted as for shells ; but if the Boarmann 
fuze is to be used, (see the article on fuzes,) the charge is to be 
inserted, and the stopper and fuze are screwed into their places. 
The bursting charges are as follows : for the 6-pounder, 2-5 ounces ; 
for the 12-pounder, 4-5 ounces; for the 24-pounder, 6 ounces; and 
for the 32-pounder, 8 ounces. 

77. A fuse is a contrivance for communicating fire to the charge 
in a shell. It consists of a highly inflammable composition, inclosed 
in a wood, metal, or paper case. Th.Q paper fuze consists of a coni- 
cal paper case, containing the composition, whose rate of burning 
is shown by the color of the case, as follows : 

Black burns two seconds to the inch. 
Red " three '' '' " 

Green " four " " " 

Yellow " five " " " 

Each fuze is made two inches long, and the yellow burns, conso- 



78 MANUAL FORVOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

quently, ten seconds. For any shorter time, the fuse is cut with a 
sharp knife. This fuse is not placed in the shell until it is to be 
fired, when the wad of tow is removed from the fuze-plug, and the 
fuze pressed down with the thumb. 

78. The Belgian or Boarmann fuze is the best now in use. The 
fuze case is made of metal (an alloy of lead and tin), and consists, 
first (Fig, 23), of a short cylinder, having at one end a horse-shoe 
shaped indentation, one end only of which communicates with the 
magazine of the fuze placed in the centre. The indentation extends 
nearly to the other end of the cylinder, a thin layer of metal only 
intervening. This is graduated on the outside into equal parts, 
representing seconds and quarter seconds, as represented in Fig. 24. 
In the bottom of this channel a smooth layer of the composition is 
placed, with a piece of wick or yarn underneath it ; on this is placed 
the piece of metal represented in Fig. 25, the cross section of it 
being wedge-shaped ; and this is by machinery pressed down upon 
the composition. The cylindrical opening represented at a, Fig. 23, 
is filled with fine powder, and covered with a sheet of tin, which is 
soldered in its place, closing the magazine from the external air. 
Before using the fuse, several holes are punched through this sheet 
of tin, to allow the flame to escape into the shell. On the side of 
the fuse the thread of a screw is cut which fits into one on the 
inside of the fuze hole, and the fuze is screwed into the shell with 
a wrench. 

79. The thin layer of metal over the composition is cut away with 
a gouge or chisel of any kind, at the point marked with the number 
of seconds which we wish the fuze to burn. The metal of this 
fuze being soft, there is danger of its being driven into the shell by 
the explosive force of the charge. To prevent this, a circular piece 
of iron, of a less diameter than the fuze, with a hole through its 
centre, and the thread of a screw on the outside, is screwed into 
the fuze-hole before the fuze is placed in. 

The regularity and certainty of this fuze is very great; one of 
its most important advantages is, the fact that the shells can be^ 
loaded, all ready for use, and remain so for any length of time, 
perfectly safe from explosion ; as the fuze can be screwed to its 



AMMUNITION 



79 






to 




80 



MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



place, and the composition never exposed to external fire until the 
metal is cut through. The only operation to be performed when 
the shell is to be fired, is to gouge through the metal at the proper 
point, which may be done with any kind of a chisel, knife, or other 
instrument. 

80. Fire is communicated to the charge in a cannon by means 
of priming tubes and friction tubes. 

Quill priming tubes are made from quills by cutting off the barrel 
at both ends, and splitting down the large end for about half an inch, 
into seven or any other odd number of parts ] these are bent out- 
wards, perpendicular to the body of the quill, and from the cup of 
the tube. Fine woollen yarn is then woven into these slits, like 
basket work, the end being brought down and tied on the stem ] or 
a perforated dish of paper is pasted on them. 

These tubes are filled by injecting into them, with a tube-injector, 
a liquid paste made of mealed powder and spirits of wine ; a better 
method is, not to make the paste too thin, and then press it in with 
the thumb. A strand of quick match, two inches long, is now laid 
across the cup, and pasted in them with the powder paste. A small 
wire is then run through the tube, and remains there until the paste 
is dry ; this leaves an aperture, furnishing a quick communication 
for the fire along the tube. A paper cap is placed over the cup, and 
twisted tightly around the tube under the cup. 

Tubes are also made of metal, 
they are either moulded, or 
formed into tubes by machinery. 
They are filled, primed, and 
capped, in the same way as 
quill tubes. 

Priming tubes are now almost 
entirely superseded hy friction 
tubes, which are made by ma- 
chinery at one of the U. S. 
arsenals. 

81. To fire priming i\\he^ portfires are used ; they consist of paper 
cases, filled with a highly inflammable, but slowly burning compo- 




AM MUNITION. 81 

sition, the flame of which is very intense and penetrating, and cannot 
be extinguished with water. 

Friction tubes are fired by means of a lanyard ; this is a stout 
cord which has a wooden handle at one end, and an iron hook upon 
the other; the cannoneer puts the hook through the loop in the 
wire of the friction tube (Fig. 26), and holding the lanyard by the 
handle, pulls steadily until the wire is withdrawn, when an explo- 
sion takes place, induced by the friction of the wire against the com- 
position in the tube. 



82 ]M A N U A L FOR VOLUNTEERS AND M I L T T T A 



ARTICLE III. 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 

GENERAL RULES- 

82. The object of this School is the individual instruction of 
the soldier; it should be taught with the greatest possible care and 
precision, as on it depends the efficiency of the instruction of the 
company, which is again so necessary to that of the battalion, and 
from that of the battalion to the evolutions of the line, where an 
entire army is manoeuvred with as much precision as a single company. 

The instructor should never require a movement to be executed 
until he has fully explained it, and joined example to precept by 
performing the movement in person. He should accustom the 
soldier to take for himself the position required, correcting him 
when necessary, and should 'abor to prevent the formation of a 
habit of carelessness in the execution of the movements. 

Each movement should be thoroughly understood before passing 
to another. After they have been properly executed in the order 
laid down, the instructor should no longer confine himself to that 
order. The men should be allowed to rest for a few moments, fre- 
quently, in the earlier stages of their instruction, and as often at 
other times as the instructor may think necessary to prevent wea- 
riness, which is the prelude to carelessness. When they are at 
attention, however, he should not allow any looking to the right or 
left; no changing of position, or laughing, or whispering, etc., so 
common among volunteers and militia. Here is the place to make 
the individual soldier, to give him habits of attention, teach him 
subordination, etc. If he does not acquire them in this school, it 
will be too late when he is advanced in the company. 

At the command rest, the soldier is no longer required to pre- 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 83 

serve immobility, or to remain in his place. If tlie instructor 
wishes merely to relieve the attention of the soldier, he commands, 
in place — REST; the soldier is then only required to keep one of 
his feet in place ; if he wishes to move that foot, the other is first 
brought up to its proper position. 

The school of the soldier is divided into three parts, the first com- 
prehending what ought to be taught to recruits without arms ; the 
second, the manual of arms, the loadings and firings ; the third, the 
principles of alignment, the march by the front, the difi"erent steps, 
the march by the flank, the principles of wheeling, and those of 
change of direction. In this school, the company is broken up into 
small squads, the number of men in each squad being proportioned 
to the number of instructors ; the squads for the first and second 
part should be as small as possible, and the men placed in single 
rank ; for instruction in the third part, two or more squads of about 
equal proficiency should be united. 



PART FIRST. 

In this part, the men should be without arms, and about one 
pace apart. 

Position of the Soldier. 

83. Heels on the same line, as near each other as the conforma- 
tion of the men will permit; because, if one were in rear of the 
other, the shoulder on that side would be thrown back. 

The feet turned out equally, and forming with each other some- 
thing less than a right angle ; because, if one foot were turned out 
more than the other, .a shoulder would be deranged, and if both 
feet be too much turned out, it would not be practicable to give the 
body its proper position. 

The knees straight, without stifi'ness ; because, if stifi'ened, con- 
straint and fatigue would be unavoidable. 

The body erect on the hips, inclining a little forward, because it 
gives stability to the position. Soldiers are at first disposed to pro- 
ject the belly and throw back the shoulders when they wish to hold 



84 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

themselves erect, from wliicli result many inconveniences in march- 
ing; it is, therefore, important that the instructor should be par- 
ticular to enforce this rule at the beginning. 

The shoulders square, and falling equally; if the shoulders are 
advanced beyond the line of the breast, and the back arched, (the 
defect called round-shouldered,^ the man cannot align himself, nor 
use his piece with skill. In correcting this defect, the instructor 
will take care that the shoulders are not thrown too much to the 
rear, causing the body to project, and the small of the back to 
curve. 

The arms hanging naturally; elbows near the body; palms of the 
hands turned a little to the front, the little finger behind the seam 
of the pantaloons. These positions are important to the slioulder- 
arms, to prevent the man from occupying more space in ranks than 
is necessary, and to keep the shoulders in proper position. 

The head erect, and square to the front, without constraint ; the 
chin slightly drawn in ; the eyes fixed straight to the front, in order 
to prevent derangement of the shoulders, and striking the ground 
at the distance of about fifteen paces. 

84. The instructor having given the squad the position of the sol- 
dier without arms, will now teach the turning of the head and eyes. 
He will command 

1. Fi/es — Right. 2. Front. 

At the word right, the soldier will turn his head gently, so as to 
bring the inner corner of the left eye in a line with the buttons of 
the coat, the eyes fixed on the line of the eyes of the men in the 
same rank. At the command Front the head will resume the 
direct or habitual position. The instructor will take care that the 
movement of the head does not derange the squareness of the 
shoulders, and that the men do not acquire a habit of throwing 
down the head in dressing. 

The movement of JEjt/es — Left will be executed by inverse means. 

Facings. 

85. Facing to the right and left will be executed in one fime, or 
pause. The instructor commands ; 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 85 

1. Squad, 2. Right (pv left) — ¥ ACE. 

At the word Face, raise the right foot slightly, turn on the left 
heel, to the right (or left), raising the left toe a little, and then 
replace the right heel beside the left, and on the same line. The 
face should always be through a right angle, and should be executed 
by the feet and legs, the body moving around to the right (or left) 
without twisting or constraint. The instructor should labor to keep 
the body steady, and to prevent the formation of the habit of bend- 
ing the knees, or springing. 

86. The full face to the rear is always to the right, and is executed 
in two times, or pauses. The instructor commands : 

1. Squad. 2. About — Face. 

First motion. At the word ahout, the soldier will turn far enough 
on the left heel to bring the left toe directly to the front, at the 
same time carrying his right foot to the rear, the hollow opposite to, 
and full three inches from the left heel, the feet square to each 
other. The back of the right hand is placed a little above the right 
hip, and the body is turned to the right sufficiently to give ease to 
the position. 

Second motion. At the word yjxce, the soldier raises his toes a little, 
turns upon both heels, faces to the rear, keeping his legs straight, 
and draws back the right heel by the side of the left, at the same 
time dropping his right hand by his side. 

Balance Step. 

87. Before commencing the march the soldier should always be 
instructed in the balance step, the object of which is to teach him 
the free movement of his limbs, while he at the same time preserves 
perfect squareness of the shoulders, with the greatest steadiness of 
the body ; no labor should be spared to attain this object, which lies 
at the very foundation of good marching. 

The squad being at attention, the instructor commands : 

Left foot — Forward. 

At this command the soldier will throw his left foot gently for- 
8 



86 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

wards, about twenty-four inclies, balancing his body well on the 
right foot without changing the position of the shoulders, and with- 
out the body losing its erect position. The toe should be turned out 
as in the position of the soldier, the foot about three inches from 
the ground and very nearly parallel to it, the toe being very slightly 
depressed. 

At the command : 

Left foot — Rear. 

The left foot is brought gently back, the ball of the left foot close 
to the right heel, the leg straight, toe raised, and heel depressed. 

As soon as the soldier becomes steady in the new position, the in- 
structor repeats the command, left foot forward ^ then left foot reaVj 
for several times, and then commands : 

Halt^ 

at which the left foot, either advanced or to the rear, is brought to 

the right, as in the position of the soldier. 

The instructor then causes the soldier to balance on the right 

foot, by advancing and retiring the right, as has been directed foi 

the left. 

The Direct Step. 

88. After the soldier is sufficiently instructed in the balance step 
to execute it on either foot without losing his balance, the instructor 
will proceed to instruct him in the mechanism of the direct step. 
For this purpose he will command : 

1. By the numbers, — Forward. 2. One. 

At the command one, the soldier will throw forward the left foot 
as in the position of left foot forward, the instructor then commands : 

Two. 

At this command, the weight of the body is thrown forward, the 
left foot striking the ground without shock, at the distance of twenty- 
eight inches from the right; the body assumes the perpendicular 
position, and the right foot is brought up to the position of right 
foot rear. 



SCHOOL F T H E SOLDIER. 8? 

The right foot is then brought forward at the command one, and 
the step completed at the command two ; thus the squad is made 
to advance step by step. The halt is executed as in the balance step. 

89. When the squad is sufficiently instructed in the mechanism 
of the direct step, the instructor will cause it to take up the march 
in common time ; for this purpose he will command : 

1. Squad forward — Common time. 2. MARCH. 

At the command forward, the soldier will throw the weight of 
his body on the right leg, without bending the left knee. 

At the command march, he will smartly, but without a jerk, carry- 
straight forward the left foot twenty-eight inches from the right, the 
sole near the ground, the leg extended, the toe a little depressed, 
and both it and the knee slightly turned out ; he will at the same 
time throw the weight of the body forward, and plant flat the left 
foot, without shock, precisely at the distance where it finds itself 
from the right when the weight of the body is brought forward, 
the whole of which will now rest on the left foot. The soldier will 
next, in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as directed 
for the left, the heel twenty-eight inches from the heel of the left 
foot, and thus continue the march without crossing the legs, or 
striking one against the other, without turning the shoulders, and 
always preserving the face direct to the front. Common time is 
executed at the rate of ninety steps to the minute. 

When the instructor wishes to arrest the march he commands : 

1. Squad. 2. Halt. 

The command halt should be given just as one foot has come to 
the ground, and the other is raised for making the next step ; the 
soldier instinctively completes the pace with the raised foot, and 
brings the other firmly to its place beside it. By careful attention 
to this rule a large command may be as readily halted at the same 
instant, as a single individual. 

90. The principles of the step in quick time are the same as for 
common time; it is executed, however, at the rate of 110 steps per 
minute. After the soldier is well established in the length and 



88 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

swiftness of the step at common time, lie should be practised in 
quick time, as it is the pace best adapted to marches, the manoeu- 
vres, etc. 

The instructor wishing the squad to march in quick time, com- 
mands • 

1. Squad forward. 2. March. 

Principles of the Double Quick Step. 

91. The length of the double quick step is thirty-three inches, 
and its swiftness is at the rate of 165 steps per minute. This step 
is designed especially for light troops, such as light infantry and 
riflemen, and to them it is indispensable ; its utility has, however, 
been so frequently demonstrated of late years, as to make it proper 
that it should form a part of the instruction of all infantry troops. 

The instructor wishing to teach his squad the principles and 
mechanism of the double quick step, commands : 

1. Double quick step. 2. MARCH. 

At the command double quick step, the soldier will raise his hands 
to a level with his hips, the hands closed, the nails towards the body, 
the elbows to the rear and well drawn in towards the body. 

At the command march, he will raise his left knee as high as 
possible without derangement of the body, keeping his leg from the 
knee down in a vertical position, the toe depressed ; he will then 
replace his foot in its former position. At the command two, he 
will execute with the right leg what has just been prescribed for 
the left, and the alternate movement of the legs at the commands 
one, two, will be continued until the command : 

1. Squad. 2. Halt. 

At the command halt, the soldier will bring the foot which is 
raised by the side of the other, and at the same time dropping his 
hands by his side will resume the position of the soldier without 
arms. 

When the squad has learned to execute the step properly, the 
instructor will repeat the words one, two, in more rapid succession, 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 89 

and will finally drop them^ leaving the files to execute the step in 
their own time. The instructor will see that the step is taken in 
rapid succession, and that none of the files lose the step. 

92. The soldier being sufficiently established in the principles of 
this step, the instructor will command : 

1. Squad, forward. 2. Double quick. 3. MarCH. 

At the command /o7'ward, the soldier will throw the weight of 
his body on the right leg, without bending the left knee. 

At the command double quick, he will place his arms as indicated 
above. 

At the command march, he will carry forward the left foot, and 
plant it, the toe first, at the distance of thirty-three inches from the 
right, the leg slightly bent, and the knee somewhat raised ; he will 
then execute with the right foot what has just been prescribed for 
the left. This alternate movement of the legs will take place by 
throwing the weight of the body on the foot that is planted, and by 
allowing a natural, oscillatory motion to the arms. The feet should 
not be raised too much, a common fault with beginners, and the 
body should incline slightly forward. 

The double quick step may be executed with difi"erent degrees of 
swiftness. Under urgent circumstances, the cadence of this step 
may be increased to 180 per minute. At this rate a distance of 
4000 yards would be passed over in about twenty-five minutes. 

The men should also be exercised in running ; the principles are 
the same as for the double quick step, the only difi"erence consisting 
in a greater degree of swiftness. - 

It is recommended in marching in double quick time, or the run, 
that the men should breathe as much as possible through the nose, 
keeping the mouth closed. 

PART SECOND. 

General Rides. 

93. The instructor will not pass the soldiers to this second pan 
until they are well established in the position of the body, and in 
the manner of marching at the different steps. 



90 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

In the manual of arms eacli command will be executed in one 
time (or pause), but this time will be divided into motions, the 
better to make known the mechanism, and to secure uniformity and 
precision in the movements. 

The rate (or swiftness) of each motion, in the manual of arms, 
is fixed at the ninetieth part of a minute ; but the instructor will, 
at first, look more particularly to the execution of the motions, with- 
out requiring a nice observance of the cadence, to which he will 
bring the men progressively, and after they have become a little 
familiarized with the use of the weapon. 

The motions relative to the cartridge, to the rammer, and to the 
fixing and unfixing of the bayonet, cannot be executed at the rate 
prescribed ; or even with uniform swiftness ; the instructor will, 
however, labor to have these motions executed with promptness and 
regularity. 

The last syllable of the command will decide the brisk execution 
of the first motion of each time (or pause). The commands twoj 
three, and/o?(r, will decide the brisk execution of the other motions. 
As soon as the men comprehend well the positions of the several 
motions of a time, they will be taught to execute the time without 
resting on its motions ; the mechanism of the time must, however, 
be observed, as well to give perfect use to the weapon, as to prevent 
carelessness or slighting of the motions. When the men have ac- 
quired sufficient proficiency to execute the times without resting, 
the instructor must be careful to have the proper cadence observed ; 
great promptness in the execution of the motions is not incom- 
patible with the observance of a pause between them, so that they 
may be executed at the prescribed rate — that is, of ninety to the 
minute. Those instructors who insist most upon the strict observ- 
ance of this rule, are those whose squads execute the manual in the 
best manner. 

Principles of Shouldered Arms. 

94. Each soldier being in the position of the soldier, the instructor 
will cause him to turn up the left hand without bending the wrist, 
the left fore-arm only acting. The instructor will raise the piece 
perpendicularly, and place it as follows : 



SCHOOL or THE SOLDIER. 



91 



(Fig. 27.) The piece in the left hand, the arm very slightly bent, 
the elbow back near the body, the palm of the hand pressing on 
the outer flat of the butt ; the outer edge of the latter on the upper 
joints of the fingers, the heel of the butt between the middle and 
fore-fingers, the thumb on the front screw of the butt plate, the 



Fig. 27. 




Fig. 28 




remaining fingers under the butt, the butt more or less kept back 
according to the conformation of the man, so that the piece, seen 
from the front, shall appear perpendicular, and, also, that the move- 
ment of the thigh, in marching, may not raise it or cause it to 
waver ; the stock, below the tail-band, resting against the hollow of 
the shoulder, just within the joint, the right arm hanging naturally 
as prescribed in the position of the soldier. 

Soldiers on first bearing arms are liable to derange their position, 



92 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

and particularly to distort the shoulders, which, causing the musket 
to lose its point of support, they drop the left hand to prevent the 
musket from falling from the shoulder, which again causes that 
shoulder to droop, a curvature of the side, spreading of the elbows, 
etc. The instructor will be careful to correct all these faults by 
continually rectifying the position ; he will avoid fatiguing the men 
too much in the beginning, but labor to render this position no 
natural and easy by degrees, that they may remain in it a long time 
without fatigue. 

The instructor will also take great care that the musket be not 
carried too high or too low; if too high, the left elbow would 
spread out, the soldier would occupy too much space in ranks, and 
the musket would be unsteady ; if too low, the files would be too 
close, the man would not have the necessary space to handle his 
musket with facility, the left arm would become too much fatigued, 
the shoulder would droop, etc. 

The manual of the musket will be taught in the following order : 
The instructor commands : 

Support — Arms. 

One time and three motions. 

95. First Motion. (Fig. 28.) With the right hand seize the small 
of the stock briskly, four inches below the lock, raising the piece 
a little, but not turning it. 

Second Motion. Take the left hand from the butt; extend the 
left fore-arm upward across the body, and under the hammer, the 
left hand flat on the right breast. 

Third motion. Drop the right arm smartly to its position. 

The squad being at support arms, the instructor commands : 

Carry — Arms. 
One time and three motions. 

96. First motion. Carry quickly the right hand to the small of 
the stock. 

Second motion. Place the left hand under the butt, as in the 
position of shoulder arms. 



^v/ 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 



93 



Third motion. Let fall smartly the right hand to ics position, 
and drop with the left, at the same time, the piece into the position 
of shoulder arms. 

Present — Aems. 

One time and tioo motions. 

97. Fii'st motion. (Fig. 29.) Turn the piece with the left hand, 
tne lock out, and seize the small of the stock at the same time with 
the right hand, the piece perpendicular and detached from the 
shoulder, the left hand remaining under the butt. 



Fig. 29. 




Fig. 30. 




Second motion. Complete the turning inwards of the piece, so 
as to bring it erect before the centre of the body, the rammer to 
the front, the right hand under and against the guard; seize it 
smartly at the same time with the left hand just above the lock, the 



94 MANUAL POR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

tliumb extended along the barrel and on the stock, the left fore-arm 
resting on the body without constraint, and the hand at the height 
of the elbow. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One time and two 'motio7is. 

98. First motion. Turn the piece with the right hand, the barrel 
to the front, raise and support it against the left shoulder with the 
right hand, drop the left under the butt, the right hand resting du, 
without grasping, the small of the stock. 

Second motion. Drop quickly the right hand into its position. 

Order — Arms. 
One time and two motions. 

99. First motion. Drop the piece smartly by extending the left 
arm, seize it at the same time with the right hand, above and near 
the tail-band ; quit the hold of the left hand, and carry the piece 
opposite to the right shoulder, the rammer to the front, the little 
finger behind the barrel, the right hand supported against the hip, 
the butt three inches from the ground, the piece erect, the left hand 
hanging by the side. 

Second motion. Let the piece slip through the right hand to 
the ground without shock, and take the position about to be 
described. 

Position of Order Arms. 

100. (Fig. 30.) The hand low, the barrel between the thumb 
and forefinger extended along the stock ; the other fingers extended 
and joined; the muzzle about two inches from the right shoulder; 
the rammer in front; the toe of the butt against, and in a line with, 
the toe of the right foot, the barrel perpendicular. 

101. When the instructor wishes to give repose in this position, 

he commands : 

Rest. 

At this command the soldiers will not be required to preserve 
silence or steadiness. They, however, will not quit their rank with- 
out special permission. 



SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER. 05 

102. When the instructor wishes the men to pass from this posi- 
tion to that of silence and steadiness, he commands: 

1. Attention. 2. Squad. 

At the second word, the men will reserve the position of orde?' 
arms, and remain firm and silent. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One time and two motions. 

103. First motion. Raise smartly the piece with the right hand, 
carry it against the left shoulder, turning it, so as to bring the barrel 
to the front; at the same time place the left hand under the butt. 
and slip the right hand down to the lock. 

Second motion. Let the right hand fall briskly to its position. 

Charge — Bayonet. 
One time and two motions. 

104. First motion. Make a half face to the right on the left 
heel, bring the left toe directly to the front, at the same time place 
the right foot behind, and at right angles with the left, the hollow of 
the right foot opposite to, and about three inches from the left heel ; 
turn the piece with the left hand, the lock outwards, and seize the 
small of the stock at the same time with the right hand, the musket 
perpendicular, and detached from the shoulder, the left hand under 
the butt. 

Second motion. Bring down the piece with the right hand, let- 
ting it fall firmly into the left, the latter seizing it a little in advance 
of the tail band, the barrel up, the left elbow near the body, the 
right hand against the hip, the point of the bayonet as high as the 
eye. (Fig. 31.) 

Shoxdder — Arms. 

One tim^e and two motions. 

105. First motion. Face to the front by turning on the left 
heel, bring up the right by the side of the left heel ; at the same 
time bring up the piece with the right hand to the left shoulder, 
and place the left hand under the butt. 

Second motion. Let the right hand fall promptly into its position 



96 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Load in ten times. 

1. Load. 

One time and two motions. 

106. First motion. Drop the piece by a smart extension of the left 
arm, seize it with the right hand above and near the lower band ; 
at the same time carry the right foot forward, the heel against the 
hollow of the left foot. 

Second motion. Drop the piece with the right hand along the left 
thigh, seize it with the left hand above the right, and with the left 
hand let it descend to the ground, without shock, the piece touch- 
ing the left thigh, and the muzzle opposite the centre of the body ; 
carry the right hand quickly to the cartridge-box and open it. 
(Fig. 32.) 

2. Handle — Cartridge. 

One time and one motion. 

107. Seize a cartridge with the thumb and the next two fingers, 
and place it between the teeth. 

3. Tear — Cartridge. 

One time and one motion. 

108. Tear the paper down to the powder, hold the cartridge up- 
right between the thumb and two next fingers, near the top; in 
this position place it in front of and near the muzzle, the back of 
the hand to the front. 

4. Charge — Cartridge. 

109. Fix the eye on the muzzle, turn quickly the back of right 
hand towards the body, in order to discharge the powder into the 
barrel, raise the elbow to the height of the wrist, shake the car- 
tridge, force it into the muzzle, and leave the hand reversed, the 
fingers closed, but not clenched. (Fig. 33.) 

5. Draw — Rammer. 
One time and three motions, 

110. First motion. Drop the right elbow smartly, and seize the 
rammer between the thumb and fore-finger bent, the other fingers 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 



97 



Fl<j. 31. 




Fig. 32. 




Ficj. 33. 




98 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

shut; draw it smartly, extending the arm, seize the rammer again 
at the middle between the thumb and fore-finger, the hand reversed, 
the palm to the front, the nails up, the eyes following the movement 
of the hand, clear the rammer from the pipes by again extending 
the arm. 

Second motion. Turn rapidly the rammer between the bayonet 
and the face, closing the fingers, the rammers of the rear rank graz- 
ing the right shoulders of the men of the same file in front, the 
rammer parallel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the butt of the 
rammer opposite to the muzzle but not yet inserted, the eyes fixed 
on the muzzle. 

Third motion. Insert the butt of the rammer, and force it down 
as low as the hand. 

6. Ram — Cartridge. 

One time and one motion. 

111. Extend the arm to its full length to seize the rammer be- 
tween the right thumb extended and the fore-finger bent, the other 
fingers closed ) with force ram home twice and seize the rammer at 
the small end between the thumb and fore-finger bent, the other 
fingers closed, the right elbow touching the body. 

7. Return — Rammer. 
One time and three motions. 

112. First motion. Draw the rammer briskly, re-seize it at the 
middle between the thumb and fore-finger, the hand reversed, the 
palm to the front, the nails up, the eyes following the hand, clear 
the rammer from the barrel by extending the arm. 

Second motion. Turn the rammer rapidly between the bayonet 
and the face, closing the fingers, the rammers of the rear rank graz- 
ins: the right shoulders of the men in the same file in front, the 
rammer parallel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the little end of 
the rammer opposite to the first pipe, but not yet inserted, the eyes 
fixed on that pipe. 

Third motion. Insert the small end, and with the thumb. M-hich 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. \)\) 

will follow the movement, force it as low as the middle band; raise 
the hand quickly, a little bent, place the little finger on the butt 
of the rammer, and force it down ; lower the left hand on the barrel 
to the extent of the arm without depressing the shoulder. 

8. Cast — About. 
One time and two motions. 

113. First motion. With the left hand bring up the piece verti- 
cally against the left shoulder, seize it smartly with the right hand 
at the small of the stock, and slide the left hand down as low as 
the chin. 

Second motion. Make a half face to the right on the left heel, 
bring the left toe to the front, place the right foot at the same time 
close behind, and at right angles with the left, the hollow of the 
right foot against the left heel ; carry the piece opposite to the right 
shoulder ; bring down the piece with the right hand into the left, 
which will seize it at the tail band, the thumb extended on the 
stock, the butt under the right fore-arm,the small of the stock against 
the body, and about two inches under the right breast, the muzzle 
at the height of the eye, the left elbow supported against the side, 
the right hand grasping the small of the stock. (Fig. 34.) 

9. Prime. 
One time and one motion. 

114. Place the thumb of the right hand on the hammer (the 
fingers remaining under and against the guard), and half-cock the 
piece; brush ofi" the old cap, and with the thumb and first two 
fingers of the right hand take a cap from the pouch, place it firmly 
on the cone by pushing it down with the thumb, and seize the piece 
by the small of the stock. 

10. Shoulder — Arms. 

One time and two motions. 

115. First motion. Face to the front by turning on the left heel ', 
at the same time bring the piece briskly with the right hand to the 
left shoulder, and place the left hand under the butt. 



100 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Second motion. Let tlie right hand fall smartly into its position 
at slwulder arms. 

Ready. (From the position of prime.') 
One time and one motion. 

116. Place the thumb of the right hand on the hammer (the 
fingers remaining under and against the guard), cock the piece, and 
seize the small of the stock. 

Ready. (From the position of shoulder arms.) 

One time and /our motions. 

117. First motion. Turn the piece with the left hand, the lock 
to the front, seize it at the small of the stock with the right hand ; 
at the same time make a half face to the right on the left heel, 
bringing the left toe to the front, and placing the right foot behind, 




SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 



101 



and at right angles to the left, the hollow of the foot against the 
left heel. 

Second motion. Bring the piece with the right hand to the middle 
of the body, place the left hand just above the lock, the thumb ex- 
tended along the stock at the height of the chin, the counter (or Sj- 
plate turned towards the body, the rammer obliquely to the left and 
front. 

Third motion. Place the thumb on the hammer, the fore-finger 
under and on the guard, the other three fingers joined to the first, 
the elbow at the height of the hand. 

Fourth motion. Close the right elbow smartly to the body in 
cocking, without bending the wrist, seize the piece by the small of 
the stock, let it descend along the body in the left hand to the tail- 
band, which will remain at the height of the shoulder. (Fig. 35.) 

Aim. 
One time and one motion. 

118. Raise the butt to the shoulder, the left elbow a little down, 
shut the left eye, direct the right along the barrel, drop the head 



Fig. 36. 




9* 



102 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

upon tlie butt to catcli tlie object, and place the fore-finger on the 
trigger. The rear rank will at the same time, carry the right foot 
about eight inches towards the left heel of the man next on his 
right. (Fig. 36.) 

Fire. 

One time and one motion. 

119. Apply the fore-finger with force to the trigger without further 
lowering or turning the head^ and remain in that position. 

Load. (From the Fire.^ 
One time and two motions. 

120. First motion. Bring back the piece quickly with both 
hands, depress the butt strongly by extending the right arm, and 
carry it with the arm thus extended to the left side, the barrel to 
the front and opposite to the left shoulder, the left hand at the 
height of the chin, the back of the hand to the front, the left fore- 
arm touching the stock ; at the same time face to the front and carry 
the right foot forward, the heel against the hollow of the left foot. 

Second motion. Let go the handle with the right hand, let the 
piece descend through the left to the ground, without shock, and 
take the position of the second motion of load. 

Shoulder — Arms. (From the Fire.) 
One time and tivo motions. 

121. First motion. Bring back the piece with both hands, face 
to the front, carry the piece against the left shoulder, and place the 
left hand under the butt. 

Second motion. Let the right hand fall smartly to its position. 
The squad being in the position of aim, the instructor, to habituate 
the soldiers to wait for the word fire, sometimes commands ; 

Recover — Arms. 
One time and one motion. 

122. Withdraw the finger from the trigger, throw up the muzzle 
smartly, and retake the position of the fourth motion of ready. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 103 

The men being in this position, if the instructor wishes them to 
come to a shoulder, he commands : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

123. At the word sJioulder, the squad will face to the front, and 
bring their pieces to the middle of the body again ; the left thumb 
at the height of the chin, the little finger just above the lock ; next 
place the right thumb on the head of the hammer, support the fore- 
finger on the trigger, sustain the hammer carefully in its descent at 
the same time, to the position of half-cock, then seize the small of 
the stock with the right hand. At the word arms, carry the piece 
to the shoulder smartly, and take the position of shoulder arms. 

To load in four times (or pauses'). 

124. The instructor commands : 

1. Load in four TiM'ES. 2. Load. 

Execute the first time of loading, handle cartridge, tear cartridge, 
charge cartridge. 

Two. 

125. Draw rammer, enter it as far as the hand, and ram twice. 

Three. 

126. Return rammer, cast about, and prime. 

Four. 

127. Execute the tenth time of loading. 

128. The soldiers being at a shoulder, when the instructor may 
wish to return bayonets, he commands : 

Unfix — Bayonets. 

One time and three motions. 

First motion. Drop the piece by a smart extension of the left 
arm, seize it with the right hand above and near the tail-band. 
Second motion. Drop the piece with the right hand along the 



104 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

left thigh^ seize it with the left hand above the right, lengthen out 
the left arm, rest the butt on the ground, without shock, and carry 
the right hand at the same time to the bayonet, with the thumb 
lower the clasp against the stop, and then seize the bayonet at the 
socket and shank. 

Third motion. Wrest off the bayonet, return it to the scabbard, 
place the little finger on the butt of the rammer, lower the left hand 
along the barrel in extending the arm, without depressing the 
shoulder. 

Should er — Arms. 

One time and three motions. 

129. First motion. Raise the piece with the left hand along the 
left side, the hand at the height of the chin, the fore-arm touching 
the piece, the barrel to the front 3 drop at the same time the right 
hand to seize the piece a little above the handle, the fore-finger 
touching the cock, and the thumb on the counter-plate. 

Second motion. Raise the piece with the right hand, drop the 
left, and place it under the butt, bring back the right heel to the 
side of the left, and on the same line ; support the piece with the 
right hand against the shoulder, in the position prescribed for 
shoulder arms, the right hand resting on, without grasping, the 
piece. 

Third motion. Let fall smartly the right hand into its position 
by the side of the thigh. 

Fix — Bayonet. 

130. First and second motions. As the first and second motions 
of unfix hayonet, except that at the end of the second motion, the 
right hand will go to seize the bayonet by the socket and shank, so 
that the lower (now upper) end of the socket shall extend about an 
inch above the heel of the palm. 

Third motion. Draw the bayonet from the scabbard, carry and 
fix it on the muzzle, turning the clasp towards the body with the 
right thumb ; place the little finger on the head of the rammer, 
lower the left hand along the barrel, in extending the arm. 



SCHOOL or THE SOLDIER. 105 

Shoulder — Arms. 
The same as from the unfix bayonet. 

Secure — Arms. ^ 

One time and two motions. 

131. First motion. Seize quickly the piece with the right hand, the 
thumb on the counter-plate, and the fore-finger against the cock; 
detach the piece from the shoulder at the same instant, the barrel 
to the front, seize it at the tail-band with the left hand, the thumb 
extended on the rammer, the piece erect, opposite to the shoulder, 
the left elbow on the piece. 

Second motion. Reverse the piece, pass it under the left arm, 
the left hand remaining at the tail-band, the thumb on the rammer 
to prevent it from sliding out, the little finger resting against the 
hip, and the right hand falling at the same time into its position. 
(Fig. 37.) 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One time and two motions. 

132. First motion. Raise the piece with the left hand, but not 
too suddenly, lest the rammer should fly out ; seize the handle with 
the right hand to support it against the shoulder, quit the hold of 
the left hand, and place quickly this hand under the butt. 

Second motion. Let fall smartly the right hand into its position ) 
drop at the same time the piece into the position of shouldered arms. 

Trail — Arms. 
One time and two motions. 

133. First motion. As the first motion of order arms. 
Second motion. Incline a little the muzzle to the front, the butt 

to the rear, and about three inches from the ground, the right hand, 
supported at the hip, will sustain the piece so that the men of the 
rear rank may not touch with their bayonets the men in front of 
them. (Fig. 38.) 



106 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

134. At the command shoulder, raise the piece perpendicularly 
in the right hand ) at the command arms, execute what has been 
prescribed for the shoulder from the position of order arms. 

To right shoulder, shift — Arms. 

One time and one motion. 

135. Turn the piece with the left hand, the lock to the front, 
seize it at the same time with the right hand at the handle, place 
it on the right shoulder, the left hand not quitting the butt, the 
lock-plate upwards, the muzzle up ; sustain the piece in this position 
by placing the right hand on the flat of the butt ; let fall the left 
hand by the side. (Fig. 39.) 

Shoulder — Arms. 

136. Raise the piece by extending the right arm, seize it with 
the left hand above the lock, carry it against the left shoulder, 
turning the barrel to the front, the right hand being at the handle, 
place the left hand under the butt, and let the right fall into its 
position. 

Arms — At will. 

One time and one motion. 

137. Carry the piece at pleasure on either shoulder, or with one 
or both hands, the muzzle always up. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

138. Retake smartly the position of shoulder arms. 

Inspection of Arms. 

139. The squad being at ordered arms, and having the bayonet 
in the scabbard, if the instructor wishes to cause an inspection of 
arms, he will command : 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 

F!g. 37. Fig. 38. 



107 






108 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Inspection of — Arms. 
One time and three motions. 

First motion. Face to the right once and a half on the left heel, 
carrying the right foot perpendicularly to the rear of the alignment, 
about six inches from, and at right angles with, the left foot; seize 
promptly the piece with the left hand a little above the middle 
band, incline the muzzle to the rear without displacing the heel of 
the butt, the rammer turned towards the body; carry at the same 
time the right hand to the bayonet and seize it as has been pre- 
scribed, No. 130. 

Second motion. Draw the bayonet from the scabbard, carry and 
fix it on the muzzle ; seize next the rammer, draw it as has been 
explained in loading it twelve times, and let it glide to the bottom 
of the bore. 

Third motion. Face promptly to the front, seize the piece with 
the right hand, and retake the position of ordered arms. 

The instructor will tlisn inspect in succession the piece of each 
man, ,in passing along the front of the rank. Each, as the in- 
structor reaches him, will raise smartly his piece with his right hand, 
seize it with the left between the tail-band and the feather-spring, 
the lock to the front, the left hand at the height of the chin, the 
piece opposite to the left eye (Fig. 40) ; the instructor will take it 
with the right hand at the handle, and, after inspecting it, will 
return it to the soldier, who will receive it back with the right hand, 
and replace it in the position of ordered arms. 

When the instructor shall have passed him, each soldier will 
retake the position prescribed at the command inspection of armsj 
and return the rammer; after which he will face to the front. 

140. If, instead of inspection of arms, it be the wish of the in- 
structor only to cause bayonets to be fixed, he will command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

Take the position indicated. No. 139, (first motion), fix bayonets 
as has been explained, and immediately face to the front. 

Bayonets fixed, if it be the wish of the instructor, after firing, to 
ascertain whether the pieces have been discharged, he will command : 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 109 

Spring — Rammers. 

Put the rammer in the barrel, as has been explained above, and 
immediately face to the front. 

The instructor, for the purpose stated, can take the rammer by 
the small end, and spring it in the barrel, or cause each man to 
make the rammer ring in the barrel. 

Each man, after the instructor passes him, will return rammer, 

and face to the front. 

Arms — Port. 

One time and one motion. 

141. Throw the piece diagonally across the body, the lock to the 
front, seize it smartly at the same instant with both hands, the right 



Fig. 41. 




Fig. 42. 




at the handle, the left at tixc tail-band, the two thumbs pointing 
towards the muzzle, the barrel sloping upwards and crossing opposite 
10 



110 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

to the point of the left shoulder, the butt proportionally lowered. 
The palm of the right hand will be above, and that of the left under 
the piece, the nails of both hands next to the body, to which the 
elbows will be closed. (Fig. 41.) 

Slioulder — Arms. 

One time and two motions. 

First motion. Bring the piece smartly to the left shoulder, 
placing the left hand under the butt. 

Second motion. Drop the right hand smartly by the side. 

MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THE RIFLE. 
Principles of Shouldered Arms. 

142. The soldier standing in the position of the soldier, the in- 
structor causes him to bend the right arm slightly, and places the 
piece in it, in the following manner : (Fig. 42.) The piece in the 
right hand — the barrel nearly vertical and resting in the hollow of 
the shoulder — the guard to the front, the arm hanging nearly at 
its full length near the body ; the thumb and fore-finger embracing 
the guard, the remaining fingers closed together, and grasping the 
swell of the stock just under the cock, which rests on the little 
finger. 

Support — Arms. 

One time and three motions. 

143. First motion. Bring the piece, with the right hand, per- 
pendicularly to the front and between the eyes, the barrel to the 
rear ; seize the piece with the left hand at the lower band, raise this 
hand as high as the chin, and seize the piece at the same time with 
the right hand four inches below the cock. 

Second motion. Turn the piece with the right hand, the barrel 
to the front ; carry the piece to the left shoulder, and pass the fore- 
arm extended on the breast between the right hand and the cock ; 
support the cock against the left fore-arm, the left hand resting on 
the right breast. 

Third motion. Drop the right hand by the side. 



SCHOOL or THE SOLDIER. Ill 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One time and three motions. 

144. First motion. Grasp the piece with the right hand under 
and against the left fore-arm ; seize it with the left hand at the lower 
band, the thumb extended; detach the piece slightly from the 
shoulder, the left fore-arm along the stock. 

Second motion. Carry the piece vertically to the right shoulder 
with both hands, the rammer to the front, change the position of 
the right hand so as to embrace the guard with the thumb and fore- 
finger, slip the left hand to the height of the shoulder, the fingers 
extended and joined, the right arm nearly straight. 

Third motion. Drop the left hand quickly by the side. 

Present — Arms. 
One time and two motions. 

145. First motion. With the right hand bring the piece erect 
before the centre of the body, the rammer to the front; at the same 
time seize the piece with the left hand half-way between the guide 
sight and lower band, the thumb extended along the barrel and 
against, the stock, the fore-arm horizontal and resting against the 
body, the hand as high as the elbow. 

Second motion. Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand 
below and against the guard. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One time and two motions. 

146. First motion. Bring the piece to the right shoulder, at the 
same time change the position of the right hand so as to embrace 
the guard with the thumb and fore-finger, slip up the left hand to 
the height of the shoulder, the fingers extended and joined, the 
right arm nearly straight. 

Second motion. Drop the left hand quickly by the side. 
Order — Arms. 
One time and two motions. 

147. First motion. Seize the piece briskly with the left hand 
near the upper band, and detach it slightly from the shoulder with 



112 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the riglit. hand : loosen the grasp of the right hand, lower the piece 
with the left, re-seize the piece with the right hand above the lower 
band, the little finger in rear of the barrel, the butt about four 
inches from the ground, the right hand supported against the hip, 
drop the left hand by the side. 

Second motion. Let the piece slip through the right hand to the 
ground by opening slightly the fingers, and take the position about 
to be described. 

Position of order- arms. 

148. The hand low, the barrel between the thumb and fore-finger 
extended along the stock; the other fingers extended and joined; 
the muzzle about two inches from the right shoulder ; the rammer 
in front ; the toe (or beak) of the butt, against, and in a line with, 
the toe of the right foot, the barrel perpendicular. 

Shoidder — Arms. 
One time and two motions. 

149. First motion. Kaise the piece vertically with the right 
hand to the height of the right breast, and opposite the shoulder, 
the elbow close to the body ; seize the piece with the left hand below 
the right, and drop quickly the right hand to grasp the piece at the 
swell of the stock, the thumb and fore-finger embracing the guard; 
press the piece against the shoulder with the left hand, the right 
arm nearly straight. 

Second motion. Drop the left hand quickly by the side. 

Load in 7iine times. 

1. LOAD.^ 

One time and 07ie motion. 

150. Grasp the piece with the left hand as high as the right 
elbow, and bring it vertically opposite the middle of the body, shift 

I Whenever the loadings and firings are to be executed, the instructor mh 
cause the cartridge boxes to be brought to the front. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 113 

the rici-ht hand to the upper band, place the butt between the feet, 
the barrel to the front ; seize it with the left hand near the muzzle, 
which should be three inches from the j^. .^ 
body ; carry the right hand to the cart- ^3- ^ • 
ridge box. (Fig. 43.) 

2. Handle — Cartridge. 

07ie time and one motion. 

151. Seize the cartridge with the thumb 
and next two fingers, and place it between 
the teeth. 

3. Tear — Cartridge. 

One time and one motion. 

. 152. Tear the paper to the powder, 
hold the cartridge upright between the 
thumb and first two fingers, near the top ; 
in this position place it in front of and 
near the muzzle — the back of the liand 
to the front. 

4. Charge — Cartridge. 

One time and one motion. 

153. Empty the powder into the barrel; disengage the ball from 
the paper with the right hand and the thumb and first two fingers " 
of the left; insert it into the bore, the pointed end uppermost, and 
press it down with the right thumb ; seize the head of the rammer 
with the thumb and fore-finger of the right hand, the other fingers 
closed, the elbows near the body. 

5. Draw — Eammer. 

One time and, three motions. 

154. First motion. Half draw the rammer by extending the right 
arm; steady it in this position with the left thumb; grasp the rammer 
near the muzzle with the right hand, the little finger uppermost, 
the nails to the front, the thumb extended along the rammer. 

10* • H 




114 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Second motion. Clear the rammer from the pipes by again ex- 
tending the arm ; the rammer in the prolongation of the pipes. 

Third motion. Turn the rammer, the little end of the rammer 
passing near the left shoulder; place the head of the rammer on 
the ball, the back of the hand to the front. 

6. Ram — Cartridge. 

One time and one motion. 

155. Insert the rammer as far as the right, and steady it in this 
position with the thumb of the left hand ; seize the rammer at the 
small end with the thumb and fore-finger of the right hand, the 
back of the hand to the front ; press the ball home, the elbows 
near the body. 

7. Return — Rammer. 

One time and three motions. 

156. First motion. Draw the rammer half-way out, and steady it in 
this position with the left thumb; grasp it near the muzzle with the 
right hand, the little finger uppermost, the nails to the front, the 
thumb along the rammer ; clear the rammer from the bore by ex- 
tending the arm, the nails to the front, the rammer in the prolon- 
gation of the bore. 

Second motion. Turn the rammer, the head of the rammer pass- 
ing near the left shoulder, and insert it in the pipes until the right 
hand reaches the muzzle, the nails to the front. 

Third motion. Force the rammer home by placing the little 
finger of the right hand on the head of the rammer ; pass the left 
hand down the barrel to the extent of the arm, without depressing 
the shoulder. 

8. Prime. 

O^ie time and two motions. 

157. First motion. With the left hand raise the piece till the hand 
is as high as the eye, grasp the small of the stock with the right hand ; 
half face to the right; place, at the same time, the right foot behind 
and at right angles with the left ; the hollow of the right foot against 
the left heel. Slip the left hand down to the lower band, the thumb 



SCHOOL OP THE SOLDIER. 115 

along the stock, the left elbow against the body ; bring the piece to 
the right side, the butt below the right fore-arm — the small of the 
stock against the body and two inches below the right breast, the 
barrel upwards, the muzzle on a level with the eye. 

Second motion. Half cock with the thumb of the right hand, 
the fingers supported against the guard and the small of the stock 
— remove the old cap with one of the fingers of the right hand, and 
with the thumb and fore-finger of the same hand take a cap from 
the pouch, place it on the nipple, and press it down with the thumb ) 
seize the small of the stock with the right hand. 

9. Shoulder — Arms. 
One time and two motions. 

158. First motion. Bring the piece to the right shoulder, and 
support it there with the left hand, face to the front; bring the 
right heel to the side of and on a line Virith the left ; grasp the piece 
with the right hand as indicated in the position of shoulder arms. 

Second motion. Drop the left hand quickly by the side. 

Ready. 

One time and three motions. 

159. First motion. Raise the piece slightly with the right hand, 
making a half face to the right on the left heel ] carry the right 
foot to the rear, and place it at right angles to the left, the hollow 
of it opposite to, and against the left heel ; grasp the piece with the 
left hand at the lower band and detach it slightly from the shoulder. 

Second motion. Bring down the piece with both hands, the barrel 
upwards, the left thumb extended along the stock, the butt below 
the right fore-arm, the small of the stock against the body and two 
inches below the right breast, the muzzle as high as the eye, the 
left elbow against the side ] place at the same time the right thumb 
on the head of the cock, the other fingers under and against the 
guard. 

Third motion. Cock, and seize the piece at the small of the stock 
without deranging the position of the butt. 



116 manual for volunteers and militia. 

Aim. 

160. As in tlie manual for the musket. 

Fire. 

161. As in tlie manual for the musket. 

Load. 
One time and one motion. 

162. Bring down the piece with both hands, at the same time 
face to the front and take the position of load. Each rear rank 
man will bright his right foot by the side of the left. 

The men being in this position, the instructor will cause the load- 
ing to be continued by the commands and means prescribed No. 151 
and following. 

If, after firing, the instructor should not wish the recruits to re- 
load, he will command : 

Slioulder — Arms. 

One time and one motion. 

163. Throw up the piece briskly with the left hand and resume 

the position of slioulder arms, at the same time face to the front, 

turning on the left heel, and bring the right heel on a line with the 

left. 

Recover — Arms. 

164. The same as in the manual for the musket. 

165. The soldiers being in the position of the third motion of 

ready, if the instructor should wish to bring them to a shoulder, he 

will command : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One time and one motion. 

At the command shoidder, place the thumb upon the cock, the 
fore-fing3r on the trigger, half-cock, and seize the small of the stock 
with the right hand. At the command arm.s, bring up the piece 
briskly to the right shoulder, and retake the position of shoulder arms. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 117 

The recruits being at slioiilder arms^ when the instructor shall 
wish to fix bayonets, he will command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

One time and three motions. 

166. First motion. Grasp the piece with the left hand at the 
height of the shoulder, and detach it slightly from the shoulder 
with the right hand. 

Second motion. Quit the piece with the right hand, lower it with 
the left hand, opposite the middle of the body, and place the butt 
between the feet without shock; the rammer to the rear, the barrel 
vertical, the muzzle three inches from the body; seize it with the 
right hand at the upper band, and carry the left hand reversed to 
the handle of the sabre-bayonet. 

Third motion. Draw the sabre-bayonet from the scabbard and 
fix it on the extremity of the barrel ; seize the piece with the left 
hand, the arm extended, the right hand at the upper band. 

Shoidder — Arms. 

One time and two motions. 

167. First motion. Raise the piece with the left hand and place 
it against the right shoulder, the rammer to the front; seize the 
piece at the same time with the right hand at the swell of the stock, 
the thumb and fore-finger embracing the guard, the right arm nearly 
extended. 

Second motion. Drop briskly the left hand by the side. 

Charge — Bayonet. 
One time and two motions. 

168. First motion. Raise the piece slightly with the right hand 
and make a half face to the right on the left heel ; place the hollow 
of the right foot opposite to, and three inches from the left heel, the 
feet square ; seize the piece at the same time with the left hand a 
little above the lower band. 

Second motion. Bring down the piece with both hands, the 



118 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

barrel uppermost, the left elbow against the body ; seize the small 
of the stock, at the same time, with the right hand, which will be 
supported against the hip ; the point of the sabre-bayonet as high 
as the eye. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One time and two motions. 

169. First motion. Throw up the piece briskly with the left 
hand in facing to the front, place it against the right shoulder, the 
rammer to the front; turn the right hand so as embrace the guard, 
slide the left hand to the height of the shoulder, the right hand 
nearly extended. 

Second motion. Drop the left hand smartly by the side. 

Trail — Arms. 
One time and two motions. 

170. First motion. The same as the first motion of order arms. 
Second motion. Incline the muzzle slightly to the front, the butt 

to the rear and about four inches from the ground. The right hand 
supported at the hip, will so hold the piece that the rear rank men 
may not touch with their bayonets the men in the front rank. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

171. At the command shoulder, raise the piece perpendicularly 
in the right hand, the little finger in rear of the barrel ; at the com- 
mand arms, execute what has been prescribed for the shoulder from 
the position of order arms. 

Unfix — Bayonet. 
One time and three motions. 

172. First and second motions. The same as the first and second 
motions of fix hayonet, except that, at the end of the second com- 
mand, the thumb of the right hand will be placed on the spring of 
the sabre-bayonet, and the left hand will embrace the handle of the 
sabre-bayonet and the barrel, the thumb extended along the blade. 

Third motion. Press the thumb of the right hand on the spring, 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 119 

wrest -'off the sabre-bayonet, turn it to tbe right, the edge to the 
front, lower the guard until it touches the right hand, which will 
seize the back and the edge of the blade between the thumb and 
first two fingers, the other fingers holding the piece; change the 
position of the hand without quitting the handle, return the sabre- 
bayonet to the scabbard, and seize the piece with the left hand, the 
arm extended. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One time and two motions. 

173. First motion. The same as the first motion from^^ bayonet, 
No. 167. 

Second motion. The same as the second motion from /^a- bayonet. 

Secure — Arms. 
One time and three motions. 

174. First motion. The same as the first motion of support arms, 
except with the right hand seize the piece at the small of the stock. 

Second motion. Turn the piece with both hands, the barrel to 
the front ] bring it opposite the left shoulder, the butt against the 
hip, the left hand at the lower band, the thumb as high as the chiu 
and extended on the rammer ; the piece erect and detached from 
the shoulder, the left fore-arm against the piece. 

Third motion. Reverse the piece, pass it under the left arm, the 
left hand remaining at the lower band, the thumb on the rammer to 
prevent it from sliding out, the little finger resting against the hip, 
the right hand falling at the same time by the side, 

SJioulder — Arms. 
One time and three motions. 

175. First motion. Raise the piece with the left hand, and seize 
it with the right hand at the small of the stock. The piece erect 
and detached from the shoulder, the butt against the hip, the left 
fore-arm along the piece. 

Second motion. The same as the second motion of shoidder arms 
from a support. 



120 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

TJiird motion. The same as tlie third motion of slwuldef arms 
from a support. 

Right shoulder shift — Arms. 

One time and two motions. 

176. First motion. Detach the piece perpendicularly from the 
shoulder with the right hand, and seize it with the left between the 
lower band and guide-sight, raise the piece, the left hand at the 
height of the shoulder and four inches from it; place, at the same 
time, the right hand on the butt, the beak between the first two fin- 
gers, the other two fingers under the butt plate. 

Second motion. Quit the piece with the left hand, raise and 
place the piece on the right shoulder with the right hand, the lock 
plate upwards ; let fall, at the same time, the left hand by the side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One time and two motions. 

177. First motion. Kaise the piece perpendicularly by extending 
the right arm to its full length, the rammer to the front, at the same 
time seize the piece with the left hand between the lower band and 
guide-sight. 

Second motion. Quit the butt with the right hand, which will 
immediately embrace the guard, lower the piece to the position of 
shoulder arms, slide up the left hand to the height of the shoulder, 
the fingers extended and closed. Drop the left hand by the side. 

The men being at support arms, the instructor will sometimes 
cause pieces to be brought to the right shoulder. To this eff"ect, he 
will command : 

Right shoulder shift — Arms. 

One time and two motions. 

178. First motion. Seize the piece with the right hand, below 
and near the left fore-arm, place the left hand under the butt, the 
heel of the butt between the first two fingers. 

Second motion. Turn the piece with the left hand, the lock plate 
upwards, carry it to the right shoulder, the left hand still holding 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 121 

the butt, the muzzle elevated; hold the piece in this position and 
place the right hand upon the butt^ and let fall the left hand by the 
side. 

Support — Arms. 

One time and two motions. 

] 79. First motion. The same as the first motion of shoulder arms. 

Second motion. Turn the piece with both hands^ the barrel to 

the front, carry it opposite the left shoulder, slip the right hand to 

the small of the stock, place the left fore-arm extended on the breast, 

and let fall the right hand by the side. 

Arms — At will. 

One time and one motion. 

180. At this command, carry the piece at pleasure on either 
shoulder, with one or both hands, the muzzle elevated. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One time and one motion. 

181. At this command, retake quickly the position of shoulder 

arms. 

Inspection ef arms. 

182. The soldiers being at ordered arms, and having the sabre- 
bayonet in the scabbard, if the instructor wishes to cause an in- 
spection of arms, he will command : 

Inspection — Arms. 

One time and tioo motions. 

183. First motion. Seize the piece with the left hand below and 
near the upper band, carry it with both hands opposite the middle 
of the body, the butt between the feet, the rammer to the rear, the 
barrel vertical, the muzzle about three inches from the body ; carry 
the left hand reversed to the sabre-bayonet, draw it from the scab- 
bard and fix it on the barrel; grasp the piece with the left hand 
below and near the upper band, seize the rammer with the thumb 
and fore-finger of the right hand bent, the other fingers closed. 

11 



122 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Second motion. Draw the rammer as lias been explained in load- 
ing, and let it glide to the bottom of the bore, replace the piece with 
the left hand opposite the right shoulder, and retake the position of 
ordered arms. 

The instructor, will then inspect in succession the piece of each 
man, in passing along the front of the rank. Each, as the in- 
structor reaches him, will raise smartly his piece with his right hand, 
seize it with the left between the lower band and guide sight, the 
lock to the front, the left hand at the height of the chin, the piece 
opposite to the left eye ; the instructor will take it with the right 
hand at the handle, and, after inspecting it, will return it to the 
man, who will receive it back with the right hand, and replace it 
in the position of ordered arms. 

When the instructor shall have passed him, each soldier will re- 
take the position prescribed at the command inspection arms, return 
the rammer, and resume the position of ordered arms. 

If, instead of inspection of arms, the instructor shculd merely 
wish to cause bayonets to be fixed, he will command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

184. Take the position indicated No. 183, fix bayonets as has 
been explained, and immediately resume the position of ordered 
arms. 

If it be the wish of the instructor, after firing, to ascertain 
whether the pieces have been discharged, he will command : 

Spring — RAMMERS. 

This is done as in the manual for the musket. 

To load in four times. 

185. The first time will be executed at the end of the command ; 
the three others at the commands, two, three, and four. 

The instructor will command : 

1. Load in four times. 2. Load. 

186. Execute the times to include charge cartridge. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 123 

Two. 

187. Execute the times to include ram cartridge. 

Three. 

188. Execute the times to include prime. 

Four. 

189. Execute the time of slioulder arms. 

To load at will. 

190. The instructor will next teach loading at will, which will be 
executed as loading in four times, but continued, and without rest- 
ing on either of the times. He will command : 

1. Load at will. 2. Load. 

The instructor will habituate the soldiers, by degrees, to load with 
the greatest possible promptitude, each without regulating himself 
by his neighbor, and above all without waiting for him. 

Firings. 

191. The firings are direct or oblique, and will be executed as 

follows : 

The direct fire. 

The instructor will give the following commands : 

1. Fire hy sqiiad. 2. Squad. 3. READY. 4. AlM. 5. FiRE. 

6. Load. 

These several commands will be executed as has been prescribed 
in the Manual of Arms. At the third command, the men will come 
to the position of ready as heretofore explained. At the fourth 
they will aim according to the rank in which each may find himself 
placed, the rear rank men inclining forward a little the upper part 
of the body, in order that their pieces may reach as much beyond 
the front rank as possible. 

At the sixth command, they will load their pieces, and return 
immediately to the position of ready. 

The instructor will recommence the firing by the commands : 



124 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. Squad. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load. 

When the instructor wishes the firing to cease, he will command : 

Cease firing. 

At this command, the men will cease firing, but will load their 
pieces if unloaded, and afterwards bring them to a shoulder. 

Oblique Firmgs. 

192. The oblique firings will be executed to the right and left, 
and by the same commands as the direct fire, with this single dif- 
ference — the command aim will always be preceded by the caution, 
right or left ohlique. 

Position of the two ranks in the Ohlique Fire to the right. 

At the command ready ^ the two ranks will execute what has been 
prescribed for the direct fire. 

At the cautionary command, right ohliqiie, the two ranks will 
throw back the right shoulder and look steadily at the object to be 
hit. 

At the command aim, each front rank man will aim to the right 
without deranging the feet; each rear rank man will advance the 
left foot about eight inches towards the right heel of the man next 
on the right of his file leader and aim to the right, inclining the 
upper part of the body forward and bending a little the left knee. 

Position of the two ranks in the Ohlique Fire to the left. 

At the cautionary command, left ohlique, the two ranks will throw 
back the left shoulder and look steadily at the object to be hit. 

At the command aim, the front rank will take aim to the left 
without deranging the feet; each man in the rear rank will advance 
the right foot about eight inches towards the right heel of the man 
next on the right of his file leader, and aim to the left, inclining 
the upper part of the body forward and bending a little the right 
knee. 

In both cases, at the command load, the men of each rank will 



SCHOOIi OF THE SOLDIER. 125 

come to the position of load as prescribed in the direct fire ; the rear 
rank men bringing back the foot which is to the right and front by 
the side of the other. Each man will continue to load as if isolated. 

To fire hy File. 

193. The fire by file will be executed by the two ranks, the files 
of which will fire successively, and without regulating on each other, 
except for the first fire. 

The instructor will command : 

1. Fire ly file. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Commence firing. 

At the third command, the two ranks will take the position pre- 
scribed in the direct fire. 

At the fourth command, the file on the right will aim and fire ; 
the rear rank man in aiming will take the position indicated No. 118. 

The men of this file will load their pieces briskly and fire a second 
time ; reload and fire again, and so on in continuation. 

The second file will aim, at the instant the first brings down pieces 
to reload, and will conform in all respects to that which has just 
been prescribed for the first file. 

After the first fire, the front and rear rank men will not be 
required to fire at the same time. 

Each man, after loading, will return to the position of ready and 
continue the fire. 

When the instructor wishes the fire to cease, he will command : 

Cease — Firing. 

At this command, the men will cease firing. If they have fired 
they will load their pieces and bring them to a shoulder ; if at the 
position of ready, they will half-cock and shoulder arms. If in the 
position of aim, they will bring down their pieces, half-cock, and 
shoulder arms. 

To fire hy Rank. 

194. The fire by rank will be executed by each entire rank, 
alternately. 

The instructor will command : 
11* 



12() MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. Fli-e hy rank. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Reai^ rank. 5. Aim. 
6. Fire. 7. Load. 

At the third command^ the two ranks will take the position of 
ready, as prescribed in the direct fire. 

At the seventh command, the rear rank will execute that which 
has been prescribed in the direct lire, and afterwards take the posi- 
tion of ready. 

As soon as the instructor sees several men of the rear rank in the 
position of ready, he will command : 

1. Front rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load. 

At these commands, the men in the front rank will execute what 
has been prescribed for the rear rank, but they will not step off with 
the right foot. 

The instructor will recommence the firing by the rear rank, and 
will thus continue to alternate from rank to rank, until he shall 
wish the firing to cease, when he will command, cease firing, which 
will be executed as heretofore prescribed. 

To fire and load Kneeling. 

195. Li this exercise the squad will be supposed loaded and drawn 
up in one rank. The instruction will be given to each man indi- 
vidually, without times or motions, and in the following manner. 

The instructor will command : 

Fire and load kneeling. 

At this command, the man on the right of the squad will move 
forward three paces and halt; then carry the right foot to the rear 
and to the right of the left heel, and in a position convenient for 
placing the right knee upon the ground in bending the left leg ; 
place the right knee upon the ground ; lower the piece, the left 
fore-arm supported upon the thigh on the same side, the right hand 
on tne small of the stock, the butt resting on the right thigh, the 
left nand supporting the piece near the lower band. 

He will next move the right leg to the left around the knee sup- 
ported on the ground, until this leg is nearly perpendicular to the 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 127 

direction of tlie left foot^ and thus seat himself comfortably on the 
right heel. 

Raise the piece with the right hand and support it with the left, 
holding it near the lower band, the left elbow resting on the left 
thigh near the knee ; seize the hammer with the thumb, the fore- 
finger under the guard, cock and seize the piece at the small of the 
stock; bring the piece to the shoulder, aim smdjire. 

Bring the piece down as soon as it is fired, and support it with 
the left hand, the butt resting against the right thigh ; carry the 
piece to the rear rising on the knee, the barrel downwards, the 
butt resting on the ground ; in this position support the piece with 
the left hand at the upper band, draw cartridge with the right and 
load the piece, ramming the ball, if necessary, with both hands. 

When loaded bring the piece to the front with the left hand, 
which holds it at the upper band; seize it at the same time with 
the right hand at the small of the stock; turn the piece, the barrel 
uppermost and nearly horizontal, the left elbow resting on the left 
thigh; half-cock, remove the old cap and prime, rise, and return to 
the ranks. 

The second man will then be taught what has just been prescribed 
for the first, and so on through the remainder of the squad. 

To fire and load Lying. 

196. In this exercise the squad will be in one rank and loaded ; 
the instruction will be given individually and without times or 
motions. 

The instructor will command : 

Fire and load lying. 

At this command, the man on the right of the squad will move 
forward three paces and halt ; he will then bring his piece to an 
order, drop on both knees, and place himself on the ground flat on 
his belly. In this position he will support the piece nearly hori- 
zontal with the left hand, holding it near the lower band, the butt 
end of the piece and the left elbow resting on the ground, the barrel 
uppermost; cock the piece with the right hand, and carry this hand 



128 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

to tlie small of the stock; raise tlie piece witli both hands, press 
the butt against the shoulder, and resting on both elbows, aim and 
fire. 

As soon as he has fired, bring the piece down and turn upon his 
left side, still resting on his left elbow ; bring back the piece until 
the cock is opposite his breast, the butt end resting on the ground ; 
take out a cartridge with the right hand ; seize the small of the 
stock with this hand, holding the cartridge with the thumb and two 
first fingers ; he will then throw himself on his back, still holding 
the piece with both hands; carry the piece to the rear, place the 
butt between the heels, the barrel up, the muzzle elevated. In this 
position, charge cartridge, draw rammer, ram cartridge, and return 
rammer. 

When finished loading, the man will turn again upon his left side, 
remove the old cap and prime, then raise the piece vertically, rise, 
turn about, and resume his position in the ranks. 

The second man will be taught what has just been prescribed for 
the first, and so on throughout the squad. 

Bayonet Exercise. 

197. The bayonet exercise in this book will be confined to two 
movements, the guard against infantry^ and the guard against 
cavalry. The men will be placed in one rank, with two paces inter- 
val, and being at shoulder arms, the instructor will command : 

1. Guard against Infantry. 2, Guard. 

One time and tv:o motions. 

First motion. Make a half face to the right, turning on both 
heels, the feet square to each other ; at the same time raise the 
piece slightly, and seize it with the left hand above and near the 
lower band. 

Second motion. Carry the right foot twenty inches perpendicu- 
larly to the rear, the right heel on the prolongation of the left, the 
knees slightly bent, the weight of the body resting equally on both 
legs ; lower the piece with both hands, the barrel uppermost, the 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER, 



129 



Fig. 44. 




left elbow against the body; seize the piece at the same time with 
the right hand at the small of the stock, the arms falling naturally, 
the point of the bayonet slightly elevated. (Fig. 44.) 
Shoulder — Arms. 
One time and one motion. 
Throw up the piece with the left hand, and place it against the 
right shoulder, at the same time bring the right heel by the side of 
the left and face to the front. 

1. Guard against Cavalry. 2. GrUARD. 
One time and two motions. 
Both motions the same as for guard against infantry, except that 
the right hand will be supported against the hip, and the bayonet 
held at the height of the eye, as in charge bayonet. 
Shoulder — Arms. 
One time and one motion. 
Spring up the piece with the left hand and place it against the 
right shoulder, at the same time bring the right heel by the side of 
the left, and face to the front. 



130 xMANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

MANUAL OF THE SWOED OR SABRE, FOR OFFICERS. 
POSITION OF THE SWORD OR SABRE, UNDER ARMS. 

198. The carry. The gripe in tlie right hand, which will be 
supported against the right hip, the back of the blade against the 
shoulder. 

TO SALUTE WITH THE SWORD OR SABRE. 

Three times (or pauses'). 

One. At the distance of six paces from the person to be saluted, 
raise the sword or sabre perpendicularly, the point up, the flat of the 
blade opposite to the right eye, the guard at the height of the 
shoulder, the elbow supported on the body. 

Tico. Drop the point of the sword or sabre by extending the 
arm, so that the right hand may be brought to the side of the right 
thigh, and remain in that position until the person to whom the 
salute is rendered shall be passed, or shall have passed, six paces. 

Three. Raise the sword or sabre smartly, and resume the posi- 
tion first prescribed. 

COLOR-SALUTE. 

199. In the ranks, the color-bearer, whether at a halt or in march, 
will always carry the heel of the color-lance supported at the right 
hip, the right hand generally placed on the lance at the height of 
the shoulder, to hold it steady. When the color has to render 
honors, the color-bearer will salute as follows : 

At the distance of six paces slip the right hand along the lance 
to the height of the eye ', lower the lance by straightening the arm 
to its fullest extent, the heel of the lance remaining at the hip, and 
bring back the lance to the habitual position when the person 
saluted shall be passed, or shall have passed, six paces. 



PART THIRD. 

200. When the men are well established in the principles and 
meclianism of the step, the position of the hodi/, and the manual of 
arms, the instructor will unite from eight to twelve in a squad, in 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 131 

order to teacli them the principles of alignment, the touch of the 
elbow in marching to the front, the principles of the march by the 
flank, wheeling from a halt, wheeling in marching, and the change 
of direction to the side of the guide. He will place the squad in 
one rank elbow to elbow, and number the men from right to left. 

Alignments. 

201. The instructor will at first teach the soldiers to align them- 
selves man by man, in order to make them understand the prin- 
ciples of alignment better ; for this purpose, he will command the 
two men on the right flank to march two paces to the front, and 
having aligned (or dressed^ them, he will cause the remainder of 
the squad to move up, as may be successively called, each by his 
number, as three, four, etc., and align (or dress) themselves suc- 
cessively on the line of the first two men. 

Each man, as designated by his number, will turn his head and 
eyes to the right, as directed for eyes right in the first part, and 
march two paces forward in quick time, shortening the last step, so 
as to find himself about six inches behind the new line, which he 
ought never to cross ; he will then move up steadily by steps of two 
or three inches, the legs straight, to the side of the next man to him 
on the line, so that, without throwing the head or the shoulders out 
of place, he may find himself in the exact line with the files on his 
right, and touching elbows with the nearest one without opening 
out his arms. 

The instructor seeing the line properly dressed, commands : 

Front. 

At which the men will turn their eyes to the front, and remain 
firm. 

Alignments to the left will be conducted on the same principles. 

202. When the men shall have learned to dress correctly man by 
man, without deranging the head or shoulders, and without jostling, 
the instructor will cause the entire squad to dress at once by the 
command : 



132 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Squad right (or left) — Dress. 

At this the squad, except tlie two men placed in advance as a 
basis of alignment, will move up in quick time, and place themselves 
on the new line according to the principles just laid down. 

The instructor will superintend the dressing, and when he sees the 
greater number of the squad in their proper places, will command : 

Front. 

The instructor may afterwards order this or that file forward or 
hack, designating each man by his number (or name). The file or 
files designated, will slightly turn the head towards the right (or 
left), to judge how much they ought to move up or back, place them- 
selves on the line by moving an inch or two at a time, and then turn 
eyes to the front, without waiting for any command from the in- 
structor. 

203. Alignments to the rear will be executed on the same prin- 
ciples, the men stepping back a little beyond the line, and then 
dressing up according to the principles laid down in No. 201 ; the 
commands of the instructor are : 

Right (or left) hachward — Dress. 

To march to the front 

204. The squad being correctly aligned, and the instructor wish- 
ing to march it to the front, he will place a well-instructed man on 
the right or left, according to the side on which he wishes the guide 
to be, and command : 

1. Squad forward. 2. Guide right (or left). 3. March. 

At the command march, the squad will step off smartly with the 
left foot, and will take up quick time, unless otherwise specially 
ordered. This rule is general. The guide will take care to march 
straight to the front, keeping his shoulders always square with that 
line. The men will touch elbows lightly on the side towards the 
guide, maintaining the shoulders square to the front, no matter on 
which side the guide may be ; they shoiild be careful not to open 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 183 

out tlie left elbow, or the right arm 3 that they yield to pressure 
coming from the side of the guide, and resist that coming from the 
side opposite ; that they recover by insensible degrees the touch of 
the elbow, if lost; and if any files are before or behind the line, 
that they correct themselves by shortening or lengthening the step 
by almost insensible degrees. It is all important that the closest 
attention should be paid to each one of the above directions, other- 
wise the men cannot attain proficiency, and when they are advanced 
to the company drill, it will be impossible to secure promptness or 
accuracy in the manoeuvres. 

205. The men being well established in the principles of the 
direct march, the instructor will exercise them in marching obliquely. 
The squad being in march, the instructor commands : 

1. Right (or left) oblique. 2. March. 

At the command march, each man will make a half face to the 
right (or left), and will then march straight forward in the new 
direction. As the men no longer touch elbows, they will glance 
along the nearest files, towards the side to which they are obliquing, 
and will regulate their steps so that the right (or left) shoulder 
shall always be behind the left (or right) shoulder of their next 
neighbor on the right (or left), and that his head shall conceal the 
heads of the other men on the right (or left). The men should be 
careful to preserve the same length of pace, and the same degree 
of obliquity. The guides must always be on the flank towards 
which the oblique takes place. 

The instructor wishing to resume the direct march, will command : 

1. Forward. 2. March. 

At the command march, each man will make a half face to the 
left (or right), and all will march straight to the front, conforming 
to the principles laid down for marching to the front. 

To march to the front in doiible quiclc time. 

206. Instruction in the principles of this step is recommended 
for all infantry troops; it mai/ be omitted for infantry of the line, 
12 



134 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

but in no otlier case ; nothing but the imperative necessity for giving 
all of the time at the disposal of the instructor to instruction in the 
principles of the quick step and to the manoeuvres, should prevent 
even infantry of the line from being thoroughly instructed in the 
principles of this step. 

The squad being at a march in quick time, the instructor com- 
mands : 

DouUe quich. 2. March. 

At the command march, which will be given when either foot is 
coming to the ground, the squad will step off in double quick time. 
The men should be careful to follow the rules already laid down for 
the march in the double quick step, and to preserve the alignment. 

When the instructor wishes the squad to resume the quick step, 
he will command : 

1. Quick time. 2. March. 

At the command march, which should be given when either foot 
is coming to the ground, the squad will retake the step in quick 
time. 

If the squad is at a halt, and the instructor wishes to march at 
the double quick step, he commands : 

1. Squad forward. 2. Guide right (or left). 3. Double quich. 

4. March. 

The squad being on the march in double quick time, the instructor 
will occasionally cause it to mark time ] the men will then mark 
double quick time without altering the cadence. He will also 
cause them to pass from the direct to the oblique march, and the 
reverse, conforming to what has been prescribed for the oblique 
inarch. 

In marching at double quich time, the men will always carry 
their pieces on the right shoulder, or at a trail. This ride is general. 

If the instructor wishes the pieces carried at a trail, he will give 
the command trail arms, before the command double quich. If, on 
the contrary, this command is not given, the men will shift their 
pieces to the right shoulder at the command double quich. In 



SCUOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 135 

either case, at tlie command halt, the men will bring their pieces to 
the position of shouldered arms. This ride is general. 

To face ahout in marching. 

207. If the squad be marching in quick, or double quick time, 
and the instructor should wish to march in retreat, he will command : 

1. Squad right about. 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, which should be given at the instant the 
right foot touches the ground, the soldier will complete the next pace 
with the left foot, then turning to the right about on both heels, 
will step off with the left foot. 

To march hy the flanh. 

208. The squad being at a halt, and correctly ahgned, the in- 
structor will command : 

1. Squad, right — Face. 2. Forward. 3. March. 

At the command /ace, the squad will face to the right; the even 
numbered men, after falling to the right, will step quickly to the 
right side of the odd numbered men, the latter standing fast, so that 
when the movement is executed, the men will be formed into files 
of two men abreast, or doubled. 

At the command march, the squad will step off smartly with the 
left foot; the files keeping their dress, and preserving their intervals. 

The march by the left flank will be executed by the same com- 
mands, substituting the word left for right, and by inverse means ; 
in this case, the even numbered men, after facing to the left, will 
stand fast, and the odd numbered will place themselves on their left. 

When the instructor shall wish to halt the squad, marching by 
the flank, and to cause it to face to the front, he will command : 

1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 

At the second command the rank will halt, and afterwards no 
man will stir, although he may have lost his distance. This pro- 
hibition is necessary, to habituate the men to a constant attention to 
their distances. 



13(5 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

At the command /roT?/, each man will front by facing to tlie left, 
if marching by the right flank, and by a face to the right, if march- 
ing by the left flank. The rear rank men will move quickly into 
their places, so as to form the squad into one rank again. 

209. The squad being on the march by the flank, the instructor 
will cause it to change direction by commanding : 

1. By file left (or right). 2. March. 

At the command march, the first file will change direction to the 
left (or right) in describing a small arc of a circle, and will then 
march strait forward ; the two men of this file, in wheeling, will 
keep up the touch of the elbows, and the man on the side to which 
the wheel is made, will shorten the first three or four steps. Each 
file will come successively to the wheel on the same spot where that 
which preceded it wheeled. 

210. The instructor will also cause the squad to face by the right 
or left flank in marching, and for this purpose will command : 

1. Squad hy the right (or left) flank. 2. March. 

At the command march, which will be given a little before either 
foot comes to the ground, the men will turn the body, plant the foot 
that is raised in the new direction, and step off with the other foot 
without altering the cadence of the step. When the squad faces 
to the front or rear in marching, the men who find themselves in 
rear step to the right or left so as to form a single rank, each man 
in his place as in the beginning ; this is called the undouhling of 
files. 

If when the squad is marching to the front or rear, the instructor 
causes it to march by a flank, the files will double ; when the squad 
is on the march to the front, and is faeed by the right flank, the 
even numbers will step up to the right of the odd ones, as in the 
first instance in facing from a halt ; when it is marched by the left 
flank, the odd numbers should double on the left of the even ; if 
the squad is marching to the rear when it is faced by the right 
flank, the odd will double on the even as in the last case, but if 
faced by the left flank the even will double to the right of th»j odd 
as in the first case. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 137 

The instructor will sometimes march by a flank without doubling 
files ; for this purpose he commands : 

In one ranh, right — Face. 

In marching at the double quick, however, the files will always be 

doubled. 

General ji)rinci^les of wheelings. 

211. Wheelings are of two kinds ; from a halt, or on fixed pivots, 
and on the march, or on a movable pivot. 

In wheelings from a halt, the pivot-man only turns in his place, 
without advancing or receding. In the wheels in marching, the 
pivot-man takes steps of nine or eleven inches, according as the 
squad is marching in quick or double quick time, so as to clear the 
wheeling point, which is necessary in order that, in a column com- 
posed of sections, platoons, or companies, the distances between the 
difi"erent parts of it shall not be lost, as will be more fully explained 
in the school of the company. 

The man on the wheeling flank will take a full pace of twenty- 
eight, or thirty-three inches, according to whether the time is quick 
or double quick. 

Wheeling from a half, or on a fixed pivot. 

212. The squad being at a halt, the instructor will place a well- 
instructed man on the wheeling flank to conduct it, and command : 

1. By squad, right wheel. 2. March. 

At the command march, the squad will step ofi" with the left foot, 
turning the head at the same time a little to the left, the eyes on 
the line of the eyes of the men to their left; the pivot-man will 
merely mark time, gradually turning his body, in order to conform 
himself to the movements of the marching flank ; the man who con- 
ducts this flank will take steps of twenty-eight inches, and from the 
first step advance the left shoulder a little, cast his eyes from time 
to time along the rank, and feel constantly, but lightly, the elbow 
of the next man on his right, but never push him. The other man 
will feel lightly the elbow of the next man to his right, resist pres- 
12* 



138 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

sure coming from the left, and yield to any coming from the right ; 
each man will conform himself to the march of the men on the left, 
shortening his step more and more as he is nearer the right, or pivot. 

The instructor will make the squad wheel round the circle once 
or twice before halting, in order to cause the principles to be better 
understood, and he will be watchful that the centre does not break 
or get too far in advance. 

He will cause the wheel to the left to be executed on the same 
principles. 

When the instructor wishes to arrest the wheel, he commands : 

1. Squad. 2. Halt. 

At the second command the squad will halt, and no man stir. 
The instructor going to the left (or right, if the wheel has been to 
the left) flank, will place the two outer men of that flank in the 
direction he may wish to give to the squad, without however dis- 
placing the pivot, who will conform the line of his shoulders to this 
direction. The instructor will take care to have between these two 
men and the pivot, only the space necessary to contain the other 
men. He will then command : 

Left (or right) — Dress. 

At this the squad will place itself on the alignment of the men 
fixed as the bases, in conformity with the principles laid down for 
the alignments. As soon as the men are aligned, the instructor 
commands : 

Front. 

Wheeling in marching, or on a movable pivot. 

218. When the men have been brought to execute the wheel from 
a halt properly, they will be taught the wheel in marching. 

For this end, the squad being on the march, when the intjtructor 
shall wish to cause it to change direction to the flank opposite the 
guide, he will command : 

1. Right (or left) wheel. 2. March. 

The first command will be given when the squad is four paces 
from the wheeling point. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 139 

At the command march the wheel will be executed in the same 
manner as from a halt, except that the touch of the elbow will re- 
main towards the left or marching flank, instead of the side of the 
actual pivot ; that the pivot man, instead of merely turning in his 
place, will conform himself to the movement of the marching flank, 
feel lightly the elbow of the next man, take steps of full nine inches, 
and thus gain ground forward so as to clear the point of the wheel. 
The middle of the rank will bend slightly to the rear. As soon as 
the movement shall commence, the man who conducts the marching 
tiank will cast his eyes on the ground over which he will have to 
pass. 

The wheel being ended, the instructor will command : 

1. Forward. 2. March. 

The command forward will be given four paces before the wheel 
is complete. 

At the command march, which will begin at the instant the wheel 
is complete, the man who conducts the wheel will march straight 
forward ; the pivot man and all the rest of the squad will retake 
the step of twenty-eight inches, and bring the head direct to the 
front. 

Turning, or change of direction to the side of the guide. 

214. The change of direction to the side of the guide, in march- 
ing, will be executed as follows : the instructor will command : 

1. Left (or right) turn. 2. March. 

The first command should be given when the squad hfour paces 
from the turning point. 

At the command march, to be pronounced at the instant the rank 
ought to turn, the guide will face to the left (or right) in marching, 
and move forward in the new direction without changing the pace. 
The whole squad will promptly conform to the new direction ; to 
effect which, each man will advance the shoulder opposite the guide, 
take the double quick step, turn the head and eyes to the side of 
the guide, place himself on the line with the guide, from whom he 
will take the step, touch elbows to the side of the guide, and resume 



140 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the direct position of tlie liead. The men will arrive in their places 
in regular succession. 

215. When tte men comprehend, and can execute the various 
wheels, etc., in quick time, the instructor will cause them to be re- 
peated in double quick time, by the same commands, and according 
to same principles as in quick time, except that the command double 
quick will precede that of march. In wheeling wbile marching, 
the pivot man will take steps of eleven inches, and in the changes 
of direction to the side of the guide, the men on the side opposite 
the guide must increase the gait in order, to bring themselves into 
line. 

The instructor, in order not to fatigue the men, and not to divide 
their attention, will cause them to execute the several movements 
of wheelings, etc., first without arms, and next, after the mechanism 
be well comprehended, with arms. 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 141 



ARTICLE lY. 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 

MANNER OF FORMING THE COMPANY. 

216. The whole company being assembled on its parade ground, 
or in the rendezvous, the^rs^, or orderly sergeant, will command : 

Fall in — Company. 

At this command the corporals and privates will form in one rank, 
faced to the right, and in the order of height from right to left, the 
tallest man on the right (now head of the company), the next tallest 
man immediately covering the first, and so on to the left or rear of 
the rank, in which position will be placed the shortest man. The 
other sergeants will take post in the rank of file-closers, two paces 
to the right of the company, and assist the first sergeant in forming 
the company. 

When the men have their places, the first sergeant will command : 

Front. 
The second sergeant, who is the left guide of the company, will 
now place himself on the left of the company, and the orderly ser- 
geant will promptly command : 

1. In two ranks, form company. 2. Left — Face. 3. March. 

At the command left face, the whole company will face to the 
left, except the guide and man on the left, who stand fast. 

At the command march, the whole of the men who have faced to 
the left, will step off together; the second man, counting from the 
left, will place himself in the rear rank, behind the man next to 
the guide, and face to the front ; the two following men will, in like 
manner, on closing up, form the next file, the third man in the 
front, and the fourth in the rear rank behind him, and all the other 



142 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

men will come successively to form files, two deep, to the right of 
those already formed.^ 

The officers will now take their posts as prescribed in No. 8 ; if 
the captain has to discharge the duties of instructor, the first lieu- 
tenant will take his place on the right of the front rank, the second 
lieutenant replacing the first behind the fourth section. 

The instructor will then cause the files to be numbered, and for 
this purpose will command : 

In each rank — count Twos. 

At this command the men count in each rank from right to left, 
pronouncing in a loud and distinct voice, in the same tone, without 
hurry and without turning the head, one, two, according to the place 
each one occupies. He will also cause the company to be divided 
into platoons and sections, taking care that the first platoon is always 
composed of an even number of files. 

To open i^anhs. 

217. The company being at ordered arms, the ranks and file- 
closers well aligned, when the instructor shall wish to cause the 
ranks to be opened, he will direct the left guide to place himself on 
the left of the front rank, which being executed, he will command : 
1. Company. 2. Shoulder — Arms. 
3. To the rear, open order. 

At the last command, the covering sergeant (or orderly sergeant), 
and the left guide, will step off smartly to the rear, four paces of 
twenty-eight inches from the front rank, in order to mark the posi- 
tion for the rear rank. They will judge this distance by the eye 
without counting the steps. 

The instructor will place himself at the same time on the right 
flank, in order to observe if these two non-commissioned officers are 
on a line parallel to the front rank ; and, if necessary, to correct 
their positions, which being executed, he will command : 

1 When the company is in good discipline, the files may be formed in two 
ranks at once, each man haying his proper number in the company depending 
upon his height, and being able to take his appropriate place without creating 
confu3ion. 



school of the company. 143 

4. March. 

At tliis command the front rank will stand fast. The rear rank 
will step to the rear without counting the steps, and will place them- 
selves on the alignment marked for this rank, each man stepping 
slightly behind the line, and then dressing forward as in the back- 
ward dress. The covering sergeant will dress the rear rank on the 
left guide placed to mark the left of this rank. The instructor 
seeing the rear rank aligned, will command : 

5. Front. 

At this command, the sergeant on the left of the rear rank will 
return to his place as a file-closer. 

Alignments in open ranks. 

218. The ranks being open, the instructor will, in the first ex- 
ercises, align the ranks, man by man, the better to inculcate the 
principles. To efi'ect this, he will cause two or four men on the 
right or left of each rank to march two or three paces forward, and, 
after having aligned them, command : 

By file^ right (or left) — Dress. 

At this, the men of each rank will move up successively on the 
alignment, each man being preceded by his neighbor in the same 
rank, towards the basis, by two paces, and having correctly aligned 
himself, will cast his eyes to the front. 

219. Successive alignments having habituated the soldier to dress 
correctly, the instructor will cause the ranks to align themselves at 
once, forward and backward, sometimes in a direction parallel, and 
sometimes in one oblique to the original direction, giving, in each 
case, two or four men to serve as a basis of alignment to each rank. 
To efi'ect which, he will command : 

1. Right {p^ left) — Dress. 2. Front; 

or, 

1. Right (or left) haclcward — Dress. 2. Front. 

In oblique alignments, in opened ranks, the men of the rear rank 
will not seek to cover their file leaders, as the sole object of the 



144 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

exercise is to teach tliem to align themselves correctly in their 
respective ranks, in the different directions. 

In the several alignments^ the captain will superintend the fron* 
rank, and the covering sergeant the rear rank. For this purpose 
they will place themselves on the side by which the ranks an 
dressed. 

In obhque alignments, the men will conform the line of theii 
shoulders to the new direction of their ranks, and will place them- 
selves on the alignment as has been prescribed in the school of the 
soldier, according as the new direction shall be in front or rear of 
the original one. 

To dose ranks. 

220. The instructor will command : 

1. Close order. 2. March. 

At the command marcli, the rear rank will close up in quick 
time, each man directing himself on his file leader. 

Alignments in closed 7'anks. 

221. The ranks being closed, the instructor will cause to be exe- 
cuted parallel and oblique alignments by the right and left, forward 
and backward, observing to place always two or four files as a basis 
of alignment. He will give the same commands prescribed for 
opened ranks. 

In alignments in closed ranks, the captain will superintend the 
front rank, and the covering sergeant the rear rank. They will 
habituate themselves to judge the alignment by the lines of the eyes 
and shoulders, in casting a glance of the eye along the front and rear 
of the ranks. 

The moment the captain perceives the greater number of the front 
rank aligned, he will command Front, and rectify afterwards, if 
necessary, the alignment of the other men by ordering this or that 
file forward or hac7c, designating each by its number. The rear 
rank will conform to the alignment of the front rank, superintended 
by the covering sergeant. 



SCHOOL or THE COMPANY. 14^ 

The ranks being steady, tlie instructor will place himself on th<? 
flank to verify their alignment. He will also see that each rear 
rank man covers accurately his file leader. 

In all alignments, the file-closers will preserve the distance of two 
paces from the rear rank. 

The alignments being ended the instructor will exercise the com- 
pany at the manual, and finish with stacking arms as follows : 

To Stack Arms. 

222. The men being at order arms, the instructor will command : 

Stach — Arms. 

At this command, the front rank man of every even numbered 
file will pass his piece before him, seizing it with the left hand above 
the middle band, and place the butt behind and near the right foot 
of the man next on the left, the barrel turned to the front. At the 
same time the front rank man of every odd numbered file will pass 
his piece before him, seizing it with the left hand below the middle 
band, and hand it to the man next on the left; the latter will receive 
it with the right hand two inches above the middle band, throw the 
butt about thirty-two inches to the front, opposite to his right 
shoulder, incline the muzzle towards him, and lock the shanks of 
the two bayonets ; the lock of this second piece towards the right, 
and its shank above that of the first piece. The rear rank man of 
every even file will project his bayonet forward, and introduce it 
(using both hands) between and under the shanks of the two other 
bayonets. He will then abandon the piece to his file leader, who 
will receive it with the right hand under the middle band, bring 
the butt to the front, holding up his own piece and the stack with 
the left hand, and place the butt of this third piece between the 
feet of the man next on the right, the S plate to the rear. The 
stack thus formed, the rear rank man of every odd file will pass 
his piece into his left hand, the barrel turned to the front, and, 
sloping the bayonet forward, rest it on the stack. 

223. If the company be armed with rijies, or any piece without 
the bayonet, arms will be stacked by the same commands, and in 

13 K 



146 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the lollowing manner : At the command stack arms, the front rank 
man of every even numbered file will pass his piece before him, 
seizing it with the left hand near the upper band ', will place the 
butt a little in advance of his left toe, the barrel turned towards the 
body, and draw the rammer slightly from its place ', the front rank 
man of every odd numbered file will also draw the rammer slightly, 
and pass his piece to the man next on his left, who will seize it with 
the right hand near the upper band, and place the butt a little in 
advance of the right toe of the man next on his right, the barrel 
turned to the front; he will then cross the rammers of the two 
pieces, the rammer of the piece of the odd num_bered man being 
inside; the rear rank man of every even file will also draw his 
rammer, lean his piece forward, the lock-plate downwards, advance 
the right foot about six inches, and insert the rammer between the 
rammer and barrel of the piece of his front rank man ; with his 
left hand he will place the butt of his piece on the ground, thirty- 
two inches in rear of, and perpendicular to, the front rank, bringing 
back his right foot by the side of the left; the front rank man of 
every even file will at the same time lean the stack to the rear, quit 
it with his right hand, and force all the rammers down. The stack 
being thus formed, the rear rank man of every odd file will pass his 
piece into his left hand, the barrel to the front, and inclining it for- 
ward, will rest it on the stack. 

224. The men of both ranks having taken the position of the 
soldier without arms, the instructor will command : 

1. Break ranks. 2. March. 

To Resume Arms. 

Both ranks being re-formed in rear of their stacks, the instructor 
will command : 

Take — Arms. 

At this command, the rear rank man of every odd numbered file 
will withdraw his piece from the stack ; the front rank man of every 
even file will seize his own piece with the left hand, and that of the 
man on his right with his right hand, both above the lower band ; 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 147 

tlie rear rank man of the even file will seize his piece with the right 
hand below the lower band; these two men will raise up the stock 
to loosen the rammers or bayonets ; the front rank man of every 
odd file will facilitate the disengagement of the rammers^ if neces- 
sary, by drawing them out slightly with the left hand, and will re- 
ceive his piece from the hand of the man next on his left ; the four 
men will retake the position of the soldier at order arms. 

The firings. 
To fijre hy com/pany. 

225. The instructor, wishing to cause the fire by company to be 
executed, will command : 

1. Fire hy company. 2. Commence fir hig. 

At the first command, the captain will promptly place himself 
opposite the centre of his company, and four paces in rear of the 
line of file-closers : the covering sergeant will retire to that line, and 
place himself opposite to his interval. This rule is general^ for both 
the captain and covering sergeant, in all the different firings. 

At the second command, the captain will add : 

1. Company. 2. Keady. 3. AiM. 4. Fire. 5. Load. 

At the command load, the men will load their pieces, and then 
.take the position of ready, as prescribed in the school of the soldier. 

The captain will immediately recommence the firing, by the com- 
mands : 

1. Company. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load. 

The firing will be thus continued until the signal to cease firing 
is sounded. 

The captain will sometimes cause aim to be taken to the right or 
left, simply observing to pronounce right (or left^ ohlique, before the 
command aim. 

The fire hy file. 

226. The instructor wishing to cause the fire by file to be exe- 
cuted, will command : 



i48 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. Fire hy file. 2. Company. 3. Ready. 4. Commence firing. 
The third and fourth commands will be executed as prescribed in 
the school of the soldier. 

The fire will be commenced by the right file of the company ; the 
next file will take aim at the instant the first brings down pieces to 
reload, and so on to the left ; but this progression will only be ob- 
served in the first discharge, after which each man will reload and 
fire without regulating himself by others, conforming himself to 
what is prescribed in the school of the soldier. 

The fire hy ranh. 

227. The instructor wishing the fire by rank to be executed, will 
command : 

1. Fire l>y ranh. 2. Company. 3. Ready. 4. Rear rank — Aim. 
5. I'iRE. 6. Load. 

The fifth and sixth commands will be executed as is prescribed 
in the school of the soldier. 

When the instructor sees one or two pieces in the rear rank at a 
ready, he will command : 

1. Front rank. 2. Aim. 3. FiRE. 4. Load. 

The firing will be continued thus by alternate ranks, until the 
signal is given to cease firing. 

228. The instructor will sometimes cause aim to be taken to the 
right and left, conforming to what is prescribed for the oblique fire. 

The instructor will cause the firing to cease, whether b}'' company, 
by file, or by rank, by sounding the signal to cease firing ; at which 
signal the men will cease to fire. If they have fired, they will load 
their pieces and bring them to a shoulder; if at the position of 
ready, they will half-cock and shoulder arms. If in the position 
of aim, they will bring down their pieces, half-cock, and shoulder 
arms. 

229. The signal to cease firing will be always followed by a bugle 
note, or tap of the drum; at which sound, the captain and covering 
sergeant will promptly resume their places in line, and will rectify, 
if necessary, the alignment of the ranks. 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 149 

The fire by file being that wliicb is most frequently used against 
an enemy, it is higlily important that it be rendered perfectly familar 
to the troops. The instructor will, therefore, give it almost exclu- 
sive preference, and labor to cause the men to aim with care, and 
always, if possible, at some particular object. As it is of the utmost 
importance that the men should aim with precision in battle, this 
principle will be rigidly enforced in the exercises for purposes of 
instruction. 

To jive hy the rear ranh. 

230. The instructor will cause the several fires to be executed to 
tlie rear, that is, by the rear rank. To efi'ect this, he will command : 

1. Face hy the rear rank. 2. Company. 3. About — Face. 

At the first command, the captain will step out and place himself 
near to, and facing the right file of his company ; the covering ser- 
geant and file-closers will pass quickly through the captain's interval, 
and place themselves faced to the rear, the covering sergeant a pace 
behind the captain, and the file-closers two paces from the front 
rank opposite to their places in line, each passing behind the cover- 
ing sergeant. 

At the third command, which will be given at the instant the last 
file-closer shall have passed through the interval, the company will 
face about ; the captain will place himself in his interval in the rear 
rank, now become the front, and the covering sergeant will cover 
him in the front rank, now become the rear. 

The company having faced by the rear rank, the instructor will 
cause it to execute the fire by company, both direct and oblique, the 
fire by file, and the fire by rank, by the commands and means pre- 
scribed. The captain, covering sergeant, and the men will conform 
themselves, in like manner, to what is prescribed. 

The fire by file will commence on the left of the company, now 
become the right. In the fire by rank the firing will commence 
with the front rank, now become the rear. 

To resume the proper front, the instructor will command : 

1. Face hy the front rank. 2. Company. S. About — Face. 
13* 



150 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

At the first command, the cajDtain, covering sergeant, and file- 
closers will conform to what is prescribed above. 

At the third command, the company having faced about, the 
captain and covering sergeant will resume their places in line. 

In this lesson, the instructor will impress on the men the import- 
ance of aiming always at some particular object, and of holding the 
piece as prescribed in the school of the soldier. 

The instructor will recommend to the captain to make a short 
pause between the commands aim and fire, to give the men time to 
aim with accuracy. 

To advance in line of battle. 

231. The company being in line of battle, and correctly aligned, 
when the instructor shall wish to exercise it in marching by the 
front, he will assure himself that the shoulders of the captain and 
covering sergeant are perfectly in the direction of their respective 
ranks, and that the sergeant accurately covers the captain ; the in- 
structor will then place himself twenty-five or thirty paces in front 
of them, face to the rear, and place himself exactly on the pro- 
longation of the line passing between their heels. 

The instructor, being aligned on the directing file, will command : 

1. Company, forward. 

At this, a sergeant, previously designated, will move six paces in 
advance of the captain : the instructor, from the position prescribed, 
will correctly align this sergeant on the prolongation of the directing 
file. 

This advanced sergeant, who is to be charged with the direction, 
will, the moment his position is assured, take two points on the 
ground in the straight line which would pass between his own and 
the heels of the instructor. 

These dispositions being made, the instructor will step aside, and 
command : 

2. March. , 

At this, the company will step off v/ith life. The directing ser- 
geant will observe, with the greatest precision, the length and 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 151 

cadence of tlie step, marcliing on tlie two points lie has chosen ; he 
will take in succession, and always a little before arriving at the 
point nearest to him, new points in advance, exactly in the same line 
with the first two, and at the distance of some fifteen or twenty 
paces from each other. The captain will march steadily in the trace 
of the directing sergeant, keeping always six paces from him ; the 
men will each maintain the head direct to the front, feel lightly the 
elbow of his neighbor on the side of direction, and conform him- 
self to the principles prescribed, school of the soldier, for the march 
by the front. 

The man next to the captain will take special care not to pass 
him ; to this end, he will keep the line of his shoulders a little in 
the rear, but in the same direction with those of the captain. 

The file-closers will march at the habitual distance of two paces 
behind the rear rank. 

If the men lose the step, the instructor will command : 

To ^Ae — Step. 

At this command, the men will glance towards the directing ser- 
geant, retake the step from him, and again direct their eyes to the 
front. 

The instructor will cause the captain and covering sergeant to be 
posted sometimes on the right, and sometimes on the left of the 
company. 

The directing sergeant, in advance, having the greatest influence 
on the march of the company, he will be selected for the precision 
of his step, his habit of maintaining his shoulders in a square with 
a given line of direction, and of prolonging that line without variation. 

To lialt tlie coiwpany ^ marcliing in line of haitle, and to align It. 

The instructor, wishing to halt the company, will command : 

1. Company. 2. Halt. 

At the second command, the company will halt; the directing 
sergeant will remain in advance, unless ordered to return to the line 
of file-closers. The company being at a halt, the instructor may 



152 MANUAL EOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

advance the first three or four files on t-he side of direction, and 
align the company on that basis, or he may confine himself to causing 
the alignment to be rectified. In this last case, he will command : 
Captain, rectify the alignment. The captain will direct the covering 
sergeant to attend to the rear rank, when each, glancing his eyes 
along his rank, will promptly rectify it, conforming to what is pre- 
scribed in the school of the soldier. 



Oblique marcli in line of hattle. 

232. The company being in the direct m.arch, when the instructor 
shall wish to cause it to march obliquely, he will command : 

1. Rigid (or left^ oUique. 2. March. 

At the command march, the company will take the oblique step. 
The men will accurately observe the principles prescribed in the 
school of the soldier. The rear rank men will preserve their dis- 
tances, and march in rear of the man next on the right (or left) of 
their habitual file leaders. 

When the instructor wishes the direct march to be resumed, he 
will command : 

1. Foricard. 2. March. 

At the command march, the company will resume the direct 
march. The instructor will move briskly twenty paces in front of 
the captain, and facing the company, will place himself exactly in 
the prolongation of the captain and covering sergeant; and then, 
by a sign, will move the directing sergeant on the same line, if he 
be not already on it ; the latter will immediately take two points on 
the ground between himself and the instructor, and as he advances, 
will take new points of direction. 

In the oblique march, the men not having the touch of elbows, 
the guide will always be on the side towards which the oblique is 
made, without an}^ indication to that efi'ect being given; and when 
the direct march is resumed, the guide will be, equally without in- 
dication, on the side where it was previous to the oblique. 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 153 

To marh time, to march in double quic/c time, and the hacJc step. 

233. The company being in the direct march and in quick time, 
the instructor, to cause it to mark time, will command : 

1. 3Iar7£ time. 2. March. 

To resume the march, he will command : 

1. Forward. 2. March. 

To cause the march in double quick time, the instructor will 

command : 

1. Douhle quick. 2. March. 

The command march^N\\\ be pronounced at the instant either foot 
is coming to the ground. 

To resume quick time, the instructor will command : 

1. Quick time. 2. March. 

The command march will be pronounced at the instant either foot 
is coming to the ground. 

The company being at a halt, the instructor may cause it to marcli 
in the back step ; to this effect, he will command : 

1. Company hachward. 2. March. 

The back step will be executed according to the principles pre- 
scribed in the school of the soldier, but the use of it being rare, the 
instructor will not cause more than fifteen or twenty steps to be taken 
in succession, and to that extent but seldom. 

The instructor ought not to exercise the company in marching in 
double quick time till the men are well established in the length, 
and swiftness of the pace in quick time ; he will then endeavor to 
render the march of 165 steps in the minute equally easy and fami- 
liar, and also cause them to observe the same erectness of body and 
composure of mind, as if marching in quick time. 

To march in retreat. 

234. The company being halted and correctly aligned, when the 
instructor shall wish to cause it to march in retreat, he will command : 



154 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND BIILITIA. 

1. Gompamj. 2. About — Face. 

The company liaving faced to the rear, the instructor will place 
himself in front of the directing file. 

The instructor, being correctly established on the prolongation of 
the directing file, will command : 

3. Company , forward . 

At this, the directing sergeant will conform himself to what is 
prescribed No. 231, with this difference — he will place himself six 
paces in front of the line of file-closers, now leading. 

The covering sergeant will step into the line of file-closers, oppo- 
site to his interval, and the captain will place himself in the rear 
rank, now become the front. 

This disposition being promptly made, the instructor will com- 
mand : 

4. March. 

At this, the directing sergeant, the captain, and the men, will 
conform themselves to what is prescribed No. 231. 

The instructor will cause to be executed, m.arching in retreat,, all 
that is prescribed for marching in advance ; the commands and the 
means of execution will be the same. 

The instructor having halted the company, will, when he may 
wish, cause it to face to the front. The captain, the covering ser- 
geant, and the directing sergeant, will resume their habitual places 
in line, the moment they shall have faced about. 

235. The company being in march by the front rank, if the in- 
structor should wish it to march in retreat, he will cause the right 
about to be executed while marchings and to this effect will command : 

1. Coiiipaiiy. 2. Right about. 3. March. 

At the third command, the company will promptly face about, 
and recommence the march by the rear rank. 

The directing sergeant will face about with the company, and will 
move rapidly six paces in front of the file-closers, and upon the pro- 
longation of the guide. The instructor will place him in the proper 
direction by the means prescribed. The captain, the covering ser- 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 155 

geant, and the men, will conform to the principles prescribed for 
the march in retreat. 

When the instructor wishes the company to march by the front 
rank, he will give the same commands^ and will regulate the direc- 
tion of the march by the same means. 

236. The instructor will cause all the above marches, except the 
backward march, to be executed in the double quick time ; the latter 
will be executed only in quick time. He will give the same com- 
mands, observing to add double quich before the command march. 

When the pieces are carried on the right shoulder, in quick time, 
the distance between the ranks will be sixteen inches. Whenever, 
therefore, the instructor brings the company from a shoulder to this 
position, the rear rank must shorten a little the first steps in order 
to gain the prescribed distance, and will lengthen the steps, on the 
contrary, in order to close up when the pieces are again brought to 
a shoulder. In marching in double quick time, the distance be- 
tween the ranks will be twenty-six inches, and the pieces will be 
carried habitually on the right shoulder. 

Whenever a company is halted, the men will bring their pieces 
at once to a shoulder at the command halt. The rear rank will close 
to its proper distance. These rules are general. 

» To march hy the JlanJc. 

237. The company being in line of battle, and at a halt, when 
the instructor shall wish to cause it to march by the right flank, he 
will command : 

1. Compavy, right — Face. 2. Forward. 3. March. 

(Fig. 45.) At the first command, the company will face to the right, 
the covering sergeant will place himself at the head of the front 
rank, the captain having stepped out for the purpose, so far as to find 
himself by the side of the sergeant, and on his left ; the two ranks 
will form to the right at the word, the rear rank will step off one 
pace to the right, then the even numbers of both ranks will step up 
to the right of the odd, as directed in the school of the soldier ; so 
that when the movement is completed, the files will be formed of 



156 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

four men aligned^ and elbow to elbow. The intervals will be pro- 
served. 

The file closers will also move by side step to the right, so that 
when the ranks are formed, they will be two paces from the rear- 
most rank. 



Fiff£5. ^ 






H 


y\m ,-fel 


E] 






i- — L 



a 



B 




Fi^^e. 



At the command marcli, the company will move off briskly in 
quick time ; the covering sergeant at the head of the front rank, 
and the captain on his left, will march straight forward. The men 
of each file v/ill march abreast of their respective front rank men, 
heads direct to the front; the file-closers will march opposite iheir 
places in line of battle. 

The instructor will cause the march by the left fiank to be exe- 
cuted by the same commands, substituting left for right; the rear 
rank steps one pace to the left, then the odd files of both ranks take 
their places to the left of the even numbered. 

At the instant the company faces to the left, the left guide will 
place himself at the head of the front rank ; the captain will pass 
rapidly to the left, and place himself by the right side of this guide; 
the covering sergeant will replace the captain in the front rank, the 
moment the latter quits it to go to the left. 

The instructor will sometimes exercise the company in facing 
without doubling, for this purpose he will command : 



1. ConijKUVj, in two ranks, right — 2. Face. 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 157 

The double qukh, however, will never be executed without the 
ranks being doubled. 

To change direction hy file. 

238. The company being faced by the flank, and either in march, 
or at a halt, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to wheel by 
file, he will command : 

1. Bi/file, left, (or right.') 2. March. 

(Fig. 46.) At the command march, the first file will wheel; if to 
the side of the front rank man, the latter will take care not to turn 
at once, but to describe a short arc of a circle, shortening a little 
the first five or six steps in order to give time to the fourth man of 
this file to conform himself to the movement. If the wheel be to 
the side of the rear rank, the front rank man will wheel in the step 
of twenty-eight inches, and the fourth man will conform himself to 
the movement by describing a short arc of a circle as has been ex 
plained. Each file will came to wheel on the same ground where 
that which preceded it wheeled. 

The instructor will see that the wheel be executed according to 
these principles, in order that the distance between the files may 
always be preserved, and that there be no check or hindrance at the 
wheeling point. 

To halt the company marching hy the flank, and to face it to the 

front. 

239. To eff'ect these objects, the instructor will command : 
1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 

The second and third commands will be executed as prescribed 
in the school of the soldier. As soon as the files have undoubled 
the rear rank will close to its proper distance. The captain and 
covering sergeant, as well as the left guide, if the march be by the 
left flank, will return to their habitual places in line at the instant 
the company faces to the front. 

The instructor may then align the company by one of the meana 
prescribed. 
14 



158 MAMU^L FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



The company heing in march hy the Jlanh, to form it on the right 
(or left^ ^y fi^Q ^^io line of battle. 

240. If the company be marcHngby tbe right fiank^ the instructor 
will command : 



1. On the right, hy file ifito line. 



March. 



9 



I I I I.I 
□mo 

I 1 M I 



Fiy /7. 



(Fig. 47.) At the command march, the rear rank men doubled will 
mark time ; the captain and the covering sergeant will turn to the 
right, march straight forward, and be 
halted by the instructor when they shall 
have passed at least six paces beyond 
the rank of file-closers; the captain will 
place himself correctly on the line of 
battle, and will direct the alignment as 
the men of the front rank successively 
arrive; the covering sergeant will place 
himself behind the captain at the distance 
of the rear rank; the two men on the 
right of the front rank doubled, will con- 
tinue to march, and passing beyond the 
covering sergeant and the captain, will 
turn to the right; after turning, they will 
continue to march elbow to elbow, and 
direct themselves towards the line of 
battle, but when they shall arrive at two 
paces from this line, the even number 
will shorten the step so that the odd num- 
ber may precede him on the line, the odd 
number placing himself by the side and 
on the left of the captain ; the even num- 
ber will afterwards oblique to the left, and 
place himself on the left of the odd num- 
ber ; the next two men of the front rank 
doubled, will pass in the same manner 
behind the two first, turn then to the 
right, and place themselves, according to the means just explained, 
to the left, and by the side of, the two men already established on 




SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 159 

tlie line; the remaining files of tliis rank will follow in succession, 
and be formed to the left in the same manner. The rear rank 
doubled will execute the movement in the manner already explained 
for the front rank^ taking care not to commence the movement until 
four men of the front rank are established on the line of battle ; 
the rear rank men, as they arrive on the line, will cover accurately 
their file leaders. 

If the company be marching by the left flank, the instructor will 
cause it to form by file on the left into line of battle, according to 
the same principles and by the same commands, substituting the 
indication hft for right. In this case, the odd numbers will shorten 
the step, so that the even numbers may precede them on the line. 
The captain, placed on the left of the front rank, and the left guide, 
will return to their places in line of battle, by order of the instructor, 
after the company shall be formed and aligned. 

To enable the men the better to comprehend the mechanism of 
this movement, the instructor will at first cause it to be executed 
separately by each rank doubled, and afterwards by the two ranks 
united and doubled. 

The compaiiy heinyin march hy the flanh, to form it hy compavy, or 
hy platoon, into line, and to cause it to face to the right and left 
in marching. 

241. The company being in march by the right flank, the in- 
structor will order the captain to form it into line ; the captain will 
immediately command : 

1. By company into line. 2. March. 

(Fig. 48.) At the command march, the covering sergeant will 
continue to march straight forward ; the men will advance the right 
shoulder, take the double quick step, and move into line by the 
shortest route, taking care to undouble the files, and to come on the 
line one after the other. 

As the front rank men successively arrive in line with the cover- 
ing sergeant, they will take from him the step, and then turn their 
eyes to the front. 



160 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The men of tlie rear rank will conform to the movements of their 
respective file leaders, but without endeavoring to arrive in line at 
the same time with the latter. 

At the instant the movement begins, the captain will face to his 
company in order to follow up the execution ; and, as soon as the 



mm^'^ 



□ 




Fi^ m 



\ s 



M N 



i N N 



V^.A^^rA^-VA^'-^A-^yyA'^A 



ixi w<\yy'\yAyA-j-\y^^'^.\'m^\>. 



h 



company is formed, he will command, guide left, place himself two 
paces before the centre, face to the front, and take the step of the 
company. 

At the command guide left, the second sergeant will promptly 
place himself in the front rank, on the left, to serve as guide, and 
the covering sergeant who is on the opposite flank will remain th.ere. 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. IGl 

Y/hen the company marclies by tlie left flank, this movement will 
be executed by the same commands, and according to the same 
principles ; the company being formed, the captain will command 
guide right, and place himself in front of his company as above ; 
the covering sergeant who is on the right of the front rank will serve 
as guide, and the second sergeent placed on the left flank will remain 
there. 

Thus, supposing the company to constitute a part of a column by 
company, right or left in front, the covering sergeant and the second 
sergeant of each company will always be placed on the right and 
left, respectively, of the front rank; they will be denominated right 
guide and left guide, and the one or the other charged with the 
direction. 

The company being in march by the flank, if it be the wish of 
the instructor to cause it to form platoons, he will give an order to 
that efiect to the captain, who will command : 

1. By -platoon, into line. 2. March. 

The movement will be executed by each platoon according to 
the above principles. The captain will place himself before the 
centre of the first platoon, and the first lieutenant before the centre 
of the second, passing through the opening made in the centre of 
the company, if the march be by the right flank, and around the 
left of his platoon, if the march be by the left : in this last case, 
the captain will also pass around the left of the second platoon in 
order to place himself in front of the first. Both the captain and 
lieutenant, without waiting for each other, will command guid^e left 
(or right^ at the instant their respective platoons are formed. 

At the command guide left (or right), the guide of each platoon 
will pass rapidly to the indicated flank of the platoon, if not already 
there. 

The right guide of the company will always serve as the guide 
of the right or left of the first platoon, and the left guide of the 
company will serve, in like manner, as the guide of the second 
platoon . 

Thus in a column, by platoon, there will be but one guide to each 

W =^ L ^ 



162 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

platoon ; he will always be placed on its left flank, if the right be 
in front, and on the right flank, if the left be in front. 

In these movements, the file-closers will follow the platoons to 
which they are attached. 

The instructor may cause the company, marching by the flank, 
to form by company, or by platoon, into line, by his own direct 
commands, using those prescribed for the captain. 

The instructor will exercise the company in passing, without halt, 
from the march by the front, to the march by the flank, and recipro- 
cally. In either case, he will employ the commands prescribed in 
the school of the soldier, substituting company for squad. The 
company will face to the right or left, in marching, and the captain, 
the guides, and flle-closers will conform themselves to what is pre- 
scribed for each in the march by the flank, or in the march by the 
front of a company supposed to be a subdivision of a column. 

If, after facing to the right or left, in marching, the company 
find itself faced by the rear rank, the captain will place himself two 
paces behind the centre of the front rank, now in the rear, the 
guides will pass to the rear rank, now leading, and the file-closers 
will march in front of this rank. 

The instructor, in order to avoid fatiguing the men, and to prevent 
them from being negligent in the position of shoulder arms, will 
sometimes order support arms in marching by the flank, and arms 
on the right shoulder, when marching in line. 

To hreah into column hy platoon, either at a halt or in march. 

242. The company being at a halt, in line of battle, the instructor, 
wishing to break it into column, by platooon to the right, will com- 
mand : 

1. By platoon, right luheel. 2. March. 

(Fig. 49.) At the first command^ the chiefs of platoons will 
rapidly place themselves two paces before the centres of their re- 
spective platoons, the lieutenant passing around the left of the com- 
pany. They need not occupy themselves with dressing, one upon 
the other. The covering sergeant will replace the captain in the 
front rank. 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 



163 



At tlie command mai'ch, tlie right front rank man of each platoon 
will face to the right, the covering ser- 
geant standing fast^ the chief of each f 
platoon will move quickly by the shortest 
line, a little beyond the point at which 
the marching flank will rest when the 
wheel shall be completed, face to the 
late rear, and place himself so that the 
line which he forms with the man on 
the right (who had faced), shall be per- 
pendicular to that occupied by the com- 
pany in line of battle; each platoon 
will wheel according to the principles 
prescribed for the wheel on a fived pivot, 
and when the man who conducts the 
marching flank shall approach near to 
the perpendicular, its chief will com- 
mand : 

1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 









23 




Fi^ /.9. 



At the command lialt^ which will be 
given at the instant the man who con- 
ducts the marching flank shall have 
arrived at three paces from the per- 
pendicular, the platoon will halt; the covering sergeant will move 
to the point where the left of the first platoon is to rest, passing 
by the front rank ; the second sergeant will place himself, in like 
manner, in respect to the second platoon. Each will take care to 
leave between himself and the man on the right of his platoon, a 
space equal to its front ; the captain and first lieutenant will look to 
this, and each take care to align the sergeant between himself and 
the man of the platoon who had faced to the right. 

The guide of each platoon, being thus established on the per- 
pendicular, each chief will place himself two paces outside of his 
guide, and facing towards him, will command : 



3. Left — Beess. 



164 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA, 

The alignment being ended, each chief of platoon will command, 
Front, and place himself two paces before its centre. 

The file-closers will conform themselves to the movement of their 
respective platoons, preserving always the distance of two paces Irom 
the rear rank. 

The company will break by platoon to the left, according to the 
same principles. The instructor will command : 

1. Bi/ platoon, left wheel. 2. March. 

The first command will be executed in the same manner as if 
breaking by platoon to the right. 

At the command march, the left front rank man of each platoon 
will face to the left, and the platoons will wheel to the left, according 
to the principles prescribed for the wheel on a fixed pivot; the 
chiefs of platoon will conform to the principles indicated. 

At the command halt, given by the chief of each platoon, the 
covering sergeant on the right of the front rank of the first platoon, 
and the second sergeant near the left of the second platoon, will 
each move to the points where the right of his platoon is to rest. 
The chief of each platoon should be careful to align the sergeant 
between himself and the man of the platoon who had faced to the 
left, and will then command : 

Right — Dress. 

The platoons being aligned, each chief of platoon will command. 
Front, and place himself opposite its centre. 

243. The instructor wishing to break the company by platoon to 
the right, and to move the column forward after the wheel is com- 
pleted, will caution the company to that efi'ect, and command : 

1. By platoon, right wheel. 2. March. 

At the first command, the chiefs of platoon will move rapidly in 
front of their respective platoons, conforming to what has been pre- 
scribed, and will remain in this position during the continuance of 
the wheel. The covering sergeant will replace the chief of the first 
platoon in the front rank. 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 165 

At the command march, tlie platoons will wheel to tlie right, con- 
forming to the principles herein prescribed; the man on the pivot 
will not face to the right, but will mark time, conforming himself 
to the movement of the marching flank; and when the man who is 
on the left of this flank shall arrive near the. perpendicular, the in- 
structor will command : 

3. Forivard. 4. March. 5. Guide left. 

At the fourth command, which will be given at the instant the 
wheel is completed, the platoons will move straight to the front, all 
the men taking the step of twenty-eight inches. The covering ser- 
geant and the second sergeant will move rapidly to the left of their 
respective platoons, the former passing before the front rank. The 
leading guide will immediately take points on the ground in the 
direction which may be indicated to him by the instructor. 

At the fifth command, the men will take the touch of elbows 
lightly to the left. 

If the guide of the second platoon should lose his distance, or 
the line of direction, he will conform to the principles herein pre- 
scribed. 

If the company be marching in line to the front, the instructor 
will cause it to break by platoon to the right by the same commands. 
At the command march, the platoons will wheel in the manner 
already explained ; the man on the pivot will take care to mark time 
in his place, without advancing or receding; the instructor, the 
chiefs of platoon, and the guides, will conform to what has been 
prescribed. 

The company may be broken by platoons to the left, according to 
the same principles, and by inverse means, the instructor giving the 
commands prescribed, substituting left for right, and reciprocally. 

To march in column. 

244. The company having broken by platoon, right (or left) in 
front, the instructor, wishing to cause the column to march, will 
throw himself twenty-five or thirty paces in front, face to the 



166 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

guides, place himself correctly, on their direction, and caution the 
leading guide to take points on the ground. 

The instructor being thus placed, the guide of the leading pla- 
toon will take two points on the ground in the straight line passing 
between his own and the heels of the instructor. 

These dispositions being made, the instructor will step aside, and 
command : 

1. Column forward. 2. Guide left (or righf). 3. March. 

At the command march, promptly repeated by the chiefs of pla- 
toon, they, as well as the guides, will lead off, by a decided step, 
their respective platoons, in order that the whole may move smartly, 
and at the same moment. 

The men will each feel lightly the elbow of his neighbor towards 
the guide, and conform himself, in marching, to the principles pre- 
scribed in the school of the soldier. The man next to the guide, 
in each platoon, will take care never to pass him, and also to march 
always about six inches to the right (or left) from him, in order not 
to push him out of the direction. 

The leading guide will observe, with the greatest precision, the 
length and cadence of the step, and maintain the direction of his 
march by the means prescribed. 

The following guide will march exactly in the trace of the lead- 
ing one, preserving between the latter and himself a dista.nce pre- 
cisely equal to the front of his platoon, and marching in the same 
step with the leading guide. 

To change direction. 

The changes of direction of a column while marching, will be 
executed according to the principles prescribed for wheeling on the 
march. Whenever, therefore, a column is to change direction, the 
instructor will change the guide, if not already there, to the flank 
opposite the side to which the change is to be made. 

245. The column being in march right in front, if it be the wish 
of the instructor to change direction to the right, he will give the 
order to the chief of the first platoon, and immediately go himself, 



SCHOOL or THE COMPANY. 167 

or send a marker to the point at which the change of direction is 
to be made; the instructor, or marker, will place himself on the 
direction of the guides, so as to present the breast to that flank of 
the column. 

The leading guide will direct his march on that person, so that, 
m passing, his left arm may just graze his breast. When the lead- 
ing guide shall have approached near to the marker, the chief of 
his platoon will command : 

1. Right wheel 2. March. 

(Fig. 50.) The first command will be given when the platoon is at 
the distance of four paces from the marker. 

At the command march, which will be pronounced at the instant 
the guide shall have arrived opposite the marker, the platoon v/ill 
wheel to the right, conforming to what is prescribed in the school 
of the soldier. 

The wheel being finished, the chief of each platoon will command : 

8. Forward. 4. March. 

These commands will be pronounced and executed as is prescribed 
in the school of the soldier. The guide of the first platoon will 
take points on the ground in the new direction, in order the better 
to regulate the march. 

The second platoon will continue to march straight forward till 
up with the marker, when it will wheel to the right, and re-take the 
direct march by the same commands and the same means which 
governed the first platoon. 

The column being in march right in front, if the instructor should 
wish to change direction to the left, he will command, guide right. 
At this command, the two guides will move rapidly to the right of 
their respective platoons, each passing in front of his subdivision ; 
the men will take the touch of elbows to the right ; the instructor 
will afterwards conform to what is prescribed. 

The change of direction to the left will then be executed accord- 
ing to the same principles as the change of direction to the right, 
but by inverse means. 



168 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



When the change of direction is completed, the instructor will 
command, guide left. 



IXJ 1 I 



A 



L-Ll-J-i-LL 



IXD 






^ 



(Z3 



& 



U< i»a=iigj:ii%i4al;^Ba»l'<^r^j<i'!^ia4JI 




FU 51. 




1Z3 



Fi^ 50. 



<a 



The changes of direction in a column, left in front, will be exe- 
cuted according to the same principles. 

In changes of direction in double quick time, the platoons will 
wheel according to the principles prescribed in the school of the 
soldier. 

In order to prepare the men for those formations in line, which 
can be executed only by turning to the right or the left, the in- 
structor will sometimes cause the column to change direction to the 
side of the guide. In this case, the chief of the leading platoon 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 169 

will command : Left (or r\ght^ turn, instead of left (or riglit) wheel. 
The subdivisions will eacli turn, in succession, conforming to what 
is prescribed in the school of the soldier. The leading guide, as 
soon as he has turned, will take points on the ground, the better to 
regulate the direction of the march. 

To lialt the column. 

The column being in march, when the instructor shall wish to 
halt it, he will command : 

1. Column. 2. Halt. 

At the second command, promptly repeated by the chiefs of pla- 
toon, the column will halt; the guides also will stand fast, although 
they may have lost both distance and direction. 

If the command hnlt be not repeated with the greatest vivacity, 
and executed at the same instant, distances will be lost. 

If a guide, having lost his distance, seek to recover it after that 
command, he will only throw his fault on the following guide, who, 
if he have marched well, will no longer be at his proper distance ] 
and if the latter regain v/hat he has thus lost, the movement will 
be propagated to the rear of the column. 

Bem^ in column h]^ platoon, to form to the right or left info line of 
battle, either at a halt or on the m^arch. 

246. The instructor having halted the column, right in front, and 
wishing to form it into line of battle, will place himself at platoon 
distance in front of the leading guide, face to him, and rectify, if 
necessary, the position of the guide beyond ; which being executed, 
he will command : 

Left — Dress. 

At this command, which will not be repeated by the chiefs of 
platoon, each of them will place himself briskly two paces outside 
of his guide, and direct the alignment of the platoon perpendicularly 
to the direction of the column. 
15 



170 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Eacli chief having aligned his platoon, will command Front, and 
return quickly to his place in column. 

This disposition being made, the instructor will command : 

1. Left into line, u'Jieel 2. March. 

(Fig. 51.) At the command march, briskly repeated by the 
chiefs of platoon, the front rank man on the left of each platoon 
•wall face to the left, and place his breast lightly against the arm of 
the guide by his side, who stands fast; the platoons will wheel to 
the left on the principle of wheels from a halt, and in conformity 
to what is prescribed. Each chief will turn to his platoon to observe 
its movement, and when the marching flank has approached near 
the line of battle, he will command : 

1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 

The command halt will be given when the marching flank of the 
platoon is three paces from the line of battle. 

The chief of the second platoon having halted it, will return to 
his place as a file-closer, passing around the left of his subdivision. 

The captain having halted the first platoon, will move rapidly to 
the point at which the right of the company will rest in line of 
battle, and command : 

Eight — Dress. 

At this command, the two platoons will dress up on the align- 
ment ; the front rank man on the right of the leading platoon, who 
finds himself opposite the instructor established on the direction of 
the guides, will place his breast lightly against the left arm of this 
ofiicer. The captain will direct the alignment from the right on the 
man on the opposite flank of the company. 

The company being aligned, the captain will command : 

Front. 

The instructor seeing the company in line of battle, will com. 
mand : 

Guides — Posts. 



SCHOOL OF THE COiMPANY. 171 

At this command, the covering sergeant will cover the captain, 
and the left guide will return to his place as a file-closer. 

If the column be left in front, and the instructor should wish to 
form it to the right into line of battle, he will place himself at pla- 
toon distance in front of the leading guide, face to him, and rectify, 
if necessary, the position of the guide beyond; which being exe- 
cuted, he will command : 

1, Right into line, ivlieel. 2. Marcii. 

At the command march, the front rank man on the right of each 
platoon will face to the right and place his breast lightly against 
the left arm of the guide by his side, who stands fast; each platoon 
will wheel to the right, and will be halted by its chief, when the 
marching flank has approached near the line of battle ; for this 
purpose, the chief of each platoon will command : 

1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 

The command halt will be given when the marching flank of the 
platoon is three paces from the line of battle. The chief of the 
second platoon having halted his platoon, will resume his place in 
the rank of file-closers. 

The captain having halted the first platoon, will move briskly to 
the point at which the left of the company will rest, and command : 

Left — Dress. 

At this command, the two platoons will dress up on the align- 
ment; the man on the left of the second platoon, oppo3ite the in- 
structor, will place his breast lightly against the right arm of this 
officer, and the captain will direct the alignment from the left on 
the man on the opposite flank of the company. 

The company being aligned, the captain will command : 

Front. 
The instructor will afterwards command : 
Giddes — Posts. 



172 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

At this command, the captain will move to the right of his com- 
pany, tlie covering sergeant will cover him, and the left guide will 
return to his place as a file-closer. 

247. If the column be marching right in front, and the instructor 
should wish to form it into line without halting the column, he will 
give the command : 

1. Left into line J wheel. 2. March. 

and will himself move rapidly to platoon distance in front of the 
leading guide. 

At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of pla- 
toons, the front rank man on the left of each platoon will face to the 
left, and place his breast lightly against the arm of the guide by 
his side, who stands fast; the platoons will wheel to the left on the 
principle of wheels from a halt. Each chief will turn to his pla- 
toon to observe its movement, and conform to what is prescribed for 
wheeling into line from a halt. 

If the column be in march left in front, this formation will be 
made according to the same principles, and by inverse means. 

248. If the column be marching right in front, and the instructor 
should wish to form it into line without halting the column, and to 
march the company in line to the front, he will command : 

1. Bij platoons left wheel. 2. March. 

At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of pla- 
toon, the left guides will halt; the man next to the left guide in 
each platoon will mark time : the platoons will wheel to the left, 
conforming to the principles of the wheel on a fixed pivot. When 
the right of the platoons shall arrive near the line of battle, the in- 
structor will command : 

3. FoQ'ward. 4. March. 5. Guide right (or left.') 

At the fourth command, given at the instant the wheel is com- 
pleted, all the men of the company will move off together with the 
fctep of twenty-eight inches; the captain, the chief of the second 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 173 

platoon, the covering sergeant, and the left guide, vnW take their 
positions as in line of battle. 

At the fifth command, which will be given immediately after the 
fourth, the captain and covering sergeant, if not already there, will 
move briskly to the side on which the guide is designated. The 
non-commissioned officer charged with the direction will move 
rapidly in front of the guide, and will be assured in his line of 
march by the instructor. That non-commissioned officer will im- 
mediately take points on the ground. The men will take the touch 
of elbows to the side of the guide, conforming themselves to the 
principles of the march in line. 

The same principles are applicable to a column left in front. 

A company marcliing to the front to hreak it into platoons^ and to 
re-form the company. 

249. The company marching in the cadenced step, and supposed 
to make part of a column, right in front, in which case the guide 
is left, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to break by pla- 
toon, he will give the order to the captain, who will command : 

1. Break info platoons, 

and immediately place himself before the centre of the first platoon. 

At the command hrealc into platoons, the first lieutenant will pass 
quickly around the left to the centre of his platoon, and give the 
caution : Mark time. 

The captain will then command : 

2. March. 

(Fig. 52). The first platoon will continue to march straight for- 
ward ; the covering sergeant will move rapidly to the left flank of 
this platoon (passing by the front rank) as soon as the flank shall be 
disengaged. 

At the command march, given by the captain, the second platoon 
will begin to mark time ; its chief will immediately add : 

1. Right oblique. 2. March. 

The last command will be given so that this platoon may com- 
15^ 



174 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 






£i 



E3 



Fi^ 52. 



& 



mence obliquing the instant the rear rank of the first platoon shall 
have passed. The men will shorten the step in obliquing, so that 

when the command forward 
march is given^ the platoon 
may have its exact distance. 

The guide of the second 
platoon being near the direc- 
tion of the guide of the first, 
the chief of the second will 
command Forward, and add 
March, the instant that the 
guide of his platoon shall 
cover ih.Q guide of the first. 

In a column, left in front, 
the company will break into 
platoons by inverse means, 
applying to the first platoon 
all that has been prescribed 
for the second, and recipro- 
cally. 

In this case, the left guide 
of the company will shift to 
the right flank of the second 
platoon, and the covering ser- 
geant will remain on the right 
of the first. 

250. The column, by pla- 
toon, being in march, right 
in front, when the instructor 
shall wish to cause it to form 
company, he will give the order to the captain, who will command : 

Form company. 

Having given this command, the captain will immediately add : 

1. First platoon. 2. Right oblique. 

The chief of the second platoon will caution it to continue U 
march straight forward. 



IZ3 Q n 



<^ 



^ 



zrrr 



& & 



Q 



a 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 175 

The captain will then command : 

3. March. 

At this command, repeated by the chief of the second, the first 
platoon will oblique to the right, in order to unmask the second ; 
the covering sergeant, on the left of the first platoon, will return to 
the right of the company, passing by the front rank. 

When the first platoon shall have nearly unmasked the second, 
the captain will command : 

1. Marh time, 

and at the instant the unmasking shall be complete, he will add : 

2. March. 

The first platoon will then cease to oblique, and mark time. 

In the mean time the second platoon will have continued to march 
straight forward, and when it shall be nearly up with the first, the 
captain will command Forward, and at the instant the two platoons 
shall unite, add March; the first platoon will then cease to mark 
time. 

In a column, left in front, the same movement will be executed 
by inverse means, the chief of the second platoon giving the com- 
mand Forward, and the captain adding the command March, when 
the platoons are united. 

The guide of the second platoon, on its right, will pass to its left 
flank the moment the platoon begins to oblique; the guide of the 
first, on its right, remaining on that flank of the platoon. 

The instructor will also sometimes cause the company to break 
and re-form, by platoon, by his own direct commands. In this case, 
he will give the general commands prescribed for the captain above : 

1. Break into platoons. 2. March. 

and, 

1. Form company. 2. March. 

If, in breaking the company into platoons, the subdivision that 
breaks ofi" should mark time too long, it might, in a column of many 



176 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

subdivisions, arrest the march of the following one, "which would 
cause a lengthening of the column, and a loss of distances. 

Being in column, to break files to the rear, and to cause them to 
re-enter into line, 

251. The company being in march, and supposed to constitute a 
subdivision of a column, right (or left) in front, when the instructor 
shall wish to cause files to break ofi" he will give the order to the cap- 
tain, who will immediately turn to his company, and command : 

1. Two files from left (or right^ to rear. 2. March. 

(Fig. 53.) At the command m.arch, the two files on the left (or 
right) of the company will mark time, the others will continue to 
march straight forward ; the two rear rank men of these files will, 
as soon as the rear rank of the company shall clear them, move to 
the right by advancing the outer shoulder ; the odd number will 
place himself behind the third file from that flank, the even number 
behind the fourth, passing for this purpose behind the odd number; 
the two front rank men will, in like manner, move to the right when 
the rear rank of the company shall clear them, the odd number will 
place himself behind the first file, the even number behind the 
second file, passing for this purpose behind the odd number. If 
the files are broken from the right, the men will move to the left, 
advancing the outer shoulder, the even number of the rear rank 
will place himself behind the third file, the odd number of the same 
rank behind the fourth ; the even number of the front rank behind 
the first file, the odd number of the same rank behind the second, 
the odd numbers for this purpose passing behind the even numbers. 
The men will be careful not to lose their distances, and to keep 
aligned. 

If the instructor should still wish to break two files from the 
same side, he will give the order to the captain, who will proceed 
as above directed. 

At the command march, given by the captain, the files already 
broken, advancing a little the outer shoulder, will gain the space 
of two files to the right, if the files are broken from the left, and 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 177 

to the left, if the jfiles are broken from the right^ shortening, at the 
same time, the step, in order to make room between themselves and 



B 



Fiff 53 



A 



^ I m ]^\ 1^1 m m M 
^ I m\ 1^ fegi \i^j r^ I 

<3 



the rear rank of the company for the files last ordered to the rear ; 
the latter will break by the same commands and in the same manner 
as the first. The men who double should increase the length of the 
step in order to prevent distances from being lost. 

The instructor may thus diminish the front of a company by 
breaking ofi" successive groups of two files, but the new files must 
always be broken from the same side. 

The instructor, wishing to cause files broken ofi" to return into 
line, will give the order to the captain, who will immediately com- 
mand : 

1. Two files into line. 2. March. 

At the command march, the first two files of those marching by 
the flank will return briskly into line, and the others will gain the 
space of two files by advancing the inner shoulder towards the flank 
to which they belong. 

The captain will turn to his company, to watch the observance 
of the principles which have just been prescribed. 

M 



178 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The instructor having caused groups of two files to break one 
after another, and to return again into line, will afterwards cause 
two or three groups to break together, and for this purpose, will 
command : Four or six files from left (or righC) to rear ; March. 
The files designated will mark time ; each rank will advance a little 
the outer shoulder as soon as the rear rank of the company shall 
clear it, will oblique at once, and each group will place itself behind 
the four neighboring files, and in the same manner, as if the move- 
ment had been executed group by group, taking care that the dis- 
tances are preserved. 

The instructor will next order the captain to cause two or three 
groups to be brought into line at once, who turning to the company, 
will command : 

Four or six files into line — March. 

At the command march, the files designated will advance the 
inner shoulder, move up and form on the flank of the company by 
the shortest lines. 

As often as files shall break off to the rear, the guide on that 
flank will gradually close on the nearest front rank man remaining 
in line, and he will also open out to make room for files ordered 
into line. 

The files which march in the rear are disposed in the following 
order : the left files as if the company was marching by the right 
flank, and the right files as if the company was marching by the 
left flank. Consequently, whenever there is on the right or left of 
a subdivision, a file which does not belong to a group, it will be 
broken singly. 

It is necessary to the preservation of distances in column that the 
men should be habituated in the schools of detail to execute the 
movements of this article with precision. 

If new files broken off do not step well to the left or right in 
obliquing ; if, when files are ordered into line, they do not move up 
with promptitude and precision, in either case the following files 
will be arrested in their march, and thereby cause the column to be 
lengthened out. 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 179 

The instructor will place himself on the flank from which the 
files are broken, to assure himself of the exact observance of the 
principles. 

Files will only be broken off from the side of direction, in order 
that the whole company may easily pass from the front to the flank 
march. 

To march the column in route, and to execute the movements incident 

thereto. 

252. The swiftness of the route step will be 110 steps in a 
minute ; this swiftness will be habitually maintained in column in 
route, when the roads and ground may permit. 

The company being at a halt, and supposed to constitute a sub- 
division of a column, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to 
march in the route step, he will command : 

1. Column, forward. 2. Guide, left (or right). 3. Route step. 
4. March. 

At the command march, repeated by the captain, the two ranks 
will step off together; the rear rank will take, in marching, by 
shortening a, few steps, a distance of one pace (twenty-eight inches) 
from the rank preceding, which distance will be computed from the 
breasts of the men in the rear rank, to the knapsacks of the men in 
the front rank. The men, without further command, will immedi- 
ately carry their arms at will, as indicated in the school of the soldier. 
They will no longer be required to march in the cadenced pace, or 
with the same foot, or to remain silent. The files will march at ease ; 
but care will be taken to prevent the ranks from intermixing, the 
front rank from getting in advance of the guide, and the rear rank 
from opening to too great a distance. 

The company marching in the route step, the instructor will cause 
it to change direction, which will be executed without formal com- 
mands, on a simple caution from the captain ; the rear rank will 
come up to change direction in the same manner as the front rank. 
Each rank will conform itself, although in the route step, to the 
principles which have been prescribed for the change in closed 



180 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

ranks, with this difference only; that the pivot man, instead of 
taking steps of nine, will take steps of fourteen inches, in order to 
clear the wheeling point. 

The company marching in the route step, to cause it to pass to 
the cadenced step, the instructor will first order pieces to be brought 
to the shoulder, and then command : 

1. Quicli time. 2. March. 

At the command march, the men will resume the cadenced step, 
and will close so as to leave a distance of sixteen inches between 
each rank. 

253. The company marching in the cadenced pace, the instructor, 
to cause it to take the route step will command : 

1. Route step. 2. March. 

At the command march, the front rank will continue the step of 
twenty-eight inches, the rear rank will take, by gradually shortening 
the step, the distance of twenty-eight inches from the front rank : 
the m-cn will carry their arms at will. 

The instructor will exercise the company in increasing and 
diminishing front, by platoon, which will be executed by the same 
commands, and the same means, as if the company were marching 
in the cadenced step. When the company breaks into platoons, the 
chief of each will move to the flank of his platoon, and will take 
the place of the guide, who will step back into the rear rank. 

254. The company being in column, by platoon, and marching 
in the route step, the instructor can cause the front to be diminished 
and increased, by section, if the platoons have a front of twelve files 
or more. 

The movements of diminishing and increasing front, by section, 
will be executed according to the principles indicated for the same 
movement by platoon. The right sections of platoons will be com- 
manded by the captain and first lieutenant, respectively ; the left 
sections, by the two next subalterns in rank, or, in their absence, 
by sergeants. 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 181 

The instructor wisliing to diminisli by section^ will give tlie order 
to the captain, who will command : 

1. Break into sectio7is. 2. March. 

As soon as the platoons shall be broken, each chief of section 
will place himself on its directing flank in the front rank, the guides 
who will be thus displaced, will fall back into the rear rank : the 
file-closers will close up to within one pace of this rank. 

Platoons will be broken into sections only in the column in route, 
the movement will never be executed in the manoeuvres, whatever 
may be the front of the company. 

When the instructor shall wish to re-form platoons, he will give 
the order to the captain, who will command : 

1. Form platoons. 2. March. 

At the first command, each chief of section will place himself 
before its centre, and the guides will pass into the front rank. At 
the command march, the movement will be executed as has been 
prescribed for forming company. The moment the platoons are 
formed, the chiefs of the left sections will return to their places as 
file-closers. 

The instructor will also cause to be executed the diminishing and 
increasing front by files, as prescribed in the preceding article, and 
in the same manner, as if marching in the cadenced step. When 
the company is broken into sections, the subdivisions must not be 
reduced to a front of less than six files, not counting the chief of 
the section. 

The company being broken by platoon, or by section, the instructor 
will cause it, marching in the route step, to march by the flank in 
the same direction, by the commands and the means indicated. The 
moment the subdivisions shall face to the right (or left), the first 
file of each will wheel to the left (or right), in marching, to pro- 
long the direction, and to unite with the rear file of the subdivision 
immediately preceding. The file-closers will take their habitual 
places in the march by the flank, before the union of the subdivisions. 

255. If the company be marching by the right flank, and the 
16 



182 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

instructor should wisli to un double tlie files, wliicli might sometimes 
be found necessary, lie will inform the captain, who, after causing 
the cadenced step to be resumed, and arms to be shouldered or sup^ 
ported, will command : 

1. In two ranks, undouhle files. 2. March. 

At the second command, the odd numbers will continue to march 
straight forward, the even numbers will shorten the step, and ob- 
liquing to the left will place themselves promptly behind the odd 
numbers ; the rear rank will gain a step to the left so as to re-take 
the touch of elbows on the side of the front rank. 

If the company be marching by the left flank, it will be the even 
numbers who will continue to march forward, and the odd numbers 
who will undouble. 

If the instructor should wish to double the files, he will give the 
order to the captain, who will command : 

1. In four ranks, double files. 2. March. 

At the command march, the files will double in the manner as 
explained, when the company faces by the right or the left flank. 
The instructor will afterwards cause the route step to be resumed. 

The various movements prescribed in this lesson may be executed 
in double quick time. The men will be brought, by degrees, to 
pass over at this g-ait about 1100 yards in seven minutes. 

When the company marching in the route step shall halt, the rear 
rank will close up at the command halt, and the whole will shoulder 
arms. 

Marching in the route step, the men will be permitted to carry 
their pieces in the manner they shall find most convenient, paying 
attention only to holding the muzzles up, so as to avoid accidents. 

Countermarch. 

256. The company being at a halt, and supposed to constitute a 
part of a column, right in front, when the instructor shall wish to 
cause it to countermarch, he will command : 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 



183 



1. Countermarch. 2. Compani/, right 
4. March. 



Face. 3. Bi/ file left. 



(Fig. 54.) At the second command, the company will face to 
the right, the two guides to the right about ) the captain will go to 
the right of his company and cause two files to break to the rear, and 



□ 5 BE 9 9 



csj- 



? 



% of . U □ U 




Dh d 



i:>l..i..i..l..l..i..l..J..L.l..i..L.J..J..l..LJ..LJ.J-l>^ 
i..J.j-J.i..lJ..LJ-.LJ.-L.J..iJ..lJ..LJ-.U 



then place himself by the side of the front rank man, to conduct 
him. 

At the command march, both guides will stand fast ; the company 
will step ofi" smartly ) the first file, conducted by the captain, will 
wheel around the right guide, and direct its march along the front 
rank so as to arrive behind, and two paces from the left guide ; each 
file will come in succession to wheel on the same ground around the 
right guide ; the leading file having arrived at a point opposite to 
the left guide, the captain will command : 

1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Right — Dress. 

The first command will be given at four paces from the point 
where the leading file is to rest. 

At the second command, the company will halt. 

At the third, it will face to the front. 

At the fourth, the company will dress by the right; the captain 
will step two paces outside of the left guide, now on the right, and 
direct the alignment, so that the front rank may be enclosed between 
the two guides : the company being aligned, he will command 
Front, and place himself before the centre of the company as if in 



184 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

column ; tlie guides, passing along the front rank, will shift to their 
proper places, on the right and left of that rank. 

In a column, by platoon, the countermarch will be executed by 
the same commands, and according to the same principles ; the guide 
of each platoon will face about, and its chief will place himself by 
the side of the file on the right, to conduct it. 

In a column, left in front, the countermarch will be executed by 
inverse commands and means, but according to the same principles 
Thus, the movement will be made by the right flank of subdivisions, 
if the right be in front, and by the left flank, if the left be in front ', 
in both cases the subdivisions will wheel by file to the side of the 
front rank. 

Being in column hy platoon, to form on the rigJit (or left^ into line 

of battle. 

257. The column by platoon, right in front, being in march, the 
instructor wishing to form it on the right into line of battle, will 
command : 

1. On the right into line. 2, Guide right. 

(Fig. 55.) At the second command, the guide of each platoon 
will shift quickly to its right flank, and the men will touch elbows 
to the right; the column will continue to march straight forward. 

The instructor having given the second command, will move 
briskly to the point at which the right of the company ought to rest 
in line, and place himself facing the point of direction to the left 
which he will choose. 

The line of battle ought to be so chosen that the guide of each 
platoon, after having turned to the right, may have at least ten paces 
to take before arriving upon that line. 

The head of the column being nearly opposite to the instructor, 
the chief of the first platoon will command; 1. Right turn; and 
when exactly opposite to that point, he will add : 

2. March. 

At the command march, the first platoon will turn to the right, 
in conformity with the principles prescribed in the school of the 
soldier. Its guide will so direct his march as to bring the front 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 



185 



rank man next on his left, opposite to the instructor : the chief of 
the platoon will march before its centre ; and when its guide shall 
be near the line of battle, he will command : 

1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 

At the command lialt, which will be given at the instant the right 
of the platoon shall arrive at the distance of three paces from the 
line of battle, the platoon will 

halt; the files not yet in line . 

will come up promptly. The 
guide will throw himself on the 
line of battle, opposite to one 
of the three left files of his 
platoon; he will face to the 
instructor, who will align him 
on the point of direction to the 
left. The chief of platoon 
having, at the same time, gone 
to the point where the right 
of the company is to rest, will, 
as soon as he sees all the files 
of the platoon in line, com- 
mand : 

X 

RigJit — Dress. '-' 

At this, the first platoon will , , , | , ,' -| 
align itself; the front rank 
man, who finds himself oppo- 
site to the guide, will rest his 
breast lightly against the right 
arm of this guide, and the chief 
of the platoon, from the right, 
will 
this man 

The second platoon will con- 
tinue to march straight forward, until its guide shall arrive opposite 
to the left file of the first ; it will then turn to the right at the 
16^ 




i 
6 



ES 



direct the alignment on 



186 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

command of its chief, and march towards the line of battle, its 
guide directing himself on the left file of the first platoon. 

The guide having arrived at the distance of three paces from the 
line of battle, this platoon will be halted, as prescribed for the first ; 
at the instant it halts, its guide will spring on the line of battle, 
opposite to one of the three left files of his platoon, and will be 
assured in his position by the instructor. 

The chief of the second platoon, seeing all its files in line, and 
its guide established on the direction, will command : 

RigJit — Dress. 

Having given this command, he will return to his place as a file- 
closer, passing around the left; the second platoon will dress up on 
the alignment of the first, and, when established, the captain will 
command : 

Front. 

The movement ended, the instructor will command : 

Guides — Posts. 

At this command, the two guides will return to their places in 
line of battle. 

A column by platoon, left in front, will form on the left into line 
of battle, according to the same principles, and, by inverse means, 
applying to the second platoon what is prescribed for the first, and 
reciprocally. The chief of the second platoon having aligned it, 
from the point of appui (the left), will retire to his place as a file- 
closer. The captain having halted the first platoon three paces 
behind the line of battle, will go to the same point to align this 
platoon, and then command : Front. At the command, guides — 
posts, given by the instructor, the captain will shift to his proper 
flank, and the guides take their places in the line of battle. 

Formation of a company from two ranks into four, and reciprocally ^ 
at a halt, and in march. 

258. The company being formed in two ranks, at a halt, and sup- 
posed to form part of a column right in front, when the instructor 
shall wish to form it into four ranks, he will command : 



SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 187 

1. In four ranks, form company. 2. Company left — Face. 3. 
March (or double quick — March). 

At the second command, the left guide will remain faced to the 
front, the company will face to the left : the rear rank will gain the 
distance of one pace from the front rank by a side step to the left 
and rear, and the men will form into four ranks as prescribed in tha 
school of the soldier. 

At the command march, the first file of four men will reface to 
the front without undoubling. All the other files of four will step 
off. and closing successively to about five inches of the preceding 
file, will halt, and immediately face to the front, the men remaining 
doubled. 

The file-closers will take their new places in line of battle, at two 
paces in rear of the fourth rank. 

The captain will superintend the movement. 

259. The company being in four ranks, when the instructor shall 
wish to form it into two ranks, he will command : 

1. In two ranks, form company. 2. Company right — Face. 3. 
March (or douUe quick — March). 

At the second command the left guide will stand fast, the com- 
pany will face to the right. 

At the command march, the right guide will step ofi" and march 
in the prolongation of the front rank. The leading file of four 
men will step off at the same time, the other files standing fast ; 
the second file will step off when there shall be between it and the 
first space sufficient to form it into two ranks. The following files 
will execute successively what has been prescribed for the second. 
As soon as the last file shall have its distance, the instructor will 
command : 

1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 

At the command front, the company will face to the front, and 
the files will undouble. 

260. The company being formed in two ranks, and marching to 
the front, when the instructor shall wish to form it into four ranks, 
he will command : 



188 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. In four ranks, form company. 2. By the left, douhle files. 3. 
March (or double qidck — March). 

At the command march, the left guide and the left file of the 
company will continue to march straight to the front : the company 
will make a half face to the left^ the odd numbers placing them- 
selves behind the even numbers. The even numbers of the rear 
rank will shorten their steps a little, to permit the odd numbers of 
the front rank to get between them and the even numbers of that 
rank. The files thus formed of fours, except the left file, will con- 
tinue to march obliquely, lengthening their steps slightly, so as to 
keep constantly abreast of the guide ; each file will close successively 
on the file next on its left, and when at the proper distance from 
that file, will face to the front by a half face to the right, and take 
the touch of elbows to the left. 

261. The company being in march to the front in four ranks, 
when the instructor shall wish to form it into two ranks, he will 
command : 

1. In two ranks, form company. 2. By the right, undouhle files. 
3. March (or douhle quick — March). 

At the command march, the left guide and the left file of the 
company will continue to march straight to the front; the company 
will make a half face to the right and march obliquely, lengthening 
the step a little, in order to keep, as near as possible, abreast of the 
guide. As soon as the second file from the left shall have gained 
to the right the interval necessary for the left file to form into two 
ranks, the second file will face to the front by a half face to the left 
and march straight forward ; the left file will immediately form into 
two ranks, and take the touch of elbows to the left. Each file will 
execute successively what has just been prescribed for the file next 
to the left, and each will form into two ranks when the file next on 
its right has obliqued the required distance and faced to the front. 

If the company be supposed to make part of a column, left in 
front, these different movements will be executed according to the 
same principles and by inverse means, substituting the indication 
left for right. 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 189 

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 

General principles and division of tlie instruction. 

262. The movements of skirmishers should be subjected to such 
rules as will give to the commander the means of moving them in 
any direction with the greatest promptitude. 

It is not expected that these movements should be executed with 
the same precision as in closed ranks, nor is it desirable, as such 
exactness would materially interfere with their prompt execution. 

When skirmishers are thrown out to clear the way for, and to 
protect the advance of, the main corps, their movements should be 
so regulated by this corps, as to keep it constantly covered. 

Every body of skirmishers should have a reserve, the strength 
and composition of which will vary according to circumstances. 

If the body thrown out be within sustaining distance of the main 
corps, a very small reserve will be sufficient for each company, whose 
duty it shall be to fill vacant places, furnish the line with cartridges, 
relieve the fatigued, and serve as a rallying point for the skirmishers. 

If the main corps be at a considerable distance, besides the com- 
pany reserves, another reserve will be required, composed of entire 
companies, which will be employed to sustain and reinforce such 
parts of the line as may be warmly attacked ; this reserve should be 
strong enough to relieve at least half the companies deployed as 
skirmishers. 

The movements of skirmishers will be executed in quick, or 
double quick time. The run will be resorted to only in cases of 
urgent necessity. 

Skirmishers will be permitted to carry their pieces in the manner 
most convenient to them. 

The movements will be habitually indicated by the sounds of the 
bugle. 

The officers, and, if necessary, the non-commissioned officers, will 
repeat, and cause the commands to be executed, as soon as they are 
given ; but to avoid mistakes, when the signals are employed, they 



190 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

will wait until the last bugle note is sounded before commencing tlie 
movement. 

Deployments. 

263. A company may be deployed as skirmishers in two ways: 
forward, and by the flank. 

The deployment forward will be adopted when the company is 
behind the line on which it is to be established as skirmishers : it 
will be deployed by the flank, when it finds itself already on that 
line. 

Whenever a company is to be deployed as skirmishers, it will be 
divided into two platoons, and each platoon will be subdivided into 
two sections ; the comrades in battle, forming groups of four men, 
will be careful to know and to sustain each other. The captain will 
assure himself that the files in the centre of each platoon and sec- 
tion are designated. 

The interval between skirmishers depends on the extent of ground 
to be covered ; but in general, it is not proper that the groups of 
four men should be removed more than forty paces from each other. 
The habitual distance between men of the same group in open 
grounds will be five paces ; in no case will they lose sight of each 
other. 

To deploy forward. 

264. A company being at a halt or in march, when the captain 
shall wish to deploy it forward on the left file of the first platoon, 
holding the second platoon in reserve, he will command : 

1. First platoon — as skirmishers. 2. On the leftfde — take in- 
tervals. 3. Marcb. (ox douUe quick — March). 

(Fig. 56.) xVt the first command, the second and third lieutenants 
will place themselves rapidly two paces behind the centres of the 
right and left sections of the first platoon ; the fifth sergeant will 
move one pace in front of the centre of the first platoon, and will 
place himself between the two sections in the front rank as soon as 
the movement begins; the fourth sergeant will place himself on the 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS, 



191 



left of the front of the same platoon, as soon as he can pass. The 
captain will indicate to the sergeant the point on which he wishes 



QBecBDiaisEiiQaEaBEaEiiiEiQi 

Mt I'll 

*^ — -D III 






! I I I 

I I I I 

I I I I 

I I I I 

I I I I 

I I I I 

I I I I 

I r I I 

I I I I 

I I I I 

I I I I 

I I I I 



Id 



Fig 56. 



him to direct his march. The first lieutenant, placing himself before 
the centre of the second platoon, will command : 

Second platoon hacJcward — MARCH. 

At this command, the second platoon will step three paces to the 
rear, so as to unmask the flank of the first platoon. It will then be 



192 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

halted by its chief, and the second sergeant will place himself on 
the lefti, and the third sergeant on the right flank of the platoon. 

At the command march, the left group of four men, conducted 
by the fourth sergeant, will direct itself on the point indicated ; all 
the other groups of fours throwing forward briskly the left shoulder, 
will move diagonally to the front in double quick time, so as to gain 
to the right the space of twenty paces, which shall be the distance 
between each group and that immediately on its left. When the 
second group from the left shall arrive on a line with, and twenty 
paces from the first, it will march straight to the front, conforming 
to the gait and direction of the first, keeping constantly on the same 
alignment and at twenty paces from it. The third group, and all 
the others, will conform to what has just been prescribed for the 
second ; they will arrive successively on the line. The right guide 
will arrive with the last group. 

The left guide having reached the point where the left of the 
line should rest, the captain will command the skirmishers to halt; 
the men composing each group of fours will then immediately 
deploy at five paces from each other, and to the right and left of 
the front rank men of the even file in each group, the rear rank 
men placing themselves on the left of their file leaders. If any 
groups be not in line at the command halt, they will move up rapidly, 
conforming to what has just been prescribed. 

If, during the deployment, the line should be fired upon by the 
enemy, the captain may cause the groups of fours to deploy, as they 
gain their proper distances. 

The line being formed, the non-commissioned officers on the right, 
left and centre of the platoon, will place themselves ten paces in 
rear of the line, and opposite the positions they respectively occu- 
pied. The chiefs of sections will promptly rectify any irregularities, 
and then place themselves twenty-five or thirty paces in rear of the 
centre of their sections, each having with him four men taken from 
the reserve, and also a bugler, who will repeat, if necessary, the sig- 
nals sounded by the captain. 

Skirmishers should be particularly instructed to take advantage 
of any cover which the ground may offer, and should lie flat on the 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 193 

ground wlienever sucli a movement is necessary to protect them from 
the fire of the enemy. Regularity in the alignment should yield 
to this important advantage. 

When the movement begins, the first lieutenant will face the 
second platoon about, and march it promptly, and by the shortest 
line, to about 150 paces in rear of the centre of the line. He will 
hold it always at this distance, unless ordered to the contrary. 

The reserve will conform itself to all the movements of the line. 
This rule is general. 

Light troops will carry their bayonets habitually in the scabbard, 
and this rule applies equally to the skirmishers and the reserve ; 
whenever bayonets are required to be fixed, a particular signal will 
be given. The captain will give a general superintendence to the 
whole deployment, and then promptly place himself about eighty 
paces in rear of the centre of the line. He will have with him a 
bugler and four men taken from the reserve. 

The deployment may be made on the right or the centre of the 
platoon, by the same commands, substituting the indication inglit or 
centre, for that of left file. 

The deployment on the right or the centre will be made according 
to the principles prescribed above ; in this latter case, the centre of 
the platoon will be marked by the right group of fours in the second 
section ; the fifth sergeant will place himself on the right of this 
group, and serve as the guide of the platoon during the deployment. 

In whatever manner the deployment be made, on the right, left, 
or centre, the men in each group of fours will always deploy at five 
paces from each other, and upon the front rank man of the even 
numbered file. The deployments will habitually be made at twenty 
paces interval; but if a greater interval be required, it will be 
indicated in the command. 

If a company be thrown out as skirmishers, so near the main 
body as to render a reserve unnecessary, the entire company will be 
extended in the same manner, and according to the same principles, 
as for the deployment of a platoon. In this case, the third lieu- 
tenant will command the fourth section, and a non-commissioned 
officer designated for that purpose, the second section; the fifth 
17 N ' 



194 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

sergeant will act as centre guide ; the file-closers will place them- 
selves ten paces in rear of the line, and opposite their places in line 
of battle. The first and second lieutenant will each have a bugler 
near him. 

To deploy hy the flanh. 

265. The company being at a halt, when the captain shall wish 
to deploy it by the flank, holding the first platoon in reserve, he will 
command : 

1. Second platoon — as skirmishers. 2. By the right flank — tahe 
intervals. 3. March (or double quick — March). 

(Fig. 57.) At the first command, the first and third lieutenants 
will place themselves, respectively, two paces behind the centres of 
the first and second sections of the second platoon ; the fifth ser- 
geant will place himself one pace in front of the centre of the second 
platoon ; the third sergeant, as soon as he can pass, will place him- 
self on the right of the front rank of the same platoon. The cap- 
tain will indicate to him the point on which he wishes him to direct 
his march. The chief of the first platoon will execute what has 
been prescribed for the chief of the second platoon, No. 264. 
The fourth sergeant will place himself on the left flank of the 
reserve, the first sergeant will remain on the right flank. 

At the second command, the first and third lieutenants will place 
themselves two paces behind the left group of their respective 
sections. 

At the command march, the second platoon will face to the right, 
and commence the movement; the left group of fours will stand 
fast, but will deploy as soon as there is room on its right, conform- 
ing to what has been prescribed. No. 264 ; the third sergeant will 
place himself on the left of the right group, -to conduct it; the 
second group will halt at twenty paces from the one on its left, the 
third group at twenty paces from the second, and so on to the right. 
As thf groups halt, they will face to the enemy, and deploy as has 
been explained for the left group. 

The chiefs of sections will pay particular attention to the succes- 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 



195 



sive deployments of the groups^ keeping near tlie group about to 
halt, so as to rectify any errors which may be committed. When 
the deployment is completed, they will place themselves thirty paces 



^ QDEQQQEiaCillQQtillEllQaEgEaaEillSIiilOISilEIBIEiBQSaQa 
t— ■ 01 « 



Bo 

DSETQ 



BOBOBIIiaESElCiBOtainiiieaia or 



B B n E) 



edshq 

IB ffl 



-^ — > 



Fij 57, 



in rear of the centre of their sections, as has been heretofore pre- 
scribed. The non-commissioned officers will also place themselves 
as previously indicated. 

As soon as the movement commences, the chief of the first pla- 
toon, causing it to face about, will move it as indicated No. 264, 



196 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Tlie deployment may be made by the left flank according to the 
same principles, substituting left flank for right flank. 

266. If the captain should wish to deploy the company upon the 
centre of one of the platoons, he will command : 

1. Second platoon — as skirmishers. 2. By the right and left flanks 
— take intervals. 3. M.ARQB. (on: double quick — ^Iajr.qyC). 

At the first command, the officers and non-commissioned officers 
will conform to what has been prescribed No. 265. 

At the second command, the first lieutenant will place himself 
behind the left group of the right section of the second platoon, 
the third lieutenant behind the right group of the left section of 
the same platoon. 

At the command march, the right section will face to the right, 
ih.Q left section will face to the left, the group on the right of this 
latter section will stand fast. The two sections will move ofi" in 
opposite directions; the third sergeant will place himself on the left 
of the right file to conduct it, the second sergeant on the right of 
the left file. The two groups nearest that which stands fast, will 
each halt at twenty paces from this group, and each of the other 
groups will halt at twenty paces from the group which is in rear of 
it. Each group will deploy as heretofore prescribed No, 264. 

The first and third lieutenants will direct the movement, holding 
themselves always abreast of the group which is about to halt. 

The captain can cause the deployment to be made on any named 
group whatsoever ; in this case the fifth sergeant will place himself 
before the group indicated, and the deployment will be made 
according to the principles heretofore prescribed. 

The entire company may be also deployed, according to the same 
principles. 

To extend intervals. 

267. This movement, which is employed to extend a line of 
skirmishers, will be executed according to the principles prescribed 
for deployments. 

If it be supposed that the line of skirmishers is at a halt, and 
that the captain wishes to extend it to the left, he will command : 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 



19^ 



1. By the left Jianh (so many paces) extend intervals. 2. March 
(or double quick — March). 
(Fig. 58.) At tlie command march, tlie group on tlie right will 
stand fast, all the other groups will face to the left, and each group 
will extend its interval to the prescribed distance by the means indi- 
cated No. 265. 



The men of the same group will continue to preserve between 
each other the distance of five paces, unless the nature of the ground 



198 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

should render it necessary tliat tliey should close nearer, in order to 
keep in sight of each other. The intervals refer to the spaces be- 
tween the groups, and not to the distances between the men in each 
group. The intervals will be taken from the right or left man of 
the neighboring group. 

If the line of skirmishers be marching to the front, and the cap- 
tain should wish to es;tend it to the right, he will command : 

1. On the left group (so mam/ paces) extend intervals. 2. March 
(or double quick — March). 

The left group, conducted by the guide, will continue to march 
on the point of direction ; the other groups throwing forward the 
left shoulder, and taking the double quick step, will open their 
intervals to the prescribed distance. 

Intervals may be extended on the centre of this line, according 
to the same principles. 

If, in extending intervals, it be intended that one company or 

platoon should occupy a line which had been previously occupied 

by two, the men of the company or platoon which is to retire, will 

fall successively to the rear as they are relieved by the extension of 

the intervals. 

To close intervals. 

268. This movement, like that of opening intervals, will be exe- 
cuted according to the principles prescribed for the deployments. 

If the line of skirmishers be halted, and the captain should wish 
to close intervals to the left, he will command : 

1. By the left flanh {so many paces) close intervals. 2. March (or 
double quick — March). 

(Fig. 59.) At the command march, the left group will stand 
fast, the other groups will face to the left and close to the prescribed 
distance, each group facing to the enemy as it attains its proper 
distance. 

If the line be marching to the front, the captain will command : 

1 On the left group (so many paces) close irifervals. 2. March (or 
douhle quick — March). 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 199 



o a 



Fiff 53. 



200 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The left group, conducted by tlie guide, will continue to move on 
in the direction previously indicated ; the other groups, advancing 
the right shoulder, will close to the left, until the intervals are re- 
duced to the prescribed distance. 

Intervals may be closed on the right, or on the centre, according 
to the same principles. 

When intervals are to be closed up, in order to reinforce a line 
of skirmishers, so as to cause two companies to cover the ground 
which had been previously occupied by one, the new company will 
deploy so as to finish its movement at twenty paces in rear of the 
line it is to occupy, and the men will successively move upon that 
line, as they shall be unmasked by the men of the old company. 
The reserves of the two companies will unite behind the centre of 
the line. 

To relieve a company deployed as skirmishers. 

269. When a company of skirmishers is to be relieved, the cap- 
tain will be advised of the intention, which he will immediately 
communicate to the first and second lieutenants. 

The new company will execute its deployment forward, so as to 
finish the movement at about twenty paces in rear of the line. 

Arrived at this distance, the men of the new company, by com- 
mand of their captain, will advance rapidly a few paces beyond the 
old line and halt; the new line being established, the old company 
will assemble on its reserve, taking care not to get into groups of 
fours until they are beyond the fire of the enemy. 

If the skirmishers to be relieved are marching in retreat, the 
company thrown out to relieve them will deploy by the flank, as 
prescribed No. 265 and following. The old skirmishers will con- 
tinue to retire with order, and having passed the new line, they will 
form upon the reserve. 

To advance. 

To advance in line, and to retreat in line. 

270. When a platoon or a company deployed as skirmishers is 
marching by the front, the guide will be habitually in the centre. 
No particular indication to this effect need be given in the com- 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 201 

mands, but if on tlie contrary it be intended that the directing 
guide should be on the right^ or left, the command guide right, or 
guide lefty will be given immediately after that of forward. 

The captain, wishing the line of skirmishers to advance, will 
command : 

1. Forward. 2. IsIkrck {ox douhle quich — March). 

This command will be repeated with the greatest rapidity by the 
chiefs of sections, and in case of need, by the sergeants. This rule 
is general, whether the skirmishers march by the front or by the 
flank. 

At the first command, three sergeants will move briskly on the 
line, the first on the right, the second on the left, and the third in 
the centre. 

At the command march, the line will move to the front, the 
guide charged with the direction will move on the point indicated 
to him, the skirmishers will hold themselves aligned on this guide, 
and preserve their intervals towards him. 

The chiefs of sections will march immediately behind their sec- 
tions, so as to direct their movements. 

The captain will give a general superintendence to the movement. 

When he shall wish to halt the skirmishers, he will command : 

Halt. 

At this command, briskly repeated, the line will halt. The chiefs 
of sections will promptly rectify any irregularity in the alignment 
and intervals, and after taking every possible advantage which the 
ground may ofier for protecting the men, they, with the three ser- 
geants in the line, will retire to their proper places in rear, 

271. The captain, wishing to march the skirmishers in retreat, 
will command ; 

1. In retreat. 2. March (or douhle quick — March). 

At the first command, the three sergeants will move on the line 
as prescribed No. 270. 

At the command march, the skirmishers will face about indi- 



202 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

vidually, and marcli to tlie rear, conforming to the principles pre- 
scribed No. 270. 

The officers and sergeants will use every exertion to preserve 
order. 

To halt the skirmishers, marching in retreat, the captain will 
command : 

Halt. 

At this command, the skirmishers will halt, and immediately face 
to the front. 

The chiefs of sections and the three guides will each conform 
himself to what is prescribed No. 270. 

To change direction. 

272. If the commander of a line of skirmishers shall wish to 
cause it to change direction to the right, he will command : 

1. Right wheel. 2. March (or double quich — March). 

At the command march^ the right guide will mark time in his 
place ; the left guide will move in a circle to the right, and that he 
may properly regulate his movements, will occasionally cast his eyes 
to the right, so as to observe the direction of the line, and the nature 
of the ground to be passed over. The centre guide will also march 
in a circle to the right, and in order to conform his movements to 
the general direction, will take care that his steps are only half the 
length of the steps of the guide on the left. 

The skirmishers will regulate the length of their steps by their 
distance from the marching flank, being less as they approach the 
pivot, and greater as they are removed from it ; they will often look 
to the marching flank, so as to preserve the direction and their 
intervals. 

When the commander of the line shall wish to resume the direct 
march, he will command : 

1. Forward. 2. March. 

At the command march, the line will cease to wheel, and the 
skirmishers will move direct to the front; the centre guide will 
march on the point which will be indicated to him. 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 203 

If the captain should wish to halt the line, in place of moving it 
to the front, he will command : 

Halt. 

At this command, the line will halt. 

A change of direction to the left will be made according to the 
Bame principles, and by inverse means. 

A line of skirmishers marching in retreat will change direction 
by the same means, and by the same commands, as a line marching 
in advance; for example, if the captain should wish to refuse his 
left, now become the right, he will command : 

1. Left wheel. 2. March. 

At the command lialt, the skirmishers will face to the enemy. 

But if, instead of halting the line, the captain should wish to 
continue to march it in retreat, he will, when he judges the line has 
wheeled sufficiently, command : 

1. In retreat. 2. March. 

To march hy the Jlanh. 

273. The captain, wishing the skirmishers to march by the right 
flank, will command : 

1. By the right flank. 2. March (or douhle quick — March). 

At the first command, the three sergeants will place themselves 
on the line. 

At the command march, the skirmishers will face to the right 
and move oflf ; the right guide will place himself by the side of the 
leading man on the right to conduct him, and will march on the 
point indicated ; each skirmisher will take care to follow exactly in 
the direction of the one immediately preceding him, and to preserve 
his distance. 

The skirmishers may be marched by the left flank, according to 
the same principles, and by the same commands, substituting left for 
right; the left guide will place himself by the side of the leading 
man to conduct him. 



204 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

If the skirmisliers be marcliing by the flank, and the captain 
should wish to halt them, he will command : 

Halt. 

At this command, the skirmishers will halt and face to the enemy. 
The officers and sergeants will conform to what has been prescribed 
No. 270. 

The reserve should execute all the movements of the line, and 
be held always about 150 paces from it, so as to be in position to 
second its operations. 

When the chief of the reserve shall wish to march it in advance, 
he will command : 

1. Platoon forward. 2. Chiide left. 8. March. 
If he should wish to march it in retreat, he will command : 
1. In retreat. 2. March. 3. Guide right 

At the command halt, it will re-face to the enemy. 

The men should be made to understand that the signals or com- 
mands, such as forward, mean that the skirmishers shall march on 
the enemy; m retreat, that they shall retire, and to the right or left 
flank, that the men must face to' the right or left, whatever may be 
their position. 

If the skirmishers be marching by the flank, and the captain 
should wish to change direction to the right (or left), he will com- 
mand : 

1. By file right (or left). 2. March. 

These movements will also be executed by the signals No. 262. 

THE FIRINGS. 
274. Skirmishers will fire either at a halt or marching. 

To fire at a halt. 
To cause this fire to be executed, the captain will command : 
Commence — Firing. 



I 



I N STRUCT 10 iN FOR SKIRMISHERS. 205 

At tliis command, briskly repeated, the men of the front rank 
will commence firing ; they will reload rapidly, and hold themselves 
in readiness to fire again. During this time the men of the rear 
rank will come to a ready, and as soon as their respective file leaders 
have loaded, they will also fire and reload. The men of each file 
will thus continue the firing, conforming to this principle, that th 
one or the other shall always have his piece loaded. 

Light troops should be always calm, so as to aim with accuracy ; 
they should, moreover, endeavor to estimate correctly the distances 
between themselves and the enemy to be hit, and thus be enabled 
to deliver their fire with the greater certainty of success. 

Skirmishers will not remain in the same place whilst reloading, 
unless protected by accidents in the ground. 

To fire marching. 

275. This fire will be executed by the same commands as the fire 
at a halt. 

At the command commence firing , if the line be advancing, the 
front rank man of every file will halt, fire, and reload before throw- 
ing himself forward. The rear rank man of the same file will 
continue to march, and after passing ten or twelve paces beyond his 
front rank man will halt, come to a ready, select his object, and fire 
when his front rank man has loaded ] the fire will thus continue to 
be executed by each file ; the skirmishers will keep united, and 
endeavor, as much as possible, to preserve the general direction of 
the alignment. 

If the line be marching in retreat, at the command commence 
firing^ the front rank man of every file will halt, face to the enemy, 
fire, and then reload whilst moving to the rear; the rear rank man 
of the same file will continue to march, and halt ten or twelve paces 
beyond his front rank man, face about, come to a ready, and fire, 
when his front rank man has passed him in retreat and loaded ] after 
which, he will move to the rear and reload ; the front rank man in 
his turn, after marching briskly to the rear, will halt at ten or twelve 
paces from the rear rank, face to the enemy, load his piece and fire, 
18 



206 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

conforming to wliat has just been prescribed; the firing will thus 
be continued. 

If the company be marching by the right flank, at the command, 
commence firing, the front rank man of every file will face to the 
enemy, step one pace forward, halt, and fire ; the rear rank man will 
continue to move forward. As soon as the front rank man has fired, 
he will place himself briskly behind his rear rank man and reload 
•whilst marching. When he has loaded, the rear rank man will, in 
his turn, step one pace forward, halt, and fire, and returning to the 
ranks, will place himself behind his front rank man ; the latter, in 
his turn, will act in the same manner, observing the same principles. 
At the command, cease firing, the men of the rear rank will retake 
their original positions, if not already there. 

If the company be marching by the left flank, the fire will be 
executed according to the same principles, but in this case it will 
be the rear rank men who will be first. 

The following rules will be observed in the cases to which they 
apply : 

If the line be firing at a halt, or whilst marching by the flank, 
at the command. Forward — March, it will be the men whose 
pieces are loaded, without regard to the particular rank to which 
they belong, who will move to the front. Those men whose pieces 
have been discharged, will remain in their places to load them before 
moving forward, and the firing will be continued agreeably to the 
principles prescribed above. 

If the line be firing either at a halt, advancing, or whilst march- 
ing by the flank, at the command. In retreat — March, the men 
whose pieces are loaded will remain faced to the enemy, and will 
fire in this position; the men whose pieces are discharged will 
retreat loading them, and the fire will be continued agreeably to the 
principles prescribed for the fire in marching in retreat. 

If the line of skirmishers be firing either at a halt, advancing, or 
in retreat, at the command. By the right (or leff) flank — March, 
the men whose pieces are loaded will step one pace out of the general 
alignment, face to the enemy, and fire in this position ; the men 
whose pieces are unloaded will face to the right (or left) and march 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 207 

in the direction indicated. The men who stepped out of the ranks 
will place themselves, immediately after firing, upon the general 
direction, and in rear of their front or rear rank men, as the case 
may be. The fire will be continued according to the principles 
prescribed for firing when marching by a flank. 

Skirmishers will be habituated to load their pieces whilst march- 
ing; but they will be enjoined to halt always an instant, when in 
the act of charging cartridge, and priming. 

They should be practised to fire and load kneeling, lying down, 
and sitting, and much liberty should be allowed in these exercises, 
in order that they may be executed in the manner found to be most 
convenient. Skirmishers should be cautioned not to forget that, in 
whatever position they may load, it is important that the piece should 
be placed upright before ramming, in order that the entire charge 
of powder may reach the bottom of the bore. 

In commencing the fire, the men of the same rank should not all 
fire at once, and the men of the same file should be particular that 
one or the other of them be always loaded. 

In retreating, the ofiicer commanding the skirmishers should seize 
on every advantage which the ground may present, for arresting 
the enemy as long as possible. 

At the signal to cease firing, the captain will see that the order 
is promptly obeyed ; but the men who may not be loaded, will load. 
If the line be marching, it will continue the movement; but the 
man of each file who happens to be in front, will wait until the man 
in rear shall be abreast with him. 

If a line of skirmishers be firing advancing, at the command halty 
the line will re-form upon the skirmishers who are in front; when 
the line is retreating, upon the skirmishers who are in rear. 

276. Officers should watch with the greatest possible vigilance 
over a line of skirmishers ; in battle, they should neither carry a 
rifle or fowling piece. In all the firings, they, as well as the ser* 
geants, should see that order and silence are preserved, and that 
the skirmishers do not wander imprudently ; they should especially 
caution them to be calm and collected ; not to fire until they dis- 
tinctly perceive the objects at which they aim, and are sure that 



208 MANUAL EOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 

those objects are witliin proper range. Skirmishers should take 
advantage promptly, and with intelligence, of all shelter, and of all 
accidents of the ground, to conceal themselves from the view of the 
enemy, and to protect themselves from his fire. It may often happen, 
that intervals are momentarily lost when several men near each 
other find a common shelter -, but when they quit this position, they 
should immediately resume their intervals and their places in line, 
so that they may not, by crowding, needlessly expose themselves to 
the fire of the enemy. 

THE RALLY. 
To form column. 

Til. A company deployed as skirmishers, is rallied in order to 
oppose the enemy with better success ; the rallies are made at a run, 
and with bayonets fixed; when ordered to rally, the skirmishers fix 
bayonets without command. 

There are several ways of rallying, which the chief of the line 
will adopt according to circumstances. 

If the line, marching or at a halt, be merely disturbed by scat- 
tered horsemen, it will not be necessary to fall back on the reserve, 
but the captain will cause bayonets to be fixed. If the horsemen 
should, however, advance to charge the skirmishers, the captain will 
command, rally hy fours. The line will halt if marching, and the 
four men of each group will execute this rally in the following 
manner : the front rank man of the even numbered file will take 
the position of guard against cavalry ; the rear rank man of the 
odd numbered file will also take the position of guard against cavalry, 
turning his back to him, his right foot thirteen inches from the 
right foot of the former, and parallel to it ; the front rank man of 
the odd file, and the rear rank man of the even file, will also place 
themselves back to back, taking a like position, and between the 
two men already established, facing to the right and left; the right 
feet of the four men will be brought together, forming a square, 
and serving for mutual support. The four men in each group will 
come to a ready, fire as occasion may offer, and load without moving 
their feet. (Fig. 60.) 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS, 



:09 



The captain and chiefs of sections will each cause the four men 
who constitute his guard to form square, the men separating so as 
to enable him and the bugler to place themselves in the centre. 



m 



Fin- 60. 



'^'5 0'^ Bija .h Iff 61. Eg^aa^ 

aaiaa o ebqej 



\ \ 
\ \ 
\ \ 




Ficr 62. 



The three sergeants will each promptly place himself in the group 
nearest him in the line of skirmishers. 

Whenever the captain shall judge these squares too weak, but 
should wish to hold his position by strengthening his line, he will 
command : 

Rally hy sections. 

278. At this command, the chiefs of sections will move rapidly on 
the centre group of their respective sections, or on any other interior 
group whose position might offer a shelter, or other particular ad- 
vantage ; the skirmishers will collect rapidly at a run on this group, 
and without distinction of numbers. The men composing the group 
on which the formation is made, will immediately form square, as 
18* o 



210 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

heretofore explained, and elevate their pieces, the bayonets upper- 
most, in order to indicate the point on which the rally is to be made. 
The other skirmishers, as they arrive, will occupy and fill the open an- 
gular spaces between these four men, and successively rally around 
this first nucleus, and in such manner as to form rapidly a compact 
circle. The skirmishers will take as they arrive, the position of charge 
bayonet, the point of the bayonet more elevated, and will cock their 
pieces in this position. The movement concluded, the two exterior 
ranks will fire as occasion may offer, and load without moving their 
feet. (Fig. 61.) 

The captain will move rapidly with his guard, wherever he may 
judge his presence most necessary. 

The officers and sergeants will be particular to ebserve that the 
rally is made in silence, and with promptitude and order; that some 
pieces in each of their subdivisions be at all times loaded, and that 
the fire is directed on those points only where it will be most effective. 

If the reserve should be threatened, it will form into a circle 
around its chief. 

If the captain, or commander of a line of skirmishers formed of 
many platoons, should judge that the rally by section does not offer 
sufficient resistance, he will cause the rally by platoons to be exe- 
cuted, and for this purpose, will command : 

Holly hy platoons. 

279. This movement will be executed according to the same prin- 
ciples, and by the same means, as the rally by sections. The chiefa 
of platoon will conform to what has been prescribed for the chiefs 
of S".ction. 

The captain wishing to rally the skirmishers on the reserve, will 
command : 

Rally on the reserve. 

280. At this command, the captain will move briskly on the re- 
serve; the officer who commands it will take immediate steps to 
form square ; for this purpose, he will cause the half sections on 
the fianks to be thrown perpendicularly to the rear; he will order 
the men to come to a ready. 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 211 

The skirmishers of each section^ taking the run, will form rapidly 
into groups, and upon that man of each group who is nearest the 
centre of the section. These groups will direct themselves diago- 
nally towards each other, and in such manner as to forni into sec- 
tions with the greatest possible rapidity while moving to the rear ; 
the officers and sergeants will see that this formation is made in 
proper order, and the chiefs will direct their sections upon the 
reserve, taking care to unmask it to the right and left. As the 
skirmishers arrive, they will continue and complete the formation 
of the square begun by the reserve, closings in rapidly upon the 
latter, without regard to their places in line ; they will come to a 
ready without command, and fire upon the enemy; which will 
also be done by the reserve as soon as it is unmasked by the skir- 
mishers. (Fig. 62.) 

If a section should be closely pressed by cavalry while retreating 
its chief will command halt; at this command, the men will form 
rapidly into a compact circle around the officer, who will re-form 
his section and resume the march, the moment he can do so with 
safety. 

The formation of the square in a prompt and efficient manner, 
requires coolness and activity on the part of both officers and ser- 
geants. 

The captain will also profit by every moment of respite which the 
enemy's cavalry may leave him ; as soon as he can, he will endeavor 
to place himself beyond the reach of their charges, either by gaining 
a position where he may defend himself with advantage, or by re- 
turning to the corps to which he belongs. For this purpose, being 
in square, he will cause the company to break into column by pla- 
toons at half distance ; to this effect, he will command : 

1. Form column. 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, each platoon will dress on its centre, and 
the platoon which was facing to the rear will face about without 
command. The guides will place themselves on the right and left 
of their respective platoons, those of the second platoon will place 
themselves at half distance from those of the first, counting from 



212 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the rear rank. These dispositions being made, the captain can move 
the column in whatever direction he may judge proper. 
If he wishes to march it in retreat, he will command : 

1. In retreat. 2. March (or douUe qidck — March). 

At the command marcli, the column will immediately face by the 
rear rank, and move off in the opposite direction. As soon as the 
column is in motion, the captain will command : 

3. Guide right (or left^. 

He will indicate the direction to the leading guide ; the guides 
will march at their proper distances, and the men will keep aligned. 
If again threatened by cavalry, the captain will command : 

1. Form square. 2. March. 

At the command march, the column will halt; the first platoon 
will face about briskly, and the outer half sections of each platoon 
will be thrown perpendicularly to the rear, so as to form the second 
and third fronts of the square. The officers and sergeants will 
promptly rectify any irregularities which may be committed. 

If he should wish to march the column in advance, the captain 
will command : 

1. Form column. 2. March. 

Which will be executed as prescribed above. 

The column being formed, the captain will command : 

1. Forward. 2. March (or double quick — March). 3. Guide 
left (or right). 

At the second command, the column will move forward, and at 
the third command, the men will take the touch of elbows to the 
side of the guide. 

If the captain should wish the column to gain ground to the right 
or left, he will do so by rapid wheels to the side opposite the guide, 
and for this purpose, will change the guide whenever it may be 
necessary. 

281. If a company be in column by platoon, at half distance, 
right in front, the captain can deploy the first platoon as skirmishers 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 213 

by the means already explained ; but if it should be bis wish to 
deploy the second platoon forward on the centre file, leaving the 
first platoon in reserve, he will command : 

1. Second platoon — as skirmishers. 2. On the centre file — talce 
intervals. 3. March (or c?oit6/e quick — MARCH.) 

At the first command, the chief of the first platoon will caution 
his platoon to stand fast; the chiefs of sections of the second pla- 
toon will place themselves before the centre of their sections ; the 
fifth sergeant will place himself one pace in front of the centre of 
the second platoon. 

Ai the second command, the chief of the right section, second 
platoon, will command : Section right face-, the chief of the left 
section: Section left face. 

At the command march, these sections will move off briskly in 
opposite directions, and having unmasked the first platoon, the chiefs 
of sections will respectively command : Bt/ the left flanh — March, 
and By the right flanh — March ; and as soon as these sections 
arrive on the alignment of the first platoon, they will command : As 
skirmishers — March. The groups will then deploy according to 
prescribed principles, on the right group of the left section, which 
will be directed by the fifth sergeant on the point indicated. 

If the captain should wish the deployment made by the flank, the 
second platoon will be moved to the front by the means above stated, 
and halted after passing some steps beyond the alignment of the 
first platoon ; the deployment will then be made by the flank ac- 
cording to the principles prescribed. 

When one or more platoons are deployed as skirmishers, and the 
captain should wish to rally them on the battalion, he will command : 

Rally on the hattalion. 

282. At this command, the skirmishers and the reserve, no 
mitter what position the company to which they belong may occupy 
in order of battle, will rapidly unmask the front of the battalion, 
directing themselves in a run towards its nearest flank, and then 
form in its rear. 



214 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

As soon as the skirmishers have passed beyond the line of file- 
closers, the men will take the quick step, and the chief of each 
platoon or section will re-form his subdivision, and place it in column 
behind the wing on which it is rallied, and at ten paces from the 
rank of file-closers. These subdivisions will not be moved except 
by order of the commander of the battalion, who may, if he thinks 
proper, throw them into line of battle at the extremities of the line, 
or in the intervals between the battalions. 

If many platoons should be united behind the same wing of a 
battalion, or behind any shelter whatsoever, they should be formed 
always into close column, or into column at half distance. 

When the battalion, covered by a company of skirmishers, shall 
be formed into square, the platoons and sections of the covering 
company will be directed by their chiefs to the rear of the square, 
which will be opened at the angles to receive the skirmishers, who 
will be then formed into close column by platoons in rear of the 
first front of the square. 

If circumstances should prevent the angles of the square from 
being opened, the skirmishers will throw themselves at the feet of 
the front rank men, the right knee on the ground, the butt of the 
piece resting on the thigh, the bayonet in a threatening position. 
A part may also place themselves about the angles, where they can 
render good service by defending the sectors without fire. 

If the battalion on which the skirmishers are rallied be in column 
ready to form square, the skirmishers will be formed into close column 
by platoon, in rear of the centre of the third division, and at the 
command. Form square — March, they will move forward and close 
on the buglers. 

When skirmishers have been rallied by platoon or section behind 
the wings of a battalion, and it be wished to deploy them again to 
the front, they will be marched by the flank towards the intervals 
on the wings, and be then deployed so as to cover the front of the 
battalion. 

When platoons or sections, placed in the interior of squares or 
columns, are to be deployed, they will be marched out by the flanks, 
and then thrown forward, as is prescribed, No= 281 3 as soon as they 



I 



INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS. 215 

shall have unmasked the column or square, they will be deployed, 
the one on the right, the other on the left file. 

The assemhl?/. 

283. A company deployed as skirmishers will be assembled when 
there is no longer danger of its being distnrbed; the assembly will 
be made habitually in quick time. 

The captain wishing to assemble the skirmishers on the reserve, 
will command : 

Assemble on the reserve. 

At this command, the skirmishers will assemble by groups of 
fours; the front rank men will place themselves behind their rear 
rank men ; and each group of fours will direct itself on the reserve, 
where each will take its proper place in the ranks. When the com- 
pany is re-formed, it will rejoin the battalion to which it belongs. 

It may be also proper to assemble the skirmishers on the centre, 
or on the right or left of the line, either marching or at a halt. 

If the captain should wish to assemble them on the centre while 
marching, he will command : 

Assemhle on the centre. 

At this command, the centre guide will continue to march directly 
to the front on the point indicated; the front rank man of the 
directing file will follow the guide, and be covered by his rear rank 
man ; the other two comrades of this group, and likewise those on 
their left, will march diagonally, advancing the left shoulder and 
accelerating the gait, so as to re-form the groups while drawing 
nearer and nearer the directing file ; the men of the right section 
will unite in the same manner into groups, and then upon the direct- 
ing file, throwing forward the right shoulder. As they successively 
unite on the centre, the men will bring their pieces to the right 
shoulder. 

To assemble on the right or left file will be executed according to 
the same principles. 

The assembly of a line marching in retreat will also be executed 



216 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

according to the same principles, the front rank men marching 
behind their rear rank men. 

To assemble the line of skirmishers at a halt, and on the line they 
occupy, the captain will give the same commands ; the skirmishers 
will face to the right or left, according as they should march by the 
right or left flank, re-form the groups while marching, and thus 
arrive on the file which served as the point of formation. As they 
successively arrive, the skirmishers will support arms. 



TARGET PRACTICE. 217 



ARTICLE Y. 

TARGET PEACTIOE. 

284. In order that fire-arms in tlie hands of soldiers may produce 
their full effect, it is necessary, 

1st. That the soldier should have sufficient knowledge of the parts 
of his piece to enable him to take it apart and put it together again 
for the purpose of keeping it in order. 

2d. That the soldier should know how to load his piece properly. 
The school of the soldier contains all that is necessary on this 
subject. 

3d. That the rules for firing his piece should be known; that is 
to say, that he knows the manner of regulating his aim according 
to the distance of the object to be hit. 

4th. That he should be practised in estimating distances within 
the range of his piece. 

5th. That he should be able to take a position which enables him, 

To aim with ease ; 

To keep the body steady, without constraint ; 

Not to incline the sights to the right or left; 

To support the recoil. 

6th. When pressing on the trigger to discharge the piece, not to 
derange his aim. 

The above comprises all that is necessary for the soldier to know, 
and put in practice, in order that he may obtain the maximum effect 
of his arm. 

EXERCISE PREPARATORY TO FIRING. 

285. In the exercises which constitute this lesson, the company 
-will be divided into as many squads as there are instructors available. 

19 



218 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

When the exercise is conducted on the drill-ground, the squads will 
be formed in one rank, with an interval of one pace between the 
files, and equipped as for drill. The bayonet, as a general rule, will 
be in the scabbard, unless otherwise directed. 

Aiming. 

286. Instruction in aiming will be given at first in the quarters, if 
practicable. A bag, partially filled with sand or earth, is placed on 
a bench, the bench on a table : by striking the bag with the back 
of the hand, an indentation will be formed in which the piece can 
be rested. The piece is now placed on the bag, and aimed by the 
instructor on some object, such as a wafer on the wall, being careful 
that the sights incline neither to the right or left. He now points 
out to his squad the two points which determine the line of sight ; 
that is, the top of the front or muzzle-sight, and the middle of the 
notch of the hausse or breech-sight. The instructor explains that 
aiming consists in bringing these two points, and the object aimed 
at, in the same right line. 

Each man, in turn, placing himself behind the butt of the piece, 
without touching it, closing the left eye, looks through the middle 
of the notch of the breech-sight, over the top of the front sight, 
and on the centre of the wafer upon which the line of sight was 
previously directed, and satisfies himself that these three points are 
in the same right line. The instructor will now derange the gun, 
and then call up each soldier in turn, who will aim the piece at the 
point indicated : he will criticise the aiming, pointing out to each 
of them their error or errors, if any are found, by making them see 
that the object aimed at is not in the line of sight, but that this line 
passes to the right, left, above, or below, as the case ma}^ be. After 
having rectified the aiming of each soldier, the instructor will be 
careful to derange the piece. This exercise will be repeated ; but, 
instead of the instructor rectifying errors himself, he will first call 
up the men of his squad in turn, and ask each if the line of sight 
passes to right, left, above, or below -the point indicated, or whether 
the piece inclines to the right or left. When the men have expressed 
their opinions, the instructor will give his own, correcting thus all 



TARGET PRACTICE. 210 

the errors which have been committed. The instructor will repeat 
this exercise as often as may be necessary. 

Two drills, of two hours each, devoted to the first part of tho 
instruction in aiming, will be sufficient to teach the generality of 
men the principles of aiming a gun with the raised sight down. 

In a third drill, the instructor will explain to his squad the us- 
of the different parts of his piece, the rules for firing, the obje:-t 
and use of the raised sight, by tracing the following figure on a 
board, table, or floor. Explain that the line of fire is the axis of 




the gun indefinitely produced, that the ball describes a curved lino 
during its flight, that the line of sight is a right line passing through 
the middle of the notch of the rear sight and the top of front sight, 
that the point-blank is the second intersection of the trajectory"^ or 
curve, with the line of sight. Assuming the point-blank of a gun, 
with the hausse down, to be 200 yards, he will explain to his squad[ 
that to hit a man in the head at 200 yards, aim at his head ; at 150.' 
at his throat; at 100, at his chest, and so on. Thus, with the assist- 
ance of a curved line, and a few simple remarks adapted to th^ 
comprehension of any man of ordinary intelligence, the squad will 
receive a lesson which many will find useful in practice, and bu'; 
few will forget. The instructor will, from time to time durin- th^ 
drill, question the men, and satisfy himself that he is clearly under- 
stood. The instructor will also add, that, by the use of the hauss^ 
or raised sight, the number of points-blank are increased, and ex- 
plain the reason. 

The fourth, fifth, and sixth drills that follow will take place o^ 
the drill-ground, and squads will be exercised in aimin- at any dis 
tance between 100 and 1000 yards, or up to that point for which 
the arm is sighted. Each squad is provided with a target, a ba- 
partially filled with sand, and a tripod, formed of poles about six 



220 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

feet long, tied or fastened near the top. The tripod is placed in an 
upright position, the sand-bag on the tripod, and the piece on the 
sand-bag. Each man aims his own gun. When he pronounces his 
piece correctly aimed, the instructor calls up the remainder of the 
squad in turn, who examine the piece and inform the instructor, in 
a low tone, how, in their opinion, the gun is sighted. He then 
examines the piece himself, pronounces how the gun is aimed, calls 
up those who answered incorrectly, and, having satisfied them of 
their errors, requires the man who aim.ed the piece to correct his 
mistake. Should it be desirable to economise targets, one target will 
answer for the diiferent squads of the same company during this 
part of the drill : in that case the tripods will be placed as near 
together as practicable. Soldiers who have previously been thoroughly 
instructed in this part of the exercise, and show a knowledge of the 
first four drills, may be excused from the last two. 

Position of a Skirmisher aiming standing. 

287. Yv^hen the men can aim correctly from a rest, they will be 
instructed in the above position. 

Squads under arms will be formed in a single rank, with an inter- 
val of one pace between the files. 

The instructor, facing the squad, will give the details of the 
position, executing the same himself as he describes them. 

Aiming with sight down (when rifled musJcet is used). 
One time and three motions. 

First motion. As first motion of ^^ charge bayonet," except that 
the right foot is carried fifteen inches to rear of left heel. 

Second motion. Bring down the piece with the right hand to 
the right side, the barrel uppermost; seizing it with the left hand 
in rear of the hausse or breech-sight, the stock resting in the palm 
of this hand, the thumb extended along the stock, the left elbow 
close to the body, the muzzle as high as the eye. Cock the piece 
with the thumb of the right hand, the fingers supported against the 



TARGET PRACTICE. 221 

guard and the small of tlie stock ; seize the piece at the small of 
the stock with the right hand. 

Third motion. Turn in slightly the left toe, raise the piece with 
both hands; place the butt firmly against the shoulder, the body 
erect, the left elbow close to the body ; shut the right eye, raise the 
right shoulder in order to bring the sight to the height of the right 
eye, the elbow raised nearly to the height of the shoulder ; aim, 
keeping the line of sight horizontal and in the vertical plane of fire, 
inclining as little as possible the head to the right, the thumb of 
the right hand over the small of the stock, the last joint of the first 
finger of the right hand in front of but not touching the trigger, 
the remaining fingers under, and grasping the small of the stock. 

AiTYiing with sight down (ivhen rifle is used'). 
One time and three motions. 

First motion. Raise the piece with the right hand ; make a half- 
face to the right on the left heel ] place the hollow of the right foot 
opposite to, and fifteen inches from, left heel ', the feet square : 
seize the piece at the same time with the left hand in rear of the 
hausse or breech-sight, the thumb extending along the stock. 

Second motion. Bring down the piece with both hands ; the 
barrel uppermost, the left elbow close to the body, the muzzle as 
high as the eye. Cock the piece with the thumb of the right hand, 
the fingers supported against the guard and the small of the stock. 
Seize the piece at the small of the stock with the right hand. 

Third motion. Same as that given for rifled musket. 

The instructor directs each man to take the position, commencing 
on the right of the squad : during the instruction he will assist the 
soldier in supporting his arm by placing his right hand under or 
near the middle band. After which, the man is made to take the 
position without any assistance. The commands given in order to 
make a soldier take or abandon the positions as given above, will be : 

As a shirinisher — AiM. Cease — Aiming. 

At the first part of the last command, withdraw the finger from 
19* 



riZ MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

in front of the trigger; at the command aiming, retake the position 
of the second motion of '^Aiming with sight down ;" half-cock the 
piece, and come to a shoulder. As the instructor proceeds with the 
squad, he will direct those who have been instructed to exercise 
themselves in taking the position, keeping it for an instant; and 
then abandoning it, repeating this as often as they can while the 
rest are being instructed. Men will be cautioned not to cock the 
piece when repeating the instruction. The squad will now be ex- 
ercised in aiming together, keeping them in the position long enough 
to confirm, but not long enough to fatigue them. This drill may 
be conducted in the cjuarters. In this case the instructor will 
drill but one man at a time ', the remainder will exercise themselves 
in taking and abandoning the position as he proceeds. Two drills 
will be given to the above exercise. One will suffice for soldiers 
who have been previously instructed. 

During the drill, the soldier will not be required to aim at any 
fixed point; the object being, that he may acquire with ease the 
position of a soldier, " aiming as a skirmisher, standing,^' and the 
habit of readily catching with his eye the two points which deter- 
mine the line of sight. 

Vfhen the men are confirmed in the position described above, 
they will be exercised at aiming at a mark. First, with the sight 
down : one drill will be given to this exercise. Previous to the 
man's aiming, the instructor will order him to direct the line of 
sight below the point to be aimed at ; to raise the piece slowly until 
the line of sight is on the point designated, preserving his aim for 
an instant, keeping the body and gun immovable. During the first 
part of this drill the men will be instructed individually. 

The men will now be exercised in aiming, using the hausse fur 
ranges for which it is graduated, and the intermediate ones. 

Aiming with sight raised (luhen rifle mushet and rijie are vsed'). 

One time and four motions. 

First and Second. Same as "Aiming with sight down." 

Third motion. Raise the piece slightly with both hands^ at the 



TARGET PRACTICE. 223 

game time depressing the muzzle until the piece is horizontal, the 
left arm and stock against the body : Vv'ith the thumb and first finger 
of the right hand regulate the hausse for the distance indicated, 
and seize the piece with the right hand at the small of the stock. 

Fourth motion. Same as third motion, "Aiming with sight 
down." 

Two drills will be given to this exercise : during the first drill, 
the men will be instructed individually, commencing with the lower 
sights, and then causing the hausse to be raised gradually. 

The position of a soldier aiming as a skirmisher cannot always be 
taken exactly in the same manner, as it will be found necessary to 
lower the shoulder and arms in proportion as the hausse is elevated : 
without moving the body, or inclining the head, the soldier, by 
lowering the shoulder and arms, can take any line of sight from 250 to 
1000 yards. This will be found a good exercise for the men. In order 
to aim at objects 800, 900, and 1000 yards distant, it is necessary 
to press the heel of the butt of the piece against the shoulder. If 
men have short necks, the position is constrained, and cannot be 
taken properly. Instructors perceiving this difficulty will exercise 
their judgment in requiring men to take the position above desig- 
nated when firing at these long ranges. 

During the second drill, squads formed on the drill-ground will 
be exercised in aiming together, using the different lines of sight 
for which the hausse is regulated. In this drill the bayonet will be 
fixed when aiming at distances less than 400 yards. 

Position of a soldier hneeling and aiming as a skirmisher. 

288. The instruction will be given without times or motions. The 
instructor will command : 

Take the position of a skirmisher kneeling and aiming ; 

or, 

Cease — Aiming. 

The instructor will detail the position of a skirmisher kneeling 
and aiming, as follows. The squad is supposed to be at shouldered 
arms, the files one pace apart. Take the position of present arms; 



224 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND INIILITIA. 

then carry the right foot to the rear and to the right of the left 
heel, and in a position convenient for placing the right knee upon 
the ground in bending the left leg ; place the right knee upon the 
ground, lower the piece, the left forearm supported upon the thigh 
on the same side, the right hand on the small of the stock, the butt 
resting on the right thigh, the left hand supporting the piece near 
the lower band. Move the right leg to the left, around the knee 
supported on the ground, until this leg is nearly perpendicular to 
the direction of the left foot, and thus seat himself on the right 
heel. Raise the piece with the right hand and support it with the 
left, holding it near the lower band, the left elbow resting on the 
left thigh near the knee. With the thumb and forefinger of tlie 
right hand regulate the hausse, if necessary; cock the piece, seize 
it with the right hand at the small of the stock, the right shoulder 
raised or lowered according to the position of the target, the right 
elbow nearly to the height of the shoulder ; aim at the point indi- 
cated, keeping the top of the muzzle-sight and the bottom of the 
notch of the hausse in the vertical plane of fire, the thumb of the 
right hand over the small of the stock, the last joint of the first 
finger of the right hand in front of but not touching the trigger, 
the other fingers of this hand grasping the small of the stock. The 
instructor, having taken, and detailed at the same time, the position 
of a skirmisher kneeling and aiming, will instruct the men in aim- 
ing from this position, in conformity with what has been prescribed 
in the school of the soldier. Two drills will be given to this exer- 
cise One will suffice for soldiers previously instructed in the drill. 

Keeping the piece steady rcheii the trigger is pulled. 

289. It is easy to preserve the aim until the trigger is pressed upon 
in order to discharge the piece ; but, when this is done^ the aim is 
maintained with difficulty. When pressing on the trigger, the line 
of sight is apt to be deranged : although properly directed before 
touching the trigger, it may not be so at the moment the discharge 
takes place. The report of the discharge of his piece should find 
the soldier still preserving his aim. The soldier will attain this if 
he holds his breath from the moment he commences to touch the 



TARGET PRACTICE. 225 

trigger until the gun is discliarged -, if he does not pull the trigger 
with a jerk, or suddenly, but increases the pressure on the trigger 
by degrees ; if he places his finger in such a manner upon the 
trigger as to exercise its full force, pressing not on the extremity of 
the finger, but on the last joint, or as near this joint as the confor- 
mation of the man will permit. The instructor, holding a gun in a 
convenient position similar to that of charge-bayonet, will point out 
to each soldier in succession the manner of pulling the trigger, 
which will be done with the first finger of the right hand as de- 
scribed above, the remaining fingers of this hand under and grasp- 
ing the small of the stock, the thumb over the stock. 

The men repeat after the instructor, in succession, what he has 
just executed. After this has been repeated as often as necessary, 
the instructor explains to his squad how they should manage in 
order to fire without deranging the position of the piece after bring- 
ing the line of sight to bear on an object. He will explain and 
execute this as follows : 

Press upon the trigger by degrees with the last joint of the first 
finger of the right hand, closing the muscles of this finger without 
moving the arm, holding the breath, the sound of the discharge 
finding the soldier preserving the line of sight upon the point aimed 
at. Remain aiming an instant after the gun is discharged, to be 
assured that the object is still in the line of sight. In actual firing, 
it will be impossible to preserve the aim the instant the gun is dis- 
charged; but, should the gun hang fire, the soldier accustomed to 
remain an instant aiming will be more apt to make a good shot. 

The instructor should make the soldier understand that a good 
marksman is known by the steadiness with which he preserves his 
gun when it misses fire. 

The men will be made to take one, or the other, of the positions 
of a soldier aiming, as laid down in No. 287. They will be per- 
mitted to snap the gun without any commands being given to that 
effect. The instructor will indicate the distance, either assumed or 
real, of the target, and will see that the men use the sights cor- 
responding to those distances. The instructor will command, for 

P 



instance, ^' Take the position of a ' skirmisher aiming standing' at 
000 yards' aim." 

The exercise given in this article is considered of great import- 
ance. It will be repeated for four drills. Two will suffice for those 
men who have been previously instructed. 

Simulated firing with caps. 

290. This is the same as the preceding, except that a cap will be used, 
and it will not be necessary to explain to the soldier the manner of 
pulling the trigger. Squads assembled in the quarters will be made 
to aim at a lighted candle, which will be placed three feet or more 
from the muzzle of the gun. The line of sight will be brought to 
bear below the flame ; then, gradually raising the piece until the 
line of sight is directly on the flame, the cap will be exploded : if 
the cone and barrel of the piece are perfectly clear, and the piece 
correctly sighted, the body kept steady when aiming and at the 
moment the cap explodes, the candle will be extinguished. Simu- 
lated firing with caps will be executed in two drills. Ten caps per 
man will be exploded at each drill ; eight caps standing and two 
kneelins:. 

Simulated firing luitli blank cartridges. 

291. Firing with blank cartridges will be conducted in conformity 
with the principles laid down. The squad will be formed on the drill- 
ground as prescribed in No. 287. The men will fire in succession 
at a target, placed or supposed to be placed at diiFerent distances. 
The rules laid down in the foregoing examples relating to a soldier 
aiming will be strictly followed. This lesson will be executed in 
two drills ; ten cartridges will be fired per man at each drill ; eight 
standins^ and two kneelino:. 

The object of these drills is to accustom the men to preserve 
their aim when firing. 

Estimating distances. 

292. The company assembled fully equipped as for drill will be 
divided into at least three squads, or as many as there are company 



TARGET PRACTICE. 227 

officers present. Each officer is provided with a small cord, 25 yards 
long. The instructor will measure on the ground a right line, which 
will be marked off into distances, 

0, 50, 100, 150, 200, yards; ]■ '^- 7' '^"' 7' 

marking these distances, as measured, with a stake, stone, or line, 
on the ground. He will now direct each man of his squad to pace 
off the measured distance of 100 yards, cautioning them to be careful 
and preserve their natural gait, without attempting to increase or 
diminish the length of their step. He will direct the men to count 
the number of steps they take in passing over the distance of 100 
yards. This having been repeated at least three times by each 
soldier, who reports each time the number of steps taken by him in 
passing over 100 yards, the ratio which a yard bears to the step of 
each soldier becomes known. The instructor will inform each soldier 
the number of steps it will be necessary for him to take to pass over 
10 yards. The soldier now knowing the number of steps he must 
take to pass over 10 and 100 yards, it will be easy for him to measure 
any distance with sufficient accuracy for all practical purposes when 
firing. 

To estimate a distance greater than 100 yards — in steps — the 
soldier, having started from the point of departure, will count the 
number of steps he should take to pass over 100 yards } extending 
as a tally, at the moment of arrival, the thumb of his right hand, 
the other fingers closed : he will recommence then his count, ex- 
tending the first finger of the right hand when he has counted the 
number of steps necessary to make a second 100 yards, and so on, 
until he arrives at a point less than 100 yards from the point up to 
which he is to measure. When the soldier finds himself less than 
100 yards from the object, he will count by tens, saying, "Ten 
yards," when he has counted the number of steps necessary for him 
to pass over the distance of 10 yards, 20, 30 yards, and so on, until 
he arrives very near the object, when he will increase the length 
of his step, counting each step a yard ; and, by adding these to the 
tens, he will then only have to count as hundreds the number of 
fingers he has raised, to know the whole distance, expressed in yards. 



228 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The instructor v/ill form his squad at one of the extremities of 
the 200 yard line, which has been measured in such a way that the 
right line measured shall be perpendicular to the front of the squad« 
He will order four men to place themselves, the first at the point 
marked 50 yards, the second at the point marked 100 yards, the 
third at the point marked 150 yards, and the fourth at the point 
marked 200 yards. The men selected should be as near the same 
height as practicable. The instructor will now direct the attention 
of the squad to the different parts of the dress, arms, equipment, 
and figure of the men on the line, such as can be easily distinguished 
and recognized at 50 yards, and such as cannot be readily recognized 
at this distance. He questions each man of his squad on these 
points, not expecting all to answer alike, since the eyesight of men 
will generally differ. 

The instructor will now call the attention of the men to the 
soldier placed at the point 100 yards distant, and cause them to 
make similar observations upon this man as those already prescribed 
for the soldier at 50 yards. The instructor again questions the men, 
and will be careful to point out to them the difference that exists 
betw^een those two distances, as illustrated by the difference in the 
appearance of the same objects at these distances. The instructor 
will make, in succession, upon the two men placed at 150 and 200 
yards, similar observations as prescribed for the men at 50 and 100 
yards ; being very careful to call the attention of each man to the 
difference which exists between the four distances, illustrated by the 
distinctness with which certain objects are seen. The instructor 
will direct the squad to notice that men appear sm.aller the farther 
they are off, although in reality they are nearly the same height. 
The men stationed at the different points will be frequently replaced 
by others. When the men of the squad have made a sufficient 
number of observations upon the four distances above indicated, 
and when these observations are well impressed on their memories, 
the instructor will cause the squad to estimate intermediate distances 
between 50 and 200 -yards. ,1 

In order to do this, the instructor wall march his squad to a 
different part of the ground from that on which he measured the 



TARGET PRACTICE. 229 

distances in tlie first instance, and forni it in one rank. He now 
sends out one man, directing him to halt at a given signal. The 
instant this man steps oflf, the squad is faced about, in order that 
the men may not count the steps taken. When the man proceeds a 
sufficient distance, he will be halted, facing towards the squad. 
The squad will now be faced to the front. The men will estimate 
the distance which separates them from the soldier. The instructor 
cautions the squad to recollect the observations made by them upon 
the men placed at the measured distances. The instructor, placing 
himself a short distance from the squad, calls each man to him in 
turn, directing them to give in their estimates in a low voice. This 
is necessary, in order that no man may be influenced in his judg- 
ment by the opinion of another. The instructor will now cause the 
distance to be measured, and, at the same time, stepped off by the 
men. The instructor now points out to the men the errors, if any 
were committed, in estimating the distance. In order to do this 
more distinctly, he may send a man to the point from which the 
squad started, pointing out all errors by observations on this man. 
The instructor will repeat this exercise as often as in his judgment 
is necessary, taking care each time to choose a different distance, 
but always between the limits above indicated. 

Estimating distances should take place under different conditions 
of the atmosphere, cloudy, foggy, etc. ; and, if the locality permits, 
squads should be drilled on ground the outline of which is diversified 
by hills, ravines, etc. 

When the instructor judges that the men of his squad — who 
should, if possible, be the same during these exercises — have 
acquired a sufficient accuracy in estimating distances comprised 
between 50 and 200 yards, he will proceed to estimate distances 
comprised between 200 and 400 yards. To accomplish this, he will 
cause to be measured a distance of 400 yards, and mark, upon the 
right line so measured, distances of 

0, 200, 250, 300, 350, and 400 yards; Q> 200, 250, 300, 350, 400. 

The squads will be formed as explained. The instructor now 
orders five men to place themselves, the first at 200, the second at 
20 



230 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

250, t"he third at 300, tlie fourth at 350, and the fifth at 400 yards, 
facing the squad and resting on their arms. He will make upon 
these different distances observations similar to those already made 
upon the lesser distances, and for that of 200 yards. This last dis- 
tance should he the object of particular attention and study. The 
instructor will cause distances comprised between 200 and 400 yards 
to be estimated as explained for the lesser distances. 

When the men have acquired sufficient accuracy in estimating 
distances comprised between 200 and 400 yards, they will be made 
to estimate distances comprised between 50 and 400 yards. 

This having been accomplished, distances will be no longer esti- 
mated on single individuals, but on groups of men. 

Each company, under the command of its captain, will be divided 
into two platoons, commanded by the first and second lieutenants, 
when not superintending the firing of a class. The captain will 
keep himself with one of the two platoons, having an eye to the 
exercise. The chief of each platoon, having halted his platoon in 
a favorable position indicated by the captain, will bring his platoon 
to an order, and rest. A group, composed of a corporal, a drummer 
or bugler, and two men, will proceed immediately in front of the 
platoon, following a line indicated by the chief of platoon, who will 
point out to the corporal two points on this line upon which to direct 
himself. The corporal, having passed over a distance of 200 yards, 
but not exceeding 700, will be at liberty to halt his group. He 
will then place the men one pace apart, in one rank, and, facing the 
platoon, bring them to an order, and rest, and take his place on the 
right of the rank, the centre of which should be established on the 
line. The chief of the platoon will now estimate the distance him- 
self, and note the same in his note-book. He will now call out the 
non-commissioned officers, receive their estimates (which should be 
given in a low tone), and so on with the men. As soon as the 
officer in charge of the platoon commences to take down the esti- 
mates of the men, a sergeant, assisted by two men carrying a cord 
twenty-five yards long, will measure the distance which separates 
the platoon from the group, and note down the same. Should the 
number of units which remain after having noted the hundreds and 



TARGET PRACTICE. 231 

tens be less or equal to five, they will be rejected; if greater than 
five, they will be counted as ten. The officer having taken down 
the estimates, and the distance separating the platoon from the 
group having been measured, the officer will display a signal, and 
the sergeant who measured the distance will indicate the number 
of yards, by causing the drummer to sound a roll for each hundred, 
and a single tap for tens. The bugler will indicate the same by 
long and short notes. 

The group, at the discretion of the officer commanding the pla- 
toon, may be made to increase or lessen the distance which separates 
it from the platoon, the corporal keeping the group within the limits 
prescribed, and on the line as indicated to him. Yfhen he halts 
the group, he will be careful to establish it on the line facing the 
platoon. 

The sergeant charged with measuring the distance will retire a 
few paces from the line after having marked the point up to which 
he last measured. 

He will observe the platoon, and as soon as its chief commences 
recording the estimates he will measure the distance v/hich separates 
the group from its first station, taking note of this distance, and 
adding it to the first or subtracting it, as the case may be. 

In estimating distances comprised between TOO and 1000 yards, 
the number composing a group will be increased to eight men, a 
corporal, and drummer or bugler. The groups will be formed some- 
times in one and sometimes in two ranks. 

In all other respects the rules laid down for estimating distances 
between 200 and 700 yards will be followed. 

Instruction in estimating distances will be given when it does not 
interfere with other parts of the soldiers' drill. It will, however, 
always precede ball-practice, and be carried on during this practice. 
When one squad is occupied in firing at the target, the remaining 
squads will be exercised in estimating distances. 

Officers, particularly, should be prompt in estimating distances 
correctly, as they are called upon to conduct and regulate the fire in 
presence of an enemy. 



232 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Firing with Ball Cartridges at Different Distanees, Formation of 

Classes, etc. 

293. The distances at wliich the targets are placed will be 150, 
225, 250, 300, 325, 350, 400, 450, 500, 550, 600, 700, 800, 900, 
and 1000 yards. 

These distances will be carefully measured and staked off on the 



"firing-ground.'^ 
















The surfaces fired at will be. 












at 150 and 225 


yards 


1 one 


target 6 ft. 


high and 22 in. 


br. 


225 and 300 




one 








44 




325, 350, and 400 




one 








66 




450 and 500 




one 








88 




550 and 600 




one 








110 




700 




one 








132 




800 




one 








176 




900 




one 








220 




1000 




one 








264 





Four rounds will be fired at each of the above distances. The 
company will be divided into three equal classes, non-commissioned 
ofiicers equally distributed. 

After the company has fired at the several distances 150, 225, 
250, 300, 325, 350, and 400 yards, the classes will be rearranged 
according to merit of firing, — the first class composed of those men 
who have hit the target the greatest number of times, the second 
class of those who come next in order, and so on with the third, 
keeping the classes as nearly equal as practicable. Non-commis- 
sioned officers will not be assigned to classes according to merit, but 
according to rank, a sergeant in each class, the presence of non- 
commissioned officers being necessary with classes when estimating 
distances, etc. When the firing has been executed at the fifteen 
distances, the classes will be again re-formed, as prescribed above ; 
previous to which no change will be made. 

Men who from unavoidable causes have missed drills will be 
plained in that class to which the number of their shots that hit the 



TARGET PRACTICE. 233 

target entitles them, — wliicli will be determined by a simple 
calculation. 

A list of the company, arranged by classes, will be kept expostid 
in the quarters until new lists are formed. The object in forming 
classes is that the officers may know the good marksmen in their 
companies, and to stimulate the pride of the men. 

When the company arrives on the ground, the classes will be 
paraded. The first class, formed in one rank, will take position ten 
steps in rear of the point from which the firing takes place, the 
centre of the rank on and perpendicular to the plane of fire. 

The remaining classes will be divided into as many squads per 
class as there are intelligent non-commissioned officers available; and 
these squads, superintended by an officer, will be exercised, on suit- 
able ground near the firing-ground, in estimating distances. When 
estimating distances greater than 400 yards, the two classes may be 
united, in which case the detachment will be commanded by an 
officer. The officer superintending the firing will order his class to 
load at will, and then bring them to a " support arms," or " order 
arms," and rest. 

Before a man fires, a roll on the drum, or note on the bugle, will 
be sounded. At this signal the markers will take their places. At 
the command " Commence firing," the man on the right will take 
the position in front of the squad that has been pointed out to him, 
and fire, retiring, as soon as he has fired, three paces in rear of his 
first position ; and so on with the rest. When a class has fired, it 
will reload at the commands " Load at will," " Load," and thus 
continue until the four shots have been expended. Three shots will 
be fired standing, the fourth kneeling. The firing of the other 
classes will be conducted in the same manner. Officers should 
retire a short distance from the soldier who is about to fire, and be 
careful not to speak to him when in the act of firing. Officers will 
pay particular attention that all the principles are followed which 
have been laid down in the foregoing articles. 

Balls which strike within the black lines will have no greater 
value on the " record-book" than those which strike any other part 
of the target, 
20* 



234 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

An intelligent non-commissioned officer, assisted by a man, will 
place themselve-s in a hole dug at tlie foot and in front of the target, 
protected by a breastwork of earth thrown upon that side from 
which the firing takes place. This non-commissioned officer will 
mark the shots which strike the target. He will be provided with 
a small flag, and a rod about six feet long, on one end of which will 
be nailed a circular disk of wood, or other material, six or eight 
inches in diameter, painted on one side white, on the other black. 
When a ball strikes outside the black, he will cover the shot-hole 
with the disk, presenting the black side to the detachment ; when 
inside the black, the white side will be presented to view. Firing 
will only be permitted when the flag is down. The marker should 
be provided with a pot of paste, a brush and patches of paper, when 
the target covered with muslin is used. After five shots, the marker 
will paste patches over the ball-holes, or otherwise deface them. 
When east-iron targets are used, the marker should be provided 
with black and white paint. 

Should it not be possible to obtain the greatest range laid down, 
the entire number of shots will nevertheless be fired. The shots, 
in that case, will be divided equally between the 150 yard range 
and the greatest available range. 

When the first class has nearly completed firing its four rounds, 
the drummer will be directed to sound a roll, or the bugler the 
signal " Commence firing." 

The second class will then be marched to the position occupied 
by the first, and execute what has been laid down above. 

During the remainder of the drill, the first class will be exercised 
in estimating distances. It will be found to economize time, and 
the record of shots can be better kept, by keeping the same non- 
commissioned officer superintending the marking of shots during 
the entire drill. 

Firing as Skirmishers. 

294. The company will now be exercised in firing as skirmishers. 
Three drills will be given to this exercise. Ten cartridges will be 
fired per man at each drill. When firing as skirmishers, the men 



TARGET PRACTICE. 235 

will be permitted to take that position which suits them best. The 
line of skirmishers will fire first advancing, then retreating, con- 
forming to the principles laid down in the instruction for skir- 
mishers. The targets will be six feet high and twenty-two inches 
wide, placed upon a line parallel to the line of skirmishers and six 
jards apart. 

As many targets will be used as the nature of the ground and a 
due regard to economy will permit. A line will be staked off 
parallel to the line of targets and 350 yards distant. The line of 
skirmishers, formed a suitable distance from this line, will advance 
upon it, and when on the line the command will be given " Com- 
mence firing :" the line of skirmishers will advance and fire five 
rounds ; the remaining five will be fired retreating. 

The firing during the second drill will be executed as laid down 
for the first. The surface fired at will be double ; the targets placed 
six yards apart. The firing will commence when the skirmishers 
arrive on a line 600 yards from the targets. The number of targets 
will not be limited. Five cartridges will be firod advancing, and 
five retreating. 

Firing during the third drill will commence when the skirmishers 
reach a line 800 yards from the line of targets. Four targets will 
be used, placed 12 yards apart. The dimension of each target will 
be 6 feet by 88 inches. 

Firing hy Company or Ranlt^ and hy Platoon. 

295, The exercises in firing will terminate with firing by file, by 
company or rank, and by platoon. At each drill six cartridges per 
man will be fired by file, two by rank or company, and two by pla- 
toon. The distances at which the several firings take place will be 
300, 400, and 500 yards. The target used will be 6 feet high and 
176 inches broad. The vertical and horizontal stripes on this target 
will be 12 inches in width. 

The firings by file, by company or rank, and by platoon, will be 
executed in three drills : at the first, the firing will commence at 
300 yards; the second at 400; and the third at 500 yards. Al 
each drill, the firing will commence by file, then by company or 



236 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

rank, and will end by firing by platoon. When firing at 800 yards, 
whether by file, by company or rank, or platoon, bayonets wi3l be 
fixed. 

As the position of soldiers firing by file, company or rankj and 
by platoon, is difi'erent from that taken when firing as a skirmidher, 
it will be necessary, before executing the above firings, to habituate 
the men to the positions which they should take by simulated firings. 

The simxulated firing will first be by allowing the hammer to fall 
upon the cone. The men will be made to take the positions as laid 
down in the school of a soldier as applicable to those different 
firings. They will be accustomed to reguJate the hausse in ranks, 
putting in practice as much as possible, when firing in ranks, what 
has been -prescribed for individual firing. 

During the first part of the first drill, ten caps per man will be ex- 
ploded — six in file firing, two by company or rank, and two by platoon. 
During the second part of the same drill, ten blank cartridges will 
be fired, — six by file, two by company or rank, and two by platoon. 
The front rank will be made frequently to change positions with the 
rear rank. Firing with ball cartridges will then take place, pre- 
ceding each real fire by simulated firings, when the hammer will be 
allowed to fall upon the cone. The proper execution of platoon 
and company firing depends in a great degree upon the commands 
of the officer. If he does not allow a sufficient interval between 
the commands "Aim" and " Fire," the men will not have time to 
aim. To obey the command in time, the trigger will be pulled sud- 
denly. The result will be, that much of the efficacy of the fire 
will be lost, and a simultaneous fire, upon which a great deal depends, 
will not be obtained ; for experience and reason demonstrate the 
fact, everything else being equal, that platoon-firing is more effective 
in proportion as it is executed together. When the officer leaves a 
suitable interval between the commands "Aim" and "Fire," the 
men have time to adjust the piece to the shoulder, to place the finger 
in front of the trigger, and to exercise a slight pressure on the 
trigger when awaiting the command " Fire." They are then ready 
to fire the moment the command is given, thus obtaining a simulta- 
neous and effective fire. But, if the officer superintending the firing 



TARGET PRACTICE. 237 

should be careful to leave a sufficient interval between the commands 
'•'Aim" and " Fire/' he should no less avoid the opposite extreme. 
If he keeps the men aiming too long, they will become fatigued, 
will lose their aim, and will not be prepared to obey the command 
when given. It is only by commanding, and seeing platoon and 
company firing executed with ball and cartridge, and judging of its 
effect by the number of balls put in the target, that officers can ap- 
preciate the influence of a command promptly given, and acquire 
the habit of thus giving their commands. 

When firing by file, by company or rank, or by platoon, the offi- 
cers will indicate the distance which separates the company from the 
object to be fired at. Men in ranks are necessarily more or less 
constrained in their movements. Occupied, moreover, in loading 
their pieces, soldiers will not be able to judge the distance which 
separates them from the enemy. 

The most suitable moment to indicate the distance will be imme- 
diately before the command "Aim" is given. The men will then 
be in a position to regulate the hausse. To direct the fire of a pla- 
toon upon an enemy, for example^ at 400 yards^ the officer will 
command : 

Fire hi/ platoon. Platoon — Eealy — at 400 yards — AiiM — Fire — 

Load. 

The above observations are applicable to firing by company or 
rank. 

When firing by file, the distance will be announced immediately 
before the command " Commence firing," and after the command 
'aieady." 

Inaccuracy of fire may arise from very different causes. 

1st. From ignorance of, or failing to apply, the principles which 
govern good marksmen when firing. 

2d. A ball, when fired, may be, and generally is, deflected from 
its course when describing the trajectory. 

The first causes may be obviated in a great degree by practical 
and theoretical instruction. 

The second is attributable to the piece, and exterior influences 



238 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

acting upon the ball. Some of tlie causes cannot be modified by 
the most skilful marksman ; while others, to a great extent, may be 
counteracted. It would be unreasonable to expect comparative per- 
fection in every gun issued from our large manufactories. Our rifle 
musket is believed to be as perfect an arm of its kind as has ever 
been made. A perfect arm can onl}^ exist in theory. A soldier 
always firing the same piece will become acquainted with its defects, 
and will be able to make such allowances when firing as experience 
teaches him to be necessary. 

Among the exterior influences which aff'ect the accuracy of a 
gun, the principal one is the wind. If the wind blows from the 
right, the ball will be deflected to the left ; to the right, if it blows 
from the left; raised, if from the rear; and lowered, if from the 
front ; raised and to the left, if it blows from the rear and right. 
The deviation produced by the wind will be increased in proportion 
as the distance increases : it increas.es even more rapidly than the 
distance. Experience alone can teach the soldier the allowance he 
must make for the wind. Not only does the wind aff'ect accuracy 
of. fire by deflecting the ball from its course, but it prevents a per- 
son from holding his piece steady. 

The temperature and dampness of the atmosphere influence the 
ball in its flight. It has been remarked that in dry weather longei 
ranges have been obtained than in damp weather. 

When firing at an object in motion, allowance must be made for 
the motion. For instance, when firing at a horseman galloping in 
a direction perpendicular to the plane of fire, it is necessary that the 
line of sight should move in proportion as the horseman moves, 
and should be directed in advance of him in proportion as he is 
farther off". 

In opening a fire upon an enemy, particular attention should be 
paid to discover where the first balls fired strike. It would be 
better that the balls fall short of, rather than pass over, the enemy. 
In the first case, we stand a chance of a ricochet ball taking effect. 
From v/hich we naturally deduce that a soldier should be impressed 
with the necessity of firing too low rather than too high. 



TARGET PRACTICE. 239 



TARGETS. 



296. The difficulty of procuring any specified material for targets 
at many posts precludes the adoption of any particular target. 

The surface fired at, at the difi'erent distances, will alone be fixed 
by regulation. 

The following suggestions are offered : 

The best targets, and those recommended for permanent posts, are 
of cast-iron, — by far the cheapest and most durable. The different 
surfaces required could be obtained by having four cast-iron targets 
of the following dimensions, — one target 6 feet by 22 inches; one 
6 feet by 4-J: inches ; one 6 feet by 66 inches ; and one 6 feet by 
132 inches. 

When cast-iron targets cannot be had, the next best are targets 
formed of wrought-iron frames with muslin stretched upon them. 
Four frames of the following dimensions, by combination, would 
enable us to obtain the surfaces required, — one 6 feet by 22 inches ; 
one 6 feet by 44 inches ; one 6 feet by 88 inches ; one 6 feet by 
110 inches; and all the parts could be carried in a wagon-body. 

By carefully covering the ball-holes with patches of paper pasted 
on, we strengthen and thicken the target; and one of these targets 
will last longer than one would suppose. 

The next best targets are wooden frames composed of four pieces, 
6 inches wide and 1 inch thick, bolted together; the ends of the 
vertical sides projecting about a foot below, and sharpened, the 
frame covered with muslin and held in position by four guys fastened 
to the top and attached to pins in the ground in front and rear. 

Every target will be marked by a vertical and a horizontal stripe, 
dividing it into four equal parts, and varying in width according to 
the distance, as follows : 

At 150 and 225 yards 4 inches wide. 

" 250 " 300 '' 5 " " 

" 325 '^ 350 <' 8 '' " 

" 400 450 " 500 " 12 " " 
'' 550 600 '' 700 " 16 " " 
" 800 900 " 1000 ^' 20 " <^ 



240 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 



ARTICLE YI, 

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

To form the Regiment or Battalion. 

297. At the signal, called the adjutanfs call, the companies are 
inarched from the company parades by their captains, the music 
playing. The color company s-erves as the basis of the formation, 
and is the iSrst to form ; the color-guard being at the point where 
the centre of the line is to rest, one marker is placed in front of it, 
his elbow touching the right corporal of the color guard, and an- 
other on the line at a little less than company distance from him, 
on his right, and facing towards him ; the color company is halted 
three paces behind this line, faced to the front, and dressed up upon 
the line by the captain, who aligns it to the left. 

The company on the left of the color is the next to take its post ; 
it is halted three paces behind the line, its right nearly behind the 
left file of the color guard, and faced to the front; as soon as it 
halts the left guide of the company throws himself out, so as to be 
opposite one of the three left files of the company, faces to the right, 
and aligns himself upon the two markers; the captain then places 
himself on the left of the color guard, on a line with its front rank, 
and aligns the company to the right. The company on ihe right 
of the colors forms next upon the same principles ; the right guide 
posts himself upon the line opposite one of the three right files of 
the company, and faces to the left ; the captain places himself on 
the right of the color company, and aligns his company to the left. 

The remaining companies take their posts on the left and right 
in succession, and when the formation is complete, the adjutant com- 
mands, Guides jjosts ; at this command the guides on the line retire to 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 241 

their places by passing through the intervals between the companies, 
and those captains who are on the left of their companies, shift to 
the right. 

Opening and dosing ranks, and the execution of the different fires. 
To open and to close ranks. 
298. The colonel, wishing the ranks to be opened, will command • 

1. Prepare to open ranks. 

At this command, the lieutenant-colonel and major will place 
themselves on the right of the battalion, the first on the flank of the 
file-closers, and the second four paces from the front rank of the 
battalion. 

These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 

2. To the rear, open order. 3. March. 

At the second command, the covering sergeants, and the sergeant 
on the left of the battalion, will place themselves four paces in rear 
of the front rank, and opposite their places in line of battle, in order 
to mark the new alignment of the rear rank ; they will be aligned 
by the major on the left sergeant of the battalion, who will be care- 
ful to place himself exactly four paces in rear of the front rank, and 
to hold his piece between the eyes, erect and inverted, the better to 
indicate to the major the direction to be given to the covering 
sergeants. 

At the command march, the rear rank and the file-closers will 
step to the rear without counting steps ; the men will pass a little in 
rear of the line traced for this rank, halt, and dress forward on the 
covering sergeants, who will align correctly the men of their respect- 
ive companies. 

The file-closers will fall back and preserve the distance of two 
paces from the rear rank, glancing eyes to the right ; the lieutenant 
colonel will, from the right, align them on the file-closer of the left, 
who, having placed himself accurately two paces from the rear rank, 
will invert his piece, and hold it up erect between his eyes, the 
better to be seen by the lieutenant colonel. 
21 Q 



242 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA, 

The colonelj seeing the ranks alignedj will coro.mand : 
4. Front. 

At this command, the lieutenant colonel, major, and the left ser- 
geant, will retake their places in line of battle. 

The colonel will cause the ranks to be closed by the commands 
prescribed for the instructor in the school of the company. 

THE FIRINGS. 

299. The colonel will cause to be executed the fire by company, 
the fire by wing, the fire by battalion, the fire by file, and the fire 
by rank, by the commands to be herein indicated. 

The fire by company and the fire by file will always be direct ; 
the fire by battalion, the fire by wing, and the fire by rank, may be 
either direct or oblique. 

When the fire ought to be oblique, the colonel will give, at every 
round, the caution rujht (or leff) oblique^ between the commands 
ready and aivii. 

The fire by company will be executed alternately by the right 
and left companies of each division, as if the division were alone. 
The right company will fire first ; the captain of the left will not 
give his first command till he shall see one or two pieces at a ready 
in the right company ) the captain of the latter, after the first dis- 
charge, will observe the same rule in respect to the left company ; 
and the fire will thus be continued alternately. 

The colonel will observe the same rule in the firing by wing. 

The fire by file will commence in all the companies at once, 
and will be executed as has been prescribed in the school of 
the company. The fire by rank will be executed by each rank 
alternately. 

The color-guard will not fire, but reserve itself for the defence 
of the color. 

The fire hy com'pany. 

The colonel, wishing the fire by company to be executed, will 
command : 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 243 

1. Fire hy compani/. 2. Commence firing . 

At tlie first command, the captains and covering sergeants will 
take the positions indicated in the school of the company. 

The color and its guard will step back at the same time, so as to 
bring the front rank of the guard in a line with the rear rank of 
the battalion. This rule is general for all the different firings. 

At the second command, the odd numbered conijDanies will com- 
mence to fire ; their captains will each give the commands prescribed 
In the school of the company, observing to precede the command 
company by that of first, third, ffi^^ oi^ seventh, according to the 
number of each. 

The captains of the even numbered companies will give, in their 
turn, the same commands, observing to precede them by the number 
of their respective companies. 

In order that the odd numbered companies may not all fire at 
once, their captains will observe, but only for the first discharge, to 
give the command fire one after another ; thus, the captain of the 
third company will not give the command y?re until he has heard the 
fire of the first company; the captain of the fifth will observe the 
same rule with respect to the third, aud the captain of the seventli 
the same rule with respect to the fifth. 

The colonel will cause the fire to cease by the sound to cease 
firing ; at this sound, the men will execute what is prescribed in 
the school of the company ; at the sound, for officers to take their 
places after firing, the captains, covering sergeants, and color-guard, 
will promptly resume their places in line of battle. This rule is 
general for all the firings. 

The fire hy wing. 

When the colonel shall wish this fire to be executed, he will 
command : 

1. Fire hy wing. 2. Eight iviiig. 3. Ready. 4. Aim. 5. Fire. 

6. Load. 

The colonel will cause the wings to fire alternately, and he will 



244 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

recommence the fire by the commands: 1. Right wing; 2. AiMj 
3. Fire; 4. Load. 1. Left wing; 2. Aim; 3. Fire; 4. Load; 
in conforming to what is prescribed in the school of the company. 

The fire hy hattalion. 

The colonel will cause this fire to be executed by the commands 
last prescribed, substituting for the first two, 1. Fire hy battalion; 
2. Battalion. 

The fire hy fide. 

To cause this to be executed, the colonel will command : 

1 Fire hy file. 2. Battalion. 3. Keady. 4. Commence firing. 

At the fourth command, the fire will commence on the right of 
each company. The colonel may, if he thinks proper, cause the fire 
to commence on the right of each platoon. 

The fire hy rank. 

To cause this fire to be executed, the colonel will command : 

1, Fire hy rank. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready. 4. Rear rank. 5. 
Aim. 6. Fire. 7. Load. 

This fire will be executed as has been explained in the school of 
the company, in following the progression prescribed for the two 
ranks which should fire alternately. 

To fire hy tlie rear rank. 

When the colonel shall wish the battalion to fire to the rear, he 
will command : 

1. Face hy the rear rank. 2. Battalion. 3. About — Face. 

At the first command, the captains, covering sergeants, and file- 
closers will execute what has been prescribed in the school of the 
company; the color-bearer will pass into the rear rank, and for 
this purpose, the corporal of his file will step before the corporal 
next on his right to let the color-bearer pass, and will then take his 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 245 

place in the front rank; the lieutenant-colonel, adjutant, major, 
sergeant-major, and the music will place themselves before the front 
rank, and face to the rear, each opposite his place in the line of 
battle — the first two passing around the right, and the others around 
the left of the battalion. 

At the third command, the battalion will face about ; the cap- 
tains and covering sergeants observing what is prescribed in the 
school of the company No. 230. 

The battalion facing thus by the rear rank, the colonel will cause 
it to execute the different fires by the same commands as if it were 
faced by the front rank. 

The colonel, after firing to the rear, wishing to face the battalion 
to its proper front, will command : 

1. Face hy the front rank. 2. Battalion. 3. About — Face. 

At these commands, the battalion will return to its proper front 
by the means prescribed No. 230. 

Different modes of passing from the order in tattle to the order in 

column. 

To hreah to the right or left into column. 

300. Lines of battle will habitually break into column by com- 
pany; they may also break by division or by platoon. 

It is here supposed that the colonel wishes to break by company 
to the right; he will command : 

1. By company, right wheel. 2. March (or double quick — 

March). 

(Fig. 63.) At the first command, each captain will place himself 
rapidly before the centre of his company, and caution it that it has 
to wheel to the right ; each covering sergeant will replace his cap- 
tain in the front rank. 

At the command march, each company will break to the right, 

according to the principles prescribed in the school of the company; 

each captain will conform himself to what is prescribed for the chiefs 

of platoon ; the left guide, as soon as he can pass, will place him- 

21* 



246 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



1 



I 



^:::::::Si.^ 



IHL- 



Fi^ G3. 



i:::-:::3 



1 



self on the left of the front rank to conduct the marching flank, 
and when he shall have approached near to the perpendicular, the 
captain will command : 

1. JSuch company/. 2. Halt. 

At the second command, which will be given at the instant the 
left guide shall be at the distance of three paces from the perpen- 
dicular, the company will halt ; the guide will advance and place 
his left arm lightly against the breast of the captain, who will es- 
tablish him on the alignment of the man who has faced to the right; 
the covering sergeant will place himself correctly on the alignment 
on the right of that man ; which being executed, the captain will 
align his company by the left, command Front, and place himself 
two paces before its centre. 

The captains having commanded Front, the guides, although 
some of them may not be in the direction of the preceding guides, 
will stand fast, in order that the error of a company that has wheeled 
too much or too little may not be propagated ; the guides not in the 
direction will readily come into it when the column is put in march. 

A battalion in line of battle will break into column by company 
to the left, according to the same principles, and by inverse means. 

When the colonel shall wish to move the column forward without 
halting, he will intimate his intention, and when the companies have 
nearly completed the wheel, command : 

3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide left. 
To hreak to the reo.r, hy the right or left, into column. 

301. When the colonel shall wish to cause the battalion to break 
to the rear, by tho right, into column by company, he will command : 
1. By the right of companies to the rear into column. 2. Battalion 
right — Face. 3. MA.ViCn (ot double quick — March). 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 



247 



(Fig. 64.) At the first command, each captain will place him- 
self before the centre of his company^ and caution it to face to the 
right ; the covering sergeants will step into the front rank. 



-rrr^^prrrsprrr::^. 



t^rrrrr::^ 



^ 



At the second command^ the battalion will face to the right ; each 
captain will hasten to the right of his company, and break two files 
to the rear; the first file will break the whole depth of the two 
ranks ; the second file less ', which being executed, the captain will 
place himself so that his breast may touch lightly the left arm of 
the front rank man of the last file in the company next on the right 
of his own. The captain of the right company will place himself 
as if there were a company on his right, and will align himself on 
the other captains. The covering sergeant of each company will 
break to the rear with the right files, and place himself before the 
front rank of the first file, to conduct him. 

At the command march, the first file of each company will wheel 
to the right ; the covering sergeant, placed before this file, will con- 
duct it perpendicularly to the rear. The other files will come suc- 
cessively to wheel on the same spot. The captains will stand fast, 
see their companies file past, and at the instant the last file shall 
have wheeled, each captain will command : 

1. JSuch comj^any. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Left — Dress. 

At the instant the company faces to the front, its left guide will 
place himself so that his left arm may touch lightly the breast of 
his captain. 

At the fourth command, the company will align itself on its left 



248 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 

guide, the captain so directing it, that the new alignment may be 
perpendicular to that which the company had occupied in line of 
battle, and, the better to judge this, he will step back two puces 
from the flank. 

The company being aligned, the captain will command : Front, 
and take his place before its centre. 

302. The battalion marching in line of battle, when the colonel 
shall wish to break into column by company, tc the rear, by the 
right, he will command : 

1. By the right of companies to the rear into column. 2. Battalion, 
hy the right flank. 3. March (or double quick — March). 

At the first command, each captain will step briskly in front of 
the centre of his company, and caution it to face hy the right flank. 

At the command march, the battalion will face to the right • each 
captain will move rapidly to the right of his company and cause it 
to break to the right; the first file of each company will wheel to 
the right, and the covering sergeant placed in front of this file will 
conduct it perpendicularly to the rear; the other files will wheel 
successively at the same place as the first. The captains will see 
their companies file past them ; when the last files have wheeled, 
the colonel will command : 

3. Battalion, hy the left flank — March. 4. Guide left. 

At the command march, the companies will face to the left, and 
march in column in the new direction. The captains will place 
themselves in front of the centres of their respective companies. 

To break to the rear by the left, the colonel will give the same 
commands as in the case of breaking to the rear by the right, sub- 
stituting the indication left, for that of right. 

The battalion may be broken by division to the rear, by the right 
or left, in like manner. 

To ploy the battalion into close column. 

303. This movement maybe executed by company or by division, 
on the right or left subdivision, or on any other subdivision, right 
or left in front. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 249 

To ploy the battalion into close column by division in rear of the 
first, the colonel will command : 

1. Close column J hy division. 2. On the first division, right in 
front. 3. Battalion right — Face. 4. Ma.'RQB. (ov double guide 
— March). 

(Fig. 65.) At the second command, all the chiefs of division will 
place themselves before the centres of their divisions; the chief of 
the first will caution it to stand fast ; the chiefs of the three others 



"- '^ ^:::;----l- -^:-----a > --a 

Fij 65. """""fe^-Ir"--- T \ H 



■ -miililiililiiiliiriiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliip 
'- iiii'tiiiiiiiiiyiiiiiiiiiiiiiiniirniiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii -' 

IIIIMIilllllHIIIIillllli' 



\ '- |ii:illlll!lll!!lllliiillllll--l!iill,|lli:!!!llllllllilllllli^ 



G6. 




^^'■''' ,^'^ r'- |iiiliiliiiiiiili:i: liiitlliilllillllllllllllllMli -' 

-^1 li J n* i-i "^ ' liiiiiiiiiiniiiiiiiiiiiii 



liililillllr'-lilllllllllilllllll 



will remind them that they will have to face to the right, and the 
covering sergeant of the right company of each division will replace 
his captain in the front rank, as soon as the latter steps out. 

At the third command, the last three divisions will face to the 
right; the chief of each division will hasten to its right, and cause 
files to be broken to the rear, as indicated No. 301 ; the right guide 
will break at the same time, and place himself before the front rank 
man of the first file, to conduct him, and each chief of division will 
place himself by the side of this guide. 

The moment these divisions face to the right, the junior captain 



250 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

in each will place himself on the left of the covering sergeant of 
the left company, who will place himself in the front rank. This 
rule is general for all the ployments hy division. 

At the command march, the chief of the first division will add, 
guide left; at this, its left guide will place himself on its left, as 
soon as the movement of the second division may permit, and the 
file-closers will advance one pace upon the rear rank. 

All the other divisions, each conducted by its chief, will step off 
together, to take their places in the column; the second will gain, 
in wheeling by file to the rear, the space of six paces, which ought 
to separate its guide from the guide of the first division, and so 
direct its march as to enter the column on a line parallel to this 
division ; the third and fourth divisions will direct themselves diago- 
nally towards, but a little in rear of, the points at which they ought, 
respectively, to enter the column ] at six paces from the left flank 
of the column, the head of each of these divisions will incline a 
little to the left, in order to enter the column as has just been pre- 
scribed for the second, taking care also to leave the distance of six 
paces between its guide and the guide of the preceding division. 
At the moment the divisions put themselves in march to enter the 
column, the file-closers of each will incline to the left, so as to bring 
themselves to the distance of a pace from the rear rank. 

Each chief of these three divisions will conduct his division till 
he shall be up with the guide of the directing one; the chief will 
then himself halt, see his division file past, and halt it the instant 
the last file shall have passed, commanding : 

1. Such division. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Left — Dress. 

At the second command, the division will halt; the left guide 
will place himself promptly on the direction, six paces from the 
guide which precedes him, in order that, the column being formed, 
the divisions may be separated the distance of four paces. 

At the third command, the division will face to the front ; at the 
fourth, it will be aligned by its chief, who will place himself two 
paces outside of his guide, and direct the alignment so that his 
division may be parallel to that which precedes — which being done, 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 251 

lie Tvill command, Front, and place himself before the centre of 
his division. 

The lieutenant-colonel, placing himself in succession in rear of 
the left guides, will assure them on the direction as they arrive, and 
then move to his place outside of the left flank of the column six 
paces from, and abreast with, the first division. In assuring the 
guides on the direction, he will be a mere observer, unless one or 
more should fail to cover exactly the guide or guides already es- 
tablished. This rule is general. 

To ploy the battalion in front of the first division, the colonel 
will give the same commands, substituting the indication left for 
that of right in front. (See Fig. 66.) 

At the second and third commands, ihQ chiefs of divisions and 
the junior captains will conform themselves to what has been pre- 
scribed above; but the chiefs of the last three divisions, instead 
of causing the first two files to break to the rear, will cause them 
to break to the front. 

At the fourth command, the chief of the first division will add : 
Guide right. 

The three other divisions will step off together to take their places 
in the column in front of the directing division ] each will enter in such 
manner that, when halted, its guide may find himself six paces from 
the guide of the division next previously established in the column. 

Each chief of these divisions will conduct his division, till his 
right guide shall be nearly up with the guide of the directing one; 
he will then halt his division, and cause it to face to the front; at 
the instant it halts, its right guide will face to the rear, place him- 
self six paces from the preceding guide, and cover him exactly — 
which being done, the chief will align his division by the right. 

The lieutenant-colonel, placed in front of the right guide, of the 
first division, will assure the guides on the direction as they suc- 
cessively arrive. 

The movement being ended, the colonel will command : 

Guides, ahout — Face. 
At this, the guides, who are faced to the rear, will face to the front 



252 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

304. To ploy the battalion in rear^ or in front of the fourth division, 
the colonel will command : 

1. Close column hy division. 2. On the fourth division, left (m right) j 
in front. ^.Battalion left — Face. 4. March (or double quids 
— March). 

These movements will be executed according to the principles of 
those which precede, but by inverse means : the fourth division on 
which the battalion ploys will stand fast ; the instant the movement 
commences, its chief will command, guide right (or left). 

305. The foregoing examples embrace all the principles : thus, when 
the colonel shall wish to ploy the battalion on an interior division, 
he will command : 

1. Close column hy division. 2. On such division, right (or left) 
in front. 3. Battalion inwards — Face. 4. March (or c?ow5/e 
quick — March). 

(Fig. 67.) The instant the movement commences, the chief of 
the directing division will command, guide left (or right). 



Fiff 67. "h iiHiiiiiiiiiikiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii-ii'iiMiiiiiiiiii'iiiiiiiiiiiif "" 
" iMliiiiiiiiii iiiHiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii ' 

-A 



1^ 



■-iiiHiiiiiiiiiiiniiiiiiiiiiniiiiiiiiiimyiiiiiiiiiiir 

The divisions which, in the order in battle, are to the right of 
the directing division, will face to the left ; those which are to the 
left will face to the right. 

To march in column at full distance. 

306. When the colonel shall wish to put the column in march, 
he will indicate to the leading guide two distinct objects in front, 
on the line which the guide ought to follow. This guide will 
immediately put his shoulders in a square with that line, take the 
more distant object as the point of direction, and the nearer one as 
the intermediate point. The colonel will then command : 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 253 

1. Column forward. . 2. Guide left (or right.) 3. March (or 
douUe quick — March). 

At the command march, briskly repeated by tlie chiefs of sub- 
division, the column will put itself in march, conforming to what 
is prescribed in the school of the company. No. 244. 

The leading guide may always maintain himself correctly on the 
direction by keeping steadily in view the two points indicated to 
him, or chosen by himself; if these points have a certain elevation, 
he may be assured he is on the true direction, when the nearer 
masks the more distant point. 

The following guides will preserve with exactness both step and 
distance ; each will march in the trace of the guide who immedi- 
ately precedes him, without occupying himself with the general 
direction. 

The lieutenant-colonel will hold himself, habitually, abreast with 
the leading guide, to see that he does not deviate from the direction, 
and will observe, also, that the next guide marches exactly in the 
trace of the first. 

To change direction in column at full distance. 

307. The column being in march in the cadenced step, when 
the colonel shall wish to cause it to change direction, he will go to 
the point at which the change ought to be commenced, and establish 
a marker there, presenting the breast to the flank of the column ; 
this marker, no matter to which side the change of direction is to 
be made, will be posted on the opposite side, and he will remain in 
position till the last subdivision of the battalion shall have passed. 
The leading subdivision being within a few paces of the marker, 
the colonel will command : 

Head of column to the left (or right). 

(Vi\£,. 68.) At this, the chief of the leading subdivision will im- 
mediately take the guide on the side opposite the change of direc- 
tion, if not already there. This guide will direct himself so as to graze 
the breast of the marker ; arrived at this point, the chief will cause 
22 




254 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

ft his subdivision to change direc- 

tion by the commands and ac- 
cording to the principles pre- 
scribed in the school of the 
company. When the wheel is 
completed, the chief of this sub- 
division will retake the guide, 
if changed, on the side of the 
primitive direction. 

The chief of each succeed- 
ing subdivision, as well as the 
guides, will conform to what 
has just been explained for the 
leading subdivision. 

When the column is at half 
distance the pivot man will take 
a pace of fourteen inches in- 
j stead of nine. 

I The column beins: in march, 

I . 

I the colonel will frequently cause 

j the ahout to be executed while 

j marching; to this effect, he will 

command : 

1. Battalion, right about. 2. March. 8. Guide right. 

At the second command, the companies will face to tbe right 
about, and the column will then march forward in the opposite di- 
rection; the chiefs of companies will remain behind the front rank, 
the file-closers in front of the rear rank, and the guides will place 
themselves in the same rank. 



—^ 



qiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiHiiiiiiiiiir ^ 



i Fi^68. 

i-ji iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiP 

f I 

N 'i i'iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii i iiir^ 



To halt the column. 

308. The column being in march, when the colonel shall wish to 
halt it, he will command : 

1. Column. 2. Halt. 
At the second command, briskly repeated by the captains, the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 255 

column will halt ; no guide will stir, though he may have lost his 
distance, or be out of the direction of the preceding guides. 

The column being in march, in double quick time, will be halted 
by the same commands. At the command halt, the men will halt 
in their places, and will themselves rectify their positions in the 
ranks. 

The column being halted, when the colonel shall wish to form 
it into line of battle, he will move a little in front of the leading 
guide, and face to him ; this guide and the following one will 
fix their eyes on the colonel, in order promptly to conform them- 
selves to his directions. 

If the colonel judge it not necessary to give a general direction 
to the guides, he will limit himself to rectifying the position of such 
as may be without, or within the direction, by the command guide 
of (such) compani/, or guides of (such) companies, to the right, (or 
fo the left ;) at this command, the guides designated will place them- 
selves on the direction ; the others will stand fast. 

If, on the contrary, the colonel judge it necessary to give a general 
direction to the guides of the column, he will place the first two on 
the direction he shall have chosen, and command : 

Guides, cover. 

At this, the following guides will promptly place themselves on 
the direction covering the first two in file, and each precisely at a 
distance equal to the front of his company, from the guide imme- 
diately preceding; the lieutenant-colonel will assure them in the 
direction, and the colonel will command : 

Left (OY right) — Dress. 

At this command, each company will incline to the right or left, 
and dress forward or backward, so as to bring the designated flank 
to rest on its guide ; each captain will place himself two paces out- 
side of his guide, promptly align his company parallelly with that 
which precedes, then command Front, and return to his place in 
column. 



256 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

To close tlie column to half distance, or in mass. 

309. A column by company being at full distance right in front, 
and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to close to half 
distance, on the leading company, he will command : 

1. To holf distance, close column. 2. March (or double quick — 

March). 

At the first command, the captain of the leading company will 
caution it to stand fast. 

At the command march, which will be repeated by all the captains, 
except the captain of the leading company, this company will stand 
fast, and its chief will align it by the left ; the file-closers will close 
one pace upon the rear rank. 

All the other companies will continue to march, and as each in 
succession arrives at platoon distance from the one which precedes, 
its captain will halt it. 

At the instant that each company halts, its guide will place him- 
self on the direction of the guides who precede, and the captain 
will align the company by the left; the file-closers will close one 
pace upon the rear rank. 

No particular attention need be given to the general direction of 
the guides before they respectively halt ; it will suffice if each follow 
in the trace of the one who precedes him. 

The colonel, on the side of the guides, will superintend the exe- 
cution of the movement, observing that the captains halt their 
companies exactly at platoon distance the one from the other. 

The lieutenant-colonel, a few paces in front, will face to the lead- 
ing guide and assure the positions of the following guides as tliey 
successively place themselves on the direction. 

The major will follow the movement abreast with the last guide. 

If the column be in march, the colonel will cause it to close by 
the same commands. 

If the column be marching in double quick time, at the first com- 
mand, the captain of the leading company will command quick time ; 
the chiefs of the other companies will caution their companies to 
continue the march. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 257 

At the command march, the leading company will take quick, 
while the other companies continue to march in double quick time ; 
and as each arrives at platoon distance from the preceding one, its 
chief will cause it to march in quick time. 

When the rearmost company shall have gained its distance, the 
colonel will command : 

Double quick — MarcH. 

When the colonel shall wish to halt the column marching at 
double quick, and to cause it to close to half distance at the same 
time, he will notify the captain of the leading company of his inten- 
tion, who, at the command marclij will halt his company and align 
it to the left. 

If the column be marching in quick time, and the colonel should 
not give the command double quick, the captain of the leading com- 
pany will halt his company at the command march, and align it to 
the left. In the case where the colonel adds the command douhle 
quick, the leading company will continue at quick, while all the 
others, at the command inarch, take double quick time. 

To close the column on the eighth, or rearmost com])a,ny. 

310. The column being at a halt, if, instead of causing it to close 
to half distance on the first company, the colonel should wish to 
cause it to close on the eighth, he will command : 

1. On the eighth company , to half distance close column. 2. Batta- 
lion ahout — Face. 3. Column forward. 4. Guide right. 5. 
March (or double quick — March). 

At the second command, all the companies, except the eighth, 
will face about, and their guide will remain in the front rank, now 
the rear. At the fourth command, all the captains will place them- 
selves two paces outside of their companies on the side of the guide. 

At the command march, the eighth company will stand fast, and 
its captain will align it to the left; the other companies will put 
themselves in march, and as each arrives at platoon distance from 
the one established before it, its captain will halt it and face it to 



258 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the front. At the moment that each company halts, the left guide, 
remaining faced to the rear, will place himself promptly on the 
direction of the guides already established. Immediately after, the 
captain will align his company to the left, and the file-closers will 
close one pace on the rear rank. 

If this movement be executed in double quick time, each captain, 
in turn, will halt, and command : 

Such company right about — Halt. 

At this command, the company designated will face to the right 
about, and halt. 

All the companies being aligned, the colonel will cause the guides, 
who stand faced to the rear, to face about. 

The lieutenant-colonel, placing himself behind the rearmost guide, 
will assure the position of the other guides in succession; the major 
will remain abreast with the rearmost company. 

811. The column being in march, when the colonel shall wish to 
close it on the eighth company, he will command : 

1, On the eighth company, to half distance close column. 2. Batta- 
lion right ahout. 3. March (or double quick — March). 4. 
Guide right. 

At the first command, the captain of the eighth company will 
caution his company that it will remain faced to the front; the 
captains of the other companies will caution their companies that 
they will have to face about. At the command march, the captain 
of the eighth company will halt his company, and align it to the 
left ; the file-closers will close one pace upon the rear rank. 

The captains of the other companies, at the same command, will 
place themselves on the flank of the column ; the subdivisions will 
face about, and as each arrives at platoon distance from the company 
immediately preceding it, its chief will face it to the front, and halt 
it. The instant each company halts, the guide on the directing 
flank, remaining faced to the rear, will quickly place himself on the 
direction of the guides already established. After which, the cap- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 259 

tain will align tlie company by the left, and the file-closers will close 
one pace upon the rear rank. 

The lieutenant-colonel will follow the movement abreast of the 
first company. The major will place himself a few paces in rear 
of the guide of the eighth company, and will assure the position 
of the other guides in succession. 

312. A column by division at full distance will close to half dis- 
tance by the same means and the same commands. 

A column by company, or by division, being at full or half dis- 
tance, the colonel will cause it to close in mass by the same means 
and commands, substituting the indication column, close in mass, for 
that of to half distance, close column. 

In a column, left in front, these various movements will be exe- 
cuted on the same principles. 

Being in column at half distance, or closed in mass, to take distances. 
To take distances hy the head of the column. 

313. The column being by company at half distance and at a 
halt, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to take full distances 
by the head, he will command : 

By the head of column, take wheeling distance. 

At this command, the captain of the leading company will put it 
in march ; to this end, he will command : 

1. First company, forward. 2. Guide left. 3. March (or c7o2/7jZe 
quick — March) . 

When the second shall have nearly its wheeling distance, its 
captain will command : 

1. Second company, forward. 2. Guide left. 3. March (or douhle 
quick — March). 

At the command march, which will be pronounced at the instant 
that this company shall have its wheeling distance, it will step off 
smartly, taking the step from the preceding company. Each of the 



260 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

other companies will successively execute what has just been pre- 
scribed for the second. 

The colonel will see that each company puts itself in march at 
the instant it has its distance. The lieutenant-colonel will hold 
himself at the head of the column, and direct the march of the 
leading guide. The major will hold himself abreast with the rear- 
most guide. 

If the column, instead of being at a halt, be in march, the colo- 
nel will give the same commands, and add : 

March (or douNe quick — March). 

If the column be marching in quick time, at the comimand 
march, the captain of the leading company will cause double qxiich 
time to be taken ] which will also be taken by the other companies 
as they successively attain their proper distance. 

If the column be marching in double quick time, the leading com- 
pany will continue to march at the same gait. The captains of the 
other companies will cause quick time to be taken, and as each com- 
pany gains its proper distance, its captain will cause it to retake the 
double quick step. 

To take distances on the rear of the column. 

314. If the colonel wish to take distances on the rearmost com- 
pany, he will establish two markers on the direction he shall wish 
to give to the line of battle, the first opposite to the rearmost com- 
pany, the second marker towards the head of the column, at com- 
pany distance from the first, and both facing to the rear ; at the 
same time, the right general guide, on an intimation from the lieu- 
tenant-colonel, will move rapidly a little beyond the point to which 
the head of the column will extend, and place himself correctly on 
the prolongation of the two markers. These dispositions being 
made, the colonel will command : 

1. On the eighth company take wlieeling distance. 2. Column for- 
ward. 3. Guide left. 4. Ma'RQB. (or douhle quick — March). 

At the third command^ the captains will place themselves two 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 261 

paces outside of the directing flank; the captain of the eighth 
company will caution it to stand fast. 

At the command march, repeated by all the captains, except the 
captain of the eighth company, this latter company will stand fast ; 
its chief will align it to the left on the first marker, who is opposite 
to this company, and place himself before its centre, after com- 
manding. Front. At this command, the marker will retire, and 
the left guide will take his place. 

All the other companies will put themselves in march, the guide 
of the leading one directing himself a little within the right gene- 
ral guide; when the seventh company has arrived opposite the 
second marker, its captain will halt, and align it on this marker, in 
the manner prescribed for the eighth company. 

When the captain of the sixth company shall see that there is, 
between his company and the seventh, the necessary space for 
wheeling into line, he will halt his company; the guide facing to 
the rear will place himself promptly on the direction, and the 
moment he shall be assured in his position, the captain will align 
the company by the left, and then place himself two paces before 
its centre ; the other companies will in succession conform to what 
has been prescribed for the sixth company. 

The colonel will follow the movement, and see that each company 
halts at the prescribed distance ; he will promptly remedy any fault 
that may be committed, and as soon as all the companies shall be 
aligned, he will cause the guides, who are faced to the rear, to face 
about. 

The lieutenant-colonel will assure the left guides on the direction 
in succession, placing himself in their rear, as they arrive. The 
major will hold himself at the head of the column, and will direct 
the march of the leading guides. 

To take distances on the head of the column. 

315. The colonel, wishing to take distances on the leading com- 
pany, will establish two marches in the manner just described, one 
abreast with this company, and the other at company distance in 
rear of the first, both facing to the front; the left general guide, 



262 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

on an intimation from the lieutenant-colonel, will move rapidly to 
tlie rear, and place himself correctly on the prolongation of the two 
marches, a little beyond the point to which the rear of the column 
will extend j these dispositions being made, the colonel will com- 
mand : 

1. On the first company take wheeling distance, 2. Battalion ahout 
— Face. 3. Column fonvard. 4. Guide right. 5. March 
(or double qiiich — March). 

At the second command, all the companies, except the one desig- 
nated, will face about, the guides remaining in the front rank, now 
become the rear. At the fourth command, the captains will place 
themselves outside of their guides. 

At the command march, the captain of the designated company 
will align it on the marker placed by its side. 

The remaining companies will put themselves in march, the guide 
of the rearmost one will direct himself a little within the left gene- 
ral guide; when the second company shall have arrived opposite 
the second marker, its captain will face it about, halt it, and align 
it as has just been prescribed for the first company. 

The captains of the remaining companies will each, in succession, 
conform himself to what has just been prescribed for the captain 
of the second. 

The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major, will conform to what 
is prescribed in No. 314. 

To change direction in column closed in mass. 

To change direction in marching. 

316. A column by division, closed in mass, being in march, will 
change direction by the front of subdivisions. 

Whether the change be made to the reverse, or to the pivot flank, it 
will always be executed on the principle of wheeling in marching; 
to this end, the colonel will first cause the battalion to take the 
guide on the flank opposite to the intended change of direction, if it 
be not already on that flank. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 



263 



A column by division^ closed in mass, right in front, liaving to 
change direction to the right, the colonel, after having caused a 
marker to be placed at the point where the change ought to com- 



mence, will command : 



1. Battalion, right wheel. 2. MARCH. 

(Fig. 69.) At the command march, the leading division will 
wheel as if it were part of a column at half distance. 

The instant that this division commences the wheel, all the others 



^; -^ 


W'l 


w 


p 




^ 


ll 


p 




H 


11 


__ _ J 




h\ . 11 V 



Fiff G9. 




264 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

will^ at once, conform themselves to its movement; to this end the 
left guide of each, advancing slightly the left shoulder, and length- 
ening a little the step, will incline to the left, and will observe, at 
the same time, to gain so much ground to the front that there may 
constantly be an interval of four paces between his division and that 
which precedes it; and as soon as he shall cover the preceding 
guide, he will cease to incline, and then march exactly in his trace. 

Each division will conform itself to the movement of its guide ; 
the men will feel lightly the elbow towards him and advance a little 
the left shoulder the instant the movement commences ; each file, 
in inclining, will gain so much the less ground to the front, as the 
file shall be nearer to the pivot, and the right guide will gain only so 
much as may be necessary to maintain between his own and the 
preceding division the same distance which separates their marching 
flanks. 

The colonel, seeing the wheel nearly ended, will command : 

1. Forward. 2. March. 

At the second command, which will be given at the instant the 
leading division completes its wheel, it will resume the direct march ; 
the other divisions will conform themselves to this movement; and 
if any guide find himself not covering his immediate leader, he will, 
by slight degrees, bring himself on the trace of that guide, by 
advancing the right shoulder. 

To change direction from a halt. 

817. A column by company, or by division, closed ^n mass, being 
at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to give it a new direction, and 
in which it is to remain, he will cause it to execute this movement 
by the flanks of subdivisions, in the following manner : 

The battalion having the right in front, when the colonel shall 
wish to cause it to change direction by the right flank, he will indi- 
cate to the lieutenant-colonel the point of direction to the right; 
this officer will immediately establish, on the new direction, two 
markers, distant from each other a little less than the front of the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 



2G5 



first subdivision, tlie first marker in front of the right file of this 
subdivision ; which being executed he will command : 

1. Change direction hy the riylitfianh. 2. Battalion, right — Face. 
3. March (or douhle quick — March). 

(Fig. 70.) At the second command, the column will face to the 
right, and each chief of subdivision will place himself by the side 
of his right guide. 




At the command march, all the subdivisions will step oif to- 
gether : the right guide of the leading one will direct himself from 
the first step, parallelly to the markers placed in advance on the 
new direction; the chief of the subdivision will not follow the 
movement, but see it file past, and as soon as the left guide shall 
have passed, he will command : 

1. First company (or first division). 2. Halt. 3. Front. 

4. Left — Dress. 
At the fourth command, the subdivision will place itself against 
the two markers, and be promptly aligned by its chief. 

The right guide of each of the following subdivisions will con- 
23 



2G6 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

form himself to the direction of the right guide of the subdivision 
preceding his own in the column, so as to enter on the new 
direction parallelly to that subdivision, and at the distance of four 
paces from its rear rank. 

Each chief of subdivision will halt in his own person, on arriving 
opposite to the left guides already placed on the new direction, see 
his subdivision file past, and conform himself, in halting and 
aligning it, to what is prescribed above. 

If the change of direction be by the left flank, the colonel will 
cause markers to be established as before, the first in front of the 
left file of the leading subdivision, and then give the same com- 
mands, substituting the indication left for riglit. 

Beiitg in column hy com^amj, dosed in mass, to form divisions. 

318. The column being closed in mass, right in front, and at a 
halt, when the colonel shall wish to form divisions, he will command : 

1. Form divisions. 2. Left companies, left — FaCE. 3. March 
(or douhle quick — March). 

At the first command, the captains of the left companies will 
caution them to face to the left. At the second command, the left 
companies will face to the left, and their captains will place them- 
selves by the side of their respective left guides. 

The right companies, and their captains, will stand fast ; but the 
right and left guides of each of these companies will place them- 
selves respectively before the right and left files of the company, 
both guides facing to the right, and each resting his right arm 
gently against the breast of the front rank man of the file, in order 
to mark the direction. 

At the command march, the left companies only will put them- 
selves in march, their captains standing fast ; as each shall see that 
his company, filing past, has nearly cleared the column, ho will 

command : 

1. Such compavy. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 

The first command will be given when the company shall yet have 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 2G7 

four paces to mcircli j the second the instant it shall have cleared ita 
right company; and the third immediately after the second. 

The company having faced to the front, the files, if there be 
intervals between them, will promptly incline to the right ; the cap- 
tain will place himself on the left of the right company of the 
division, and align himself correctly on the front rank of that com- 
pany. The left guide will, at the same time, place himself before 
one of the three left files of his company, face to the right, and 
cover the guides of the right company correctly; the moment his 
captain sees him established on the direction, he will command : 

Riglit — Dress. 

At this, the left company will dress forward on the alignment of 
the right company ; the front rank man, who may find himself oppo- 
site to the left guide, will, w^ithout preceding his rank, rest his 
breast lightly against the right arm of this guide ; the captain of 
the left company will direct its alignment on this man, and the 
alignment being assured, he will command Front; but not quit 
his position. 

The colonel seeing the divisions formed, will command : 

Guides — Posts. 

At this, the guides who have marked the fronts of division, will 
return to their places in column, the left guide of each right com- 
pany passing through the interval in the centre of the division, 
the senior captain of each division will take his post two paces in 
front of the division, and the junior captain will place himself be- 
tween the two companies. 

319. If the column be in march, instead of at a halt, when the 
colonel shall wish to form divisions, he will command : 

1. Form divisions. 2. Left companies, hy the left flank. 3. March 
{ov double quick — March). 

At the first command, the captains of the right companies will 
command, mar/c time, the captains of the left companies will cau- 
tion their companies to face hy the left flank. At the third com- 
mand, the right companies will mark time, the left companies will 



268 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

face to the left, tlie captains of tlie left companies will each see his 
company file past him, and when it has cleared the column, will 
command : 

Such company hy the right flanh — March. 

As soon as the divisions are formed, the colonel will command : 

4. Forward. 5. March. 

At the fifth command, the column will resume the gait at 
which it was marching previous to the commencement of the move- 
ment. The guides of each division will remain on the right and 
left of their respective companies ) the left guide of the right com- 
pany will pass into the line of file-closers, before the two companies 
are united ; the right guide of the left company will step into the 
rear rank. 

Being in column at full or half distance to form divisions. 

320. If the column be at a halt, and, instead of being closed in 
mass, is at full or half distance, divisions will be formed in the same 
manner; but the captains of the left companies, if the movement 
be made in quick time, after commanding Front, will each place 
himself before the centre of his company, and command : 

1. Such company, forward. 2. Guide right. 3. March. 

If the movement be made in double quick time, each will com- 
mand as soon as his company has closed the column : 

1. Such company hy the right flanh. 2. March. 

If the left be in front, the movement will be executed by inverse 
means. 

Countermarch of a column at full or half distance. 

321. In a column at full or half distance, the countermarch will 
be executed by the means indicated, school of the company ; to this 
end, the colonel will command : 

1. Countermarch. 2. Battalion right (or left^ — Face. 3. By file, 
left (or right). 4. March (or douhle quick — ^^ March). 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 260 



To countermarch a column closed in mass. 

(Fig. 71.) If the column be closed in mass, the countermarch 
will be executed by the commands and means subjoined. 

The column being supposed formed by division, right in front, 
the colonel will command : 

1. Countermarch. 2. Battalion, right and left — Face. 3. By file 
left and right. 4. March (or do\ible quick — March). 

At the first command, the chiefs of the odd numbered divisions 
will caution them to face to the right, and the chiefs of the others 
to face to the left. 

At the second command, the odd divi- H i ,, Sja 

sions will face to the right, and the even g ^ i ,, p 

to the left ; the right and left guides of all 
the divisions will face about ; the chiefs „ , 
of odd divisions will hasten to tbeir right 
and cause two files to break to the rear, 
and each chief place himself on the left 

of the leading front rank man of his divi- 

sion; the chiefs of even divisions will ^ L... ^"n^ 

hasten to their left, and cause two files to //^ -J vL^/ 

break to the rear, and each chief place \\^^ — '— i 
himself on the right of his leading front □ - r'"' \.°) ) 

rank man. /f^^rZITV" 

At the command march, all the divi- ^^ — ^ 
sions, each conducted by its chief, will -^^J ^^' 

step off smartly, the guides standing fast; 
each odd division will wheel by file to the 
left around its right guide ; each even 
division will wheel by file to the right 

around its left guide, each division so r""ii'ii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiHiiiii!iii niiiiini-, 

directing its march as to arrive behind its rriMiiiiiiiini i iiiiiiiniiiiii iiii!!iii![i-. 

opposite guide, and when its head shall be diZZZZZEZII^Zli 

up with this guide, the chief will halt the ^iimlJM^j-;^^^^^ 

division, and cause it to face to the front. 

Each division, on facing to the front, will be aligned by its chief 



270 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

by tlie riglit; to this end, the chiefs of the even divisions will move 
rapidly to the right of their respective divisions. 

The divisions being aligned, each chief will command, Front ; 
at this, the guides will shift to- their proper flanks. 

In a column with the left in front, the countermarch will be exe- 
cuted by the same commands and means ; but all the divisions will 
be aligned by the left : to this end, the chiefs of the odd divisions 
will hasten to the left of their respective divisions as soon as the 
latter shall have been faced to the front. 

Different modes of passing froiin the order in column to the order in 

battle. 

Planner of determining the line ofhattle. 

322. The line of battle may be marked or determined in three 
different manners : 1st, by placing two markers eighty or one hun- 
dred paces apart, on the direction it is wished to give to the line • 
2d, by placing a marker at the point at which it may be intended 
to rest a flank, and then choosing a second point towards, or beyond 
the opposite flank, and there posting a second marker distant from 
each other a little less than the leading subdivision ; 3d, by choos- 
ing at first the points of direction for the flanks, and then determi- 
ning, by intermediate points, the straight line between those selected 
points, both of which may sometimes be beyond reach. 

Column at full distance, right in front, to the left into line ofhattle. 

323. A column, right in front, being at a halt, when the colonel 
shall wish to form it to the left into line, he will assure the positions 
of the guides by means previously indicated, and then command : 

Left into line, wheel. 2. Marcii (or double quieh — March). 

At the first command, the right guide of the leading company will 
hasten" to place himself on the direction of the left guides of the 
column, face to them, and place himself so as to be opposite to one 
of the three right files of his company, when they shall be in line : 
he will be assured in this position by the lieutenant-colonel. 

At the command march, briskly repeated by the captains, the left 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 271 

front rank man of each company will face to the left, and rest his 
breast lightly against the right arm of his guide; the companies 
will wheel to the left on the principle of wheeling from a halt, con- 
forming themselves to what is prescribed, school of the company : 
each captain will turn to his company, to observe the execution of 
the movement, and, when the right of the company shall arrive a 
three paces from the line of battle, he will command : 

1. /SucJi company. 2. Halt. 

The company being halted, the captain will place himself on the 
line by the side of the left front rank man of the company next on 
the right, align himself correctly, and command : 

3. Right — Dress. 

At this command, the company will dress up between the captain 
and the front rank man on its left, the captain directing the align- 
ment on that man ; the front rank man on the right of the right 
company, who finds himself opposite to its right guide, will lightly 
rest his breast against the left arm of this guide. 

Each captain, having aligned his company, will command, Front, 
and the colonel will add : 

Guides — Posts. 

At this command, the guides will return to their places in line 
of battle, each passing through the nearest captain's interval ; to 
permit him to pass, the captain will momentarily step before the 
first file of his company, and the covering sergeant behind the same 
file. This rule is general for all the formations info line of battle. 

When companies form line of battle, file-closers will always place 
themselves exactly two paces from the rear rank, which will suffi- 
ciently assure their alignment. 

The battalion being correctly aligned, the colonel, lieutenant- 
colonel, and major, as well as the adjutant and sergeant-major, will 
return to their respective places in line of battle. This rule is gene- 
ral/or all the formations into line of hattle. 



272 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

A column, with the left in front, will form itself to the right into 
line of battle, according to the same principles. 

At the command, guides posts, the captains will take their places 
in line of battle as well as the guides. I'Ms rule is general for all 
formations into line of hattle in which the companies are aligned hy 
the left. 

324. A column by division may form itself into line of battle by 
the same commands and means, observing what follows : if the right 
be in front, at the command halt, given by the chiefs of division, 
the left guide of each right company will place himself on the align- 
ment opposite to one of the three files on the left of his company ; 
the left guide of the fi.rst company will be assured on the direction 
b}'' the lieutenant-colonel; the left guides of the other right com- 
panies will align themselves correctly on the division guides; to 
this end, the division guides (already on the line) will invert, and 
hold their pieces up perpendicularly before the centre of their 
bodies, at the command left into line wheel. If the column by 
division be with the left in front, the right guides of the left com- 
panies will conform to what has just been prescribed for the left 
guides of the right companies. 

325. A column in march will be formed into line, without halting, 
by the same commands and means. At the command rtiarch, the 
guides will halt in their places, and the lieutenant-colonel will 
promptly rectify their positions. 

If, in forming the column into line, the colonel should wish to 
move forward, without halting, he will command : 

1. Bi/ companies left wheel. 2. MARCH (or double quick — March.) 

At the command ma/rch, repeated by the captains, each company 
will wheel to the left on a fixed pivot, as prescribed in the school of 
the company, the left guides will step back into the rank of file- 
closers before the wheel is completed, and when the right of the 
companies shall arrive near the line, the colonel will command : 

3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide centre. 
At the fourth command, given at the instant the wheel is com- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 273 

pleted, the companies will march directly to the front. At the fifth 
command, the color and the general guides will move rapidly six 
paces to the front. The colonel will assume the direction of the 
color ; the captains of companies and the men will, at once, conform 
to the principles of the march in line of battle, to he indicated. No. 
343. 

By inversion to the right (or leff) into line of hattle. 

326. When a column, right in front, shall be under the necessity 
of forming itself into line faced to the reverse flank, a^d the colo- 
nel shall wish to execute this formation by the shortest movement, 
he will command : 

1. By inversion, right into line, wheel. 2. Battalion, guide right. 

At the first command, the lieutenant-colonel will place himself in 
front, and facing to the right guide of the leading subdivision ; at 
the second command, he will rectify, as promptly as possible, the 
direction of the right guides of the column ; the captain of the odd 
company, if there be one, and the column be by division, will 
promptly bring the right of his company on the direction, and at 
comj)any distance from the division next in front ; the left guide 
of the leading subdivision will place himself on the direction of 
the right guides, and will be assured in his position by the lieu- 
tenant-colonel ; which being executed, the colonel will command : 

3. March (or double quick — March). 

At this, the right front rank man of each subdivision will face to 
the -right, rest his breast lightly against the left arm of his guide, 
and the battalion will form itself to the right into line of battle, ac- 
cording to the principles prescribed. 

Successive formations. 

327. Under the denomination of successive formations are included 
all those formations where the several subdivisions of a column 
arrive one after another on the line of battle ; such are formations 
on the right, or left, forward and faced to the rear into line of battle, 
as well as deployments of columns in mass. 

s 



274 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERSAND MILITIA. 

The successive formations which may be ordered when the column 
is marching, and is to continue marching, will he executed by a 
combination of the two gaits, quick and double quick time. 

In all the successive formations, every captain will always observe 
before dressing his company, to place himself correctly on the line 
either on the left or right of the company which precedes his in 
line, and see that his guide has been assured on the direction by 
the lieutenant-colonel. 

Column at full distance, on the riykt (or on tlie left') into line of 

hattle. 

328. A column by company, at full distance and right in front, 
having to form itself on the right into line of battle, the colonel will 
indicate to the lieutenant-colonel a little in advance, the point of 
appui, or rest, for the right, as well as the point of direction to the 
left; the lieutenant-colonel will hasten with two markers, and esta- 
blish them in the following manner on the direction indicated : 

The first marker will be placed at the point of appui for the right 
front rank man of the leading company; the second will indicate 
the point where one of the three left files of the same company will 
rest when in line; they will be placed so as to present the right 
shoulder to the battalion when formed. 

These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 

1. On the right, into line. 2. Battalion, guide right. 

(Fig. 72.) At the second command, the right will become the 
directing flank, and the touch of the elbow will be to that side; the 
right guide of the leading company will march straight foiward 
until up with the turning point, and each following guide will march 
in the trace of the one immediately preceding. 

The leading company being nearly up with the first marker, its 
cap^^ain will command : 

1. Right turn, 

and when the company is precisely up with this marker, he will add : 

2. March. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 



:^7D 



At the command march, tlie company will turn to the right ; the 
right guide will so direct himself as to bring the man next to him 
opposite to the right marker, and 
when at three paces from him, the 
captain will command : 

1. First company ; 2, Halt. 

At the second command, the com- 
pany will halt; the files, not yet in 
line, will form promptly; the left 
guide will retire as a file-closer; and 
the captain will then command : 

3. Right — Dress. 



^i:^ 



^Willllilllllllili'iWIiP 



At this command, the company j 

will align itself; the two men who Hiiniiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii'iiiif' 
find themselves opposite to the two i 

markers, will each lightly rest his ! 

breast against the right arm of his HMOIImIIP 
marker ; the captain, passing to the ; -^(^ ^^' 

right of the front rank, will direct the 
alignment on these two men. These 
miles are general for all successive 
formations. 

The second company will continue 
to march straight forward; when 
arrived opposite to the left flank of 
the preceding company, it will turn 
to the right, and be formed on the 
line of battle, as has just been jore- 
scribed ; the right guide will direct himself so as to come upon that 
line by the side of the man on the left of the first company. 

At the distance of three paces from the line of battle, the com- 
pany will be halted by its captain, who will place himself briskly by 
the lide of the man on the left of the preceding company, and align 
himself correctly on its front rank. 

The left guide will, at the same time, place himself before one 



Zib RIANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

of the three left files of his company, and, facing to the right, he 
will place himself accurately on the direction of the two markers 
of the preceding company. 

The captain will then command : 

EigJit — Dress. 

At this command, the second company will dress forward on the 
line ; the captain will direct its ahgnment on the front rank man 
who has rested his breast against the left guide of the company. 

The following companies will thus come successively to form 
themselves on the line of battle, each conforming itself to what has 
just been prescribed for the one next to the right; and when they 
shall all be established, the colonel will command : 

Guides — Posts 

At this command, the guides will take their places in line of 
battle, and the markers placed before the right company will retire. 

If the column be marching in quick time, and the colonel should 
wish to cause the movement to be executed in double quick time, 
he will add the command : 

Douhle qukli — March. 

At the command march, all the companies will take the double 
quick step, and the movement will be executed as prescribed above. 

The colonel will follow up the formation, passing along the front, 
and being always opposite the company about to turn : it is thus 
that he will be the better able to see and correct the error that 
would result from a command given too soon or too late to the pre- 
ceding company. 

The lieutenant-colonel will, with the greatest care, assure the 
direction of the guides ] to this end, the instant that the markers 
are established for the leading company, he will move a little beyond 
the point at which the left of the next company will rest, establish 
himself correctly on the prolongation of the two markers, and assure 
the guide of the second company on this direction : this guide being 
assured, the lieutenant-colonel will place himself farther to the rear, 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION, 277 

in order to assure, in like manner, tlie guide of the third company, 
and so on, successively, to the left of the battalion. In assuring 
the guides in their positions on the line of battle, he will take care 
to let them first place themselves, and confine himself to rectifying 
their positions if they do not cover accurately, and at the proper 
distance, the preceding guides or markers. This rule is general for 
all successive formations. 

W^hen the direction of the line of battle forms a sensible angle 
with that of the march of the column, the colonel, before beginning 
the movement, will give the head of the column a new direction 
parallel to that line. 

A column, left in front, will form itself on the left into line of 
battle according to the same principles. 

Each captain will cause his company to support arms, the instant 
that the captain, who follows him, shall have commanded front. 
This rule is general for all successive formations. 

When, in the execution of this movement, the colonel shall wish 
to commence firing, he will give the order to that effect to the cap- 
tain whose company is the first on the line ; this captain will imme- 
diately place himself behind the centre of his company, and as soon 
as the next captain shall have commanded front, he will commence 
the fire by file. At the command fre hy file, the marker at the 
outer flank of this company will retire, and the other will place him- 
self against the nearest man of the next company. The captain of 
the latter will commence firing as soon as the captain of the third 
company, in line, shall have commanded front ; the marker before 
the right or left file retiring, and the guide before the opposite 
flank taking post before the nearest file of the third company, in 
line; and so on to the last company. 

Column at full distance, forward into line of hattle. 

329. A column being by company, at full distance, right in front, 
and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form it forward intc 
line, he will conform to what is prescribed in the first part of the 
last number, and then command : 
24 



278 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA, 



1. Forward into line. 2. By company, left half ivheel. 8. MaRCH 

(or douhle quick — March). 

(Fig. 73.) At the first command, the captain of the leading com. 

pany will add, guide right , put the company in march, halt it three 

paces from the markers, and align it against the latter by the right 



lllllil!|i|l|li!ll!ll!!l|!|lilll!lilllliliyillir!lllll|ll!lbllil]||IHIIIIIl!llllllllll!lllillll!ill^illliHllliaill 




nj 73. 









At the command march, all the other companies will wheel to the 
left on fixed pivots ; and, at the instant the colonel shall judge, ac- 
cording to the direction of the line of battle, that the companies 
have sufficiently wheeled, he will command : 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 279 

4. Foriuard. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 

At the fifth command, the companies ceasing to wheel, will march 
*itraight forward ', and at the sixth, the men will touch elbows to- 
wards the right. The right guide of the second company, who is 
nearest to the line of battle, will march straight forward ; each suc- 
ceeding right guide will follow the file immediately before him at 
the cessation of the wheel. 

The second company haying arrived opposite to the left file of 
the first, its captain will cause it to turn to the right, in order to 
approach the line of battle ; and when its right guide shall be at 
three paces from that line, the captain will command : 

1. Second company. 2. Halt. 

At the second command, the company will halt; the files not yet 
in line with the guide will come into it promptly, the left guide will 
place himself on the line of battle, so as to be opposite to one of 
the three files on the left of the company ; and, as soon as he is as- 
sured on the direction by the lieutenant-colonel, the captain, having 
placed himself accurately on the line of battle, will command : 

3. Bight — Dress. 

At the instant that the guide of the second company begins to 
turn to the right, the guide of the third ceasing to follow the file 
immediately before him, will march straight forward ] and, when he 
shall arrive opposite to the left of the second, his captain will cause 
the company to turn to the right, in order to approach the line of 
battle, halt it at three paces from that line, and align it by the right, 
as prescribed for the second company. 

Each following company will execute what has just been pre- 
scribed for the third, as the preceding company shall turn to the 
right, in order to approach the line of battle. 

The formation ended, the colonel will command : 

Guides — Posts. 

The colonel and lieutenant-colonel will observe, in this formation, 
what is prescribed for them on the right into line. 



280 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

A column left in front, will form itself forward into line of battle 
according to the same principles and by inverse means. 

330. When a column by company at full distance, right in front, 
and in march, has arrived at company distance from the two markers 
established on the line, the colonel will command: 

1. Forward into line. 2. By company, left half wheel. 3. March. 
{pv double quick — March). 

At the first command, the captain of the first company will com- 
mand. Guide right, and caution it to march directly to the front, 
the captains of the other companies will caution them to wheel to 
the left. 

At the command march, briskly repeated by the captains, the 
movement will be executed as in the last case. 

If the colonel should wish to form the column forward into line, 
and to continue to march in this order, he will not cause markers to 
be established ; the movements will be executed in douhle. quick time, 
by the same commands and means, observing what follows : 

At the first command, the captain of the first company will add 
quick time after the command guide right. At the second command, 
the first company will continue to march in quick time, and will take 
the touch of elbow to the right ; its chief will immediately place 
himself on its right, and to assure the march, will take points of 
direction to the front. The captain of the second company will cause 
his company to take the same gait as soon as it shall arrive on a line 
with the first, and will also move to the right of his company; the 
captains of the third and fourth companies will execute in succession 
what has just been prescribed for the second. The companies will 
preserve the touch of elbows to the right, until the command, giiide 
centre. 

When the color company shall have entered the line, the colonel 
will command, guide centre. At this command, the color-bearer 
and right general guide, will move rapidly six paces in advance of 
the line. The colonel will assure the direction of the color-bearer, 
the lieutenant-colonel and right companies will immediately conform 
to the principles of the march in line of battle. The left companies 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 281 

and the left general guide, as they arrive in line, will also conform 
to the same principles. 

Column at full distance, faced to the rear, into line of hattle. 

331. A column being by company, at full distance, right in front, 
and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form it into line faced 
to the rear, he and the lieutenant-colonel will conform themselves 
to what is prescribed in the first part of JSTo. 328, and the colonel 
will then command : 

1. Into line, faced to the rear. 2. Battalion, right — Face. 3. 
March (or douhle quick — March). 

(Fig. 74.) At the first command, the captain of the leading 
company will cause it to face to the right, and put it in march, 
causing it to wheel by file to the left, and direct its march towards 
the line of battle which it will pass in rear of the left marker; the 
first file having passed three paces beyond the line, the company 
will wheel again by file to the left, in order to place itself in rear 
of the two markers ; being in this position, its captain will halt it, 
face it to the front, and align it by the right against the markers. 

At the second command, all the other companies will face to the 
right, each captain placing himself by the side of his right guide. 

At the command march, the companies will put themselves in 
movement ', the left guide of the second, who is nearest to the line 
of battle, will hasten in advance to mark that line; he will place 
himself on it as prescribed above for successive formations, and thus 
indicate to his captain the point at which he ought to pass the line 
of battle, by three paces, in order to wheel by file to the left, and 
then to direct his company parallelly to that line. 

As soon as the first file of this company shall have arrived near 
the left file of the preceding one already on the line of battle, its 
captain will command : 

1. Second company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4, Right — Dress. 

The first command will be given when the company shall yet have 
four paces to take to reach the halting point. 
24* 



282 MANUAL yOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITI>i 



►fiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiijiiiiiiiiiiiimiiiii!iiiiliiiiliiiiiiiiiiiii'Hiiililiiiliiiiiiiiiiiii^^ ^^^^i iii.iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii h HPHiiiiiiiiiip 

i ////// / 



f / 



/ 
/ / / / / / J-v^^- 



/ / / / 

/ / / 

' / / / 

/ 

' / / / / 
/ / / / 



/ / / 

/ 
/ / / 



/ 
/ 



At the second command, the company will halt. 

At the third, the company will face to the front, and if there be 
openings between the files, the latter will promptly close to the right ; 
the captain will immediately place himself by the side of the man 
on the left of the preceding company, and align himself on its front 
rank. 

The fourth command will be executed as prescribed, No. 328. 

The following companies will be conducted and established on 
the line of battle as just prescribed for the second, each regulating 
itself by the one that precedes it; the left guides will detach them- 
selves in time to precede their respective companies on the line by 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 283 

twelve or fifteen paces, and eacli place himself so as to be opposite 
to one of tlie three left files of his company, when in line. If the 
movement be executed in double quick time, the moment it is com- 
menced, all the left guides will detach themselves at the same time 
from the column, and will move at a run, to establish themselves on 
the line of battle. 

The formation ended, the colonel will command : 

Guides — Posts. 

The colonel and lieutenant-colonel, in this formation, will each 
observe what is prescribed for him in that of on the right, into line 
of battle. 

A column, left in front, will form itself faced to the rear into line 
of battle according to the same principles and by inverse means. 

332. If the column be in march, and nearly at company distance 
from the two markers established on the line, the colonel will com- 
mand : 

1. Into line, faced to the rear. 2. Battalion, hy the right flanh. 
3. March (or double quick — March). 

At the first command, the captains will caution their companies 
to face by the right flank. 

At the command march, briskly repeated by the captains of com- 
panies, all the companies will face to the right, and the movement 
will be completed as in the last case. 

Formation in line of battle by two movements. 

333. If a column by company, right in front, and at a halt, find 
itself in part on the line of battle, and the colonel should think 
propel to form line of battle before all the companies enter the new 
direction, the formation will be executed as follows : 

It will be supposed that the column has arrived behind the line 
of battle, and that five companies have entered the new direction, 
the colonel having assured the guides of the first five companies on 
the direction,, will command : 

1. Left into line wheel. 2. Three rear companies forward into line. 



284 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

At the second command^ the chief of each of the rear companies 
will command : By company left Tialf-icheel ; and the colonel will 
add : 

3. March (or double qidclz — March). 

At this command, repeated by the captains, the first five compa- 
nies will wheel to the left into line, and the last three will execute 
forward into line^ by the means prescribed for this formation ; 
each captain of the three rear companies will, when his company 
shall have sufficiently wheeled, command : 

1. Forward. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
If the column be in march, the colonel will command : 

1. To the left and forward into line. 2. March (or doidjle 
quick — March). 

If the colonel should wish, in forming the battalion into line, to 
march immediately forward, he will command : 

1. By comjpany to the left, and foricard into line. 2. March. 

And when the right of the companies which wheel shall arrive 
on the line, he will command : 

3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide centre. 

If the battalion be marching in double quick time, the colonel 
will cause quick time to be taken before commencing the movement. 

334. If, instead of arriving behind, the column should arrive 
before the line of battle, so that a portion is on the line, and the 
remaining portion still in front of it, the colonel will command : 

1. Left into line, wheel. 2. Three rear companies into line, faced 
to the rear. 

At the second command, the captain of each of the three rear 
companies will command : 

1. Such company. 2. Right — Face. 

The colonel will then add : 

M 



SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION. 285 

3. March (or double quick — March). 

At this command, repeated by tlie captains, tlie first five com- 
panies will form to the left into line, and tlie three last ii\Jto line 
faced to the rear. 

If the column be in march, the colonel will command : 

1. To the left, and into line faced to the rear. 2. March (or douhle 
quick — March). 

Different modes of passing from column at half distance into line 

of battle. 

Column at half distance, to the left (or right') into line of bo.ttle. 

335. A column at half distance having to form to the left (or 
right) into line, the colonel will cause it to take distance by the 
means prescribed. No. 313 ; which being executed, he will form the 
column into line to the left or right. No. 323. 

If a column by company, at half distance, be in march, and it is 
necessary to form rapidly into line, the colonel will command : 

1. By the rear of column left (or right') into line wheel. 2. March 
(or double quick — March). 

At the first command, the right general guide will move rapidly 
to the front, and place himself a little beyond the point where the 
head of the column will rest, and on the prolongation of the guides. 
The captain of the eighth company will command : Left into line 
wheel; the other captains will caution their companies to continue 
to march to the front. At the command march, repeated by the 
captain of the eighth company, the guide of this company will halt, 
and the company will wheel to the left, conforming to the princi- 
ples laid down for wheeling from a halt ; when its right shall arrive 
near the line, the captain will halt the company, and align it to the 
left. The other captains will place themselves briskly on the flank 
of the column ; when the captain of the seventh sees that there is 
sufficient distance between his company and the eighth to form the 
latter into line, he will command: Left into line wheel — March: 



286 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the left guide will halt, and facing to the rear, will place himself 
on the line ; the company will wheel to the left, the man on the left 
of the front rank will face to the left, and place his breast against 
the arm of the guide ; the captain will halt the company when its 
right shall arrive near the line, and will align it to the left. The 
other companies will conform in succession to what has been pre- 
scribed for the seventh. Each captain will direct the alignment 
of his company on the left man in the front rank of the company 
next on his right. 

The lieutenant-colonel will see that the leading guide marches 
accurately on the prolongation of the line of battle, and directs him- 
self on the right general guide. The major, placed in rear of the 
left guide of the eighth company, will, as soon as the seventh com- 
pany is established on the direction, hasten in rear of the guides of 
the other companies, so as to assure each of them on the line in 
succession. 

Column at half distance, on the right (or left^ into line of hattle. 

836. A column at half distance will form itself on the right (or 
Ift) into line, as prescribed for a column at full distance. 

Column at half distance, forward, into line of hattle. 

337. If it be wished to form a column at half distance, forward 
into line of battle, the colonel will first cause it to close in mass and 
then deploy it on the leading company. 

Column at half distance, into line faced to the rear. 

338. A column at half distance will be formed into line of battle, 
faced to the rear, as prescribed for a column at full distance. 

Deployment of columns closed in mass. 

839. When a column in mass, by division, arrives behind the 
line on which it is intended to deploy it, the colonel will indicate^ in 
advance, to the lieutenant-colonel, the direction of the line of battle, 
as well as the point on which he may wish to direct the column. 
The lieutenant-colonel will immediately detach himself with two 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 287 

markers, and establish them on that line, the first at the point 
indicated, the second a little less than the front of a division from 
the first. 

Deployments will always be made upon hnes parallel;, and Hues 
perpendicular to the line of battle ; consequently, if the head of the 
column be near the line of battle, the colonel will commence by 
establishing the direction of the column perpendicularly to that line, 
if it be not already so. If the column be in march, he will so direct 
it that it may arrive exactly behind the markers, perpendicularly to 
the line of battle, and halt it at three paces from that line. 

The column, right in front, being halted, it is supposed that the 
colonel wishes to deploy it on the first division ; he will order the 
left general guide to go to a point on the line of battle a little 
beyond that at which the left of the battalion will rest when 
deployed, and place himself correctly on the prolongation of the 
markers established before the first division. 

These dispositions being made, the colonel will command: 

1. On the first division, deploy column. 2. Battalion, left — Face. 

(Fig. 75.) At the first command, the chief of the first division 
will caution it to stand fast; the chiefs of the three other divisions 
will remind them that they will have to face to the left. 

At the second command, the three last divisions will face to the 
left ; the chief of each division will place himself by the side of its 
left guide, and the junior captain by the side of the covering 
sergeant of the left company, who will have stepped into the fron^ 
rank. 

At the same command, the lieutenant-colonel will place a third 
marker on the alignment of the two first, opposite to one of the 
three left files of the right company, first division, and then place 
himself on the line of battle a few paces beyond the point at which 
the left of the second division will rest. 

The colonel will then command : 

3. March (or doulle quick — March). 

At this command, the chief of the first division will go to its 
right, and command : 



Z5Q MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Right — Dress. 

At this, tlie division will dress up against the markers; the chief 
of the division, and its junior captain, will each align the company 
on his left, and then command : 

Front. 

The three divisions, faced to the left, will put themselves in 
march ; the left guide of the second will direct himself parallelly to 

q pllMiiiiiiiiiiiHiiiiiiiiiiiii!iiiiiiiiiiiiiibiiiiiiiiHiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiidmiiiiliii»^^ iiKiiiiiiiiiii m!i|!ii|ii;ii!i!iiii[iiiiiiig|j|i|i|iiiiiiiillIiP 

T— • R _:rzr - H-' w — p 



1|lil|| ll!llllll|llll| |!lll| Hlllllll l llll|'|l||l|l|ll!li! 



liiMiniiiiiiiii^^ 



MiliillllllllllllllllllillllliHIilililllllllllfillllliiiF " 



.-Q D a 

llliilllilllillli UHlllllllllllililli !iir 



1lllliilllllllUlllllllllllHliHIIIIIIIIIIII[|IIIIIIIHI!ll! |-' 
^lllllllllllillli;i;llllllll!;Hillllllllllll!IH1llllllllir 
Hllllllllllllllli!lljillllllN!lllll''llllllllllg iiil? 

the line of battle ; the left guides of the third and fourth divisions 
will march abreast with the guide of the second ; the guides of the 
third and fourth, each preserving the prescribed distance between 
himself and the guide of the division which preceded his own in 
the column. 

The chief of the second division will not follow its movement; he 
will see it file by him, and when its right guide shall be abreast 
with him, he will command : 

1. Second division. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 



SCHOOL or THE BATTALION. 289 

Tlie first command will be given when the division shall yet have 
seven or eight paces to march ; the second, when the right guide 
shall be abreast with the chief of the division, and the third imme- 
diately after the second. 

At the second command, the division will halt ', at the third, it 
will face to the front, and if there be openings between the files, the 
chief of the division will cause them to be promptly closed to the 
right; the left guides of both companies will step upon the line of 
battle, face to the right, and place themselves on the direction of 
the markers established before the first division, each guide opposite 
to one of the three left files of his company. 

The division having faced to the front, its chief will place him- 
self accurately on the line of battle, on the left of the first division ; 
and when he shall see the guides assured on the direction, he will 
command : 

Eight — Beess. 

At this, the division will be aligned by the right in the manner 
indicated for the first. 

The third and fourth divisions will continue to march; at the 
command halt, given to the secon d, the chief of the third will halt 
in his own person, place himself exactly opposite to the guide of the 
second, after this division shall have faced to the front and closed 
its files ; he will see his division file past, and when his right guide 
shall be abreast with, him, he will command : 

1. Third division. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 

As soon as the division faces to the front, its chief will place 
himself two paces before its centre, and command : 

1. Third division, forward. 2, Guide right. 3. March. 

At the third command, the division will march towards the line 
of battle ; the right guide will so direct himself as to arrive by the 
side of the man on the left of the second division, and when the 
division is at three paces from the line of battle, its chief will halt 
it and align it by the right. 

25 T 



290 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 

The chief of the fourth division will conform himself (and the 
chief of the fifth, if there be a fifth) to what has just been pro- 
scribed for the third. 

The deployment ended^ the colonel will command : 

Guides — Posts. 

At this command, the guides will resume their places in line of 
battle, and the markers will retire. 

340. If the column be in march, and the colonel shall wish to 
deploy it on the first division without halting the column, he will 
make the necessary dispositions, and when the first division shall 
have arrived at three paces from the line, he will command : 

1. On the first division, deploy column. 2. Battalion hy the left 
flanlc. 3. IslKRCli (ox double g_uick — March). 

At the first command, the chief of the first division will caution 
it to halt, and will command, First division ; the other chiefs will 
caution their divisions to face by the left fiank. 

At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of the 
rear divisions, the chief of the first division will command, Halt, 
and will align his division by the right against the markers; the 
other divisions will face to the left, their chiefs hastening to the 
left of their divisions. The second, third, and fourth divisions will 
execute what is prescribed No. 338 ; but the chief of each division 
will halt in his own person at the command march, given by the 
chief of the division which precedes him, and when the right of his 
division arrives abreast of him, he will command : 

Such division hy the right Jlank — March. 

If the colonel shall wish to deploy the column without halting it, 
and to continue the march, the markers will not be posted ; the 
movement will be executed by the same commands and means as the 
foregoing, but with the following modifications : 

At the first command, the chief of the first division will com- 
mand, 1. Guide right. 2. Quick time. At the command. Double 
quick — March, given by the colonel, the first division will take 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 291 

quick thne, and toucli elbows to tlie riglit ; ilie captains ^ill place 
themselves on the right of their respective companies ; the captain 
on the right of the battalion will take points on the ground to assure 
the direction of the march. The chief of the second division will 
allow his division to file past him, and when he sees its right abreast 
of him, he will command, 1. Second division hy the right flanh. 
2. March. 3. Guide right; and when this division shall arrive 
on the alignment of the first, he will cause it to march in quick 
time. The third and fourth divisions will deploy according to the 
same principles as the second. 

The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, major, and color-bearer, will con- 
form to what is prescribed No. 330. 

341. The column being at a halt, if, instead of deploying it on 
the first, the colonel shall wish to deploy it on the rearmost division, 
he will cause the dispositions to be made indicated No. 338 ; but it 
will be the right general guide whom he will send to place himself 
beyond the point at which the right of the battalion will rest when 
deployed. 

The colonel will then command : 
1. On the fourth (or such') division, deploi/ column. 2. Battalion, 
right — Face. 

(Fig. 76.) At the first command, the chief of the fourth division 

Wl!i!llNlllllllllllill-illlllllHII|lllllllil!HllhliUIIIIIIIIII!lll!illllliililllilllilllllllllilllll»^ 



y 

Fij 76, 



1 

lill!l|llllll||lllllllll|llll|-llllllllllllllllllllllillMll|-' 



'■ 1 1^1 V ^|iHlillli!lillllllllllllilii11lij||| lllllllll»IIHIIIliiiP 

c; H ^ — H n — D 



will caution it to stand fast; the chiefs of the other divisions will 
caution them that they will have to face to the right, 



292 ai A N U A L iM) 11 VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

At the second command, the first three divisions will face to the 
right; and the chief of each will place himself by the side of its 
right guide. 

At the same command, the lieutenant-colonel will place a third 
marker between the first two, so that this marker may be opposite 
to one of the three right files of the left company of the division : 
the lieutenant-colonel will then place himself on the line of battle 
a few paces beyond the point at which the right of the third division 
will rest when deployed. 

The colonel will then command : 

3. March (or douhle quick — March). 

At this command, the three right divisions will put themselves in 
march, the guide of the first so directing himself as to pass three 
paces within the line marked by the right general guide. The chief 
of the third division will not follow its movement; he will see it 
file past, halt it when its left guide shall be abreast with him, and 
cause it to face to the front ; and if there be openings between the 
files, he will cause them to be promptly closed to the left. 

The chief of the fourth division, when he sees it nearly unmasked 
by the three others, will command : 

1. Fourth division, forward. 2. Guide left. 8. MARCH. 

At the command march, which will be given the instant the fourth 
is unmasked, this division will approach the line of battle, and when 
at three paces from the markers on that line, its chief will halt it^ 
and command : 

Left — Dress. 

At this command, the division will dress forward against the 
markers; the chief of the division and the junior captain wall each 
align the company on his right, and then command : 

Front. 

The instant that the third division is unmasked, its chief will 
cause it to approach the line of battle, and halt it in the manner just 
prescribed for the fourth. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 293 

The moment the division halts, its right guide and the covering 
sergeant of its left company will step on the line of battle, placing 
themselves on the prolongation of the markers established in front 
of the fourth division ; as soon as they shall be assured in their 
positions, the divisions will be aligned as has just been prescribed 
for the fourth. 

The second and first divisions which will have continued to march, 
will, in succession, be halted and aligned by the left, in the same 
manner as the third; the chiefs of these divisions will conform 
themselves to what is prescribed. No. 339. The second being near 
the line of battle, the command will not be given for it to move on 
this line, but it will be dressed up to it. 

The deployment ended, the colonel will command : 

Guides — Posts. 

842. To deploy the column on an interior division, the colonel 
will cause the line to be traced by the means above indicated, and 
the general guides will move briskly on the line. This being exe- 
cuted, the colonel will command : 

1. On such division, deploy column. 2. Battalion out wards-^¥ ACE. 
3. March (ov douhle quick — March). 

(Fig. 77.) Whether the column be with the right or left in front, 
the divisions which, in the order in battle, belong to the right of 

fiiitiiiiiiiiiiuiiiHiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiHiiiiitiiiiiiiiiM 



Fig 77. ' =^ 



he directing one, will face to the right ; the others, except the 
directing division, will face to the left. 

The directing division, the instant it finds itself unmasked, will 
approach the line of battle, taking the guide left or right, according 
as the right or left of the column may be in front. The chief of 
25 * 



1:9-1 -AI A N U A L FOR VOLUNTEERS A N D JI I L I T I A . 

this division will align it by the directing flank, and then step back 
into the rear, in order momentarily to give place to the chief of the 
next for aligning the next division. 

To advance in line of hattle. 

343. The battalion being correctly aligned, and supposed to be 
the directing one when the colonel shall wish to march in line of 
battle, he will give the lieutenant-colonel an intimation of his pur- 
pose, place himself about forty paces in rear of the color-file, and 
face to the front. 

The lieutenant-colonel will place himself a like distance in front 
of the same file, and face to the colonel, who will establish him as 
correctly as possible, by signal of the sword, perpendicularly to the 
line of battle opposite to the color-bearer. The colonel will next, 
above the heads of the lieutenant-colonel and color-bearer, take a 
point of direction in the field beyond, if a distinct one present itself, 
exactly in the prolongation of those first two points. 

The colonel will then move twenty paces farther to the rear, and 
establish two markers on the prolongation of the straight line passing 
through the color-bearer and the lieutenant-colonel ; these markers 
will face to the rear, the first placed about twenty-five paces behind 
the rear rank of the battalion, and the second at the same distance 
from the first. 

The color-bearer will be instructed to take, the moment the lieu- 
tenant-colonel shall be established on the perpendicular, two points 
on the ground in the straight line which, drawn from himself, would 
pass between the heels of that officer ; the first of these points will 
be taken at fifteen or twenty paces from the color-bearer. 

These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 

1, Battalion J forward. 

(Fig. 78.) At this, the front rank of the color-guard will advance 
six paces to the front; the corporals in the rear rank will place 
themselves in the front rank, and these will be replaced by those 
in the rank of file-closers ; at the same time the two general guides 
will move in advance, abreast with the color-bearer, the one on the 



S H U L OF T II E B A T T A L ION. 



295 



right, opposite to the captain of the right company, the other oppo- 
site to the sergeant who closes the left of the battalion. 

The captains of the left wing will shift, passing before the front 




Fig- 



78. 



JL 




rank, to the left of their respective companies; the sergeant on the 
left of the battalion will step back into the rear rank. The covering 
sergeant of the company next on the left of the color-company, will 
step into the front rank. 

The lieutenant-colonel having assured the color-bearer on the line 



296 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND 31 I L I T I A . 

between himself and the corporal of the color-file, now in ^he front 
rank, will go to the position which will be hereinafter indicated. 

The major will place himself six or eight paces on either flank 
of the color-rank. 

The colonel will then command : 

2. March (or douhh g-juVA: — March). 

At this command, the battalion will step off with life ; the color- 
bearer, charged with the step and direction, will scrupulously 
observe the length and cadence of the pace, marching on the pro- 
longation of the two points previously taken, and successively taking 
others in advance by the means indicated in the school of the com- 
pany ; the corporal on his right, and the one on his left, will march 
in the same step, taking care not to turn the head or shoulders, the 
color-bearer supporting the color-lance against the hip. 

The two general guides will march in the same step with the 
color-rank, each maintaining himself abreast, or nearly so, with that 
rank, and neither occupying himself with the movement of the 
other. 

The three corporals of the color-guard, now in the front rank of 
the battalion, will march well aligned, elbow to elbow, heads direct 
to the front, and without deranging the line of their shoulders ; the 
centre one will follow exactly in the trace of the color-bearer, and 
maintain the same step, without lengthening or shortening it, except 
on an intimation from the colonel or lieutenant-colonel, although he 
should find himself more or less than six paces from the color-rank. 

The covering sergeant in the front rank between the color-com- 
pany and the next on the left, will march elbow to elbow, and on 
the same line, with the three corporals in the centre, his head well 
to the front. 

The captains of the color-company, and the company next to the 
left, will constitute, with the three corporals in the centre of the 
front rank, the basis of alignment for both wings of the battalion ; 
they will march in the same step with the color-bearer, and exert 
themselves to maintain their shoulders exactly in the square with the 
direction. To this end, they will keep their heads direct to the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 297 

front, only occasionally casting an eye on tlie three centre corporals, 
witli the slightest possible turn of the neck, and if they perceive 
themselves in advance, or in rear of these corporals, the captain, or 
two captains, will, almost insensibly, shorten or lengthen the step, 
so as, at the end of several paces, to regain the true alignment, 
without giving sudden checks or impulsions to the wings beyond 
them respectively. 

The lieutenant-colonel, placed twelve or fifteen paces on the right 
of the captain of the color-company, will maintain this captain and 
the next one beyond, abreast with the three centre corporals ; to 
this end, he will caution either to lengthen or to shorten the step, 
as. may be necessary, which the captain, or two captains, will execute 
as has just been explained. 

All the other captains will maintain themselves on the prolon- 
gation of this basis ; and, to this end, they will cast their eyes 
towards the centre, taking care to turn the neck but slightly, and 
not to derange the direction of their shoulders. 

The captains will observe the march of their companies, and 
prevent the men from getting in advance of the line of captains; 
they will not lengthen or shorten step except when evidently neces- 
sary; because, to correct, with too scrupulous attention, small 
faults, is apt to cause the production of greater — loss of calmness, 
silence, and equality of step, each of v/hich it is so important 
to maintain. 

The men will constantly keep their heads well directed to the 
front, feel lightly the elbow towards the centre, resist pressure 
coming from the flank, give the greatest attention to the squareness 
of shoulders, and hold themselves always very slightly behind the 
line of the captains, in order never to shut out from the view of 
the latter the basis of alignment ; they will, from time to time, cast 
an eye on the color-rank, or on the general guide of the wing, in 
order to march constantly in the same step with those advanced 
persons. 

Pending the march, the line determined by the tv/o markers (Ji 
and d) will be prolonged by placing, in proportion as the battalion 
advances, a third marker (/) in the rear of the first (It), then the 



298 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

marker (f?) will quit his place and go a like distance in rear of (^) ; 
the marker (/t) will, in his turn, do the like in respect to (fZ), and 
so on, in succession, as long as the battalion continues to advance; 
each marker, on shifting position, taking care to face to the rear, 
and to cover accurately the two markers already established on the 
direction. A staff officer, or the quartermaster-sergeant, designated 
for the purpose, and who will hold himself constantly fifteen or 
twenty paces from and facing the marker farthest from the battalion, 
will caution each marker when to shift place, and assure him on the 
direction behind the other two. 

To halt the hattalion, marching in line of battle, and to align it. 

844. The battalion, marching in the line of battle, when the 
colonel shall wish to halt it, he will command : 

1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 

At the second command, the battalion will halt; the color-rank 
and the general guides will remain in front; but if the colonel 
should not wish immediately to resume the advance in line, nor to 
give a general alignment, he will command : 

Color and general guides — PoSTS. 

At this command, the color-rank and general guides will retake 
their places in line of battle, the captains in the left wing will shift 
to the right of their companies. 

If the colonel should then judge it necessary to rectify the align- 
ment, he will command : 

Captains^, rectify the alignment. 

The captains will immediately cast an eye towards the centre, 
align themselves accurately, on the basis of the alignment, which 
the lieutenant-colonel will see well directed, and then promptly dress 
their respective companies. The lieutenant-colonel will admonish 
such captains as may not be accurately on the alignment by the 
command : Captain of (such) company^ or captains of (such) com- 
2Janies, move np or fall hack. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 299 

But when the colonel shall wish to give the battalion a general 
alignment, either parallel or obliqne, instead of rectifying it as above, 
he will move some paces outside of one of the general guides (tlie 
right will here be supposed) and caution the right general guide 
and the color-bearer to face him, and then establish them by signal 
of the sword, on the direction which he may wish to give to the bat- 
talion. As soon as they shall be correctly established, the left gene- 
ral guide will place himself on their direction, and be assured in his 
position by the major. The color-bearer will carry the color-lance 
perpendicularly between his eyes, and the two corporals of his rank 
will return to their places in the front rank the moment he shall 
face to the colonel. 

This disposition being made, the colonel will command : 

1. Guides — On the line. 

At this command, the right guide of each company in the right 
W'ing, and the left guide of each company in the left, will each place 
himself on the direction of the color-bearer and the two general 
guides, face to the color-bearer, place himself in rear of the guide 
who is next before him at a distance equal to the front of his com- 
pany, and align himself upon the color-bearer and the general guide 
beyond. 

The captains in the right wing will shift to the left of their com- 
panies, except the captain of the color-company, who will remain on 
its right, but step into the rear rank; the captains in the left wing 
will shift to the right of their companies. 

The lieutenant-colonel will promptly rectify, if necessary, the 
positions of the guides of the right wing, and the major those of the 
other 3 which being executed, the colonel will command : 

2. On the centre — Dress. 

At this command, the companies will move up in quick time 
against the guides, where, having arrived, each captain will align 
his company according to prescribed principles, the lieutenant- 
colonel aligning the color-company. 



300 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

If the alignment be oblique, the captains will take care to con- 
form their companies to it in conducting them towards the line. 
The battalion being aligned, the colonel will command : 

3. Color and guides — Posts. 

At this command, the color-bearer, the general and company 
guides, and the captains in the right wing, will take their places' in 
the line of battle, and the color-bearer will replace the heel of the 
color-lance against the right hip. 

To march in retreat, in line of hattle. 

345. The battalion being halted, if it be the wish of the colonel 
to cause it to march in retreat, he will command : 

1. Face to the rear. 2. Battalion, about — Face. 

At the second command, the battalion will face about; the color- 
rank, and the general guides, if in advance, will take their places in 
line; the color-bearer will pass into the rear rank, now leading; 
the corporal of his file will step behind the corporal nest on his own 
right, to let the color-bearer pass, and then step into the front rank, 
now rear, to re-form the color-file ; the colonel will place himself 
behind the front rank, become the rear; the lieutenant-colonel and 
major will place themselves before the rear rank, now leading. 

The colonel will take post forty paces behind the color-file, in 
order to assure the lieutenant-colonel on the perpendicular, who will 
place himself at a like distance in front, as prescribed for the ad- 
vance in line of battle. 

If the battalion be the one charged with the direction, the colonel 
will establish markers in the manner indicated. No. 343, except 
that they will face to the battalion, and that the first will be placed 
twenty-five paces from the lieutenant-colonel. If the markers be 
already established, the officer charged with replacing them in suc- 
cession villi cause them to face about, the moment that the battalion 
executes this movement, and then the marker nearest to the bat= 
talion will hasten to the rear of the two others. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 801 

These dispositions being made^ the colonel will command : 
3. Battalion J for ward. 

At tills command, tlie color-bearer will advance six paces beyond 
the rank of file-closers, accompanied by the two corporals of his 
guard of that rank, the centre corporal stepping back to let the 
color-bearer pass ; the two file-closers nearest this centre corporal 
will unite on him behind the color-guard to serve as a basis of align- 
ment for the line of file-closers ; the two general guides will place 
themselves abreast with the color rank, the covering sergeants will 
place themselves in the line of file-closers, and the captains in the 
rear rank, now leading ; the captains in the left wing, now right, 
will, if not already there, shift to the left of their companies, now 
become the right. 

The colonel will then command : 

4. March (or double quick — March). 

The battalion will march in retreat on the same principles which 
govern the advance in line. 

To halt the hattalion marching in retreat, and to face it to the front 

346. The colonel having halted the battalion, and wishing to face 
it to the front, will command : 

1. Face to the front. 2. Battalion , about — Face. 

At the second command, the color-rank, general guides, captains, 
and covering sergeants, v/ill all retake their habitual places in line 
of battle, and the color-bearer will repass into the front rank. 

347. The battalion marching in hne of battle by the front rank, 
when the colonel shall wish to march it in retreat, he will command : 

1. Battalion, right about. 2. March. 

At the command march, the battalion will face to the rear and 
move off at the same gait by the rear rank. If the colonel should 
wish the battalion to march again by the front, he will give the 
same commands. 
26 



302 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



Passage of obstacles, advancing and retreating. 

3-48. The battalion advancing in line will be supposed to encounter 
an obstacle which covers one or more companies ] the colonel will 
cause them to ploy into column at full distance^ in rear of the next 
company towards the color, which will be executed as follows : It 
will be supposed that the obstacle only covers the third company, 
the colonel will command : 

Tliird company, obstacle. 

At this command, the captain of the third company will place 
himself in its front, turn to it, and command, 1. Third company, by 
the left Jlank, to the rear into column. 2. Double quich. 3. MARCH. 
He will then hasten to the left of his company. 

At the command march, the company will face to the left in 
marching; the two left files will promptly disengage to the rear in 
double quick time ; the left guide, placing himself at the head of 
the front rank, will conduct it behind the fourth company, directing 
himself parallelly with this company ; the captain of the third will 
himself halt opposite to the captain of the fourth, and see his com- 
pany file past ; when its right file shall be nearly up with him, he 
will command, 1. Third company. 2. By the right flank. 3. 
March, 4. Guide right, and place himself before the centre of 
the company. 

At the command march, the company will face to the right, pre- 
serving the gait, but the moment it shall be at the prescribed dis- 
tance, the captain will command : 

1. Quick time. 2. March. 

This company will follow in column that behind which it finds 
itself, and at wheeling distance, its right guide marching exactly in 
the trace of the captain of that company. 

As soon as the third company shall have faced to the left, the 
left guide of the second will place himself on the left of the front 
rank of his company, and maintain between himself and the right 



SCHOOL OF T IT E BATTALION. 303 

of the fourtli^ the space necessary for the return into line of the 
third. 

The obstacle being passed, the colonel will command : 

Third company, forward into line. 

At this command, the captain, turning to his company, will add : 

1. Bi/ comjmn?/, right half wheel 2. Double quick. 3. March, 

At the command march, the company will take the double quick 
step and execute a half wheel ; its captain will then command : 

1. Forward. 2. March. 3. Guide hft. 

At the command march, the company will direct itself straight 
forward towards the line, and retake its position in it according to 
the principles prescribed for the formation forward into line. 

349. It will be supposed that the obstacle covers several con- 
tiguous companies (the three companies on the right for example), 
the colonel will command : 

1. Three right companies, ohstacle. 2. By the leftflanh, to the r ear ^ 
into column. 3. Double quick. 4. MarCH. 

At the first command, the captains of the designated companies 
will each place himself before the centre of his company, and cau- 
tion it that it has to face to the left. 

At the command march, the designated companies will face to 
the left in marching, and immediately take the double quick step ; 
each captain will cause the head of his company to disengage itself 
to the rear, and the left guide will place himself at the head of the 
front rank ; the captain of the third company will conform to what 
has been prescribed for him in the last number; the captains of the 
other companies will conduct their companies by the flank in rear 
■ of the third, inclining towards the head of thQ column ; and, as 
the head of each company arrives opposite to the right of the one 
next before it in column, its captain will halt, see his company file 
past him, face it by the right flank, take guide right, and place him- 
self before its centre. 



o04 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

When the last company in column shall have passed the obstacle, 
the colonel will command : 

1. TJiree right comj)ames, foricard into line. 

At this command, the captain of each of these three companies 

will command : B?/ compavy, right half wheel. The colonel will 

then add ; 

1. DouUe qniclc. 2. March. 

At this briskly repeated by the captains of the three companies, 
each company will execute the movement on the principles laid 
down in the movement of forward into line without halting. 

350. If the companies belong to the left wing, they v/ill execute 
the passage of an obstacle according to the same principles, but by 
inverse means. 

If the battalion is marching at double quick, and it becomes 
necessary to break off several companies in the passage of an obsta- 
cle, the colonel will first bring it to march in quick time. 

When the color company shall be obliged to execute the mr^ve- 
ment of passing an obstacle, the color rank will return into line the 
moment the company shall face to the right or left; the major will 
place himself six paces before the extremity of the company behind 
which the color company marches in column, in order to give the 
step and the direction ; he, himself, first taking the step from the 
battalion. 

To pass a defile, in retreat, hy the right or left fianlc. 

351, When a battalion, retiring in line, shall encounter a defile 
which it must pass, the colonel will halt the battalion and face it to 
the front. 

It will be supposed that the defile is in rear of the left flank, and 
that its width is sufficient to give passage to a column by platoon ; 
the colonel will place a marker fifteen or twenty paces in rear of 
the file-closers at the point around which the companies will have 
to change direction in order to enter the defile ; he will then com- 
mand : 

To the rear, hy the right fianh, pass the defile. 



SCHOOL or THE BATTALION. 305 

The captain of tlie first company will immediately command : 

1. First company, rigJit — Face. 2. March (ox douhle quick — 

March). 

At the command march, the first company will commence the 
movement ; the first file will wheel to the right, march to the rear 
till it shall have passed four paces beyond the file closers, when it 
will wheel again to the right, and then direct itself straight forward 
towards the left flank. All the other files of this company will 
wheel in succession at the same place where the first had wheeled. 

The second company will, in its turn, execute the movement, by 
the commands of its captain, who will give the command march, so 
that the first file of his company may immediately follow the last 
of the first, without constraint; the first file of the second company 
will wheel to the right on its ground ; all the other files of this 
company will, in succession, wheel at the same place. The follow- 
ing companies will execute, each in its turn, what has just been 
prescribed for the second. 

When the whole of the second company shall be on the same 
direction with the first, the captain of the first will cause it to form, 
by platoon, into line, and the moment that it is in column, the guide 
of the first platoon will direct himself on the marker around whom 
he has to change direction in order to enter the defile. 

The second company will continue to march by the flank, direct- 
ing itself parallelly with the line ', and it, in its turn, will form by 
platoon into line, when the third company shall be wholly on the 
same direction with itself. The following companies will execute in 
succession what has just been prescribed for the second. 

The first platoon of the leading company having arrived opposite 
to the marker placed at the entrance of the defile, will turn to the 
left, and the following platoons will all execute the same movement 
at the same point. As the last company will not be able to form 
platoons before reaching the defile, they will so direct themselves, 
in entering it, as to leave room to the left for this movement. 

The battalion will thus pass the defile by platoon ; and, as the 
two platoons of each company shall clear it, companies will be formed. 
26* u 



306 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The head of the column having cleared the defile^ and having 
reached the distance at which the colonel wishes to re-form the line 
faced to the defile, he may cause the leading company to turn to the 
left, to prolong the column in that direction, and then form it to the 
left into line of battle ; or he may halt the column, and form it into 
line faced to the rear. 

If the defile be in rear of the right fiank, it will be passed by the 
left; the movement will be executed according to the same princi- 
ples, and by inverse means. 

If the defile is too narrow to receive the front of a platoon, it 
will be passed by the flank. 

To maj'ch Ijy tlie flanh. 

352. The colonel, wishing the battalion to march by the flank, 
will command : 

1. Battalion. 2. Right^ (or left) — Face. 3. Forward. 4 
March (or double quick — March). 

At the second command, the captains and covering sergeants will 
place themselves as prescribed in the school of the company. 

The sergeant on the left of the battalion will place himself to the 
left and by the side of the last file of his company, covering the 
captains in file. 

The battalion having to face by the left flank, the captains, at 
the second command, will shift rapidly to the left of their companies, 
and each place himself by the side of the covering sergeant of the 
company preceding his own, except the captain of the left company, 
who will place himself by the side of the sergeant on the left of the 
battalion. The covering sergeant of the right company will place 
himself by the right side of the front rank man of the rearmost file 
of his company, covering the captains in file. 

At the command march, the battalion will step ofi" with life ; the 
sergeant, placed before the leading file (right or left in front), will 
be careful to preserve exactly the length and cadence of the step, 

1 Or, In iioo ranks — riffht — Face. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 807 

and to direct himself straight forward; to this end, he will take 
points on the ground. 

Whether the battalion march by the right or left flank, the 
lieutenant-colonel will place himself abreast with the leading file, 
and the major abreast with the color-file, both on the side of the 
front rank, and about six paces from it. 

The adjutant, placed between the lieutenant-colonel and the front 
rank, will march in the same step with the head of the battalion, 
and the sergeant major, placed between the major and the color- 
bearer, will march in the same step with the adjutant. 

The captains and file-closers will carefully see that the files neither 
open out, nor close too much, and that they regain insensibly their 
distances, if lost. 

353. The colonel wishing the battalion to wheel by file, will com- 
mand : 

1. Bij file right (or left). 2. March. 

The files will wheel in succession, and all at the place where the 
first had wheeled, in conforming to the principles prescribed in the 
school of the company. 

The battalion marching by the flank, when the colonel shall wish 
it to halt, he will command : 

1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 

These commands will be executed as prescribed in the school of 
the company. 

If the battalion be marching by the flank, and the colonel should 
wish to cause it to march in line, either to the front or to the rear, 
the movements will be executed by the commands and means pre- 
scribed in the school of the company. 

To form the hattalion on the right or left, hy file, into line of battle 

354. The battalion marching by the right flank, when the colonel 
shall wish to form it on the right by file, he will determine the line 
of battle, and the lieutenant-colonel will place two markers on that 
line, in conformity with what is prescribed No. 327. 



308 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Tlie head of tlie battalion being nearly up with the first marker, 
the colonel will command : 

1. On the right, hy file, into line. 2. March (or douhle quick — 

March). 

At the command march, the leading company will form itself on 
the right, by file, into line of battle, as indicated in the school of 
the company, No. 240 ; the front rank man of the first file will rest 
his breast lightly against the right arm of the first marke^; the 
other companies will follow the movement of the leading company ; 
each captain will place himself on the line at the same time with 
the front rank man of his first file, and on the right of this man. 

The left guide of each company, except the leading one, will 
place himself on the direction of the markers, and opposite to the 
left file of his company, at the instant that the front rank man of 
this file arrives on the line. 

The formation being ended, the colonel will command : 

Guides — Posts. 

The colonel will superintend the successive formation of the 
battalion, moving along the front of the line of battle. 

The lieutenant-colonel will, in succession, assure the direction of 
the guides, and see that the men of the front rank, in placing them- 
selves on the line, do not pass it. 

Changes of front. 
Change of front perpendicularly forward. 

355. The battalion being in line of battle, it is supposed to be 
the wish of the colonel to cause a change of front forward on the 
right company, and that the angle formed by the old and new posi- 
tions be a right angle, or a few degrees more or less than one ; he 
will cause two markers to be placed on the new direction, before the 
position to be occupied by that company, and order its captain to 
establish it against the markers. 

The captain of the right company will immediately direct it upon 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 



309 



the markers by a wheel to the right on the fixed pivot ; and after 
having halted it, he will align it by the right. 

These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 

1. Change front foriuard on first compauT/. 2. Bi/ compani/, right 
half ivheel. 3. March (or double quick — March). 

(Fig. 79). At the second command, each captain will place him- 
self before the centre of his company. 





Fif 79. 



V\\ 





At the third, each company will wheel to the right on the fixed 
pivot; the left guide of each wdll place himself on its left as soon 
as he shall be able to pass; and when the colonel shall judge that 
the companies have sufficiently wheeled, he will command : 

4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right 



310 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

At the fifth command, the companies ceasing to wheel will march 
straight forward ; at the sixth, the men will touch elbows towards 
the right. 

The right guide of the second company will march straight for- 
ward until this company shall arrive at the point where it should 
turn to the right; each succeeding right guide will follow the file 
immediately before him at the cessation of the wheel, und will 
march in the trace of this file until this company shalt turn to the 
right to move upon the line ; this guide will then march straignt 
forward. 

The second company having arrived opposite to the left file of the 
first, its captain will cause it to turn to the right ; the right guide 
will direct himself so as to arrive squarely upon the line of battle, 
and when he shall be at three paces from that line, the captain will 
command: 

1. Second company. 2. Halt. 

At the second command, the company will halt ; the files not yet 
in line with the guide will come into it promptly, the left guide will 
place himself on the line of battle, and as soon as he is assured in 
the direction by the lieutenant-colonel, the captain will align the 
company by the right. 

Each following company will conform to what has just been pre- 
scribed for the second. 

The formation ended, the colonel will command : 

Guides — Posts. 

856. If the battalion be in march, and the colonel shall wish to 
change front forward on the first company, and that the angle formed 
by the old and new positions be a right angle, he will cause two 
markers to be placed on the new direction, before the position to be 
occupied by that company, and will command : 

1. Change front forxDard on first comimm/. 2. By company, right 
half wheel. 3. March (or douhle quick — March). 

At the first command, the captains will move rapidly before the 
centre of their respective companies ; the captain of the first com- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 311 

pany will command, 1. Right turn. 2. Quick time; the captains 
of the other companies will caution them to wheel to the right. 

At the command march, the first company will turn to the right 
according to the principles prescribed in the school of the soldier, 
its captain will halt it at three paces from the markers, and the files 
in rear will promptly come into line. The captain will align the 
company by the right. 

Each of the other companies will wheel to the right on a fixed 
pivot; the left guides will place themselves on the left of their 
respective companies, and when the colonel shall judge they have 
wheeled sufficiently, he will command : 

4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 

The colonel will cause the battalion to change front forward on 
the eighth company according to the same principles and by inversQ 
means. 

Change of front perpendicularly to the rear. 

357. The colonel, wishing to change front to the rear on the right 
company, will impart his purpose to the captain of this company. 
The latter will immediately face his company about, wheel it to the 
left on the fixed pivot, and halt it when it shall be in the direction 
indicated to him by the colonel : the captain will then face his com- 
pany to the front, and align it by the right against the two markers, 
whom the colonel will cause to be estabhshed before the right and 
left files. 

These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 

1. Change front to the rear, on first company. 2. Battalion, about 
— Face. 3. By company, left half wheel. 4. March (or double 
quick — March). 

(Fig. 80.) At the second command, all the companies, except the 
right, will face about. 

At the third, the captains, whose companies have faced about, 
will each place himself behind the centre of his company, two paces 
from the front rank, now the rear. 

At the fourth, these companies will wheel to the left on the fixed 



312 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

pivot by the rear rank ; the left guide of each will, as soon as he is 
able to pass, place himself on the left of the rear rank of his com- 




Fig^ 80. 





pany, now become the right; and when the colonel shall judge that 
the companies have sufficiently wheeled, he will command : 

5. Forward. 6. March. 7. Guide left. 

At the sixth command, the companies will cease to wheel, march 
straight forward towards the new line of battle, and, at the seventh, 
take the touch of the elbow towards the left. 

The second company, from the right, having arrived opposite to 
the left of the first, will turn to the left; the guide will so direct 
himself as to arrive parallelly with the line of battle, cross that line, 
and when the front rank, now in the rear, shall be three paces be- 
yond it, the captain will command : 1. Second company. 2. Halt. 

At the second command, the company will halt ; the files which 
may not yet be in line with the guide, will promptly come into it; 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 813 

tlie captain will cause the company to face about, and then align it 
by the right. 

All the other companies will execute what has just been pre- 
scribed for the second, each as it successively arrives opposite to the 
left of the company that precedes it on the new line of battle. 

The formation being ended, the colonel will command : 

Guides — Posts. 

The colonel will cause a change of front on the left company of 
the battalion to the rear, according to the same principles and 
by inverse means. 

To ploy the hattallon into column doubled on the centre. 

358. This movement consists in ploying the corresponding com- 
panies of the right and left wings into column at company distance, 
or closed in mass in rear of the two centre companies. 

The colonel, wishing to form the double column at company 
distance, (the battalion being in line of battle,) will command : 

1. Double column^ at half distance. 2. Battalimi, inwards — Face. 
3. March (or double quick — March). 

(Fig. 81.) At the first command, the captains will place them- 
selves two paces in front of their respective companies ] the cap- 
tains of the two centre companies will caution them to stand fast, 
and the other captains will caution their companies to face to the 
left and right respectively. The covering sergeants will step into 
the front rank. 

At the second command, the fourth and fifth companies will stand 
fast ; the others of the right wing will face to the left, and the 
others of the left wing will face to the right; each captain whose 
company has faced, will hasten to break to the rear the two files at 
the head of his company ; the left guide of each right company^ 
and the right guide of each left company, will each place himself at 
the head of its front rank, and the captain by the side of his guide. 

At the command march, the fourth and fifth companies, which 
27 



314 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

^re to form the first division, will stand fast ; the senior captain of 
the two will place himself before the centre of the division, and 
command : Guide right; the junior captain will place himself in 



^ V V Tiiiiiiiiiiiiii iiHi iiiiiiiil 




\ \ / / 



Fig 81. 



" ^|i|l!l!lillllllHlHllllllll:|IIIHIIIIIIIi:HlllilillllP 



FUj 82. 



h H s H 



the interval between the two companies, and the left guide of the 
left company will place himself in the front rank on the left of the 
division, as soon as he shall be able to pass. 

All the other companies, conducted by their captains, will step 
off with life to arrange themselves in column at company distance, 
each company behind the preceding one in the column of the same 
wing, so that, in the right wing, the third ma}^ be next behind the 
f(mrth, the second next to the third, and so on to the right com- 
pany ; and, in the left wing, the sixth may be next behind the fifth, 
the seventh next to the sixth, and so on to the left company of the 
battalion. 

The corresponding companies of the two wings will unite into 
divisions in arranging themselves in column ; an instant before the 
union^ at the centre of the column, the left guides of right compa- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 315 

nies will pass into the line of file-closers, and each captain will 
command : 1. Such compaiir/. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 

At the second command, which will be given at the instant of 
anion, each company will halt ; at the third, it will face to the front 
The senior captain in each division will place himself on its right, 
and command. Right — Dress, and the junior captain will place 
himself in the interval between the two companies. The division 
being aligned, its chief will command, Front, and take his position 
two paces before its centre. 

The column being thus formed, the divisions will take the respect- 
ive denominations of first, second, thirds etc., according to position 
in the column, beginning at the front. 

The lieutenant-colonel, who, at the second command given by the 
colonel, will have placed himself at a little more than company dis- 
tance in rear of the right guide of the first division, will assure the 
right guides on the direction as they successively arrive, by placing 
himself in their rear. 

The music will pass to the rear of the column. 

359. The battalion being in march, to form the double column at 
company distance without halting the battalion, the colonel will 
command : 

1. Douhle colaran at half distance. 2. Battalion hi/ the right and 
left flanks. 3. March (or double quick — March). 

At the first command, each captain will move briskly in front of 
the centre of his company; the captains of the fourth and fifth will 
caution their companies to march straight forward ; the other cap- 
tains will caution their companies to face to the right and left. 

At the command march, the fourth and fifth companies will con- 
tinue to march straight forward ] the senior captain will place him- 
self before the centre of his division and command. Guide right ; 
the junior captain will place himself in the interval between the two 
companies. The left guide of the fifth company will place himself 
on the left of the front rank of the division. The men will take 
the touch of elbows to the right. The color and general guides will 
retake their places. The three right companies will face to the left, 



816 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

and the three left companies will face to the right. Each captain 
will break to the rear two files at the head of his company -, the left 
guides of the right companies, and the right guides of the left com- 
panies, will each place himself at the head of the front rank of his 
company, and the captain by the side of his guide. 

The third and sixth companies will enter the column and direct 
themselves parallelly to the first division. Each of the other com- 
panies will, in like manner, place itself behind the company of the 
wing to which it belongs, and will be careful to gain as much ground 
as possible towards the head of the column. 

The corresponding companies of each wing will unite into divi- 
sions on taking their positions in column, and each captain, the 
instant the head of his company arrives at the centre of the column, 
will command : 1. Such compani/ hy the right (or left^ flanh. 2. 
March. The senior captain of the two companies will place him- 
self in front of the centre of his division, and command. Guide 
right ; the junior captain will place himself in the interval between 
the two companies. The two companies thus formed into a division 
will take the touch of elbows to the right, and when each division 
has gained its proper distance, its chief will cause it to march in 
quick time. 

The double column, closed in mass, will be formed according to 
the same principles and by the same commands, substituting the 
indication, dosed in mass, for that of at half distance. 

Deployment of the douhle column, faced to the front. 

o60. The colonel wishing to deploy the double column, will place 
a marker respectively before the right and left files of the first di- 
vision, and a third before the left file of the right company, same 
division ; which being done, he will cause the two general guides to 
spring out on the alignment of the markers a little beyond the points 
at which the respective flanks of the battalion ought to rest; he will 
then command : 

1. Deploy column. 2. Battalion ouficards — Face. 3. March (or 
double quich — March). 
(Fig. 82.) The column will deploy itself on the two companies at 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 317 

its head, according to the principles prescribed for the deployment of 
columns in mass. The captain of these companies will each, at the 
command march, place himself on the right of his own company, and 
align it by the right ; the captain of the fourth will then place him- 
self in the rear rank, and the covering sergeant in the rank of file- 
closers, at the moment the captain of the third shall come to its 
left to align it. 

The deployment being ended, the colonel will command : 

Guides — Posts. 

361. The battalion being in double column and in march, if the 
colonel shall wish to deploy it without halting the column, he will 
cause three markers to be posted on the line of battle, and when the 
head of the column shall arrive near the markers, he will command : 
1, Deploy column. Battalion, hy the right and left Jlanks. 3. 
'^Iarch {oY double quick — March). The column will deploy on 
the two leading companies, according to the principles prescribed 
for the deployment of a close column; at the command march, the 
chief of the first division will halt it, and the captains of the fourth 
and fifth companies will align their companies by the right. 

362. If the column be in march, and it is the wish of the colonel 
to deploy the column, and to continue on the march in line of battle, 
he will not cause markers to be established at the head of the 
column. At the first command, the chief of the first division will 
command. Quick time ; at the command march, the first division will 
continue to march in quick time; the colonel will command. Guide 
centre. The captains of the fourth and fifth companies, the color, 
and the men, will immediately conform to the principles of the 
march in line. The companies will take the quick step by the 
command of their captains, as they successively arrive in line. The 
movement completed, the colonel may cause the battalion to march 
in double quick time. 

To form the double column into line of battle, faced to the right or 

left. ■ 

363. The double column being at company distance, and at a 

27 * 



318 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

halt, may be formed into line faced to the right or left; when the 
colonel shall Yv^ish to form it faced to the right; he will command : 

1. Right into line loJieel, left companies on the right into line. 2. 
Battalion, guide right. 3. March (or double quick — March). 

At the first command, each captain will place himself before the 
centre of his company; the right companies will be cautioned that 
they have to wheel to the right, the left companies that they will 
have to move straight forward. 

At the second command, the left guide of the fourth company 
will place himself briskly on the direction of the right guides of the 
column, face to them, and opposite to one of the three last files of 
his company when in line ; the lieutenant-colonel will assure him in 
that position. 

At the command march, briskly repeated by the captains, the 
right companies will form to the right into line, the left companies 
will put themselves in march in order to form on the right into line; 
the lieutenant-colonel will assure the guides of the left wing on the . 
line as they in succession come upon it. 

Dispositions against Cavalry. 

364. A battalion being in column by company, at full distance, 
right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form it 
into square, he will first cause divisions to be formed ; which being 
done, he will command : 

1. To form square. 2. To half distance, close column. 8. March 
(or double quick — March). 

(Fig. 83.) At the command march, the column will close to com- 
pany distance, the second division taking its distance from the rear 
rank of the first division. 

At the moment of halting the fourth division, the file-closers of 
each company of v/hich it is composed, passing by the outer flank 
of their companies will place themselves two paces before the front 
rank opposite to their respective places in line of battle, and face 
towards the head of the column. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 



319 



At the commencement of the movement, the major will place 
himself on the right of the column abreast with the first division • 



^ 




Pi 



y S3. 



Ii» iimittiimia; ■.n:^^'^ 

Fiif S4. 



the buglers formed in two ranks will place themselves at platoon 
distance, behind the inner platoons of the second division 

These dispositions being made, the colonel may, according to cir- 
cumstances, put the column in march, or cause it to form square = 
It he wish to do the latter, he will command : 

1. Fonx square. 2. Ryht and left into line, wheel. 

, If^; f •> .,^**'' fi'-'^t command, the lieutenant-colonel, facing 
to the left guides, and the major, facing to those of the right, will 
ahgn them from the front, on the respective guides of the fourth 
division who will stand fast, holding up their pieces, inverted, per- 
pendicularly; the right guides, in placing themselves on the direc- 
tion, will take their exact distances. 

At the second command, the chief of the first division will caution 
It to s and fa.t; a 1 the captains of the second and third divisions 
wiU place themselves before the centres of their respective com- 
pan.es, and caution them that they will have to wheel, the ri<.ht 
companies to the right, and the left companies to the left into lie 
01 battle. 

The color-bearer will step back into the line of file-closers, oppo- 
site to h,s place in line of battle, and will be replaced by the corporal 



320 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

of his file, wlio is in the rear rank ; the corporal of the same file 
who is in the rank of file-closers will step into the rear rank. 

The chief of the fourth division will command : 1. Fourth divi- 
sion, forward ; 2. Guide left, and place himself at the same time 
two paces outside of its left flank. 

These dispositions ended, the colonel will command : 

March (or douUe quick — March). 

At this command, briskly repeated, the first division will stand 
fast ', but its right file will face to the right, and its left file to the 
left. 

The companies of the second and third divisions will wheel to the 
right and left into line, and the buglers will advance a space equal 
to the front of a company. 

The fourth division will close up to form the square, and when it 
shall have closed, its chief will halt it, face it about, and align it by 
the rear rank upon the guides of the division, who will, for this 
purpose, remain faced to the front. The junior captain will pass 
into the rear rank, now become the front, and the covering sergeant 
of the left company will place himself behind him in the front rank, 
become rear. The file-closers will, at the same time, close up a pace 
on the front rank, and the outer file on each flank of the division 
will ftice outwards. 

The square being formed, the colonel will command : 

Guides — Posts. 

At this command, the chiefs of the first and fourth divisions, as 
well as the guides, will enter the square. 

The captains whose companies have formed to the right into line, 
will remain on the left of their companies; the left guide of each 
of those companies will, in the rear rank, cover his captain, and the 
covering sergeant of each will place himself as a file-closer behind 
the right file of his company. 

The field and stafi" will enter the square, the lieutenant-colonel 
placing himself behind the left, and the major behind the right of 
the first division. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 321 

If the battalion present ten, instead of eight companies, the fourth 
division will make the movements prescribed above for the second 
and third divisions, and the fifth, the movements prescribed for the 
fourth division. 

The fronts of the square will be designated as follows : the first 
division will always be the first front ; the last division, the fourth 
front ; the right companies of the other divisions will form the 
second front ; and the left companies of the same divisions the tliird 
front. 

365. If the battalion, before the square is formed, be in double 
column, the two leading companies will form the first front, the two 
rear companies the fourth ; the other companies of the right half 
battalion will form the second, and those of the left half battalion 
the third front. 

The first and fourth fronts will be commanded by the chiefs of 
the first and fourth divisions ; each of the other two by its senior 
captain. The commander of each front will place himself four paces 
behind its present rear rank, and will be replaced momentarily in 
the command of his company by the next in rank therein. 

366. If the column by division, whether double or single, be in 
mass, and the colonel shall wish to form it into square, he will first 
cause it to take company distance ; to this eifect, he will command : 

1. To form square. 2. By the. head of column, take half distance. 

The colonel will halt the column the moment the third division 
shall have its distance, and as soon as the necessary dispositions are 
made, form it into square. 

367. The battalion being formed into square, when the colonel 
shall wish to cause it to advance a distance less than thirty paces, he 
will command : 

1. Bt/ (such) front, forward. 2. March. 

If it be supposed that the advance be made by the first front, the 
chief of this front will command : 

1. First front, forward. 2. Guide centre. 
The chief of the second front will face his front to the left. The 



322 MANUAL FOR VOLUKTEERS AND MILITIA. 

captains of the companies composing the front will place themselves 
outside, and on the right of their left guides, who will replace them 
in the front rank ; the chief of the third front will face his front to 
the right, and the captains in this front will place themselves out- 
side, and on the left of their covering sergeants; the chief of the 
fourth front will face his front about, and command: 1. Fourth 
front, forivard. 2. Guide centre. The captain who is in the centre 
of the first front, will be charged with the direction of the march. 

At the command march, the square will put itself in motion; the 
companies marching by the flank will be careful not to lose their 
distances. The chief of the fourth division will cause his division 
to keep constantly closed on the flanks of the second and third 
fronts. 

This movement will only be executed in quick time. 

The lieutenant-colonel will place himself in rear of the file of 
direction, in order to regulate his march. 

If the colonel should wish to halt the square, he will command : 

1, Battalion. 2. Halt. 

At the second command, the square will halt; the fourth front 
will face about immediately, and without further command; the 
second and third fronts will face outward ; the captains of the com- 
panies will resume their places in square. 

In moving the square forward by the second, third, or fourth 
fronts, the same rule will be observed. 

368. The battalion being formed into square, when the colonel 
shall wish to cause it to advance, he will command : 

1. Form column. 

The chief of the first front will command : 

1. First division forward. 2. Guide left. 

The commander of the fourth front will caution it to stand fast; 
the commander of the second front will cause it to face to the loft, 
and then command: By company, hy file hft. The commander of 
the third front will cause it to face to the right, and then command : 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 32B 

By company, hy file right. At the moment the second and third 
fronts face to the left and rlght^ each captain will cause to break to 
the rear the two leading files of his company. 

These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 

3. March (or double quich — March). 

At this command, the first front will march forward ; its chief 
will halt it when it shall have advanced a space equal to half its 
front, and align it by the left. 

The corresponding companies of the second and third fronts will 
wheel by file to the left and right, and march to meet each other 
behind the centre of the first division, and the moment they unite^ 
the captain of each company will halt his company and face it to 
the front. The division being re-formed, its chief will align it by 
the left. 

The commander of the fourth front will cause it to face about: 
its file-closers will remain before the front rank. 

The column being thus re-formed, the colonel may put it in 
march ; the right guides will preserve company distance exactly ap 
the directing guides. 

When the colonel shall wish to re-form square, he will give the 
necessary commands. 

369. To cause the square to march in retreat, the colonel will 
first cause column to be formed, and, when formed, he will cause it 
to face by the rear rank ; to this end, he will command : 

1. To march in retreat. 2. Face hy the rear rank. 3. Battalion 
about — Face. 

(Fig. 85.) At the second command, the file-closers of the interior 
divisions will place themselves, passing by the outer flanks of their 
respective companies, behind the front rank opposite to their places 
in line of battle ', the file-closers of the other divisions will stand fast. 

At the third command, the battalion will face about ; each chief of 
division will place himself before its rear rank, become front, passing 
through the interval between its two companies; the guides will 
step into the rear rank, now front. 



rf 


'-^ ,_, 




..^. - --j=- = -'-' 


p_ 




rP U "L 




^ 4. 




Fij I 


a 




rl 


ui " ^, 




>P sj. 


D ■ 




rl 


I--I h 




4. ^ 



824 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The column being thus disposed^ the colonel may put it in march, 
or cause it to form square as if it were faced by the front rank 
The square being formed^ its fronts will 
preserve the same designations they had 
when faced by the front rank. 

The battalion being in square by the 
rear rank, when the colonel shall wish to 
^•^- march it in retreat or in advance^ he will 
conform to what is prescribed above ; other- 
wise, he will re-form the column, by march- 
ing forward the fourth front. 

If the square is to be marched to the 
front, the colonel will face the column by 
the front rank ; to this end, he will command : 

1. To march in advance. 2. Face hy the front rank. 3. Battalion 
about — Face. 

870. If the column be marching in advance, and the colonel shall 
wish to march it in retreat, he will command : 

1. To march in retreat. 2. Battalion right about. 3. March (or 
double quick — March). 

At the second command, the file-closers of the second and third 
divisions will place themselves rapidly before the front rank of tlieir 
respective divisions. At the command inarch, the column will face 
about and move off to the rear. 

If the column be marching in retreat and the colonel shall wish 
to march it in advance, he will command : 

1. To march in advance. 2. Battalion 7ight about. 8. March (or 
double quick — March). 

At the second command, the file-closers of the second and third 
divisions will place themselves before the rear rank of their respect- 
ive divisions; at the third, the column will face by the front rank. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 825 

To vediLce the square. 

371. The colouelj wishing to break the square^ will command ; 

1. Reduce square. 2. Ukrcii (ox douUe quick — March). 

This movement will be executed in the manner indicated No. 
368 ; but the file-closers of the fourth front will place themselves 
behind the rear rank the moment it faces about; the field and staff, 
the color-bearer and buglers, will, at the same time, return to their 
places in column. 

To form square from line of battle. 

372. To ploy the battalion into column upon one of the flank 
divisions, the colonel will command : 

1. To form square. 2. Column at half distance hy division 3. 
On the first (or fourth^ division. 4. Battalion right (or left') — 
Face. 5. March (or double quick — March). 

This movement will be executed according to the principles 
already prescribed. 

373. To ploy the battalion into double column, the colonel will 
command : 

1. To form square. 2. Double column at half distance. 3. Bat- 
talion inwards — Face. 4. '^Ia'&qil {pv double quick — March). 

374. The battalion being in march, to ploy it into double column 
to form square, the colonel will command : 

1. To form square. 2. Form doid)le column. 8. Battalion by the 
right and left flanks. 4. March (or double quick — March), 

The chief of the leading division will halt his division at the 
command march. 

Squares in four ranks. 

375. If the squares formed in two ranks, according to the pre- 
ceding rules, should not be deemed sufficiently strong, the colonel 
may cause the square to be formed in four ranks. 

28 



dZb MANUAL TOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The battalion being in column by company at full distance, rigbt 
in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form square 
in four ranks, he will first cause divisions to be formed, which being 
executed, he will command : 

1. To form square in four ranks. 2. To half distance, close column. 
3. March (or double quick — March). 

At the first command, the chief of the first division will caution 
the right company to face to the left, and the left company to face 
to the right. The chiefs of the other divisions will caution their 
divisions to move forward. 

At the command march, the right company of the first division 
will form into four ranks on its left file, and the left company into 
four ranks on its right file. The formation ended, the chief of this 
division will align it by the left. 

The other divisions will move forward and double their files 
marching; the right company of each division will double on its 
left file, and the left company on its right file. The formation com- 
pleted, each chief of division will command. Guide left. Each 
chief will halt his division when it shall have the distance of a 
company front in four ranks from the preceding one, counting from 
its rear rank, and will align his division by the left. At the instant 
the fourth division is halted, the file-closers will move rapidly before 
its front rank. 

The colonel will form square, re-form column, and reduce square 
in four ranks, by the same commands and means as prescribed for a 
battalion in two ranks. 

376. If the square formed in four ranks be reduced and at a halt, 
and the colonel shall wish to form the battalion into two ranks, he 
will command : 

1. In two ranks undouhle files. 2. Battalion outwards — Face. 
3. March. 

At the first command, the captains will step before the centres of 
their respective companies, and those on the right will caution them 
to face to the right, and those on the left to face to the left. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 327 

At the second command, the battalion will face to the right and 
left. 

At the command march, each company will undouble its files and 
re-form into two ranks as indicated in the school of the company. 
Each captain will halt his company and face it to the front. The 
formation completed, each chief of division will align his division 
by the left. 

377. To form square in four ranks on one of the flank divisions, 
the colonel will command : 

1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Column at half distance, hi/ 
division. 3. On the first (or fourth^ division. 4. Battalion, 
right (or left) — Face. 5. March (or double quick — March). 

x\t the second command, each chief of division will place himself 
before the centre of his division, and caution it to face to the right. 

At the fourth command, the right guide of the first division will 
remain faced to the front, the battalion will face to the right. 

At the command march, the first file of four men of the first 
division will face to the front, remaining doubled. All the other 
files of four men will step ofi" together, and each in succession will 
close up to its proper distance on the file preceding it, and face to 
the front, remaining doubled. When the last file shall have closed, 
the chief of division will command. Left — Dress. 

The other divisions will ploy into column in the same manner as 
with a battalion in two ranks, observing what follows : the chiefs of 
divisions instead of allowing their divisions to file past them, on 
entering the column will continue to lead them, and as each divi- 
sion shall arrive on a line with the right guide of the first division, 
its chief will halt the right guide, who will immediately face to the 
front; the first file of four men will also halt at the same time and 
face to the front, remaining doubled. The second file will close on 
the first, and when closed, halt, and face to the front, remaining 
doubled. All the other files will execute successively what has just 
been prescribed for the second. When the last file shall have closed, 
the chief of division will command. Left Dress. 

378. If the colonel should wish to form a perpendicular square 
in four ranks by double column, he will command : 



828 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Douhle coIu7nn, at half 
distance, d. Battalion inwards — Face. 4. March (or douhle 
quick — March). 

At tlie second command the captains of companies will place 
themselves before the centres of their respective companies, and 
caution those on the right to face to the left, and those on the left 
to face to the right. The captain of the fifth company will caution 
his covering sergeant to stand fast. 

At the third command the battalion will face to the left and right ; 
at the command march, the left file of the fourth, and the right file 
of the fifth company, will face to the front, remaining doubled. 
The fourth company will close successively by file of fours on the 
left file, and the fifth company, in like manner, on the right file ; 
the files will face to the front, remaining doubled. The formation 
completed, the chief of division will command. Eight Dress. The 
junior captain will place himself in the interval between the two 
companies. 

The other companies will close as prescribed for the double 
column in two ranks, observing what follows : Each captain will halt 
the leading guide of his company the moment the head of his com- 
pany arrives on a line with the centre of the column. In the right 
companies, the left guides will step into the line of file-closers, and 
the left file of four men will face immediately to the front, remaining 
doubled, and by the side of the right guide of the left companj^ 
The companies will each form into four ranks, the right companies 
on the left file, and the left companies on the right file. The for- 
mation completed, the junior captain will place himself between 
the two companies, and the senior will command^ Eight Dress. 

Cohimn against cavalry. 

379. When a column closed in mass has to form square, it will 
begin by taking company distance ; but if so suddenly threatened 
by cavalry as not to allow time for this disposition, it will be formed 
in the following manner : 

The colonel will command : 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 



329 



March. 



u 1 


X°° °"'° 




n 1 


,^7%^-. ^ 


°,--^^. 1 


■/s* 1 SI 1 -^, 1 


^. » . „ . ^ » 


::::> 


Ml 1 



i^ijT ,?<?. 




1. Column against cavalrij. 

(Fig. 86.) At the first command, the 
chief of the leading division will cau- 
tion it to stand fast and pass behind the 
rear rank; in the interior divisions A 
each captain will promptly designate 
the number of files necessary to close 
the interval between his company and 
the one in front of it. The captains of 
the divisions next to the one in rear, 
in addition to closing the interval in 
front, will also close up the interval 
which separates this division from 
the last; the chief of the fourth 
division will caution it to face about, 
and its file-closers will pass briskly 
before the front rank. 

At the command marcli, the guides of each division will place 
themselves rapidly in the line of file-closers. The first division will 
stand fast, the fourth will face about, the outer file of each of these 
divisions will then face outwards ; in the other divisions the files 
designated for closing the intervals will form to the right and left 
into line, but in the division next to the rearmost one, the first files 
that come into line will close to the right or left until they join the 
rear division. The files of each company which remain in column 
will close on their outer files, formed into line, in order to create a 
vacant space in the middle of the column. 

If the column be in march, the column against cavalry will be 
formed by the same commands and means. At the command march, 
the first and fourth divisions will halt, and the latter division will 
face about; the interior divisions will conform to what has been pre- 
scribed above. 

The battalion being no longer threatened by cavalry, the colonel 
will command : 

1. Form column. 2. March. 

At the command march, the files in column will close to the left 

28* 



880 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

and i-iglit to make room for those in line, who will retake their places 
in column by stepping backwards, except those closing the interval 
between the two rear divisions, who will take their places in column 
by a flank movement. The fourth division will face about, the 
guides will resume their places. 

To deploy the hattalion as skirmishers, and to rally this hatfalion. 

To dejoloy the battalion as skirmishers. 

380. A battalion being in line of battle, if the colonel should 
wish to deploy it on the right of the sixth company, for example, 
holding the three right companies in reserve, he will signify his 
intention to the lieutenant-colonel and adjutant, and also to the 
major, who will be directed to take charge of the reserve. He will 
point out to the lieutenant-colonel the direction he wishes to give 
the line, as well as the point where he wishes the right of the sixth 
company to rest, and to the commander of the reserve the place he 
may wish it established. 

The lieutenant-colonel will move rapidly in front of the right of 
the sixth company, and the adjutant in front of the left of the same 
company. The commander of the reserve will dispose of it in the 
manner to be hereinafter designated. 

The colonel will then command : 

1. First (or second') platoons — as skirmishers. 2. On the right of 
the sixth company — take intervals. 8. March (or double qidck 
— March). 

At the second command, the captains of the fifth and sixth com- 
panies will prepare to deploy the first (or second) platoons of their 
companies, the sixth on its right, the fifth on its left file. The 
captain of the fourth company will face it to the right, and the 
captains of the seventh and eighth companies will face their re- 
spective companies to the left. 

At the command march, the movement will commence, the 
platoons of the fifth and sixth companies will deploy forward (see 
No. 264) ; the right guide of the sixth will march on the point 
which will be indicated to him by the lieutenant-colonel. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 331 

The company "wliicli has faced to the right, and also the companies 
which have faced to the left, will march straight forward. The 
fourth company will take an interval of 100 paces, counting from 
the left of the fifth, and its chief will deploy its first platoon on its 
left file. The seventh and eighth companies will each take an 
interval of 100 paces, counting from the first file of the company 
which is immediately on its right ; and the chiefs of these com- 
panies will afterwards deploy their first platoons on the right file. 

The guides who conduct the files on which the deployment is 
made, should be careful to direct themselves towards the outer man 
of the neighboring company, already deployed as skirmishers ; or 
if the company has not finished its deployment, they will judge 
carefully the distance which may still be required to place all these 
files in line, and will then march on the point thus marked out. 
The companies, as they arrive on the line, will align themselves on 
those already deployed. 

The lieutenant-colonel and adjutant will follow the deployment, 
the one on the right, the other on the left; the movement concluded, 
they will place themselves near the colonel. 

The reserves of the companies will be established in echelon in 
the following manner. The reserve of the sixth company will be 
placed 150 paces in rear of the right of this company; the reserves 
of the fourth and fifth companies, united, opposite the centre of 
their line of skirmishers, and thirty paces in advance of the reserve 
of the sixth company; the reserves of the seventh and eighth 
companies, also united, opposite the centre of their line of skirmishers, 
and thirty paces farther to the rear than the reserve of the sixth 
company. 

The major commanding the companies composing the reserve, on 
receiving an order from the colonel to that effect, will march these 
companies thirty paces to the rear, and will then ploy them into 
column by company, at half distance ; after which he will conduct 
the column to the point which shall have been indicated to him. 

The colonel will have a general superintendence of the move- 
ment; and when it is finished, will move to a point in rear of the 



332 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

line, whence his view may best embrace all the parts, in order to 
direct their movements. 

If instead of deploying forward, it be desired to deploy by the 
flank, the sixth and fifth companies will be moved to the front ten 
or twelve paces, halted, and deployed by the flank, the one on the 
right, the other on the left file, by the means already indicated. 
(See No. 265.) Each of the other companies will be marched by 
the flank ; and as soon as the last file of the company, next towards 
the direction, shall have taken its interval, it will be moved upon 
the line established by the fifth and sixth companies, halted, and 
deployed. 

In the preceding example, it has been supposed that the battalion 
was in order of battle ; but if in column, it would be deployed as 
skirmishers by the same commands, and according to the same prin- 
ci|)les. 

If the deployment is to be made forward, the directing company, 
as soon as it is unmasked, will be moved ten or twelve paces in front 
of the head of the column, and will be then deployed on the file 
indicated. Each of the other companies will take its interval to 
the rio:ht or left, and deploy as soon as it is taken. 

If the deployment is to be made by the flank, the directing com- 
pany will be moved in the same manner to the front, as soon as it 
is unmasked, and will then be halted and deployed by the flank on 
the file indicated. Each of the other companies will be marched 
by the flank, and when its interval is taken, will be moved on the 
line, halted, and deployed as soon as the company next towards the 
direction shall have finished its deployment. 

When the color-company is to be deployed as skirmishers, the 
color, without its guard, will be detached, and remain with the 
battalion reserve. 

The rally. 

381. The colonel may cause all the movements prescribed for a 
company to be executed by the battalion, and by the same com- 
mands and the same signals. When he wishes to rally the battalion, 
he will cause the rally on the battalion to be sounded, and so dis- 
pose his reserve as to protect this movement. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION 006 

The companies deployed as skirmishers will be rallied in squares 
on their respective reserves (see No. 280) ; each reserve of two con- 
tiguous companies will form the first front of the square, throwing 
to the rear the sections on the flanks; the skirmishers who arrive 
first will complete the lateral fronts, and the last the fourth front. 
The ojB&cers and sergeants will superintend the rally, and as fast as 
the men arrive, they will form them into two ranks, without regard 
to height, and cause them to face outwards. 

The rally being effected, the commanders of squares will profit 
by any interval of time the cavalry may allow for putting them in 
safety, either by marching upon the battalion reserve, or by seizing 
an advanced position ; to this end, each of the squares will be formed 
into column, and march in this order; and if threatened anew, it 
will halt, and again form square. 

As the companies successively arrive near the battalion reserve, 
each will re-form as promptly as possible, and, without regard to 
designation or number, take place in the column next in the rear 
of the companies already in it. 

The battalion reserve will also form square, if itself threatened by 
cavalry. In this case, the companies in marching towards it will 
place themselves in the section without fire (i. e. march on the 
angles), and thus march on the squares. 



334 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



AETICLE VII. 

SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 

882. The object of this school is to make troopers skilful in the 
Bianagement of their horses and arms, in all directions, and at all 
gaits. To accomplish this, the instructor must attend particularly, 
from the commencement, to placing the men well on horseback, and 
to habituating them in the application of correct principles. 

The instruction should always commence at a icalk, in order to 
give the troopers the facility of seating themselves well, and of 
calming their horses, as they are generally more restive on first 
being brought together. The instruction should also terminate at 
a vmlk. 

At the commencement it is generally necessary to make the 
troopers march repeatedly on the same track, at a walh, and at a 
trot ; when, however, they already have some skill in the manage- 
ment of their horses, which is almost invariably the case with 
volunteer cavalry, this exercise is less necessary, and the instructor 
may proceed almost at once to the changes of direction, and other 
movements. 

When the instructor wishes to rest the men, he commands : 

Rest. 

At this command the trooper is no longer required to remain 
immovable. 

When the instructor wishes to resume the drill, he commands : 

Attention. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 335 

When the trooper resumes his immovable position, and fixes his 
attention. 

In the first part of the instruction but a very few men should be 
under the same instructor, or small squares should be formed as in 
infantry. 

To conduct tlie horses to the drill ground. 

383. The horses having the bridle reins near the neck, each 
trooper takes hold of the reins with the right hand, six inches from 
the mouth of the horse, the back of the hand up, the hand elevated 
and firm, to prevent the horse from jumping, and leads his horse to 
the ground, where under the direction of the instructor, he places it 
in such position that all the horses shall be on the same line, or in 
one rank. 

The squad being formed, the instructor commands : 

Count hy fours. 

At this command, the men count from right to left, one, two, threCj 
four, according to the place which each one occupies. 
The troopers should be without arms or spurs. 

Position of the trooper before mounting. 

384. On the left side of the horse, abreast of the lower jaw; the 
reins in the right hand six inches from the mouth of the horse, the 
back of the hand up. Heels upon the same line as nearly as the 
conformation of the man will permit, the feet at a little less than a 
right angle, and equally turned out; the knee straight without 
being stiff; the body perpendicular upon the haunches and slightly 
inclined forward ; the left hand hanging by the side, the palm a little 
turned out, the little finger along the seam of the pantaloons ; the 
head erect without being constrained, the chin drawn in, and eyes 
to the front. 

To mount. 

385. The instructor commands : 



836 manual for volunteers and militia. 

Prepare to Mount. 

One time and two motions. 

First motion. (Fig. 87.) Nos. 1 and 3 move forward six paces, 

Stepping off witli the left foot, keeping opposite their intervals. 

Place the right foot three inches in rear of the left; make a face 

and a half to the right on both heels, the right 

To ^ Movnt toe to the front ; let go the right rein ; slip the 

Fij 87. right hand along the left rein ; take two steps, 

% fi fi Q i (u stepping off with the right foot, and face to 

the left on the toe of the left foot, the right 
side towards the flank of the horse ; carry hack 
the right heel three inches in rear of the left; the right hand seizing 
the end of the reins is placed upon the cantle of the saddle. 

Second motion. Place a third of the left foot in the stirrup, sup- 
porting it against the fore-arm of the horse ; rest upon the point of 
the right foot, and seize a lock of the mane with the left hand over 
the reins as far forward as possible, the extremity of the lock pass- 
ing out of the hand on the side of the little finger. 

Mount. 
One time and two motions. 

First motion. At the command mount, spring from the right foot, 
holding firmly to the mane, at the same time pressing the cantle 
with the right hand to prevent the saddle from turning; the body 
erect. 

Second motion. Pass the right leg stretched over the croup of the 
horse, without touching him; sit down lightly in the saddle, placing 
the right hand at the same time, without quitting the reins, upon 
the right holster, the palm of the hand resting upon it, the fingers 
on the outside of it, and take one rein of the bridle (if a snaffe) 
in each hand. 

If the trooper is using the curb bridle, he will pass the reins into 
the left (or hridle hand), the little finger between the reins, the 
other fingers well closed, and the thumb upon the second joint of 
the first finger ; the elbow slightly detached from the body, the 
hand four inches above the pommel of the saddle, the fingers six 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. • 837 

inches from, and turned towards tlie body; the right hand at the 
side. 

The instructor should allow but a short interval between the first 
and second motion, because, were the trooper to remain a long time 
on the stirrup, the horse would become restive, and move out of 
place, then command : 

Form — Rank. 

Nos. 1 and 3 raise the wrists (or the bridle hand), and hold the 
legs close to the body of the horse to keep him quiet ; Nos. 2 and 4 
enter the intervals without jostling and without precipitation. 

After mounting, the instructor causes the stirrups to be crossed 
upon the neck, the left stirrup over the right. 

Position of the trooper, mounted. 

386. The buttocks bearing equally upon the saddle, and as far 
forward as possible ; the thighs turned upon their flat side, or knees 
turned in, without effort, embracing the horse equally, and stretched 
only by their own weight and that of the legs ; a supple bend of 
the knees ; the legs below the knee free, and falling naturally ; the 
toes falling in like manner; the loins supported without stiffness; 
the upper part of the body at ease, free and erect; the shoulders 
square ; the arms free, the elbows falling naturally ; the head erect, 
at ease, and not drawn in between the shoulders ; when the snaffle 
is worn, one rein in each hand, the fingers closed, the thumb 
along each rein, the wrists as high as the elbow, at six inches from 
each other, the fingers turned towards each other, the upper ex- 
tremity of the reins leaving the hand on the side of the thumb. 

The instructor then commands : 

1. Eyes Right (or Left). 2. Front. 

At the word right, the head is turned gently to the right, so that 
the corner of the left eye, next the nose, may be in a line with the 
buttons of the jacket. 

At the command /roTi^, the head is gently turned to the front. 
29 w 



338 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The use of the reins. 

387. The reins serve to prepare the horse for the movements he 
is required to execute, to direct him, and to stop him. Their action 
should be progressive, and in accordance with that of the legs. 

When the trooper makes use of the reins, the arms should act 
with suppleness, and their movements ought to extend from the 
waist to the shoulder. 

The use of the legs. 

388. The legs serve to urge the horse forward, to support him, 
and to aid him in turning to the right or left. Whenever the 
trooper wishes his horse to move forward, he should close the legs 
hy degrees behind the girths, causing their effects to correspond 
with the sensibility of the horse, taking care neither to open or 
elevate the knees, of which the bend should be always pliant. The 
trooper relaxes the legs by degrees, as he closed them. 

The effect of the reins and legs combined. 

389. In elevating the wrists, or the bridle-hand, a little, and 
closing the legs, the trooper " gathers his horse ; '^ in elevating the 
wrists, or bridle hand, he slackens the pace ; in repeating this move- 
ment of the wrists, or bridle-hand, he stops the horse, or he "reins 
hack." The trooper ought to elevate the wrists without curving 
them, at the same time drawing them slightly towards the body. 

In opening the right rein, and closing the right leg, the trooper 
turns his horse to the right. To open the right rein, the right wrist 
is carried, without turning it, more or less to the right, according to 
the sensibility of the horse. When the curb is worn, move the 
bridle-hand forward and to the right. 

In opening the left rein, and closing the left leg, the trooper turns 
his horse to the left. The left rein is opened upon the same princi- 
ple as that on which the right is opened. When the curb is worn, 
move the bridle-hand forward and to the left. 

By lowering the wrists, or bridle-hand, slightly, the horse is at 
liberty to move forward ; the closing of the legs puts him in motion. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 339 

To march. 

390. The instructor commands : 

1. Squad forward. 2. MARCH. 

At the command squad forward, elevate the wrists, or bridle- 
hand, slightly, and close the legs, in order to gather the horse. 

At the command march, lower the wrists, or bridle-hand, slightly, 
and close the legs more or less, according to the sensibility of the 
horse. The horse having obeyed, replace the wrists, or bridle-hand, 
and the legs by degrees. 

After some steps the instructor commands : 

1. Squad. 2. Halt. 

At the first command, the trooper gathers his horse without 
slackening his pace. 

At the command halt, the trooper braces himself in the saddle ; 
elevate the wrists, or bridle-hand, at the same time, by degrees, and 
close the left to prevent the horse from backing. The horse having 
obeyed, replace the wrists and the legs by degrees. 

To turn to the right, or left. 

391. The instructor commands : 

1. Squad to the right (or left). 2. March. 3. Halt. 

At the command squad to the right, gather the horse. 

At the command march, open the right rein, or move the bridle 
hand to the right, and gradually close the right leg. In order not 
to turn the horse too short, perform the movement on the fourth of 
a circle three paces in length. The movement being almost com- 
pleted, diminish the effect of the rein and tlje right leg, supporting 
the horse at the same time with the left rein and leg to terminate 
the movement. 

At the command halt, elevate the wrists or bridle-hand slightly, 
and hold the legs near, in order to keep the horse straight in the 
new direction; replace the wrists and the legs by degrees. 



340 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

To turn about to the right, or left. 

392. The instructor commands : 

1. Squad to the right (or left^, about. 2. March. 3. Halt. 

This command is executed on the principles prescribed for the 
turn to the right or left, with this difference, that the horse should 
pass over a semicircle of six paces, and face to the rear. 

To make a quarter turn to the right or left. 

393. The instructor commands : 

1. Squad right (ov left) oblique. 2. March. 3. Halt. 

At the command right oblique, gather the horse. 

At the command march, open the right rein a little, or move the 
bridle-hand slightly to the right, and close the right leg slightly, in 
order to make the horse execute a quarter turn to the right ; cause 
the horse to feel, almost at the same time, the effect of the right 
rein and the left leg, to terminate the movement without increasing 
the degree of obliquity. 

At the command halt, elevate the wrist, or bridle-hand, and close 
the legs slightly, to keep the direction of the quarter turn to the 
right; replace the wrists and legs by degrees. 

The instructor commands halt, almost immediately after the com- 
mand march; he does not require great exactness in this movement, 
the object of which is to give the trooper the first idea of the oblique 
march. 

To rein hack, and to cease reining bach. 

294. The instructor commands : 

1. Squad — backwards. 2. March. 3. Squad. 4. Halt. 

At the command backwards, gather the horse. At the com- 
mand march, keep a firm seat, elevate the wrists, or bridle-hand, 
and close the legs. As soon as the horse obeys, lower and elevate 
the wrists or bridle-hand, in regular succession, which is called 
tjielding and checking. If the horse throws the haunches to the 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 341 

right, close the right leg; if to the left, close the left leg. If these 
means are not sufficient to replace the horse in his proper position, 
open the rein on the side towards which the horse throws the 
haunches, causing him to feel slightly, at the same time, the effect 
of the opposite rein. 

At the command squad, the trooper prepares to stop. At the 
command halt, lower the wrists, or bridle-hand, and close the legs. 
The horse having obeyed, replace the wrists, or bridle-hand, and 
the legs by degrees. 

To dismount. 

395. The instructor causes the stirrups to be let down, and the 
feet put in them. He then commands : 

1. Prepare to dismount. 

One time, and two motions. 

First motion. Nos. 1 and 3 move forward six paces, and keep 
themselves opposite their intervals. Pass the right rein of the 
snaffle (when it is worn) into the left hand, the extremity of the 
reins leaving the hands on the side of the thumb. 

Second motion. Seize the reins of the snaffle (or of the curb 
hridle) above and near the left thumb with the right hand, the back 
of the hand up, and place this hand upon the right holster. Dis- 
engage the right foot from the stirrup, and seize with the left hand 
a lock of the mane over the reins. 

2. Dismount. 

One time, and two motions. 

First motion. At the command dismount, rise upon the left 
stirrup ', pass the right leg extended over the croup of the horse, 
without touching him, and bring the right thigh near the left, the 
body well sustained ; at the same time place the right hand on the 
cantle of the saddle, slipping it along the reins without letting them 
go ; descend lightly to the ground, the body erect, the heels on the 
Bame line. Let go the mane with the left hand. 
29* 



342 MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Second motion . Make a face and two steps to tlie left, stepping 
off with the left foot ; slip the right hand along the left rein, seize 
Loth reins with the same hand six inches from the mouth of tlie 
horse, back of the hand up, and take the position of the troojper dis- 
mounted. 

To fde off. 

896. The instructor commands : 

1. By the right (or left) — File off. 2. March. 

At the command march, the trooper of the right (or left) steps 
oif with the left foot, leading his horse to the front ; he takes four 
steps, turns to the right, (or left,) and marches, in the new direction, 
at the same time holding the hand high and firm to keep the horse 
from jumping. Each trooper executes, in succession, the same 
movement, when the one who precedes him has moved four paces 
to the front. 

Exercises in the riding house. 

397. In the instruction which follows, the squad is supposed to 
be exercising in a riding house whose sides are about ninety, and 
ends thirty, yards in length, or on a riding ground which is bounded 
by lines corresponding to the walls of the riding house. 

Two of the best instructed troopers are designated to be con- 
ductors; they are placed on the right and left of the squad, and use 
their stirrups. 

To march to the right (or left) hand. 

398. The squad being drawn up in the riding house, or on the 
ground, parallel to its length, the instructor commands : 

1. Squad to the right (or left). 2. March. 3. Forward. 

(Fig. 88.) At the command march, the troopers conform to what 
is prescribed in order to execute a turn to the right from a halt, as 
directed in No. 391. 

At the command forward, the troopers, in lowering their wrists 
and closing the legs, march straight forward, and follow the con- 
ductor. 



SCHOOL or THE TROOPER. 



843 



At the extremity of the riding house, the conductor turns to the 
right, when the troopers march to the right hand, having between 
them the distance of four feet from head 
to croup. 

The trooper marches to the right hand, 
when he has the right side towards the 
interior of the riding horse. He marches 
to the left hand, when it is the left side. 

To turn to the right (or lef{) in march- 
ing. 

399. The troopers follow the con- 
ductor, and make a turn to the right (or 
left), in marching, or arriving at the 
angles of the riding house. The in- 
structor directs the trooper to advance 
the outer hip and shoulder, without in- 
clining inward, in order to conform to 
the movement of the horse. 



To halt, and to step off. 

400. The troopers marching in column 
on one of the long sides, the instructor 
commands : 

1. Squad. 2. Halt. 

The troopers stop as prescribed in No. 
890. 

To recommence the march, the instructor commands : 

1. Squad forward. 2. MARCH. 

To pass from the walk to the trot, and from the trot to a walJc. 

401. The troopers becoming habituated to the movement of the 
horse, the instructor causes them to pass to the trot. When they 
are in column on one of the long rides, he commands : 

1. Trot. 2. March. 




344 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

At the command trot, gather the horse, without increasing his 
gait. 

At the command march, lower the wrists a little, and close the 
legs more or less, according to the sensibility of the horse. As 
soon as the horse obeys, replace the wrists and the legs by degrees. 

The instructor should employ this gait cautiously at first, and at 
a moderate trot, that the men may not lose their position. 

To pass from the trot to the walk, the instructor commands : 

1. Walk. 2. March. 

At the command walk, gather the horse without affecting his 
gait. 

At the command march, elevate the wrists, or bridle-hand, by 
degrees, and hold the legs near, in order to prevent the horse from 
stopping. As soon as the horse obeys, replace the wrists and legs 
by degrees 

Changes of hand. 

402. When the troopers have marched some time to the 7nght (or 
left) hand, to make them change hands in the breadth of the riding 
house, or ground, without stopping, the instructor commands : 

1. Right (ox left') — Turn. 2. Forward. 

(Fig. 89.) At the word turn, the leading file turns to the right. 
At the command forward, he moves straight forward and crosses 
the riding-house, or ground, in its breadth, followed by the other 
troopers. 

The leading file being at two paces from the opposite track, the 
instructor commands : 

1. Left (or right) — Turn. 2. Forward. 

At the command turn, the leading file turns to the left ; and at 
the command forward, he follows the track. All the troopers turn 
in succession on the same ground. 

The instructor causes these changes of hand to be made at a walk, 
and at a trot. 



SCHOOL OP THE TROOPER. 



845 




Fij 90. 



-EI3>- 






J,.-E3>- 

ic 



To turn to the right (or left?) hy troojper, in ma 

403. The troopers marcliing in column, and having arrived about 
the middle of one of the long sides, the instructor commands : 

1. Squad to the right (or left'). 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 

(Fig. 90). At the command squad to the right, gather the horse 
A-t the command march, each trooper executes a turn to the right 
in marching. At the command forivard, each trooper moves straight 
to the front. 



346 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The troopers being at two paces from the opposite track, the in- 
structor commands : 

1. Squad to the riglit (or left^. 2. March. 3. Forward. 

At the command march, each trooper executes a turn to the rights 
following the same principles; and at the command /on^-arc?, all 
return to the track. 

The same movements are repeated to resume the order in which 
the troopers were originally. 

To turn ahout to the right (or left') hy troojjers, in marching on the 

same line. 

404. The troopers having made a turn to the right as has just 
been explained, and having arrived near the opposite track, the in- 
structor commands : 

1. Squad to the right (or left) ahout. 2. March. 3. FORWARD. 

(Fig. 91.) At the command, squad to the right ahout, gather 
the horse. At the command march, each trooper executes a turn 
to the right ahout in marching, following the principles laid down in 
No. 392. At the command forward, each trooper moves directly 
to the front. 

The instructor gives the command march, at {hQ moment the 
troopers are within two paces of the track; the troopers are then 
re-formed in column upon the opposite track^ by the movement of 
squad to the right (or left). 

To turn ahout to the right (or left) hy trooper, in marching in 

column. 

405. The troopers marching in column, and the leading file having 
arrived near the end of one of the long sides of the riding house, or 
ground, the instructor commands : 

1. Squad to the right (or left) ahoui. 2. March. 3. Forward. 

(Fig. 92.) At the command squad to the right ahout, gather the 
horse. At the command march, each trooper executes a turn to the 



SCHOOL or THE TROOPER. 



347 



Ficf 91. 



-E3> 



■ <^ EHE^', 

-<^ E=3^; 

- <p^ cE3x' 

-<^ EE3x' 

-<F^ -F^^tx] 

-<^ E3>\ 

-<^ EZ3?C_ 

-O P^^C x' 

C 

-<^ E3>' 

d 




riJj'A^ aSowi in marcliing. At the command forward^ each trooper 
moves forward. 

On arriving at the short side opposite, the leading file turns to the 
left without command ; the squad returns to the original order, by 
executing the inverse movement. 

406. To rezt the squad, the instructor causes the troopers to turn 
to the right (or left), when they are about the middle of one of the 
long sides of the riding house, or ground, and gives the command 
haJtj when they are out of the track. The instruction is recom- 
menced by a turn to the right (or left). 



348 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

To terminate the drill, the stirrups are let down, and the feet 
placed in them, when the instructor commands the troopers to dis- 
mount, and^/e off. 

During the rests, the instructor exercises the troopers in vaulting 
on, and from, their horses, without commands. 

To leap to the ground. 

The trooper, holding the reins as in dismounting, seizes a lock 
of the mane firmly with the left hand ; places the right hand upon 
the pommel, raises himself upon his wrists, brings the right thigh 
by the side of the left, remains an instant in this position, and 
descends lightly to the ground. 

To leap on the horse. 

The trooper seizes the mane with the left hand, places the right 
hand which holds the reins upon the pommel of the saddle, springs 
lively, raising himself upon the two wrists, remains an instant in 
this position, and places himself lightly in the saddle. 

The instructor sometimes gives the command to rest in marching, 
in order to calm the horses after a quick pace, and to relieve the 
troopers. During the rest in marching, the troopers relax them- 
selves, but without changing the pace, and without losing their 
distance. 

Exercises in two ranks. 

407. The troopers are placed in two ranks opened, with a distance 
of six paces between the ranks, and the horses at one foot from each 
other. In this instruction from twelve to sixteen troopers may be 
united. The stirrups are crossed as in the precedingcases; the men 
wear spurs. 

The instructor commands : 

In each rank — count FoURS. 

At the last part of the command, the men count in each rank, 
from right to left, pronouncing in a loud and distinct voice, in the 
same tone, without hurry, and without turning the head ; one, two, 
three, four, according to the place which each one occupies. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 349 

At the command : 

Prepare to Mount. 

Nos. 1 and 3 of each ranh move six paces to the front ; stepping 
off with the left foot, keeping opposite their intervals, and regulating 
by the right. The troopers then execute the first motion of prepare 
to mount as directed for a single rank. 

After the troopers are mounted, the instructor commands : 

Form — Ranks. 

At the command, ranhs Nos. 1 and 3 raise the wrists (or bridle- 
hand), and hold the legs close to the body of the horse to keep 
him quiet; Nos. 1 and 4 enter the intervals without jostling and 
without precipitation. 

The rear rank being formed, closes to the distance of two feet 
from the front. 

Of the spurs. 

408. The instructor explains to the troopers the use and the effect 
of the spur. 

If the horse does not obey the legs, it is necessary to employ the 
spur. The spur is not an aid, it is a means of chastising. It is 
only necessary to use it occasionally, but always vigorously, and at 
the moment the horse commits the fault. 

In order to use the spurs, it is necessary to keep steady the body, 
the waist, and the wrists ; to cling to the horse with the thighs and 
the calves of the legs ) turn the toes a little out ; lower the wrists 
a little ; press the spurs close behind the girths, without moving 
the body, and let them remain there until the horse obeys; then 
replace the wrists and legs by degrees. In using the spur, the 
troopers should not bear too much upon the rein, as this would 
counteract the effect of the spur. 

409. To conduct the squad to the riding house, or ground, the 
instructor commands : 

1. By file to the right (or left). 2. March. 
30 



350 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

(Fig. 93.) At the command hy file to the right, gather the horse. 
At the command march, the trooper on the right of each ranK Txe- 
cutes a turn to the right, and moves forward, the trooper of the rear 




Fig^ 93 



rank approaching, in marching, to within one foot of the one of the 

front rank. This movement is executed by all the other troopers 

in succession. 

To march to the right (or leff) hand. 

410. In entering the riding house, or ground, the instructor 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 351 

marclies his squad parallel to tlie long sides, and wlien the head of 
the column arrives towards the middle, he commands : 

1. Right and left — TuRN. 2. Forward. 

(Fig. 94.) The leading file of the front rank turns to the left, 
the one of the rear rank turns to the right; when these files have 
arrived within two paces of the track, the instructor commands : 

1. Right — Turn. 2. Forward. 

The two columns then march to the right hand, and at the same 
pace. 

The troopers preserve the distance of four feet from head to 
croup. 

The leading files regulate the pace of their horses so as to arrive 
at the same time at the opposite angles of the riding-house, or 
ground, the leading file of the rear rank regulating himself on him 
of the front. 

To pass a corner to the right, a turn to the right is executed ; to 
pass a corner to the left, a turn to the left is made in marching ; 
the movement of each one should be independent of the trooper who 
has gone before, their hands and legs alone should determine the 
horse to go to the right or to the left. 

To pass from the walk to the trot, and from the trot to the walh. 

411. The troopers marching in column upon the long sides, the 
instructor causes them to commence the trot. 

Whenever the change is made from a slow gait to one more rapid, 
as from a walk to the trot, it is necessary to commence slowly, and 
increase it gradually to the degree prescribed. 

The troopers marching in column at a trot upon the long sides, 
the instructor causes them to pass to the walk. 

Whenever the change is made from a lively gait to one more slow, 
as from the trot to the walk, it is necessary to commence the last 
gait as gradually as possible, and to reduce it by little and little to 
the degree indicated. 



852 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Change of direction in the hreadth of the riding house, or ground. 

412. The instructor causes the change of direction in the breadth 
of the riding house, or ground, as directed for the changes of hand, 
taking care to give the command in sufficient time to prevent the 
columns from meeting at the end of the change of direction. 

(Fig. 95.) The change of direction ought to be executed 30 as 
neither to stop nor check the rear of the column ; the troopers, and 



/• — 








^ 


1 

i 

! 
1 

1 
1 

r 


Ti^ &S. 


1 

i 

1 
1 

1 


Vi''^i!'SZi <i^ -^ <^ <s.i 


<EZl'4' 


fj 






f 

1 

1 

1 
1 
1 

i 

! 

1 
1 
1 

1 

1 

1 
1 

i 




1 

! 


1 


E!3> IS> S> ^ E> B>''| 


^c 




j 
i 
j 


i 

1 






. , 






9ff. 



\']C 



ISF 



particularly the leading files, ought to turn without slackening the 
pace, aiding themselves not only with their hands, but also with 



their legs. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 353 

Change of direction in the length of the riding-house, or ground. 

413. (Fig. 96.) This change of direction is executed on the 
same principles as that in the breadth of the riding house, or ground, 
the instructor observing, in order to commence it, to command riglit 
or left J at the instant the leading files arrive at the first angle, and 
to command turn, when having passed the corner, they are at three 
paces from the middle of the short side. 

The troopers then cross the riding house, or ground, iu its length 
in a right line, without touching each other, passing to the left, and 
re-enter upon the track at the commands : 

1. Right (or left) — Turn. 2. Forward. 

Change of direction diagonally. 

414. When the leading files have passed the second corner, and 
have arrived upon the long sides, the instructor causes a diagonal 
change of direction to be executed at the commands: 

1. Right (qv left) — Turn. 2. Forward. 

(Fig. 97.) At the command turn, the leading files make a half- 
turn to the right. At the command forward, they move straight 
forward, cross the riding house, or ground, diagonally, pass each 
other to the left, and re-enter upon the track at the commands : 

1. Left (or right). 2. Turn. 3. Forward. 

All the other troopers execute the same movement in succession, 
in turning upon the same ground that the leading files have turned. 

Cha7ige of direction ohliquely hy the trooper. 

415. The squad commences a change of direction in the length 
of the riding house, or ground ; as soon as all the troopers have 
turned, and are in the same direction, the instructor commands : 

1. Column. 2. Halt. 

(Fig 98.) The troopers stop at the same time, keeping their 
horses straight, and at their distances. 
30* X 



854 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA, 



The instructor causes the troopers to make a quarter-turn to the 
right (or left) from a halt. This movement being executed, he as- 





fjc 


A 




Ficf 97. / \ 

/ 1 


i / j 


r^ 


6 


1 


^ fi 


1 


A 


1 
f 




u 


/ { 

«• r 


'■ ^;3 <t3 <m <S3 <E3i3 ■^^ j 



. _ .- - , 


i "3 \ 


\ if \ 


i /7,5 i 


1 ///(Ti Fi<! 9S. ; 


1 ///'•!' " 4\ 


i ////,3 /a 


i /////I //^l 


i //////^ /'/^ 


^fl lilif ////^ 


^//////ll ////'/S 


a a a If .inui^ 


V ' ' 1 1 1 I 1 ^2/&/ 1 1 • 1 1 ^ 


l'/'///// ffiiHiif 
%ii!li fiii^ 


r if i 


¥ gVV'// i 


f Hi! \ 


\ ' ii! i 


a ay' i 


,_.. .^i^ i 





sures himself of the exactness of the directions and intervals, and 
then commands : 

1. Squad forward. 2. March. 

The troopers march at the same gait, each in the direction he 
has taken. When they arrive one foot from the track, tlie instructor 
commands : 

Forward. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 355 

At this command, make a quarter-turn to the left in advancing, 
with the hand light and leg near, to follow the track. 

The instructor causes these movements to be repeated without 
halting; for this purpose, after having commenced the change of 
direction in the length of the riding house, or ground, as soon as the 
two ranks are in column, he commands : 

1. Squad right (or left') oblique. 2. March. 3. Forward. 

At the command right ohlique, gather the horse. At the com- 
mand march, execute a quarter-turn to the right} having taken thi.^ 
direction, keep the legs equally near, and march straight forward 
at the same gait. At the command forward, return upon the track^ 
or return to the original direction. 

To march in a circle. 

416. When the leading files have passed over about one-third of 
the long sides, the instructor commands : 

1. In circle to the right (or left). 2. March. 

(Fig. 99.) At the command in circle to the right, the leading 
files, and in succession the troopers, gather their horses. At the 
command march, the leading files describe a circle between the two 
tracks ; they are followed by the other troopers, who march exactly 
in the same direction. 

To change hand on the circle. 

417. The instructor commands : 

1. Right (or left) — Turn. 2. Forward. 

(Fig. 100.) At the command turn, the leading files turn to the 
right. At the command forward, they move straight forward, 
directing themselves, in passing the centre, towards the opposite 
point of the circumference. 

When the leading files are two feet from this point, the instructor 
commands : 

1. Left (or right) — Turn. 2. Forward 



356 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



Fig 99. 
f --..^ 

=1 



i^ 



"^«£, -'■ 



.- — 4. 



<^ 






c^^ 



^ 



<i^ <!:3 < r==3 <is ■« 



- r. 


1 


Fiy 100. \ 


i'' 


c 


/I 


1^ 
1 ^ 

i 


^ 




I 

1 / 




1 

\ J 


\\ 
\ ^ 

I 
'^ 




E&- cg^^r^^jv^j 


^? 


o^ j 



At the command turn, the leading files turn to the left. At the 
command forward^ they re-enter upon the circle at the new hand. 
All the other troopers follow the leading files. 

When the instructor wishes to resume the exercise upon the right 
line, he takes care that the leading files are at opposite points of the 
circumference ; and when they are on the track of the long sides, 
he commands : 

Forward. 

At this command the leading files straighten their horses and 
re-enter on the track^ followed by the other troopers. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 



357 



418. (Fig. 101.) To reunite the troopers in order to conduct 
them to the quarters, the instructor causes them to close to the dis- 
tance of two feet; he then orders a change of direction in the 
breadth of the riding house, or ground, at the moment the leading 
liles are opposite each other. 




Fiir 102. 



FRONT. 



c wlTlriiniinipiii c 



•STT 






!^.^J;.y-Y-f-ffi'^ 



When the leading files, in the act of meeting each other, arrive 
towards the middle of the space, the instructor commands : 

1. Left and right — Turn. 2. Forward. 



358 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The leader of the front rank turns to the left^ that of the rear 
rank to the right, the two columns thus reunite, the troopers of the 
rear rank approaching to within one pace of those of the front. 

The column having arrived on the ground where the squad was 
formed, the instructor commands : 

1. Front. 2. Halt. 

(Fig. 102.) At the command front, the first trooper of each 
rank turns to the left and moves straight forward. At the com- 
mand halt, the trooper of the front rank stops ; and when the rear 
rank trooper finds himself at two feet from the front rank he stops 
also. 

All the other troopers execute a turn to the left, in succession, 
when they are nearly opposite the place they are to occupy in the 
rank, and halt abreast of this rank. 

419. To terminate the exercise, the instructor gives the command 
to dismount in two ranks as follows : at the command 

Prepare to dismount, 

Nos. 1 and 3 of the front rank move forward six paces ; Nos. 2 
and 4 of the rear rank rein back four paces, and keep themselves 
opposite their intervals, dressing by the right. 

After the troopers have taken these positions they go through the 
first motions of prepare to dismount as directed for a single rank, 
followed by the dismount. 

After the dismount the instructor commands : 

Form — Ranks. 

At the word ranlcs, Nos. 1 and 3 of each rank elevate the right 
hand slightly, to keep the horse quiet ; Nos. 2 and 4 return quietly 
to their intervals. 

Exercises with stirrups. 

420. The stirrup should support only the weight of the leg ; the 
foot ought to be inserted one-third of its length, the heel lower than 
the toe. The stirrups are of proper length, if, when the trooper 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 



359 



raises himself on the stirrups, there is a space of six inches between 
the fork and the saddle. 

To turn to tlie right (or left^, hy the trooper^ in marching. 

421. The instructor causes this movement to be executed as 
already prescribed (No. 398), at the commands : 

1. Squad to the right. 2. March. 3. Forward. 

He will observe that, the troopers marching in two columns, the 
command march ought to be given at 
the moment the leading files arrive 
opposite the last trooper but one of the 
othor column. 

(Fig. 103.) Immediately after the 
command forward, the troopers move 
straight forward, preserving their gait 
and direction, so that each one may 
find before him the interval and the 
place he is to occupy in the column 
on the opposite track. In passing into 
the intervals, the legs should be kept 
near, to prevent the horse slackening 
his gait. 

To pass in succession from the head to 
the rear of the column. 

422. This movement is executed in 
succession in the two columns, at a 
simple warning from the instructor, by 
two right (or left^ about turns. 

The trooper designated to pass to 
the rear of the column gathers his 
horse and executes the movement in 
advancing, so as not to retard those 
who are behind him. He holds the 
outer leg near, in order to describe a 
semicircle of more than six paces ; he 
marches then parallel to the column, and when he has re-entered upon 
the track by a second turn, he closes to the distance of four feet from 




360 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the last trooper. The trooper who follows, and who becomes the 
leader, should gather his horse, and direct him with the outei rein 
and the inner leg, to prevent his following the horse which has left 
the column. 

Being at a halt, to commence the move at a trot. 

423. The troopers being in column upon the long sides, the in- 
structor commands : 

1. Column forward. 2. Trot. 3. March. 

At the command trot, gather the horse. At the command march, 
lower the wrists and close the legs by degrees ; as soon as the horse 
obeys, replace the wrists and legs slowly. 

Marching at a trot, to halt. 

424. The troopers marching at a trot, and in column on the long 
sides, the instructor commands : 

1. Column. 2. Halt. 

At the command column, gather the horse. At the command 
halt, elevate the wrists by degrees, until the horse stops ; and hold 
the legs always near, to keep him straight, and to prevent his 
stepping back. The horse having obeyed, gradually replace the 
wrists and legs. 

The instructor should require all the troopers to set off freely at 
the trot, at the command march, and to stop altogether without 
jostling, at the command halt. 

To pass from the trot to the trot-out, and from the trot-out to the trot. 

425. The troopers marching at the trot, and in column upon the 
long sides, the instructor commands : 

Trot-out. 

At this command, lower the wrists a little, and close the legs 
gradually; as soon as the horse obeys, replace the wrists and the legs 
by degrees. 



SCHOOL OP THE TROOPER ' 361 

This gait sliould be executed only during one or two turns towards 
each hand ; in continuing it longer, the horses lose their steadiness, 
and the equality of their gaits is destroyed. 

426. To pass from the trot-out to tlie trot, the instructor com- 
mands : 

Slow trot. 

At this command, elevate the wrists by degrees, and close the 
legs, to prevent the horse from taking the walk; as soon as the horse 
obeys, replace the wrists and legs by degrees. 

To pass from the trot to the gallop. 

427. Before commencing this exercise, and when the rear rank 
arrives opposite one of the short sides of the riding house, or 
ground, it is formed by causing the troopers to front and halt, as 
directed No. 391, paying attention to make them move forward six 
paces from the track. 

The troopers of the front rank continue to march, take between 
them the distance of four paces, pass to the trot and commence the 
gallop in succession, at the indication of the instructor, as follows : 

On approaching the corner, lengthen the trot, and gather the horse, 
feeling the left rein slightly, in order to keep back the left shoulder, 
and leave the right perfectly free. 

At the moment of passing the corner, close the legs equally but 
not suddenly. The horse having taken the gallop, hold a light 
hand and the legs near, to keep him at his gait. 

After one or two turns, the troopers pass from the gallop to the 
trot, and from the trot to the walk. Th« instructor makes them 
change hand in the breadth of the riding ground, and recommence 
the same exercise to the left hand. The traopers of the front rank 
are then formed as those of the rear rank, upon the other short side, 
and the troopers of the rear rank go through with the same exercise. 

To passage to the right or left. 

428. The two columns marching at a walk upon the long sides, 
the instructor causes the movement squad to the right (or Ze/J") to 
be executed, No. 898, and having halted the troopers he commands; 



362 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 



1. Right (or lef{) pass. 2. March. 8. Squad. 4. Halt. 

(Fig. 104.) At the command rigJif pass, bear tlie shoulders of the 
horse to the right, in opening the right rein a little, and closing the 
right leg. This movement is one of preparation ; it indicates to the 
trooper that the shoulders of the horse should always commence the 
march, and precede the movement of the haunches. At the com- 




! ^i 

.1 ] i 

|-:r.r.::| 
f::-.^:-::JS 

1--?----! 

1 ' ' 

i 
1 


/OS \ 

t.::faa 
rzir;J 
t.:±::::l 
t::i-::;j 
t:±:zi 
fi:;::fc-::fl 
fi:::i:;:J 
t:::l::-::d 
i-;:::t:-i 

i '• i 

1 

_v^ ^__J 



mand march open the right rein to incline the horse to the right, 
closing the left leg at the same time, that the haunches may follow, 
without leaning the body to the left : make use of the left rein and 
the right leg, to support the horse and moderate his movement. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 303 

After some steps upon tlie side, tlie instructor halts the squad. 

At the command Ualt, cause the effect of the right rein and left 
leg to cease instantly, employing the opposite rein and leg ', straiten 
the horse, and replace the wrists and legs by degrees. 

To passage to the left, employ the same principles and inverse 
means. 

The instructor causes this movement to be executed in the com^ 
mencement, by each man separately, and then by all at the same 
time. 

To passage to the rigid, or left, bring in column. 

429. (Fig. 105.) The troopers being on the track, and marching 
to the right (or left) hand, the instructor orders a change of direction 
in the length of the riding house or ground ; and when the two 
columns are by the side of each other, he halts them and causes 
them to execute passage to the right (or left'). When the troopers 
have nearly arrived at the track the instructor halts them. 

Principles of the Gallop. 

430. A horse gallops on the right foot, when the right fore and 
hind leg move in advance of the left fore and hind leg. This gait 
is generally divided into three distinct times or treads. The first 
time is marked by the left hind foot which reaches the ground first ; 
the second by the left fore and right hind foot which touch at the 
same instant, and the third by the right fore-foot. 

A horse gallops on the left foot when the left fore and hind leg 
move in advance of the right fore and hind leg. In this case, the 
right hind foot first reaches the ground, then the right fore and left 
hind foot, and lastly the left fore foot. 

A horse gallops true when he gallops on the right foot, in exer- 
cising or turning to the right hand, and on the left foot, in exer- 
cising or turning to the left hand. 

A horse gallops false when he gallops on the left foot in exer- 
cising or turning to the right hand, and on the right foot, in exer- 
cising or turning to the left hand. 

A horse is " disunited " when he gallops with the near fore leg 



SG4 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

followed by the off hind leg, or with the off fore leg followed by 
the near hind leg. 

When the horse gallops on the right foot, the rider experiences a 
sensible movement in his position from right to left, and when he 
gallops on the left foot, the rider experiences a sensible movement 
in his position from left to right. 

When the horse is disunited, the trooper experiences irregular 
movements in his position ; the centre of gravity of the horse is 
deranged, and his strength impaired. 

To gallop on right lines. 

431. After the troopers of the rear rank are formed as directed 
No. 427, the instructor causes the men of the front rank to take the 
distance of four paces from each other; these troopers marching at 
the trot, and to the right hand upon one of the long sides, the in- 
structor commands : 

1. Gallop. 2. March. 

At the command gallop, gather the horse and keep him perfectly 
straight. At the command march, carry the bridle-hand slightly 
forward and to the left, to enable the right shoulder to move in 
advance of the left, and close the legs behind the girths in order to 
urge the horse forward, causing him to feel the effect of the left leg 
lightly. The horse having obeyed, hold a light hand and the legs 
near, to keep him at his gait. 

To preserve the movement of the horse true, it is necessary for 
the trooper to accommodate himself to all his motions, particularly 
in passing corners, when the slightest derangement in the seat would 
render the action of the horse irregular. 

When a horse gallops false, or is disunited, the trooper is ordered 
to take the trot and pass to the rear of the column, taking care not 
to interfere with those who follow. When he arrives at the rear, 
he resumes the gallop. 

The troopers should make but a turn or two at the gallop to each 
hand, and should always be required to pass to the trot in order to 
change hand. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 365 

When the troopers manage their horses well; the distance between 
i3 generally reduced to four feet. 

The rear rank is carried through the same exercise; and then 

both ranks at once. 

To gallop on the circle, 

432. When the troopers have been sufficiently exercised at the 
gallop on straight lines, the instructor causes them to make a few 
turns on the circle, following the principles laid down in No. 416. 

This exercise is commenced on very large circles ; the diameter 
is diminished as the troopers become more skilful. 

WHEELINGS. 

433. There are two kinds of wheels ; the loheel on a fixed pivot, 
and the wheel on a movable pivot. The wheel is always on 2l fixed 
pivot, except when the- command is right {or left) .rr^ turn. The 
troopers should execute this movement without disuniting, and 
without ceasing to observe the alignment. 

In every kind of wheel, the conductor of the marching flank 
should measure with his eye the arc of the circle he is to pass over, 
so that it may not be necessary for the files to open or close. He 
turns his head occasionally towards the pivot; if he perceives that 
the troopers are too much crowded; or too open, he increases or 
diminishes the extent of his circle gradually. Each trooper of the 
front rank should describe his circle in the ratio of the distance at 
which he may be from the pivot. During the wheel; the troopers 
should turn the head slightly towards the marching flank; to regulate 
the rapidity of their march and to keep themselves aligned ; they 
should also feel the boot lightly on the side of the pivot, in order 
to remain closed to that side. They should yield to pressure coming 
from the pivot, and resist that from the opposite direction. The 
horses are slightly turned towards the pivot, in order to keep them 
on the circular line they have to pass over. 

The wheel on a fixed pivot. 

434. The object of the wheel on a fixed pivot is to pass from the 
order of battle to the order of column; and from the order of column 

31* 



366 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

to the order of battle. The trooper who forms the pivot of the 
wheel turns upon his own ground, without advancing or reining 
back, and without passing to the right or left. 

The wheelings are executed at first in single rank ; for this pur- 
pose the front rank is marched forward, and halted when arrived 
at a distance from the rear rank equal to double its front. The 
ranks being aligned, the instructor commands : 

1. Squad in circle right (or leff) wheel. 2. March. 

(Fig. 106.) At the command march,' the troopers put them- 
selves in motion, turning the head towards the marching flank ; the 
flank file conducts the flank at a, ivalh, measuring with the eye the 
extent of the circle he is to pass over, that neither opening nor 
closing may be caused in the rank, and that the troopers may keep 
aligned. The pivot man turns upon his own ground, regulating 
himself upon the marching flank. 

"When the squad has executed several wheels, to halt it, the in- 
structor commands : 

1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Left (ov right) — Dress. 4. Front. 

At the command halt, the troopers straighten their horses and 
halt with steadiness. At the command left (or right) — dress, they 
align themselves to the side indicated. At the command /row;', turn 
the head to the front. 

The two ranks are then marched forward, preserving between 
them the same distance, and made to recommence the wheel. When 
the instructor wishes the squad to take the direct march, he com- 
mands : 

1, Forward. 2. Guide left (or right). 

At the command forward, the pivot resumes the gait at which 
it was previously marching. All the other troopers straighten their 
horses, and the two flanks move forward at the same gait, conform- 
ing to the principles of the direct march. At the command guide 
left (or right), the troopers regulate their movements towards the 
gide indicated. 



SCHOOL OP THE TROOPER. 



367 



If the squad is wheeling to the right, and the instructor wishes 
it to change the wheel to the left without halting, he commands : 

1. Squad in circle, left wheel. 2. March. 

At the command march, the left flank halts, and becomes the 
pivot. The right flank, assuming the gait at which the left flank 











n^ 108. 




was marching, moves forward, and describes a circle proportionate 
to the extent of the front. All the other troopers straiten their 
horses, and guide them so as to pass new circles in the inverse 
sense. 



368 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

435. The troopers being sufficiently exercised at the wheels in 
single rank at the walk and the trot, the ranks are closed and the 
wheels executed in double ranks. The instructor commands : 

1. Squad in circle, right (or lef() wheel. 2, March. 

(Fig. 107.) At the command march, the troopers of the front 
rank execute the movement as prescribed above. The troopers of 
the rear rank turn the head and carry the hand towards the march- 
ing flank, so that each one may be out of the direction of his file- 
leader by two troopers. For this purpose, the moment the wheel 
commences, each rear rank man executes a quarter turn to the left, 
sustaining the haunches of his horse with the right leg, when the 
wheel is to the right, or a. quarter turn to the right, when the wheel 
is to the left, keeping during the wheel in the direction of his new 
file-leader, and remaining at the distance of two feet from the front 
rank. 

To stop the wheel, the instructor commands : 

1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Left (or right) Dress. 4. Front. 

At the command squad, the rear rank men straiten their horses, 
and return to the direction of their file-leaders. All the troopers 
halt at the command. At the command left (or right) dress, they 
align themselves towards the side indicated. At the command 
front, turn the head to the front. 

When the instructor wishes the squad to resume the direct march, 
he commands : 

1. Forward. 2. Guide left (or right). 

At the command forward, the rear rank men replace themselves 
behind their file-leaders, and march straight forward. 

The squad wheeling to the right, to wheel to the opposite side 
without halting, the instructor commands : 

1. Squad in circle, left wheel. 2. MARCH. 

At tlie command in circle left icheel, the rear rank men return to 
tlie direction of their file-leaders. At the command march, the 
troopers conform to what has already been laid down. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 369 

The squad being halted, to place it in a direction perpendicular 
to the original front, the instructor commands : 

1. Squad right (or left) wheel. 2. Maech. 3. Halt. 4. Left 
(ox right) — Dress. 5. Front. 

Which is executed on the same principles as the wheel on a fixed 
pivot. 

436. The squad being at the halt, to face it to the rear, the 
instructor commands : v 

1. Squad right (or left) about, wheel 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. 
Left — Dress. 5. Front. 

Which is executed as in circle to the right or left, the squad pass- 
ing over a half circle. 

437. The squad being at a halt, to place it towards its right in a 
direction oblique to the original, the instructor commands : 

1. Squad right (ov left) half wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4,. Left 
(or right) — Dress. 5. Front. 

Which is executed on the principles of the wheel on a fixed point. 

The squad being on the march, the same movements are executed 
at the commands : 1. Squad right (or left) wheel, right (or leff^ 
about wheel, right half (or left half) wheel. 2. March. 3. For- 
ward. 4. Guide right (or left). 

At the command march, the wheeling flank wheels at the gait at 
which the platoon was marching ; the pivot flank halts. At the com- 
mand forward, the pivot resumes its original pass, and the two 
flanks move forward at the same gait. 

To wheel on a movable pivot. 

438. The wheel on a movable pivot is employed in the suc- 
cessive changes of direction in column. The conductor of the 
marching flank should measure his gait, and describe his arc of 
circle so as to cause the files neither to open or close. The pivot 
describes an arc of five paces, in slackening the gait. The centre 
men preserve the gait at which the squad was marching. At the 

y 



370 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

end of the wheel, the marching flank and the pivot resume the gait 
at which they originally marched. 

The squad being on the march, to cause it to change direction, 
the instructor commands : 

1. Left (or rigli£) — TuRN. 2. Forward. 

(Fig. 108). At the command left (or right) the pivot prepares 
to slacken, and the marching flank to augment the gait. At the 
command turn, the squad turns to the left, or to the right, the 
pivot slackening its gait, in describing an arc of five paces ; the 
marching flank augments its gait, and regulates itself by the pivot 
during the whole of the wheel. At the command forward, all 
the troopers straighten their horses, the pivot and marching flank 
move forward in the gait at which the squad was originally marching. 

SABRE EXERCISE. 

439. For instruction in the use of the sabre the men of the squad 
are on foot, and in one rank about nine feet apart. 

The right side of the gripe is the side opposite the guard. 

The left side of the gripe is the side next the guard. 

Tierce is the position in which the edge of the blade is turned 
towards the right, the nails downwards. 

Quarte is the position in which the edge of the blade is turned 
to the left, the nails upwards. 

440. The squad being in position, the instructor commands : 

Draw — Sabre. 

Two times and two motions. 

First motion. At the first part of the command, which is draw, 
turn the head slightly to the left, without changing the position of 
the body: unhook the sabre with the left hand, and bring the hilt 
to the front ; run the right wrist through the sword-knot ; seize the 
gripe, draw the blade six inches out of the scabbard, pressing the 
scabbard against the thigh with the left hand, which secures it at 
the upper ring, and turn the head to the front. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 371 

Second motion. At the last part of the command^ which is sahre, 
draw the sabre quickly, raising the arm to the full extent; make a 
slight pause, carry the blade to the right shoulder, the back of it 
against the hollow of the shoulder, the wrist resting against the 
hip, the little finger on the outside of the gripe. This position is 
the same when mounted, except that the wrist then naturally falls 
upon the thigh. 

Present — Sabre. 

One time and one motion. 

441. At the last part of the command, which is sahre, carry the 
sabre to the front, the arm half extended, the thumb opposite to, 
and six inches from the neck, the blade perpendicular, the edge to 
the left, the thumb extended on the right side of the gripe, the 
little finger by the side of the others. 

Carry — Sabre. 

442. At the command sahre, carry the back of the blade against 
the hollow of the shoulder, the wrist resting against the hip, the 
little finger on the outside of the gripe. 

Return — Sabre. 

Two times and two motions. ■ 

443. First motion. At the command return, execute the first mo- 
tion of return sahre. 

Second motion. At the command sahre, carry the wrist opposite 
to, and six inches from, the left shoulder ; lower the blade and pass 
it across and along the left arm, the point to the rear ; turn the head 
slightly to the left, fixing the eyes on the opening of the scabbard ; 
return the blade, free the wrist from the sword-knot, turn the head 
to the front, drop the right hand to the side, and hook up the sabre 
with the hilt to the rear. 

Guard. 

One time and one motion. 

444. At the command guard, carry the right foot two feet from 



372 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the left, the heels on the same line ; place the left hand, closed, six 
inches from the body, and as high as the elbow, the fingers towards 
the body, the little finger nearer than the thumb (^position of the 
hridle-liand) ) at the same time, place the right hand in tierce at 
the height of, and three inches from the left hand, \k\.Q thumb ex- 
tended on the back of the gripe, the little finger by the side of the 
others, the point of the sabre inclined to the left, and two feet 
higher than the hand. 

In tierce — Point. 

One time and three motions. 

445. First motion. At the command point, raise the hand in 
tierce as high as the eyes, throw back the right shoulder, carrying 
the elbow to the rear, the point of the sabre to the front, the edge 
upwards. 

Second motion. Thrust to the front, extending the arm to the 
full length. 

Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 

Li quarte — Point. 
One time aiid three motions. 

446. First motion. At the command point, lower the hand in 
quart near the right hip, the thumb extended on the right side of 
the gripe, the point a little higher than the wrist. 

Second motion. Thrust to the front, extending the arm the full 
length. 

Third motion. Keturn to the position of guard. 

Left — Point. 
One time and three motions. 

447. First motion. At the command pom^, turn the head to the 
left, draw back the hand in tierce towards the right, at the height 
of the neck, the edge upwards, the point directed to the left. 

Second motion. Thrust to the left, extending the arm to its full 
length. 

Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 



SCHOOL OP THE TROOPER. 373 

Right — Point. 
One time and. three motions. 

448. First motion. At the command point, turn the head to the 
right, carry the hand in quarte near the left breast, the edge up- 
wards, the point directed to the right. 

Second motion. Thrust to the right, extending the arm to its 
full length. 

Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 

Rear — Point, 

One time arid three motions. 

449. First motion. At the aommdindi point, turn the head to the 
right and rear, bring the hand in quarte opposite to the right 
shoulder, the arm half extended, the blade horizontal, the point to 
the rear, the edge upwards. 

Second motion. Thrust to the rear, extending the arm to its 
full length. 

Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 

Against infantry, left — PoiNT. 

One time omd three motions. 

450. First motion. At the command pom^, turn the head to the 
left, raise the hand in tierce near the neck, the point of the sabre 
directed to the height of the breast of a man on foot. 

Seco-nd motion. Thrust down in tierce. 

Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 

Against infantry, right — Point, 

One time and three motions. 

451. First motion. At the command point, ixHYi the head to the 
right, carry the hand in quarte near the right hip, the point of the 
sabre directed at the height of the breast of a man on foot. 

Second motion. Thrust in quarte. 
Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 
32 



874 MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Front — Cut. 
One time and three motions. 

452. First motion. At tlie command cut, raise the sabre, the 
arm half extended, the hand a Kttle above the head, the edge 
upwards, the point to the rear, and higher than the hand. 

Second motion. Cut, extending the arm to its full length, and 
give a back-handed cut, horizontally to the rear. 
Third motion. Keturn to the position of guard. 

Right in tierce and carte — CvT. 

One time and /our motions 

453. First motion. At the command cut, execute the first motion 
of right cut. 

Second motion. Execute the second motion of right cut. 
Third motion. Turn the hand in quarte, and cut horizontally. 
Fourth motion. Return to the position of guard. 

Left in quarte and tierce — CvT. 
One time and four motions. 

454. First motion. At the comm.and cut, execute the first mo- 
tion of left cut. 

Second motion. Execute the second motion of left cut. 
Third motion. Turn the hand in tierce, and cut horizontally. 
Fourth motion. Return to the position of guard. 

In i^^erce-— Parry. 

One time and tico motions. 

455. First motion. At the command Parry, carry the hand 
quickly a little to the front and right, the nails downwards, without 
moving the elbow; the point inclined to the front, as high as the 
eyes, and in the direction of the right shoulder; the thumb ex- 
tended on the back of the gripe, and pressing against the guard. 

Second motion. Return to the position of guard. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 3/5 

In quavte — Parry. 
One time and tico motions. 

456. F'irst motion. At tlie command parry, turn the hand and 
carry it quickly to the front and left, the nails upwards, the edge 
to the left, the point inclined to the front, as high as the eyes, and 
m the direction of the left shoulder; the thumb extended on the 
back of the gripe, and resting against the guard. 

Second motion. Return to the position of guard. 

For the head — Parry. 
One time and two motions. 

457. First motion. At the command j^arry, raise the sabre quickly 
above the head, the arm nearly extended, the edge upwards, the 
point to the left, and about six inches higher than the head. The 
hand is carried more or less to the right, left, or rear, according to 
the position of the adversary. 

Second motion. Return to the position of guard. 

Against infantry right — Parry. 
One time and three motions. 

458. First motion. At the command parry, turn the head to the 
right, throwing back the right shoulder, raise the sabre, the arm 
extended to the right, and rear, the point upwards, the hand in 
tierce, the thumb extended on the back of the gripe, the edge to 
the left. 

Second motion. Describe a circle quickly on the right, from rear 
to front, the arm extended ; turn aside the bayonet with the back 
of the blade, bringing the hand as high as the head, the point 
upwards. 

Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 

Against infantry left — Parry. 
One time and three motions. 

459. First motion. At the command pa?ry, turn the head to the 
left, raise the sabre, the arm extended to the front and right, the 



376 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

-point upwards, tlie hand in tierce, the thumb extended on the back 
of the gripe, the back of the blade to the front. 

Second motion. Describe a circle quickly on the left, from front 
to rear along the horse's neck, the arm extended ; turn aside the 
bayonet with the back of the blade, bringing the hand, still in tiercC; 
above the left shoulder. 

Third motion. Return to the position of guard. 

460. When the troopers begin to execute the above cuts, thrusts, 
and parries, correctly, the instructor requires them to make the ap- 
plication of them by combined motions, as follows : 

In tierce — Point and front cut. 

In qibarte — PoiNT AND FRONT CUT. 

Left — Point and cut. 

Riylit — Point and cut. 

Rear — Point and cut. 

Against infantry right — Point and cut. 

Against ivfantry left — Point and cut. 

Inspection of Sabre. 
One time and seven motions. 

461. First motion. At the word sahre, execute the first time 
of draiv sahre. 

Second motion. Execute the second time of draio sahre. 
' Third motion. Present sahre. 

Fourth motion. Turn the wrist inwards to show the other side 
of the blade. 

Fifth motion. Carry the sabre to the shoulder, as is prescribed 
in carry sahre. 

Sixth motion. Execute the first time of return sahre. 

Seventh motion. Execute the second time of return sahre 



MANUAL FOE A BREECH-LOADING CARBINE, OR RIFLE, THE 
troopers MOUNTED. 

462. Whenever the troopers are not exercising with the carbine, 
or rifle; it is slung by a belt, which passes from the left shoulder to 



SCHOOL OP THE TROOPER. 377 

the riglit side, the muzzle down, and in such a position that it may 
be seized by the right hand at any moment, and at the same time 
be entirely out of the way when the trooper is exercising with the 
sabre or pistol. 

The trooper, in conducting his horse to the ground before mount- 
ing, has the carbine passed over the right shoulder, the muzzle in 
the air. 

After mounting let the carbine fall by the side. 

At the first command to dismount, seize the carbine with the 
right hand a little above the band, and pass it over the right shoulder, 
the muzzle in the air. 

463. The trooper being mounted, with the carbine hanging by 
his right side, the instructor commands : 

Advance — Carbine (or Eifle). 

Two times. 

At the command advance, seize the carbine at the small of the 
stock with the right hand. At the command carbine (or rifle), 
elevate it, and place the butt upon the thigh, the muzzle at the 
height of the eye and opposite to the right shoulder, the lock to 
the front. 

To load. 

464. The squad being in the position of advance carbine (or 7^ijle^, 
the instructor commands : Load in four times. 

1. Load. 

One time and two motions. 

First motion. At this command, place the carbine (or rifle) in 
tho left hand, which seizes it a little below the band, the thumb 
along the stock, the muzzle elevated, at the height of, and opposite 
to, the left shoulder, with the right hand move back the catch, and 
t?e.ize the lever with the thumb and first two fingers. 

Second motion. Spring open the chamber, and carry the hand 
to the cartridge-box and open it. 
82* 



378 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 
2 . CJia rge — CARTRIDGE. 
One time and two motions. 

First motion. At the command cartridge, draw a cartridge, and 
insert it in the barrel, and seize the lever with the thumb and nrst 
two fingers. 

Second, motion. Draw back the lever to its place^ half cock^ 
remove the old cap, and carry the hand to the cap box, and open it. 

3. Prime. 

One time and one motion. 

At the command prime, place a cap on the nipple, press it down 
with the thumb, let down the cock, and seize the piece by the small 
of the stock with the right hand. 

4. Advance — Carbine. 

One time. 

As prescribed above. 

To fire. 

465. The squad being in the position of advance carbine, the 
instructor commands : 

Ready. 

One time. 

At this command let fall the carbine in the left hand as in the 
first motion of load, cock it, and return to the position of advance 
carbine. 

Aim. 

One time. 

At this command, carry the butt to the shoulder with the right 
hand, support the piece with the thumb and first finger of the left 
hand, a little below the barrel, the others closed in order to hold 
the reins without slackening them; place the face against the stock, 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOPER. 



379 



Fliut the left eye^ direct the right along the barrel to aim, and place 
the forefinger of the right hand on the trigger. 

Fire. 

At the command /re, pass the forefinger against the trigger and 
fire, without lowering the head or turning it, and remain in this 
position. 

If, after firing, the instructor wishes to load, he commands : 

Load. 

At the command load, bring down the carbine to the first motion 
of load ; load at will, and take the position of advance carbine. 
If, after firing, the instructor does not wish to load, he commands : 

Advance — Carbine. 

Which is done as already prescribed. 

To drop the carbine, the instructor commands : 

Br op — Carbine. 

One time. 

At the command carbine, lower the muzzle of the carbine, and 
cast the butt to the rear. 

Inspection of arms. 

466. The instructor commands : 

Inspection — Carbine. 

One time and two motions. 

First motion. At the command carbine, take the position of 
advance carbine. 

Second motion. Drop the carbine. 

manual FOR COLT'S REVOLVERS.' 

467. The troopers being mounted, the pistol either in the holster 
or pistol-case, the instructor commands : 

1 With very little modification this manual will serve for Colt's Carbine 
and Bifle. 



380 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Draw — Pistol.* 
Two times and two motions. 

First motion. At the first command, unbuckle the holster or pistol 
case, seize the pistol by the handle with the right hand, holding it 
between the palm of the hand and the three last fingers, the fore 
finger resting on the guard, the thumb on the handle 

Second motion. At the second command, draw out the pistol and 
elevate it, the guard to the front ; the wrist at the height of, and six 
inches from, the right shoulder. 

Load in six times. 

1. Load. 

One time and one motion. 

Place the pistol in the bridle hand, holding it by the handle in 
front of the body, the hammer between the thumb and fore-finger, 
and turned to the left, the muzzle pointing upwards. Carry the 
right hand to the cartridge-box, and open it. 

2, Handle — Cartridge. 

One time and one motion. 

Seize the cartridge with the thumb and the first two fingers, and 
carry it to Ihe mouth. 

3 Tear — Cartridge. 

One time and one motion. 

Bite off the end and carry the cartridge opposite the chamber 
nearest the lever, or, if the cartridge is furnished from the manu- 
factory with the pistol, seize the end of the cord, which projects 
from one end of the~ cartridge, between the teeth, tear open the 
outer case, and take out the cartridge. 

^If it is a carbine or rifle, the command will be, advance — carbine (or rifle). 



SCHOOL OF THE T ROOTER. 381 

4. Charge — CARTRIDGE. 

One time and tico motions. 

First motion. Empty tlie powder into the chamber, and insert 

the ball, pressing it down as far as possible with the thumb and 

fore-finger; or, if it be a cartridge furnished from the manufactory, 

simply insert it in the chamber, pressing the ball down as before. 

Second motion. Turn the pistol with the left hand, bringing the 
hammer towards the body, and cock it with the thumb of the right 

hand. 

5. Ram — Cartridge. 

One time and two motions. 

First motion. Seize the lever with the catch, with the thumb and 
fore-finger of the right hand, ram down the ball, and replace the lever. 

Second motion. Let down the hammer with the right hand, and 
carry the hand to the cartridge-box. 

Repeat as above directed until all the chambers are loaded. 

6. Prime. 
One time and two motions. 

First motion. Lower the muzzle towards the right side by turn- 
ing the wrist of the bridle-hand, the muzzle pointing downwards, 
the hammer to the front, the left wrist resting against the stomach ; 
half-cock the pistol with the left thumb ; turn the cylinder with the 
thumb and forefinger of the right hand until it clicks. Take a cap 
and press it on the cone. Turn the cylinder again until it clicks, 
and so on until all the cones are capped, the hammer resting on the 
safety notch. 

Second motion. Seize the pistol at the handle with the right 
hand, and bring it to the position of draw pistol. 

468. The instructor wishing to fire, will command : 

Eeady. 

One time and two motions. 

First motion. Place the pistol in the left hand, the little finger 
touching the key, the barrel nearly vertical, the muzzle a little in- 



382 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

clined to tlie left and front, the guard to the front, the thumb on 
the head of the hammer, the forefinger along the guard. 

Second motion. Cock the pistol, and bring it to the position of 
draw pistol. 

Aim. 

One time. 
Lower the pistol, the arm half extended, and place the fore-finger 
lightly on the trigger, the muzzle directed to the height of a man's 
waist. 

Fire. 

One time. 

Press the forefinger steadily on the trigger, fire, and retake the 
position of draw pistol. 

The men being at a ready, and the instructor wishing to fire all 

the barrels in quick succession, will give intimation to that effect, 

and command : 

1. Aim. 2. Fire. 

The men will aim and fire, come to the first position of ready, 
cock, aim, fire again, and so continue until the pistol is discharged ; 
then take the position of draw pistol. 

469. The instructor wishing to reload, commands : 

Load at will. 
Load. 

One time. 

Load the gix chambers as heretofore directed, and take the posi- 
tion of draw pistol. 

Return — Pistol. 

One time. 

Lower the muzzle of the pistol, and return it to the muzzle, or 
pistol-case. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 383 



AETICLE YIII. 
SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 

470. The troopers being sufficiently instructed to manage their 
horses and use their arms, are passed to the school of the troop. 
The object of this school is to teach them to exercise properly 
together, and to execute all the movements of the troop, whether in 
column of platoons, or in line. 

Each movement, after having been correctly executed by the 
right, is repeated by the left. 

When the movements are all executed at the ivalk, the instructor 
causes them to be repeated at the trot, requiring always the same 
simultaneous action, and the same precision. This gradation is also 
followed for exercise at the gallop ; but the horses should not be 
kept long at this gait. 

The troop is composed of all the troopers of a single company ; 
for exercising it is formed in two ranks, and divided into two pla- 
toons.^ The troop is one half of the squadron, and when it forms 
a part of the squadron constituting one of the divisions, the officers 
and non-commissioned officers are posted as directed for a squadron 
in line ] but where the troop acts singly, as will be supposed in the 
school of the troop, the officers and non-commissioned officers take 
posts as directed for a company acting singly. (See No. 17.) 

For the school of the troop, the troopers are under arms ; if armed 
with the carbine it is always slung. 

471. The troop being formed in two ranks, at open order, the 

1 If the platoons are small, or if the instructor -wishes to exercise the 
troop in the school of the squadron, he may cause it to be formed in a single 
rank. 



881 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

troopers and file-closers at the head of their horses, the chiefs of 
platoon mounted, facing the platoon, at ten paces from and opposite 
the centre, the captain commands : 

1 Attention. 2. i^iV;^^ — Dress. 8. Front. 
He then commands : 

In each platoon — -and in each rank — Count hy fours. 

At this command, the troopers count off in both platoons at once, 
commencing on the right of each rank. 

The captain then gives the command mounts which is executed as 
explained in the school of the trooper, No. 407. 

At the command /orm — Ranks, the chiefs of platoon move for- 
ward, face to the front by turning to the right about, and place them- 
selves before the centre of their platoon, the croup of their horses 
one pace from the head of the horses of the front rank. The file- 
closers follow the rear rank. 

General principles of alignment. 

472 The troopers, in order to align themselves, should regulate 
their shoulders upon those of the men on the side of the alignment, and 
fix the eyes upon the line of the eyes, so as to perceive the breast 
of the second trooper of their rank on the alignment ; for this pur- 
pose, they should turn the head, remaining square upon their horses, 
feel lightly the boot of the man on the side of the alignment, and 
keep the horses straight in the ranks, that all may have a parallel 
direction. 

The troopers of the rear rank, independently of the alignment, 
should be exactly behind their file-leaders, and in the same direction, 
taking care to preserve the distance of two feet from head to croup. 

Successive alignment of the files in the troop. 

473. The two files of the right (or left) are moved forward ten 
paces, and aligned parallel to the troop by the commands : 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOT. 385 

1. Two files from tie right (or left) forward. 2. March. 3. 
Halt. 4. llajlit {qv left) — Dress. 5. FroiNT. 

The captain then commands : 

1. Bi/ file right (or left) — Dress. 2. Front. 

At the command dress, each file moves forward in succession and 
steadily, the troopers turning the head to the right, and taking the 
last steps slowly, in order to arrive abreast of the files already formed 
without passing beyond the alignment, observing then to halt, give 
the hand, relax the legs, and keep the head to the right until the 
command front. 

Each file executes the same movement when the preceding one 
has arrived on the base of alignment, so that only one file may align 
itself at the same time. 

At the command front, turn the head to the front. The captain 
gives the command /ron^ when the last file is aligned. 

When the troopers execute these alignments, this instruction is 
repeated in giving the two files of the right an oblique direction. 
For this purpose, the two files having inarched forward four paces, 
as has been prescribed, execute a half turn to the right (or left), and 
march six paces in this new direction. 

The troop being unmasked, the remainder of the movement is 
executed by the same commands, and on the same principles as in 
the last case ; each file, as it arrives nearly opposite the place it is 
to occupy, executes a half turn to the right (or left), so that having 
left the troop by one straight line, it arrives upon the new alignment 
by another. 

474. The two files of the right, or left, are made to rein back four 
paces, and align themselves parallel to the troop, and opposite the 
place they occupied in it, by the commands : 

1. Two files from right {or left) hacJcwards. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
4. Eight (or left) — Dress. 5. Front. 

The captain then commands : 

1. By file — right (or left), hachward — Dress. 2. Front. 
33 z 



886 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

At tlie command dress, each file reins back in succession, keeping 
perfectly straight, the troopers turning the head to the right, and 
passing a little to the rear of the files already formed, in order to 
come up abreast of them by a movement to the front, which renders 
the alignment more easy. 

The troopers of the front rank rein back slowly, those of the rear 
rank regulate themselves upon their file-closers, preserving always 
their proper distance. 

At the command /ro??f, turn the head to the front. 

475. The alignment is then executed by twos (or by fours). For 
this purpose, the two or four files of the right move forward as has 
been prescribed, and the captain commands : 

1. Bi/ twos (oY h^ fours) — right (or left) —Dress. 2. Front. 

At the command dress, the files align themselves in succession 
by twos (or by fours), following the principles prescribed for the 
alignment by file, being particular to set out and arrive upon the 
alignment together. 

At the command front, turn the head to the front. 

Alignment of the troop. 

476. The captain, after having placed the right guide, so that 
no trooper will be compelled to rein back, commands : 

1. Riylit — Dress. 2. Front. 

At the command right dress, all the troopers align themselves 
steadily but promptly to the right. 

The troop being aligned, the captain commands : 

Front. 

The captain causes three difierent alignments to be executed by 
the left, following the same principles, but by inverse means. 

To open and close the ranks. 

477. To open the ranks, the captain commands : 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOT. o87 

1. Rear rank open order. 2. March. 3. Riylit — Dress. 
4. Front. 

At the command march, the front rank remains immovabloj the 
rear rank reins back six paces, each trooper preserving the direction 
of his file-leader. The file-closers rein back until they are six 
paces from the rear rank. The chiefs of platoon move forward six 
paces, and face the centre of the platoons by turning to the left 
about. 

At the command right dress, the rear rank dresses to the right. 
At the command /ro??/, the head is turned to the front. 

To close the ranks the captain commands : 

1. Rear ranh close order. 2. March. 3. Right — Dress. 
4. Front. 

At the command march, the rear rank closes upon the front to 
the distance of two feet, each trooper taking care to preserve the 
direction of his file-leader. The chiefs of platoon resume their 
places by a turn about to the right, and the file-closers take their 
proper distances from the rear rank. 

At the command right dress, the troop is aligned to the right. 
At the command /row.^, the head is turned to the front. 

To rein back the troop. 

478. The troop being at a halt, the captain commands : 

1. Troop backivards. 2. Guide right (or left). 3. March. 

At the command march, all the troopers rein back at once, regu- 
lating their movements by those of the right guide. 

When the troop has reined back some steps, the captain com- 
mands : 

1. Troop. 2. Halt. 3. Right (or left) — Dress. 4. Front, 

To break the troop by jile. 

479. The troop being in line, the captain commands : 

1. By file. 2. March. 



388 MANUAL FOR Y f ) L U N T E E R S AND MILITIA 



Fi0 109. 



■mz 



4(1 %r. 
I 



/f I 

3^L C^/ 2%L I 



^mii[iiiiiiiiiii®ii« 



(Fig. 109). At tlie eomraand 
ly file, the troopers of the first 
file (front and rear rank) gather 
their horses, and the others in 
succession as soon as the file on 
the right is in motion. The 
chief of the first platoon, fol- 
lowed by the first sergeant, or 
guide of the right, posts himself 
in front of the first file. 

At the command march, the 
chief of the platoon, the guide, 
and the first file on the right 
moves straight to the front; they 
are followed by the next file; 
each files moves off when the 
haunches of the horses of the 
roar rank man which has broken, 
arrives at the head of the horses 
of the front rank ; each file 
marches six paces straight to the 
front, makes a quarter-turn to 
the right, and marches in the new 
direction until it reaches its place 
in the column, when it makes a 
quarter-turn to the left. 

The chief of the second pla- 
toon breaks with his first file, 
keeping abreast with, and one 
pace to his left. The first lieu- 
tenant is in the rank of file- 
closers, opposite the centre of the 
column, and the second sergeant 
or guide of the left, follows the 
last file. 

To break the platoon by the 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 389 

left, the movement is executed following the same principles, but by 
inverse means, at the commands : 

1. By the left file. 2. MARCH. 

Direct maj'ch in column by file. 

480. The troopers should keep their horses straight, and march 
at a free and equal gait; they should keep their eyes to the front, 
and continue in the direction of the column, so as to perceive only 
the trooper who marches before them, to march at the same gait 
with him, preserving always the distance of two feet from head to 
croup, that his own horse may not tread upon the heels of the horse 
in front. This distance should be recovered gradually when lost. 

The column changes direction to the right or left, as prescribed 
No. 410. 

To halt the column, the captain commands : 

1. Column. 2. Halt. 

At the command halt, the troopers stop together in the direction 
of their file-leaders and at their distances, taking care to prevent 
the horses from stepping back. 

To move off, the captain commands : 

1. Column forward. 2. March. 

At the command march, the troopers move off together. 

The column being at a halt, if the captain wishes to commence 
the move at a trot, he conforms to what is prescribed No. 423. In 
this case the chiefs of platoon move off prompt-ly at the trot, that 
the troopers in their rear may take this gait at once, without march- 
ing first at a ivalk. 

Individual oblique march. 

481. The commn marching by file, the captain commands: 

1. Left (or right) oblique. 2. March. 

At the command march, each trooper executes a quarter turn to 
83* 



390 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS, AND MILITIA. 

the left, and moves forward in his new direction, all following parallel 
lines, and regulating themselves towards the right, in order to keep 
on the same line, and to preserve their distances on that side. 
To return to the primitive direction, the captain commands : 

Forward. 

At this command, the troopers return to the original direction, 
hy a quarter tnrn to the right j in advancing, and move forward in 
the direction of their file-leaders. 

The troop marching in column l)}j file, to form it to the front, to the 
left, or on right, into line. 

482. The column marching right in front, to form it to the front 
into line, the captain commands : 

1. Front into line. 2. March. ^. Right — Dress. 4. Front. 

(Fig. 110.) At the command march, the first file continues to 
march straight forward. The others immediately commence ob- 
liquing to the left, march in their new direction, and each file makes 
a quarter turn to the right on coming opposite to the place he is to 
occupy in the troop. When the first file has marched twenty paces, 
the chief of the first platoon commands halt. At this command, it 
halts square to the front, the guide on the right of the front rank 
man ; the other files come up in succession on the left of the first^ 
and dress to the right. 

At the command front, turn the head to the front. 

The captain gives the command right — dress, immediately after 
halt, and commands front when the last file is aligned. 

The column marching left in front, the movement is executed 
following the same principles, but by inverse means. 

483. The column marching right in front^ to form it into line 
upon its left flank, the captain commands : 

1. Left into line. 2. March. 3. Left — Dress. 4. Front. 

(Fig. 111.) At the command march, the first file turns to the 
left, and moves straight forward ; the other files continue to march 



SCHOOL or THE TROOP. 

1 



891 



Fij 110. 



N0 








892 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

on, and at two paces before arriving opposite the place they are to 
occupy in the troop, they turn in succession to the left. 

When the first file has marched twenty paces, the chief of the 
first platoon commands halt. At this comm^and it halts — the guide 
on the right of the front rank man ; the other files come up and 
form in succession on the left of the first, and dress to the right. 

At the command frontj turn the head to the front. The captain 
gives the command right — dress, immediately after halt, and/z-ow^ 
when the last file is aligned. 

A column marching left in front is formed into line on the right 
flank by inverse means. 

484. The column marching right in front, to form in line upon 
the prolongation and in advance of its right flank, the captain com- 
mands : 

1. On right into line. 2. March. 3. Right — Dress. 4. Front. 

(Fig. 112.) At the command march, the first file turns to the 
right and moves straight forward ; the other files continue to march 
on, and each turns in succession to the right, at one pace beyond 
the point where the one preceding turned. 

When the first file has marched twenty paces, the chief of the 
first platoon commands halt. At this command it halts ; the guide 
taking his place on the right of the front rank, the other files come 
up and form in succession on the left of the first, and dress to the 
right. 

A column marching left in front, is formed into line on the left 
by inverse means. 

To break the troojp hy tioos or hy fours. 

485. The troop being in line, the captain commands : 

1. By twos (or hy fours). 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

(Fig. 113.) At the first command, the chief of the first platoon 
places himself in front of the two or four files of the right ; the right 
guide places himself on his right. At the command march, the 
first two or four files of the right move straight to the front ; they 



SCHOOL or THE TROOP, 



393 



^3"^' 

r- 



K 



fe 



i^ ^> 



■ 



i Fiu 



112. 



Fig 113. 



\ % //fl I 




394 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

are followed by the other files, who move ofi" when the haunches of 
the horses of the rear rank are on a line with the heads of the 
horses of the front rank. These files march straight forward six 
paces, execute a quarter turn to the right by troopers, and march in 
this direction until they meet the column, when they take their 
places in it by making a quarter turn to the left. 

The chief of the second platoon breaks with the first two or four 
files of his platoon, keeping abreast with them and at one pace from 
the flank of the column on the side of the guide, each rank of two 
or four preserving between them the distance of two feet. 

The captain assures himself that the officers, the file-closers, and 
guide, are properly placed. 

The trooper on the left of the first rank of twos (or fours) is 
guide of the column j he keeps his eyes to the front, moves straight 
forward, and marches so that the troopers of his rank may be at one 
pace from the croup of the horse of the chief of the first platoon. 
The trooper on the left of each of the other ranks, who is guide of 
his rank, preserves the head direct, and keeps at the distance of 
two feet from his file-leader, and in the same direction ; the other 
troopers of each rank look occasionally towards the guide, in order 
to align themselves and regulate their march upon him. They feel 
the boot lightly towards that side, and yield to all pressure coming 
from it. When the march is by fours, they resist all pressure 
coming from the side opposite the guide. 

The column marching by twos or by fours, the captain com- 
mands : 

1. Trot. 2. March. 

At the command ma7xh, the troopers take the trot, taking care 
not to fret their horses. 

When the column has marched a sufficient distance at the trot, 
the captain commands : 

1. Walk. 2. March. 

486. The column marching in column of twos or fours, right in 
front, to change direction, the captain commands : 

Head of the column to the left (or right). 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 395 

At this command, the chief of the first platoon commands : 
1. Left — Turn. 2. Forward. 

At the command left^ the left trooper, who is pivot, prepares to 
turn at the same gait, the trooper of the opposite side to lengthen 
his. 

At the command turn, the first rank of twos or fours turns to the 
^eft. The pivot turns without changing his gait, describing an 
arc of a circle of five pacesi. The trooper on the opposite side 
turns in lengthening the gait; the other troopers turn the head 
towards the marching flank, to regulate their rate of march, feeling 
lightly the boot on the side of the pivot. At the command /crzi;(7rc?, 
the troopers who had increased the gait, resume the precise pace at 
which they were before moving, and the head of the column marches 
straight forward in the new direction. Each rank executes the 
same movement, on arriving upon the ground where the first has 
turned. 

The column marching by twos or by fours, the captain halts it, 
as prescribed, school of the trooper. 

To recommence the march, he commands : 

1. Column forward. 2. March. 3. Guide loft. 

487. The column marching by twos or by fours, the captain com- 
mands : 

1. Left (or TigM^ ohlique. 2. March. 

(Fig. 114.) At the command march, each trooper executes a 
quarter turn to the left. The trooper on the left of the first rank, 
who is guide of the column, moves straight forward in the new 
direction, and parallel to the chief of the first platoon. The trooper 
on the left of each of the other ranks, who is guide of his rank, 
moves forward also in the new direction, observing the guide of the 
column so as to keep on the same line, and in a parallel direction 
with him. 

The other troopers move forward, looking occasionally to the left 
so as to align themselves upon their guide. Each one places the 



396 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA, 



Fia US, 




W //I'h 
W // // 
W/ // 

4'7//// 
// / / 





\\ 



Vl S ffl 

\\ s 
\>.,(ffl 

ffl 

m 
n 



V 



s^3 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 397 

left knee behind tlie right knee of the man on the left, and the 
head of his hoi:se opposite the lower part of the neck of the horse 
on his left. 

To return to the primitive direction^ the captain commands : 

Forward. 

At this command, the troopers return to the original direction, by 
a quarter turn to the right. 

The troop marching in column hi/ twos or hi/ fours, to form it to the 
front, to the left, or on right, into line. 

488. The troop marching in column by twos or by fours, right in 
front, the captain commands : ' 

1. Front into line. 2. March. 3. Eight — Dress. 4. Front. 

(Fig. 115.) At the command march, the first two (or four) files 
continue to march straight forward ; when they have marched thirty 
paces, the chief of the first platoon commands : 

Halt. 

At this command, the first two (or four) files halt square to the 
front, the guide of the right returns to the right of the troop. All 
the other files of twos or fours oblique to the left, march in this 
direction, and come up in succession by a quarter turn to the right 
on coming opposite their places, and without command of the chiefs 
of platoon. 

The captain, who moves to the right flank after the command 
march, commands the alignment when the chief of the first platoon 
commands halt. 

As soon as the chiefs of platoon arrive upon the line, they place 
themselves at the centre of their platoons and align themselves. 
The guide of the left returns to the left of the troop, when the last 
two (or four) files arrive upon the line. The first lieutenant super- 
intends the alignment of the rear rank, and then takes his post in 
rear of the centre. 
34 



398 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITTA. 

4P9 The column marching right in front^ to form it in line on 
its left flank^ the captain commands : 

1. L-e ft into line. 2. Marcii. 3. Rujlit — Dress. 4. Front. 

(Fig. 116.) At the command march, the four leading files turn 
to the left and move straight forward ; when they have marched thirty 
paceS; the chief of the first platoon commands : 

Halt. 

At this command, the two (or four) leading files halt, and the 
guide places himself on the right of the troop. All the other files 
continue to march on^ and at three paces before arriving opposite 
the place they are to occupy in the troop, turn in succession to the 
left, without the command of the chiefs of platoon. 

The captains, the first lieutenant, the chiefs of platoon, and the 
guide of the left, conform exactly to what is prescribed for the 
front into line. 

490. The column marching right in front, to form line upon the 
prolongation and in advance of its right flank, the captain com- 
mands : 

1. On the right into line. 2. March. 3. Right — Dress. 
4. Front. 

(Fig. 117.) At the command march, the four leading files turn 
to the right, and march straight forward ; when they have marched 
thirty paces, the chief of the first platoon commands halt. 

At this command, the four leading files halt, and the right guide 
takes his place on the right of the troop. All the other files con- 
tinue to march forward, each turning to the right in succession, 
and without the commands of the chiefs of platoon, at the distance 
three paces beyond the point where the preceding rank has turned, 
forming to the left, and upon the alignment of the first. 

The captain, the first lieutenant, the chiefs of platoon, and the 
left guide, conform exactly to what is prescribed for the front into 
line. 

491. The troop is broken by the left, at the commands: 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP, 



399 



1 



i 







i^/y //^i 



i 



^ 



fii 



ffl 



1 
i 

i 

i 
i 
ffli 
flfi 



F/y iJ7, 



i 



400 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. By twos (or % fours) from the left. 2. March. 3. Guide 

right. 
The column is exercised at the march in column, the changes of 
direction, and the individual oblique marches. It is also exercised 
at the different formations, which are executed, following the same 
principles, but by inverse means, at the commands : 1. Front {right 
or on l(ft) into line. 2. March. 3. Left — Dress. 4. Front. 

492. When the troop has acquired precision and regularity in 
the formations at the different gaits, the captain exercises it in 
breaking by fours from a halt at the trot, and at the gallop. 

To form, the troop to the left in one rank. 

493. The troop being formed in two ranks, the captain com- 
mands : 

1. Left into single rank. 2. March. 3. Front. 4. Halt. 
6. Eight — Dress. 6. Front. 

(Fig, 118.) At the command march, the front rank moves for- 
ward six paces, dressing by the right ; the trooper on the left of the 
rear rank turns to the left and moves forward ; he is followed by all 
the other troopers of that rank, who execute the same movement 
in succession. 

At the command front, the troopers of the left of the rear rank 
turn to the right, and the other troopers in succession, when they 
have arrived nearly opposite the place they are to occupy in the 
rank. 

At the command halt, the trooper on the left halts, and so do the 
others in succession, on arriving abreast of him. 

At the command right — dress, all the troopers of the rear rank 
dress to the right. 

At the command /ro?2^, turn the head to the front. 

To form the troop to the right in two ranks. 

494. The troop being in one rank, the captain designates the 
trooper who is to be on the left of the front rank, also the one to 
be the right of the rear rank, and commands : 

1. Right into tivo ranks. 2. March. 3. Right — Dress. 4. Front. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP 



401 



(Upper part of Fig. 118.) At the command march, the front 
rank moves forward six paces, dressing by the right ; the trooper on 
the right of the rear rank turns to the right as soon as the front 



V 



s S fl- 






3^L CjJ 5fi 



mmmmmmmmmmm s 



mm/mMMmm 



mT'. 



Ficr m. 



4^ 4 4 



mi' 







rank has passed, and moves forward obliquely to the right; when 
he is nearly in rear of the trooper on the right of the front rank, he 
fronts by turning to the left. All the other troopers execute the 
same movement in succession, placing themselves exactly behina 
their file-leaders and at their proper distances. 

At the command right — dress, all the troopers align themselves 
to the right. 

At the command front, turn the head to the front. 



To form twos and fours at the same gait. 
34* 2 a 



402 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

495. Tlie troop mardiing in column by file, riglit in front, to 
form twos the captain commands : 

1. Form twos. 2. March. 

(Fig. 119.) At the command march, the first fiie continues to 
march on, and halts when it has marched ten paces ; the second fi^e 



Fij 119. 



^M^ 






(1 



\ 



mr. 



^% 4( 



obliques to the left, and comes up abreast of the first ; on arriving 
there, it halts and dresses to the right. All the other files continue 
to march straight forward, Nos. 2 and 4 executing their movement 
in the same manner, but in succession, and when Nos. 1 and 3, upon 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 403 

wliicli tliey sliould form, have nearly arrived at tlieir proper distance, 
and are about to halt. 

496. The troop marching in column by twos, right in front, to 
form fours the captain commands : 

1. Form fours. 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, the first two files continue to march on, 
and halt when they have gone ten paces : the two following files 
oblique to the left, and come up abreast of the first two ; on arriving 
there, they halt, and dress to the right. All the other files continue 
to march straight forward, Nos. 2 and 4 of each rank executing 
their movement in the same manner, when Nos. 1 and 2, upon which 
they should form, have nearly arrived at their proper distance, and 
are about to halt, 

497. When the column is at a trot, the leading file or files pass 
to the icalk, at the command march, the others continue to march 
at the trot, until they have arrived abreast of those on which they 
should form : then they pass to the loalk. 

AYhen the column is at a gallop, the leading file or files pass to 
the trot at the command march; the others continue at the gallop, 
until they have executed their formation, when they pass to the trot. 

When twos or fours are formed at the trot, or at the gallop, the 
guide is announced as soon as the first files have doubled. In exe- 
cuting the same movements at a walk, as the head of column halts, 
the guide is not announced. 

In a column marching left in front, these movements are executed 
by inverse means. 

To hreah l)y twos and hi/ file at the same ga'i. 

49S. The troop marching in column by fours, right in front, to 
break by twos the captain commands : 

1. By twos. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

(Fig. 120.) At the command hy twos, all the troopers prepare to 
halt, except Nos. 1 and 2 of the leading files. At the command 
march, Nos. 1 and 2 of the leading files continue to march at the 



404 



MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEER SAND MILITIA. 



same gait; all the others halt. Files Nos. 3 and 4 of the leading 
rank oblique to the right at the moment they are passed by the 
croup of the horses of the rear rank of Nos. 1 
and 2, and place themselves in column behind 
them. 

Each rank of four executes the same move- 
ment in regular succession, files Nos. 1 and 2 
breaking as soon as files Nos. 3 and 4 of the 
rank which precedes them have commenced 
obliquing, in order to enter the column. 

Files Nos. 1 and 2, which break to the front, 
regulate their gait so as to preserve their dis- 
tances ; and files Nos. 3 and 4 keep their horses 
straight, so as not to constrain the movements 
of files Nos. 1 and 2. 

499. The troop marching in column by twos, 
right in front, to break by file, the captain com- 
mands : 

1. By file. 2. March. 

At the command hy file, all the troopers prepare to halt except 
the right file of the leading rank of twos. At the command march, 
the right file of the leading rank of twos continues to march at the 
same gait ; all the others halt. The left file of this same rank 
obliques to the right the moment it is passed by the croup of the 
rear rank horse of No. 1, and places himself in column behind the 
first file. The guide of the right, takes his place in rear of the 
chief of the first platoon. 

Each rank of twos executes the same movement in succession, 
files Nos. 1 and 2, breaking as soon as files Nos. 2 and 4, who pre- 
cede them, have commenced obliquing in order to enter the column. 

Files 1 and 3, which break to the front, regulate their gait so as 
to have their distances. Files 2 and 4, keep their horses strait, 
so as not to constrain the movements of files 1 and 3. 

When the column is at a trot, the right files of the leading 
rank continue at that gait, all the others take the loalk at the com- 




SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 405 

maud march, and resume the trot on entering:; the column. When 
the column is at the gallop, the files which are to break take the 
trot at the command march, and resume the gallop on entering the 
column. 

The column marching left in front, the movement is executed by 
inverse means at the command : 1. By tivos (or hy file) from the Icftj 
march. If the column marches by twos, the guide is indicated to 
the right, immediately after the command march. 

To form tiuos and fours in douhling the gait. 

500. The troop marching by file right in front, to form twos^ the 
captain commands : 

1. Form twos — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. ' 

At the command form twos — trot, all the troopers prepare to trot, 
except the leading file, and take it at the command march. The 
second file obliques to the left, and comes up abreast of the first, 
and on arriving there takes the walk; all the other files continue to 
move at the trot. Files 4 and 2 execute the movement in the same 
manner, when 3 and 1, upon whom they are to form, have nearly 
arrived at their distance, and are about to pass to the walk. 

501. The troop marching in column of twos, right in front, to 
form fours, the captain commands : 

1. Form fours — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

At the command form fours — trot, all the troopers, except the 
two leading files, prepare to take the trot, and take it at the com- 
mand march. The two files following the first two, oblique to the 
left, an-d come up abreast of these two, resuming the walk as they do 
BO ; all the other files continue to march forward at the trot. Files 
1 and 2 of the next file of fours close up upon the leading file, and 
pass to the loalk, when Nos. 2 and 4 of the same file oblique to the 
left, and come up abreast of them, taking the wcdk; and so do all 
the remaining files in succession. 

When the column is at the trot, the movement is executed on the 
same principles. At the command march, all the troopers, except 



406 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the files at the head of the column, pass to tlie gallop, and resume 
the trot when the formation is executed. 

The column marching left in front, the movement is executed by 
inverse means. 

To hreah hy twos and hy file in doubling the gait. 

502. The troop marching in column hy fours, the captain com- 
mands : 

1. By tivos — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide Left. 

At the command hy twos — trot, files 1 and 2 of the leading rank 
of fours prepare to trot. At the command march, they commence 
the trot; all the other files continue to march at the walk; files 3 
and 4 'take the trot in succession and oblique to the right, in order 
to place themselves in column behind files 1 and 2. 

The movement being terminated the captain orders the walTi. 

503. The troop marching in column of twos, right in front, to 
break by file the captain commands : 

1. By file — trot. 2. March. 

At the command hy file — trot, the right file of the leading rank 
of twos prepares to trot. At the command march, it commences the 
trot, all the other files continue at the walk; files 2 and 4 assume 
the trot in succession and oblique to the right, in order to place 
themselves behind files 1 and 3 in the column. 

When the column is at the trot, to break in doubling the gait, 
the captain commands : 1. By twos (or hy file^ — gallop. 2. March. 

504. The column marching left in front, the movement is exe- 
cuted by inverse means, at the commands : 1. By twos (or hy file) 
from the left. 2. March. If the column is to march by twos, the 
guide is indicated to the right, immediately after the command 
m,arch. 

SABRE EXERCISE. 

505. The captain causes the sabre exercise to be executed at a 
halt ; for this purpose he opens the ranks, and commands : 



I 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 407 

1. By the left (or riglit) open files. 2. March. 3. Rijht (or 
left) — Dress. 4. Front. 

At the command march, the right trooper of each rank moves 
forward six paces; the one on the left of each rank turns to the left, 
and moves forward; he is followed by all the other troopers of his 
rank, who execute the same movement as soon as they have the 
necessary space to put themselves in file at their proper distances. 
The second trooper from the right of each rank, after having 
marched three paces, turns and dresses to the right ; each of the 
other troopers look occasionally to the rear, and perform the same 
movement in succession when at three paces from the one who fol- 
lows him, and dresses upon those already formed ; the troopers of 
the rear rank place themselves exactly behind their file-leaders. 

After the command march, the captain moves to the right of the 
front rank, and when the second trooper from the right has turned 
to the front, he commands, right — dress. After having rectified 
the alignment and the distances in the two ranks, he commands, 
front. 

506. When the captain wishes to re-form the troop, he com- 
mands : 

1. To the right (or left) — close files. 2. March. 

At the command march, the right trooper of each rank moves 
forward six paces ) all the other troopers execute a turn to the right, 
and move forward. 

Each trooper, on arriving within two paces of the place he is to 
occupy in line, turns to the left, and places himself on the left of 
tJie troopers already formed, and dresses to the right. The captain 
closes the ranks as soon as they are formed. 

Direct march of the troop in line. 

507. The most important point in the direct march being to keep 
the horses straight in the ranks, it is indispensable that the trooper 
should preserve the head direct. 

To keep themselves aligned, the troopers should feel lightly the 
boot of the man on the side of the guide, and march at an equal 



408 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

gait. They should yield to all pressure coming from the side of the 
guide, and resist that coming from the opposite side. 

The guide should always march at a free and steady gait, and 
change it with steadiness in order to avoid irregularity in the ranks. 
If the troopers are in front or in rear of the alignment, too near or 
too ffir from the man on the side of the guide, they move from or 
approach him gradually. When the guide feels himself thrown out 
of his direction, he extends his arm to the front to indicate that 
there is too much pressure towards him. When the troopers carry 
the hand towards the opposite side, give a glance to the guide, and 
straighten their horses as soon as the guide is relieved. 

The guide should be alternately to the right and to the left, that 
the troopers may acquire the habit of dressing equally well tow^ards 
either direction. 

608. To march the troop forward, the captain commands : 

1. Troop forte aid. 2. Guide right (oy left). 3. March. 

At the command march, all the troopers move straight forward, 
at the same gait with the men on the side of the guide. 

The troopers march straight forward, feeling the boot lightly on 
the side towards the guide. 

To halt the troop, the captain commands : 

1. Troop. 2. Halt. 3. Right (ox left) — D^m^. 4. Front. 

At the command hcdt, the troopers stop. 

At the command right — dress, they align themselves, and at the 
command front, turn the head to the front. 

After the troop has been exercised sufficiently in the direct 
march, at the loalh, it will be practised at the trot, and afterwards 
at the gallop; when marching at a gallop, the troop should habitu- 
ally pass to the trot, and the walk, before being halted ; but when the 
troopers are masters of their horses, it may be halted from the gallop. 

Countermarch. 

509. The troop having arrived at the extremity of the ground, 
m order to change the direction, the captain commands : 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP 



409 



1. Countermarch 



hy the right flanh. 
3. March. 



2. By file to the right. 




(Fig. 121.) At the command countermarch hy the right flarJt^ 
the chiefs of platoon turn to the right, the 
chief of the first platoon placing himself -^^^ ^'^^* 
in front of his first file j the file-closers turn 
to the left, and pass to the left of the troop, 
placing themselves abreast of the rear rank. 

The guide of the right places himself 
promptly behind the guide of the left, 
facing to the rear, the croup of his horse at 
six paces from the rear rank. 

At the command march, the trooper on 
the right of each rank turns to the right, 
the rear rank man joining the front rank 
man ; they then wheel together to the right, 
the latter lengthening his gait a little; they pass very near the 
croup of the horses of the rear rank, and are followed by the other 
troopers, who execute the same movement in succession, taking care 
to pass over the same ground. 

When the first file is two paces from the right guide, who indi- 
cates the place where it is to form, the captain commands : 

1. Front. 2. Halt. 8. Right — J)ke^^. 4. Front. 

The file-closers follow the movement, and resume their places as 
they arrive at them. 

After having commanded march, the captain moves rapidly to 
the flank by which the movement is executed, in order to direct the 
head of the column, and to re-form the troop to the rear upon a line 
parallel to the one it at first occupied. 

The troop being aligned, the captain commands, front. At this 
command, the chiefs of platoon face to the front, by a turn to the left. 

The countermarch should generally be executed at the trot. For 
this purpose, after the second command, the captain indicates the gait. 

This movement is executed by the left flank by inverse means. 
35 



410 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA, 



The troop being in line, to form it in column with distance. 
510. The captain commands : 

1. Platoons right wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
(Fig. 122.) 



Fi^ 122. 




At tlie first commandj the left file of each platoon 
prepares to step ofi" promptly, and 
1^ the pivot to turn upon its own 

ground. 

x\t the command march, each 
platoon executes its wheel to the 
right, following the principles of 
the wheel on a fixed pivot, the 
marching flanks taking care to step 
ofi" and wheel together. 

At the command halt, the march- 
ing flanks and all the troopers halt 
at the same instant, those of the rear rank resuming their places 
behind their file-leaders. 

The captain commands halt, when the platoons have nearly com- 
pleted the wheels. 

The chiefs of platoon, without leaving their platoons, observe 
that the movement is correctly executed. 

During the movement, the guide of the left passes as file-closer 
behind the second file from the left of the second platoon. 

To march in column with distance. 

511. In this order of column, the guides should preserve between 
them a distance equal to the front of their platoons, and regulate 
their gait upon that of the preceding guide. 

The chiefs of platoon are responsible for the preservation of the 
distance, which should be half of the front of the platoon, assuming 
it to contain twelve files, measured from the croup of the horses of 
the rear rank of the leading platoon, to the head of the horses of 
the front rank of the rear platoon. 

The troop being in open column, right in front, the captain com- 
mands: 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 411 

1. Column forward. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

At tte command march, botli platoons put themselves in motion 
at the same time. 

Before the column commences the march, the captain gives the 
guide of the first platoon a point of direction. 

Changes of direction. 

512 In the open column, the changes of direction are executed 
bj" successive wheels on a movable pivot, so that the march of the 
column may not be retarded. The arc of the circle described by 
the pivots should hQ five paces. 

The column being in march, to change the direction, the captain 
commands : 

Head of column to the left or half-left (or to the right or half-right^. 

(Fig. 123.) At this command, the chief 
of the first platoon commands: 1. Left' — 
Turn; 2. Forward; which is executed 
on the principles of the wheel upon a mov- 
able pivot. 

The chief of the second platoon gives the 
same commands in time for his platoon to 
turn upon the same ground. 

In this change of direction while marching, the guide of the 
right, at the command head of column to the left, moves rapidly to 
the side of the pivot, and places himself so that the head of his 
horse will mark the centre point of the arc described by the pivot. 

Both platoons commence their wheel at two and a half paces be- 
fore arriving abreast of the head of the horse of the guide of the 
right, so as to prevent the column from being thrown out. The 
guide resumes his place when the second platoon has completed its 
wheel. 

Individual oblique march. 
513. The troop marching in column, with distance, right in front, 





412 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

to cause it to gain ground towards one of the flanks, without 
changing the front of the columns, the captain commands : 

1. Left (or righf) ohlique. 2. March. 

(Fig. 124.) At the command march, the troopers all execute, at 
the same time, a quarter turn to the right, so that the head of each 

horse may be opposite the 
extremity of the neck of the 
horse on his right, and that 
the right knee of each 
trooper may be in rear of 
Fiy 124. i 0IMMMSilli the left knee of the trooper 

on his right. This first 
movement being executed, 
the troopers move forward 
in the new direction, regu- 
lating themselves upon the 
guide. 

The guide of the second 
platoon pays attention to 
march on the same line, to 
preserve his distance, and 
to keep in a direction exactly 
parallel to that of the guide 
of the first platoon. 

To resume the primitive 
direction, the captain com- 
mands : 

Forward. 

At this command the troopers straiten their horses, and move 
forward, regulating themselves upon the guide. 

In the oblique march, the guide is always on the obliquing side, 
without being indicated ; and after the command forward, the guide 
returns, without indication, to the side on which it was before the 
oblique. 




SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 413 

To hreoJi, hy fours , hy twos, and hy file; to form twos, fours, and 
platoons at the same gait. 

514. The troop marching in column with distance, right in front, 
to break by fours at the same gait, the captain commands : 

1. By fours. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

At the command hy fours, repeated by the chief of the first pla- 
toon, this officer places himself in front of the first four files on the 
right; the right guide places himself on his right. 

At the command march, which is also repeated by the chief of 
the platoon, this platoon breaks by fours as prescribed No. 485, and 
the chief of the second platoon commands halt. 

The chief of the second platoon commands by fours, in sufficient 
time to command march, the moment the last four files of the first 
platoon commence the oblique movement in order to enter the 
column. 

515. The troop marching in column by fours, right in front, to 
break by twos, at the same gait, the captain commands : 

1. By twos. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

The chiefs of platoon conform to what is prescribed in order to 
break by fours, and give the commands, halt ; and then, 1. By 
twos. 2. March; so as to cause no confusion in the column. 

516. The troop marching in column by twos, right in front, to 
break by file at the same gait, the captain commands : 

1. By file. 2. March. 

Which is executed as prescribed for breaking by twos, the guide 
of the right placing himself behind the chief of the first platoon. 

517. The troop, marching in column with distance, at the trot, right 
m front, to break by fours, at the same gait, the captain commands . 

1. By fours. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 
At the first command, repeated by the chief of the first platoon, 



414 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

this officer and tlie guide of tlie right, place themselves as prescribed 
No. 514, and the chief of the second platoon commands, walk. 

At the command march, repeated by both the chiefs of platoon, 
the first platoon breaks by fours, as prescribed No. 514, and the 
second platoon takes the walk. 

The chief of the second platoon commands, hi/ fours — trot, in 
sufficient time to command march, when the last four files of the 
first platoon commence the oblique movement in order to enter the 
column. 

The same principles are applicable to breaking by twos, and by 
file. 

When the column is at the gallop, these movements are executed 
on the principles just prescribed, the whole column except the first 
four files, passing to the trot, and resuming the gallop, as the filef 
break in order to enter the column. 

518. The troop marching in column by file, right in front, to form 
twos at the same gait, the captain commands : 

1. Form twos, 2. March. 

At the commands form ticos, and march, repeated by the chief 
of the first platoon, this platoon executes the movement as pre- 
scribed No. 500 ; the guide of the right moves to the right of the 
chief of the first platoon, who commands, halt, after having marched 
ten paces. The other platoon continues to march by file, and exe- 
cutes the movement at the command of its chief, who does not com- 
mand march until the first files of his platoon has arrived at its 
proper distance. 

519. The troop marching in column by twos, right in front, to 
form fours, at the same gait, the captain commands : 

1. Formfonrs. 2. March. 

Which is executed as is prescribed for forming twos. 

520. The troop marching in column of fours, right in front, to 
form platoons at the same gait, the captain commands : 

1, Form platoons. 2. March. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 415 

At the first command^ the chief of the first platoon commands, 
form, platoon. 

At the command march, repeated by the chief of the first platoon, 
the guide of the right places himself on the right of this platoon, 
which forms as \\i front into line, No. 488 ; the chief of the platoon 
commands lialt, after having marched twenty paces. 

The other platoon continues to march in column by fours, and 
forms at the command: 1. Form platoon — March; given by its 
chief in sufficient time to command halt, when the first four files of 
the platoon arrives at six paces from the platoon which precedes. 

521. When the column is at the trot, the same principles are con- 
formed to, except that instead of halting, the first two or four files 
of the first platoon pass to the walk, at the command march given 
by their chief. The second platoon continues to march at the trot, 
and execute the movement at the same gait, the first two or four 
files of the platoon passing also to the walk, at the command march, 
givcD by the chief of the platoon when they arrive at their proper 
distances. 

When the column is at the gallop, to form twos, fours, etc., the 
same principles are observed, the first two or four files of each 
platoon passing to the trot at the command march, given by their 
chief. 

When these formations are executed at the trot, and at the gallop, 
the guide is announced by the captain as soon as the first files have 
doubled, or the first platoon is formed ; in the last case only, each 
chief of platoon repeats the command of the guide as soon as his 
platoon is formed. 

To brealc hy fours, hy twos, and hy file ; to form twos, fours, and 
platoons, in douhling the gait. 

522. The trooper marching in column with distance, right in 
front, to break by fours, in doubling the gait, the captain commands : 

1. By fours — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

At the first command, repeated by the chief of the first platoon, 



416 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

tliis officer^ and tlie guide of the right, place themselves as pre- 
scribed, No. 514. 

At the command march, repeated by the chief of the first platoon, 
this platoon breaks by fours, as prescribed. No. 514. 

The other platoon continues to march at the walk ; its chief com- 
mands, 1)7/ fours — trot, in sufficient time to command march, the 
moment the last four files of the first platoon commence the oblique 
movement in order to enter the column. 

These principles are applicable to breaking by twos and by file. 

When the column is at the trot, to break at the gallop, the same 
principles are observed at the commands : 

1. By fours — gallop. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

523. The troop marching in column by files, to form twos in 
doubling the gait, the captain commands : 

1. Form twos — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

At the commands form twos — trot, and march, repeated by the 
chief of the first platoon, this platoon executes its movement as pre- 
scribed, No. 500, and the guide of the right moves to the right of 
the chief of the first platoon. 

At the first command, the chief of the second platoon commands, 
trot. At the command march, repeated by him, the second platoon 
takes the trot. He commands, form twos, in sufficient time to 
command march, the moment the first file of the platoon is nearly 
at its proper distance; the first file then passes to the loalJc. 

524. The troop marching in column of twos, to form fours, in 
doubling the gait, the captain commands : 

1. Form fours — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

"Which is executed as prescribed for forming twos. 

525. The troop marching in column by fours, to form platoon^ in 
doubling the gait, the captain commands : 

1. Form platoons — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 417 

At the first commandj the chief of the first platoon commands. 
form 'platoon — trot. 

The chief of the second platoon commands trot. 

At the command march, repeated by these officers, the first pla- 
toon forms as prescribed, No. 520, and the guide of the right places 
himself on the riglit of this platoon. The second platoon takes the 
trot. The chief of this platoon gives the command, form twos, in 
sufficient time to command march, the moment the first file of his 
platoon is nearly at its proper distance ; the first file then passes to 
the walk. 

526. The troop marching in column by twos to form fours, in 
doubling the gait, the captain commands : 

1. Form fours — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

Which is executed as prescribed for forming twos. 

527. The troop marching in column by fours, to form platoons, in 
doubling the gait, the captain commands : 

1. Form platoons — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

At the first command, the chief of the first platoon commands, 
form platoon — trot. 

The chief of the second platoon commands trot. At the com- 
mand march, repeated by these officers, the first platoon forms as 
prescribed, No. 520, and the guide of the right places himself on 
the right of this platoon. 

The second platoon takes the trot, and forms at the command form 
platoon, given by its chief in sufficient time to command march, 
when the first four files arrive at their proper distance from the first 
platoon ; then these four files take the wcdk. 

The captain commands guide left when the first platoon is formed, 
and gives a point of direction. 

The chief of the second platoon commands the guide as soon as 
his platoon is formed. 

When the column is at the trot, these formations are executed at 
the gallop, following the same principles, at the commands : 1. Form 
twos, QY form four, ^, or form platoons — gallop). 2. March. 

2b 



418 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 



The troop marching in column with distance, to face it in the opposite 
direction, and to face it to the front again. 

528. The troop marcliing in open column, riglit in front, the 
captain commands : 

1. Platoons left — ahout wheel. 2. MARCH. 



(Fig. 125.) 



At the first command, the trooper on the left of 
each platoon, who becomes the 
pivot, prepares to halt without, how- 



Fig^ 125. 




t E3>./> 



ever, slackening his pace. 

At the command march, the 
pivots halt, and the marching flanks 
wheel at the gait in which the 
column was marching, regulating 
themselves upon the outer flank of 
the platoon at the head of the 
column, so as to complete the first 
half of the movement at the same 
instant. 

The movement being nearly fin- 
ished, the captain commands : 



1. Foriuard. 2. Guide right. 

During this movement, the guide of the left places himself on 
the left of the second platoon; the guide of the right takes his 
place as file-closer in rear of the second file from the right of the 
first platoon, and the other file-closers pass to the side opposite the 
guide. 

To cause the troop to resume its primitive direction, the captain 
commands: 1. Platoons right — about tuheel. 2. March. 3. For- 
ward. 4. Guide left. 

529 The column being on the march, to halt it, the captain 

commands : 

1. Column. 2. Halt. 

2Vt the first command, both platoons prepare to halt, and at the 
command halt, halt at the same time. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 419 



To form line to the left. 



530. Tlie troop being in column with distance, right in front, to 
form it in line on its left flank, the captain commands : 

1. Left into line, -wJieel 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. Ri^ht — Dress. 

5. Front. 

At the first command, the guide of the right moves upon the 
prolongation of the guides of the column, at the distance of the 
front of a platoon, facing the side towards which the line will be 
formed. 

At the command march, the troop wheels into line, the trooper 
on the left wing of each platoon serving as pivot, and turning upon 
his own ground. 

The captain commands halt the moment the marching flanks have 
nearly completed their movement, and then right dress. 

At this command, both platoons align themselves. 

The troop being aligned, the captain commands /roTi^. 

During the wheel, the guide of the left resumes his place in lino. 

531. The formation of the troop into a column with distancCj 
left in front ; the march of this column ; the changes of direction 
in a column; left in front; etc. etc., are executed upon the same 
principles as a column right in front, but by inverse means. 

To form line to the right hy inversion. 

532. The troop marching in open column, right in front, to form 
it in line upon its right flank by inversion, the captain changes the 
guide ; for this purpose, he commands : 

Gidde right. 

The captain passes by the head of the column to the side of the 
new guides, rectifies their direction, then halts the column, and 
commands : 



420 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. By inversion right into line wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 
4. Left — Dress. 5. Front. 

Which is executed as prescribed for wheeling into line to the 
left, but by inverse means. 

To put the troop in column again, right in front, the captain 
commands : 1. Platoons left wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt (or 
Forwards. 4. Guide left. 

To form on right into line. 

533. The troop marching in column with distance, right in front, 
to form it in line on the prolongation and in advance of its right 
flank, the captain commands : 

1. On right into line. 2. March. 3. Guide — Right. 4. Front. 

(Fig. 126.) At the first command the chief of the first platoon 
commands right, and at the command march, he commands turn : 

i 



c(S 




Fif 126. 



the platoon turns to the right and moves forward at the command 
forward; when it has marched thirty paces, its chief commanda 
halt, and then right — d'ress. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 421 

The second platoon continues to marcli forward, without approach- 
ing the Hne ; as soon as it arrives abreast of the fourth file from the 
left of the first platoon, its chief commands: 1. Riglit — Turn. 
2. Forward. The platoon then directs itself towards the place it 
is to occupy in line, and on arriving abreast of the file-closers, iis 
chief commands halt, and then left — dress. 

When the troop is aligned, the captain commands, front. 

To form on left into line hy inversion. 

534. The troop marching in column with distance, right in front, 
to form it in line upon the prolongation and in advance of its left 
flank, the captain commands : 

1. By inversion on left into line. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 4, 

Front. 

At the first command, the chief of the first platoon commands, 
left. 

At the command march, he commands, turn ; the platoon turns 
to the left, and moves forward at the command forward ; when it 
has marched thirty paces its chief commands halt, and then left 
— dress. 

The second platoon continues to march forward, without approach- 
ing the line ; when it arrives abreast of the fourth file from the 
right of the first platoon, its chief commands : 1. Left — Turn; 2. 
Forward ; this platoon directs itself towards the place it is to occupy 
in line, and on arriving abreast of the file-cIoscrs, its chief com- 
mands halt, and then left — dress. 

To form front into line. 

535. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, to 
form it in line upon the head of the column, the captain commands : 

1. Front into line. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 4. Front. 

(Fig. 127.) At the first command, the chief of the first platoon 
commands, platoon forward, and the chief of the second com- 
mands platoon left half loheel. 
36 



422 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 



At the command march, repeated by these officers, the first pla- 
toon moves forward; its chief repeats the indication of the guide, 



A.A^-A„ 


•V^T. iS 


II ^ 




A>Ji^,^ 


/\/>^.-^,Jis/K'hJ!s/> . f„ 'Aw**,/,v!v5vi>/;j(vNN 





CO 




Fi^ 127. 




and when it has marched thirty paces, he commands : 1. Halt. 
2. Right — Dress. 

The chief of the second platoon, when the left half loheel is exe- 
cuted, commands: 1. Forward. 2. Guide right; and marches 
straight forward. When the right of his platoon arrives opposite the 
left of the first platoon, he commands : 1. Right half wheel. 2. For- 
ward : and when he arrives abreast of the file-closer : 1. Halt. 
2. Right — Dress. 

The troop being aligned, the captain commands, front. 

To form line faced to the rear, on the rear of the column. 

636. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, to 
form line faced to the rear, the captain commands : 

1. Platoons left ahoitt icheel. 2. MARCH. 3. Front into line. 
4. March. 5. Guide left. 6. Front. 

(Fig. 128.) At the second command, each platoon executes its 
wheel to the left about. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 



423 



At the fourth command^ the chief of the second platoon, now in 
front, when its wheel is nearly completed, commands forward^ guide 
left; and when it has marched thirty paces: 1. Halt. 2. Left — 
IDress, 

I The chief of the second platoon, on completing three-fourths of 
his wheel, commands : 1, Forward. 2. Guide left, and directs it 
towards the place it is to occupy in line, conforming in other respects 
to what is prescribed fox front into line, when the column is left in front. 

To form line faced to the rear on the head of the column. 

537. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, to 
form line faced to the rear upon the head of the column, the cap- 
tain commands : 

1. By inversion front into line. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 



(Fig. 129). At the 
first command, the chief 
of the first platoon com- 
mands, platoon forward ; 
and the chief of the 
second, platoon right 
lia If -wheel. 

At the command 
march, repeated by these 
ofiicers, the movement is 
executed as prescribed for 
front into line, but by in- 
verse means. 

The captain without 
rectifying the alignment, 
commands : 



1. Platoon left-ahout wheel 2. March. 3. Halt. 4:. Eiglu — 
Dress. 5. Front. 

Movements lij fours, the troop heing in column loitli distance. 
538. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, to 




424 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

cause it to gain ground towards its left flank, tlie captain com- 
mands : 

1. By fours left iclieel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide right. 

(Fig. 130.) At the command march, eacli rank of fours executes 

its wheel to the left, according to the principles of the wheel on a 

xed pivot ; Nos. 4 turn upon themselves, sustaining with the left 






A/" 

n 



mi 



K0 



vwvvvvnV 



a- II^^L 



Vyv\A/VVV V V 



fe( 



15 



in 



,U?2l ) 



^f 



a 



1 
a. 






cfi 









/vd 



V "t- W'-WWvVv 



U-'L!.--i|U-1 






jwi I I i 



A W\AAA^ 7SA Aa I 



leg the haunches of their horses, in order not to constrain the 
movement of the rank immediately behind them ; all the troopers' 
reo'ulate themselves towards the marchino- flanks. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 425 

539. To take a direction parallel to the first, and return to column 
with distance, the captain commands : 

1. B// fours riglit wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. Halt. 

Which is executed on the same principles, but by inverse means. 
If instead of halting, the captain wishes the column to march 
forward, he commands : 1. Forward. 2. Guide left. 

540. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, it 
is caused to gain ground towards its right fiank by the commands : 
1. B)/ fours riylbt ivlieel. 2. Marcpi. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide 
left ; and lo resume the primitive direction at the commands : 1 . Bi/ 
fours left wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt (or Forward). 4. Guide 
left. 

541. The troop being in column with distance, right in front, to 
cause i'/ to march to the rear the captain commands : 

1. By fours left about loheel. 2. MARCH. 3. FORWARD. 4. Guide 

right. 

(Fig. 131.) At the command march, the movement is executed 
in each rank by fours, so as to throw the rear rank before the front 
rank, and the ranks of fours are inverted throughout the column. 

If, instead of moving forward after the loheel to the left about by 
fours, the captain wishes to halt the column, he commands, halt. 

To return to the primitive direction, the captain commands : 

1. By fours right about wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 

Which is executed as just prescribed, but by inverse means. 
If the captain wishes the column to march forward, he com- 
mands : 1. Forward. 2. Guide left. 

542. In all the movements to the left and to the right by fours, 
the chiefs of platoon move up abreast of the first rank of their pla- 
toons, on the side of the guide. 

The captain, the file-closers, and the guides of the right and left, 
preserve their places after the ivheel to the left or right by fours is 
completed, facing in the new direction. 

In the wheel to the left or right about by fours, the chiefs of pla- 
36* 



426 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 

toon march behind tlie centre of their platoons^ and the file-closers 
in front. The guide of the right is on the left of his platoon, and 
the guide of the left in front of his. 

WHEELINGS. 

543. During the wheel, the chiefs of platoon keep at the centre 
of their platoons, and correctly aligned, keeping their horses upon 
the arc of a circle, more or less great, in proportion to their dis- 
tance from the pivot. The files on the flanks of platoons close upon 
each other, all observing the progression of the marching flank, and 
keeping upon the arcs they should describe. 

To wheel on a fixed pivot. 

544. The troop is exercised in wheeling on a fixed pivot, first ai 
the walk, then at the trot; also at the gallop. 

The troop being halted and correctly aligned, the captain com- 
mands : 

1. Troop in circle to the right. 2. March. 

Which is executed on the principles prescribed, Nos. 434 and 435. 
To halt the troop during the wheel, the captain commands : 

1. Troop. 2. Halt. 3. Left — Dress. 4. Front. 

At the first command, the troopers of the rear rank straighten 
their horses, and resume their places behind their file-leaders. 

At the second command, all the troopers halt. 

At the third command, the troop dresses to the left. 

The troop being aligned, the captain commands front. 

If instead of halting, the captain wishes to resume the direct 
march, he commands : 



1. Forward. 2. Guide left. 

At the first command, the troopers of the rear rank straighten 
their horses, and place themselves behind their file-leaders, and the 
whole troop moves forward at the gait in which it was marching 
before the wheel. 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 427 

645. The troop wheeling to the right, at the loalk, or at the trot, 
the captain commands : 

1. Troop in circle left icheel. 2. MARCH. 

Which is executed as prescribed Nos. 434 and 435. 

546. The troop being halted the captain commands : 

r right (or Ic/t wheel). "\ 

1. Troop. < right (iho lit (oYle/t-aboutyicheel. I 2. March. 

\. riy] it-half (oT left-half) tvheel. J 

^. Troop. 4. Halt. b. Left {oy right) ~J)r^^^. Q. Front. 

To exercise the troop while marching at the wheels on a fixed 
pivot, the captain commands : 

f right (or left) loheel. -\ 

1. Troop. } right-about (or left about) wheel. I 2. MARCH. 
(. right half (or left half) loheel. ) 
8. Forward. 4. Guide left (or guide right.) 

To wheel on a movable pivot. 

547. The troop marching in line, to change direction to the 
right, the captain commands : 

1. Right — Turn. 2. Forward. 

Which is executed as prescribed. No. 438, the pivot describing 
an arc of a circle of fifteen paces. 

llovements by fours. 

548. The troop being in line, to cause it to gain ground towards 
its right flank, the captain commands : 

I. By fours right-wheel. 2. BIarch. 3. Forward. 4. Guide left 

Which is executed as prescribed. No. 540. The chiefs of platooi 
march on the side of the guide, at one pace from, and abreast of the 
leading files of their platoon. 

The guide of the right marches in front of the column, at one 
pace from the leading rank of eight, the guide of the left behind 
the last rank of eight of the second platoon. 



428 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS ANDMILITIA. 

To |)ut the troop in line again^, tiie captain commands : 

1. Bij fours left iflieeL 2. Marcii. 3. Halt. A:. Right — Dress. 

5. Front. 

Wliicli is executed as prescribed^ No. 540j tlie guides resuming 
tlieir places in line. 

The troop marching in line, to hreak it hy platoons, to the right, 
and to form it again info line. 

549. The troop marching in line, to cause it to gain ground to- 
wards its right flankj the captain commands : 

1. Platoons right loheel. 2. j^Iarch. 3, FORWARD. 4. 

Guide — Left. 

"Which is executed as prescribed, No. 510, the pivots halting 
short, and the left file of each platoon stepping out promptly, so as 
to arrive together in column. 

To put the troop in line again, the captain commands : 

1. Platoons left wheel 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. 
Guide — Right. 

The marching flanks regulate their movements so as to arrive 
together in line. 

The troop marching in line to hreah it to the front hi/ platoons, and 

to reform it. 

550. The captain commands : 

1. JBi/ platoon to the front. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

(Fig. 132.) At the command march, the first platoon continues 
to march forvsrard ; its chief repeats the command guide left. At 
the first command, the chief of the second platoon commands : 
platoon right half-ioheel, which is commenced at the command 
march ; when it is executed, the chief of the platoon commands : 
1. Forward. 2. Guide left; and marches it straight forward. 
When the left of his platoon arrives in the direction of the first 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 



429 



I'llatooii; lie commands^ 1. Left half wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. For- 
ward; in order to take his position in column. 

The movement is executed in the 
same manner at the trot, and at the 
gallojy. 

551. The troop marching in col- 
umn with distance, right in front, 
to form it at the same gait, the 
caiDtain commands : 




1. Form troop. 2. MARCH. 3. 
Guide right. 

Which is executed in the same 
manner £ls front' into line, No. 535, 
except that as the troop is on the 
march the chief of the first platoon 
does not command jpJatooii for- 
ward, or inarch, but repeats the command for the guide. 

The troop marching at the trot, this mx)vement is executed on the 
same principles, except that the chief of the first platoon commands : 

1. Walk. 2. March; the guide of the right moving up on ihQ 
line with the chiefs of platoon, and the chief of the second platoon 
commands; 1. Walk. 2. March; on arriving in line. When the 
column is at the gallop, the platoons take the trot in succession. 

The troop marching in line it is broken by the left by inverse 
means, at the commands: 1. Bi/ the left — hy platoons to the front. 

2. March. 3. Guide right. 

The same movement may be performed by doubling the gait, at 
the commands: 1. By platoons, to the front — trot. 2. March. 3. 
Guide hft. At the first command, the chief of the first platoon 
commands, trot; the chief of the second commands, platoon right 
half-wheel-^ trot. 

At the command march, the movement is executed as before. 

The line may be re-formed at the commands: 1. Form troop — 
trot. 2. March. 3. Gidde right. At the first command, the chief 
of the second platoon commands, platoon left half wheel— trot. 



430 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Tlic first platoon continues to marcli at a walk, and its chief repeats 
tlie command for the guide. When the second platoon arrives in 
line^ its chief commands : 1. Walk. 2. March. 

THE CHARGE. 

552. The troop is exercised at the charge : 1. In line. 2. In 
column. 3. As foragers. 

The charge in line, executed by the troop when in line ; it should 
be as short as possible^ so as arrive in good order^ and without 
fatiguing the horses. 

The charge in column is exercised by the troop when broken into 
column of platoons with distance. 

To execute the charge as foragers, all the troopers of the troop 
disperse, and direct themselves each upon the point he wishes to 
attack, observing not to lose sight of their officers, who charge with 
them. 

553. The troop being in line, the captain orders the sabres to be 
drawn, and the platoons to charge in succession. . 

Ij'or this purpose the captain advances 240 paces to the front, 
taking a trumpeter with him; and when he wishes the movement 
to commence, he causes a signal to be given. 

The first platoon then moves forward at the commands : 1. Pla- 
toon forward. 2. Guide right (or lef). 3. March; by its chief. 
It passes in succession from the walk to the trot, from the trot to 
the gallop, and from the gallop to the charge. 

When the platoon has moved some sixty paces at the charge, the 
chief of platoon commands : 1. Attention. 2. Platoon. 3. Halt. 
4, Eight — Dress. 5. Front. 

At the command attention, the troopers carry the sabre to the 
shoulder. At the command j^^^^oon, they take the trot. At the 
command halt, they stop. At the command right — dress, they 
align themselves to the right. At the command front, turn the 
head to the front. 

The second platoon follows when the first has halted. 

554. To execute the charge by the troop, the cajatain places him* 
pelf in front of the centre of his troop, and commands : 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 4ol 

1. Troop foricard. 2. Guide right (pv left), f. MARCH. 
When the troop has marched twenty paces, he commands : 

1. Trot. 2. March. 
At sixty paces fiirther, he commands : 

1. Gallop. 2. March. 
At eighty paces farther, he commands : 
Charge. 

At this command, repeated by the chiefs of platoons, the troopers 
of both ranks take the position of raise — sahre. They give hand 
and lengthen the gallop, without losing control of their horses or 
disuniting. 

When the troop has passed over sixty paces to the charge, the 
captain commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Troop. 3. Halt. 4. Riglit — Dress. 5. Front. 

At the command attention^ repeated by the chiefs of platoon, the 
troopers prepare to slacken the pace, and carry the sabre to the 
shoulder. 

At the comm^and troop, the chiefs of platoon command platoon^ 
and the troopers pass to the trot. 

At the command halt, repeated by the chiefs of platoon, the 
troopers halt. 

At the command right — dress, they align themselves to the right. 

The troop being aligned, the captain commands /rojii^. 

When the troop executes the charge correctly, instead of halting 
■when the charge is finished, the captain commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Trot. 3. March. 

555. At these commands, repeated by the chiefs of platoon, the 
troop passes to the trot, and he commands : 

1. First {p^ second) platoon — as foragers. 2. March. 

At these commands, repeated by the chief of the platooon desig- 



432 MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

uated, the platoon moves forward at tlie gaUoj)^ and disperses as 
foragers. A trumpeter follows the chief of the platoon. 

The other platoon follows at a trot ; when it has passed over 150 
paces, the captain causes the rally to be sounded. At this signal, 
repeated by the trumpeter of the platoon dispersed as foragers, the 
latter rally upon the other platoon by wheeling to tlie left ahout, and 
resuming their places in rank by the shortest line, the troopers enter- 
ing the ranks by the rear. When three-fourths of the platoon have 
rallied and are in line, the captain commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Gallop. 3. March. 4. Charge. 

The troop again executes the charge in line; the troopers who 
have not been able to rally, charge upon the flanks of the troop. 

556. The troop marching in column with distance, at the trot, 
the captain commands : 

1. To the charge. 2. March. 

At the first command, the chief of the first platoon commands 
gallop. 

At the command march, repeated by the chief of the first pla- 
toon, this platoon commences the gallop. ' 

The other platoon follows at a trot, taking the gallop, when the 
first platoon has gotten 50 paces in front of it. 

When the first platoon has passed over 80 paces at the gallop, 
its chief commands charge. At this command the platoon executes 
the charge ; and when it has passed over 60 paces, its chief causes 
it to pass to the trot, by the commands: 1. Attention. 2. Trot. 
3, March. 

The other platoon pays attention to the movements of the first, so 
as to change the gait in time, and to resume the ordinary distance ; 
the captain halts the column when he thinks proper. These 
charges are executed, each platoon in turn taking the head of the 
column. 

557. The troop marching in column with distance, at the trot, 
the captain commands : 



SCHOOL OF THE TROOP. 433 

1. First platoon as foragers. 2. March. 

At the command marcJi, repeated by the chief of the first platoon, 
this platoon disperses as foragers. The troop continues to march at 
the trot, and when it has passed over 100 or 150 paces, the captain 
causes the rally to be sounded. 

At this signal, the platoon rallies and re-forms in the rear of the 
second. 

RALLYING. 

558. To give the troopers the habit of rallying promptly, after 
having been dispersed as foragers, the captain places the troop at 
the extremity of the drill-ground ; and after giving notice to the 
files on the flanks of platoons, the file-closers and the trumpeters, to 
remain upon the line with him, he causes the disperse to be sounded. 
At this signal, the troopers disperse and charge as foragers ; when 
they are at the distance of 100 or 200 paces, the captain causes the 
rall^ to be sounded. 

The captain causes the troopers to disperse without confusion, 
and in rallying, see that they direct themselves to the right and left 
of the troop, in order to unmask the front of the troop, and to re- 
form in passing to the rear. 

When the troopers rally without confusion, this movement is re- 
peated without requiring the flank files, etc., to remain on the line 
of the troop. At the signal, the troop disperses in every direction 
to the front. 

When the troop is dispersed, the captain causes the rall^ to be 
sounded. 

At this signal, the officers, the non-commissioned officers, and the 
troopers, rejoin rapidly; the officers align themselves promptly 
upon the captain, and the non-commissioned officers promptly mark 
the flanks of the platoons. 

As soon as the captain has rallied two-thirds of the troop he 
moves forward, charges again, and halts. 

These movements are first executed at the trot, and then at the 
gallop. 

37 2 c 



43 1 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Light cavalry sliould be particularly exercised in charging as 
foragers and in ralli/ing. 

SKIRMISHINa. 
559. Tlie troop being in line, tlie captain commands : 
1. First (qy second^ platoon — as sJcirmishers. 2. March. 

At the first command, the chief of the first platoon orders the 
sabres to be returned, and the arms to be loaded ; he then com- 
mands : 1. Platoon forward. 2. Guide right. 3. Trot. 

At the command march, repeated by the chief of the platoon, 
this platoon moves forward at the trot. After marching 100 paces 
to the front, the chief of the platoon commands : 1. Six files from 
right (ov left^ — as skirmishers. 2. March. 3. Guide right {ov left) . 

At the first command, the senior file-closer places himself in front 
of the files of the left who are intended to support the skirmishers, 
and at the command march, cause them to halt and draw sabre. 

At the command march, the six files of the right continue to 
move forward ', after going ten paces they disperse as skirmishers, 
extending themselves so as to cover the exposed part of a troop in 
passing beyond each of its flanks. The right trooper obliques to 
the right, the left trooper to the left. The troopers of the rear rank 
come up as soon as possible, abreast of the front rank, each one 
placing himself on the left of the file-leaders, and as soon as they 
are in line, all take the position of advance — carbine, or raise — 
pistol. They continue to march until the signal to halt. 

The chief of platoon causes the halt to be sounded when the 
skirmishers are at 100 or 150 paces from the reserve. 

The troopers keep at five paces apart, regulating themselves to- 
wards the guide during the time they act as skirmishers. 

The chief of platoon places himself in rear of the skirmishers, 
in order to superintend their moveme>its. 

When the captain wishes the skirmishers to re-enter the troop, 
he causes the rally to be sounded. At this signal, the chief of the 
platoon employed as skirmishers rallies his platoon, and then rejoins 
the troop at a gallop). 



SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 435 



ARTICLE IX. 

SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON 

560. The object of the scJwoI of the squadron is to instruct four 
platoons to execute together what has been taught to two, and to 
prepare the squadron to perform what it will be required to do when 
a part of the regiment. 

To make the formations in line better understood^ they are exe- 
cuted at first from a halt. Each movement, after having been 
correctly executed by the right, is repeated by the left. 

The troopers are made to mount and dismount by the times, but 
without explanation. 

The captain commanding requires the distance between the pla- 
toons to be preserved exactly in all the movements ; he sees that 
the troopers are not constrained, and that the rear-rank men are not 
only in the direction of their file-leaders, but that there is always 
two feet between the head of their horses and the croup of those 
.of the front rank. 

The second captain is charged with the alignment of the rear 
rank, and the rank of file-closers ; he resumes his place in line at 
the command front. 

The captain commanding moves wherever his presence is most 
required; the troopers are required to observe absolute silence, and 
all rectifications are done by signs, or in a low voice. 

A large majority of the movements are the same, and are exe- 
cuted by the same commands as those already laid down in the 
school of the troop; the only difference being that what is laid 
down as applicable to two platoons, must now be made to apply to 
four. All of the movements of the squadron are indicated in the 



4o6 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

following number, those marked in italics not having been already 
described in the school of the troop, are described farther on ; for 
all the other movements a simple reference to corresponding move- 
ments in the school of the troop will be sufficient to make them all 
perfectly intelligible. 

For the manner of forming the squadron, and the posts of the 
officers, see No. 18. 

MOVEMENTS OP THE SQUADRON. 

561. Successive alignment of platoons in the squadron. 

Alignment of the squadron. 

To open and close ranks. 

To break the squadron by fours. 

Direct march in column by fours. 

Change of direction. 

Individual oblique march. 

The squadron marching in column by fours, to form it to the 
front, to the left, or on right into line. 

To regulate the rapidity of the gaits. 

To form the squadron in one rank, and to form it in two ranks. 

The squadron being in line, to form it in column with distance. 

To march in column with distance. 

Changes of direction by successive wheels. 

Individual oblique march. 

Change of gait, being in column with distance. 

To break by fours, by twos, and by file ; to form twos, fours, and 
platoons, at the same gait. 

The squadron marching in column with distance, to face it to the 
opposite direction, and to face it again to the front. 

To halt the column. 

To form line on the left. 

To hreak hy the right to march to the left. 

To form line to the right by inversion. 

To hreak to the rear hy the right to march to the left. 

To form on right into line. 

To form on left into line, by inversion 



{ 



SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 437 

To break by platoons to the front. 

To form front into line. 

To break hy platoons to the right, and to move forward after the 
wheel. 

To form line to the front, hy inversion. 

To break by platoons to the right, head of column to the left or 
half left. 

To form line faced to the rear, on the rear of the column. 

To form line faced to the rear, by inversion, on the rear of the 
column. 

To break by platoons to the right, head of column to the nght or 
half right. 

To form line faced to the rear on the head of the column. 

To form line faced to the rear, by inversion, on the head of the 
column. 

Movements by fours, the squadron being in column with dis- 
tance. 

Direct march of the squadron in line. 

Countermarch. 

Wheelings. 

To wheel on a fixed pivot. 

To wheel on a movable pivot. 
^Individual oblique march. 

Oblique march by platoons. 

Movements by fours. 

The squadron being in line, to cause it to gain ground to the rear^ 
and to face it again to the front. 

The squadron marching in line to break by platoons to the right, 
and to form it again in line. 

The squadron marching in line, to march it to the rear by wheeling 
the platoons about. 

The squadron marching in line, to break it to the front by pla- 
toons, and to re-form it. 

The squadron marching in line to break it to the front by platoons ^ 
in doubling the gait, and to reform it. 

Passage of obstacles. 
S7^ 



438 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Charge. 

Kallying. 

Skirmishing. 

The column hy divisions. 

Successive alignment of platoons in the squadron. 

562. The squadron being in line, the captain commanding places 
the two non-commissioned officers, principal guides of the right and 
left, upon a line parallel to the front of the squadron, at thirty paces 
from the front rank, and facing each other. 

On receiving notice from the captain commanding, the chief of 
the first platoon commands : 1. Platoon forward. 2. Guide right. 
3. March. At the command march, the platoon moves forward; 
at one pace from the point which marks the new alignment, the 
chief of the platoon commands : 1. Halt. 2. Right — Dress. At 
the command halt, the chief of the platoon, and guide of the right, 
establish themselves immediately, the latter bringing the head of 
his horse against the boot of the principal guide of the right. 

The first platoon being correctly aligned, the first captain com- 
mands : 

1. By -platoon — Right — Dress. 2. Front. 

(Fig. 133.) At the first command, the chief of the second pla- 
toon commands : \. Platoon forward. 2. Guide right. 3. March. 
Having arrived abreast of the file-closers of the platoon which forms 
the base of the alignment, he commands: 1. Halt. 2. Right — ■ 
Dress ; and at the same time moves forward on the line of the chief 
of that platoon. At the command halt, the platoon stops. At the 
command right — dress^ all the troopers move forward together upon 
the alignment. 

Each chief of platoon executes the same movement, commanding 
march, when the one who precedes him has commanded halt. The 
guide of the left, at the command halt, from the chief of the fourth 
platoon, brings up the head of his horse against the boot of the 
principal guide of the left. The squadron being aligned, the first 
captain commands, front. 



SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON 



439 



This alignment being correctly executed, it is repeated, giving 
the new base of alignment a direction oblique to the front of the 

Si fit 4t s|t. li ST. 




squadron. For this purpose the chief of the first platoon, on receiv- 
ing notice from the captain-commanding, moves his platoon 24 paces 
to the front, causes it to execute a half wheel to the right at the 
commands: 1. Eight half-wheel. 2. Forward; and after march- 
ing at six paces in the new direction, he halts and aligns it. The 
first platoon being correctly aligned, the first captain commands : 

1. B2/ platoon right — Dress. 2. Front. 

(Fig. 134.) The movement is executed by the platoons in suc- 
cession: each chief of platoon moves straight forward, and com- 
mands : 1. Right-half— WreeIi. 2. Forward; in time to complete 
the wheel at the moment the right arrives opposite the left of the 
platoon which precedes it. The squadron being aligned, the first 
captain commands, front. 

To hreah hy the right to march hy the left. 
563. The squadron being in line, the first captain commands : 
1. Platoons break hy the right — to march to the left. 2. March. 
(Fig. 135.) At the first command, the chief of the first platoon 



440 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 

commands: 1. Platoon forward. 2. Guide left. At the commana 
march, repeated by the chief of the first platoon, this platoon 



E ^^ 



mh 



Mtu 



Li __ ^ 



Fi(j I3§. 



1 /«S^/^«y»-«v?^/>.*vfNMs*v»vi!^<^*.A«s/!>.*^ 


■\ %ii 


; i 

1 


I 1 

!l 

I I 
11 

! ! 




marches ten paces to the front, turns to the left, and moves forward 
at the commands : 1. Left — Turn. 2. Forward. 

The chief of the second platoon, and successively those of the 
third and fourth, command : 1. Platoon forward. 2. Guide left: 



SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 



441 



wlien the chief of the platoon on the right commands march ; and 
they command march, when the chief of that platoon, after having 
turned to the left, commands, forward. 

J'i^ 135, 




To hreah to the rear hy the riyht to march to the left. 

5G4. The squadron being in line, the first captain commands : 

1. Platoons break hy the right to the rear — to march to the left 
2. March. 

(Fig. 136.) At the first command, the chief of the first pla- 
toon commands, platoon right — about wheel. At the command 




442 MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

march, repeated by the cliief of tlie first platoon, this platoon exe- 
cutes its wheel to the right about; when nearly terminated, its 
chief commands : 1. Forward. 2. Guide left; and after march- 
ing ten paces straight forward, he commands: 1. Right — Turn. 
2. Forward. The chief of the second platoon, and those of the 
third and fourth in succession, commands, platoon right — ahout 
wheel, when the chief of the platoon on their right commands 
march, and they command march, when that platoon has passed 
over three-fourths of its first wheel. 

To hreah hy platoons to the right, and to move forvjard after the 

wheel. 

565. The squadron being in line, the captain commanding com- 
mands : 

1. Platoon right wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. 

Guide left. 

At the first command, the left file of each platoon prepares to 
step off promptly, and the pivot to turn upon itself. At the com- 
mand march, each platoon executes its wheel to the right, following 
the principles of the wheel on a fixed pivot. At the third com- 
mand, the platoons march straight forward. 

To form line to the front hy inversion. iff 

566. The squadron being in open column, right in front, to form 
line by inversion upon the head of the column, the first captain 
commands : 

1. By inversion front into line. 2. March. 3. Guide left, 
4. Front. 

At the first command, the chief of the first platoon commands 
platoon forward ; and then the other chiefs of platoons command 
platoon right half-wheel. At the command march, repeated by these 
officers, the movement is executed as prescribed, No. 535, but by 
inverse means. 

This formation is executed in the same manner when the column 



SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 443 

is marching; in this case the chief of the first phitoon does not 
comma.nd jjlatoon forward, nor march, but repeats the indication of 
the guide. 

To break hy platoons to the rigat, head of column to the left or half 

left. 

567. The squadron being in line^ the first captain commands : 

1. Platoons right wheel — head of column to the left (or half left). 
2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide left. 

At the command march, each platoon executes its wheel to the 
right. At the third command the chief of the first platoon com- 
mands : 1. Left — Turn. 2. Forward; the other platoons move 
on and turn in succession at the command of their chiefs, on the 
ground upon which the first had turned. 

The first captain commands ^or2f7arc?, when the wheels are nearly 
completed, and gives a point of direction. 

To form line faced to the rear hy inversion, on the rear of the column. 

568. The squadron being in column with distance, right in front, 
and obstacles are presented on its left flank, to form line faced to 
the rear, the first captain commands : 

1. Platoons right about wheel. 2. March. 3. By inversion front 
into line. 4. March. 5. Guide right. 6. Front. 

At the second command, each platoon executes its wheel to the 
right about. At the fourth command, the chief of the fourth pla- 
toon, which becomes the head of the column, when its wheel is 
nearly completed, commands: 1. Forward. 2. Guide right; and 
when it has marched thirty paces, 1. Halt. 2. Right — Dress. 
The chiefs of the other platoons, at three-fourths of the wheel, 
command: 1. Forward. 2. Guide right; and direct themselves 
towards the place they are to occupy in line, conforming, in other 
respects, to what is prescribed for ly inversion front into line, when 
the left is in front. 



444 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

To hrenh hy jpJatoons to the right, head of column to the right (or 
half right). 

569. The squadron being in line, the first captain commands : 

1. Platoons right wheel — head of column to the right (or half right). 
2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide left. 

At the command march, each platoon executes its wheel to tJie 
right. At the third command, the chief of the first platoon com- 
mands : 1. Eight — Turn. 2. Forward. The other platoons move 
on, and turn in succession at the commands of their chiefs, on the 
same ground. The first captain commsinds forward, when the wheels 
are nearly completed. 

To form line faced to the rear, hy inversion on the head of the 

column. 

570. The squadron being in column with distance, right in front, 
and obstacles are presented on its right flank, to form line upon the 
head of the column, faced to the rear, the first captain commands : 

1. Front into line. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 

Which is executed as prescribed /or /roTi^ into line, right in front. 
No. 535, but without rectifying the alignment. 

The squadron being formed, the first captain immediately com- 
mands : 

1. Platoons right — ahout wheel. 2. March. 3. Halt. 4:. Left 
Dress. 5. Front. 

The movement is executed in the same manner, when the column 



is marching. 



Individual oblique march. 



571. The squadron marching in line, to cause it to gain ground 
towards the right flank, without changing the front of the squadron, 
the first captain commands : 

1. Right ohlique. 2. March. 



SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 445 

(Fig. 137.) To resume the primitive direction, the first captain 
commands ; 

Forward. 

This movement is executed at a walk, or at a trot, but never at a 
gallop. 

f.i) 




Ohllquc march h]/ platoons, 

572. The squadron being in line, to cause it to gain ground 
towards its right flank, by the oblique march by platoons, the first 
captain commands : 

1. Platoons right — half wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 
4. Guide right. 

(Fig. 138.) At the command march, each platoon executes its 
half wheel to the right, on a fixed pivot. At the third command, 
each platoon moves forward, conforming to the principles of tne 
direct march. 

To cause the squadron to resume the primitive direction, the 
first captain commands : 

1. Platoons left — halfvAeel. 2. March. 8. Forward. 
4. Guide right. 

Which is executed as just prescribed, but by inverse means. 
During this march, the right guide of the first platoon marches 

38 



446 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

directly upon the point whicli has been indicated to him Th-^ 
guides of the other platoons preserve their distances, take for file- 



Fitr /se. 




p 
1 







leader the fourth trooper from the left of the platoon which pre- 
cedes them, and keep it two paces from him. The second captain 
places himself behind the guide of the first platoon, in order to 
superintend his direction. 

The squadron heing in line, to cause it to gain ground to the rear, 
and to face it again to the front. 

573. The squadron being in line, to face it in the opposite 
direction, the first caj^tain commands : 



1, By fours right — ahout wheel. ' 2. March. 
4. Guide left. 



Forward. 



(Fig. J 39.) Which is executed as prescribed. No. 541. The 
chiefs of platoon, the file-closers, and the guides, iclieel — ahout 
individually, and march, the chiefs of platoon behind the centre 
of their platoons, the file-closers in front, and the guides of the 
right and left of the rear rank, now become the front. At the 
fourth command, the file-closer nearest the guide passes to the left, 
in order to place himself in front of the guide, the first captain gives 
him a point of direction, which is also indicated to the guide of the 



SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON 



447 



riglit or left, who, in tins movement, remains on the flank of the 
squadron. 



.-3i--.,.-,^.-'#-J.(^'..-'fl.'l-.,,-....^i^.J^5;^5^ 




The squadron is faced again to the front, by a movement similar 
to the one just stated. 

The squadron marching in line, to march it to the rear by wheeling 
the platoons about. 

674. The squadron marching in line, guide right, the first cap- 
tain commands : 

1. Platoons right about wheel 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide 

left. 

(Fig. 140.) At the command march, the pivots halt short, and 
turn upon themselves, the marching flanks step ofl" at the same in- 
stant, regulating themselves by the right during the first half of 
the wheel, so as to arrive together in column, and by the left during 



448 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the second half^ so as to arrive together in line. In each platoon; 
the rear rank and the file-closers carry the hand towards the niarch- 



^^'^r^^^^. 




ing flank, in order to facilitate the movement. At the third com- 
mand, the squadron resumes the direct march. At the fourth com- 
mand, the indicated guide moves up on the line of the officers ; he 
is immediately replaced, and a point of direction given. 

In this movement, the guide of the right turns to the riglit, moves 
straight forward the extent of the front of a platoon, and hmu again 
to the right, in order to place himself on the left of the squadron. 
The guide of the left executes the same movement, to place him- 
self on the right of the right of the squadron. 

TJie squadron marching in line, to hreak it to the front hy platoon ^ 
in doubling the gait, and to re-form it. 

575. The first captain commands : 



SCHOOL OP THE SQUADRON. 449 

1 Bi/ platoons to tlie front — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

At the first commandj the chief of the first platoon commands 
trot) and those of the other platoons command, pZatoo?i rigid halj 
wheel — trot. At the command march, repeated by these officers, 
the movement is executed as prescribed No. 550. 

The squadron marching in line at the trot, the movement is exe- 
cuted at the gallop, on the same principles. 

The squadron marching in column with distance, right in front, 
to form it in doubling the gait, the first captain commands : 

1. Form squadron — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 

At the first command, the chiefs of the three last platoons com- 
mand, ^?atoo7z- ^e/<f Aa{/'«;AeeZ — trot. At the command marc/i, re- 
peated by the chiefs of the three last platoons, the first platoon con- 
tinues to march straight forward at the walk, and its chief repeats the 
indication of the guide. The three other platoons execute their half 
icheel to the left at the trot, on a fixed pivot. The half wheels being 
nearly terminated, the chiefs of these platoons command : 1. For- 
ward. 2. Guide right; they move straight forward, and as soon 
as the right file of their platoon is in the direction of the left file 
of the platoon which precedes, they command : 1. Right half wheel. 
2. March. 3. Forward; and then walk, in sufficient time to 
command march, when their platoon arrives in line; then the troopers 
resume the walk, and align themselves in marching. Each platoon 
after its half wheel to the left, moves straight forward on the point 
where it is to turn, and without obliquing towards the platoon which 
precedes it. 

Passage of obstacles. 

576. The squadron marching in line, to execute the passage of 
obstacle, the first captain commands : 

1. Obstacle. 2. First platoon. 3. Halt. 

(Fig. 141.) At the command halt, repeated by the chief of the 
first platoon, this platoon halts, and its chief immediately com- 
38* 2d 



450 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

mands : 1. Left ohUque — trot. 2. March; and this platoon doubles 
on the second. When the platoon which has aligned, is in rear of 



lit s^i c§d s^L i| sd 



A^cAA AA.\ A^^A^/^A>>, ^L ^^^,.^.^A,tj;A .iv^jjL^i 



AMiA&M*^^ 








the one upon which it has doubled, its chief commands : 1. For- 
WARD. 2. Guide right. 3. Walk. 4. March. 

To cause the platoon which has obliqued to return to its place, 
the first captain coinmands : 

1. First jolatoon. 2. Into line. 



SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 451 

At tlie command into line, the chief of the platoon commands : 
1. Right ohiique — trot. 2. March; when opposite the ground 
the phitoon is to occupy, he commands: 1. Forward. 2. Guide 
left. 3. Walk; and when the platoon is in line, march. The 
chief of the platoon commands ybrit-arc/, a little before its left file 
has passed beyond the right file of the platoon on which it is 
to form. 

The second platoon executes the same movement, in obliquing to 
the right, behind the first platoon ; the third in obliquing to the 
left behind the fourth, and the fourth in obliquing to the right 
behind the third; each platoon should always double upon that 
with which it forms the division. 

577. The squadron marching in line, to execute the passage of 
obstacle upon the head of each platoon, the first captain commands : 

1. In each platoon — hy fours (or hy twos) — trot. 2. March. 
3. Guide right. 

(Fig. 142.) At the first command, the chiefs of platoon com- 
mands hy fours (or hy twos) — trot. At the command march, re- 
peated by three officers, each platoon breaks by fours ; the chiefs 
of platoon march at the head of their platoons ; the guide of the 
right, who marches on the line of officers, places himself on the right 
of the chief of the first platoon ; the guide of the left, in rear of the 
fourth platoon, and the file-closers on the right flank of their pla- 
toons. Each platoon having thus broken in column, should assume 
a direction parallel to that one which is the guide, keeping on the 
same line, and always at the distance of its front, to be able at any 
moment to re-form line. 

To re-form the squadron, each platoon having broken by fours or 
by twos at the trot, right in front, the first captain commands : 

1. Form platoons. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 

At the first command, the chiefs of platoon command, form 
platoon. At the command march, repeated by their officers, eacn 
platoon forms. If the ground does not permit all the platoons to 
form at once, the one before which the obstable is presented, forms 



452 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

in the rear of the other platoon of its division^ and retakes its place 
in line as soon as practicable. 




Ti^142 









fil 




SKIRMISHING. 

578. When the squadron is in sight of the skirmishers^ the first 
captain orders no signal except the rally. The chief of the skir- 
mishers observes the movements of the squadron he covers, and 
conforms to them as soon as practicable, requiring his trumpeter to 
Bound the necessary signals. 

When the squadron changes front, the chief of the skirmishers 



SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 453 

moves upon tlie new front, unless the first captain gives orders to 
the contrary. If the squadron is out of sight of the skirmishers, 
the first captain causes the signals which correspond to the move- 
ments he executes to be sounded, in order to give notice to the 
chief of the skirmishers, who conforms to them as soon as practi- 
cable. The trumpeter who follows the chief of the skirmishers 
should give the signals only upon the order of that officer. The 
skirmishers should execute their movements only by the signals of 
the trumpeter who accompanies the officer who commands them. 
The squadron being in line, the first captain commands : 

1. First (or fourtK) platoon — as skirmishers. 2. March. 

At the first command, the chief of the first platoon orders the 
sabres to be returned, the holsters to be uncovered, and the arms to 
be loaded; he then commands: 1. Platoon forivard. 2. Guide 
right. 3. Trot. At the command march, repeated by the chief 
of the platoon, this platoon moves forward. After marching 100 
paces to the front, the chief of the platoon commands : 1. Six files 
from rirjlit (or left^ — as skirmishers. 2. March. 3. Guide right 
(or left); which is executed as prescribed. No. 559. When the 
first captain wishes the skirmishers to re-enter the squadron, he 
causes the rally to be sounded. At this signal the chief of the 
skirmishers rallies his platoon, as prescribed No. 559, and then 
rejoins the squadron at a gallop, directing himself upon one of the 
flanks to resume his place in line. 

579. When the first captain wishes to relieve a platoon which is 
skirmishing, the chief of the new platoon moves forward upon the 
reserve of the platoon which is acting as skirmishers. On coming 
up abreast of it, he orders out six files as skirmishers ; the remaining 
files halt and draw sabres. As soon as the new skirmishers have 
passed five paces beyond those they are to relieve, the latter turn 
about and rally upon their reserve. The platoon having rallied, is 
conducted back to the squadron at a trot. 

580. When the entire squadron is to act as skirmishers, the first 
captain orders the sabres to be returned, the holsters to be uncovered, 
and the arms to be loaded ; he then commands : 



454 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. Squadron forward. 2. Guide right. 3. Trot. 4. MARCH. 

Having arrived at the point where the reserve is to be established, 
about 100 paces from the front of the body to be covered, and more 
if it has been commanded, the first captain commands : 

1. Three first (pi last^ platoons — as sldrmishers. 2. March. 

At the command march, the chief of the platoon whicli is to 
support the skirmishers, halts that platoon, and causes sabres to be 
drawn. The chiefs of the three other platoons continue to march 
on, each directing himself by the shortest route, 100 paces to the 
front towards the part of the line his platoon is to occupy, and hav- 
ing reached it, he disperses his platoon as skirmishers. The right 
platoon covers the right of the regiment, and extends 30 or 40 
paces beyond it ', another platoon covers the centre, and the left 
platoon covers the left, extending also 30 or 40 paces beyond. The 
chiefs of these platoons remain 25 paces in rear of the line of skir- 
mishers, and pass over the extent occupied by the troopers of their 
platoons. The reserve remains in rear of tbe centre of the line of 
skirmishers. 

The first captain, followed by the first sergeant, keeps habitually 
half-way between the reserve and the skirmishers, to direct the 
movements. The second captain, followed by the second sergeant, 
passes the line, and gives notice to the first captain of every thing 
that it is important for him to know. 

581. If the first captain wishes to rally the skirmishers upon 
themselves, he causes the rally of skirmishers to be sounded. At 
this signal each platoon rallies as rapidly as possible on its chief. 
If the first captain then wishes to rally the squadron, he moves 
upon the point where he intends it shall form, and causes the rally 
to be sounded where three-fourths of each platoon has rallied. At 
this new signal, the reserve and each platoon of skirmishers move 
at a gallop upon the point where the captain commanding is placed. 
The troopers who did not rejoin their platoon when it rallied upon 
itself, direct themselves towards the squadron. 

The squadron being dispersed as skirmishers, if the first captain 



SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 455 

''vi.- 'les it to rally immediately, lie orders the rallij to be sounded ; 
at this signal, the officers, the skirmishers, and the reserve, rally 
upon the point occupied by the first captain. 

The troopers being dispersed as skirmishers, if the first captain 
wishes them to charge as foragers, he orders them to cease firing, 
and causes the disperse to be sounded. At this signal, the chiefs 
of platoon move forward in line, and the skirmishers draw sabres; 
they charge immediately. The reserve follows at tlie trot, or at tlie 
gallop, as may be necessary. After the charge, the first captain 
orders the rally to be sounded, when the troopers rally in rear of 
the reserve. 

The skirmishers being rallied by platoons, if the first captain 
wishes to charge, he orders the charge to be sounded. At this 
signal, each chief of platoon conducts his platoon to the charge, in 
good order; the reserve supports the movement at tlie trot or galloj), 
The first captain places himself so as to be able to direct the general 
movement. The second captain charges with the platoon nearest 
to him. The platoons rally behind the reserve ; the first captain 
moves upon that point at the same time that he orders the rally to 
be sounded. 

The Column by Divisions. 

582. The squadron being in hne, if the first captain wishes to 
form it into column by divisions, he commands : 

1. Divisions rigid (or left') ivheel. 2. March. 3. Halt (or For- 
ward). 4. Guide left (or right'). 

Which is executed in the same manner as the breaking of the 
troop or squadron into a column of platoons, either to halt or move 
forward without halting. The same movement may be executed 
when the squadron is marching in line. 

The principles prescribed for the column of platoons are appli- 
cable to the march in column by divisions, the difi'erent modes of 
passing from line into column, and from column into line. 

To gain ground towards its flanks or to the rear, employ the means 
prescribed for the column by platoons. The wheels — ahoiU can 



456 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

be also executed bj divisions. The distance measured from the 
croup of the horses of the rear rank of one division, to the head of 
the horses of the division which follows, should be equal to the front 
of the division, less the depth of the two ranks. In the wheels on 
a movable pivot by divisions, the ninth file of the platoon, upon 
which the wheel is executed, is the middle point of the radius of 
the wheel. The pivot describes an arc of circle of fen paces. 

583. The squadron marching in column by platoons, right in 
front, to form the divisions at the same gait, the first captain com 
mands i 

1. Form divisions. 2. March. 

At the first command, the chiefs of the second and fourth platoons 
commsind, platoon left — half -wheel. At the command march, re- 
peated by the same ofiicers, the second and fourth platoons execute 
a half wheel to the left on a fixed pivot. The first and third platoons 
continue to march straight forward, and after having marched thirty 
paces, their chiefs command, halt. The chiefs of the second and 
fourth platoons, when the half -wheel to the left is nearly terminated, 
command : 1. Forward. 2. Guide right. They move straigbt for- 
ward, and as soon as the right of their platoon arrives in the direc- 
tion of the left file of the platoon which precedes, they command : 
1. Eight — half wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. Forward, They move for- 
ward, and command halt, on arriving abreast of the platoon belong- 
ing to the same division. The lieutenants commanding the divisions 
then command, left — dress, move to the left of the division, rectify 
the alignment, command front, and return to the centre of their 
platoons. 

584. The squadron marching in column by divisions, right in 
front, to break the divisions by platoons, the first captain com- 
mands : 

1 . J5y platoons. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

At the first command, the chiefs of the second and fourth platoons 
command, platoon right half-wheel. At the command march, re- 
peated by the same ofiicers, the second and fourth platoons execute 
a half-wheel to the right on a fixed pivot^ and the first and third 



SCHOOL OF THE SQUADRON. 457 

platoons continue to march on. The chiefs of the second and fourth 
platoons, the Iwlf-icheel to the rujlit being nearly terminated, com- 
mand : 1. roRY>"ARD. 2. Guide left; they move straight forward, 
and as soon as the left file of their platoons arrives in the direction 
0^ the left file of the platoon which precedes, they command : 1. Left 
half-wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. Forward; and move forward in 
taking their proper distances. 

The divisions are broken by platoons, on the same principles, in 
marching at the trot or gallop. 

585. The squadron marching in column by platoons, right in 
front, to form divisions in doubling the gait, the first captain com- 
mands : 

1. Form divisions — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

"Which is executed as prescribed above, the first and third pla- 
toons continuing to march at the same gait, and the chiefs of the 
second and fourth platoons commanding : 1. Platoon left — half wheel 
— trot. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide right] and: 1. 
Right half-wheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. WalJi^. When 
they arrive abreast of the platoon on which they form, they com- 
mand : 5. March. 

586. The squadron marching in column by divisions, right in 
front, to break the division by platoons, in doubling the gait, the 
first captain commands ; 

1. Bi/ platoons^- trot. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 

At the first command, the chiefs of the first and third platoons 
commands, trot; those of the second and fourth platoons com- 
mand, p?a<foo?z right halfvjheel — trot. At the command mairh, re- 
peated by the chiefs of platoon, the first and third platoons move 
forward at the trot. The second and fourth execute their half-wheel 
to the right on a fixed pivot, at the trot, and the movement is com- 
pleted as described above. 

587. The squadron being in line, to break it by division by the 
right to march to the left^ the first captain commands : 

39 



458 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. Divisions hreah hy the right — to march to the left. 2. March. 

Which is executed as prescribed for a column of platoons. 
To break the squadron by divisions to the rear by the right, to 
march to the left, the first captain commands : 

1. Divisions break hy the right to the rear — to march to the left. 
2. March. 

Which is executed as prescribed for the column of platoons. 



EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 4.59 



AETICLE X. 

EVOLUTIONS OF THE REOIMENT. 

588. WheN' the regiment is in line, the squadrons are drawn up 
on the same line, with intervals of twelve paces between them, and 
the field and staff of the regiment are posted as indicated No. 18. 

When it is in column right in front, and on the march, the guide 
is habitually to the left, and as constantly to the right when the left 
is in front; in the march of the column the colonel does not indi- 
cate the guide, except in cases where he sees proper to depart from 
the principle just laid down. Whenever the guide is indicated by 
the colonel, the captains commanding all repeat it. 

Successive aliynment of the squadrons in the regiment. 

589. The regiment being in line, the colonel causes the right 
general guide and the principal guide of the left of the first squad- 
ron to be placed thirty paces in front of the squadron opposite the 
right and left, and facing each other. The left general guide im- 
mediately places himself on the same line in front of the extreme 
left of the regiment, facing the right general guide. 

The captain commanding the first squadron, on an intimation from 
the colonel, commands : 1. Squadron Forward. 2. Guide right. 
2. March. The squadron having arrived within one pace of the 
new line, the captain commands halt. At this command the squad- 
ron halts, the captain, and the guides of the right and left advance 
and align themselves; the first captain commands right — dress; and 
when the alignment is complete, front. 

The colonel then commands : 

1. Attention. 2. By squadron right — Dress. 



460 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

At the second command, the captain commanding the second 
squadron commands : 1. Squadron forward. 2. Guide right. 3. 
March. The squadron having reached the rank of file-closers of 
the first squadron, the first captain commands : 1. Squadron. 2. 
Halt. The principal guide of the left throws himself out opposite 
the left of the squadron, faces to the right, and aligns himself on 
the guides in front of the first squadron; the ofiicers and guides of 
the right and left align themselves correctly; the first captain throws 
himself to the left wing, and commands, right — dress. The 
squadron being aligned, the captain commands /ro??^. 

Each captain commanding causes the movement to be executed in 
succession, and commands ma.rch as soon as the one preceding him 
commands halt. The regiment being aligned, the colonel com- 
mands /}'o?2^. 

Alignment of the Regiment. 

590. The regiment being in line, the colonel causes the general 
guides to be fixed on the new line, facing each other, and the guides 
of the left to be placed on intermediate points, facing to the right; 
he then commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Right — Dress. 

At the second command, repeated by the captains commanding, 
the squadrons are aligned in such manner that the men of the front 
rank of each squadron may have the heads of their horses on the 
line of the guides. The regiment being aligned, the colonel com- 
mands front. 

To hreah the regiment hy fours. 

691. The regiment being in line, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. By fours. 3. March. 

(Fig. 143.^) The second command is repeated by the captiin 
commanding the first squadron. At the command anarch, repeated 
by the captain, the first squadron breaks by fours as in the school 

1 But three squadrons are figured. 



EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 



461 



of the squadron. The first captain of the second squadron commands 
hy fours, in time to command march at the instant the fourth pla- 



Ti^m, 



Yzmmmimmmt -iiEisHiiiiiSisiB 




l[Q 01 




ID [^ 






El 

OS " 

ED 
Eai Di 
HI 






toon of the squadron which precedes it, commences its movement. 
When the half of the second squadron has broken, the captain 
changes direction in order to join the column. The other squadrons 
break in succession in the same way, and change direction as directed 
for the second. 

To form platoons at the same gait, 

592. The regiment marching in column by fours, the right in 
front, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Form platoons. 3. March. 

The second command is repeated by the captain commanding 
39* 



462 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the first squadron. At tlie command march, also repeated by tlie 
captains, platoons are formed in the first squadron, as prescribed in 
the school of the squadron. The other squadrons continue to march, 
and platoons are formed in succession, in the same manner as in the 
first, at the commands : 1. Form j^latoons. 2. March. 

Tu break the platoons It/ /ours at the same gait. 

593. The regiment marching in column by platoons, right in 
front, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. By fours. 3. March, 

At the second command repeated by the captain commanding; the 
first squadron, the first captains of the other squadrons command 
column. At the command march, repeated by the captain com- 
manding the first squadron, the captains commanding the other 
squadron command halt. The first cajDtain of the second squadron, 
and in succession those of the other squadrons, commands : 1. By 
fours. 2. March ; in sufficient time for the head of the squadron 
after it is broken to be at its proper distance from the rear of the 
squadron which precedes. 

If the column is marching at a trot, the chiefs of squadron, except 

the first, take the walk at the command march, and at the proper 

time for breaking the squadrons, command : 1. By fours — trot. 2. 

March. 

To form jplatoons in doubling the gait. 

594. The regiment marching in column of fours, right in front, 
the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Form platoons — trot. 3. MARCH. 

At the second command repeated by the captain commanding the 
first squadron, the chiefs of the other squadrons command trot. At 
the command march, repeated by all the chiefs of squadrons, platoons 
are formed in the first squadron. The other squadrons take the 
trot, and form in succession at the command : 1. Form platoons. 2. 
March ; given by each chief the nearest the head of his squadron, 
is at its proper distance from the squadron which precedes. 



EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 463 

To Tjrcah tlie platoons in douhUng the gait. 

505. The regiment marcliing in column of platoon, right in front, 
the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Bj fours, — trot. 3. March. 

The second command is repeated by the chief of the first squadron, 
and at the command raarch, this squadron breaks by fours. The 
other squadrons continue to march at a walk, and the chiefs com- 
mand in succession : 1. Bi/ fours — trot. 2. March; at such time 
as to preserve their distance. 

To form the regiment to the front, to the left, or upon the right into 

line. 

596. The regiment marching in column by fours, the right in 
front, to form line to the front the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Front into line. 3. March. 

At the second command, repeated by the chief of the first squad- 
ron, the chiefs of the other squadrons command, head of column 
to the half left. At the command march, repeated by the chiefs of 
squadron, the first squadron forms front into line as directed for a 
single squadron. The other chiefs command, guide rigid, throw 
themselves at the head of their squadron, and direct it by the 
shortest line to a point 100 paces behind the point the right of the 
squadron is to occupy in line ; as soon as the head of each squadron 
reaches this point, the chief commands, head of column to the 
hcdf right, and when the third platoon of his squadron is in the new 
direction, he commands, front into line, in time to give the com- 
mand marchy at the moment the head of his column arrives within 
thirty paces of the line of battle. The regiment being aligned, the 
colonel commands, front. 

597. The regiment marching in column by fours, the right in 
front, to form line to the left flank, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Left into line. 3. March. 



464 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The second command is repeated by the chief of the first squad- 
ron. At the command march, repeated by him, the first squadron 
is formed into line to the left, as prescribed in the school of the 
troop, No. 489. The other chiefs throw themselves to the head of 
their squadrons, and each, in succession, commands left into line, 
in time to command march the moment their first four files get to 
the proper turning point. The regiment being aligned, the colonel 
commands front. 

598. The regiment marching in column by fours, the right in 
front, to form the line on the prolongation of the right flank, the 
colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. On the right into line. 3. March. 

The second command is repeated by the chief of the first squad- 
ron. At the command march, also repeated by him, he forms his 
squadron into line on the right, as prescribed school of the troop. 
No. 490. The other chiefs of squadron command guide right, 
throw themselves to the head of their squadrons, and each com- 
mands upon the right into line in time to command march, at the 
proper point for turning to the right, in order to take its proper 
place in line. The regiment being obliqued the colonel commands, 
front. 

To form the regiment into column with distance. 

599. The regiment being in line, to break to the right by a 
general movement, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Platoons right loheel. 3. March. 

The second command is repeated by all the captains command- 
ing. At the command march, also repeated by them, the move is 
executed at the same time in all the squadrons, as prescribed in the 
school of the troop, No. 510. At the moment the platoons have 
nearly completed the wheel, the captains commanding command, 
halt. The chiefs of squadron see that the chiefs of platoon, 
guides, etc. , take their proper posts. If the colonel wishes to put 
the column in march without halting, he commands, when the wheel 
lacks about one-fourth of its completion : 



evolutions of the regiment. 465 

4. Forward. 
This command is repeated by the chiefs of squadron. 
To hrealz hi/ the riglit to march to the left. 

600. The regiment being in line, to break by successive move- 
ments from the right to pass before the front of the line^ the colonel 
commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Platoons hreaJc hy the right to march to left. 

3. March. 

At the second command, repeated by the captain commanding 
the first squadron, the chief of the first platoon commands : 1. Pla- 
toon furivarcl ; Guide I'ft. At the command march, repeated by 
the chief of the first squadron, and by the chief of the first platoon, 
the movement is executed in the first squadron, as it is prescribed, 
school of the squadron, No. 563. The chiefs of the other squadrons 
repeat the second command in succession, in time to command march 
when the fourth platoon of the squadron which is on their right, is 
opposite the centre of the second platoon of their squadron. 

To hreah to the rear hy the right to march to the left. 

601. The regiment being in line, to break by successive move- 
ments, the right to pass by the rear of the line, the colonel com- 
mands : 

1. Attention. 2. Platoons hreah to the rear hy the right — to 
march to the left. 3. March. 

At the second command, repeated by the captain commanding 
the first squadron, the chief of the first platoon commands, platoon 
right — about icheel. At the command march, repeated by both 
these officers, the first squadron executes the movement as pre- 
scribed, school of the squadron. No. 564. The chiefs of the other 
squadrons repeat the commands in succession, in time to command 
march, at the instant the fourth platoon of the squadron on their 

2e 



466 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

right, after having finished its right about and advance, has exe- 
cuted three-fourths of its change of direction to the right. 

To form the regiynent into close column. 

602. The regiment being in line, if it be the desire of the colonel 
to form it into a close column, faced to the right, he commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Squadrons rigJit wlieel — form close column. 
3. March. 

(Fig. 144.) At the second command, the captains commanding 
squadrons command, squadron right wheel. At the command 
march, repeated by the chiefs of squadrons, all the squadrons wheel 
to the right. The wheel being nearly completed, the chief of the 
first squadron throws himself to its left, and commands : 1. Squadron. 

2. Halt. Z. Left — Dress. 4. Front. The chiefs of the other 
squadrons command : 1. Forward. 2. Guide left; and at twelve 
paces from the squadron which precedes : 1. Squadron. 2. Halt. 

3. Left — Dress. 4. Front. 

603. The regiment being in line, to form a close column without 
changing the front, the colonel commands : 1. Attention. 2. Upon 
the third squadron form close column. 3. March. 

(Fig. 145.) At the second command the chief of the third squad- 
ron throws himself to its left, and commands: 1. Left — Dress. 
2. Front. The chief of the second squadron commands, platoons 
right wheel — fourth ^platoon left half wheel. The chief of the first 
squadron commands, platoons right wheel — head of column to the half 
right. The chief of the fourth squadron commands, p/'afoo??.s right 
wheel — first platoon right a.hout wheel. The chief of the fifth 
squadron commands, platoons right wheel — head of column to the 
half right. 

At the command march, repeated by all the chiefs of squadrons 
except that of the third, all the other squadrons break hi/ platoons 
to the left and right; and when the wheels are nearly completed 
each chief on the right commands : 1. Forward. 2. Guide right; 
those on the left command: 1. Forward. 2. Guide left. Each 
one throws himself at the head of his column to direct it. 

The chief of the fourth platoon second squadron^ after having 



EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 



467 







in^ 



.& — ... 







!!?1 


-«^ 




! 


\V^ 


*^"n 




1 


\h 




\ 


1 


\|\^ 




'^ 


1 


k 


1 ..- 


^^ 


4 



13 




SI 13 "'-.^ |i]5:l i 
a 0\ El' \A 




468 MANUALFOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

eseciited the liaJficheel to the left, moves forward, and commands : 

1. iyp/;^ — Turn. 2. Forward; so as to enter the column in a 
direction parallel to the front of the third squadron, passing near 
the heads of the horses of the officers. The other platoons of this 
squadron change direction on the same ground, and by the same 
commands from their chiefs. The chief of the squadron continues 
to march at the head of his squadron, and commands, ^Za^ooiis right 
■wheel, in time to command march, when its fourth platoon has 
arrived opposite the right of the fourth platoon of the third squad- 
ron. The platoons having executed the wheel, he commands: 1. 
Halt. 2. Left — Dress. 3. Front. 

The chief of the fourth platoon of the first squadron, after having 
executed his wheel to the left, commands: 1. Rujht — Turn. 

2. Forward ; and directs himself diagonally to the front in such 
manner as to turn to the left on a line parallel to the front of the 
second squadron at the command, head of column to the half -left, 
given by the chief of the squadron when the fourth platoon arrives 
opposite the right flank of the squadron already formed. The rest 
of the movement is performed in precisely the same manner as has 
been laid down for the second squadron. 

The chief of the first platoon of the fourth squadron, after having 
executed his right about loheel, moves forward, and commands : 
1. L(ft — Turn. 2. Forward; so as to enter the column in a 
direction parallel to the third squadron, at the command, head of 
column to the left, given by the chief of squadron, when this pla- 
toon has gained a distance of twelve paces in rear of the third 
squadron. The three other platoons execute a right turn on the 
same ground on which the first platoon made its right about, and 
hft turn on the same ground that the first did. As soon as the 
chief of the squadron finds himself opposite the left of the third 
squadron, he halts, allows his column to pass him, and gives the 
command, platoons left wheel, in time to command march as soon 
as the fourth platoon gets opposite its place. The platoons having 
executed the wheel, he commands: 1. Halt. 2. Left — Dress. 
8. Front. 

The chief of the first platoon of the fifth squadron, after having 



EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 469 

executed tlie wheel to flic right, commands: 1. Riyld — Turn. 
2. Forward ; and directs himself diagonally, in such manner as 
to turn to the left on a line parallel to the fourth squadron, at the 
command, head of column to the half-left, given by the chief of the 
squadron when the first platoon reaches the left flank of the squad- 
rons already formed. The squadron is then brought to its proper 
position in the column by the same commands and means as for the 
fourth squadron. 

604. The regiment being in line, to form in close column, with 
the left in front, without changing the front, the colonel com- 
mands : 

1. Attention. 2. TJj^on the third squadron — form close column — 
the left in front, 3. March. 

The commands are repeated, and the movements executed in 
accordance with the principles laid down above, with this difference, 
that the squadrons on the right form in rear of the squadron which 
serves as the basis of the formation, while those on the left form in 
advance of this same squadron ; and that the alignment is to the 
right. 

605. The regiment marching in line, if the colonel wishes to 
form a close column, faced to the right, without halting, he com- 
mands : 

1. Attention. 2. Squadrons right wheel — form close column. 3. 

March. 

At the second command, the captains commanding command, 
squadrons right wheel — trot. At the command march, repeated 
by the captains commanding, a movement is executed. The wheel 
being nearly completed, the chief of the first squadron commands : 
1. Forward. 2. Guide left. 3. Walk. 4. March; the other 
chiefs of squadron command : 1. Forward. 2. Guide left ; smd sit 
twelve paces from the preceding squadron : 1. Walk. 2. March. 

To march in column. 

606. The principles of the march in column with distance; as 

40 



470 MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

prescribed for tlie troop or squadron, are applicable to tlie roarcb. of 
tbe regiment; tbe squadrons are separated by a distance equal to 
tbe front of a platoon, plus twelve paces the interval between squa- 
dron in line. 

The regiment being in column with distance, right in front, the 
colonel indicates to the adjutant the direction he wishes the column 
to take : he commands : 



1. Attention. 2. Column forward. 3. March. 

The second command is repeated by the chiefs of squadron. At 
the command march, also repeated by these officers, the movement 
is executed as for a single troop or squadron. 

To halt the column, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Column. 3. Halt. 

The second command is repeated by the chiefs of squadron, and 
at the command halt, all the platoons halt at once. 

To change the direction of the column with distance. 

607. The regiment marching in column with distance, with the 
right in front, to change the direction, the colonel commands : 

Head of column to the hft. 

At this command, repeated by the chief of the first squadron, 
this squadron executes the movement as is prescribed for the change 
of direction of a column of platoons, school of the troop. No. 512. 
Each of the chiefs of squadron in succession gives the same command 
when the head of his column reaches the point where the first 
squadron changed its direction. The principal guide of each 
squadron places himself at the wheeling point, and remains there 
until the last platoon of his squadron has commenced the wheel, 
when he is relieved by the guide of the succeeding squadron. 

608. The regiment marching in column with distance, with the 
right in front, to cause it to face in the opposite direction, the colo 
nel commands : 



EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 471 

1, Attention. 2. Platoon left about wheel o. March. 4. 
Forward. 

The last three commands are repeated by the chiefs of squadron * 
the movement is executed in all the squadrons, as prescribed for a 
single squadron, No. 574. 

609. The regiment being in column with distance, at a halt or on 
the march, on order to gain ground in the direction of one of the 
flanks, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. B?/ fours to the left {or right). 3. March. 
4. Forward. 

The last three commands are repeated by the chiefs of squadron, 
and the movement is executed in all the squadrons, as prescribed 
for a single troop. No. 528. 

610. The regiment being in column with distance, at a halt or on 
the march, to cause it to face in the opposite direction, the colonel 
commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Bj/ fours left (or right) ahout wheel. 3. March. 
4. Forward. 

The last three commands are repeated by the chiefs of squadrons, 
and the movement is executed as for a single troup or squadron. 
No. 573. 

611. The regiment marching in column with distance, to cause 
it to gain ground to the left or right, without changing the front, 
the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Left (or right) ollique. 3. March. 

The last two commands are repeated by the captains commanding, 
and the movement is executed in each squadron as prescribed for a 
jingle troop or squadron. 

The column having obliqued sufficiently, the colonel commands : 

Forward. 

This command is repeated by the chiefs of squadron, and the 
movement is executed as in a single troop. 



472 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

To form the regiment into line 'upon one of its flanks, or on tJie 
prolongation of one of its flanks. 

612. Tlie regiment being in column with distance, with the right 
in front, to form in line upon its left flank, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Left into line wheel. 3. March. 

The second command is repeated by the captains commandinc^ 
squadrons. At the command march, repeated by the chiefs of 
squadron, the movement is executed in each squadron as prescribed, 
No. 530. The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands, 
front. 

613. The reo^iment marchino- in column with distance, the rioht 
in front, to form into line on the prolongation of the right flank, 
the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. On tlie right into line. 3. March. 

The second command is repeated by the chief of the first squad- 
ron. At the command march, also repeated by him, the movement 
is executed in the first squadron as prescribed for a single troop, 
No. 530. The chiefs of the other squadrons command guide right, 
throw themselves to the head of their columns, and in succession 
command, on the right into line, in time to command march, when 
the first platoon is twelve paces beyond the left of the one which pre- 
cedes. The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands, //-tiw^. 

To form' the regiment into line to the front. 

614. The regiment being in column with distance, the right in 
front, in order to form it into line upon the head of the column, the 
colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Front into line. 3. March. 

(Fig. 146.) At the second command, repeated by the captains 
commanding the first squadron, the chiefs of the others command, 
column forward — head of column to the half left. At the com- 
mand march, repeated by all the chiefs of squadron, the first squad- 



EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 



473 



ron is formed as prescribed for a troop, No. 535. The cliiefs of the 
other squadrons place themselves at the head of their column. The 




\x^ \"^-^ \^v* \x;^ W 

\^ '\M \^ NlS.., \l 

\^. ■^#x ^-^x.. ^^'^€:\. ^^i 



Ficf 146. 






\X 



\K 









first platoon of each squadron having made a half wheel, is moved 
forward in a diagonal direction by command of its chiefs, the others 
following in regular succession. The chiefs of squadron command 
guide right as soon as the first platoon has changed its direction to 
the left. When the head of the second squadron gets within sixty 
paces of the line, the chief of squadron commands, head of column 
to the half right; the chief of squadron commands, //'on^ into line^ 
in time to command marcJi, when the third platoon has turned to 



474 MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILlTIA. 

the riglit^ and the fourth platoon is marching towards its place in 
the line. The other squadrons are brought up upon the line in the 
same manner as the second. The regiment being aligned, the colonel 
commands front. 

615. The regiment being in column with distance, the right in 
front, if it be the wish of the colonel to bring it into line faced to 
the rear, he commands: 

1. Attention. 2. Into line faced to the rear. 3. March. 

(Fig. 147.^) At the second command, repeated by the chiefs of 
the first squadron, the chiefs of the other squadrons command, 
iolumn forward — head of column to the half right. 







At the command march, the first squadron performs the move- 
ment as directed for a single troop or squadron. No. 537. The 
second squadron, and the others in succession, march in a diagonal 



Two squadrons only are figured. 



EVOLUTIONS OP THE REGIMENT. 475 

direction towards the line^ the chief of squadron at its head j when 
at the distance of sixty paces from the line, he commands, head of 
column to the half left, followed by the command, into line faeed to 
the rear, just as the third platoon has taken the new direction, and 
before the fourth has commenced the half-wheel. The squadron is 
then formed into line in the same manner as the first, by the com- 
mands : 1. P^a^oo^i Z^/i' — about ichcel 2. March. 3. Halt. 4. 
Jiight — Dress. 5. Front. The regiment being aligned, the 
colonel commands, front. 

To form a column with distance into line hy the union of two move- 
ments. 

616. The regiment marching in column with distance, the right 
in front, and a portion of the column having changed its direction 
to the right, if it is desired to come into line faced to the front, the 
colonel halts the column, at the moment the fourth platoon of the 
squadron which last entered upon the new direction, has marched 
forward twelve paces after turning to the right, and commands : 

1. Attention. 2. To the left — and front into line. 3. March. 

(Fig. 148.) At the second command, repeated by the field 
officers, the chiefs of squadron who are in the new direction com- 
mand, left into line, wheel. The chief of the squadron immediately 
in rear of the one which entered the new direction last, commands, 
front into line. The chiefs of the other squadrons command, column 
forward — head of column to the half left. At the command march, 
repeated by the field officers and by the chiefs of squadron, the 
portion of the column in the new direction forms to the left into line, 
which the rear portion forms to the fro7it into line. The regiment 
being aligned, the colonel commands, front. 

The column marching left in front, and having changed direction 
to the left, is brought into line to the front, upon the same princi- 
ples, but by inverse means. 

617. The regiment marching in column with distance right in 
front, and one portion having changed direction to the left, to form 
it into line faced to the rear, the colonel halts the column the 



476 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 












'Mh 



M] 



L/ 









// 



/ 



-% 



&cgwi 



.««i>sv- 






EVOLUTIONS or THE REGIMENT. 



477 



moment the fourth platoon of the squadron which last entered the 
new direction has turned to the left, and commands : 

1. Attention. 2. To the left — and upon the head of the third (or 
othei-) squadron — into line faced to the rear. 3. MARCH. 

(Fig. 149.^) At i^e second command, repeated hy the field offi- 
cers, the chiefs of squadron whose squadrons are in the new direc- 
tion (first and second) command, left into line wheel. The chief of the 




squadron in rear of the last which is in the new direction (say the 
third), commands, hy inversion front into line. The chiefs of the 
remaining squadrons command : 1. Column forward. 2. Head, of 
column to the half right. At the command march, repeated by the 
field officers and by the chiefs of squadrons, the squadrons are 
brought into line; those on the new line are brought to the left into 
line, while those in rear, after having been brought hy inversion 
front into line, complete the movement hj platoons left ahout wheel. 
The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands, //-o??^. 

The column marching left in front, having changed direction to 
the right, a portion still being in the old direction, is brought into 
line upon the same principles, but by inverse means. 

618. The regiment being in column with distance, the right in 
front, to form front into line upon a line that the head of the column 
has passed, the colonel commands : 

1 But two squadrons, the second and third, are figured. 



478 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1 Attention. 2. Upon the third (or other) squadron, front into line. 
8. March. 

At the second command, repeated by the field officers, the chiefs 
of squadrons which are in front of the designated squadron com- 
mand, ^/«toows right about wheel. The chief of the third squadron 
commands, front into tine. The chiefs of the fourth and fifth 
squadrons command : 1. Column forward. 2. Head of column to 
the half left. 

At the command march, repeated by the field officers and by the 
chiefs of squadron, the third squadron, and those in its rear, per- 
form the movement front into line with the right in front. The 
chiefs of the first and second squadrons, after having wheeled about 
by platoons, conform to what is prescribed for into line faced to the 
rear upon the head of the column, except that they complete the 
movement by a left about wheel by platoons. 

The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands, /ro??^. 

To form a close column into line upon one of its flanks, or upon the 
prolongation of one of its flanks to the front. 

619. The regiment being in close column, the right in front, to 
form it into line upon the left flank of the column, the colonel 
commands : 

1. Attention. 2. By the rear of the column — left into line wheel. 
3. March. 

(Fig. 150.) At the second command, the chief of the fifth squad- 
ron commands, squadron left wheel. The chiefs of the other squad- 
rons command : 1. Squadrons forward. 2. Guide left. At the 
command march, repeated by the chiefs of squadron, the first four 
squadrons move forward ; the fifth executes its wheel to the left ; 
when it is nearly completed the chief commands : 1. Forward; 
and afterwards : 2. Squadron. 3. Halt. 4. Left — Dress. 5. 
Front. The chief of the fourth squadron commands, squadron 
left wheel, in time to command march, when the fifth squadron 



teiSCT H 



EVOLUTIONS or THE REGIMENT. 479 

0^00 

0^00! \ilr .'-' I\l\ ^Vl! 



0\ 



[^ ^"~-0— ^- 



r— ID E}--— {[}-— aj--r- 

i s P 




BS«ij H 




480 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



I 





L m 

t 1 

— — a 


HI 




EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 481 

has made two-tlilrds of its wheel to the left, completing the move- 
ment as directed for the fifth squadron. The chiefs of the other 
squadrons conform in succession to what has been prescribed for the 
fourth. The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands /ro/i^. 

620. The regiment marching in close column, the right in front, 
to form it into line on the prolongation of the right flank to the 
front, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. On the right into line. 3. March. 

(Fig. 151.) At the second command, the chief of the first 
squadron commands, right. At the command march, he com- 
mands tarn ; when the wheel is nearly completed, he commands : 
1. Forward. 2. Guide right; and when the squadron reaches 
the new line: 1. Squadron. 2. Halt. 3. Right — Dress. 4. 
Front. The chiefs of the other squadrons command, guide rights 
throw themselves to the right of their squadrons, and command in 
succession, right, in time to give the command turn, when their 
squadron has gone the proper distance beyond the left of the 
squadron which precedes; the rest of the movement is executed 
as directed for the first squadron. The regiment being aligned, 
the colonel commands front. 

To deploy a close column. 

621. The regiment being in close column, the right in front, to 
deploy it in advance of the head of the column, on one of the inte- 
rior squadrons, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Upon the third squadron — deploy column. 
3. March. 

(Fig. 152.) At the second command, the chiefs of the first and 
second squadrons command, platoons right wheel; the chiefs of the 
fourth and fifth command, p^orioons left wheel. The chief of the 
third squadron commands, 1. Squadron forward] 2. Guide right. 
At the command march, repeated by all the chiefs of squadron, ex- 
41 2r 



482 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

cept that of the third, their squadrons break by platoons to the riglit 
and lefty when the wheels are nearly complete, the chiefs of the 
first and second squadrons command : 1. Forward. 2. Guide 
left ', those of the third and fourth command : 1. Forward. 2. 
Guide right. They all throw themselves to the head of their 
column. The chief of the third squadron gives the command 
march, when his front is unmasked ; halts his squadron one pace 
behind the line, and commands: 1. Right — Dress. 2. Front. 

The chiefs of the other squadrons march at the head of their 
respective columns, until they have reached the point on the right 
or left that the left or right of their squadron should be from the 
squadron which precedes them on the left or right; they then halt 
in their own persons, allow their squadrons to march past them, and 
command, platoons left wheel, if they are on the right, and, platoons 
right wheel, if they are on the left of the third squadron, in time to 
give the command march, the moment the rear platoon has gotten 
its proper interval; the wheels being nearly completed, the chiefs 
on the right command: 1. Forward. 2. Guide left; those on the 
left: 1. Forward. 2. Guide right. When the squadrons reach 
the rank of file-closers of the squadron on the left or right, the chiefs 
command: 1. Squadron. 2. Halt. 3. Left (or right') — Dress. 4. 
Front. The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands, front. 

622. The squadron on the march in close column, right in front, 
to deploy forward without halting, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. On the first squadron — deploy column. 3. MARCH. 

At the second command, the chief of the first squadron com- 
mands Guide right, and throws himself in front of the centre of 
his squadron ; the other chiefs command, platoons left wheel — trot. 
At the command march, repeated by the chiefs of the last four 
squadrons, the first squadron continues to march ; the others break 
by platoons left wheel — trot, and when the wheel is nearly com- 
pleted, each chief of squadron commands: 1. Forward. 2. Guide 
right. After reaching the point the right of his squadron ought to 
occupy, he halts, allows his squadron to march past him, and com- 
mands, j^^ai^oons right wheel, in time to command march, when his first 



E V L U T I N ft OF THE REGIMENT. 483 

platoon has its proper place ; the wheels being nearly completed, he 
commands : 1. Forward. 2. Gidde right; throws himself in front 
of the centre of his squadron, and when he reaches the line on which 
the first is marching, commands : 1. Walk. 2. March. 

31arch in line. 

623. The regiment being in line, to march it to the front, the 
colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Squadrons forward. 3. The riyht (or left^ squad- 
ron, the squadron of direction. 4. March. 

The second command is repeated by the field officers, and chiefs 
of squadrons ; at the third command, repeated by the field officers, 
the chiefs of squadron command, guide right (or lef) ; and the ad- 
jutant indicates the direction to be taken by the guide of the right 
of the first squadron. At the command march, repeated by the 
field officers, and the chiefs of squadron, the regiment moves ofi", 
and the first squadron conforms to what is prescribed for the march 
of a single troop or squadron, No. 507; the others are careful to 
preserve the alignment and their intervals on the side of the guide. 

The regiment marching in line is halted at the command : 

1 Attention. 2. Squadrons. 3. Halt. 4. Right (or left') — 

Dress. 

The last three commands are repeated by the field officers and the 
chiefs of squadron. The captains align their squadrons, and com- 
mand front. The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands 
front. 

624. The regiment marching in line, with the guide right, to 
cause it to gain ground to the front and flank at the same time, the 
colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 'Z. Platoons right half icheel 3. March. 4. For. 

WARD. 

When the colonel wishes to renew the march to the front, he 
commands : 



484 MANUAL FOE VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. Attention. 2. Platoons left half wheel 3. March. 4. For- 
ward. 

625. To gain ground to the riglit witliout at the same time gain- 
ing to the front, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Platoons right wJieel. 3. March. 4. Forward. 

The regiment having gained sufficient ground to the right, the 
colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 1. Platoons left wheel. 3. March. 4. Forward. 

626. The regiment marching in line with the guide right, to 
cause it to march in retreat, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Platoons right ahout wheel. 3. March. 
4. Forward. 

To cause it to resume the march to the front, the colonel com- 
mands : 

1. Attention. 2. Platoons left ahout wheel. 3. March. 
4. Forward. 

The last three commands are repeated by the field officers and 
chiefs of squadron. 

To change the front of the line. 

627. The regiment being in line, if it is wished to change the 
front of the line so that it shall face to the right, the colonel com- 
mands : 

1. Attention. 2. Change front on the right wing. 3. March. 

At the second command, repeated by the field officers, the chiefs 
of squadron command, platoons right wheel.. At the command 
march, repeated by the field officers and chiefs of squadron, all the 
squadrons break by platoons to the right; when the wheels are 
nearly completed, the chief of the first squadron commands : 1. Front 
into line. 2. March. 3. Guide right. The chiefs of the other 
squadrons command : 1. Forward. 2. Head of column to the 



EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 485 

Imlf left, the rest of the movement is executed as prescribed foi 
coming front into line, the right being in front, No. 535. The 
regiment being aligned, the colonel commands, front. 

628. The regiment being in line, to cause it to change its front 
to the left, at the same time gaining ground to the rear, the colonel 
commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Change front to rear on the right wing. 3. MARCH. 

At the second command repeated by the field ofl&cers, the chiefs 
of squadrons command, ^^afoows right wheel. At the command 
march, repeated by the field officers and chiefs of squadron, all the 
squadrons break by platoons to the right; when the wheels are 
nearly completed, the chief of the first squadron commands : 1. By 
inversion front into line. 2. March. 3. Guide left ; the chiefs 
of the other squadrons command : 1. Forward. 2. Head of 
column to the half right ; the remainder of the movement is exe- 
cuted upon the principles for coming into line faced to the rear. The 
regiment being aligned, the colonel commands front. 

To pass a defile. 

629. The regiment being in line, and it is proposed to pass a 
defile in front of some point of the line, say the interval between the 
third and fourth squadrons, and the defile is wide enough to admit 
the front of a division, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. On the fourth platoon of the third squadron y and 
the first of the fourth, pass the defile in front, 3. March. 

(Fig. 153.) At the second command, repeated by the field offi- 
cers, the chief of the third squadron commands, platoons left loheel 
—fourth platoon forward ; that of the fourth squadron commands, 
platoons right loheel — first platoon f one ard. The chiefs of the first 
two squadrons command, platoons left wheel; and the chief of the 
fifth, j^latoons right wheel. At the command march, repeated by 
the field officers, and the chiefs of squadron, the two platoons desig- 
nated march forward, and obliquing to the right and left, unite ; all 
the others break to the left and right, and the wheels being nearly 
41* 



486 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 




R:- 



t I 






i 



S3 
1^ 



ss 



! ^ 



TT 



•* 



I 



EVOLUTIONS OF THE REGIMENT. 487 

completed, the chiefs of the squadron on the right command : 1 
Forward. 2. Guide left; those of the squadrons on the left: 1. 
Forward. 2. Guide right. The platoons of the right and left- 
columns so regulate their march as that those of the same number 
coming from the head of the column shall reach the turning-point 
at the same time, so that when the turn is complet-ed they may 
march through the defile abreast each other. The column thus 
formed passes the defile presenting the front of a division, and pre- 
serving the distances prescribed for a column of platoons. 

When the two squadrons at the head of the column have cleared 
the defile, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Front into line. 3. March. 

The second command is repeated by the field officers and the 
chiefs of the third and fourth squadrons. At the command march., 
repeated by these same officers, these two squadrons fovm. front into 
line, the head of the columns of platoons obliquing to the right and 
left, in order to regain the interval which should separate squadrons 
The chiefs of the other squadrons continue to march forward, and 
command, those on the right, head of column to the right ; those 
on the left, head of column to the left. The columns move parallel 
to the line of battle, and when the heads of squadrons reach the 
proper points, those of the right column are brought on the left 
into line, and those of the left on the right into line. The regiment 
being aligned, the colonel commands, front. 

630. The regiment being in line, to pass a defile in rear of the 
line, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention. 2. By platoons from the wings, to pass the defile in 
rear of the interval between the third and fourth squadrons. 3. 
March. 

At the second command, repeated by the field officers, the chief 
of the first squadron commands, platoons hreak to the rear hy the 
right, to march to the left. At the command march, repeated by these 
same officers, the first squadron breaks as directed, school of the 



488 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

squadron, No. 664, and the column marches towards the defile in a 
direction parallel to the regiment, until its head reaches the defile, 
when it turns to the left. The chief of the second squadron repeats 
these commands time enough to follow the first squadron at its 
proper distance ; the chief of the fifth squadron at the same time 
commands: 1. Platoons break to the rear hy the left, to march to 
the right. 2. MARCH ; so that the two columns may reach the defile 
at the same time, and join after turning into it, presenting the front 
of a division. The third and fourth squadrons break by the same 
commands, and pass through the defile in the same way as has been 
prescribed for the second and fifth. When the squadrons, after 
having passed the defile, reach the new line established in rear of 
the defile, the first turns to the left, and when the double column 
reaches it, the second turns to the left, and the fifth to the right.' 
When the last platoon of each column has turned into the line, and 
the two are separated by the interval between squadrons, the 
colonel, who marches in rear, commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Column. 3. Halt. 4. To the left and right inio 
line. 5. March. 6. Right — Dress. 

All these commands, except the first, are repeated by the field 
officers and chiefs of squadron. The regiment being aligned, the 
colonel commands, front. 

The Charge. 
631. The regiment marching in line, the colonel commands : 

1. Attention for the charge. 2. Draw — Sabre. 8. Trot. 
4. March. 

The third command is repeated by the field officers, and by the 
chiefs of squadron. At the command march, repeated by these 
same officers, the squadrons take the trot. After having gone 1 50 
paces at this gait, the- colonel commands : 



EVOLUTIONS OF THE 11 E G I M E N T . 489 

1. Gallop. 2. March. 

The first command is repeated by the field officers, and by the 
chiefs of squadron ; and at the command march, also repeated by 
them, the squadrons take the gallop. After having gone about one 
hundred paces at this gait, and being only about sixty paces from 
the supposed line, the colonel causes the charge to be sounded. At 
this sound, repeated by all the trumpets, all the officers command 
charge. The men of the front and rear ranks place their sabres in 
the positions for the charge (see school of the troop, No. 554). 

The colonel wishing to arrest the charge, commands : 

1. Attention. 2. jSqncidrons. 3, Halt, 4. Eight (or le/t) — 

Dress. 

At the command attention^ repeated by all the officers, the squad- 
rons prepare to change the gait, and the troopers return sabres. At 
the command squadrons, repeated by the field officers and chiefs of 
squadron, the chiefs of platoon command platoon, and the squad- 
rons take the trot. At the command halt, repeated by the field 
officers, the chiefs of squadron, and chiefs of platoon, the squad- 
rons halt. 

At the command right (or left^ — dress, repeated by the field 
officers, and by the chiefs of squadron, the squadrons are aligned. 
The regiment being aligned, the colonel commands, front. 

At the sound of the charge, the officers remain in their places in 
line ; the colonel and other field officers place themselves upon the 
officers' line. 

Charge in Column. 

632. The charge in column is employed against infantry formed 
in column or in square. For this purpose, the regiment is formed 
in close column, and the squadrons take in succession a distance 
equal to double their front, so that the first squadron having charged, 
it is promptly followed by the second, which, if the first has made 



490 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

an opening in the square, throws itself into it, and completes its 
overthrow. In case the first squadron is repulsed, it retires by the 
right and left, to re-form in the rear, disengaging the front of the 
second squadron -, this squadron renews the charge ; if it does not 
succeed, it clears the ground for the third ; and thus they continue 
until the charge may have completely failed. 

Such charges, made in rapid succession, ought to finish by break- 
ing the square, if they are directed as they ought to be, against the 
angles, which are the weakest points, unless guarded by artillery. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS, 491 



ARTICLE XI. 

LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 

SCHOOL OF THE PIECE. 

633. Light artillerymen should, before receiving instruction in 
their duties at the piece, be familiar with the first part of the school 
of the soldier, as laid down in Infantry Tactics, and with the Manual 
of the Sabre, No. 440, and following. If intended for horse artil- 
lerymen, they should also be instructed in the duties of the trooper, 
No. 382, and following. 

The drivers — one to every pair of horses — -should have experience 
in the management of horses in harness. 

634. The cannoneers of a piece, when united, constitute a gun 
detachment, which is composed ordinarily of nine men in mounted 
artillery, and eleven in horse artillery ; two of whom — the gunner 
who commands the detachment, and the chief of caisson — should 
be corporals. 

The detachment is formed by the gunner, who causes the can- 
noneers to form in two ranks, eighteen inches between them, 
elbows slightly turning. He tells the detachment off from the 
right. No. 1 being on the right of the rear rank, No. 2 on the right 
of the front rank. No. 3 on the left of No. 1, No. 4 on the left of 
No. 2, and so on, the even numbers being in the front, and the 
odd numbers in the rear rank. The cliief of caisson is told off as 
No. 8. When the detachment is composed of more or less than 
eight men, the chief of caisson should be the highest even number. 



492 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

When the detachment, from any cause, consists of less than nine 
men, the higher numbers are left out, and additional duties arc 
imposed upon the cannoneers present. 

When the chief of the piece, who should be a sergeant, is pre- 
sent, and is not acting as the instructor, he performs the duties, 
and takes the position of the gunner, who then takes post one yard 
in rear of the right file, and acts as file-closer, except when the chief 
of piece is out of ranks, when he resumes his post. 

For purposes of instruction, each detachment should be halted in 
front of, and facing the piece, the latter being unlimbered,^ and the 
difierent numbers called upon successively, to perform their re- 
spective duties in detail, while the rest of the detachment are re- 
quired to attend to the instruction, and to the manner in which the 
motions are performed. 

Posts of the cannoneers. Piece unlimhered. 

635. The gunner is at the end of the trail handspike ; Nos. 1 and 
2 are about two feet outside the wheels. No. 1 on the right, and No. 
2 on the left^ with howitzers, they are rather in rear of the muzzle; 
with guns, in line with the front part of the wheels. Nos. 3 and 4 
are in line with the knob of the cascable, covering Nos. 1 and 2; 
No. 5 five yards in rear of the left wheel ; No. 6 in rear of the 
limber, which is turned about so as to face towards the piece (see 
No. 29) ] and No. 7 on his left, covering No. 5 ; No. 8, the chief 
of the caisson, is four yards in rear of the limber, and on its left; 
all face to the left, which is the direction in which the muzzle of 
the piece is pointing. 

The chief of the piece is opposite the middle of the trail hand- 
spike, outside of, and near the left cannoneers. In actual firing, 
he places himself where he can best observe the effect of the shot. 

' With the limber removed from the body, and carried to the rear, the trail 
resting upon the ground, and the trail handspike in the rings, as shown in 
Fig. 14. The piece is then prepared for firing or for action. The front in 
this case means in front of the muzzle. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 493 

Loading and firing. 

636. The piece is supposed to be upon the drill ground, unlim- 
bcred, and ready for action; the limber is in position behind the 
piece, and facing towards it, the end of the pole six yards from the 
end of the trail handspike; and the detachment in front of and 
facing the piece. 

Before commencing the individual instruction of the cannoneers, 
the instructor should enter into an explanation of the different kinds 
of field guns, their names, and the names and uses of the different 
parts of the gun and carriage before them. This done, he com- 
mences the instruction with the gunner, who commands and points 
the piece in action. 

637. Commanding and pointing. — The gunner is responsible for 
the manner in which the numbers discharge their duty. He com- 
municates the orders which he receives for the kind of ammunition 
to be fired ; sending to No. 6 (who is charged with preparing the 
fuze) the time of flight or the distance for each round, when firing 
shells or spherical- case shot. He should, when the firing is slow, 
see that each fuze is properly prepared, and make such corrections 
as are necessary ; for this purpose, he, as well as No. 6, should be 
provided with a fuze-gouge. 

On receiving the command, or signal to commence firing, he 
gives the command load ; takes hold of the handspike at the end 
with the right hand, and at the centre with the left; places his 
left knee against the left hand, bending over it, the right knee 
being slightly bent ; looks over the top of the piece, and gives the 
direction. He then steps to the breech to give the elevation, which 
he does by placing the hausse (see No. 665) on its seat, taking hold 
of a handle of the elevating screw, drawing back his right foot, 
bending over his left knee, and sighting through the slit in the 
hausse. 

When the piece is loaded and pointed, he removes the hausse, 
gives the command ready, and stepping clear of the wheel to that 
side where he can best observe the effect of his shot, gives the com- 
mand yire. As soon as the piece has been fired, he causes it to be 
run up to its foiTner place, if the recoil has made it necessary. 
42 



494 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

When tlie instructor, instead of giving tlie command commence 
^firing, gives that of load, the gunner repeats it, and performs the 
same duties as before, except that he does not command fire until 
the firing is ordered to commence. After the command to com- 
mence firing is given, the action is continued by the gunners with- 
out further command from the instructor, until the firing is ordered 
to cease. When the commands are all given by the instructor, as 
in loading by detail, the gunner performs the same duties, but with- 
out repeating the commands. 

638. Sponging and ramming. — Until the command load, No. 1 
stands faced to the front, in line with the front of the wheels, hold- 
ing the sponge about the middle of the staff in his right hand, and 
trailing it at an angle of 45°, sponge head up. 

The instructor commands : 

By detail — -Load. 
Three pauses and four motions. 

First motion. At the command load, No. 1 faces to the left, steps 
obliquely to the right with his right foot, without moving his left, 
and at the same time brings the sponge to a perpendicular position 
by drawing his right hand up in line with the elbow. The sponge 
is grasped firmly in the hand, the rammer head held over the right 
toe, and the elbow kept close to the side. 

Second motion. He steps obliquely to the left with his left foot, 
planting it about half way between the piece and the wheel, and 
opposite the muzzle, bringing the sponge at the same time across his 
body to the left, so that his right hand may be opposite the middle 
of the body, the sponge staff being inclined at an angle of 45° 
across the front of it. 

Third motion. He takes a side step to the right of thirty inches 
with the right foot, and bending the right knee, brings the sponge 
to a horizontal position, extending the hands to the ends of the staff, 
the sponge head to the left, the back of his right hand up, and that 
of his left down, the sponge head pressing against the face of the 
piece. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 495 

Fourth motion. He inserts the sponge head, drops his left hand 
behind his thigh, shoulders square, feet equally turned out, straightens 
the right knee, bends the left, and, leaning over it, forces the sponge 
home. 

Sponge. 
Three pauses and four motions. 5 

First motion. At the command sj)onge, No. 1 fixes his eye on the 
vent to see that it is closed, gives two turns to the sponge, pressing 
it at the same time against the bottom of the bore. 

Second motion. He draws out the sponge, at the same time 
straightening his left knee and bending his right, seizes the staff 
near the sponge head with his left hand, back of the hand down, 
and places the sponge against the face of the piece. 

Third motion. He turns the sponge by bringing his hands 
together in the middle of the staff, giving a cant with each hand, 
throwing the sponge head over, at the same time turning his wrists, 
so as to bring the staff to a horizontal position • he then extends his 
hands to the ends of the staff, the back of the left up, that of the 
right down. 

During the whole time of sponging. No. 1 keeps his eye on the 
vent. If at any time it is not closed, he will discontinue the ma- 
noeuvre, and command, stop vent. 

Fourth motion. He introduces the rammer head into the muzzle 
as soon as No. 2 has inserted the charge, and joins his left hand to 
his right, casting his eyes to the front. 

Ram. 

Two pauses and three motions. 

First motion. At the command ram, No. 1 rams home, throwins; 
the weight of his body with the rammer ; bending over his left 
knee, and passing his left arm, with the elbow slightly bent, and 
back of the hand up, in a horizontal position over the knee, until it 
points in the direction of the left trunnion; the right shoulder 



496 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

thrown back^ and the eyes cast towards the front until the cartridge 
is home. 

Second motion. He jerks the sponge out with his right hand, 
allowing it to slide through the hand as far as the middle of the 
staff, when he grasps it firmly, and seizing it close to the rammer 
head with the left hand, back of the hand up, places the rammer 
hand against the face of the piece, straightens his left knee, and 
stands erect ; eyes to his own front. 

Third motion. He then draws the sponge close to his body, and 
immediately steps back outside the wheel, first with the right, then 
with the left foot ; so that when the right foot is brought to it, the 
right hip may be on a line with the front of the wheel. In draw- 
ing the right foot to the left, he gives the sponge a cant with his 
left hand, at the same time quitting it, and brings the sponge to a 
perpendicular position in the right hand, the rammer head resting 
on the right toe. 

Ready. At this command, which is given as soon as the piece 
is loaded, or the firing about to commence, Nx). 1 breaks well off to 
the left with his left foot, bending the left knee and straightening 
the right leg, drops the end of the sponge staff into the left hand, 
back of the hand down, and fixes his eyes on the muzzle. The 
heels should be parallel with the wheel, the body erect on the 
haunches, and the sponge and rammer held in both hands in a hori- 
zontal position, the sponge head to the left. 

The piece having been fired. No. 1 rises on his right knee, ana 
returns to his position as in the third motion of ram. 

At the command load, he steps in and performs his duties in the 
same manner as before. 

When the loading is not by detail. No. 1 goes through all his 
duties at the command load, returns to his position outside the 
wheel, as given in the third motion of ram ; breaks off at the com- 
mand ready, and at the firing of the gun rises, steps in, and performs 
his duties as before. Thi^ he continues until the command cease 
firing is given, at which command he resumes the position he had 
before the first command load. If the sponging has been com- 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 497 

menced wlieii the command cease firing is given, it is completed 
before No. 1 resumes his post. 

In sponging and ramming, if the length of the piece requires it 
the sponge and rammer are to be pressed home in two motions, 
No. 1 extending his right hand to the end of the staff, as soon as it 
reaches the muzzle. 

In sponging lioicitzer^, No. 1 presses the sponge to the bottom of 
the chamber, which should be well sponged out; he wipes the bore 
by rubbing its whole surface, without allowing the sponge to turn 
in his hands. 

639. Loading. — The instructor places No. 2 on the left of the 
piece, where he remains faced to the front until the command load. 
At this command, he faces to his right, and by two oblique steps, 
corresponding to those of No. 1, the first with his left foot, the se- 
cond with his right, at the command two, he places himself near the 
muzzle of the piece. At the command ^/iree, he brings up his left 
foot to the side of the right, and faces to the right, bringing his 
hands together to receive the ammunition from No. 5 ; the cartridge 
in the right, the shot in the left hand. As soon as the sponge is 
withdrawn by No. 1, he faces to the left, and puts the ammunition 
into the muzzle, taking care that the seam of the cartridge does not 
come under the vent, and then steps back, commencing with his 
left foot, to his position outside the wheel, in the same manner that 
No. 1 does. 

At the command ready, he breaks off well to the right with his 
right foot, bending the right knee, and straightening the left knee; 
the body erect on the haunches, the eyes fixed on the muzzle. 

The piece having been fired. No. 2 raises on his left leg, remains 
facing the piece until he hears the command load, or the firing of 
the gun ; then steps in, and performs his duty as before. At the 
command cease firing, he resumes his position outside the wheel, 
and faces to the front. 

With the liowitzer, No. 2 puts in the charge, so that the fuze 
may rest against the rammer head, and No. 1 rams it home very 
carefully. 

640. Serving the vent. — The instructor places No. 3 on the right 
42 * 2 G 



498 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

of the piece, on a line witli the knob of the cascable, and covering 
No. 1 ; he holds the priming wire in his right hand, thumb through 
the ring, the thumb stall on the left thumb; and the tube pouch 
fastened to his waist. 

At the command load he steps to his left, wipes the vent field 
(or surface around the vent) with the thumbstall, which he then 
holds pressed upon the vent, keeping his elbow raised ] his fingers 
on the left side of the piece, so as to allow the gunner to point over 
his thumb ; the right hand on the tube pouch. When the piece is 
sponged, and the charge inserted by No. 2, he jumps to the end of 
the trail handspike, and seizing it with both hands, prepares to 
move it to the right or left, on a signal from the gunner, who taps 
the right of the trail for a movement to the left, and the left of it 
for a movement to the right. As soon as the piece is pointed, the 
gunner raises both hands as a signal to No. 3, who then resumes 
his post. 

At the command ready he steps to the piece, pricks the cartridge, 
taking care not to move the charge, and covers the vent with his 
loft hand as soon as the friction tube is inserted. At the command 
fire he steps to his right, clear of the right wheel, and at the firing 
of the gun, or at the command load, serves the vent as before. 

No. 3 must keep the vent closed from the time the sponge enters 
the muzzle until the charge is inserted by No. 2. 

641. Firing. — The, instructor places No. 4 on the left of the 
piece, opposite No. 3, and covering No. 2 ; he is equipped with a 
tube pouch, and lanyard. 

At the command load, No. 4 inserts the lanyard hook into the 
ring of a primer, and stands fast. 

At the command ready, he steps in with the right foot, drops the 
tube in the vent, takes the lanyard in his right hand, moves to the 
rear so far as to keep the lanyard slack, but capable of being 
stretched, without altering his position, which should be outside the 
wheel, the left foot broken to the left and rear. 

As soon as No. 3 is clear of the wheel after the command yzre 
is given, No, 4 pulls the lanyard briskly and firmly, passing the 
hand, back up, in a downward direction to the rear, so as to keep 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 499 

tlie lanyard hook from flying back in tlie direction of tlie face. 
Should the tube fail to explode the charge, the gunner immedi- 
ately commands, doiit advance, the primer has failed. Upon 
which No. 2 steps inside the wheel, close to the axletree, receives 
a priming-wire over the, wheel from No. 3, and a prepared primer 
from No. 4, pricks, inserts the primer, and resumes his post. At 
the command cease firing, No. 4 secures his lanyard. 

In the absence of No. 4, No. 3 discharges his duties ; after 
pricking the cartridge, he prepares and inserts a friction tube, 
steps to his post, faces the vent, breaks to his rear with his left 
foot, and at the command fitre, discharges the piece. He then 
resumes his post, and tends the vent as before. 

642. Serving Amm.uivition. — The instructor stations No. 5 five 
yards in rear of the left wheel, and covering it. No. 7 in rear of 
and near the left limber wheel, and No. 6 in rear of the limber 
chest to issue ammunition. He is provided with a fuze-gouge, and 
prepares the shells or spherical-case shot, according to the distance 
or time ordered, before delivering them to No, 5. 

To cut the fuze. — Place the projectile between the knees, fuze 
uppermost, and support it with the left hand. Holding the fuze- 
gouge in the right hand, place the left corner of its edge close to, 
and on the right of the graduated mark indicating the time desired ; 
then cut away gradually until tbe composition is exposed for a length 
about ecjual to tlie width of the gouge. Care must be taken not to 
cut the fuzes more rapidly than the demand for shells or case shot 
requires. 

At the command load, No. 5 runs to the ammunition chest, re- 
ceives from No. 7 or No. 6 a single round, the shot in the right 
hand, the cartridge in his left ; takes it to the piece and delivers it 
to No. 2 ; returns immediately for another round, and then halts at 
his post until the piece is fired. In firing shell or spherical-case, 
he exhibits the fuze to the gunner before delivering it to No. 2. 

Ammunition pouches are worn by Nos. 5 and 7, hung from the 
left shoulder to the right side ; the round is so placed in the pouch 
that the cartridge will be to the front. When it is brought up, No. 
5 holds open the pouch, and No. 2 takes out the round with both 



500 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

hands. In rapid firing with round shot and canister, Nos. 5 and 7 
may alternate in delivering the charges. At the command cease 
firing, No. 5 carries the round hack to No. 6. No. 6 should keep 
the lid of the ammunition chest closed as much as possible. At the 
command cease firing, he carefully replaces the ammunition in the 
, chest, and secures the lid, 

643. Loading hy detail. — Eor the instruction of the cannoneers 
united for the service of the gun, the exercise is first conducted by 
detail, the instructor giving all the commands. His commands are: 
Load ly detail — LOAD; TWO, THREE, FOUR: SPONGE; TWO, THREE, 
FOUR; RAM; TWO, THREE : READY; FIRE; CEASE FIRING. 

Yv^hen the men are sufficiently instructed to go through the 
manual, without detail, the commands of the instructor for that pur- 
pose, are: load; commence fi.ri'iig ; cease firing ; or simply, com- 
mence firing, and cease firing. After the command commence firing, 
the action is continued as laid down for loading without detail, until 
the command cease firing is given, which is repeated by the chief 
of the piece and the gunner. 

Moving tlie piece hy Jiand. Piece nnlimLered. 

644. To thefiront. — The cannoneers being at their posts, the in- 
structor commands : 

1. By liand to the front. 2. March. 3. Halt. 

At the first command, the gunner seizes the end of the handspike, 
and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, the spokes of the wheels. No. 1 with his 
left hand; Nos. 2, 3, and 4, with both hands; No. 1 holds the 
sponge with his right hand, the stafi" resting upon his right shoulder, 
sponge head down. At the second command they move the piece 
forward, the gunner raising the trail until the command lialt is given, 
when all resume their posts. 

645. To the rear. — The instructor commands : 

1. By hand to the rear. 2. March. 3. Halt. 

At the first command, the gunner, facing to the rear, seizes the 
handspike with his right hand; Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, seize the wheels 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 



501 



fis before, except that No. 1, holding the sponge in his left hand, 
uses his right hand at the wheel. At the command anarch, they 
move the piece to the rear, the gunner raising the trail^ until the 
command halt is given, when all resume their posts. 



Changing posts. 

646. In order to instruct the men in all the duties at the piece, 
the instructor causes them to change posts. 
For this purpose he commands : 

1. Change posts. 2. March. 

At the command change posts, the men on the right of the piece 
face to the rear ; those who have equipments lay them down ; No. 1 
resting the sponge head on the nave of the wheel. At the com- 
mand inarch, each man takes the place and equipments of the man 
in his front. 



No. 3 


u 




No. 8. 


No. 8 


u 


u 


No. 6. 


No. 6 


u 


a 


No. 7. 


No. 7 


u 


cc 


No. 5. 


No. 5 


ii 


a 


No. 4. 


No. 4 


(C 


iC 


No. 2. 


No. 2 


u 


u 


No. 1. 



The gunner changes with one of the numbers, by special direction 
of the instructor. 

647. Equipments. — The gunner, who is responsible for the equip- 
ments, either distributes them from the limber chest, or they may 
be hung on the neck of the cascable, and distributed by him to the 
proper numbers, at the command, ta7{;e equipments, from the in- 
structor. He receives them again at the command, replace equip- 
ments, making such disposition of them as may be directed. 

Limhering. 

648. To the front. — The instructor commands : 



502 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Limber to the front. 

At this command, jSTo. 1 steps up between the muzzle and the 
wheel, by the oblique steps indicated for loading; turns the staff, 
seizing it with the left hand, at the same time shifting his right, 
t}iQ back of the right up, that of the left down, and passes the 
sponge on its hook; rammer head to the rear, to No. 3, who 
receives the head, secures it against the stop, and keys it up. The 
piece is then brought about by the cannoneers, and the limber, in- 
clining to the right, passes to its place in front of it, being drawn, 
when the horses are not attached, by Nos. 6 and 7, who take hold 
of the end of the pole for the purpose. • 

To bring the piece about, the gunner and No. 5 pass to the right 
of the handspike, and, facing towards the left, seize it, the gunner 
near the end, and No. 5 at the middle, and on his right, raise the 
trail and carry it round to the left; Nos. 1 and 2 bear down upon 
the muzzle, and Nos. 3 and 4, each using both hands, bring the 
wheels around ; No. 3 turning the right wheel to the rear, and No. 
'1 the left wheel to the front. When the piece is brought about, 
the trail is lowered ; Nos. 3 and 4 step within the wheels to avoid 
the limber; Nos. 1 and 2 remain at the muzzle, and the gunner and 
No. 5 step up between Nos. 3 and 4 and the trail, the gunner first 
taking out the handspike, and passing it to No. 4, by whom it is 
put up. 

As soon as the limber is in front of the piece, the gunner com- 
mands, halt, limher up ; upon which the limber halts, the gunner 
and No. 5 raise the trail by means of the handles, and, assisted by 
Nos. 3 and 4 at the wheels, and Nos. 1 and 2 at the muzzle, run the 
piece forward, and place the lunette upon the pintle ; the gunner 
then puts in the key, and all take their posts; when necessary, Nos. 
6 and 7 assist at the trail in bringing the piece about, and in limb- 
ering up. 

649. To the right (or left'). — The instructor commands : 

Limher to the right (or left^. 
The trail is turned to the right (or left), and the piece limbered 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 50o 

up as before; the limber inclining to the right (or left)^ and taking 
its place by a right (or left) wheel. 

C50. To the rear. — The instructor commands : 

Limher to the rear. 

The limber inclines to the right, and takes its place by wheeling 
about to the left ; the piece is then limbered up as before. 

Posts of the cannoneers. Piece limher ed. 

651. Nos. 1 and 2 opposite the muzzle; Nos. 8 and 4 opposite 
the knob of the cascable ; the gunner and No. 5 opposite the rear, 
and Nos. 6 and 7 opposite the front parts of the limber wheels; No. 
8 is on the left, and opposite the limber chest of the caisson. All 
face to the front, which is now in the direction of the pole instead 
of the muzzle, and cover each other in lines one yard from the 
wheels; the even numbers on the right, the odd on the left. The 
chief of the piece is on the left, and, if not mounted, opposite the 
end of the pole ; if mounted, he is near the leading driver, and on 
his left. 

To form the detachment. 

652. To the front. — The instructor commands: 

Detachment — Front. 

The gunner commands, cannoneers, forward, ma7xh ; the even 
numbers move directly to the front ; the odd numbers closing to 
the right upon them when clear of the piece. The gunner files 
then to the left, halts the detachment in front of the piece, and 
faces them to the front. No. 8 moves directly forward, and takes 
his place in the detachment. 

653. To the rear. — The instructor commands : 

Detachment — Rear. 

The gunners command, cannoneers, rear face — march. At the 
command march, the odd numbers move directly to the rear, the 
even numbers closing to the right upon them after passing the 



504 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

piece, the detachment is filed to the left at the proper distance, 
halted by the gunner opposite the piece and faced to the front, No. 
8 taking his proper place in the detachment. 

In forming the detachments in line, they are always, after halt- 
ing, dressed to the right by the gunner. 

Posts of the detachments at their pieces. 

654. In front. — The detachment is in line facing to the front, 
two yards from the end of the pole or the leading horses. 

1)1 rear. — The centre of the detachment in two yards, behind the 
muzzle, and facing it. 

On the 7v'ght or left. — The detachment is in line opposite the axle- 
tree of the limber, and three yards from it. In horse artillerij, it 
is in line with, and three yards from, the leading horses. In all 
cases it faces to the front. 

Change of posts of detachments at their pieces. 

655. From front to rear. — The detachments being in line, in front 
of their pieces, to post them in rear, the instructor commands : 

Detachments — Rear. 

The gunner commands, cannoveers, rear face, march. At the 
command march, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 oblique sufficiently to the left, 
and Nos. 5, 6, 7, and 8 to the right, move along the sides of their 
piece ; reunite as soon as they have passed it, and are halted at the 
proper distance, faced to the front, and aligned to the right by the 
gunner. 

From rear to front. — The instructor commands : 

Detachments — Front. 

The gunner repeats the command, and adds march. At this com- 
mand, the cannoneers oblique; Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4 to the right, Nos. 
5, 6, 7 and 8 to the left; pass their piece, reunite in front, and are 
halted and aligned to the right by the gunner. 

From rear to right (or left). — The instructor commands : 

Detachments — right (or Jeft~). 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 605 

Tlie gunner commands, right (or left) oblique — march, and d^ft&v- 
wsirds forward, Rnd halt, in time to bring the detachment to its post 
on the right or left. He then aligns it to the right. 

In horse artillery, to change from front to rear, the gunners 
command, left reverse, March; Forward; left reverse, March; 
Halt. The left reverse is executed on the same principle as the left 
about ivheelm cavalry tactics. 

From rear to front. — The gunners command, right oblique, 
March; Forward. Left oblique, march ; Forward; Halt. 

From rear to right (or left^. — The gunners command, right (or 
left) oblique; March; Forward; Halt. 

From right (or left) to rear. — The gunners command, right (or 
left) reverse ; March ; FORWARD ; right (or left) reverse, March ; 
Halt. 

If the piece is moving when the last change of post is ordered, 
the gunner halts, or slackens the pace until it passes, and then com- 
mands, left (or right) oblique. March ; FORWARD. 

The commands of the instructor in all these cases are the same as 
in mounted artillery. The movements are executed in the same 
manner when the detachments are dismounted. 

To post the cannoneers at the "piece limbered. 

656. The detachment being formed in- line in front or rear, on 
the right or left, the instructor commands : 

Cannoneers, to your Posts. 

From the front. — The gunner passes the detachment to the right^, 
and commands, to your posts — march. At this command, the can- 
noneers, Nos. 1 and 2, turning to the right, and opening out, file 
to their posts ; halt at their proper places, and face to the front. 

From the rear, right or left. — At the command cannoneers to 
your posts, the gunner, in each case, faces the detachment to the 
left, and marches the cannoneers by that flank to their posts. 

Moving the piece by hand. Piece limbered. 

657. To the front. — The instructor commands ; 
43 



506 manual for volunteers and militia 
1. Forward. 2. March. 3. Halt. 

At the first command, Nos 6 and 7 seize the end of the pole with 
both hands, the gunner and No. 5, facing towards the pole, seize 
the splinter-bar with one hand, and the pole with the other. Nos. 

3 and 4 seize the spokes of the hind wheels with both hands, and 
Nos. 1 and 2 apply both hands at the head of the carriage At the 
second command, all acting together, urge the piece forward until 
the command halt is given, when all resume their posts. 

To the rear The instructor commands : 

1. Bachioard. 2. March. 3. Halt. 

At the first command, all face to the rear ; Nos. 6 and 7 seize the 
end of the pole with both hands ; No. 5 and the gunner seize the 
spokes of the limber, and Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4, those of the hind 
wheels. At the command march, all moving together, move the 
piece to the rear, Nos. 6 and 7 keeping it straight by the use of the 
pole. At the command halt, all resume their posts. 

Unlimhering, and coming into action. 
To the front. — The instructor commands : 
Action — Front. 

658. At this command, the gunner takes out the key, and assisted 
by No. 5, raises the trail from the pintle, and then commands drive 
on, upon which Nos. 6 and 7 reverse the limber, and proceed with 
it to the rear. Again reverse to the left, and halt so that the limber 
shall cover the piece, with the end of the pole six yards from the 
end of the trail handspike. At the same time that the limber moves 
ofi", the piece is brought about in all respects as in limbering to the 
front, except that the gunner and No. 5, without lowering the trail, 
carry it about, each by means of the handle on his own side. Nos. 
6 and 7, when necessary, assist at the trail, after placing the limber 
in position. 

As soon as the piece is brought about, and the trail lowered. No. 

4 takes out the handspike and passes it to the gunner, who fixes it 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 507 

in the trail. No. 1 takes out tlie sponge, No. 3 unkeying it, and 
No. 4 prepares his lanyard. All then take their posts as required 
when the piece is unlimhered. 

To the right (or le/t^. — The instructor commands : 

Action right (or left'). 

659. The piece is unlimhered in the same manner as for action 
front, and placed in the required direction ; the limber wheels to 
the left (or right), and takes its place in rear, by reversing to the 
left (or right). 

To the rear. — The instructor commands : 

1. Fire to the rear. 2. In battery. 

660. At the command in battery, the piece is unlimhered as 
before ; the trail immediately lowered, and the gun prepared for 
action ; the limber moves directly forward at the command drive on, 
from the gunner, and takes its place by coming to the left about. 

Movements ivith the Prolong e. 

661. The piece being in battery, to fix the prolonge to fire retiring, 
the instructor commands : 

Fix prolonge to fire retiring. 

At this command, the limber inclines to the right, wheels to the 
left about, and halts four yards from the trail. No. 5 uncoils the 
prolonge and passes the toggle to the gunner, who fixes it in the 
trail by passing it upwards through the lunette, whilst he attaches 
the other end to the limber by passing the ring over the pintle and 
keying it. 

At the command retire, the cannoneers face about, and all march 
on the left of the piece, except Nos. 1 and 3. They keep the im- 
plements in their hands, and, at the command halt, face about, 
resume their posts, and go on with the firing. 

Should the piece be loaded at the command retire, No. 3 puts in 
the priming wire. At the command halt, he takes it out again, and 
No. 1 rams home. If the command load be given when the piece 



508 MANUAL iOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

is in motion, No. 5 puts in the charge, and No. 2 serves vent, re- 
ceiving from No. 3 the necessary implements for that purpose. 

The piece being in action, to fix the prolonge to fire advancing, 
the instructor commands : 

Fix prolonge to fire advancing. 

At this command, the limber passes its piece on the right and 
halts when in front of it, Nos. 1 and 3 stepping within the wheels 
to avoid the limber. No. 5 uncoils the prolonge, carries it to the 
front, gives the toggle to No. 2, who puts it in the lunette of the 
axle-strap, whilst he places the ring over the pintle and keys it. 

In advancing, the men retain their implements and march at their 
posts. At the command halt, No. 2 takes out the toggle and com- 
mands drive 07i, upon which the limber takes its place in rear, and 
the firing is renewed. 

When the piece is limbered, to fix the prolonge to fire retiring or 
advancing, the same commands are given. The piece is unlimbered, 
and the prolonge attached as before. 

To fix the prolonge passing a ditch, or for any other purpose, the 
command is, fioc prolonge. The prolonge is then fixed to the trail 
as before. 

In moving with the prolonge, the gunner attends the handspike, 
and in changes of direction, is careful to circulate the trail round 
* X proper time to prevent the prolong being cut by the wheels. No. 

clears the prolonge from the limber wheels, and Nos. 1 and 2 
I'om the gun wheels. In wheeling about the limber first backs a 
little and then describes a small circle. In passing a ditch the 
gunner takes out the handspike. 

In fixing the prolonge for any purpose, the caisson wheels or 
reverses, if necessary, so that the horses of the hmber and caisson 
nay face in the same direction. 

To detach the prolonge from the limber and coil it up, the 
instructor commands 

Coil prolonge. 
At this command, the gunner takes out the toggle, and No. 5 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS, 509 

takes off the ring and coils tlie prolonge, first passing tlie ring over 
the upper prolonge hook. 

To coil the prolonge and limber to the rear, the instructor com- 
mandsj coil prolonge — limher to the rear. The prolonge is detached 
and coiled as before, the piece is run towards the limber, which 
reins back on receiving the command rein hack from the gunner, 
and is limbered up. To limber to the front, right, or left, the in- 
structor commands, coil prolonge — limher to the front, 7'ight, or left; 
which is executed as already described, the gunner commanding 
drive on, as soon as the prolonge is detached. 

Service of the gun with diminished numhers. 

662. Disabled men are replaced as soon as possible by the highest 
numbers, or, if men are selected to replace them, the highest num- 
bers will be reduced to fill the vacancies thus created. During 
action, Nos. 1 and 2 may occasionally change places and numbers ; 
the duties of No. 1 are very fatiguing. 

Service of the piece hy two men. — The gunner commands, points, 
serves the vent, and fires ; No. 1 sponges, loads, and serves ammu- 
nition. 

Three men — The gunner commands, points, serves the vent, and 
fires; No. 1 sponges; No. 2 loads and serves ammunition. 

Four men. — The gunner commands and points ; No. 1 sponges ; 
No. 2 loads and serves ammunition ; No. 3 serves the vent and fires. 

Five men. — The gunner commands and points ; No. 1 sponges ; 
No. 2 loads ; No. 3 serves the vent and fires ; No. 4 serves ammu- 
nition. 

Six men. — The gunner commands and points ; No. 1 sponges ; 
No. 2 loads ; No. 3 serves the vent and fires ; Nos. 4 and 5 serve 
ammunition. 

Seven men. — The gunner commands and points ; No. 1 sponges ; 
No. 2 loads ; No. 3 serves the vent, and attends to the trail ; No. 4 
fires ; No. 6 is at the limber, serves ammunition to No. 5, and occa- 
sionally changes with him. 

Eight men.— -1^0. 7 assists No. 6; the other numbers as before. 
43* 



510 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Supply of ammunition when in action. 

663. When it can be done without inconvenience, ammunition 
will be served direct from the rear chest of the caisson, No. 8 per- 
forming the duties prescribed for No. 6 at the limber chest. At 
convenient moments, the ammunition served out by No. 6 will be 
replaced from the rear caisson chest. If the ammunition chest on 
the limber of the piece is exhausted, the limber is replaced by that 
of the caisson, and the empty chest exchanged for the centre one 
of the caisson. 

As a rule, the limber chests, and especially that of the piece, will 
be kept full at the expense of the others, so that in case of a sudden 
movement on the field, there shall always be a sufficient supply of 
ammunition at hand. 

Pointing and Ranges. 

664. To point a piece, is to place it in such a position that the 
shot may reach the object it is intended to strike. To do this, the 
axis of the trunnions, being horizontal, the line of metal, called 
also the natural line of sight, must be so directed as to pass through 
the object, and then the elevation given to the piece to throw the 
shot the required distance. The direction is given from the trail, 
and the elevation from the breech j the trail being moved to the 
right and left by a handspike, and the breech raised or depressed by 
an elevating screw. 

The axis of the piece coincides with that of the cylinder of the 
bore. 

The line of sight in pointing is the line of direction from the eye 
to the object. It lies in a vertical plane, passing through, or parallel 
to ih.e axis of the piece. 

The angle of sight is the angle which the line of sight makes 
with the axis of the piece. 

The natural line of sight is the straight line passing through the 
highest points of the base ring, the swell of the muzzle, muzzle 
sight, or muzzle band. 

The natural angle of sight is the angle which the natural line of 
sight makes with the axis of the piece. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 5IJ. 

The dispart of a 'piece is half the difference between the diame- 
ters of the base ring and swell of the muzzle, or the muzzle band. 

By range is commonly meant the distance between the piece and 
the object which the ball is intended to strike; or, the first graze of 
the ball upon the horizontal plane on Which the carriage stands. 
Point-hlanh range is the distance between the piece and the point- 
blank. Extreme range is the distance between the piece and the 
point where the ball finally rests. 

665. Theory of pointing . — The point-hlanh \% the second point of 
intersection of the trajectory or curve described by the projectile in 
its flight with the line of sight. As the angle of sight is increased, 
the projectile is thrown farther above the line of sight, and the tra- 
jectory and point-blank distance becomes more extended. 

The point-blank range increases with the velocity^ the diameter^ 
and the density of the ball. 

A piece is said to be aimed point-hlanh when the line of metal, 
which is the natural line of sight, is directed upon the object. This 
must be the case when the object is at point-blank distance. When 
at a greater distance the pendulum-hausse, or the tangent scale, is 
raised upon the breech until the sight is at the height which the 
degree of elevation for the distance may require. An artificial 
line of sight, and an artificial point-blank are thus obtained, and 
the piece is aimed as before. 

The different lines, angles, etc., which are to be taken into account 
in pointing, will be understood by the following figure : 




^^^^ 



A B, axis of the piece. B E I F, trajectory, or curve described 
by the ball. C F, line of sight. C D A, angle of sight or dispart. 
The ball being thrown in the direction of the axis A B, is acted 
upon by the force of gravity, and begins to fall at once below mat 
line at the rate of 16^ feet for one second, 64 J for two, 144| for 
three, and so on in proportion to the time. It cuts the line of sio'ht 



512 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

at E, a sliort distance from the muzzle of the piece, and descendini^, 
again cuts at the point F. This second point of intersection is the 
point-blank. 

Pendidum-hausse. — The instrument at present in most general 
use in pointing field guns at objects beyond the natural point-blank, 
is called a pendulum-hausse, of which the component parts are 
denominated the scale, the slider, and the seat. The scale is made 
of sheet brass; at the lower end is a brass bulb filled with lead. 
The slider is of thin brass, and is retained in any desirable position 
on the scale by means of a brass set screw with a milled head. The 
scale is passed through a slit in a piece of steel, with which it is 
connected by a brass screw, forming a pivot on which the scale can 
vibrate laterally ; this slit is made long enough to allow the scale to 
take a vertical position in any ordinary cases of inequality of the 
ground on which the wheels of the carriage may rest. The ends of 
this piece of steel form two journals, by means of which the scale is 
supported on the seat attached to the piece. The seat is of iron, 
and is fastened to the base of the breech by three screws, in such 
manner that the centres of the two journal notches shall be at a 
distance from the axis equal to the radius of the base ring. 

A mtizzle-siglit of iron is screwed into the swell of the muzzle of 
guns, or into the middle of the muzzle ring of howitzers. The 
height of the sight is equal to the dispart of the piece, so that a 
line from the top of the muzzle sight to the pivot of the scale is 
parallel to the axis of the piece. Consequently the vertical plane 
of sight passing through the centre line of the scale and the top of 
the muzzle sight, will be also parallel to the axis in any position of 
the piece ; the scale will therefore always indicate the angle which 
the line of sight makes with the axis. 

The hausse, when not in use, is carried by the gunner in a leather 
pouch, suspended by a shoulder-strap. 

On pointing. 

666. As it is impossible to point a piece correctly without know- 
ing the distance of the object, artillery men should be frequently 
practised in estimating distances by the eye alone, and rectifying 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 513 

the estimate afterwards, either by pacing the distance, or by actual 
meiusurement with a tape-line or chain, until they acquire the habit 
of estimating them correctly. 

Shc/ls are intended to burst in the object aimed at; spherical-case 
sJiot are intended to buret from fifty to seventy-five yards short of it. 

Shell or spherical-case firing, for long ranges, is less accurate 
than that of solid shot. 

At high elevations, a solid shot will range farther than a shell or 
spherical-case shot of the same diameter fired with an equal charge. 
But at low elevations, the shell or spherical-case will have a greater 
initial velocity, and a longer range. If, however, the charges are 
proportioned to the weights of the projectiles, the solid shot will 
in all cases have the longest range. 

The velocity or range of a shot is not affected in any appreciable 
degree by checking the recoil of the carriage, by using a tight wad, 
or by different degrees of ramming. 

The principal causes which disturb the true flight of the pro- 
jectile, are as follows: 

1st. If the wheels of the carriage are not upon the sam.e hori- 
zontal plane, the projectile will deviate towards the lowest side of 
the carriage. 

2d. If the direction of the wind is across the line of fire, devia- 
tions in the flight of the projectile will be occasioned, and in pro- 
portion to the strength of the wind, the angle its direction makes 
with the line of fire, and the velocity of the projectile. 

3d. If the centre of gravity of the projectile be not coincident 
with the centre of figure, the projectile will deviate towards the 
heaviest side, that is, in the same direction that the centre of gravity 
of the projectile, while resting in the piece, lies with regard to the 
centre of figure. Therefore, if a shot be placed in the piece so 
that its centre of gravity is to the ri(/ht of the centre of the ball, the 
shot will deviate to the right; and vice versa. If the centre of 
gravity be above the centre of figure, range will be increased ; if 
below, it will be diminished. 

Solid shot should be used from 350 yards upwards ; the use of 
canister should begin at 350 yards, and the rapidity of the fire in- 

2h 



514 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

creases as the range diminishes. In emergencies, double charges 
of canister may be used at 150 or 160 yards, with a single cart- 
ridge. 

Spherical-case should not, as a general rule, be used for a less 
range than 500 yards; and neither spherical-case nor shells should 
be fired at rapidly advancing bodies, as, for instance, cavalry 
charging. 

The fire of spherical-case and of shells on bodies of cavalry in 
line or column, and in position, is often very effective. To the 
destructive effects of the projectile are added the confusion and 
disorder occasioned amongst the horses by the noise of their explo- 
sion ; but neither shells nor spherical-case should be fired so rapidly 
as solid shot. 

In case of necessity, solid shot may be fired from howitzers. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

Composition of tlie Battery ^ and the officers and men necessary to 

man it. 

667. The battery is composed of four, six, or eight pieces ; six 
pieces will be supposed. It is divided into three sections of two 
pieces each, denominated the right, centre, and left sections, accord- 
ing to their position in line. The battery is commanded by a 
captain ; each section is commanded by a, lieutenant, called the 
chief of section, and an additional lieutenant is necessary to com- 
mand the line of caissons. Each piece is commanded by a sergeant, 
as chief of the piece, while the gunner and chief of caisson are 
corporals. The officers and men necessary to man the battery con- 
stitute a company, which is divided into as m^axij platoons as there 
are pieces. Each platoon is composed of the drivers and cannoneers 
of a single piece, and is commanded by the chief of the piece ; 
the cannoneers of a piece, as already stated in the school oP the 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 515 

piece^ constitute the gun detachment. When the drivers and can- 
noneers form together, the drivers form on the left. 

Two platoons constitute a section. 

In addition to the platoons, there should be 2k first (or orderly) 
ser^ea??^ attached to the company; 2, quartermaster sergeant ; two 
buglers or trumpeters ; one guidon ; and as many artificers as may 
be necessary to keep the guns, carriages, harness, etc., in order. 

When the company is formed, the platoons form in line in the 
order of their pieces. 

Posts of the officers, non-commissioned ofiicers, etc. 

668. The captain commanding goes where his presence may be 
necessary, or his commands best heard. His position, in the order 
in line, is four yards in front of the centre of the company ; in the 
order in column, or when the company is faced hy a flank, four 
yards outside the flank in the first case, and from the company in 
the second, and opposite the centre. 

The lieutenants commanding sections in line or in column of sec- 
tions, are two yards in front of the centres of their respective sec- 
tions; in columns of platoons or of detacliments, or when faced by 
a flank, they are two yards outside the marching flank, and opposite 
the centres of their respective sections ; except that when faced by 
a flanJc, the chief of the leading section takes his place at the side 
of the leading file. 

The chief of the line of caissons, is four yards in rear of the 
centre of the company when it is in line ; when it is in column or 
faced by a flank, he is four yards outside the pivot flank, and oppo- 
site the centre of the company. 

The chiefs of pieces, when the company is in line, in column of 
sections, or faced by a flank, are on the right of the gun detach- 
ments of their respective platoons, in the front rank. In column 
of platoons, or of detachments, they are one yard in front of the 
centre of their platoons or of their gun detachments. 

The gunners, when the company is in line, or in column of sec- 
tions, are one yard behind the right files of their respective gun 
detachments. In column of platoons, or detachments, they are on 



616 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the right of the gun detachments. When faced by a flanh, they 
face with the company, and retain their relative positions. 

The chiefs of cannons are in their places in the ranks as No. 8 
of the gun detachments, or as the front rank men on the left of their 
platoons. 

The first sergeant, when the company is in line, is on the right 
of the front rank, and one yard from it; when it is in column, he is 
on the marching flank, one yard outside the section, platoon, or de- 
tachment nearest him when in line. When the company faces by 
a flank, he faces with it. 

The quartermaster sergeant is on the left of the company, and 
occupies positions corresponding to those of the first sergeant on 
the right. 

When the company is in line, the buglers are on the right of the 
first sergeants, in one rank, and two yards from line ; in column 
they are six yards in front or rear of the subdivision next them in 
line, according as that subdivision forms the head or rear of the 
column. When the company is faced by a flank, they face also. 

The artificers occupy positions on the left of the company, corre' 
spending to those of the musicians on the right. 

The guidon forms with the musicians, or takes such position as 
the captain prescribes. 

Manning the Battery. 

699. The gun detachments and teams, having been probably tolled 
off, are marched to the battery, or park, with the teams in front. 

The chiefs of pieces and caissons, when mounted, march with the 
teams ; when the teams reach the battery, they are hitched by the 
drivers. 

In forming the detachments they are formed in line, touching 
each other, and in positions corresponding to the positions of their 
pieces in the battery. The chiefs of section, etc., are at their posts 
as directed for the company in line. 

The detachments are marched to the battery, either in column or 
in line, as circumstances may require. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 517 

Each detachment is halted by its gunner when opposite its piece, 
and wheeled into line. 

If approaching from the front or rear, the detachments are formed 
in line facing the battery, in the same order as their pieces, and 
the captain commands : 

Detachments, opposite your Pieces. 

At this command, each detachment is wheeled or faced in the 
proper direction by its gunner, marched opposite its piece, and formed 
in line. 

The captain, after all the detachments have been halted in front 
or rear of their pieces, commands : 

Cannoneers, to your Posts. 

At this command the gunners face their detachments, and all 
take their posts, as directed in No. 656. 

The position of the detachment in horse artllUrij, is habitually 
two paces in rear of the muzzle of the piece, but its position may be 
changed by the means laid down in No. 655. 

During the manoeuvres of mounted artillery, the cannoneers are 
seated on the ammunition chests as follows : The gunner, and Nos. 
5 and 6, on the limber chest of the piece, the gunner on the right; 
and No. 5 on the left ; Nos. 1, 2, and 7 on the limber chest of the 
caisson. No. 2 on the right, and No. 1 on the left ; Nos. 3, 4, and 
8 on the middle chest of the caisson, No. 4 on the right, and No. 3 
on the left. 

When circumstances require it, Nos. 6 and 7 may be directed to 
mount the rear chest of the caisson. They sit with their backs to 
the front^ No. 6 on the right. 

To mount and dismount the Cannoneers. 

670. To mount, — The captain halts the battery, if not already ac 
a halt, and commands : 

1. Cannoneers, p?*epare to mount. 2. Mount. 

At the first command, the cannoneers run to their respective 
places, and stand facing the chests which they are to mount^ the 
44 



518 MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

gunner and No. 5 in rear of the gun limber ; No. 6 on the right of 
the gunner ; Nos. 1 and 2 in rear of the caisson limber ; No. 7 on 
the left of No. 1 ; Nos. 3 and 4 in front of the middle chest of the 
caisson; No. 8 on the right of No. 3. The gunner and Nos. 2 and 
3 seize the handles with the right hand, and step upon the stocks 
with the left foot, and Nos. 5, 1, and 4, seize the handles with the 
left hand, and step upon the stocks with the right foot. 

At the command mount, the gunner, and Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, 
spring into their seats. The gunner, and Nos. 5, 1, and 2, seat 
themselves in their places with their backs to the front, and imme- 
diately face about, by throwing their legs outward over the 
handles. 

No. 8 then springs into his seat in the same manner as No. 3 ; 
Nos. 6 and 7 step in rear of their chests, place their hands upon 
them, step upon the stocks with their nearest feet, spring up, step 
over the boxes and take their seats, placing their hands on the 
shoulders of the men already seated in order to steady themselves. 

When the command cannoneers, mount, is given by itself, the 
men run to their places and spring into their seats at once, No. 8 
taking his seat before No. 3. 

671. To dismount. — The captain halts the carriages as before, and 
commands : 

1. Cannoneers, prepare to dismount. 2. Dismount. 

At the first command, the cannoneers stand up in their places, 
except the gunner and No. 5, who face about. At the second com- 
mand, the whole jump ofi" and run to their posts. 

When the command cannoneers, dismount, is given by itself, the 
men jump from their chests in the same manner. 

The cannoneers always dismount at the command, action front, 
right (or left). They also dismount at the command in hattery, as 
soon as the carriage on which they are mounted halts. 

In liorse artillery, the gunner dismounts the cannoneers when the 
command action front, right or left, or in hattery, is given, and all 
move to their posts in double quick time, and unlimber as rapidly 
as possible. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 519 

The object of mounting the cannoneers on the ammunition chests, 
is generally to enable the battery to make quick movements. 

To unpark. 

672. Everything being prepared for manoeuvring, if the captain 
wishes to unpark by the right, he commands : 

1. By piece — from the right — front into column. 2. March. 

At the command march, the right piece, followed by its caisson, 
marches direct to the front, and the captain indicates the direction 
it should take. The other pieces and caissons follow the movement 
of the right piece, each so regulating its march by that which pre- 
cedes it, as to march in the same direction, and two yards behind. 
Each chief of section directs the march of his carriages, which are 
so conducted by their chiefs as to enter the column by the most 
simple movement. The column of pieces is thus formed with a dis- 
tance of two yards between the carriages ; and in horse artillery 
with the same distance between the carriages and detachments. 

The captain goes wherever his duty may require, but generally 
remains on the left flank, opposite the centre of the column. 

The chief of the leading section places himself near the chief of 
the leading piece, and on his left ; the other chiefs of sections four 
yards from the left flank, abreast the centres of their respective 
sections. 

The chief of the line of caissons is in rear of the chief of the 
centre section. 

Each chief of piece and caisson, when mounted, is near his lead- 
ing driver, on the left. 

The trumpeter is near the captain. 

When the battery is parked with the caissons in front, the cap- 
tain causes it to unpark by the right by the same commands ; the 
movements being executed in the same manner. 

The battery may be unparked by the left according to the same 
principles and by inverse means. 

The column of pieces is not to be considered a column of ma- 
noeuvre. It will be changed into a column of sections as soon as 



520 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

tlie nature of the gronnd will permit. But the exigencies of ser- 
vice sometimes require that formations into line and battery should 
he made directly from the column of pieces. In such cases, the 
principles and commands laid down for similar formations from the 
column of sections; will govern. In the formations to the right or 
Isftj the pieces must close up, and wheel successively when opposite 
thoir proper places. 

To Rait. 

To halt the battery, when marching in column of pieces, the cap- 
tain commands : 

1. Column. 2. Halt. 

At the second command, repeated by the chiefs of sections, all 
the carriages are immediately halted. 

Choinje of gait. 

673. The changes of gait, in column of pieces, are executed by 
the following commands from the captain : 

To pass from the walk to a trot. 

1. Trot. 2. March. 
To pass from a trot to a walk. 

1. Walk. 2. March. 

At the first command, repeated by the chiefs of sections, all the 
drivers and others on horseback prepare to change the gait; and at 
the second, repeated in like manner, they pass at once to the gait 
indicated by the first command. 

To form sections. 

674. When the battery is marching at a walk in column of pieces, 
to form sections at the same gait by gaining ground to the left, the 
captain commands : 

1. Form sections — left ohlique. 2. March. 3, Guide riglit. 

(Fig. 154.) The chief of the leading section repeats the com- 
mands, Form section — left ohliqiie — march ; guide right, in sue- 



«=> 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS 

-HUf 






/^ 



y 






m 



V 



t 









•tat 



/ 



ft 



44* 



^ 



4i. 






«»5j 



*hi-. 



•^^\ 



"Wv f 


j 


'^|i 


1 


* ofe\ 


¥ 


1 «r-^ 


i 


«=». \ 


{ 


s 




ft. 


..1 


«B '\ 


■■■j 




j 



I 

li 

4f' 



1 



?^« 






1 



4* 

■Kit 






621 



522 MANUAli FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

cession after the captain. At the command march, the two first 
carriages, piece and caisson, continue to march, and halt when they 
have advanced five yards. The two following gain their interval of 
fourteen yards by obliquing to the left, and place themselves abreast 
and parallel with the other two. 

The other sections continue to march in column of pieces, and 
are formed successively by their chiefs ] each commanding, form 
section — left ohJique, in time to command march, when the leading- 
carriage of his section has arrived within five yards of its distance. 
The chief of section then commands, guide right. 

When the column of pieces is marching at a trot, the formation 
is executed according to the same principles and by the same com- 
mands. But the leading carriages, instead of advancing five yards 
and halting as before, pass to a walk as soon as the command march 
is repeated by the chief of section. The other sections continue to 
march at a trot, and execute the movement at that gait ; the tw^o 
leading carriages of each section passing to a walk at the command 
march, which must be given when they have closed to their proper 
distance. 

When the column of pieces is at a halt, the formation is executed 
as prescribed for the column at a walk. In this case the carriages 
all move at the command march, and the leading ones halt after 
advancing five yards. 

When the column of pieces is marching at a walk, to form sec- 
tions at a trot gaining ground to the left, the captain commands : 

1. Form sections — left ohlique — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 

The chief of the leading section repeats the commands, form sec- 
tion — left ohlique — trot; march; guide right, in succession, after 
the captain. At the command march, the two leading carriages 
continue to march in the original direction at a walk. The two 
following oblique to the left, gain their interval at a trot, and resume 
the walk when opposite the leading carriages. 

At the first command, the chiefs of the other sections command 
trot; and at the second, which they repeat, their sections commence 
the trot. 



L I a li T ARTILLERY TACTICS. 523 

The chiefs of the second and third sections command, /or??^ sec- 
tion — le/t oblique, in time to command inarch, when the leading car- 
riage of each section has nearly gained its distance. The leading 
carriage then resumes the walk, and the chief of section commands, 
guide ri(jht. 

The chiefs of sections superintend their carriages, and take the 
posts assigned them in the order in column as soon as their sections 
are formed. 

Sections are formed by gaining ground to the right according to 
the same principles and by inverse means. 

The haitery being in column of pieces to form the caissons on the 

fianh. 

675. When the battery is in column of pieces with the caissons 
in rear, to form the pieces and caissons into separate columns, as in 
the flank march of a battery in line, the captain commands : 

1. Caissons left (or Caissons left — trot'). 2. March. 3. Guide right. 

These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections, the cais- 
sons oblique at once to the left, gain the interval of fourteen yards, 
and place themselves opposite their pieces ; the pieces closing upon 
each other at the same time to the usual distance. The gait is re- 
gulated as in the formation of sections; and when the movement is 
performed at a walk, the leading carriage halts after advancing its 
own length. 

The chiefs of sections take their places as in column of sections. 

The caissons are formed on the right according to the same prin- 
ciples and by inverse means. 

When the pieces are in rear, they are formed on the right or left 
of their caissons in the same manner and by corresponding com- 
mands. 

To march in column. 

G76. The battery being in column at a halt, to advance, the cap- 
tain commands : 

1. Column — forward. 2. March. 3. Guide left (or right). 



524 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The commands forward — march; guide left (or righf), are re- 
peated by the chiefs of sections. At the command march, all the 
carriages advance, the guide maintains the direction, and the car- 
riages, as well as the detachments of horse cannoneers, preserve 
their intervals and distances. 

To march hy a flanh. 

677. The battery being in column, in march or at a halt, to gain 
ground to the left, the captain commands : 

1. Column — by the left flanh. 2. March. 

(Fig. 155.) The commands, hy the left flanh — march, are re- 
peated by the chiefs of sections. At the command march, each car- 
riage wheels at once to the left. 

When the wheel is nearly completed, the captain commands : 

1. Forward. 2. Guide right. 

These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the 
command forward, all the carriages march direct to the front. 

The line is regularly established, and the carriages aligned in 
each rank, with their distances of two, and intervals of fourteen 
yards. The chiefs of sections take their places between the leading 
carriages as in line. 

To cause the battery to resume its original direction, the captain 
commands : 

1. Battery — hy the right flanh. 2. MARCH. 3. Forward. 
4. Guide left. 

The commands, hy the right flanh — march; forward; guide 
left, are repeated and executed according to the principles before 
described. 

After the flank march, to march the battery in a direction oppo- 
site to the original one, the captain commands : 

1. Battery — hy the left flanh. 2. March. 3. FORWARD. 4. 
Guide right. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 



525 



]p\ ^^i 



■^^ 






ioi- 



-Ipl- 



]■• ill--"- 






■0-(]i -^^^ -0-J>i 



•Ttr^i 



-D-ii 



-Q-g 



g » 



li,]. .fa;- 

0' 



i-l^- 






^-Djl 



■■^ii 



526 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

In horse artillery the flank marcli is executed according to the 
same principles, and by the same commands. The line formed by 
the flank movement is established, and the carriages aligned in each 
rank, with distances of five and intervals of fourteen or twenty-one 
yards, according to the relative position of the pieces and caissons. 
The detachments wheel in the same direction as their pieces ; and, 
after following them during a part of the movement, place them- 
selves by their sides, two yards from the wheels, with the Jieads of 
their leading horses on a line with the axle-trees of the limbers. 
In marching by the left flank they are on the left of their pieces, 
and the reverse when marching by the right. When sufficient 
ground has been gained to the flank, and the battery resumes its 
formation in column by marching in the original direction, the de- 
tachments wheel in the same direction as their pieces and place 
themselves in their rear. But when the march in column is in the 
opposite direction, they resume their places by allowing their pieces 
to pass them and then falling in their rear. 

The flank march, to gain ground to the right, is executed accord- 
ing to the same principles and by inverse means. 

In each case the captain and the chief of the line of caissons 
change their direction to the left or right, and conform to the move- 
ments of the battery. 

Oblique march. 

678. The battery being in column, in march or at a halt, to cause 
it to march obliquely to gain ground to the front and left, the cap- 
tain commands : 

1. Column — left oUique. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 

The chiefs of sections repeat the commands, left oblique; 
march; guide right. At the command march, all the carriages 
oblique at once to the left, and march direct to the front in the new 
direction ; moving in parallel lines, dressing by the right, and pre- 
serving their intervals from that flank. 

In obliquing, the heads of the horses in each rank are on a line 
parallel to the original front of the column. The interval between 
the carriages is fourteen yards, measured parallel to the front; and 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 527 

only ten if measured perpendicularly to tlie oblique direction. 
Each carriage of the rio-ht file marches in the prolongation of the 
left carriage of the rank which precedes its own, and at a distance 
of nine yards. 

The officers conform to the movement and preserve their relative 
positions. 

To resume the original direction the captain commands : 

FORAVARD. 

This command is repeated by the chiefs of sections, and the car- 
riages resume the original direction by obliquing to the right. 

If the captain wishes to halt the column for the purpose of recti- 
fying its alignments, intervals, or obliquity, he commands : 

1. Column. 2. Halt. 
And to resume the march in the oblique direction : 
1. Column. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 

The commands halt; march; guide right, sue repeated by the 
chiefs of sections. 

The right oblique is executed according to the same principles 
and by inverse means. 

Passage of carriages in column. 

679. When the battery is marching in column at a walk, to 
change the relative positions of the front and rear ranks, without 
altering the gait, the captain commands : 

1. Pieces pass your caissons (or caissons pass your pieces'). 
2. March. 

These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections ; and at 
the command march, the leading carriages of each section halt. 
Those of the rear rank execute the passage without changing the 
gait, and halt as soon as they have reached their positions in front. 



528 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

To continue the march without halting the carriages of the rear 
rank, the captain commands forvmrcl, when the passage is nearly 
completed, and the command is repeated by the chiefs of sections. 

When the column is marching at a trot, the passage is executed 
according to the same principles and by the same commands, except 
that the carriages of the front rank move at a walk instead of halt- 
ing at the command march. The carriages of the rear rank exe- 
cute the passage at a trot, and then change the gait to a walk. 

When the column is at a halt, the passage is executed according 
to the same principles and by the same commands. If the captain 
wishes to put the column in march immediately after the movement, 
he commands forward, when the passage is about being completed, 
and then guide left (or righf). These commands are repeated by 
the chiefs of sections. 

W^hen the column is marching at a walk, to execute the passage 
at a trot, the captain commands : 

1. Pieces pass your caissons — trot, (or caissons pass your pieces — 
trot). 2. March. 

These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the 
command march, the carriages of the front rank in each section 
continue to march at a walk. Those of the rear rank execute the 
passage at a trot, and resume the walk as soon as the passage is com- 
pleted. 

About in column. 

680. The battery being in column, in march or at a halt, to face 
it to the rear, the captain commands : 

1. Pieces and caissons — left about. 2. March. 

These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections; and at 
the second all the carriages execute the about. When the move- 
ment is about being completed, the captain commands, column — 
halt ; or forward — guide right (or left ;) the commands, halt, or for- 
ward — guide right (or left), are repeated by the chiefs of sections. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 629 

Countermarch in column. 

681, The battory being in column, in marcb or at a halt, to exe- 
cute the countermarch in each section, the captain commands : 

1. Countermarch. 2. MARCH. 

These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections, and at the 
second each piece and its caisson execute the countermarch. When 
the movement is about being completed the captain commands, 
column — halt ; ov forward ; guide right (or left.') 

These commands are repeated as in the preceding paragraph. 

To change direction in column. 

682. The battery being in column, in march or at a halt, to cause 
it to change direction to the left, the captain commands : 

Head of column to the left. 

The chief of the leading section commands, left wheel — march; 
and afterwards, forward. At the command march, the pivot car- 
riage executes the wheel without changing the gait. The carriage 
on the wheeling flank wheels in such a manner as to conform to its 
movement; increasing the gait, and preserving the intervals. At 
the command /oriy« re?, the pivot carriage moves direct to the front, 
and the other resumes its original gait after completing the wheel 
and arriving upon the same line. The carriages of the rear rank 
preserve their distance and follow those of the front rank. 

Each of the other sections, on arriving at the point where the 
first wheeled, executes the same movement, and by the same com- 
mands from its chief. 

Each chief of section must give the command left wheel in time 
to command march, when the heads of his leaders are three yards 
from the wheeling point. And the command forward must be 
given, as soon as the leading pivot carriage has entered the new 
direction. 

The change of direction to the right is executed according to the 
same principles, and by inverse means. 
45 



530 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

To dimmish the front of a column on the march. 

683. The battery marcliing at a walk in column of sections, to 
form column of pieces from the right, at that gait, the captain com- 
mands : 

1. By the right — hreuh sections. 2. MARCH. 

(Fig. 154.) The chief of the leading section commands, suc- 
cessively, after the captain, hy the riglit — hreah section; march. 
At the command march, the two right carriages of the leading sec- 
tions continue to march at a walk, and all the other carriages halt. 
The left carriages of the leading section remain halted, until the 
leaders of the leading carriage are passed by the wheel horses of 
the rear carriage on the right. They then oblique to the right, 
take their places in column, and follow the two leading carriages. 
The other sections are broken in succession by the same commands 
from their chiefs ; the command march being given when the wheel 
horses of the left carriages of the next preceding section enter the 
right oblique. 

When the column is marching at a trot, the column of pieces is 
formed according to the same principles and by the same commands. 
But in this case the carriages which halted before slacken the gait 
to a walk, and resume the trot to oblique and enter the column. 

When the column is at a halt, the movement is executed as pre- 
scribed for a column marching at a walk ; the two right carriages 
of the leading section moving forward at a walk at the command 
march. 

The battery marching at a walk in column of sections, to form 
column of pieces from the right at a trot, the captain commands : 

1. By the right — hreah sections — trot. 2. March. 

The chief of the leading section commands successively, after 
the captain, hy the right — hreak section — trot; march ; and the 
right carriages qf the leading section move forward at a moderate 
trot. The left carriages of the same section commence the trot on 
obliquing to enter the column. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 531 

The other sections are broken successively by the same com- 
mands from their chiefs; and the carriages are regulated by each 
other, as in breaking sections at a walk. 

This formation is executed from the left, according to the same 
principles and by inverse means. 

In column with tlie caissons on tlie Jianh, to replace them in front 

or rear. 

684. The battery being in column with the caissons on the flank, 
to re-establish them in rear of their pieces, the captain commands : 

1. Caissons rear (or caissons rear — trot). 2. MARCH. 

Each chief of section repeats the commands in time to command 
march, when the leading piece of his section is to commence the 
movement. The piece at the head of the column moves forward 
with the required gait, and its caisson places itself in rear by an 
oblique. The other pieces move forward in succession, and are 
followed by their caissons in like manner. 

All the carriages preserve the usual distance in column. 

This movement is performed with the different gaits, and accord- 
ing to the principles prescribed for breaking sections. 

The formation for placing the caissons in front is executed by the 
commands, caissons front (or caissons front — trot^ ; march, the 
caissons obliquing successively in front of their pieces. 

To pass from the order in column to the order in line, and the reverse. 

In all formations in line or column, the movements are the same 
whether the pieces or caissons lead. 

Forward into line. 

685. The battery being in column at a halt, to form it into line 
on the head of the column, gaining ground to the left, the captain 
commands : 

1. Forwards into line — left ohlique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 

4. Front. 



582 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA, 

(Fig. 156.) At the first command, the chief of the leading 
section commands, section — fortcard, and those of the other sections, 
section — left ohliqne. At the command march, repeated by the 
chiefs of sections, the leading section moves to the front, and its 
chief repeats the command for the guide. After advancing eighteen 
yards, or for horse artillery twenty-two, he commands, section — halt; 
right — dress. 

Each of the other chiefs of sections repeats the command for 
the guide, and conducts his section by a left oblique, until by the 
direct march it may gain its proper interval from the section imme- 
diately on its right. He then commands, /orworf?, and when within 
four yards of the line, section — halt; right — dress. 

When the battery is aligned, the captain commands, yv'o?ii^. 

The movement is executed on the opposite flank, according to 
the same principles, and by inverse means. 

In this case the commands are, forward into line- — right oblique 
— march) guide left — front. 

The formation forward into line by a right or left oblique, exe- 
cuted in a similar manner when the column is in march. In this 
case the chief of the leading section gives no command except for 
the guide, until he has advanced the distance before prescribed. 
He then halts his section as before. 

To form line faced to the rear. 

686. The battery being in column at a halt, to form it into line 
faced to the rear, on the head of the column gaining ground to the 
left, the captain commands : 

\. Into line faced to the rear — left ohliqne. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide 
right. 4. Front. 

(Fig. 157.) At the first command, the chief of the leading sec- 
tion commands, section — foruard; and those of the other sections, 
section — left ohlique. At the command march, repeated by the 
chiefs of sections, the movement is executed as in No. 685, with the 
exception of the alignment. When the leading section has advanced 
18 yards, or for horse artillery 22, it is halted by its chief until the 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS 



583 



4crt 



V 



n \ 









4B1- 






i..-k..jii 



^l4 



1L...I]. 



afa **' 



± ^\. 






•IB} 



lii 



at 



If fL...li. 



..._.j 



L_lU.li 



45* 



534 MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



\^ 

i 
H-h +1+ 

1 Ail 



h^i "v 



...^JS._..^^ 



liHi 






t 



Ivivi 'T 

44- i 



-T^ 



ll^ 



.ii.\j. w \ 



t-^l 






18 

12 



■Hb 



'•.-lit 



a\ i 



els 



^ 






-^ 



Z 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 535 

centre section arrives upon the same line. He then commands, 
comitcr march — march; and when the countermarch is nearly 
completed, section — halt ] left — dress. 

The centre section is halted upon the line, in like manner, until 
the left section comes up, and is then countermarched and aligned 
by the same commands. 

When the left section arrives upon the line, it is countermarched 
before halting, and then aligned like the rest. 

When the centre and left sections are countermarched, the com- 
mands, halt; left dress, should be given if possible, when they are 
four yards in rear of the line on which the leading section is es- 
tablished. 

When the battery is aligned the captain commands front. 

The movement is executed on the opposite flank according to the 
same principles and by inverse means. 

The formation into line faced to the rear by a right or left ob- 
lique, is executed in a similar manner when the column is in march. 
In this case, as the leading section is already in motion, its chief 
only repeats the command for the guide as in No. 685. 

To form line to the right or left. 

687. The battery being in column, in march or at a halt, to form 
it into line to the left, the captain commands : 

1. Left into line wheel. 2. March. 8. Battery — Halt. 4. Left 
— Dress. 5. Front. 

(Fig. 158.) At the first command the chiefs of sections command, 
section left wheel; and at the second, which they repeat, all the sec- 
tions wheel to the left. Each chief of sections commands, for- 
loard; guide left, as soon as his leading pivot carriage has taken 
the new direction. 

When the rear carriages have completed the wheel, and the sec- 
tions are in line, the captain commands, lattery ; halt ; left dress. 

The commands, halt; left — dress, are repeated by the chiefs of 
sections, and when the alignment is completed the captain com- 
mands /roTi^. 



536 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The battery is formed into line to the right according to the same 
principles and by inverse means. 

To form line on the right or left. 

688. The battery marching in column to form it into line on the 
right, the captain commands : 

1. On the right into line. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 4. Front. 

(Fig. 159.) At the first command, the chief of the leading sec- 
tion commands, section — right wheel; and at the second, which 
he repeats, the section wheels to the right. As soon as the leading 
pivot carriage enters the new direction he commands, forward — 
guide right ; and as the section completes the wheel, and unmasks 
the column, he commands, section — halt; right — di^ess. 

The chiefs of the other sections repeat the command for the guide, 
and their section continues to move forward. As each section 
passes the one preceding it in the formation, its chief establishes it 
on the line, with the proper interval, by the same commands. The 
commands, section — halt; right — di^ess, are given when the section 
is four yards in rear of the line. 

When the battery is aligned the captain commands, front. 

The line is formed on the left according to the same principles 
and by inverse means. The commands are, oji the left into line — 
march; guide left — front. 

When the column is at a halt, the line is formed on the right or 
left in the same manner. In this case, the chiefs of the two rear 
sections command, section — forivard, and afterwards repeat the 
commands, march — guide right (or left.) 

To break into column to the front. 

689. The battery being in line at a halt, to break into column to 
the front from the right, the captain commands : 

1. Bt/ section from the right — front info column. 2. March. 
3. Guide left. 

(Fig. 160.) At the first command, the chief of the right section 
commands, section — forward ; and those of the other sections, section 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS 



537 




538 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



I 

i 

! 



1 ! 



""JL J~ ~_ p|gSE»..GggM» ^a » " "i" C 



! / 



p- E^^ -^-d; 



-H>||^^^ .^J 



- — p- 









I w 



hH 



^ 

1 
^ 



ipf 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 539 

— right oblique. At the command marcli, repeated by the chief of 
the right section, that section moves forward, and its chief repeats 
the command for the guide. 

Each of the other chiefs of sections repeats the commands march; 
guide left, after the section on his right has commenced the move- 
ment, and when the leaders of its rear carriages are in line with 
him. After obliquing sufficiently to gain the rear of the preceding 
sections, he commands, ybrw;«rc?. 

The movement is executed from the left according to the same 
principles and by inverse means. 

To hreah into column to the rear. 

The battery being in line, in march or at a halt, to break into 
column to the rear from one of the flanks, the captain executes 
an about or a countermarch, according to the kind of carriage he 
may wish in front, then halts the battery, and breaks it into column 
to the front by the preceding manoeuvre. 

To hreah into column to the right or left. 

690. The battery being in line, in march, or at a halt, to break 
it into columns to the left, the captain commands : 

1. By section — left icheel. 2. March. 3. Forward. 4. Guide left. 

At the first command, the chiefs of sections command, section — 
left wheel; and at the second, repeated by those chiefs, all the 
sections wheel to the left. Yf hen the wheels are nearly completed 
the captain commands, /orioartZ — guide left, and the chiefs of sec- 
tions repeat the commands. 

When the column is not to advance, the command, column — 
halt is substituted im forward — guide left. 

The battery is broken into column to the right according to the 
same principles and by inverse means. 

To hrcak into columns to the front from one flanh, to march towards 

the other. 

691. The battery being in line at a halt, to break from the right 
to march to the left, the captain commands : 



540 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 



ill k III 



m 

n* 



I 






HA ^ M 

/ /I 

i 



/ 1 ^v 




/ I / 
1-5 /-'" 



n 



/ 



/ 




/ 



n 




A 



/ / / 

H/ ij/ fj/ 



IHI 



l-H 



1^1- 



H. 



s 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 541 

1. Bi/ section — hreah from the right — to march to the left. 2. March. 
3. Guide left. 

At the first command, the chief of the right section commands, 
section — forward; and at the second, which he repeats, the section 
moves forward, and he commands, guide left. After advancing 
eleven yards he changes the direction to the left by the commands, 
section — left wheel; march; forward. 

Each of the other chiefs of sections command, section — for- 
ivard, in time to command march, when the limber wheels of the 
rear carriages in the section preceding his own arrive in front of 
him. He then conducts the section to the front, changes its direc- 
tion to the left, and places it in rear of the preceding section by 
the commands already prescribed for the section on the right. 

The battery is broken from the left to march to the right, accord- 
ing to the same princij^les and by inverse means. 

To hreah into column to the rear f^om one flanh, to march towards 

the other. 

692. The battery being in line at a halt, to break to the rear from 
one flank to march towards the other, the captain first executes an 
about or countermarch, according to the kind of carriage he may 
wish in front. He then halts the battery and executes the preceding 
manoeuvre. 

To hreah into column to the front ivhen the Lattery is marching in 

line. 

693. The battery marching in line at a walk, to break into column 
to the front from the right, and at the same gait, the captain 
commands : 

1. By the right — hreah into sections. 2. March. 3. Guide left. 

The chief of the right section repeats the command for the guide, 
and his section continues to move at the same gait. At the com- 
mand march, the other sections are halted by the command, section 
— halt, from their chiefs. 

The halted sections are put in motion successively by their chiefs ; 
46 



542 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

each commanding, section — right oblique, in time to command marchy 
when the leaders of the rear carriages in the section on his right 
arrive opposite to him. The sections oblique and enter the column 
as described in No. 689. 

When the battery is marching at a trot, the movement is exe- 
cuted according to the same principles. But the sections which 
halted in the preceding case slacken the gait to a walk at the com- 
mands, walk — march, from their chiefs. They again trot and enter 
the column by the commands, section — right oblique — trot; march; 
forward. 

When the battery is marching in line at a walk, to break into 
column from the right at a trot, the captain commands : 

1. By the right — break into sections — trot. 2. March. 3. Guide 

left. 

At the first command, the chief of the right section commands 
trot ; and at the second, which he repeats, the section changes its 
gait to a trot. He afterwards repeats the command, guide left. 

Each of the other sections continues to march at a walk until 
required to enter the column, when its chief conducts it, as already 
described, by the commands, section — right oblique — trot; march ; 
forivard. 

The battery is broken into column from the left, according to the 
same principles and by inverse means. 

To form line advancing. 

694. When the battery is marching in column at a walk, to form 
it into line at a trot, gaining ground to the left, and continue the 
march, the captain commands : 

1. Form line advancing — left oblique — trot. 2. March. 3. 
Guide right. 

The chief of the leading section repeats the command for the 
guide, and his section continues to move at a walk. 

At the first command, the chiefs of the other sections command, 
section — left oblique — trot. The command march is repeated by 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 543 

the same chiefs ; and when the oblique movement is commenced, 
they repeat the command, guide right. Each chief commands, for- 
ward, as soon as his section has obliqued sufficiently to the left, and 
walk, in time to command march, as it arrives on the line. 

When the battery is marching in column at a trot, the movement 
is executed according to the same principles. In this case the 
captain does not command trot ; and the chief of the leading section 
commands, loaJk; march, successively, after the first and second 
commands of the captain. The chiefs of the other sections give the 
sanie commands as their sections arrive on the line. 

The movement is executed so as to gain ground to the riglit, 
according to the same principles, and by inverse means. 

To form double column on the centre section. 

695. The battery being in line at a halt, to form double column 
on the centre section, the captain commands : 

1. DouUe column on the centre. 2. March. 3. Guide right (or 

left). 

(Fig. 161.) At the first command, the chief of the centre section 
commands, section — forivard ; the chief the right section, section — 
left ohlique ; and the chief of the left section, section — right oblique. 
At the command march, repeated by the chief of the centre section, 
that section marches to the front, and its chief repeats the com- 
mand for the guide. 

When the wheel horses in the rear rank of the centre section 
have passed the leaders in the front rank of the other sections, the 
chiefs of those sections repeat the command march, and the sections 
commence the oblique. 

When the piece nearest the column is about entering it, in each 
of these sections, the chief of the right section commands, bi/ the left 
— brecdc section; march ; and the chief of the left, by the right — 
brcah section ; march. The right and left sections, without chano-e 
of gait, then form into columns of pieces in rear of the right and 
left carriages of the centre section. 

The chiefs of the flank sections are careful to make their pieces 



544 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

enter the column at the proper time. And when the column is 
formed they place themselves outside of it, four yards from the cen- 
tres of their respective sections. 

The chief of the line of caissons follows the movement, sees that 
his carriages do not enter the column too soon, and, when the 
column is formed, places himself four yards in rear of the centre. 

When the battery is marching at a walk, to form the double 
column at the same gait, the captain commands : 

1. Douhle column on the centre. 2. March. 3. Guide right (or 

The chief of the centre section repeats the command for the 
guide, and the section continues to advance. 

At the command march, the other sections are halted by the 
command, section — halt, from their chiefs. They are afterwards 
formed into column by the commands and means prescribed for 
forming double column from a halt. 

When the battery is marching at a trot, the double column is 
formed according to the same principles. In this case the flank 
sections pass to a walk, instead of halting as before, and resume the 
trot to oblique and enter the column. The commands from their 

chiefs are, walJc ; march; section left (ov right) oblique — trot; 

march, and, l// the left (or 7-ight) — hreah section; march. 

When the battery is marching at a walk, to form the double 
column at a trot, the captain commands : 

1. Douhle column on the centre — trot. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide 
right (or left^. 

At the first command, the chief of the centre section commands, 
trot. At the second, which he repeats, the section moves forward 
at a moderate trot, and he repeats the command for the guide. 

The flank sections continue to walk until the centre has advanced 
sufiiciently to allow them to oblique, and are then formed into 
column as already prescribed ; their chiefs commanding, section — 
left (or right) ohlique — trot ; march, and, hy the left (or right) — 
hreah section ; march. 



LTOHT ARTILLERY TACTICS, 



545 







m 



■M- 



n 1^ 




46* 



2k 



54'J MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



l|"Tir""ll 
8| i5 i 



+ff 



+h ^-]- 



^s^ \ -{EH- 

\ 8ffl f4 Sffi 



■HP-/-' 



/ 



fli/ 



\ 



•^ 
^ 



^f 



\f 









4 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 547 

To form tlie double column with a battery of four pieces, tlie 
captain gives the same commands as with a battery of six. The 
right section is broken into column of pieces by the left, and the 
left section by the right. The chiefs of sections place themselves 
on the outer flanks of the column, abreast the leading drivers of 
the leading carriages. The senior chief repeats the command for 
the guide, and gives such other commands as are required for the 
head of the column ; the leading carriages moving as a section for 
the time being. 

To deploy the double column into line to the front. 

696. The battery being in double column at a halt, to form it 
into line to the front^ the captain commands : 

1. Forward into line. 2. March. 3. Front. 

(Fig. 162.) At the first command, the chief of the centre 
section commands, section forward ; the chief of the right section, 
section into line — right ohlique ; and the chief of the left section, 
section into line — left ohlique. At the command march, repeated 
by these chiefs, the centre section advances five yards, and its chief 
commands, section ; halt — right (or lef) — dress. 

The flank sections oblique to the right and left; and as their 
pieces arrive in rear of their proper places on the line, they move 
forward, halt, and dress towards the centre without command. 

As soon as the battery is aligned, the captain commands, front. 

When the column is marching, the movement is executed in the 
same manner. In this case the chief of the centre section does 
not command, sec^io?! — forward; march; but halts and aligns his 
section after advancing five yards. 

When the column is marching at a trot, to deploy it into line to 
the front at the same gait, without discontinuing the march, the 
captain commands : 

1. Form line advancing. 2. March. 3. Guide right (or left). 

At the first command, the chief of the centre section commands, 
ivalk ; the chief of the right section, section into line- — right ohlique ; 



548 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

and the chief of tlic left section, section into line — left ohlique. At 
the command mat'ch, repeated by these chiefs, the centre section 
slackens its gait to a walk, and the flank sections deploy. As each 
piece arrives upon the line, its gait is changed to a walk without 
command. The movement is executed as in the preceding cases 3 
but when the line is formed it continues to advance ; the captain 

commanding, guide right (or left), which command is repeated by j 

the chiefs of sections. i 

When the column is marching at a walk, to deploy it into line l 

to the front at a trot, without discontinuing the march, the captain j 
commands : 

\. Form line advancing — trot. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (ox left^ . 

At the first command, the chief of the right section commands, 

section into line — right ohlique — trot; and the chief of the left ■ 

section, section into line — left ohlique — trot. At the command ' 

inarch, repeated by these chiefs, the flank sections deploy at a trot; ■ 

the centre section continues to march at a walk; and, the line ! 

having been formed as in the preceding case, the captain gives the ■ 
command for the guide. 

When the battery consists of four pieces, the double column is ; 

deployed into line to the front by the same commands from the | 

captain as when it consists of six. The chiefs of sections give the ' 

same commands as in the other case, and then their sections are \ 

formed as in No. 674. When the line is to be halted, as in forming ! 

forvjard into line, the senior chief commands, halt — (right or left^ '\ 

— dress, as soon as the leading carriages have advanced five yards ; ; 

and the alignment is made upon the central carriages. ' 

To form the double column into line to the right or left. j 

697. The battery being in double column at a halt, to form it into | 

line on the right, the captain commands : i 

1. To and on the right into line. 2. March. 3. Front. '\ 

At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands, j 

section — right wheel; and the other chiefs 0? SQctions, forward. j 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 549 

At tlie second, repeated by those chiefs, the leading section wheels 
to the right and is established on the line as in No. 687. The other 
pieces advance under the direction of their chiefs and of the chiefs 
of sections, wheel to the right in succession as they arrive opposite 
their places, establish themselves on the line, and dress upon the 
pieces already aligned. When the alignment is completed the cap- 
tain commands, front. 

When the column is marching, the line is formed to the right 
in the same manner, except that the chiefs of the flank sections 
omit the commands, forward — march. The line is formed to the 
left according to the same principles and by inverse means. 

When the battery consists of four pieces, the double column is 
deployed into line to the right or left by the same commands from 
the captain, as when it consists of six. In this case the leading 
pieces are wheeled to the right or left, as a section, and established 
on the line. For this purpose the senior chief of section commands, 
right (or left) wheel; march; forward; guide right (or left^; 
halt; right (or left) — dress. The other pieces move forward, 
wheel in succession as they arrive opposite their places, and form 
on the line as already described. 

To advance in line. 

698. The battery being in line at a halt, to cause it to advance, 
the captain indicates to the guide the points on which he is to 
march, and commands : 

1. Battery — forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or left). 

The commands, forioard ; march; guide right (or left), are 
repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the command march, all the 
carriages move forward at a walk, and the chiefs of sections preserve 
the alignment towards that chief of carriage who serves as guide 
of the line. The guide marches steadily in the given direction, and 
the chiefs of carriages regulate their intervals and alignment by him. 

The carriages of the rear rank follow those in front at their 
appropriate distance of two yards. The chief of the line of caissons 
superintends the march of the rear rank of carriages, and moves 
wherever his presence may be necessary for that purpose. 



550 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

In horse artillery tlie detacliments preserve their alignments^ and 
follow their pieces at the proper distance. 

To halt the battery and align it. 

699. When the battery is marching in line, to halt and align it, 
the captain commands : 

1. Battery — Halt. 2. Right (oy left) — Dress. 3. Front. 

The commands, halt; right (or leff) — dress, are repeated by the 
chiefs of sections. At the first command, the carriages and detach- 
ments halt, and at the second align themselves by the right (or left) 
in their respective ranks ; the carriages dressing by the drivers of 
their wheel horses. The carriages are placed as squarely on the 
line as possible without opening or closing the intervals. The cap- 
tain superintends the alignment of the front rank of carriages,, and 
the chief of the line of caissons that of the rear ; each placing him- 
self for that purpose on the flank of the guide. When the battery 
is aligned, the captain commands front. 

When the battery is halted, if it cannot be aligned by slight 
movements, the captain causes one or two carriages from one of the 
flanks or centre to advance four yards, or to a greater distance if 
necessary, and then causes the alignment to be made by the right, 
left, or centre, by the command, right, left, or, on the centre — dress. 
At this command, the carriages and detachments move forward and 
align themselves according to the principles just explained; the 
drivers halting a little in rear of the line, and dressing forward so 
as to place the carriages as squarely upon it as possible. 

To change direction in line. 

700. The battery being in line at a halt, to wheel it to the right, 
the captain commands : 

1. Battery right loheel 2. March. 8. Forward. 4. Battery — 
Halt. 5. Eight — Dress. 6. Front. 

The commands, right loheel; march; forward; halt; right- — 
dress, are repeated by the chiefs of sections. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 551 

At the command march, the pivot carriage moves at a walk, and 
describes a quadrant (twenty-two yards) of a circle, whose radius is 
fourteen yards. The other carriages move at a trot and preserve 
their intervals from the pivot. They regulate their gaits according 
to their distances from the pivot, so as to remain as short a time as 
possible in rear of the line, without urging their horses injuriously, 
and so as to arrive upon it in succession. The carriages of the rear 
rank follow at the proper distance in the tracks of those in front. 

At the command forward, which is given when the leading pivot 
carriage has described its arc of twenty-two yards, that carriage 
moves direct to the front; and when the rear pivot carriage is in 
the new direction, the captain commands, hattery ; halt; right — 
dress. The commands ybrt6'ar(:?; halt; right — dress, are repeated by 
the chief of the right section immediately after the captain ; and by 
the other chiefs in time to be applicable to their sections; the pivot 
carriages halting at the command halt, and the others halting and 
dressing towards the pivot as they arrive in succession on the line. 

When the battery is aligned, the captain commands /ro??^. 

The battery is wheeled to the left according to the same principles 
and by inverse means. 

When the battery is at a halt or marching in line, to wheel it to 
the right and continue the march, the captain commands : 

1. Battery — right loheel. 2. Margh. 3. FORWARD. 

The movement is executed as already described, except that the 
pivot carriage, after wheeling, continues to march in the new direc- 
tion, and the others conform to its gait and direction as they arrive 
on the line. • 

The direction is changed to the left according to the same prin- 
ciples and by inverse means. 

FORMATIONS IN BATTERY. 

In line ivith pieces in front to form in hattery to the front. 

701. When the battery is in line at a halt, with the pieces in 
fronts to form in battery to the front, the captain commands : 



552 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. In battery. 2. Guide left. 3. March. 

(Fig. 163.) These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sec- 
tions. At the command in hatteri/, the caissons stand fast, and the 
pieces advance. The intervals and alignment are preserved, and 
the chiefs of pieces and sections march at their places in line. At 
the command march, which is given as soon as they have advanced 
seventeen yards, the chiefs of pieces and sections halt, and the 
pieces execute an about. As soon as the about is completed, the 
pieces are halted, unlimbered, and prepared for firing ; the limbers 
being taken to their places in battery by an about. 

When the cannoneers are marching by the sides of their pieces, 
they halt at the command march, allow their pieces to pass them, 
change sides, and move forward to the posts they are to occupy, 
when their pieces have completed the about. They are not required 
to observe any particular order during this movement. 

When the cannoneers are mounted on the ammunition chest, 
those on the caissons dismount and run to their posts at the com- 
mand in hatter y. Those on the pieces dismount after the about. 

The chiefs of pieces and sections, take their posts in battery, as 
soon as the formation is completed. 

In horse artillery, the movement is executed in the same manner, 
and by the same commands. But the pieces advance only ten yards 
before executing the about. The horses of the detachments do not 
advance. But at the command in Lattery, the cannoneers dismount 
and run to their posts. 

After the formation the captain rectifies the alignment if necessary. 

When the battery is marching in line with the pieces in front, it 
is formed in battery io the front, according to the same principles, 
and b}'' the commands, in battery — march. The caissons halt at 
the command in battery ; and in horse artillery the detachments do 
the same ; the cannoneers dismounting and running to their posts. 

To form in battery to the front by throiuing the caissons to the rear. 

702. When the battery is in line at a halt, with the pieces in 
front, to form in battery to the front by throwing the caissons to 
the rear, the captain commands : 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 



553 



^O^S^ -B-^^iP. 






■-•■^ 



-tD- 



•ffi- 



HfJ I ^aac ■^f/:'»- ^jjgf:- ^— »-«— »§■« 






■-$- 



^^^Pg= -t^^^- -^ 






tH 



+li- 



/m f 



4^- 



i^ § 



-f$i- 



\ 



t 1. 

4-' 4»-' 

47 









it 






+|-h 



+u 



j f i 



554 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Action front. 

At this command^ repeated by the chiefs of sections^ the pieces 
are iinlimbered and wheeled about by hand : the limbers reversing 
to the left at the same time, and taking their places in battery, as 
described in the school of the piece, No. 658. The caissons reverse 
to the left, move to the rear, reverse again to the left, and take their 
places in battery. 

When the cannoneers are mounted on the ammunition chests, 
they dismount and run to their posts at the command action front. 

In Jiorse artilleri/j when this mode of coming into action is re- 
sorted to, the detachments move to the posts belonging to their 
horses in battery, before dismounting, except when the number of 
horses is so small, that they may be led to the rear by the horse 
holders. In this case the captain com-mands, dismount', immedi- 
ately after, action front. When the detachments conduct their 
horses to the rear, they dismount without command from the captain. 

The battery is generally in line at a halt when this mode of 
coming into action is resorted to. It may also be used in successive 
formations by giving the command action front, when a part of the 
battery has been halted on the line. But with bad ground or heavy 
pieces this mode of coming into action should not be used. 

In line with caissons in front, to form in hattery to the front. 

703. When the battery is in line at a halt, with the caissons in 
front, to form in battery to the front, the captain commands : 

1. Pieces pass your caissons. 2. March. 3. In battery. 4. 
Guide left. 5. March. 

(Fig. 163.) These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sec- 
tions ; the pieces pass their caissons, and at the command in hattery, 
given as soon as the pieces have passed their caissons, the formation 
is executed as prescribed in No. 702. 

In Jiorse artillery, 'Ohq command in hattery is given when the 
detachments have passed the caissons. 

When the battery is marching in line, with the caissons in front; 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 555 

it is formed in battery to tlie front according to the same principles, 
and by the commands, pieces pass your caissons (or pieces pass your 
caissons — trot)) march; in hatiery ; guide left — march. 

In line with pieces in front, to form in hattery to the rear. 

704. Wlien the battery is in line at a halt, with the pieces in 
front, to form in battery to the rear the captain commands : 

1. Fire to the rear. 2. Caissons pass your pieces — trot. 3. March. 
4. In battery. 

The three last commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. 
At the third, the caissons pass their pieces at a brisk trot. And at 
the fourth, which \& given as soon as the caissons have passed, the 
cannoneers unlimber and prepare for firing. 

The caissons advance seventeen yards beyond their pieces, execute 
an about together, and take their places in battery. 

When the cannoneers are mounted on the ammunition chests, the 
caissons advance seventeen yards beyond their pieces, and then halt 
to allow the cannoneers to dismount before executing the about. As 
soon as the caissons halt, the cannoneers dismount and run to their 
posts. When the battery is at a halt, as in the present case, it is 
considered better to dismount the cannoneers before commencing 
the movement. The chief of the line of caissons precedes the move- 
ment of his carriages, and places himself on the line to be occupied 
by their leaders, when the about is commenced. He takes his place 
in battery as soon as the about is completed, and the carriages are 
on the line. 

The chiefs of pieces and sections take their places in battery as 
soon as the formation is completed. 

In horse artillery, at the command in hattery, the detachments 
incline to the right, pass their pieces at a brisk trot, and take their 
places in battery by a left about. The cannoneers then dismount, 
run to their posts, unlimber, and prepare for firing.. 

When the battery is marching in line, with the pieces in front, 
the formation in battery to the rear is executed according to the 
same principles and by the same commands. At the command in 



556 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

battery y which is given as soon as the caissons have passed their 
pieces, the latter halt, the detachments in horse artillery pass them, 
and the movement is completed as already described. 

In line with caissons in front, to form in hattery to the rear. 

705. When the battery is in line at a halt, with the caissons in 
front, to form in battery to the rear, the captain commands : 

1. Fire to the rear. 2. In battery. 

At the command in hattery, which is repeated by the chiefs of 
sections, the cannoneers unlimber and prepare for firing. 

The chiefs of pieces and sections take their places in battery. 

The caissons move at a brisk trot and take their places in battery, 
under the superintendence of their chief. 

In horse artillery, at the command, in hattery, the detachments 
pass their pieces at a trot, move to their places in battery, dismount, 
and run to their posts. 

When the battery is marching in line, with the caissons in front, 
the formation in battery to the rear is executed according to the 
same principles and by the same commands. 

In hattery, to form in line to the front. 

706. Being in battery, to form in line to the front with the 
caissons in rear, the captain commands : 

Limber to the front. 

This command is repeated by the chiefs of sections, and the 
pieces are limbered as described in No. 648 ; the caissons closing 
at the same time to the proper distance without further command. 

When the captain wishes to place the caissons in front, he com- 
mands, lirnher to the front ; and while the pieces are limbering, 
caissons pass your pieces— --trot; march. The caissons pass and 
halt in front of their pieces ; or, if the captain wishes the battery 
to advance, he commands, forward; guide right (or left^, as the 
caissons are completing the passage, and the battery moves forward 
at a walk. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 557 

In horse artillery^ when the pieces are limbered to the front, the 
horse holders advance within two yards of their pieces ; and there 
the cannoneers mount. 

The captain rectifies the alignment^ if necessary, and commands, 
front. 

When the battery is to advance immediately, the captain com- 
mands, forivarcl ; guide right (or leff), instead of hattery — hall', 
and the caissons close on the march. 

When the captain wishes to place the caissons in front, he may 
cause the pieces to be limbered to the rear, and command : 

1. Caissons pass your pieces — trot — pieces left ahoiit. 2. MarcII 
3. Battery — Halt, or Forward — Guide right (or left). 

These commands are repeated and executed as already prescribed; 
the pieces executing the about as soon as the ground has been un- 
masked by the caissons, and the battery halting or advancing, a,s 
soon as the passage is completed. 

In horse artillery, when the pieces are limbered to the rear, the 
cannoneers run to their horses, mount, and rejoin their pieces. 

In hattery to form in line to the rear. 
707. When in battery, to form in line to the rear, the captain 
causes the pieces to be limbered to the rear ; and then, if he wishes 
to place the caissons in front, commands : 

1. Caissons left about — pieces forward. 2. MARCH. 3. Battery — 
Halt, or Forward — Guide right (or left). 

The two first commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections ; 
the caissons execute the about ; and the pieces close to their proper 
distance. The third command, which is given at the moment the 
about is finished, is repeated and executed as prescribed. 

The captain rectifies the alignment if necessary, and commands^ 
front. 

In 7i07-.se artillery, the detachments oblique to the left to facilitate 
the movement of the caissons. And then if the battery halts, they 
place themselves at once in rear of their pieces ; or if it advances, 
they wait and do the same by wheeling to the right, as they pass. 
47* 



558 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

If the formation in line to the rear is to be executed by placing 
the pieces in front, the captain, after causing the pieces to be lim- 
bered to the rear, commands : 

1. Pieces pass your caissons — caissons left ahout. 2. MARCH, 
o. Battery — Halt, or Forward — Guide riyJit (or left). 

The first two commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections 3 
the pieces pass their caissons ; and the caissons execute the about 
as soon as the ground is unmasked. The third command is repeated 
and executed according to the principles prescribed in No. 698. 

The captain rectifies the alignment if necessary, and commands, 
front. 

In horse artillery, the detachments place themselves behind their 
pieces as soon as they are passed by them. 

In forming line to the rear, either with pieces or caissons in front, 
the caissons may be placed at once in front of their pieces for greater 
convenience in mounting the cannoneers. For this purpose, as soon 
as the captain has commanded, liniber to the rear, he commands : 

1. Caissons in front of your pieces (or caissons in front of your 
pieces — trot). 2. March. 

These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections ; and while 
the pieces are limbering, the caissons oblique to the right, move 
forward near the middle of the interval between the leaders of the 
pieces, place themselves in front of them by two successive wheels 
to the left, and halt. 

In horse artillery, when the caissons are ordered to the front of 
their pieces, the horse holders oblique to the left at the command 
march, and halt between the leading drivers of the pieces. As 
soon as the cannoneers are mounted, the detachments take their 
posts in rear of their pieces. 

In column ivith pieces in front, to form in hattery to the front. 

708. (Fig. 164.) When the battery is in column at a halt, with 
the pieces in front, to form in battery to the front by gaining ground 
to the left, the captain commands : 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS 



559 



+il^ 






-I# 



m ^ 






iK 



i '■■■•■| 












\ 



^ i^t \ 






1. I 



ti 



JM M It.... 



^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 



4a 



15 



l.S 



^■ 



4h' 



+ 



660 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 








LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 561 

1. Forward into lattery — left ohlique. 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right. 

At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands, 
section — forward ; and those of the other sections, section — left 
ohlique. The chief of the line .of caissons moves quickly to the 
right of the leading section, to cause the caissons to halt at the 
proper time and to superintend their alignment. At the command 
march, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the movement is executed 
as prescribed in No. 685, for forming line to the front. But as each 
section arrives on the line instead of halting, its chief forms it in 
battery to the front by the commands, in hattery ^ march, which are 
executed as prescribed in No. 701. 

The formation in battery to the front, by gaining ground to the 
right, is executed according to the same principles and by inverse 
means. 

When the battery is marching in column, it is formed in battery 
to the front by applying the principles of No. 701. 

In column with caissons in front, to form in hattery to the front. 

709. When the battery is in column at a halt, with the caissons 
in front, to form in battery to the front by gaining ground to the 
left, the captain commands : 

1. Forioard into hattery — left ohliqiie. 2. MARCH, 3. Guide right. 

At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands, 
section — forward; and those of the other sections, section — left 
ohlique. The chief of the line of caissons moves quickly to the 
right of the leading section, to halt the caissons at the proper time 
and to superintend their alignment. At the command march, re- 
peated by the chiefs of sections, the movement is executed as pre- 
scribed in No. 701, for forming line to the front. But as each sec- 
tion arrives on the line instead of halting, its chief forms it in 
battery to the front by the commands, pieces poss your caissons; 
march; in hattery ; march, which will be executed as prescribed 
in No. 703. 

The formation in battery to the front, by gaining ground to the 

2l 



U 



562 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

riglit, is executed according to tlie same principles and by inverse 
means. 

When the battery is marching in column, it is formed in battery 
to the front by applying the principles laid down in the latter part of 

No. 703. 

In column loith pieces in front, to form in hattery to the rear. 

710. When the battery is in column at a halt, with the pieces in 
front, to form in battery to the rear by gaining ground to the left, 
the captain commands: 

1. Into hattery faced to tTie rear — left ohligue. 2. March. 
3. Guide right. 

(Fig. 165.) At the first command, the chief of the leading 
section commands, section — forward; and those of the other 
sections, section — left oblique. The chief of the line of caissons 
goes to the right of the leading section, to direct the about of the 
caissons, and to superintend their alignment. At the command 
'march, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the movement is executed 
as prescribed in No. 685, for forming line to the front. But as each 
section arrives on the line, instead of halting, its chief forms it in 
battery to the rear by the commands, caissons pass your pieces — 
trot; march ; in hattery, which are executed as prescribed in No. 704. 

The formation in battery to the rear, by gaining ground to the 
right, is executed according to the same principles and by inverse 
means. 

When the battery is marching in column, it is formed into bat- 
tery to the rear by applying the principles prescribed in the latter 
part of Nos. 685 and 704. 

In column ivith caissons in front to form in hattery to the rear. 

711. The battery being in column at a halt, with the caissons in 
front, to form in battery to the rear by gaining ground to the left, 
the captain commands : 

1. Into hattery faced to the rear — left ohlique. 2. March. 
3. Guide right. 



LIGPIT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 563 

At tlie first command, the chief of the leading section commands, 
section — foricard ; and those of the other sections, section — left 
ohllqxie. The chief of the line of caissons goes to the right of the 
leading section, to direct the about of the caissons, and to superin- 
tend their alignment. At the command march, repeated by the 
chiefs of sections, the movement is executed as prescribed in No. 
685 for forming line to the front. But as each section arrives on 
the line, instead of halting, its chief forms it into battery to the 
rear by the command m hattery, which is executed as prescribed in 
No. 704. 

The formation in battery to the rear, by gaining ground to the 
right, is executed according to the same principles and by inverse 
means. 

When the battery is marching in column, it is formed into bat- 
tery to the rear by applying the principles of Nos. 685 and 704. 

In column loith pieces in front, to form in hattery to the right or left. 

712. "When the battery is in column, in march, or at a halt, with 
the pieces in front, if the captain wishes to form it in battery to the 
left, by gaining ground to the right, he commands : 

1. Fire to the left — hy section right wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. Caissons 
pass your pieces — trot. 4. March. 5. In battery. 

(Fig. 166.) At the fi.rst command, the chiefs of sections com- 
mand, section — right wheel; and at the second, which they repeat, 
all the sections wheel to the right. The caissons follow their pieces 
at the proper distance. 

At the commands, caissons pass your pieces — trot; march, which 
are given before the completion of the wheel, and repeated by the 
chiefs of sections, all the caissons pass their pieces at a trot. 

At the command in battery, which is given and repeated in like 
manner as soon as the caissons have passed, and the pieces are 
square on the new line, all the sections form at once into battery to 
ilie rear, as prescribed in No. 704. 

When the captain wishes to form in battery to the left, by gain- 
ing ground to the left, he commands : 



564 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. Fire to the left — hy section left wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. In 

BATTERY. 4. MaRCH. 

(Fig, 167.) At the first command, the chiefs of sections com- 
mand, section left wheel; and at the second, which they repeat, all 
the sections wheel at once to the left. 

At the command in hattery, which is given and repeated as soon 
as the caissons have completed the wheel, all the sections form at 
once into battery to the front, as prescribed in No, 703. 

The two formations in battery to the right, by gaining ground to 
the left or right, are executed according to the same principles and 
by inverse means. 

In column with caissons in front, to form in hattery to the right or 

left. 

713. When the battery is in column, in march or at a halt, with 
the caissons in front, to form it in battery to the left, by gaining 
ground to the right, the captain commands : 

1. Fire to the left — hy section right wheel. 2. March. 3. In 
Battery. 

At the first command, the chiefs of sections command, section — 
right wheel ; and at the second, which they repeat, the sections 
wheel at once to the right, and move to the front at the commands, 
forward — guide right, from their chiefs. 

At the command in hattery, which is given and repeated as soon 
as the pieces are square on the new line, all the sections form at 
once into battery to the rear, as prescribed in No. 704. 

To form in battery to the left, by gaining ground to the left, the 
captain commands : 

1. Fire to the left — hy section left wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. Pieces 
pass your caissons. 4. March. 5. In Battery. 6. March. 

At the first command, the chiefs of sections command, section — 
left icheel; and at the second, which they repeat, the sections wheel 
at once to the left. The third and fourth commands are given and 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 



565 




1 ^^.^"'^ / 
J- i / 



^^sea^--""*^ ^Sfi^ -S- — " 



48 



566 MANUAL FOE, VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 




LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 567 

repeated just before the completion of the wheel ; and the fifth is 
given when the pieces have passed their caissons, and the latter are 
square upon the new line. The sections are then formed in battery 
to the front as prescribed in No. 703. 

The formations in battery to the right, by gaining ground to the 
right or left, are executed according to the same principles and by 
inverse means. 



In column with pieces in front, to form in battery on the right or left. 

714. When the battery is marching in column with the pieces in 
front, to form in battery on the right, the captain commands : 

1. On the right into battery. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 

At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands, 
section — right tcheel ; and the chief of the line of caissons goes 
to that section. At the command march, repeated by the chief of 
the leading section, that section wheels to the right, and its chief 
conducts it to the line by the corRmmids, fo7'2vard — giiide right. 
And then, without halting, it is formed into battery to the front, as 
prescribed in No. 703, by the commands, in battery — march, from 
its chief. 

The other sections continue to advance ; and as each arrives op- 
posite its place in battery, after passing the one preceding it in the 
formation, it is formed into battery by its chief, by the commands, 
section — right wheel ; march ; forte ard ; guide right; in battery; 
march ; the command in battery being given as the caissons arrive 
in line with those already established. 

The formation in battery on the left is executed according to the 
same principles and by inverse means. 

When the battery is in column at a halt, it is formed in battery 
on the right or left according to the same principles. In this case, 
the chiefs of the two rear sections command, section — foricard, 
immediately after the first command of the captain, and then repeat 
the commands, march; guide right (or Icf). 



568 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

In column with caissons in front, to form in hattery on the right 

or left. 

715. When the battery is marching in column, with the caissons 
in front, to form in battery on the right, the captain commands : 

1. On the right into hattery. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 

At the first command, the chief of the leading section commands, 
section — right wheel; and the chief of the line of caissons goes to 
that section. At the command march, repeated by the chief of the 
leading section, that section wheels to the right, and is conducted 
to the line by the Gomma,uds, forwai^d — guide right, from its chief; 
as soon as it reaches the line, the section is formed in battery to the 
front by the commands, pieces pass your caissons; march; in 
hattery ; march, from its chief. 

The other sections continue to advance, and as each arrives op- 
posite its place in battery, after having passed the one preceding it 
in the formation, it is wheeled to the right, and formed into battery 
by its chief, in the same manner as the leading section. 

The formation in battery on the left, is executed according to the 
same principles and by inverse means. 

When the battery is in column at a halt, it is formed in battery 
on the right or left, according to the same principles : the chiefs 
of the two rear sections giving the additional commands prescribed 
in No. 714. 

To deploy the douhle column into hattery to the front or rear. 

716. The battery being in double column at a halt, to deploy it 
into battery to the front, the captain commands : 

1. Forward into hattery. 2. March. 

At the first command, the chief of the centre section commands, 
section — forward; that of the right, section irito line — right oh- 
lique ; that of the left, section into line — left ohlique ; and the 
chief of the line of caissons goes to the leading section. At the 
command march, repeated by the chiefs of sections, the centre sec- 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 569 

tion advances five yards, aud, witliout halting, is formed into bat- 
tery to the front as prescribed in No. 701 or 703, according to the 
kind of carriage in front. 

The pieces of the flank sections are brought upon the line by 
obliquing, and placed successively in battery without command; 
regulating by the centre section. 

When the battery is marching in double column, it is deployed 
into battery to the front in the same manner, except that the chief 
of the centre section does not command, section — forward; 
march. 

When the battery is in double column, marching or at a halt, it 
is deployed into battery to the rear according to the principles pre- 
scribed in this No, and in No. 704 or 705, according to the kind of 
carriage in front. The commands are : 

1. Into Lattery faced to the rear. 2. March. 

When the battery consists of four pieces, the double column is 
deployed into battery to the front or rear, by the same commands 
from the captain as when it consists of six. The sections are formed 
into battery as prescribed for the flank sections in this number. The 
senior chief of section, besides superintending the formation of his 
own, gives the commands required for the centre section, and the 
leading pieces conform to the movements of that section. 

To deploy the douhle column into battery to the right or left. 

717. When the battery is in double column, marching or at a 
halt, to form it in battery to the right, the captain commands : 

1. To and on the right into battery. 2. March. 

The centre section is formed in battery on the right, as prescribed 
for the leading section in No. 712 or 718, according to the kind of 
carriage in front. 

The other pieces are brought into line as prescribed in No. 697, 
and, without halting, are formed successively in battery to the front 
without commands; regulating by the centre section. 
48* 



570 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 

The deployment into battery to tlie left is executed according to 
the same principles and by inverse means. 

When the battery consists of four pieces, the double column is 
deployed into battery to the right or left, by the same commands 
from the captain as when it consists of six. In this case the lead- 
ing pieces are wheeled to the right or left as a section, and conducted 
to the line by the senior chief of section. And then, without halt- 
ing, they are formed into battery to the front by the same chief. 
The other pieces move forward, wheel in succession as they arrive 
opposite their places, and form in battery on the alignment of those 
already established. 

To pass from the order in hattery to the order in column. 

718. Being in battery, to form column, the captain first causes 
the line to be formed as prescribed in Nos. 706 or 707, and then 
forms column by one of the manoeuvres for passing from the order 
in line to the order in column. 

FIRINGS. 

719. When everything is prepared for firing, the captain com- 
mands : 

Commence Firing. 

This command, given by itself or after load, is repeated by the 
the chiefs of sections, and the firing immediately commenced. 

The firing is discontinued by the command or signal, cease firing, 
which is repeated by the chiefs of sections and pieces. 

When the battery is formed for action, the pieces are not loaded 
until the command load or commence firing is given by the captain. 
In successive formations, when this command is given, it is repeated 
in succession by the chiefs of sections, as their sections are formed 
on the line. 

At the command cease firing, such pieces as are loaded must be 
discharged. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 571 

To fire advancing. 

720. When the battery is firing, to advance by half batteries, the 
captain commands : 

1. Fire advancing — hy half hatter}/. 2. Right half hattery — 
Advance, 

At the second command, the chief of the right half battery dis- 
continues firing, causes his pieces to be limbered to the front, and 
commands /orw;ar(i ; march; guide left.. Or, he may cause them 
to be limbered to the rear, and after executing the about, command, 
forward; guide left. The half battery advances, and the caissons 
preserve their distance in battery. 

As soon as the right half battery reaches the new position, previ- 
ously indicated by the captain, its chief places it in battery by the 
commands, halt; action front; or in battery ; march; the two 
last commands being given in quick succession. The caissons halt 
at these commands; and as soon as the pieces are unlimbered, the 
firing is renewed by command from the chief of half battery. 

The fire of the left half battery is continued during the move- 
ment of the right, care being taken to direct the pieces so that their 
fire shall not injure the half battery in advance. 

As soon as the right half battery commences firing, the left moves 
forward with the guide to the right ; and, after passing the right 
half battery as far as the latter has advanced, is formed into battery, 
and the firing commenced. The movements of the left half battery 
are efiected by commands and means corresponding to those of the 
right. 

The right half battery again advances, as soon as the left com- 
mences firing; and the two continue to advance alternately until 
the captain causes the firing to cease. The battery is then aligned, 
or formed into line to the front or rear by the proper commands 
from the captain. 

While advancing by half battery, the captain places himself 
habitually with the most advanced portion of the battery, and is 
accompanied by the chief of the centre section. The chief of the 
line of caissons remains habitually with the rear half battery. 



572 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

In Iwrse artillery, while advancing by half battery, tlie detacli- 
nients preserve their distance in battery. When the pieces are 
limbered to the front, the horse holders advance to enable the can- 
noneers to mount more readily ; but as soon as the pieces advance, 
the detachments resume their distance in battery. 

To fire advancing by half battery, commencing with the left, is 
executed according to the same principles and by inverse means. 

The movement may also be executed by sections ; the sections 
advancing in succession according to their positions in the battery. 

To fire in retreat. 

721. When the battery is firing, to retire by half batteries, the 
captain commands : 

1. Fire retiring — hy half battery . 2. Right half baiter y — Retire. 

At the second command, the chief of the right half battery dis- 
continues firing, limbers to the rear, and commands, caissons left 
about — r}%orch. As soon as the about is completed, he commands. 
foriuard — guide right ; and conducts the half battery to the ground 
previously indicated by the captain ] the pieces preserving their dis- 
tance in battery by marching nineteen yards in rear of the caissons. 
As soon as the ground has been reached, the chief of half battery 
commands, halt ; in battery, and commences firing; taking care not 
to injure the other half battery. The limbers and caissons remain 
facing towards the rear, as long as the firing in retreat continues. 

As soon as the right half battery commences firing, the left 
retires with the guide to the left; and, after passing the right half 
battery as far as the latter has retired, it is formed into battery, 
and the firing again commenced. The movements are executed in 
a manner corresponding to those of the other half battery. 

The half batteries continue to retire alternately, until the captain 
causes the firing to cease. The battery is afterwards aligned, or 
formed into line to the front or rear, by appropriate commands from 
the captain. 

While retiring by half battery, the captain remains habitually 
with the portion of the battery nearest the enemy, and is accom- 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 573 

panied by the chief of the centre section. The chief of the line 
of caissons accompanies the other half battery. 

In horse artiUerT/, the detachments move to the left to facilitate 
the about of the caissons. They afterwards place themselves be- 
hind and follow them during the retrograde movement at the dis- 
tance of two yards ; remaining faced to the rear as long as the firing 
in retreat continues. 

To fire retiring by half battery, commencing with the left, is 
executed according to the same principles and by inverse means. 

The movement may also be executed by sections ; the sections 
retiring in succession according to their positions in the battery. 

Movements for firing in echellon. 

722. When the battery is in line at a halt with pieces in front, to 
advance in echellon of pieces, the captain commands : 

1. By piece from the right — front into echellon. 2. MARCH. 

(Fig. 168.) At the first command, the right piece moves for- 
ward, followed by its caisson. The next piece moves forward in 
like manner as soon as its leaders are abreast the wheel horses of 
the rear carriage on the right; and the other pieces commence the 
movement in succession according to the same rule. 

The officers preserve the same relative positions as in line. 

When the battery is marching in line at a walk or trot, the 
echellon is formed according to the same principles and by the same 
commands ; the gaits being regulated as in breaking sections. 

The battery advances in echellon of pieces from the left accord- 
ing to the same principles and by inverse means. 

When the caissons are in front, the battery advances in echellon 
of pieces from the right or left according to the same principles and 
by the same commands. 

When the battery is in echellon, marching or at a halt, it may be 
formed into battery to the front, rear, right or left. 

When firing in echellon to the front or rear, the direction of the 
fire may be changed to the right or left. For this purpose the «5ap- 
tain orders the firing to cease, and commands action right (or left). 



574 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

At this commandj the trails of the pieces are turned to the left (or 
right), and the limbers and caissons take their places in rear of the 
pieces. But if retiring with the prolonge fixed, the caissons stand 
fast, and the limbers back to allow the trails to be turned in the 
proper direction. The prolonge must be sufficiently slack to allow 
the recoil of the guns. This last method is only applicable to firing 
to the right when retiring by the right, and to the left v/hen retiring 
by the left. 

To fire to the rear. 

723. When the battery is firing, to fire to the rear, the captain 
causes the firing to cease, and commands : 

1. Fire to the rear. 2. Limbers and caissons i^ass your pieces — trot. 

3. March. 

These commands are repeated by the chiefs of sections. At the 
command march, the pieces are wheeled about by turning the trails 
to the left; and the limbers and caissons oblique to the right, pass 
them, and take their places in battery by a left reverse. 

In horse artillery, the horses follow their limbers, pass them, and 
take their places by wheeling about to the left. 

CHANGES OF FRONT IN BATTERY. 

Change of front to fire to the right, left wing foriuard, and the 
reverse. 

724. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a 
perpendicular change of front, to fire to the right, throwing forward 
the left wing, he discontinues firing, and commands : 

1. Fire to the right. 2. Change front forimrd. on the right piece. 

3. March. 

(Fig. 169.) At the second command, the chief of the right sec- 
tion places the right piece in the new direction, by causing the trail 
to be moved to the left. He also causes the left piece of his section 
to be moved forward by hand, and established on the new line. 
When the ground is unmasked, the limbers and caissons of these 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS 



575 



m 






H^ 



fw 



^ 



^a^ 



i 



li^ 



.-£ M 

% 
f 






576 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 






]-i)j^^^, - ^m^ ' • — $- 



\ 



-51 



\ rcO 
6\ 



/■-^ 



/' 



5lasae^&^» { 'IIJIL 




LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 577 

pieces oblique to the left, move forward, and take tlieir places in 
battery by wheeling to the right; the caissons aligning themselves 
by the chief of the line of caissons established on the right. 

The other chiefs of sections cause their pieces to be limbered by 
the command, limher to the front ; the caissons, and in liorse artil- 
lery the horse holders, also, closing upon the pieces while they are 
limbering. As soon as they are limbered, the chiefs of sections 
command, forward. 

At the second command, the chief of the line of caissons places 
himself on the left of the right piece of the centre section, facing 
to the front, to mark the right of the new line of caissons. 

At the command march, repeated by the chiefs of the centre and 
left sections, these sections move to the front; and, when each has 
arrived opposite its place on the new line, its chief commands; 
section — right wheel; march ; forward ; and afterwards, in hattery 
— r.iarch, so as to form upon the alignment of the right section. 
When the caisson of the right piece of the centre section reaches 
the point where its piece wheeled, it wheels to the left, takes its 
distance in rear, wheels about and dresses to the right upon the line 
of caissons. 

The other caisson of the same section obliques to the left when 
its piece commences the wheel; and, after gaining its distance 
establishes itself on the line by wheeling and dressing to the right. 

The pivot piece commences firing again, as soon as it is in posi- 
tion, and the others as they arrive on the line. 

The change of front to fire to the left, right wing forward, is exe- 
cuted according to the same principles and by inverse means. 

In horse artillery, the detachments follow their pieces and halt at 
their proper distance from the line. That of the left piece of the right 
section, when limbered, wheels to the left when its piece wheels to 
the right, allows its caisson to pass it, and takes its place by wheeling 
about to the left. The horse holders of the pieces not limbered, 
oblique to the left, with their limbers, and, like them, take their 
places in battery by wheeling to the right. When it is deemed 
advisable, the captain may retain the cannoneers at their pieces, and 
allow all the horse holders to conduct their horses to the new line. 
The same may be done in the other changes of front. 
49 2 m 



578 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

CJiange of front to fire to the left, left wing forward , and the reverse. 

725. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a 
perpendicular change of front to fire to the left, throwing forward 
the left wing, he discontinues firing and commands : 

1. Fire to the left. 2. Change front forward on the right piece. 
3. March. 

(Fig. 170.) At the second command, the chief of the right sec- 
tion causes the right piece to be placed in the new direction at once, 
by moving the trail to the right; and the limber and caisson of that 
piece will oblique to the right, and take their places in its rear by 
wheeling to the left; the caisson dressing upon the chief of the line 
of caissons. He also causes his left piece to be moved to its place 
and established on the line by hand; the limber of this piece, 
passing it on the right, takes its place by wheeling to the left, its 
caisson obliques to the right, passes on the right, and in rear of 
the right caisson, and takes its place also by wheeling to the left. 

The chiefs of the other sections cause them to be limbered to the 
front; and while limbering they command, caissons pass your pieces 
— trot; march. When this is executed the chief of the centre sec- 
tion commands section — right luheel, and that of the Itft forward. 

At the command march^ repeated by the chiefs of the centre and 
left sections, these sections move as ordered, with the caissons lead- 
ing. The centre section is conducted to the line by its chief and 
formed by the commands, forward and in Lattery. The left section 
advances five yards and is conducted to the line by two successive 
right half wheels. It is there formed in like manner upon the align- 
ment of the right section. 

At the second command from the captain, the chief of the line 
of caissons places himself in prolongation of the line, thirty-two 
yards on the right of the right piece, and faces to the front, to mark 
the left of the new line of caissons. 

The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is unmasked; 
and the others when they arrive on the line. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 



579 



I"--... 5^^-.. -i-.I^^S.-ffiffip^^g.'^^- 



■H^^:-0 1^^^— i. 



•♦,. 5^^ ^ 






C*J... 



^^SS -$- 



-^ 



.V 



f[f 4* 



I j 



■*■ 



taf 



580 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The change of front to fire to the right, right wing forward, is 
executed according to the same principles and by inverse means. 

In horse artillery^ the horse holders of those pieces, which are 
placed on the line by hand, conduct the horses to their positions in 
battery by following their limbers. 

ChaiKje of front to fire to the Irft^ Ifft lohg to the rear, and the 

reverse. 

726. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a 
perpendicular change of front to fire to the left, throwing the left 
wing to the rear, he causes the firing to cease, and commands : 

1. Fire to the left. 2. Change front to the rear on the rhjht jpiece. 

3. March. 

At the second command, the chief of the right section places 
the right piece in the new direction, by causing the trail to be 
moved to the right. He also causes the left piece of his section to 
be moved to the rear by hand, and established on the new line. 
The limbers and caissons of these pieces move at once to the right, 
obliquing sufficiently to place themselves in rear of their respective 
pieces, and take their places by wheeling to the left or left about. 

The other chiefs of sections command, limher to the rear, and 
immediately afterwards, caissons in front of your pieces — trot ; 
march. The caissons place themselves in front of their pieces, 
while they are limbering, and halt as prescribed in No. 707. The 
chiefs of these sections then command, forward. 

The chief of the line of caissons places himself in the prolonga- 
tion of the line, thirty-two yards on the right of the right piece, 
and faces to the rear to mark the right of the new line of caissons. 

At the command march, given by the captain, and repeated by 
the chiefs of the centre and left sections, the chiefs of these sections 
command, guide left, and afterwards in succession, section — lef 
wheel; march ; forward ; inhattery. The carriages dress towards 
the pivot as they arrive on the line. 

The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is unmasked: 
and the others when they arrive on the line. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 581 

The change of front to fire to the right, right wing to the rear, is 
executed according to the same principles and by inverse means. 

In horse artiUer?/, the detachments pass their pieces at the com- 
mand march, place themselves two yards in rear of the muzzles, 
follow them, and, at the command in battery, take their places. 
The horse holders of those pieces which are moved by hand, follow 
their limbers and conduct the horses to their positions, by move- 
ments corresponding to those of their caissons. When the left piece 
of the right section is limbered, the horses of the detachment are 
conducted to their places in the same manner as though the piece 
were unlimbered, except that the detachment mounts. 

Change of front to fire to the right, left vnng to the rear, and the 



12,1. When the battery is firing, if the captain wishes to make a 
perpendicular change of front to fire to the right, throwing the left 
wing to the rear, he discontinues firing and commands : 

1. Fire to the right. 2. Change front to the rear on the right piece. 

3. March. 

At the second command, the chief of the right section commands, 
limbers and caissons in rear of your pieces — trot; march. The 
limbers and caissons oblique to the right, and pass their pieces with 
the limbers leading. As soon as the limbers have passed, they 
wheel twice to the left and cover their pieces. The caissons pass 
their limbers and cover them in like manner. The chief of the 
section causes the trail of his right piece to be moved to the left, 
and his left piece to be placed upon the new alignment by hand. 

The chiefs of other sections command, limber to the rear, and 
caissons in rear of your pieces — trot; march. When this is exe- 
cuted they command forward. 

At the second command, the chief of the line of caissons places 
himself on the left of the right piece of the centre section, facing to 
the rear, to mark the left of the new line of caissons. 

At the command march from the captain, repeated by the chiefs 
of the centre and left sections, those sections, as well as the limbers 
49* 



582 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA, 

and caissons of the first^ are established upon the new line as de- 
scribed in No. 724. 

The pivot piece recommences firing as soon as it is placed in the 
new direction ; and the others as they arrive on the line. 

The change of front to fire to the left, right wing to the rear, is 
executed according to the same principles and by inverse means. 

In horse artilhry, the mounted detachments pass their pieces with 
the caissons at the command march, and take their places in rear of 
the muzzles by successive wheels to the left. The horse holders of 
the pieces which are moved by hand follow their limbers and wheel 
into their places in like manner. The remainder is executed as in 
No. 724. 

To pass a defile in front. 

728. When the battery is firing, to pass a defile in front of the 
right section, the captain commands : 

1. To the front — hi/ the right section — pass the dcfle. 2. March. 

At the first command, the chief of the right section discontinues 
firing, limbers his pieces to the front, and commands, forward. At 
the command march, repeated by this chief, who also commands, 
guide left, the section moves forward, passes the defile, and is again 
established in battery, and the firing commenced by his command. 

As soon as the right section commences firing, the centre is put 
in motion in like manner. Its chief conducts it through the defile 
by successive wheels, and forms it into battery in line with the first. 

As soon as the centre section commences firing, the left passes in 
like manner. 

While one section is passing the defile, the others continue firing; 
care being taken not to injure the section in advance. 

When the defile is in front of the left section, it is passed accord- 
ing to the same principles, commencing with that section. 

When the defile is in front of the centre section, it is passed 
according to the same principles, commencing with that section, 
and by the commands, to the front — ly tlie centre section — pass the 
defile ; march. Unless there is some reason to the contrary, the 
right section will pass before the left. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY TACTICS. 583 

When the flank or oblique march is better suited to the nature 
of the ground, the chiefs of sections will give the required commands. 

When the defile will admit but one piece at a time, the sections 
are broken by their chiefs in such a manner, as to cause the nearest 
piece to enter first. The sections are re-formed by their chiefs 
immediately after passing the defile. 

To pass a defile in rear. 

729. When the battery is firing, to pass a defile in rear of the 
centre section, the captain commands : 

1. To the rear — hy the right section — pass the defile. 2. MARCH. 

At the first command, the chief of the right section discontinues 
firing, limbers to the rear, and commands, caissons left about — pieces 
forioard. At the command march, repeated by the chief of the 
right section, the caissons of that section execute the about, and the 
pieces close to their proper distance at a trot. As soon as the about 
is completed, the chief commands forward — guide left, conducts 
the section through the defile by successive wheels, and forms it 
into battery in rear of its first position. 

The left section is put in motion as soon as the right commences 
firing. It is conducted through the defile by its chief, and formed 
into battery in rear of its first position, by the principles already 
described. 

The centre section moves as soon as the left commences filing. It 
is formed into battery in rear of its first position, and in line with 
the other two sections. 

The passage of the defile may be executed, commencing with the 
left section, according to the same principles and by inverse means. 

When the defile is in rear of one of the flanks, the movement 
ghould commence with the other. It should always end by passing 
the section or piece covering the defile. 

When the defile will admit but one piece at a time, the sections 
are broken by their chiefs in such a manner as to cause the piece 
farthest from the defile to enter first; and the sections are again 
formed; as soon as possible after leaving the defile. 



584 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 



ARTICLE XII. 

HOxXOKS PAID BY THE THOOPS — INSPECTIONS — 
REVIEWS, ETC. 

HONOKS TO BE PAID BY THE TROOPS. 

730. Whenever a person entitled to compliments from the troops, 
visits any camp or military post, and the commanding officer has 
official notice of his presence, the troops are paraded to salute him. 

The President or Vice-President of the United States and the 
Governor of the State to which the troops belong, are to be saluted 
with the highest honors — all standards and colors drooping, officers 
and troops saluting, drums beating and trumpets sounding. 

A General commanding-in-cTiief is to be received — by cavalry, with 
sabres presented, trumpets sounding the march, and all the officers 
saluting, standards dropping; by infantry, with drums beating the 
march, colors dropping, officers saluting and arms presented. 

A Major- General is to be received — by cavalry, with sabres pre- 
sented, trumpets sounding twice the trumpet-flourish, and officers 
saluting; by infantry, with three ruffles, colors dropping, officers 
saluting, and arms presented. 

A Brigadier- General is to be received — by cavalry, with sabres 
presented, trumpets sounding once the trumpet-flourish, and officers 
saluting ; by infantry, with two ruffles, colors dropping, officers salut- 
ing, and arms presented. 

An Adjutant- General or Inspector- General, if under the rank of 
a general officer, is to be received at a review or inspection of the 
troops under arms — by cavalry, with sabres presented, officers 
saluting; by infantry, officers saluting and arms presented. The 

(684) 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 585 

same honors to be paid to any field officer autliorized to review and 
inspect the troops. When the inspecting officer is junior to the 
officer commanding the parade, no compliments will be paid : he 
will be received only with swords drawn and arms shouldered. 

All guards are to turn out and present arms to (jeneral ojicers aa 
often as they pass them, except the personal guards of general offi- 
cers, which turn out only to the generals whose guards they are, 
and to officers of superior rank. 

To commanders of regiments, garrison, or camp, their own guard 
turn out, and present arms once a day; after which, they turn out 
with shouldered arms. 

To the Memhers of the Cahinet ; to the Chief Justice, the PresiJe.nt 
of the Senate, and Speaker of the House of Representatives of the 
United States ; and to Governors within their respective States and 
Territories, the same honors will be paid as to a general command- 
ing-in-chief. 

Ojjicers of a foreign service may be complimented with the honors 
due to their rank, 

American and Foreign Envoys or Ministers will be received with 
the compliments due to a major-general. 

731. The colors of a regiment passing a guard are to be saluted, 
the trumpets sounding, and the drums beating a march. 

When general officers, or persons entitled to salute, joass in the 
rear of a guard, the officer is only to make his men stand shouldered, 
and not to face his guard about, or beat his drum. 

When general officers, or persons entitled to a salute, pass guards 
while in the act of relieving, both guards are to salute, receiving 
the word of command from the senior officer of the whole. 

All guards are to be under arms when armed parties approach 
their posts ; and to parties commanded by commissioned officers, 
they are to present their arms, drums beating a march, and officers 
saluting. 

No compliments by guards or sentinels will be paid between 
retreat and reveille, except as prescribed for grand rounds. 

All guards and sentinels are to pay the same compliments to the 
officers of the navy, marines, and militia, in the service of the 



586 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

United States, as are directed to be paid to tlie officers of the army, 
according to their relative ranks. 

It is equally tlie duty of non-commissioned officers and soldiers, 
at all times and in all situations, to pay the proper compliments to 
officers of the navy and marines, and to officers of other regiments, 
when in uniform, as to officers of their own particular regiments 
and corps. 

Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline. 
Respect to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, but 
will be extended to all occasions. It is always the duty of the in- 
ferior to accost or to offer first the customary salutation, and of the 
superior to return such complimentary notice. 

Sergeants, with swords drawn, will salute by bringing them to a 
present; with muskets, by bringing the left hand across the body, 
so as to strike the musket near the right shoulder. Corporals out 
of the ranks, and privates not sentries, will carry their muskets at 
a shoulder as sergeants, and salute in like manner. 

When a soldier without arms, or with side-arms only, meets an 
officer, he is to raise his hand to the right side of the visor of his 
cap, palm to the front, elbow raised as high as the shoulder, looking 
at the same time in a respectful and soldier-like manner at the officer, 
who will return the compliment thus offered. 

A non-commissioned officer or soldier being seated, and without 
particular occupation, will rise on the approach of an officer, and 
make the customary salutation. If standing, he will turn toward 
the officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain in the same 
place or on the same ground, such compliment need not be re- 
peated. 

Artillery Salutes. 

732. The President of the United States and the Governor of the 
State to which the troops belong, to receive a salute of twenty-one 
guns. 

The Vice-President is to receive a salute of seventeen o-uns. 

o 

The Heads of the great Executive Departments of the National 
Government; the General commandiinj the army; ih.Q Lieutenant- 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS^ ETC. 587 

Govervor of the State to icJii'ch the troops helong ; the Governors of 
other States and Territories, fifteen guns. 

A 31ajor- General, thirteen guns. 

A Brigadier- General, eleven guns. 

Foreign ships-oficar will be saluted in return for a similar com- 
pliment, gun for gun, on notice being officially received of such 
intention. If there be several posts in sight of, or within six miles 
of each other, the principal only shall reciprocate compliments with 
ships passing. 

Officers of the Navy will be saluted according to relative rank. 

Foreign Officers invited to visit a fort or post may be saluted 
according to their relative rank. 

Envoys and Ministers of the United States and foreign Powers 
are to be saluted with thirteen guns. 

A general officer will be saluted but once in a year at each post, 
and only when notice of his intention to visit the post has been 
given. 

Salutes to individuals are to be fired on their arrival only. 

A national salute will be fired at meridian on the anniversary of 
the Independence of the United States, at each military post and 
camp provided with artillery and ammunition. 

Escorts of Honor. 

733. Escorts of honor may be composed of cavalry or infantry, 
or both, according to circumstances. They are guards of honor for 
the purpose of receiving and escorting personages of high rank, 
civil or military. The troops for this purpose, will be selected for 
their soldierly appearance and superior discipline. 

The escort will be drawn up in line, the centre opposite to the 
place where the personage presents himself, with an interval between 
the wings to receive him and his retinue. On his appearance, he 
will be received with the honors due to his rank. When he has 
taken his place in the line, the whole will be wheeled into platoons 
or companies, as the case may be, and take up the march. The 
same ceremony will be observed, and^the same honors paid, on his 
leaving the escort. 



588 MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

When the position of the escort is at a considerable distance from 
the point where he is expected to be received, as, for instance, where 
a court-yard or wharf intervenes, a double line of sentinels will be 
posted from that point to the escort, facing inward, and the sentinels 
will successively salute as he passes. 

An officer will be appointed to attend him, to bear such commu- 
nications as he may have to make to the commander of the escort. 

Funeral Honors, 

734. The funeral escort of a General commanding-in-cJiief, shall 
consist of a regiment of infantry, a squadron of cavalry, and six 
pieces of artillery. 

That of a Major- General, a regiment of infantry, a squadron of 
cavalry, and four pieces of artillery. 

That of a Brigadier- General, a regiment of infantry, one com- 
pany of cavalry, and two pieces of artillery. 

That of a Colonel, a regiment. 

That of a Lieutenant- Colonel, six companies. 

That of a Major, four companies. 

That of a Captain, one company. 

That of a Subaltern, half a company. 

The funeral escort shall always be commanded by an officer of the 
same rank with the deceased ; or, if none such be present, by one 
of the next inferior grade. 

The funeral escort of a non-commissioned staff officer shall con- 
sist of sixteen rank and file, commanded by a sergeant. 

That of a sergeant, of fourteen rank and file, commanded by a 
sergeant. 

That of a corporal, of twelve rank and file, commanded by a cor- 
poral; and. 

That of a private, of eight rank and file, commanded by a cor- 
poral. 

The escort will be formed in two ranks, opposite to the quarters 
or tent of the deceased, with shouldered arms and bayonets unfixed ; 
the artillery and cavalry on the right of the infantry. 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 589 

On the appearance of the corpse, the officer commanding the es- 
cort will command : 

Present — Arms; 

when the honors due to the deceased will be paid by the drums and 
trumpets. . The music will then play an appropriate air, and the 
coffin will then be taken to the right, where it will be halted. The 
3ommander will next order : 

1. Shoulder — Arms. 2. By comj^any (or platoo7i), left icJieel. 
3. March. 4. Reverse — Arms. 5. Column, forward. 6. Guide 
right. 7. March. 

The arms will be reversed at the order by bringing the iBrelock 
under the left arm, butt to the front, barrel downward, left hand 
sustaining the lock, the right steadying the firelock behind the back ) 
swords are reversed in a similar manner under the right arm. 

The column will be marched in slow time to solemn music, and, 
on reaching the grave, will take a direction so that the guides shall 
be next to the grave. When the centre of the column is opposite 
the grave, the commander will order : 

1. Column. 2. Halt. 3. Right into line, tvheel. 4. March. 

The coffin is then brought along the front, to the opposite side of 
the grave, and the commander then orders : 

1. Shoidder — Arms. 2. Present — Arms. 
And when the coffin reaches the grave, he adds : 

1. Shoulder — Arms. 2. Rest on — Arms. 

The rest on arms is done by placing the muzzle on the left foot, 
both hands on the butt, the head on the hands or bowed, right knee 
bent. 

After the funeral service is performed, and the coffin is lowered 
into the grave, the commander will order : 

1. Attention. 2. Shoulder — Arms. 3. Load at will. 4. Load. 
50 



590 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

When tliree rounds of small arms will be fired by the escort, 
taking care to elevate the pieces. 

This being done, the commander will order : 

\. By company (qy 2'>lo toon), riglit iclieel. 2. March, 3. Column^ 
forward. 4. Guide left. 5. Quick — March. 

The music will not begin to play until the escort is clear of the 
inclosure. 

When the distance to the place of interment is considerable, the 
escort may march in common time and in column of route, after 
leaving the camp or garrison, and till it approaches the burial-ground. 

The pall-bearers, six in number, will be selected from the grade 
of the deceased, or from the grade or grades next above or below it- 

At the funeral of an officer, as many in commission of the army, 
division, brigade, or regiment, according to the rank of the deceased, 
as can conveniently be spared from other duties, will join in proces- 
sion, in uniform, and with side-arms. The funeral of a non-com- 
missioned officer or private will be attended, in like manner, by +he 
non-commissioned officers or privates of the regiment or company, 
according to the rank of the deceased, with side-arms only. 

Persons joining in the procession follow the coffin in the inverse 
order of their rank. 

The usual badge of military mourning is a piece of black crape 
around the left-arm, above the elbow, and also upon the sword-hilt; 
and will be worn when in full or in undress. 

As family mourning, crape will be worn by officers (when in uni- 
form) only around the left arm. 

The drums of a funeral escort will be covered with black crape, 
or thin black serge. 

Funeral honors will be paid to deceased officers without military 
rank according to their assimilated grades, 

INSPECTIONS OF TUB TROOPS. 

735. The inspection of troops, as a division, regiment, or other 
body composing a garrison or command, not less than a company, 
will generally be preceded by a review. 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 591 

Form of in-ipectlon for mfardnj. 

The present example embraces a battalion of infantry. The in 
specting officer and the field and stajQF officers will be on foot. 

The battalion being in the order of battle, the colonel will cause 
it to break into open column of companies, right in front. He will 
next order the ranks to be opened, when the color-rank and color- 
guard, under the direction of the adjutant, will take post ten paces 
in front, and the band ten paces in rear of the column. 

The colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will command, 

1. Officers and sergeants, to the front of your companies. 2. March. 

The officers will form themselves in one rank, eight paces, and 
the non-commissioned officers in one rank, six paces, in advance, 
along the whole fronts of their respective companies, from right to 
left, in the order of seniority ) the pioneers and music of each com- 
pany, in one rank, two paces behind the non-commissioned officers. 

The colonel will next command : 

Field and staff, to the front — MARCH. 

The commissioned officers thus designated will form themselves 
in one rank, on a line equal to the front of the column, six paces in 
front of the colors, from right to left, in the order of seniority ; and 
the non-commissioned staff, in a similar manner, two paces in rear 
of the preceding rank. The colonel, seeing the movement executed, 
will take post on the right of the lieutenant-colonel, and wait the 
approach of the inspecting officer. But such of the field officers as 
may be superior in rank to the inspector will not take post in front 
of the battalion. 

The inspector will commence in front. After inspecting the 
dress and general appearance of the field and commissioned staff 
under arms, the inspector, accompanied by these officers, will pass 
down the open column, looking at every rank in front and rear. 

The colonel will now command : 

1. Order arms, 2. Rest; 



592 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

when the inspector will proceed to make a minute inspection of the 
several ranks or divisions, in succession, commencing in front. 

As the inspector approaches the non-commissioned staiF, color- 
rank, the color-guard, and the band, the adjutant will give the 
necessary orders for the inspection of arms, boxes, and knapsacks. 
The colors will be planted firm in the ground, to enable the color- 
bearers to display the contents of their knapsacks. The non-com- 
missioned staff may be dismissed as soon as inspected ; but the color- 
rank and color-guard will remain until the colors are to be escorted 
to the place from which they were taken. 

As the inspector successively approaches the companies, the cap- 
tains will command : 

1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Inspection — Arms. 

The inspecting officer will then go through the whole company, 
and minutely inspect ihQ arms, accoutrements, and dress of each 
soldier. After this is done, the captain will command : 

Open — Boxes ; 

when the ammunition and the boxes will be examined. 
The captain will then command : 

1. Slioulder — Arms. 2. Close order. 3. March. 4. Order 

Arms. 5. Stack — Arms. 6. To the rear open order. 
7. March. 8. Front rank — About — Face. 9. Unsling — 
Knapsacks. 10. Open — Knapsacks. 

The sergeants will face inward at the second command, and close 
upon the centre at the third, and stack their arms at the fifth 
command ; at the sixth command they face outward, and resume 
their positions at the seventh. When the ranks are closed, pre- 
paratory to take arms, the sergeants will also close upon the centre, 
and at the word, take their arms and resume their places. 

The knapsacks will be placed at the feet of the men, the flaps 
from them, with the great-coats on the flaps, and the knapsacks 
leaning on the great-coats. In this position the inspector will 
examine their contents, or so many of them as he may think neces- 



HONORS PAID BY THE TR, OOPS^ ETC. 593 

sary, commencing witli the non-commissioned officers; tlie men 
standing at attention. 

When the inspector has passed through the company, the cap- 
tain will command ; 

Repach — Knapsachs ; 

when each soldier will repack and buckle up his knapsack, leaving 
it on the ground, the number upward, turned from him, and then 
stand at rest. 

The captain will then command : 

1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Sling — Knapsacks. 

At the word sling, each soldier will take his knapsack, holding 
it by the inner straps, and stand erect ; at the last word he will 
replace it on his back. The captain will continue : 

4. Fro7it rank — About — Face. 5. Close ordc7\ 6. March. 
7. Take — Arms. 8. Shoulder — Arms. 9. OJicers and Ser- 
geants to your posts. 10. March. 

And will cause the company to file off to their tents or quarters, 
except the company that is to re-escort the colors, which will await 
the further orders of the colonel. 

In an extensive column, some of the rearmost companies may, 
after the inspection of dress and general appearance, be permitted 
to stack arms until just before the inspector approaches them, when 
they will be directed to take arms and resume their position. 

The inspection of the troops being ended, the field and staff will 
next accompany the inspector to the hospital, magazine, arsenal, 
quarters, sutler's shop, guard-house, and such other places as he 
may think proper to inspect. The captains and subalterns repair 
t<) their companies and sections to await the inspector. 

The hospital being at all times an object of particular interest, it 
will be critically and minutely inspected. 

The men will be formed in the company quarters in front of their 
respective bunks, and on the entrance of the inspector the word at- 
tention will be given by the senior non-commissioned officer present, 
when the whole will salute with the hand, without uncovering. 
50* 2 N 



594 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The inspector, attended by tlie company officers, will examine the 
general arrangement of the interior of the quarters, the bunks, 
bedding, cooking, and table utensils, and such other objects as may 
present themselves; and afterwards the exterior. 

The adjutant will exhibit to the inspector the regimental books 
and papers, including those relating to the transactions of the Coun- 
cil of Administration. The company books and papers will also be 
exhibited, the whole together, generally at the adjutant's office, and 
in the presence of the officers not otherwise particularly engaged. 

The inspector will examine critically the books and accounts of 
the administrative and disbursing officers of the command, and the 
money and property in their keeping. 

Inspection of Cavalry. 

736. -The regiment being in line as prescribed for a review, the 
colonel causes the companies to wheel to the right. He then orders 
the ranks to be opened; at which -the standard-bearer, under the 
direction of the adjutant, is posted about twenty paces ahead of 
the column. 

The colonel seeing the ranks aligned, commands: 1. Officers and 
non-commissioned officers. 2. Ih the front of your companies — 
March; on which the officers form themselves in one rank, twelve 
paces, and the non-commissioned officers in one rank, six paces, in 
advance, along the whole front of their respective troops, in the 
order of rank, the highest on the right, and the lowest on the left; 
the trumpeters of each company, at the same time, take post on the 
alignment of the front rank, six paces from the right. 

Seeing the last order in a train of execution, the colonel com- 
mands:!. Field and staff. 2. To the front — MARCH. The com- 
missioned officers thus designated, form themselves in one rank, 
twelve paces in front of the standards, in the following order, be- 
ginning on the right; lieutenant-colonel, major, adjutant, quarter- 
master, etc. The non-commissioned staff in a similar manner, six 
paces in rear of the preceding rank. The band is formed in one 
rank, ten paces in rear of the column, the chief musician four paces 
in front of it. 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 595 

The colonel, if a liiglier officer inspects tlie column, now takes 
his post on the right of the lieutenant-colonel. 

The inspection commences in front. After inspecting the dress 
and general appearance of the field and commissioned staff, the in- 
spector, accompanied by these officers, passes down the column, look- 
ing at every rank, in front and in rear, with a view to the same 
object. He afterwards, in a like manner, passes and inspects the 
arms. As he successively approaches each company for this purpose^ 
its captain commands : 1. Attention. 2. Inspection of — Arms. 

The inspector then dismounts with the field and commissioned 
staff, for the purpose of inspecting horse furniture, and valises, pre- 
paratory to which, the colonel causes the column to dismount. The 
men being then in the position of stand to horse, the colonel com- 
mands rest, for the whole column ; when the inspector proceeds to 
make a minute inspection of the several ranks, in succession, com- 
mencing in front. 

On approaching the non-commissioned staff and the band, the 
adjutant gives the necessary orders for the inspection of boxes and 
valises; and in like manner as to the standard-bearer. The non- 
commissioned staff may be dismounted as soon as inspected. 

As the inspector successively approaches the companies, each 
captain commands : 1. Attention. 2. Unstrap valises. 3. Open 
boxes'; when the valises are placed at the feet of the men, with the 
flaps from them. In this position the inspector may examine tlie 
contents of the whole, boxes and valises, or of as many as he may 
think necessary. 

As the inspector passes each company, the captain orders the 
valises to be re-packed and re-strapped, and the men to file off to 
their tents or quarters, except the company which is to escort the 
standard, which awaits the orders of the colonel. 

FORMS OF PARADE. 

737. On all parades of ceremony, such as Reviews, Gruard-mount- 
ing, at Troop or Retreat parades, instead of the word rest, which 
allows the men to move or change the position of their bodies, the 
command will be parade — rest. At the last word of this com- 



596 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

mand, tlie soldier will carry tlie right foot six in dies in rear of the 
left heel, the left knee slightly bent, the body upright upon the 
right leg ; the musket resting against the hollow of the right 
shoulder, the hands crossed in front, the backs of them outward, 
and the left hand uppermost. At the word attention, the soldier 
will resume the correct position at ordered arms. In the positions 
here indicated, the soldier will remain silent and motionless ; and it 
is particularly enjoined upon all officers to cause the commands 
above given, on the part of the soldier, to be executed with great 
briskness and spirit. 

Officers on all duties under arms are to have their swords drawn, 
without waiting for any words of command for that purpose. 

Dress j)arade. 

738. There shall be daily one dress parade, at troojj or retreat, as 
the commanding officer may direct. 

A signal will be beat or sounded half an hour before troop or 
retreat, for the music to assemble on the regimental parade, and each 
company to turn out under arms on its own parade, for roll-call and 
inspection by its own officers. 

Ten minutes after that signal, the Adjutants call will be given, 
wdien the captains will march their companies (the band playing) to 
the regimental parade, where they take their positions in line as 
directed. No. 297. When the line is formed, the captain of the 
first company, on notice from the adjutant, steps one pace to the 
front, and gives to his company the command, order arms ; 'parade ; 
rest; which is repeated by each captain in succession to the left. 
The adjutant takes post two paces on the right of the line ; the ser- 
geant-major two paces on the left. The music will be formed in two 
ranks on the right of the adjutant. The senior officer present will 
take the command of the parade, and will take post at a suitable dis- 
tance in front, opposite the centre, facing the line. 

When the companies have ordered arms, the adjutant will order 
the music to heat off, when it will commence on the right, beat in 
front of the line to the left, and back to its place on the right. 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 597 

When the music lias ceased, the adjutant will step two paces to 
the front, face to the left, and command : 

1. Attention. 2. Battalion. 3. Shoulder — Arms. 4. Prepare 
to open ranks. 5. To the rear open order. 6. March. 

At the sixth command, the ranks will be opened according to 
the system laid down in the Infantry Tactics, the commissioned 
officers marching to the front, the company officers four paces, field 
officers six paces, opposite to their positions in the order of battle, 
where they will halt and dress. The adjutant, seeing the ranks 
aligned, will command : 

Front, 

and march along the front to the centre, face to the right, and pass 
the line of company officers eight or ten paces, when he will come 
to the right about, and command : 

Present — Arms ; 

when arms will be presented, officers saluting. 

Seeing this executed, he will face about to the commanding 
officer, salute, and report, "Sir, the parade is formed.'^ The adju- 
tant will then, on intimation to that effect, take his station three 
paces on the left of the commanding officer, one pace retired, pass- 
ing round his rear. 

The commanding officer, having acknowledged the salute of the 
line by touching his hat, will, after the adjutant has taken his post, 
draw his sword, and command : 

1. Battalion. 2. Shoulder — Arms; 

and add such exercises as he may think proper, concludino- with : 

Order — Arms; 

then return his sword, and direct the adjutant to receive the reports 
The adjutant will now pass round the right of the commandino' 
officer, advance upon the line, halt midway between him and the 
line of company officers, and command : 



598 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

1. First sergeants, to the front and centre. 2. MARCH. 

At the first command, they will slioulder arms as sergeantSj march 
two paces to the front, and face inward. At the second command, 
the}/ will march to the centre, and halt. The adjutant will then 
order : 

1. Front — Face. 2. Reiwrt. 

At the last word, each in succession, beginning on the right, will 
salute by bringing the left hand smartly across the breast to the 
right shoulder, and report the result of the roll-call previously made 
on the company parade. 

The adjutant again commands: 

1. First sergeants, outward — Face. 2. To your posts — March; 

when they will resume their places, and order arms. The adjutant 
will now face to the commanding officer, salute, report absent 
officers, and give the result of the first sergeant's reports. The 
commanding officer will next direct the orders to be read, when the 
adjutant will face about, and announce : 

Attention to Orders. 

He will then read the orders. 

The orders having been read, the adjutant will face to the com- 
manding officer, salute, and report ; when, on an intimation from 
the commander, he will face again to the line, and announce : 

Parade is dismissed. 

All the officers will now return their swords, face inward, and 
close on the adjutant, he having taken position in their line, the 
field officers on the flanks. The adjutant commands : 

1. Front — ¥ac:e. 2. Forward — March; 

when they will march forward, dressing on the centre, the music 
playing, and when within six paces of the commander, the adjutant 
will give the word : 

Halt. 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 599 

The officers will then salute the commanding officer by raising the 
hand to the cap, and there remain until he shall have communicated 
to them such instructions as he may have to give, or intimates that 
the ceremony is finished. As the officers disperse, the first sergeants 
will close the ranks of their respective companies, and march them 
to the company parades, where they will be dismissed, the band con- 
tinuing to play until the companies clear the regimental parade. 

All field and company officers and men will be present at dress 
parades, unless especially excused, or on some duty incompatible 
with such attendance. 

A dress parade once a day will not be dispensed w^ith, except on 
extraordinary and urgent occasions. 

Revleiu of a hatted ion of infantry. 

739. Preparatory to a review, the adjutant will cause a camp color 
to be placed 80 or 100 paces, or more, according to the length of 
the line, in front of, and opposite to, where the centre of the battalion 
will rest, where the reviewing officer is supposed to take his station ; 
and, although he may choose to quit that position, still the color is 
to be considered as the point to which all the movements and forma- 
tions are relative. 

The adjutant will also cause points to be marked at suitable dis- 
tances, for the wheelings of the divisions; so that their right flanks, 
in marching past, shall only be about four paces from the camp-color, 
where it is supposed the reviewing officer places himself to receive 
the salute. 

The battalion being formed in the order of battle, at slioiddcrcd 
arms, the colonel will command : 

1. Battalion, prepare for review. 2. To the rear open order. 3. 

March. 

At the word march, the field and staff officers dismount; the com- 
pany officers and the color-rank advance four paces in front of the 
front rank, and place themselves opposite to their respective places, 
in the order of battle. The color-guard replace the color-rank. The 
staff officers place themselves, according to rank, three paces on the 



600 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

right of the rank of company officers, and one pace from each other; 
the music takes post as at a parade. The non-commissioned staff 
take post one pace from each other, and three paces on the right of 
the front rank of the battalion. 

When the ranks are aligned, the colonel will command : 



Front 



and place himself eight paces, and the lieutenant-colonel and major 
will place themselves two paces, in front of the rank of company 
officers, and opposite to their respective places in the order of battle, 
all facing to the front. 

When the reviewing officer presents himself before the centre, 
and is fifty or sixty paces distant, the colonel will face about, and 
command : 

Present — Arms ; 

and resume his front. The men present arms, and the officers salute, 
so as to drop their swords with the last motion of the firelock. The 
non-commissioned staff salute by bringing the sword to 2^. poise, the 
hilt resting on the breast, the blade in front of the face, inclining a 
little outward. The music will play, and all the drums beat, accord- 
ing to the rank of the reviewing officer. The colors only salute such 
persons as, from their rank, and by regulation (see No. 730), are 
entitled to that honor. If the reviewing ofiicer be junior in rank 
to the commandant of the parade, no compliment will be paid to 
him, but he will be received with arms carried, and the officers will 
not salute as the column passes in review. 

The reviewing officer having halted, and acknowledged the salute 
of the line by touching or raising his cap or hat, the colonel will 
face about and command : 

Shoulder — Arms ; 

when the men shoulder their pieces ; the officers and non-commis- 
sioned staff recover their swords with the last motion, and the colonel 
faces to the front. 

The reviewing officer will then go towards the right, the whole 
remaining perfectly steady, without paying any further compliment^ 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 601 

while he passes along the front of the battalion, and proceeds round 
the left flank, and along the rear of the file-closers, to the right 
While the reYie^Ying officer is going round the battalion, the band 
will play, and will cease when he has returned to the right flank of 
the troops. 

AVhen the reviewing ofiicer turns ofi", to place himself by the 
camp-color iu frontj the colonel will face to the line, and com- 
mand : 

1. Clo&e order. 2. March. 

At the first command, the field and company ofiicers will face to 
the riglu about, and at the second command, all persons, except the 
colonel, will resume their places in the order of battle ; the field and 
staff ofiicers mount. 

The reviewing ofiicer having taken his position near the camp- 
color, the colonel will command : 

1. Bi/ cor\tjpnmj^ right wheel. 2. Quirh — MARCH. 3. Pa.?.s in 
review. 4. Column, forward. 5. Guide ri(jht. 6. March. 

The battalion, in column of companies, right in front, will then, 
in common time, and at shouldered arms, be put in motion ; the 
colonel four paces in front of the captain of the leading company ; 
the lieutenant-colonel on a line with the leading company ; the 
major on a line with the rear company; the adjutant on a line with 
the second company; the sergeant-major on a line with the com- 
pany next preceding the rear — each six paces from the flank (left) 
opposite to the reviewing ofiicer; the staff" oflacers in one rank, 
according to the order of precedency, from the right, four paces in 
rear of the column ; the music, preceded by the principal musician, 
six paces before the colonel; the pioneers, preceded by a corpoial, 
four paces before the principal musician ; and the quartermaster- 
sergeant two paces from the side opposite to the guides, and in line 
with the pioneers. 

All other ofiicers and non-commissioned officers will march past 
in the places prescribed for them in the march of an open column. 
The guides and soldiers will keep their heads steady to the front in 
passing in review. 
51 



602 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The color-bearer will remain in the ranks while passing and 
saluting. 

The music will begin to play at the command to march, and after 
passing the reviewing officer^ wheel to the left out of the column, 
and take a position opposite and facing him, and will continue to 
play until the rear of the column shall have passed him, when it 
will cease, and follow in the rear of the battalion, unless the batta- 
lion is to pass in q\iich time also, in which case it will keep its 
position. 

The officers will. salute the reviewing officer when they arrive 
within six paces of him, and recover their swords when six paces 
past him. All officers, in saluting, will cast their eyes towards the 
reviewing officer. 

The colonel, when he has saluted at the head of the battalion, 
will place himself near the reviewing officer, and will remain there 
until the rear has passed, when he will rejoin the battalion. 

The colors will salute the reviewing officer, if entitled to it, when 
within six paces of him, and be raised when they have passed by 
him an equal distance. The drums will beat a march, or ruffle, 
according to the rank of the reviewing officer, at the same time that 
the colors salute. 

When the column has passed the reviewing officer, the colonel 
will direct it to the ground it marched from, and command : 

Guide left; 

in time for the guides to cover. The column having arrived on its 
ground, the colonel will command : 

1. Column. 2. Halt; 

form it in order of battle, and cause the ranks to be opened. The 
review will terminate by the whole saluting as at the beginning. 

If, however, instructions have been previously given to march the 
troops past in quick time also, the colonel will, instead of changing 
the guides, halting the column, and wheeling it into line, as above 
directed, give the command : 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. G03 

1. Quick time. 2. March. 

In passing tlie reviewing officer again^ no salute will be oifered 
by either officers or men. The music will have kept its position 
opposite the reviewing officer, and at the last command will com- 
mence playing, and, as the column approaches, will place itself in 
front of, and march off with the column, and continue to play until 
the battalion is halted on its original ground of formation. The 
review will terminate in the same manner as prescribed above. ^ 

The colonel will afterwards cause the troops to perform such exer- 
cises and manoeuvres as the reviewing officer may direct. 

When two or more battalions are to be reviewed, they will be 
formed in parade order, with the proper intervals, and will also per- 
form the same movements that are laid down for a single battalion, 
observing the additional directions that are given for such move- 
ments when applied to the line. The brigadier-general and his 
staff, on foot, will place themselves opposite the centre of the 
brigade; the brigadier-general two paces in front of the rank of 
colonels ; his aid two paces on his right, and one retired ; and the 
other brigade staff officers, those having the rank of field officers, in 
the rank of lieutenant-colonels and majors; and those belov/ that 
rank, in the rank of company officers. 

In passing in review, a major-general will be four paces in front 
of the colonel of the leading battalion of his division ; and the 
brigadier-general will be on the right of the colonels of the leading 
battalions of their brigades ; staff officers on the left of their generals. 

When the line exceeds two battalions, the reviewing officer may 
cause them to march past in quick time only. In such cases the 
mounted officers only will salute. 

A number of companies less than a battalion will be reviewed as 
a battalion, and a single company as if it were with the battalion. 
In the latter case, the company may pass in column of platoons. 

If several brigades are to be reviewed together, or in one line, 
this further difference will be observed : the reviewing personage, 

1 Or the battalion may pass a third time at the double quick, and then 
re-form. 



604 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND JI I L I T I A . 

joined by the general of the division, on the right of his division, 
will proceed down the line, parallel to its front, and when near the 
brigadier-generals respectively, will be saluted by their brigades in 
succession. The music of each, after the prescribed salute, will 
play while the reviewing personage is in front, or in rear of it, and 
only then. 

In marching in review, with several battalions in common time, 
the music of each succeeding battalion will commence to play when 
the music of the preceding one has ceased, in order to follow its 
battalion. When marching in quick time, the music will begin to 
play when the rear company of the preceding battalion has passed 
the reviewing officer. 

The reviewing officer or personage will acknowledge the salute 
by raising, or taking off, his cap. or hat, when the commander of the 
troops salutes him; and also when the colors pass. The remainder 
of the time occupied by the passage of the troops he will be covered. 

Review of a Regiment of Cavalry/. 

740. The regiment being in line, the captains one pace in advance 
of the centre of their companies, the lieutenants commanding pla- 
toons one pace in advance of the centre of their platoons, the colonel 
commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Prepare for review. 8. Rear raiik open order. 
4. March. 5. Rir/ht — Dress. 6. Front. 

At tlie fourth command the ranks are opened, all the officers in 
the rank of file-closers advancing to the front, and placing them- 
selves on the line of officers, opposite to the positions they before 
occupied. The staff officers place themselves on the right of the 
rank of company officers, according to their relative rank, one pace 
from each other. The quartermaster-sergeant and the sergeant- 
major, are on the right of the front rank of the regiment. 

The colonel, lieutenant-colonel, major, and adjutant are posted a? 
in order of battle. 

The music is formed at the same time in one rank on the right 
of the regiment, and ten paces from it 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 005 

After tlie ranks are opened, the colonel commands : 
1. Attention. 2. Draio — Sabre. 

In this parade order, the regiment awaits the approach of the 
personage who is to review it ; for whose guidance a camp-color will 
have been placed eighty or one hundred and fifty paces in front of 
the centre, according to the extent of the line and the plain in 
front of it. 

When the reviewing personage is midway between the camp-color 
and the colonel, the latter turns his horse to the right about on his 
ground, and commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Present — Sabre; 

and resumes his proper front. The officers all salute. 

When the reviewing personage, who has halted until the proper 
compliments are paid, advances, the colonel brings his sabre to a 
carry ^ turns about as before to the line, and commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Carry — Sabre. 

When the whole line remains perfectly steady, except the colonel, 
who resumes his proper front. 

The reviewing- personage now turns off to the right of the regi- 
ment, passes thence, in front of all the officers, to the left, around 
the left, and behind the rank of file-closers, to the right again. 
While he is passing around the regiment, no matter what his rank, 
the music will play ; and when he turns off to take his station near 
the camp-color, the music will cease. 

When the music ceases, the colonel turns about, and commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Rear ranh, close order. 3. March. 

At the command march, all the officers from the rank of file- 
closers return to their position in that rank. 

The reviewing personage having taken a position near the camp- 
color, previously placed at a proper distance, the colonel causes the 
regiment to break into column of companies, right in front, and 

commands : 

Pass in revieiu. 
51* 



606 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

At this command the band and trimipeters repair to the head of 
the regimental column, six paces in front of the colonel. The quar- 
termaster-sergeant places himself ten paces in front of the colonel, 
two paces from the flank opposite to the guides. 

The quartermaster, surgeon, etc., in one rank, in the order in 
which they are named, four paces in rear of the last division. 

The colonel is six paces in front of the captain of the leading 
company. 

The lieutenant-colonel on a line with the first company, six paces 
from the flank opposite to the guide. 

The major on a line with the last company, six paces from the 
side opposite to the guide. 

The adjutant on a line with the second company, six paces from 
the flank opposite to the guide. 

The sergeant-major on a line with the company next to the rear, 
six paces from the flank opposite to the guide. 

Captains, two paces in advance of the centre of their companies. 

Chiefs of platoons, two paces in advance of the centre of their 
platoons. 

Oflicers of the rank of file-closers, on the side opposite the guide, 
on a line with the chiefs of platoons. 

The column is then put in march, at a walk, with the guide on 
the side next to the reviewing personage. 

The column first passes at a walk, and afterwards, if required, at 
a trot. 

^A'hen the head of the column arrives within fifty paces of the 
reviewing personage, the music commences to play. 

Tlie band having passed, the chief musician causes it to wheel 
out oi' the column and take position opposite to the reviewing per- 
sonage ; the music continues to play until the last company has 
passed, when it ceases, and follows in the rear. 

Passing at a walk, all the oflicers salute with the sabre as they 
successively arrive within six paces of the reviewing personage, 
turning thtir heads towards him. 

If more than one regiment passes, the difi'erent regiments will 
march with intervals of about forty paces between them. 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 607 

Review of a hatlcry of artillery. 

741. The battery being in line with the trumpeters on the right, 
the captain commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Prepare for revleir. 3. To the rear open order, 
4. March. 5. Elr/ht — Dress. 6. Front. 

At the third command, the chief of the line of caissons com- 
mands, cnlswns — left reverse, and places himself on the right flank 
sixteen yards in rear of the line of pieces, facing to the left, to 
mark the point where the right of the line of caissons is to rest. 
In horse artillery the distance is twenty yards. 

At the same command, the gunners face the detachments to the 
rear in foot artillery, by the command about — face; and in horse 
artillery, they command, backward. 

At the command ynarch, repeated by the chief of the line of 
caissons, the caissons reverse to the left, move to the rear, reverse 
again to the left, and align themselves by appropriate commands 
from the chief of the line of caissons. As soon as the ground is 
unmasked, the gunners repeat the command march, at which the 
cannoneers in foot artillery march forward, and are formed six yards 
in rear of their pieces; the chiefs of caissons joining their detach- 
ments at the same time. In horse artillery the cannoneers rein back 
and are halted by the gunners at the same distance. 

At the fifth command the battery is aligned; the pieces and 
detachments by the captain, and the caissons by the chief of the 
line of caissons. At the sixth command, given by the captain when 
the alignment is completed, the chief of the line of caissons takes 
his post as in line. The captain then commands : 

Draw — Swords. 

This is executed by the officers, non-commissioned officers, and 
detachments only, and the captain takes his post as in line. 

In this order the battery awaits the approach of the reviewing 
officer. When he is midway between the camp color and the cap- 
tain, the latter turns his horse to the right about and commands : 



608 MANUAL FOR YOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Present — SwORDS. 

He immediately resumes his front and salutes. Tlie officerSj non- 
commissioned officers, and detachments, all salute as in cavalry; and 
the music plays according to the rank of the reviewing officer. 

The reviewing officer having halted and acknowledged the salute, 
the captain brings his sword to a carry^ turns about to the line as 
before, and commands : 

Carry — SwORLS. 

He immediately resumes his front, the reviewing officer turns off 
to the right of the battery, passes along its front, and returns to the 
right by passing between the lines of carriages or in rear of the 
caissons. While the reviewing officer is passing around the battery, 
the music plays. It ceases when he turns off to take his post at the 
camp color. 

When the music ceases, the captain turns about and commands : 

1. Detachments. 2. Return — SwORDS. 3. Battery. 4. Close 
order. 5. March. 

In horse artillery the first and second commands are not given. 

At the fourth command, the gunners in foot artillery command, 
left — face, and in horse artillery, forward. 

At the command march, repeated by the gunners, the cannoneers 
in mounted artillery take their posts as prescribed in the school of the 
piece. The caissons, and in horse artillery the cannoneers, close to 
their proper distances in line. 

The reviewing officer having taken a position near the camp color, 
the captain causes the cannoneers to mount, if in foot artillery, and 
breaks the battery into column of sections to the right by the usual 
commands. He then commands : 

Pass in revieio ; 

and puts the column in march, at a walk, with the guide to the 
right. The captain then places himself at the head of the column, 
four yards in advance of the chief of the leading section. The 



HONORS r A I D BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 609 

trumpeters march four yards in advance of the captain ; and the 
chief of the line of caissons outside the column, opposite the centre, 
and four yards from the left fiank. 

When the head of the column has arrived within forty yards of 
the reviewing officer, the music begins to play ; and as soon as the 
latter has passed, it wheels out of the column to a position in front 
of the reviewing officer, where it faces him, and continues to play 
until the column has passed. It then ceases, follows in rear of the 
battery, and resumes its place at the head of the column after the 
next change of direction. 

All the officers salute in succession as they arrive within six yards 
of the reviewing officer; casting their eyes towards him at the same 
time, and bringing their swords to a carry after having passed him 
six yards. As soon as the captain has saluted, he places himself 
near the reviewing officer, remains until the rear has passed, and 
then rejoins his battery. 

The column is so conducted as to march parallel to the line on 
which the battery is to form, and far enough in its rear to enable 
the column to wheel into line. It is then wheeled into line, the 
ranks opened, and the review terminated by a salute as at the 
beginning. 

When instructions have been previously given to pass a second 
time, either at a trot or gallop, it will be done before wheeling into 
line ; the officers passing the second time without salute. 

When artillery has been passing in review with other troops, and 
is marching in prolongation of the line on which the different corps 
are to form, it may be wheeled by sections to the right, and, after 
gaining the necessary distance, countermarched and established on 
the line. 

When a battery is to march past in line, or in column of half 
batteries, it will be done according to the principles already de- 
scribed. In line the officers will be at their usual posts. In column 
of half batteries the captain will be two yards in advance of the 
chief of the leading half battery; each chief of half battery two 
yards in front of the centre of his command ; the chief of the centre 
section on the left of the leading half battery, four yards from the 

2o 



610 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

leading driver; and the chief of the line of caissons in the same 
position with respect to the rear half battery. 

In all cases the trumpeters are four yards in front of the captain. 

Yv^hen the battery is to be minutely inspected, the captain will 
cause the ranks of the detachments to be opened, if required^ by 
the commands : 

1. Detachments. 2. To the rear open order. 3. March. 

Which will be executed as in infantry or cavalry, as the case may 
require. 

GUARD-MOUIs'TING. 

742. At the first call for guard-mounting, the men warned for 
duty turn out on their company parades for inspection by the first 
sergeants; and at the second call, repair to the regimental or gar- 
rison parade, conducted by the first sergeants. Each detachment, 
as it arrives, will, under the direction of the adjutant, take post on 
the left of the one that preceded it, in open order, arms shouldered, 
and bayonets fixed ; the supernumeraries five paces in the rear of the 
men of their respective companies; the first sergeants in rear of 
them. The sergeant-major will dress the ranks, count the files, 
verify the details, and when the guard is formed, report to the ad- 
jutant, and take post two paces on the left of the front rank. 

The adjutant then commands /ro?i;^, when the officer of the guard 
takes post twelve paces in front of the centre, the sergeants in one 
rank, four paces in the rear of the officers ; and the corporals in one 
rank, four paces in the rear of the sergeants — all facing to the front. 
The adjutant then assigns their places in the guard. 

The adjutant will then command: 

1. Officer and non-commissioned officers. 2. About — Face. 
3. InsjDecf your guards — MARCH. 

The non-commissioned officers then take their posts. The com- 
mander of the guard then commands : 

1. O/Y/er — Arms. 2. Insjjection — Arms; 



HONORS r A I D BY THE TROOPS, ETC. Gil 

and inspects his guard. When there is no commissioned officer on 
the guard, the adjutant will inspect it. During; inspection the band 
will play. 

The inspection ended, the officer of the guard takes post as though 
the guard were a company of a battalion, in open order under re- 
view ; at the same time, also, the officers of the day will take post 
in front of the centre of the guard ', the old officer of the day three 
paces on the right of the new officer of the day, one pace retired. 

The adjutant will now command : 

1. Parade — Rest. 2. Troop — Beat off ; 

when the music, beginning on the right, will beat down the line on 
front of the officer of the guard to the left, and back to its place in 
the right, where it will cease to play. 
The adjutant then commands : 

1. Attention. 2. Shoulder — Arms. 3. Close order — March. 

At the word close order, the officer will face about ; at march^ 
resume his post in line. The adjutant then commands : 

Present — Arms. 

At which he will face to the new officer of the day, salute, and 
report, ^^Sir, the guard is formed J^ The new officer of the day, 
after acknowledging the salute, will direct the adjutant to march 
the guard in review, or by flank to its post. But if the adjutant 
be senior to the officer of the day, he will report without saluting 
with the sword then, or when marching the guard in review. 

In review, the guard march past the officer of the day, accord- 
ing to the order of review, conducted by the adjutant, marching on 
the left of the first division; the sergeant-major on the left of the 
last division. 

When the column has passed the officer of the day, the officer 
of the guard marches it to its post, the adjutant and sergeant-major 
retiring. The music, which has wheeled out of the column, and 
taken post opposite the officer of the day, will cease, and the old 
officer of the day salute, and give the old or standing orders to the 



612 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

new officer of tlie day. The supernumeraries, at the same time, 
will be marched by the first sergeants to their respective company 
parades, and dismissed. 

In bad weather, or at night, or after fatiguing marches, the cere- 
mony of turning off may be dispensed with, but not the inspection. 

Grand guards, and other brigade guards, are organized and 
mounted on the brigade parade by the staff officer of the parade, 
tinder the direction of the field officer of the day of the brigade, 
according to the principles here prescribed for a police guard of a 
regiment. The detail of each regiment is assembled on the regi- 
mental parade, verified by the adjutant, and marched to the brio:ade 
parade by the senior officer of the detail. After inspection and 
review, the officer of the day directs the several guards to their 
respective posts. 

The officer of the old guard, having his guard paraded, on the 
approach of the new guard, commands : 

Present — Arms. 

The new guard will march, in quick time, past the old guard, at 
shouldered arms, officers saluting, and take post four paces on its 
right, where, being aligned with it, its commander will order : 

Present — Arms. 

The two officers will then approach each other, and salute. They 
will then return to their respective guards, and command: 

1. Shoulder — Arms. 2. Order — Arms. 

The officer of the new guard will now direct the detail for the 
advanced guard to be formed and marched to its post, the list of the 
guard made and divided into three reliefs, experienced soldiers 
placed over the arms of the guard and at the remote and responsible 
posts, and the young soldiers in posts near the guard for instruction 
in their duties, and will himself proceed to take possession of the 
guard-house, or guard-tent, and the articles and prisoners in charge 
of the guard. 

During the time of relieving the sentinels, and of calling in the 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 613 

small posts, the old commander will give to tlie new all the infor- 
mation and instructions relating to his post. 

The first relief having been designated and ordered two paces to 
the front, the corporal of the new guard will take charge of it, and 
go to relieve the sentinels, accompanied by the corporal of the old 
guard, who will take command of the old sentinels, when the whole 
are relieved. ^ 

If the sentinels are numerous, the sergeants are to be employed, 
as well as the corporals, in relieving them. 

The relief, with arms at a support, in two ranks, will march by a 
flank, conducted by the corporal on the side of the leading front- 
rank man ; and the men will be numbered alternately in the front 
and rear rank, the man on the right of the front rank being No. 1. 
Should an officer approach, the corporal will command carry arms^ 
and resume the support arms when the officer is passed. 

The sentinels at the guard-house or guard-tent will be the first 
relieved and left behind; the others are relieved in succession. 

When a sentinel sees the relief approaching, he will halt and face 
to it with his arms at a shoulder. At six paces, the corporal will 
command : 

1. Belief. 2. Halt. 

When the relief will halt and carry arms. The corporal will then 
add, "No. 1," or "No. 2," or "No. 3," according to the number of 
the post : 

Arms — Port. 

The two sentinels will, v/ith arms at port, then approach each 
other, when the old sentinel, under the correction of the corporal, 
will Avhisper the instructions to the new sentinel. This done, the 
two sentinels will shoulder arms, and the old sentinel will pass, in 
quick time, to his place in rear of the relief. The corporal will 
then command : 

1. SyjDport — Arms. 2. Forward. 3. March. 

And the relief proceeds in the same manner until the whole are 
relieved. 
52 



614 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The detachments and sentinels from the old guard having como 
in, it will be marched, at slioiddered arms, along the front of the 
new guard, in quick time, the new guard standing 2it presented arms ; 
officers saluting, and the music of both guards beating, except at 
the outposts. 

On arriving at the regimental or garrison parade, the commander 
of the old guard will send the detachments composing it, under 
charge of the non-commissioned officers, to their respective regi- 
ments. Before the men are dismissed, their pieces will be drawn or 
discharged at a target. On rejoining their companions, the chiefs 
of squads will examine the arms, etc.^ of their men, and cause the 
whole to be put away in good order. 

When the old guard has marched off fifty paces, the officer of the 
new guard will order his men to stack their arms, or place them in 
the arm-racks. 

The commander of the guard will then make himself acquainted 
with all the instructions for his post, visit the sentinels, and ques- 
tion them and the non-commissioned officers relative to the instruc- 
tions they may have received from other persons of the old guard. 

Method of escorting , and receiving the color of an infantry regiment. 

743. When the regiment turns out under arms, and the color is 
wanted, one of the flank companies in its tour, or, if both be absent, 
a battalion company, other than that of the color, will be put in 
march to receive and escort the color. 
" The march will be in the following order, in quick time and with- 
out music : the drum-major and field music, followed by the band; 
the escort in column by platoon, right in front, with arms shifted to 
the right shoulder (see No. 768), and the color-bearer between the 
platoons. 

Arrived in front of the tent or quarters of the colonel, the escort 
will form line, the field music and band on the right, and arms will 
be carried. 

The moment the escort is in line, the color-bearer, preceded by 
the first lieutenant, and followed by a sergeant of the escorj:, will go 
to receive the color. 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 615 

When the color-bearer shall come out, followed by the lieutenant 
and sergeant, he will halt before the entrance ; the escort will pre- 
sent arms, and the drums will beat to the color. 

After some twenty seconds, the captain will cause the beat to 
cease, arms to be shouldered, and then break by platoon into co- 
lumn ; the color-bearer will place himself between the platoons, and 
the lieutenant and sergeant will resume their posts. 

The escort will march back to the battalion to the sound of music 
in quick time, and in tbe same order as above. 

Honors j^aid to the color. 

Arrived at the distance of twenty paces from tlie battalion, tlie 
escort will halt, and the music cease; the colonel will place himself 
six paces before the centre of the battalion, the color-bearer will 
approach the colonel, by tbe front, in quick time; when at the dis- 
tance of ten paces, be will halt : the colonel will cause arms to be 
presented, and to the color to be played, which being executed, the 
color-bearer will take his place in the front rank of the color-guard, 
and the battalion, by command, shoulder arms. 

The escort, field music, and band, will return in quick time to 
their several places in line of battle, marching by the rear of the 
battalion. 

The color will be escorted back to the colonel's tent or quarters 
in the above order. 

Method of escorting and receiving the standard of a cavalry regiment 

744, The squadrons of a regiment, commencing with the first, 
furnish in turn the escort of the standard. 

The captains commanding and the second captain, alternate in 
command of the escort. 

The escort is composed of two platoons (a troop). 

The first platoon of the escort furnishes the advanced guard, com- 
posed of two men in front, with the carbine or rifle, advanced, or pistol 
raised ; a corporal and four men with drawn sabres march ten paces 
from them. 



616 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The trumpeters, formed by fours, and conducted by the adjutant, 
inarch ten paces from the four men who precede. 

The rest of the platoon with drawn sabres, having the lieutenant 
at its head, marches by fours, ten paces from the trumpeters. 

The standard-bearer follows immediately after, between two ser- 
geants. 

The second platoon with drawn sabres, having the second lieu- 
tenant at the head, follows the standard-bearer, marches by fours, 
and furnishes the rear guard, composed of a corporal and two men, 
who march with drawn sabres, ten paces in rear of the second 
platoon. 

Two other men, with the carbine or rijie adoanced, or pistol raised^ 
march ten paces in rear. 

The captain marches four paces from the left flank opposite to the 
standard-bearer. 

The detachment having arrived where the standard is kept, with- 
out sounding the trumpets, is there formed into line. 

The adjutant dismounts, takes the standard, and gives it to the 
standard-bearer. 

Reception of the Standard. 

As soon as the standard appears, the captain orders sabres to be 
presented ; the trumpets sound to the standard. 

After this signal has been twice repeated, the captain orders the 
sabres to be carried, and breaks in the same order in which he came : 
the trumpets sound the march. 

When the standard arrives in front of the right or left wing of 
the regiment, the colonel orders the sabres to be drawn ] the trum- 
pets cease to sound, and, with the escort, take their place in line^ 
passing behind the regiment. 

The standard-bearer, accompanied by the two sergeants, moves 
tov/ards the centre of the regiment, parallel to the front, and halts 
before the colonel, fronting the regiment ; the colonel then orders 
the sabres to be presented, and the trumpets to sound to the stand- 
ard; he salutes with the sabre. The standard-bearer then takes 
his place in line, and the colonel orders the sabres to be carried. 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 617 

The field officers salute with the sabre when the standard passes 
before them. 

The standard receives the same honors on its departure as on its 
arrival, and is escorted to the colonel's quarters in the order pre- 
scribed above. 

Reception of one loclij of troojjs hj another. 

745. The commanding officer of the receiving corps, having 
notified the commander of the other body of his intention, brings 
his command into line, so that it shall be on the o-iglit of the route 
which it is intended the other shall take. The commander of the 
body receiving the compliment, should have his command in column 
right in front; and when he sees the other body in line, or receives 
an intimation from its commanding officer, that he is ready to 
receive him, he puts his column in motion; when its head is within 
six paces of the left of the line on its right, the latter will be 
brought to a present, and will continue in that position until the 
rear of the column has passed the right of the line. The column 
passes at shouldered arms, each officer saluting as soon as he comes 
within six paces of the left of the line. When the rear of the column 
has passed some twenty-five or thirty paces beyond the right of the 
line, the column is brought into line, on the same side with the first 
line. As soon as this is done, the first line breaks into column right 
in front, and marches past the second, receiving the same compli- 
ments that it extended when the other body passed. After march- 
ing past, it may be formed into line again as it was at first, when both 
commands may be brought to an order, the officers advancing and 
being presented ; or the column may halt long enough to allow the 
other command, now in line, to re-form column, when both take up 
the march, the leading column serving as an escort for the other. 

ORDERS. 

746. The orders of commanders of armies, divisions, brigadiers 
and regiments, are denominated orders of such an army, division, 
etc. And all orders are either general or special. Orders are num- 
52* 



618 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

bered, general and special; in separate series^ eacli beginning "with 
llie year. 

General orders provide for tne organization, discipline, instruc- 
tion, and movement of the troops; announce tbe hours for roll-calls 
and duties; then umber and kind of guards, and the time when they 
shall be relieved ; police regulations, and the prohibitions required 
by circumstances and localities; returns to be made, and their forms; 
laws and regulations for the forces ; promotions and appointments ; 
eulogies or censures to corps or individuals, and generally, whatever 
it may be important to make known to the whole command. 

Special orders are such as do not concern the troops generally, 
and need not be published to the whole command; such as relate to 
the march of some particular corps, the establishment of some post, 
the detaching of individuals, the granting requests, etc., etc. 

An order will state, at the head, the source, place, and date, and 
at the foot, the name of the commander who gives it, followed by 
the signature and title of the staif officer by whom it is written, for 
example : 

For an army — 

Head Quarters, Army of Occupation^ 
Corpus Christi, Texas. 
Sept., 18—. 
Grcneral (or Special) Orders, ) 

By order of Greneral Z. T., 

W. S. B. Aclft General. 



No. 1. 



For a divisiun — 

Head Quarters, Sc? D., Va. M, 
Winchester, Va., Dec, 18 — . 
General (or Special) Orders, ") 
No. — . J 

By order of Major-General A. B., 

C. D., Assistaint Adft General, 

or Division Inspector, 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 619 

For a brigade — 

Head Quarters, dth Brigade, Va. 31., 

Camp near , Jan., 18 — . 

General (or Special) Orders, | 
No. — . j 

By order of Brigadier General F. G. 

H. I., Assistarit Adft- General, 

or Brigade Inspector 

For a regiment — 

Head Quarters, 20th Regiment, Va. 31. 
C — N., August, 18 — . 
Orders (or Special Orders), 
No.—. 

By order of Colonel 0. P. Q., 

R. S., J^djutanf. 

Orders are ordinarily transmitted through all the intermediate 
commanders in the order of rank. When an intermediate com- 
mander is omitted, the officer who gives the order shall inform him, 
and he who receives it shall report it to his immediate superior. 

The orderly hours being fixed at each head-quarters, the staff 
officers and chiefs of the special services, either attend in person, or 
send their assistants to obtain the orders of the day; and the first 
sergeants of companies repair for that purpose to the regimental or 
garrison head-quarters. 

During marches and active operations, and when the regular 
orderly hours cannot be observed, all orders will be either sent 
direct to the troops, or the respective commanders or corps will be 
informed when to send to head-quarters for them. 

MUSTERS. 

747. Musters of the volunteers and militia are made at least once 
a year, by the brigade inspectors. Where troops are in actual ser- 
vice musters are made every two months ; usually on the last day 
of every second month. In this case they are made by an inspector- 
general, if present, otherwise by an officer specially designated by 



620 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the commander of tlie army, division, or brigade ; and in the absence 
of the inspector-general or officer specially designated^ the muster is 
made by the commander of the post. 

When one inspecting officer cannot inspect all the troops himself 
on the day specified, the commanding officer will designate such 
other competent officers as may be necessary, to assist him. All 
stated musters of the troops should be preceded by a minute and 
careful insjjection in the prescribed mode ; and if the command be 
more than a company, by a review, before inspection. 

The mustering officer having inspected the companies in succes- 
sion, beginning on the right, returns to the first company to muster 
it. The company being at ordered arms, with open ranks, as when 
inspected, the captains will, as the mustering officer approaches, 
command : 

1. Attention. 2. Comjjani/. 3. Shoulder — Arms. 4. Support — • 

Arms. 

The mustering officer will then call over the names on the roll, 
and each man, as his name is called, will distinctly answer Aere, 
and bring his piece to a carry, and to an order. 

After each company is mustered, the captain will order it to be 
marched to the company parade, and there dismissed to quarters, to 
await the inspector's visit. After mustering the companies, the 
mustering officer, attended by the company commanders, will visit 
the guard and hospital, to verify the presence of the men reported 
there. The muster and pay rolls are made on printed forms in 
accordance with the directions on them. On the muster rolls com- 
panies are designated by the name of the captain, whether present 
or absent. The pay roll is left blank to fill up by the paymaster. 



THE ROSTER, OR DETAILS FOR SERVICE. 

748. The duties performed by detail are of three classes. The 
first class comprises, first, grand guards and outposts; second, 
interior guards, as of magazine, hospital, etc. ; third, orderlies ; 
fourth, police guards. 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 621 

The second class comprises, first, detachments to protect hibor on 
military works, as field works, communications, etc. -, second, work- 
ing parties on such works; third, detachments to protect fatigues. 

The tJnrcl class are all fatigues, without arms, in or out of camp. 
In the cavalry, stable-guards form a separate roster^ and count be- 
fore fatigue. 

The rosters are distinct for each class. Officers are named on 
t.hen\ in the order of rank. The details are taken in succession in 
the order of the roster, beginning at the head. Lieutenants form 
one roster, the first and second lieutenants are entered on it alter- 
nately. The senior first lieutenant is the first on the roster; the 
senior second lieutenant is the second, etc. The captains form one 
roster, and are exempt from fatigue, except to superintend issues. 
A captain commanding a battalion temporarily, is exempt from 
detail, and duty falling to him passes. Lieutenant-colonels and 
majors are on one roster. They may be detailed for duties of the 
first and second classes, when the importance of the guards and 
detachments requires it. Their roster is kept at division and brigade 
head-quarters. The rosters of the captains and lieutenants are kept 
at regimental head-quarters, and those of the companies by the first 
sergeants. In the company, sergeants, corporals, and privates form 
distinct rosters. 

Officers, non-commissioned officers, and soldiers, take duties of 
the first class in the order stated, viz., the first for the detail, takes 
the grand guards ; the next, the interior guards ; the last, the police 
guard ; and the same rule in regard to the details and duties of the 
second class. In the details for the third class, the senior officer 
takes the largest party. The party first for detail takes the service 
out of camp. 

When the officer whose tour it is, is not able to take it, or is not 
present at the hour €f marching, the next after him takes it. 
When a guard has passed the chain of sentinels, or an interior 
guard has reached its post, the officer whose tour it was cannot then 
take it. He takes the tour of the officer who has taken his. When 
an officer is prevented by sickness from taking his tour, it passes. 
These rules apply equally to non-commissioned officers and soldiers. 



622 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Duties of the first and second class are credited on the roster 
when the guards or detachments have passed the chain of sentinels, 
or an interior guard has reached its post ; fatigue duties when the 
parties have passed the chain or begun the duties in camp. 

Every officer, non-commissioned officer, or soldier, on duty of the 
first class, or who is of the next detail for such duty, takes, when 
relieved, the duty of the second or third class that has fallen to him 
during that time, unless he has marched for detachment of more 
than twenty-four hours. 

Soldiers march with knapsacks for all duties of the first class ; 
and with arms and equipments complete on all working parties out 
of camp, unless otherwise ordered. In the cavalry, horses are 
packed for all mounted service; and dismounted men, and those 
whose horses are not in order, are preferred for the detail for dis- 
mounted service. Those who are mounted are never employed on 
those services, if the number of the other class are sufficient. 

Every non-commissioned officer and soldier in the cavalry detailed 
for dismounted service must, before he marches, take to the first 
sergeant of his troop, or sergeant of his squad, his horse equip- 
ments and valise ready packed. In case of alarm, the first sergeant 
sees that the horses of these men are equipped and led to the 
rendezvous. 

In the field, artillery-men are not called upon for any duty out- 
side their own batteries or camps. 

These rules in regard to the roster apply also to service in garrison. 

DUTIES OP GUARDS. 

749. Sentinels will be relieved every tv,'-o hours, unless the state 
of the weather, or other causes, should make it necessary or proper 
that it be done at shorter or longer intervals. 

Each relief, before mounting, is inspected by the commander of 
the guard or of its post. The corporal reports to him, and presents 
the old relief on its return. 

The countersign, or watchword, is given to such persons as are 
entitled to pass during the night, and to officers, non-commissioned 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 623 

officers, and sentinels of the guard. Interior guards receive the 
countersign only when ordered by the commander of the troops. 

The parole is imparted to such officers only as have a right to 
visit the guards, and to make the grand rounds; and to officers 
commanding guards. 

As soon as the new guard has been marched off, the officer of the 
day will repair to the office of the commanding officer and report 
for orders. 

The officer of the day must see that the officer of the guard is 
furnished with the parole and countersign before retreat. 

The officer of the day visits the guards during the day at such 
times as he may deem necessary, and makes his rounds at night at 
least once after 12 o'clock. 

Upon being relieved, the officer of the day will make such remarks 
in the report of the officer of the guard as circumstances require, 
and present the same at head-quarters. 

Commanders of guards leaving their posts to visit their sentinels, 
or on other duty, are to mention their intention, and the probable 
time of their absence, to the next in command. 

The officers are to remain constantly at their guards, except while 
visiting their sentinels, or necessarily engaged elsewhere on their 
proper duty. 

Neither officers nor soldiers are to take off their clothing or accou- 
trements while they are on guard. 

The officer of the guard must see that the countersign is duly 
communicated to the sentinels a little before twilight. 

When a fire breaks out, or any alarm is raised in a garrison, all 
guards are to be immediately under arms. 

Inexperienced officers are put on guard as supernumeraries, for 
the purpose of instruction. 

Sentinels will not take orders or allow themselves to be relieved, 
except by an officer or non-commissioned officer of their guard or 
party, the officer of the day, or the commanding officer; in which 
case the orders will be immediately notified to the commander of the 
guard by the offxcer giving them. 



624 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Sentinels will report every breach of orders or regulations tliey 
are instructed to enforce. 

Sentinels must keep themselves on the alert, observing everything 
that takes place within sight and hearing of their post. They will 
carry their arms habitually at support, or on either shoulder, but 
will never quit them. In wet weather, if there be no sentry-box, 
they will secure arms. 

No sentinel shall quit his post or hold conversation not necessary 
to the proper discharge of his dutjr. 

All persons, of whatever rank in the service^ are required to ob- 
serve respect towards sentinels. 

In case of disorder, a sentinel must call out tlie guard ; and if a 
fire take place, he must cry — "Fire I" adding the number of his post. 
If in either case the danger be great, he must discharge his firelock 
before calling out. 

It is the duty of a sentinel to repeat all calls made from posts 
more distant from the main body of the guard than his own, and 
no sentinel will be posted so distant as not to be heard by the guard, 
either directly or through other sentinels. 

Sentinels will halt, come to attention, and present arms to general 
and field ofiicers, to the officer of the day, and to the commanding 
officer of the post. To all other officers they will carry arms. 

When a sentinel in his sentry-box sees an officer approaching, he 
will stand at attention, and as the officer passes will salute him, hy 
bringing the left hand briskly to the musket, as high as the righl 
shoulder. 

The sentinel at any post of the guard, when he sees any body of 
troops, or an officer entitled to compliment, approach, must call : 
'^ Turn out the guard ;" and announce who approaches. 

Guards do not turn out as a matter of compliment after sunset; 
but sentinels will, when officers in uniform approach, pay them 
proper attention, by facing to the proper front, and standing steady 
at shoiddered arms. This will be observed until the evening is so 
far advanced that the sentinels begin challenging. 

After retreat (or the hour appointed by the commanding officer), 
until broad daylight, a sentinel challenges every person who 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. G25 

approaches him, taking, at the same time, the position of arms port. 
He will suffer no person to come nearer than within reach of his 
bayonet, until the person has given the countersign. 

A sentinel, in challenging, will call out — ^^Wlio comes tliereV^ 
If answered — " Friend, with the countersign,'' and he be instructed 
to pass persons with the countersign, he will reply — ^^ Advance, 
friend, with the countersign." If answered — "Friends," he will 
reply — " Halt, friends. Advance one with the countersign." If 
answered — " Relief," " Patrol" or " Grand rounds" he will reply 
— "Halt. Adva'uce, sergeant (on corporal) with the countersign," 
and satisfy himself that the party is what it represents itself to be. 
If he have no authority to pass persons with the countersign, if the 
wrong countersign be given, or if the persons have not the counter- 
sign, he will cause them to stand, and call — " Corporal of the 
guard." 

In the daytime, when the sentinel before the guard sees the 
officer of the day approach, he will call — " Turn out the guard, 
officer of the day." The guard will be paraded, and salute with 
presented arms. 

When any person approaches a post of the guard at night, the 
sentinel before the post, after challenging, causes him to halt until 
examined by a non-commissioned officer of the guard. If it be the 
officer of the day, or any other officer entitled to inspect the guard 
and to make the rounds, the non-commissioned officer will call — • 
"Turn out the guard," when the guard will be paraded at shouldered 
arms, and the officer of the guard, if he thinks necessary, may de- 
mand the countersign and parole. 

The officer of the day, wishing to make the rounds, will take an 
escort of a non-commissioned officer and two men. When the rounds 
are challenged by a sentinel, the sergeant will answer — " Grand, 
rounds," and the sentinel will reply — " Halt, grand rounds. Ad- 
vance, sergeant, with the countersign." Upon which the sergeant 
advances and gives the countersign. The sentinel will then cry — 
"Advance, rounds" and stand at a shoulder till they have passed. 

When the sentinel before the guard challenges, and is answered— - 
"Grand rounds," he will reply — "Halt, grand rounds. Turn out 
53 2p 



626 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

fne guard; grand rounds.^' Upon wliicli the guard will be drawn 
up at shouldered arms. The officer commanding the guard will 
then order a sergeant and two men to advance ; when within ten 
paces, the sergeant challenges. The sergeant of the grand rounds 
answers — ^^ Grand rounds" The sergeant of the guard replies — 
^^Advance, sergeant, with the countersign.'' The sergeant of the 
rounds advances alone, gives the countersign, and returns to his 
round. The sergeant of the guard calls to his officer — ^^The coun- 
tersign is right,'' on which the officer of the guard calls — "Advance, 
rounds." The officer of the rounds then advances alone, the guard 
standing at shouldered arms. The officer of the rounds passes along 
the front of the guard to the officer, who keeps his post on the right, 
and gives him the parole. He then examines the guard, orders 
back his escort, and, taking a new one, proceeds in the same manner 
to other guards. 

All material instructions given to a sentinel on post by persons 
entitled to make grand rounds, ought to be promptly notified to the 
commander of the guard. 

Any general officer, or the commander of a post or garrison, may 
visit the guards of his command, and go the grand rounds, and be 
received in the same manner as prescribed for the officer of the 
day. 

FORM OF GUARD REPORT. 
Report of a Guard mounted at , on the , and relieved on the — •-. 



PAROLE. 


"S 

cs 

a 

S 

3 
1-5 


2 

a 

1 

1 


o 
ft 

s 


a 

"53 
s 


1 


'3 

1 


1 


Articles in 
Charge. 


Received the fore- 
going articles. 

Lieut. 1st In- 
fantry. 


Countersign. 




- 


- 


- 


- 


- 


Detail. 


1 



HONORis PAID BY THE 'IROOPS, ETC. 627 



LIST OF THE GUARD. 



Reliefs, and when Posted. 


1 
Where Posted. 


1 

Remarks. 


1st Kelief. 
From — to — and 

— to — . 


2d Relief. 
From — to — 
and — to — . 


3d Relief. 
From — to — 
and — to — . 


No. 


Name. 


Co. 


Rt. 

1st 


Name. 


Co. 


Rt. 


Name. 


Co. 

G 


Rt. 
8th 


1 


C. D. 


A 


I. J. 


D 


3d 


0. p. 


Guard House. 




9 


E. F. 


B 


4th 


K.L. 


E 


2d 


Q.K 


H 


9th 


Magazine. 




3 

1 


G. H. 


C 


6tli 


M. N. 


F 


5th 


S. T. 


I 


10th 


Quarm. Store. 




Sergeant W. V., Co. A, 1st Artillery. 


Serg't Guard 


2 


Corporal W. X., Co. B, 1st Infantry. 


Corp'l " 




3 


Corporal Y. Z., Co. C, 3d Infantry. 


ii a 





LIST OF PRISONERS. 



1 

No. 


NiMES. 


n 

1 


1 

a 

1 


Confined. 


Charges. 


Sentences. 


Remarks. 


When. 


By whom. 


1 

2 
3 
4 
5 














i 





A. B. C, 

Lieut. 



GUARDS. 



Eegiment 



Commanding the Guard. 



750. Guards, in time of war, are bodies of men whose duties are 
to secure an army or place from being surprised by an enemy. 

By a proper disposition of tbe guards, and by a faithful discharge 
of the duties imposed upon them, a whole army can at all times, 
and under all circumstances, be kept in readiness for action ; the 
larger part of the army, even in the pursuit of an enemy, and 
momentarily expecting to meet him, may with safety geek that 



628 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

repose whicli is so necessary to keep up the physical energies of the 
forces ; and as the guards generally constitute but a comparatively 
small portion of the command, and are frequently relieved, no 
soldier is likely to be called upon to endure an amount of fatigue 
greater than a man in his vigor ought to bear. 

In order that the guards of an army may protect it properly, 
they must be so posted as to cover both the front and flanks of the 
position, and at the same time have possession of all the avenues 
of approach to it. The ordinary arrangement of guards is such, 
that no matter how far the outer line may lie from the main body, 
it may rally from point to point, if driven in by an advancing 
enemy, gaining strength each time, until it finally reaches the main 
body. Thus even the most advanced posts need never be cut off, 
while it would be impossible for an enemy to surprise the main 
body. 

The usual arrangement consists of two or three lines of posts, 
within relief of each other, and extending around the main body as 
a centre, the exterior line throwing out a chain of sentinels in its 
front, and so distributed as to prevent the approach of any one 
without being seen. 

751. The inner line consists of what are denominated police 
guards ; there is a police guard for each regiment, which is posted 
within the regimental camp (see camp of an infantry regiment). 
These guards are of sufficient strength to supply a chain of sentinels 
along the front and rear of the regiment, connecting it with the 
regiments on the right and left, thus forming a chain of sentinels 
close to and all around the camp. 

The next line consists of a number of strong detachments, termed 
picJcets ; they are posted upon the main avenues of approach to the 
position, and serve as supports to the exterior lines, upon which 
they rally when driven in by the enemy. 

Next beyond the pickets is the line of grand guards, and of 
course occupying a wider circumference; they are posted in the 
most favorable position for observing the enemy, and throw out the 
extreme line, called the line of outposts. The line of grand 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS^ ETC. 629 

guards, while supported by the pickets, in turn furnishes support 
to the outposts when necessary. 

Besides these various lines, patrols are kept up between the 
various posts, to keep the one informed of the condition of the other; 
and, also between the outposts and the extreme line of sentinels, to 
see that the duties of the latter are properly performed. 

This arrangement secures positions favorable for observation, and 
mutual support. 

" The duties of the outposts, and of the grand guards which form 
their supports, are strictly those of observation. If attacked, they 
offer no resistance further than to enable them to feel the enemy 
perfectly, and never lose sight of him. The task of holding the 
enemy in check by a vigorous resistance, so as to procure sufficient 
time for the main body to make its disposition for battle, is con- 
signed to the pickets." (Mahan). 

Police Guards. 

752. The police guard is detailed every day from each regiment, 
and consists of two sergeants, three corporals, two musicians, and 
men enough to furnish the necessary sentinels and patrols. The 
men are taken from all the companies, from each in proportion to 
its strength. 

The guard is commanded by a lieutenant, under the supervision 
of a captain as regimental officer of the day. It furnishes ten sen- 
tinels at the camp ; one over the arms of the guard ; one at the 
colonel's tent; three on the color front; one of them over the colors ; 
three, fifty paces in rear of the field officer's tents ; and one on each 
flank, betv/een it and the next resfiment. If it is a flank reg-iment, 
one more sentinel is posted on the outer flank. 

An advanced post is detached from the police guard, composed 
of a sergeant, a corporal, a drummer, and nine men to furnish sen- 
tinels and the guard over the prisoners. The men are the first of 
the guard roster from each company. The men of the advanced 
post must not leave it under any pretext. Their meals are sent to 
the post. The advanced post furnishes three sentinels; two a few 
paces in front of the post, opposite the right and left wing of the 
53* 



630 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

regiment, posted so as to see as far as possible to the front, and one 
over the arms. . 

In the cavalry, dismounted men are employed in preference on 
the police guard. The mounted men on guard are sent in succes- 
sion, a part at a time, to groom their horses. The advanced post is 
always formed of mounted men. 

In each company, a corporal has charge of the stable guard. His 
tour begins at retreat, and ends at morning stable-call. The stable 
guard is large enough to relieve the men on post every two hours 
They sleep in their tents, and are called by the corporal when wanted. 
At retreat he closes the streets of the camp with cords, or uses other 
precautions to prevent the escape of loose horses. 

The officer of the day is charged with the order and cleanliness 
of the camp : a fatigue is furnished to him when the number of 
prisoners is insufficient to clean the camp. He has the calls beaten 
by the drummer of the guard. 

The police guard and the advanced post pay the same honors as 
other guards. They take arms when an armed body approaches. 

The sentinel over the colors has orders not to permit them to be 
moved except in the presence of an escort; to let no one touch 
them but the color-bearer, or the sergeant of the police guard w^hen 
he is accompanied by two armed men. 

The sentinels on the color front permit no soldier to take arms 
from the stacks, except by order of some officer, or a non-commis- 
sioned officer of the guard. The sentinel at the colonel's tent has 
orders to warn him, day or night, of any unusual movement in or 
about the camp. 

The sentinels on the front, flanks, and rear, see that no soldier 
leaves camp with horse or arms unless conducted by a non-commis- 
sioned officer. They prevent non-commissioned officers and soldiers 
from passing out at night, except to go to the sinks, and mark if they 
return. They arrest, at any time, suspicious persons prowling about 
the camp, and at night, every one who attempts to enter, even the 
soldiers of other corps. Arrested persons are sent to the officer of 
the guard, who sends them, if necessary, to the officer of the day. 

The sentinels on the front of the advanced post have orders to 



HONORS PAID Bi' THE TROOPS, ETC. 681 

permit neither non-commissioned officers nor soldiers to pass the line, 
without reporting at the advanced post; to warn the advanced post 
of the approach of any armed body, and to arrest all suspicious per- 
sons. The sergeant sends persons so arrested to the officer of the 
guard, and warns him of the approach of any armed body. 

The sentinel over the arms at the advanced post guards the 
prisoners, and keeps sight of them, and suffers no one to converse 
with them without permission. They are only permitted to go to 
the sinks one at a time, and under a sentinel. 

If any one is to be passed out of camp at night, the officer of the 
guard sends him under escort to the advanced post, and the ser- 
geant of the post has him passed over the chain. 

At retreat, the officer of the guard has the roll of his guard called, 
and inspects arms, to see that they are loaded and in order ; and 
visits the advanced post for the same purpose. The sergeant of the 
police guard, accompanied by two armed soldiers, folds the colors 
and lays them on the trestle in rear of the arms. He sees that the 
sutler's stores are then closed, and the men leave them, and that the 
kitchen fires are put out at the appointed hour. 

The officer of the day satisfies himself frequently during the 
night of the vigilance of the police guard and advanced post. He 
prescribes patrols and rounds to be made by the officer and non- 
commissioned officers of the guard. The officer of the guard orders 
them when he thinks necessary. He visits the sentinels frequently. 

At reveille, the police guard takes arms; the officer of the guard 
inspects it and the advanced post. The sergeant replants the colors 
in place. At retreat and reveille the advanced post takes arms ; 
the sergeant makes his report to the officer of the guard when he 
visits the post. 

AYhen necessary, the camp is covered at night with, small out- 
posts, forming a double chain of sentinels. These posts are under 
the orders of the commander of the police guard, and are visited by 
his patrols and rounds. 

The officer of the guard makes his report of his tour of service, 
including the advanced post, and sends it, after the guard is marched 
off, to the officer of the day. 



()o'2 MANUAL r O R VOLUNTEERS AND M I L [ T I A 

"When the regiment inarclies, the men of the police guard return 
to their companies, except those of the advanced post. In the 
cavah-j, at the sound "boot and saddle/' the officer of the guard 
sends one half the men to saddle and pack; when the regiment 
assembles, all the men join it. 

When the camping party precedes the regiment, and the new 
police guard marches with the camping party, the guard, on reach- 
ing the camp, forms in line thirty paces in front of the centre of 
the ground marked for the regiment. The officer of the guard fur- 
nishes the sentinels required by the commander of the camping 
party. The advanced post takes its station. 

The advanced post of the old police guard takes charge of the 
prisoners on the march, and marches, bayonets fixed, at the centre 
of the regiment. On reaching camp, it turns over the prisoners to 
the new advanced post. 

PICKETS. 

753. The detail for the picket is made daily, and is composed of 
a lieutenant, two sergeants, four corporals, a . drummer, and about 
forty privates for each regiment. For a smaller force, the picket is 
in proportion to the strength of the detachment. The duty of the 
pickets is to hold the enemy in check, and the points which they 
take up should, if possible, be susceptible of good defence ; Buch 
as villages, defiles, etc. : when these advantages do not present them- 
selves, temporary obstacles, such abatis, etc., should be resorted to. 
The points occupied by the pickets should be about midway between 
the line of outposts and the position of the main body. 

Small posts should be thrown forward by the pickets, between 
them and the line of grand guards. These give greater security to 
the pickets, and furnish support to the grand guard. 

GRAND GUARDS AND OUTPOSTS. 

754. The numbers, strength, and position of grand guards are 
regulated by the commanders of brigades; in detached corps, by 



HONORS PAID BY THE T R P S ^ ETC. Go3 

the commanding officer. When it can be done, the grand guards 
of infantry and cavalry are combined, the cavah-y furnishing the 
advanced sentinels. When the cavalry is weak, the grand guards 
are infantry, but furnished with a few cavalry soldiers, to get and 
carry intelligence of the enemy. 

The strength of the grand guard of a brigade will depend on 
the strength of the regiments, the nature of the country, the 
position of the enemy, and the disposition of the inhabitants. It is 
usually commanded by a captain. 

Under the supervision of the generals of division and brigade, 
the grand guards are especially under the direction of a field officer 
of the day in each brigade. In case of necessity, captains may be 
added to the roster of lieutenant-colonels and majors for this detail. 

G-rand guards usually mount at the same time as the other guards, 
but may mount before daybreak if the general of brigade thinks it 
necessary to double the outposts at this time. In this case they 
assemble and march without noise, and during the march throw oat 
scouts ; this precaution should always be taken in the first posting 
of a grand guard. The doubling of guards weakens the corps and 
fatigues the men, and should seldom be resorted to, and never when 
preparing to march or fight. 

755. A grand guard is conducted to its post in the first instance 
by the field officer of the day, guided by one of the staff" officers who 
accompanied the general in his reconnoissance. After the post has 
been established, the commander sends to the field officer of the 
day, when necessary, a soldier of the guard to guide the relieving 
guard to the post. He also sends to him in the evening a corporal 
or trusty man of the guard, for the note containing the parole and 
countersign, and sends them before dark to the outposts. He will 
not suff"er his guard to be relieved except by a guard of the brigade, 
or by special orders from competent authority. 

If there is no pass to be observed or defended, the grand guards 
are placed near the centre of the ground they are to observe, on 
sheltered, and, if possible, high ground, the better to conceal their 
strength and observe the enemy; they ought not to be placed near 
the edge of a wood. When, during the day, they are placed very 



634 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS A N D ISI I L I T I A . 

near, or in siglit of the enemy, tlie}'' fall back at niglit on parts 
selected farther to the rear. 

After a grand guard is posted, the first care of the commander 
and of the field officer of the day is to get news of the enemy; then 
to reconnoitre his position, and the roads, bridges, fords, and defiles. 
This reconnoissance determines the force and position of the out- 
posts and their sentinels day and night. These posts, when of 
infantry, should be about 200 paces in front of the line of grand 
guards, and of cavalry from 600 to 800 3 and are commanded by 
officers or non-commissioned officers, according to their importance. 
Cavalry posts may be relieved every four or eight liours. 

The commander of a grand guard receives detailed instructions 
from the general and field officers of the day of the brigade, and 
instructs the commanders of the outposts as to their duties, and the 
arrangements for the defence or retreat. The commanders of grand 
guards may, in urgent cases, change the positions of the outposts. 
If the outposts are to change their position at night, they wait 
until the grand guard has gotten its position, and darkness hides 
their movements from the enemy ; then march silently and rapidly 
under charge of an officer. 

In detached corps, small posts of picked men are at night sent 
forward on the roads by which the enemy may attack or turn the 
position. They watch the forks of the roads, keep silence, conceal 
themselves, light no fires, and often change place. They announce 
the approach of an enemy by signals agreed upon, and retreat, by 
routes examined during the day, to places selected, and rejoin the 
guard at daybreak. 

Grand guards have special orders in each case, and the following 
in all cases : to inform the nearest posts and the field officer of the 
day, or the general of brigade, of the march and movements of the 
enemy, and of the attacks they receive or fear; to examine every 
person passing near the post, particularly those coming from with- 
out ; to arrest suspicious persons, and all soldiers and camp-followers 
who try to pass out without permission, and to send to the general, 
unless otherwise directed, all country people who come in. 

756. All out-guards stand to arms at night on the approach of 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 635 

patrols, rounds, or otlier parties ; the sentinel over the arms will call 
them out. 

The sentinels and videttes are placed on points from which they 
can see farthest, taking care not to break their connection with each 
other or with their posts. They are concealed from the enemy as 
much as possible by walls, or trees, or elevated ground. It is 
generally even of more advantage not to be seen than to see far. 
They should not be placed near covers, where the enemy may capture 
them. A sentinel should always be ready to fire ; videttes carry 
their carbines or pistols in their hands. A sentinel must be sure 
of the presence of an enemy before he fires; once satisfied of that, 
he must fire, though all defence on his part be useless, as the safety 
of the post may depend on it. Sentinels fire on all persons desert- 
ing to the enemy. 

If a sentinel's post must be where he cannot communicate with 
the guard, a corporal and three men are detached for it, or the 
sentinels are doubled, that one may communicate with the guard. 
During the day communication may be made by signals, such as 
raising a cap or handkerchief. At night sentinels are placed on low 
ground, the better to see objects against the sky. 

To lessen the duty of rounds, and keep more men on the alert at 
night, sentinels on outposts are relieved every hour. To prevent 
sentinels from being surprised, it is sometimes well to precede the 
countersign by signals, such as striking the musket with the hand, 
striking the hands together, etc. 

On the approach of any one at night, the outpost sentinel orders — 
'^ Halt !" If the order is not obeyed after being repeated once, he 
fires. If obeyed, he calls — "Who goes there P^' If answered — 
" Bounds," or "Patrol/' he says — "Advance with the countersign/' 
If more than one advance at the same time, or the person who 
advances fails to give the countersign or signal agreed on, the sentinel 
fires, and falls back on his guard. The sentinel over the arms, as 
soon as his hail is answered, turns out the guard, and the corporal 
goes to reconnoitre. When it is desirable to hide the position of 
the sentinel from the enemy, the hail is replaced by signals; the 
sentinels give the signal, and those approaching the counter signal. 



636 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

With raw troops, or when the light troops of the enemy are 
numerous and active, and when the country is broken or wooded, 
the night stormy or dark, sentinels should be doubled. In this case, 
while one watches, the other, called a flying sentinel, moves about, 
examining the paths and hollows. 

The commanders of grand guards visit the sentinels often ; change 
their position when necessary; make them repeat their orders; teach 
them under what circumstances and at what signals to retire, and 
particularly not to fall back directly on their guard if pursued, but 
to lead the enemy in a circuit. 

757. At night, half the men of the grand guard off post watch 
under arms, while the rest lie down, arms by their side. The horses 
are always bridled; the horsemen hold the reins and must not sleep. 
An hour before break of day, infantry grand guards stand to arms, 
and cavalry mount. At the outposts some of the infantry are all 
night under arms, some of the cavalry on horseback. 

The commander of a grand guard regulates the numbers, the 
hours, and the march of patrols and rounds, according to the strength 
of his command, and the necessity for precaution; and, accom- 
panied by those who are to command the patrols and rounds during 
the night, he will reconnoitre all the routes they are to follow. 
Patrols and rounds march slowly, in silence, and with great precau- 
tion ; halt frequently to listen and examine the ground. The rounds 
consist of an officer or non-commissioned officer, and two or three 
men. Towards the break of day the patrols ought to be more frequent, 
and sent to greater distances. They examine the hollow ways and 
ground likely to conceal an enemy, but with great caution, to avoid 
being cut off, or engaged in an unequal combat; if they meet the 
enemy, they fire and attempt to stop his march. While the patrols 
are out, the outposts are under arms. 

Cavalry patrols should examine the country to a greater distance 
than, infantry, and report to the infantry guard every thing they 
observe. The morning patrols and scouts do not return until broad 
daylight ; and when they return, the night sentinels are withdrawn, 
and the posts for the day resumed. 

On their return, commanders of patrols report in regard to the 



HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS, ETC. 637 

ground and everything they have observed of the movements of the 
enemy, or of his posts, and the commander of the grand guard 
reports to the field officers of the day. The fires of grand guards 
should be hidden by a wall, ditch, or other screen. To deceive the 
enemy, fires are sometimes made on unoccupied ground. Fires are 
not permitted at small posts liable to surprise. 

If a body of troops attempt to enter the camp at night, unless 
their arrival has been announced, or the commander is known to, 
or is the bearer of a written order to the commander of the grand 
guard, he stops them, and sends the command under escort to the 
field officer of the day, and at the same time warns the posts near 
him. 

Bearers of flags are not permitted to pass the outer chain of sen- 
tinels ; their faces are turned from the post or army ; if necessary 
their eyes are bandaged ; a non-commissioned officer stays with them 
to prevent indiscretion on the part of sentinels. 

The commander of the guard receipts for dispatches, and sends 
them to the field officer of the day or general of brigade, and dis- 
misses the bearer ; but if he has discovered what ought to be con- 
cealed from the enemy, he is detained as long as necessary. 

Deserters are disarmed at the outposts, and sent to the commander 
of the grand guard, who gets from them all the information he can 
concerning the enemy. If many come at night, they are received 
cautiousli/, a few at a time. They are sent in the morning to the 
field officer of the day, or to the nearest post or camp, to be con- 
ducted to the general of the brigade. All suspected persons are 
secreted by the commanders of the outposts. 



54 



638 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



AETICLE XIII. 

DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES — DUTIES IN 

GAMP AND aAERISON, ETC. 

758. Captains or commanders of companies fill one of the most 
important stations in the service, when they are viewed in relation 
to the direct influence they exercise upon the soldiery ; to them 
attaches the high responsibility of the instruction, good order, effi- 
ciency, and discipline of their companies; and no one should be 
willing to accept the post who is not qualified, or ready to qualify 
himself, for a faithful discharge of all the duties of the office. 

It is the duty of every captain to make himself familiar with 
tactics, or at least so much of it as will enable him to command his 
company properly in every situation ; and to become perfectly ac- 
quainted with its interior management. 

In the case of a vacancy in the office of captain, or in his absence, 
the command of the company devolves on the officer next in rank. 
Captains should require their lieutenants to assist them in the per- 
formance of all company duties, the knowledge thus acquired being 
essential to every company officer. 

In the volunteers and militia, the captain and lieutenant are 
elected by the company after its organization ; the non-commissioned 
officers are either elected in the same way, or are selected by the 
captain. 

759. Arms and accoutrements are issued by order of the adjutant- 
general to volunteer companies after their organization, and to such 
of the militia as the Grovernor may deem it proper to arm. Before 
a volunteer company can receive its arms, the captain must procure 



DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES^ ETC. 639 

the following certificate from the colonel of the regiment to which 
the company is attached. 

Form of Inspection Return to enahle a Volunteer Coni-pany to 
receive Public Arms. 

I, A. B.^ commandant of the Regiment of Virginia Militia, 

do hereby certify^ that on the — day of , I mustered and in- 
spected the (troop of cavalry, company of artillery, company of light 
infantry or riflemen, as the fact may be,) commanded by Cap- 
tain , (attached to or belonging to, as the fact may be,) 

the said regiment; at which muster and inspection there were of 
the said company — men, fully and completely uniformed, in the 
mode prescribed by law. 

Given under my hand this — day of , 18 — } 

760. The militia laws of many of the States permit volunteer 
companies to choose their own uniforms ; all experience proves that 
the plainest and simplest uniform is the best for service. It is a 
mistake to suppose that handsome and expensive uniforms are to be 
preferred ; the best uniform is that which combines comfort, appro- 
priateness, and durability. 

Plain and substantial overcoats with capes should always form a 
part of the uniform; and some simple fatigue dress, to be v/orn 
when off duty, or on fatigue, will always be found to be a great 
saving to the uniform. 

Each man of the company should be provided with a knapsack 
for his clothing, a haversack for his rations, and one or two thick 
blankets. In addition, there should be one bedsack for every two 
men, to be made of substantial linen or cotton goods; it should be 
made about six and a half feet long, by three and a half- feet wide, 
sewed up at both ends, and having a slit in the centre, provided 
with strings to tie it close, so as to prevent the straw working out,. 
The haversack is made of white linen or cotton duck ; it is worn 
from the right shoulder to the left side ; it should be large enougn 

' This is t.lie Viro:inia form ; each State has its own form. 



640 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

to contain at least tliree days' rations of bread and meat^ and would 
be mucb improved by having a small tin box in it large enougb to 
contain tbe meat ration. Fig. 171 is a representation of tbe haver- 
sack. The company should at all times be supplied with tentS; etc., 




for service in the field; together with the requisite number of camp 
kettles, tin table furniture, etc. 

761. There are several forms of tents — the common tent, covering 
an area of about seven feet square, and capable of accommodating 
from five to six men ; the wall tent, usually used by officers, about 
nine feet square, and having its roof protected by a second piece of 
canvas, known as the "y?y;" the Sibley tent, which is conical in 
shape, has but a single central pole, with an arrangement at the top 
to admit of a fire in the centre for cooking purposes, or for comfort 



DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES, ETC. G41 

in cold weather, and sufficiently large to accommodate from twelve 
to fifteen men ; and tlie sJieUer tent of the French. The Sibley tent 
is in general use in the U. S. service. Fig. 172 is a representation 



Fij 172, 




of the Sibley tent, and Fig. 173 of the shelter tent. The latter is id 
valuable in a summer campaign, when transportation is limited. 




'v■)-^,..^v^.//'" 



A new invention has been lately introduced into the U. S. ser- 
vice, which promises to be very useful ; it is called the tent knap- 
sack, and serves the purpose of a knapsack on the march, and a 
shelter tent when in camp. It is a piece of gutta-percha, five feo' 
54 * 2 Q 



642 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



three inches long, and three feet eight inches wide, with double 
edges on one side, and brass studs and button holes along two edges, 

and straps and buckles on the 



Ficf J74^. ^ 




fourth ) with two sticks, three 
feet eight inches long, by one 
and a half inches in diameter, 
and a small cord. When used 
as a knapsack, the clothing is 
packed in a cotton bag, and 
the gutta-percha sheet is folded 
around it, lapping at the ends. 
The clothing is thus protected 
by two or three thicknesseb 
of gutta-percha ; the knapsack 
adapts itself to the size of the 
contents, so that a compact and 
portable bundle can be made, 
whether the ^^ kit" be entire or not ; and with the cotton bag, it 
forms a convenient, commodious, and desirable receptacle for all a 
soldier's clothing and necessaries. (Fig. 174.) 

The studs and eyelets along two edges of the tent knapsack are 
for the purpose of fastening a number of them together, and thus 
making a large sheet which may be used as a shelter tent. When 
used the sheet is to be stretched on a cord supported by two sticks, 
or by two rifles, muskets, or carbines, and pinned down at the sides 
with small pins. The sheet of four knapsacks is ten feet six inches 
long, and seven feet four inches wide, and when pitched on a rope 
four feet four inches above the ground, covers a horizontal space of 
six feet six inches wide, and seven feet four inches long, which will 
accommodate from five to seven men (see Fig. 173). Or four of these 
knapsacks may be united, an edge pinned to the ground, and the 
opposite one secured to a pole facing a fire, forming a half-faced 
camp, as is shown in Fig. 175. 

762. Every man should be provided with the following articles 
at all times, such as are not on the person to be kept in the knap- 
sack : 



DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES, ETC. G43 

Ficf 175. 




-.ivj^'/'O';: 



Two woollen under-shirts. 

Two pair thick cotton drawers. 

Four pair woollen socks. 

Two pair stout shoes, with broad, thick soles, for footmen. 

One pair boots, and one pair shoes for horsemen. 

Towels, handkerchiefs, comb and brush, and tooth-brush. Stout 
linen thread, large needles, a bit of wax, a few buttons, paper of 
pins, and a thimble, all contained in a small buckskin or stout 
cloth-bag. 

In addition every man should be supplied with a tin plate ; quart 
cup with the handle well riveted on, so as to serve the soldier for 
making his coffee, etc., in case of necessity, as well as for an ordi- 
nary drinking cup ; knife, fork, 
and spoon. The plate may be 
carried in the knapsack, or on the 
outside of it under the straps, or 
all the plates of the company may 
be packed in the camp-kettles ) the 
cup may be carried on the waist 
belt, or on the knapsack strap 
and the knife, fork, and spoon 
should be carried in a leathern 
sheath which slips on to the waist 

belt, to be worn in front, and on the left of the centre of the body. 
Fig. 176 shows the manner of arranging the sheath. 

Every company should be provided with a small chest petitioned 




Fi^ J7G. 



6 14 .^lANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

oiF into several compartments, and large enough to contain a week 
or ten days' issue of the small rations, such as beans, rice, coffee, 
sugar, salt, etc. The issues of bread, pork, etc., should be trans- 
ported in the original packages. 

When a militia company is called into service, the captain should, 
at the earliest possible moment, have it properly uniformed and 
equipped, and taught how to take care of its arms, clothing, etc. ; 
each man should be provided with his knapsack, haversack, blanket, 
knife and fork, spoon, tin plate, and cup. 

Canteens are also necessary in most cases ; they are worn over the 
haversack. 

763. The captain should cause the men of his company to be 
numbered in a regular series, including the non-commissioned offi- 
cers, and divided into several squads, each to be put under the 
charge of a non-commissioned officer. As far as practicable, the 
men of each squad are quartered together. 

Each of the lieutenants is charged with a squad for the supervi- 
sion of its order and cleanliness ; and captains should require their 
subalterns to assist them in the performance of all company duties 

The utmost attention should be paid by captains to the cleanli- 
ness of their men, as to their persons, clothing, arms, accoutrements, 
and equipments, and also as to their quarters or tents. 

The name of each soldier should be labelled on his bunk in 
quarters, and his company number should be placed against his 
arms and accoutrements. 

The arms are placed in arm-racks, the stoppers in the muzzles, the 
cocks let down, and the bayonets in their scabbards, the accoutre- 
ments suspended over the arms, and the swords or sabres, when 
these are worn, hung up by the belts on pegs. 

The knapsack of each man should be placed at the foot of iiis 
burjk when he is in quarters, packed with his effects, and ready to 
be slung; the overcoat rolled, strapped, and placed under the knap- 
sack ; the cap on a shelf, and his boots well cleaned. Dirty clothes 
should be kept in an appropriate part of the knapsack ; nothing to 
he put under the bedding. 

'Jooking utensils .and table furniture should be clean, and iu 



DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES, ETC. 645 

their appropriate places ; blacking and brushes out of sight ; the fuel 
in boxes. 

The cleaning up should take place at least once a week. The 
chiefs of squads should cause bunks and bedding to be overhauled, 
floors cleaned, and arms, accoutrements, etc., all put in order. 

Non-commissioned officers, in charge of squads, should be held 
immediately responsible that their men observe what is prescribed 
above; that they wash their hands and faces daily ; that they brush 
or comb their heads and beards ; that those who go on duty put 
their arms, accoutrements, dress, etc., in the best order. 

Commanders of companies should see that the arms and accoutre- 
ments in possession of the men are always kept in good order, and 
that proper care is taken in cleaning them. 

Arms should not be taken to pieces without permission of an 
officer. Bright barrels should be kept clean and free from rust 
without polishing them ; care should be taken not to bruise or bend 
the barrel. After firing, wash out the bore, wipe it dry, and then 
pass a bit of cloth, slightly greased, to the bottom. In these opera- 
tions, a rod of wood with a loop on one end is to be used instead of 
the rammer. The barrel, when not in use, should be closed with a 
stopper. For exercise, each man should keep himself provided with 
a piece of sole leather to fit the cap or countersink of the hammer, 
to prevent breaking the nipple. 

All field pieces in the possession of artillery companies should be 
kept clean and dry; their vents frequently examined to see that 
they are clear; the elevating screw wiped clean, worked and oiled. 
When tarpaulins are placed over them, they should occasionally be 
removed, the guns and carriages brushed ofi", and, if damp, allowed 
to dry. 

The implements should all be kept clean and under cover, the 
harness and leather articles should be brushed and greased with 
neat's, foot oil as often as their condition requires it, and if they have 
a reddish hue, mix a little lampblack with the oil. First brush the 
leather, then pass over it a sponge wet with warm water, and apply 
the oil before the leather is quite dry. 

Arms should not be left loaded in armories, quarters, or tents, or 



646 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

when the men are off duty, except by special orders. The ammu- 
nition in the possession of the men should he inspected frequently, 
and any damaged, wasted, or lost by neglect, should be paid for. 

Knapsacks should be black ; they should be marked on the out- 
side with the number of the regiment, and on the inside with the 
letter of the company, and the number of the soldier, on such part 
as will readily be seen at inspections. 

Haversacks should be marked on the flap with the number and 
name of the regiment, the letter of the company, and the number 
of the soldier. 

Both officers and men should wear the prescribed uniform in camp 
or garrison. 

In camp or quarters, the officers should visit the kitchen daily 
and inspect the kettles, food, etc., and at all times carefully attend 
to the messing and economy of their companies. 

The company rations are usually taken charge of by the orderly 
sergeant, and issued daily to the cooks by whom they are prepared 
and served to the company. The men of the company serve in turn 
as cooks, two being the usual number serving at once. When in 
camp, the men present themselves at meal times to the cooks, who 
issue to each man in turn his proper allowance; in garrison, or 
quarters the tables are set out, and the cooks place each man's 
ration on his plate, and in his cup, before the company is marched in. 

When not actually in the field the ration is in most cases more 
than sufficient, so that by care on the part of the orderly sergeant 
and cooks, there is more or less saved on the rations of the com- 
pany; this saving is sold for the benefit of the company, and con- 
Btitutes what is denominated the Gompany Fund. 

DUTIES IN CAMP AND GARRISON. 

764. The duties in camp and garrison are to be conducted, as far 
as practicable, in the same manner and on the same principles. 

The Reveille is the signal for the men to rise, and the sentinels 
to leave off challenging. It is usually sounded at dawn of day, 
except when the troops are on the march, when the signal may be 
sounded at a much earlier hour. The men form on their company 



DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES, ETC. 647 

parade grounds, and as soon as tlie reveille ceases tlie rolls are called 
by the orderly sergeants, s^iperintended by a commissioned officer. 

Immediately after the roll call (after stable duty in the cavalry 
and light artillery), the tents or quarters should be put in order by 
the men of the companies, superintended by chiefs of squads; the 
parades, streets of the camp, etc., are cleaned by the police party 
of the day, in charge of a non-commissioned officer, and superin- 
tended by the officer of the day, and the guard house or guard tent 
by the guard or the prisoners, if there are any. 

Breakfast call is sounded at — o'clock in the morning, and is 
the signal for breakfast. 

The Troop sounds at — o'clock in the morning for the purpose 
of assembling the men for duty, inspection at guard-mounting, and 
morning dress parade, when the commanding officer commands it. 

The Surgeon's call is to sound* or beat at — o'clock in the morn- 
ing, when the sick, able to go about, are conducted to the hospital 
by the first sergeants of companies, who hand to the surgeon a list 
of all the sick in the company. 

After the surgeon has passed upon the sick, the first sergeants 
proceed to make off the morning reports of their companies, which, 
after being signed by their captains, are taken to regimental head- 
quarters at first sergeant's call. 

The morning report of the company is made off in a book kept 
for that purpose, called the morning report hooJc, and in accordance 
with Form No. 1. The rulings extend across both pages of the 
book when open ; the report occupies but a single line each morn- 
ing, so that if the number of lines are sufficient, a single heading 
will suffice for the reports of an entire month. 

The Dinner call is sounded at — o'clock, and is the signal for 
dinner. 

The Retreat is sounded at sunset, when there is a roll-call and 
the orders for the day are read. When the weather permits, there 
is a dress parade at retreat, and the orders are read out at the close 
of it. Each regiment or battalion has an independent parade, com- 
manded by the colonel. 

The Tattoo is sounded at — o'clock in the evening, when the 



648 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

rolls are called ; no soldier is allowed to be out of his tent or quar- 
ters after this hour, without special permission. 

In the cavalry, stable-calls are sounded immediately after reveille, 
and an hour and a half before retreat; water-calls at the hours 
directed by the commanding officer. 

The Drummers^ call is beaten by the drums of the police guard 
five minutes before the time of beating the stated calls, when the 
field music assembles before the colors of their respective regiments, 
and as soon as the beat begins on the right is taken up along the line. 

Calls for drills are sounded at such hours as the commanding 
officer may designate. 

765. Daily duties must be announced in ord^r, and the officers to 
perform them are detailed according to the rules of the roster. 

The number and rank of the officers for daily duty, are to be 
regulated by the strength and circumstances of the camp or garrison; 
the officers detailed for duty, should remain in or about the camp or 
garrison during their tours of duty. 

Besides the officers detailed for guard duty, the officers for daily 
duties in large commands are as follows : 

A General officer of the day for each division ; a field officer of the 
day for each brigade ; and a regimental officer of tlie day for each 
regiment. 

In camps or garrisons of one regiment or less, the officers are as 
follows : officer of the day, and officer of the guard. 

The General of the day is to superintend the regularity and dis- 
cipline of the camp of the division, visit the guards and outposts, 
call out and inspect the guards as often and at such times as he 
thinks proper ; to receive all reports of guards, and make immediate 
communication of any extraordinary circumstances, to his command- 
ing officer, or to the Greneral-in -chief. 

The Field officer of the day has the immediate superintendence 
of the camp of the brigade ; he is to be present at the mounting 
and dismounting of the brigade or grand guards ; he is to call them 
out to inspect them ; to order such patrols, posts, and outposts as 
may be necessary ; to see that the grand guard is vigilant, that none 
are absent, and that their arms and accoutrements are in order ; that 
the officers and non-commissioned officers are acquainted with their 



DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES, ETC. 649 

duty, and that the sentries are properly posted, and have received 
proper orders. 

The Regimental officer of the day in each regiment, and in com- 
mands less than a regiment, is charged with the order and cleanliness 
of the camp or garrison ; he has the calls beaten by the drummer of the 
police guard ; he attends the parading of the guards, and orders the 
roll to be called frequently and at unexpected periods, and reports 
everything extraordinary to the commander of the garrison or camp ) 
he is to visit the hospital at various hours and make a report of its 
state to the commanding officer. He should satisfy himself fre- 
quently during the night, of the vigilance of the police guard, and 
prescribe patrols and rounds to be made by the officer of the guard. 
He should give attention to the condition of the sinks, the regula- 
tion of the camp fires, the removal of rubbish, etc, ; and for these 
purposes a fatigue party will be furnished him when necessary. 

CAMPS. 
Camjp of Infantry. 

766. Each company has its tents in two files, facing on a street 
perpendicular to the color line. The width of the street depends 
on the front of the camp, but should not be less than five paces. 
The interval between the ranks of tents is two paces ; between the 
files of tents of adjacent companies, two paces; between regiments, 
twenty-two paces. 

The color line is ten paces in front of the front rank of tents. 
The kitchens are twenty paces behind the rear rank of company 
tents ; the non-commissioned stafi" and sutler, twenty paces in rear 
of the kitchens; the company officers, twenty paces farther in rear; 
and the field and staff", twenty paces in rear of the company officers. 

The company officers are in rear of their respective companies ; 
the captains on the right. 

The colonel and lieutenant-colonel are near the centre of the line 
of field and staff; the adjutant, a major and surgeon, on the right; 
the quartermaster, a major and assistant surgeon, on the left. 

The police guard is at the centre of the line of the non-commis- 
sioned staff", the tents facing to the front, the stacks of arms on the left. 
55 



650 M'ANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

The advanced post of the police guard is about 200 paces in front 
of the color line, and opposite the centre of the regiment or on the 
best ground ; the prisoners' tent about four paces in rear. In a re- 
giment of the second line, the advanced post of the police guard is 
200 paces in rear of the line of its field and staff. 

The horses of the staff officers and of the baggage train are 
twenty-five paces in rear of the tents of the field and staff; the 
wagons are parked on the same line, and the men of the train 
camped near them. 

The sinks of the men are 150 paces in front of the color line — 
those of the officers 100 paces in rear of the train. Both are con- 
cealed by bushes. When convenient, the sinks of the men may be 
placed in rear or on a flank. A portion of the earth dug out for 
sinks to be thrown back occasionally. 

The front of the camp of a regiment of 1000 men in two ranks 
will be 400 paces, or one-fifth less paces than the number of files, 
if the camp is to have the same front as the troops in order of battle. 
But the front may be reduced to 190 paces by narrowing the com- 
pany streets to five paces ; and if it be desirable to reduce the front 
still more, the tents of companies may be pitched in single file — 
those of a division facing on the same street. 



Camp of Cavalry. 

767. In the cavalry, each company has one file of tents — the 
tents opening on the street facing the left of the camp. 

The horses of each company are placed in a single file, facing the 
opening of the tents, and are fastened to pickets planted firmly in 
the ground, from three to six paces from the tents of the troops. 

The interval between the file of tents should be such that, the 
regiment being broken into column of companies [as indicated in 
plate], each company should be on the extension of the line on 
which the horses are to be picketed. 

The streets separating the squadrons are wider than those between 
the companies by the interval separating squadrons in line ] these 
intervals are kept free from any obstruction throughout the camp. 



DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES, ETC. 651 



D=nl 






'Q □ 

aa 



□ □ 

a □ 
u □ 
u a 



p a 
□ □ 



a □ 
□ □ 



□ □ 

□ □ 
u u 



S TA C/<S Cr A RMS' 



CI □ 

□ G 

U LI 



u a 

□ □ 



□ □ 

□ □ 

□ □ 

CIGI 



□ □ 

□ □ 

□ □ 



□ CO 

□ to 



c, baa 


CJ 


/</r<^/-/^A'j^ 


Q 




□ 




42- 


O 1 71-C-S 




POZ. /C^ QC/ARO SL> TL ER 

X X □ a a 


□ 


-s 




%\u □ □□ □ a 

1 i;^^^^ 


coMPAA/y orr/CERS 

□ u aa aa aa 

^^ ZC C Aoj 

□ □ □ a 


□ □ 


□! a 


1 ^ 

1 M 

" f i- 


1^ M »;i 


!?! 


BAGGAGE TRAfN 


^ 


^ 




v^ 


! 


L— icg. 




OFF/CER^ S/NKS^ 


CF=a 








ll 






•?(7^ /VJrirj" 








~~ 





652 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



ISO PACES 20 /cePACLS zo e zo e 20 s 



<o 





.|.JV._..„ 


Q- - - - — —3— u — 


-?-?.^>-- 




01, \ 

1 V-..1 



raocr»oo orn oa ©□ a 


rf^ 


n3 ^'a 






□" " - " Q"^ 


Q 


-□- -^-,3- 






ciomomoa on oa as 
^- _._ 


-Q— 


-Q a- 




\ 



jj ^ □— rp- 






g , rj— -n 


C3 







cn 


J 


a 




3 g Q 


-Q— 


-n-^ 






caoaonocjoaonorift a 


a 




a V 




jj -Q- g — 


Q 




'I 




(^ 


t., 


'"-- 





aoaon oc3 oaoaon 


a 


i=J 


^=* n 


Q. — ^ 


CT" 


U 


a"; — - - 


C30*aoa oa ocaoa on 
^ ^- 


-Q— 







DUTIES OF CAPTAINS COMPANIES, ETC. 653 

The horses of the rear rank are placed on the left of those of 
their file-leaders. 

The horses of the lieutenants are placed on the right of their pla- 
toons ; those of the captains on the right of the company. 

Each horse occupies a space of about two paces. The number of 
horses in the company fixes the depth of the camp, and the dis- 
tance between the files of tents ; the forage is placed between the tents. 

The kitchens are twenty paces in front of each file of tents. 

The non-commissioned officers are in the tents of the front rank 
Camp-followers, teamsters, etc., are in the rear rank. The police 
guard in the rear rank, near the centre of the regiment. 

The tents of the lieutenants are thirty paces in rear of the file 
of their company; the tents of the captains thirty paces in rear of 
the lieutenants. 

The colonel's tent thirty paces in rear of the captains, near the 
centre of the regiment; the lieutenant-colonel on his right; the 
adjutant on his left; the majors on the same line, opposite the 
second company on the right and left ; the surgeon on the left of 
the adjutant. 

The field and staff have their horses on the left of their tents, on 
the same line with the company horses ; sick horses are placed in 
one line on the right or left of the camp. The men who attend 
them have a separate file of tents ; the forges and wagons in rear of 
this file. The horses of the train and of camp-followers are in one 
or more files extending to the rear, behind the right or left squad- 
ron. The advanced post of the police guard is 200 paces in front, 
opposite the centre of the regiment ; the horses in one or more files. 

The sinks for the men are 150 paces in front — those for officers 
100 paces in rear of the camp. 

Camp of Artillery. 

768. The artillery is encamped near the troops to which it is 
attached, so as to be protected from attack, and to contribute to the 
defence of the camp. Sentinels for the park are furnished by the 
artillery, and, when necessary, by the other troops. 

For a battery of six pieces the tents are in three files — one for 
55 =!= ■ 



654 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

each section; distance between tlie ranks of tents fifteen paces; 
tents opening to the front. The horses of each section are picketed 
in the file, ten paces to the left of the file of tents. In the horse 
artillery, or if the number of horses makes it necessary, the horsea 
are in two files on the right and left of the file of tents. The kitchens 
are twenty-five paces in front of the front rank of tents. The tents 
of the ofiicers are in the outside files of company tents, twenty paces 
in rear of the rear rank — the captain on the right, the lieutenants 
on the left. 

The park is opposite the centre of the camp, forty paces in rear 
of the officers^ tents. The carriages in files four paces apart; dis- 
tance between ranks of carriages sufiicient for the horses when har- 
nessed to them; the park guard is twenty-five paces in rear of the 
parK. The sinks for the men 150 paces in front; for the officers 
100 paces in rear. The harness is in the tents of the men. 

BIVOUACS. 

769. A regiment of cavalry being in order of battle, in rear of 
the ground to be occupied, the colonel breaks it by platoons to the 
right. The horses of each platoon are placed in a single row, and 
fastened as prescribed for camps; near the enemy, they remain 
saddled all night, with slackened girths. The arms are at first 
stacked in rear of each row of horses ; the sabres, with the bridles 
hung on them, are placed against the stacks. 

The forage is placed on the right of each row of horses. Two 
stable-guards for each platoon watch the horses. 

A fire for each platoon is made near the color line, twenty paces 
to the left of the row of horses. A shelter is made for the men 
around the fire, if possible, and each man then stands his arms and 
bridle against the shelter. 

The fires and shelter for the officers are placed in rear of the line 
of those for the men. 

The interval between the squadrons must be without obstruction 
throughout the whole depth of the bivouac. 

The interval between the shelters should be such that the pla- 
toons can take up a line of battle freely to the front or rear. 



DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES^ ETC. (355 

The distance from tlie enemy decides the manner in which the 
horses are to be fed and led to water. When it is permitted to un- 
saddle, the saddles are placed in the rear of the horses. 

In infantry, the fires are made in rear of the color line, on the 
ground that would be occupied by the tents in camp. The compa- 
nies are placed around them, and, if possible, construct shelters. 
When liable to surprise, the infantry should stand to arms at day- 
break, and the cavalry mount until the return of the reconnoitring 
parties. If the arms are to be taken apart to clean, it must be done 
by detachments, successively. 

CANTONMENTS. 

770. The cavalry should be placed under shelter whenever the 
distance from the enemy, and from the ground where the troops are 
to form for battle, permit it. Taverns and farm-houses, with large 
stables and free access, are selected for quartering them. 

The colonel indicates the place of assembling in case of alarm. 
It should generally be outside the cantonment ; the egress from it 
should be free; the retreat upon the other positions secure, and 
roads leading to it on the side of the enemy obstructed. 

The necessary orders being given, as in establishing a camp, the 
picket and grand guards are posted. A sentinel may be placed on 
a steeple or high house, and then the troops are marched to the 
quarters. The mep sleep in the stables, if it is thought necessary. 

The above applies in the main to infantry. Near the enemy, com- 
panies or platoons should be collected, as much as possible, in the 
same houses. If companies must be separated, they should be 
divided by platoons or squads. All take arms at daybreak. 

When cavalry and infantry canton together, the latter furnish 
the guards by night, and the former by day. 

Troops cantoned in presence of the enemy should be covered by 
advanced guards and natural or artificial obstacles. Cantonments 
taken during a cessation of hostilities should be established in rear 
of a line of defence, and in front of the point on which the troops 
would concentrate to receive an attack. The general commanding-in- 
chief assigns the limits of their cantonments to the divisions, the 



656 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

commanders of divisions to brigades, and the commanders of bri- 
gades post tlieir regiments. The position for each corps in case of 
attack is carefully pointed out by the generals. 

MARCHES. 

771. For marching, the force, if a large one, is divided into as 
many columns as circumstances permit, without weakening any one 
too much. The object of the movement and the nature of the 
ground determine the order of march, the kind of troops in each 
column, and the number of columns. They ought to preserve their 
communications, and be within supporting distance of each other. 
The commander of each column ought to know the strength and 
direction of the others. 

The advance and rear-guards are usually light troops; their 
strength and composition depend on the nature of the ground and 
the position of the enemy. They serve to cover the movements of 
the army, and to hold the enemy in check until the general has 
time to make his arrangements. 

The ^'general" sounded one hour before the time of marching, is 
the signal to strike tents, to load the wagons, pack horses, etc., and 
send them to the place of assembling. The fires are then put out, 
and care taken to avoid burning straw, etc., or giving the enemy 
any other indication of the movements. 

The ''march" beats in the infantry, and the ''advance" is 
sounded in the cavalry, in succession, as each is to take its place in 
the column. The infantry forms in column of companies or pla- 
toons ; the cavalry in column of twos, fours, or of platoons ; and the 
artillery by sections. 

When the army should form suddenly to meet the enemy, the 
" long-rolV is beat, and " to liorse'^ sounded. The troops form 
rapidly in front of their camp. 

Batteries of artillery and their caissons move with the corps to 
which they are attached ; the field train and ambulances march at 
the rear of the column ; and the baggage with the rear-guard. 

Cavalry and infantry do not march together, unless the proximity 
of the enemy makes it necessary. 



DUTIES OF CAPTAINS — COMPANIES^ ETC. 657 

In cavalry marches, when distant from the enemy, each regiment, 
and, if possible, each squadron, forms a separate column, in order . 
to keep up the same gait from front to rear, and to trot, when 
desirable, on good ground. In such cases, the cavalry may leave 
camp later, and can give more rest to the horses, and more attention 
to the shoeing and harness 

After the march has commenced, the troops habitually take the 
route step. The men should not be allowed to straggle, or leave the 
ranks for any but a necessary purpose, and then but for a few 
moments at a time. 

The general and field officers frequently stop, or send officers to 
the rear, to see that the troops march in the prescribed order, and 
keep their distances. 

In approaching a defile, the colonels are warned; they close their 
regiments as they come up ; each regiment passes separately, at an 
accelerated pace, and in as close order as possible. The leading 
regiment having passed, and left room enough for the whole column 
in close order, halts, and moves again as soon as the last regiment 
is through. In the cavalry, each squadron, before quickening the 
pace to rejoin the column, takes its original order of march. 

When a march is to be continued from day to day, the daily 
march should commence at a very early hour -, the rate of going 
should be as regular as possible, not more than two and a half miles 
an hour ; and the guides should be careful to preserve their dis- 
tance, so as to prevent oscillations in the rear of the column, which 
are very fatiguing to the men. At the expiration of every hour, or 
a little more, the halt is sounded, when the men are allowed to take 
their ease for about ten minutes, when the march is resumed. In 
this way a day's march of twenty miles or more may be made by 
mid-day, or a little later : the men get their dinners after getting 
into camp, have the afternoon to rest, wash their clothing, clean 
their arms, etc., and are fresh for an early start on the following 
day. 

In forced marches, or where the march is a long one, the halt at 
noon may be from an hour to an hour and a half, when the men may 
loosen their belts, take a lunch, smoke, and take their ease in any way 

2r 



658 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

thej choose, until the hour for resuming the march; the march may be 
continued until the middle of the afternoon, and still the men will 
have time to get their cup of hot coffee for supper, and make them- 
selves comfortable for the night. The march of the first two days 
should be short, after that it may be increased to the required 
number of miles; the march from day to day should be as nearly 
of equal length as the convenience of fuel and water, etc., for 
camping purposes will admit. 

772. A camping party, headed by the quartermaster of the com- 
mand, precedes the column for the purpose of selecting and marking 
off the camp before the arrival of the troops. The camp is marked 
by placing camp-colors on the line intended for the color line of the 
command. 

When the column reaches the camp-ground, the infantry comes 
into line on the color line ; the cavalry in rear of its camp. 

The number of men to be furnished for guards, pickets, and 
orderlies ; the fatigue parties to be sent for wood and water for the 
cooks, etc.; the hour of marching, etc., are then announced by the 
brigadier-generals to the colonels, and by them to the field officers — 
the adjutant and captains formed in front of the regiment, the first 
sergeants taking post behind their captains. The adjutant then 
makes the details, and the first sergeants warn the men. The regi- 
mental officer of the day forms the picket, and sends the guards to 
their posts. The colors are then planted at the centre of the color 
line, and the arms are stacked on the line. The fatigue parties 
proceed to their duties, and the men of the company not on detail 
pitch the tents. 

In the cavalry, each troop moves a little in rear of the point at 
which its horses are to be secured, and forms in one rank; the -men 
then dismount; a detail is made to hold the horses; the rest stack 
their arms and fix the picket rope ; after the horses are attended to, 
the tents are pitched, and each horseman places his arms at the side 
from the weather. 

Artillery is brought into line, and the picket ropes fixed ; the 
drivers unhitch, take off harness, secure their horses to the picket 
ropes, etc., while the cannoneers proceed to pitch the tents. 



THE STAFF. 659 



AETICLE XIV. 

THE STAFF. 

Adjutant- GentraVs, Department. 

773. The general duties of the adjutant-general and of the assist- 
ant adjutant-generals have been laid down under the head of army 
vKganization. 

The adjutant-generals of the several States are required to make 
annual returns of the strength and condition of the militia, the state 
of the arms, etc., applicable to military purposes, to the governor or 
commander-in-chief of the State, and to forward a consolidated 
return of the militia, arms, etc., to the President of the United States 
through the adjutant-general of the United States army, agreeable 
to a form furnished by him. 

Assistant adjutant-generals, in addition to the duties already spe- 
cified in general terms, attend to the formation of their divisions or 
brigades, publish all orders received at division or brigade head- 
quarters ; issue all orders proceeding from the general commanding 
the division or brigade; preserve the records of the division or 
brigade ; inspect and form division or brigade guards ; prepare and 
keep the necessary rosters of the officers of the division or brigade ; 
and regulate all details for duty depending upon the rosters. 

774. It is the duty of the assistant adjutant-general of each 
brigade, to prepare a morning report of the brigade, every morning 
after the receipt of the regimental morning reports (seeForm No. 
2), in accordance with Form No. 3, which is signed by him and the 
general commanding the brigade, and forwarded to division head- 



660 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

quarters. The assistant adjutant-general of the division prepares, 
in like manner, a consolidated morning report of the division, to be 
transmitted to the adjutant-general of the army corps, or army of 
which the division forms a part. (See Form No. 4). 

Thus the commanding-general is from day to day kept advised 
as to the exact strength and condition of his command. 

The assistant adjutant-general of a detached brigade, division, or 
army in the field, has to prepare a monthly return of the command, 
to be signed by himself and his commanding general, to be for- 
warded to the adjutant-general at general head-quarters. 

775. When orders are received at, or emanated from the head- 
quarters of an army or army corps, the adjutant-general, or assistant 
adjutant-general, as the case may be, transmits copies to each of the 
assistant adjutant-generals at division head-quarters; the assistant 
adjutant-generals at division head-quarters in turn transmit copies 
to the assistant at each of the brigade head-quarters, and from 
brigade head-quarters they go to the adjutants of regiments, by 
whom they are read to the troops on parade. When troops are 
on a campaign, the orders are given to officers of the staff, who 
report for them daily at the different head-quarters. See article 
''Orders." 

776. The 'parole and countersign emanate daily from head-quar- 
ters, in the form of '' special orders ;" copies of both under seal are 
transmitted to division head-quarters ; from them to brigade head- 
quarters, and from brigade head-quarters to regimental head-quar- 
ters, provided there is any officer of the regiment who is entitled to 
the parole ; if not, the countersign only is sent. Copies of one or 
both are sent to such persons of the division, brigade, or regiment, 
as may be entitled to them. 

The parole is only sent to the field and regimental officers of the 
day, officers of guards, and to such other officers as may be entitled 
to visit and inspect guards. 

The parole and countersign are usually sent out on small pieces 
of paper, so folded as to make it impossible to discover either with- 
out breaking the seal. Fig. 177 shows the manner in which the 
paper should be folded ; ahcd is the paper, of which ac is a little 



THE STAFF. 



661 



longer than ah] it is folded so as to bring the edge cd to coincide 
with df, the point c being brought to f, the fold being along de-, 

Fig. 177, 



/ 



d 



SPECIAL ORDERS.' 

No>— . 



HeAD-QUARTEBSj./ 
JONE ~, 18—. 



Parole — ^s^ Washington. 

9;/ 

Countersign — /'' Mount Vernon. 



By order of 

A. B., Adft. 



the point d is then folded over upon e, making the fold along the 
linej^; the projecting edge ahfe is then folded over, sealed near 
both ends, and the '^countersign" is directed on the opposite 
side. 

779. By the militia laws of Virginia, and most of the other States* 
the division and brigade inspectors are the chiefs of staff of their 
respective divisions and brigades, and they discharge the duties of 
assistant adjutant-generals in the divisions and brigades with which 
they serve. 

778. The adjutants of regiments are the chiefs of the regimental 
staffs, and perform within, their regiments the various duties required 
of them in the formation of their regiments, in all parades, inspec- 
5G 



662 MANUAL rOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

tions, manoeuvres, formation of guards, etc. The adjutant publislies 
all orders received at regimental head-quarters^ and issues all orders 
emanating from the head-quarters of the regiment; keeps a roster 
of the officers of the regiment, and makes all details for duty from 
the roster ; has charge of the field-music, band, and pioneers ; and 
discharges such other duty as his colonel may require. 

At the first sergeant's call, the orderly sergeants of companies 
present the morning reports of their companies, made off in con- 
formity with the requirements of Form No. 1, and signed by their 
captains. The adjutant then proceeds to make off the morning 
report of the regiment, as required in Form No. 2, which is signed 
by himself and the colonel, and transmitted to brigade head-quar- 
ters. 

On receiving the parole and countersign from brigade head-quar- 
ters, he sends a copy of both to the colonel and to the regimental 
officer of the day, and copies of the countersign to the surgeon, and 
such other of the staff officers of the regiment as, from the nature 
of their duties, may require it. 

The Quarter- Master' s Department. 

779. This department has to provide quarters and transpor- 
tation for the troops; storage and transportation for all supplies; 
clothing; camp and garrison equipage; cavalry and artillery horses ; 
fuel; forage; straw, and stationery. Its duties, when troops are 
in actual service, are very important, and embrace such a wide range 
of subjects, that a large number of agents, and thorough organiza- 
tion, are indispensable. 

780. Under the head of quarters are included all buildings for 
the use of an army; as quarters for men and officers, hospitals, 
store-houses, offices, and stables. When quarters are to be occu- 
pied, they are allotted by the quarter-master at the station, under 
the control of the commanding officer. 

The number of rooms and amount of fuel for officers and men 
are as follows: 



THE STAFF. 



mi 



A Major-General „ 

A Brigadier-General or Colonel 4 

A Lieutenant-Colonel or Major 3 

A Captain or Chaplain 2 

Lieutenant , 1 

Military store-keeper 1 

The General commanding the army , 

The commanding officer of a division or department 
an assistant or deputy Quartermaster-General.. 

The commanding officer of a regiment or post 
Quartermaster, Assistant Quartermaster, or Com 
missary of Subsistence 1 

An acting Assistant Quartermaster when approved 

by the Quartermaster-General 1 

Wagon and forage master, Sergeant-Major, Ord- 
nance-Sergeant, or Quartermaster-Sergeant 

Each non-commissioned officer, musician, private, 
officer's servant, and washerwoman 

Each necessary fire for the sick in hospital to be 
regulated by the surgeon and commanding offi- 
cer, not exceeding , 

Each guard-fire to be regulated by the command- 
ing officer, not exceeding 

A Commissary or Quartermaster's store-house, 
when necessary, not exceeding 

A regimental or post mess 

To every six non-commissioned officers, musicians, 
and privates, servants and washerwomen, 225 
square feet of room north of 38° N., and 256 
square feet south of that latitude 

* Or coal, at the rate of 1500 lbs. anthracite, or 30 bushels bituminous to the cord. 



Cords of 
wood per 
month.* 






No officer shall occupy more than his proper quarters, except by 
order of the commanding officer when there is an excess of quarters 
at the station. But the amount of quarters shall be reduced pro 
rata by the commanding officer when the number of officers and 
troops make it necessary. 

A mess room, and fuel for it, are allowed only when a majority 
of the officers of a post or regiment unite in a mess. Fuel for a 



664 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

mess room should not be used elsewhere, or for any other pur- 
pose. 

Fuel issued to officers or troops is public property for their use, 
and what is not actually consumed should be returned to the quar- 
termaster's department. Fuel is issued only in tlie month when 
due. 

In allotting quarters, officers have choice according to rank; but 
the commanding officer may direct the officers to be stationed con- 
venient to their troops. An officer may select quarters occupied by 
a junior; but having made his choice, he must abide by it, and 
shall not again at the post displace a junior, unless himself displaced 
by a senior. 

An officer arriving at a station should make requisition on the 
quartermaster for his quarters and fuel, accompanied by a copy of 
the order putting him on duty at the station. If in command of 
troops, his requisition should be for the whole, and designate the 
num*ber of officers of each grade, of non-commissioned officers, sol- 
diers, and servants. 

781. When troops are moved, or officers travel with escorts or 
stores, the means of transport provided shall be for the whole com- 
mand. Proper orders in the case, and an exact return of the com- 
mand, including officers' servants and company women, will be fur- 
nished to tlie quartermaster who is to furnish the transportation. 
The baggage to be transported is limited ta camp and garrison equi- 
page, and officers' baggage. Officers' baggage should not exceed 
(mess-chest and all personal effects included) as follows : 





In the Field. 


Changing Stations. 




125 pounds. 
100 

80 

80 


1000 pounds. 
800 
700 
600 


Field officers 


Captains 







These amounts may be reduced pro rata by the commanding- 
officer when necessary, and may be increased on transports by water, 
when proper, in special cases. 



THE STAFF. 665 

All the books, papers, and instruments necessary for tlie duties 
of staff officers ; also regimental and company desks, and the medi- 
cine chests of medical officers, must be transported. 

Estimates of the medical director, approved by the commanding 
officer, for the transportation of the hospital service, and the sick, 
will be furnished to the quartermaster. 

The baggage trains, ambulances for the sick and wounded, and 
all the means of transport, continue in charge of the proper officers 
of the quartermaster's department, under the control of the com- 
manding officers. 

When supplies are turned over to the quartermaster for trans- 
portation, each package must be directed, and its contents marked 
on it. 

On transports, cabin passage is provided for the officers, and rea- 
sonable and proper accommodation for the troops, and, when possi- 
sible, a separate apartment for the sick. 

782. The forage ration is fourteen pounds of hay, and twelve 
pounds of oats, corn, or barley. Forage is issued to officers only in 
the month when due, and at their proper stations, and for the horses 
actually kept by them in service, not exceeding in number as fol- 
lows : In time of war, major-general, seven horses; brigadier-gene- 
ral, five ; colonels who have the cavalry allowance, five ; other colo- 
nels, four; lieutenant-colonels and majors who have the cavalry 
allowance, four; other lieutenant-colonels and majors, three; cap- 
tains who have the cavalry allowance, three ; all other officers enti- 
tled to forage, two : and in time of peace, general and field officers, 
three horses ; officers below the rank of field officers in the regi- 
ments of cavalry, etc., two horses; all other officers entitled to 
forage, one horse. 

No officer is allowed to sell forage issued to him. Forage issued 
to public horses or cattle is public property; whatever is not con- 
sumed is accounted for. 

783. Issues of stationery are made quarterly, in amount as fol- 
lows : 

66* 



666 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS A-N D MILITIA, 



ComiBander of an army, department, or 
division (what may be necessary for 
himself and staff for their public 
duty) 

Commander of a brigade, for himself 
and staff. 

Officer commanding a regiment or post 
of not less than five companies, for 
himself and staff 

Officer commanding a post of more than 
two and less than five companies 

Commanding officer of a post of two 
companies 

Commanding officer of a post of one 
company or less, and commanding 
officer of a company 

A Lieutenant-Colonel or Major not in 
command of a regiment or post 

Officers of the Inspector-General's, Pay, 
and Quartermaster's Department (the 
prescribed blank books and printed 
forms, and the stationery required 
for their public duty) 

All officers, including Chaplains, not 
enumerated above, when on duty and 
not supplied by their respective de- 
partments 



12 



10 



n 



40 



30 



25 



20 



12 



I 1 



i 



i 



Steel pens, with one holder to 12 pens, may be issued in place 
of quills, and envelopes in place of envelope paper, at the rate of 
100 to the quire. 

To each officer is allowed an inkstand, one stamp, paper-folder, 
sand-box, wafer-box, and as many lead pencils as may be required. 

Necessary stationery for military courts and boards will be fur- 
nished on the requisition of the recorder, approved by the presiding 
officer. 

Eegimental, company, and post books, and printed blanks for the 



THE ST ATP. 



667 



officers of qiiar term aster and pay departments^ will be procured by 
requisition on the quartermaster-general. 

Postage and dispatches by telegraph on public business, paid by 
an officer, will be refunded to him on his certificate to the amount, 
and to the necessity of the communication by telegraph. 

784. Supplies of clothing and camp and garrison equipage will 
be sent by the quartermaster-general to the officers of his depart- 
ment stationed with the troops. The contents of each package, and 
the sizes of the clothing in it, will be marked on it. 

The allowance of camp and garrison equipage is as follows : 





a 


1 


< 




15 


1 

ft 
a 
6 


p 
^ 

g 


A General 

Field and staff officer above 


3 

2 

1 
1 
1 


... 

2 


1 
1 
1 
1 

9 


2 


1 
1 
1 
1 

2 


2 


5 


Other staff officers and cap- 
tains 


Subalterns of a company, to 
every two 

To every 15 foot and 13 





Bed sacks and straw are provided for troops in garrison. Requi- 
sitions will be sent to the quartermaster-general for the authorized 
flags, colors, standards, guidons, drums, fifes, bugles, and trumpets. 

Commanders of companies draw the clothing of their men, and 
the camp and garrison equipage for the officers and men of their 
company. The camp and garrison equipage of other officers is 
drawn on their own receipts. 

"When clothing is needed for issue to the men, the company com 
mander will procure it from the quartermaster on requisition, ap 
proved by the commanding officer. 

Commanders of companies take receipts of their men for the 
clothing issued to them, on a receipt roll, witnessed by an officer or 
non-commissioned officer. Each soldier's clothing account is kept 



668 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

by the captain in a company book, the account setting forth the 
money value of the clothing received and receipted for. 

785. Every separate command should have its quartermaster; if 
it is a regiment, or less, one of the subalterns may discharge the 
duty by order of the commanding officers; if a brigade or division, 
an officer of the quartermaster department is assigned by the quar- 
termaster-general. In the volunteers and militia, quartermasters 
are appointed by the colonels, brigadier-generals, or major-generals 
of regiments, brigades, or divisions; but while quartermasters so 
appointed must obey the directions of their commanding officers, 
their accountability as officers of the quartermaster's department is 
just the same. 

All requisitions for supplies, for transportation, forage, etc., are 
made upon the quartermaster of the command requiring them; if it 
is in his power to fill the requisition, he does so; if not, he makes 
his requisition upon the next higher officer of the department, and 
so on. 

In order to facilitate the operations of the department, depots of 
supplies, in charge of de])ot quartermasters, are established at con- 
venient points, and from which quartermaster's supplies are drawn 
upon proper requisition. 

In order to secure a proper accountability on the part of the offi- 
cers of the quartermaster's department, the quartermaster-general 
should institute a proper system of returns, accounts, etc., requiring 
all officers of the department to conform strictly to their require- 
ments, and in the settlement of their accounts to present satisfac- 
tory vouchers for all money or public property expended. For the 
necessary forms see the general regulations of the United States 
army. 

SuhsistencG Department. 

786. Every command should have its commissary or assistant 
commissary ; when the command is less than a regiment, the same 
officer may, and usually does, discharge the duties of both commis- 
sary and quartermaster. 

Subsistence supplies are issued on requisitions approved by the 



THE S T A r F . 009 

commanding oJ0&cer, in the same way tliat quartermaster's supplies 
are issued. The commissary must, however, so regulate his own 
requisitions upon purchasing or depot commissaries, as to keep on 
hand a sufficient supply to meet the wants of the troops. 

Good and sufficient store-room for the subsistence stores will be 
procured by the commissary from the quartermaster. 

787. The ration is three-fourths of a pound of pork or bacon, or 
one and a fourth pounds of fresh or salt beef; eighteen ounces of 
bread or flour, or twelve ounces of hard bread, or one and a fourth 
pounds of corn meal, and at the rate, to one hundred rations, of 
eight quarts of peas or beans, or, in lieu thereof, ten pounds of rice ; 
six pounds of coffee ; twelve pounds of sugar ; four quarts of vine- 
gar, one and a half pounds of tallow, or one and a fourth pounds of 
adamantine, or one pound sperm candles ] four pounds of soap, and 
two quarts of salt. 

On a campaign, or on marches, or on board transports, the ration 
of hard bread is one pound. 

Fresh beef, when it can be procured, should be furnished at 
least twice a week ) the beef to be procured, if possible, by contract. 

788. Company provision returns are usually made every week or 
ten days, in accordance with Form No. 12 ; the return must be 
signed by the commanding officer of the regiment, or post, when 
the. command is less than a regiment. 

When it is practicable, a consolidated return for the regiment or 
post is made and signed by the commanding officer (see Form 13) ; 
but the return must state the allowance for each company, in order 
to prevent any confusion in the issues. 

Issues to the hospital are made on returns by the medical officer, 
for such provisions only as are actually required for the sick and 
the attendants. The cost of such parts of the ration as are issued 
is charged to the hospital at contract or cost prices, and the hospital 
is credited by the whole number of complete rations due through 
the month at contract or cost prices ; the balance, constituting the 
liospital fund, or any portion of it, maybe expended by the commis- 
sary, on the requisition of the medical officer, in the purchase of 
any article for the subsistence or comfort of the sick. 



670 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

An extra issue of fifteen pounds of candles per montli may be 
made to the principal guard of each camp or garrison, on the order 
of the commanding officer. Extra issues of soap, candles, and vine- 
gar, are permitted to the hospital when the surgeon does not avail 
himself of the commutation of the hospital ration, or when there is 
no hospital fund j salt in small quantities is issued for public horses 
and cattle. When the officers of the medical department find anti- 
scorbutics necessary for the health of the troops, the commanding 
officer may order issues of fresh vegetables, pickled onions, saur 
kraut, or molasses, with an extra quantity of rice and vinegar. 
Potatoes are usually issued at the rate of one pound per ration, and 
onions at the rate of three bushels in lieu of one of beans. Troops 
at sea are recommended to draw rice and an extra issue of molasses 
in lieu of beans. 

When a soldier is detached on duty, and it is impracticable to 
carry his subsistence with him, it will be commuted at seventy-five 
cents a day, to be paid by the commissary, when due, or in advance, 
on the order of the commanding officer. The ration of a soldier 
stationed where he has no opportunity of messing, is commuted at 
forty cents. 

789. As in the case of the quartermaster's department, the com- 
missary-general should organize such a system of returns, accounts, 
etc., on the part of the officers of the department, as to ensure a 
proper accountability on their part. See the army regulations for 
the necessary forms. 

Medical Department. 

790. The senior medical officer, on duty with any body of troops 
in the field, will, unless otherwise specially ordered, be ex officio the 
medical director; and will have the general control of the medical 
officers, and the supervision of the hospitals under their charge. 

The senior medical officers of a hospital distribute the patients, 
according to convenience and the nature of their complaints, into 
wards or divisions, under the particular charge of the several assist- 
ant surgeons, and should visit them himself each day, as frequently 
as the state of the sick majr require. 



THESTAFF. 671 

His prescriptions of medicine and diet are written down at once 
in the proper register, with the name of the patient and the number 
of his bed ; the assistants fill up the diet table for the day, and 
direct the administration of the prescribed medicine. 

He should enforce the proper hospital regulations to promote 
health and prevent contagion, by ventilated and not crowded rooms, 
scrupulous cleanliness, frequent changes of bedding, linen, etc. 

791. At surgeon's call, the sick then in the companies will be 
conducted to the hospital by the first sergeants, who will each hand 
to the surgeon, in his company book, a list of all the sick of the 
company, on which the surgeon shall state who are to remain or go 
into hospital; who are to return to quarters as sick or convalescent; 
what duties the convalescents in quarters are capable of; what cases 
are feigned ; and any other information in regard to the sick of the 
company he may have to communicate to the captain. He will then 
make a morning report of the sick to the commanding officer (Form 
No. 17). 

Pay Department. 

792. The troops should be paid in such manner that the arrears 
shall at no time exceed two months, unless the circumstances of the 
case render it unavoidable. The paymaster-general should take 
care, by timely remittances, that the paymasters have the necessary 
funds to pay the troops. 

The payments, except to officers and discharged soldiers, are 
made on muster and payrolls; those of companies and detachments, 
are signed by the company or detachment commander; those of 
the hospital are signed by the surgeon ; and all muster and pay rolls 
are signed by the mustering and inspecting officer. 

Copies of the necessary blank forms for muster and pay rolls may 
always be obtained from the office of the Adjutant-General U. S. 
Army, Washington. These blanks are too large to be properly 
represented in a work like this. 

When a company is paraded for payment, the men should be 
called to the pay table one at a time, commencing with the non- 
commissioned officers; who are paid according to rank ; the privates 



672 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

are called in alphabetical order. Every member of the company, 
or detachment, must, on receiving his pay, sign his name opposite 
his name in the pay roll, and his signature must be witnessed by 
the captain, or some other officer of the company, or detachment, 
whose, d-aty it is to be present when the company, or detachment^ 
is paid. 

Officers are paid on certified accounts, as in Form 5. 



Morniiajx Reports of Capta-in. 



's Comp; 



DATE. 


PRESENT. 


For Duty. 


Sick. 


On Special 
Duty. 


Ai 




2 

c 

p 

a 


1 


a 


3 


1 
1^ 


1 


_2 
< 


1 

o 




i 

> 


a 


3 

o 


r 

to 


— 




— 


— 





.IX Reports or Cuptair 



FORM No. 1. 

Realment of , Stationed at , for the Month of , 18 



PRESENT. 



ABSENT. 



'"«♦ 



Mornins; Report of tli 



COMMAND. 


PRES 


For Duty. 




§ 

a 


-i 

a 

i 

a 
3 


1 


+3 

1 

■'3' 
< 


1 

3 


1 

S 

1 


i 

3 




a 

3 
1 


1 

3 


a 

S 
1 

1 


i 


1 
& 


1 

S 




1 


Field and Staff". 








" (B) 

etc., etc., etc. 




Grand Total 









Station 



Date 



(Signed) A. B.^ 

Adjutant. 



MorninK Report of tli 



FORM No. 2. 

ReeiiTXent of 



Commanded by Colonel 



COMMAND. 


PRESENT. 


ABSENT. 


PRESE!.! 


1 




A„..„A.,„. 




EEMAKKS. 


Fob Duty. 


.0. 


^dX^ 


A»S 


T. 


^ 


DETACnED 


With 
Leave, 


Leave. 


Absest. 




! 


1 

§ 

1. 


» 3 


1 
1 


5 


1 
1 




•J 
1 


1 

1 


1 

1 
3 


1 

1 




1 


1 
1 


* 


J 


1 

1 


J 


i 


J 


1 

5 


i 


1 

lii 


k 


^ 


el 

If 

If 

1^ 


- 








i 


1 


1 

f 


j 

•s 

1 






























" (B) 

etc., etc., etc. 


Gi-aud Tot.il 

















(Signed) A. B." 
Adjula 



(Signed) C. D. 

Colonel Commanding Jiegiment of ■ 



(Tu/oUvw F„rm No. 1.) 



l3rio;a,diei" Greiieral 



HOUT 
VE. 


Present 

AND 

Absent. 


< 


AtTERATIOKS 

Since 
Yesterday. 


REMARKS. 




- 


1 


1 

< 


§ 
S 

1 
a 


a 
2 

i 

1 


1 

a 

a 


i 

a 


1 

1 


! 


i 
i 





















(Signed) C. D. 

brigadier- General Commanding Brigade, 



(Tofottotv Porm iVo. 2.) 



Moi-nina Report of 



FORM No. 3. 

Division, Army of 



Comi-nanded by BriEUdlei-General 



CO JIM AND. 


PRESENT. 


ABSENT. 


L. 


SEKI. 


Yesierbav. 


Fob Duty. 


Sice. 


EXTRl 

Dun. 


AaBEai. 




DETAcnmll Wlin 
Service. Leave. 


|;= ' 


1 
1 


13 

1 

1 
t 


1 
1 


1 

Si 


1 ; 


.i! 


1 

L 


;! 


1 


11 


II, 


! 


i 


_ 


3 
1 
g 






1 
° 


1 

1 


1 


1 


- 


! 


J 


11 
II 


1 


|_ 








•3 
1 


1 


iii 

ILiJI 


REMARKS. 

ll .^ 
flil 


General Staff 


















' Regiment Infantry 











































(Signed) A. B. 

.-f.M/stani Adjulant-Genetal 



Brigadkr-Gencral Commanding Brigade. 
(To/dtow form Xa. 2.) 



reneral 



T. 


Present 


1 

1 
1 

< 




Alterations 




REMARKS. 




Without 
Leave. 


AND 

Absent. 


SINCE 

Yesterday. 




- 




i 
1 


3 
^ 


i 

ho 
1 


a 

"a 
a 

O 


a 
2 

9 


1 

a 


1 


1 

i 


i 


1 
ft 





















(Signed) C. D. 



Major- General Commanding Division. 



(To follow Form No. 3.) 



FORM No. 4. 

. Army, CoirLiTianded toy Majc 



General Staff of Division.... 

Brigade 

Second " 

— Regiment Cavalry... 

Capt. B 'a Battery of 

Artillery 

Capt. C 's Battery of 

Artillery 

Grand Total 



(Signed) C. D. 



tins column includpa Non-CommlFsioncd 
Olliccre, Musitian.-J, and I'rivatt.s. 

•This column includes the entire force 



(Signed) A. B. 

Assistant Adjutanl-Qeneral. 



Major- General Commanding Divii 
(Tofitloui Form No. 3.) 



The 



ON WHAT ACCOUNT. 


C M M E N C E M 


Erom — 


For 

1 

1 For 

For 

For 

For 
For 


PAY. 
myself 


the 
the 

the 

the^ 

the 
the 


of 
of 

of 

of 

of 
of 




1 
1 


CLOTHING, 
private servfint cot soldier ..<»>.... 


1 


FORAGE. 
horses 

. 

SUBSISTENCE. 


1 
1 


private servant not soldier 


1 







I HEREBY CEFwTlFY, That the foregoing account is accurate and just; that 1 
ing, in kind, or received money in lieu of any part thereof, for any part of the tii) 
of the time charged, and that I did not, during the term so charged, or any part 
charged for my staff appointment, I actually and legally held the appointment, i 
•within my knowledge, has a right to claim, or does claim, for said services for anj 
company for the whole time additional pay is charged ; that I have not been in th 
I have been in as a commissioned officer for the number of year 



DESCRIPTION OF SERVANTS. 


Names. 


Complexion. 


Heiget. 


Eyes. 


Hair. 


Feet. 


Inches. 















The 



FORM No. 5. 

To _ 



ON WHAT ACCOUNT. 


com..nc.m.ntan..xp:kax.on. 


TERM OF SERVICE 


PAY PER MONTH. 


AMOUNT. 


REMARKS. 


I.-KOM- 


To- 


M0..U3. 


D.«s. 


DoLl.iRS. 


Cents. 


DOLLSRS. 


Cli.\-TS. 


PAY. 


the of 18 
the of 18 


the of 18 
the of 18 

the of 18 

the of 18 

the of 18 
the of 18 


















ClOTIIINO. 

For private Bcrvant not soldier 

WRAOE. 
For hortes 


tlio of 18 
the of 18 


SDBSISTEN-OE. 


No. of 
Dajs. 


No. of 


Total No. of 


Post or place 
where due. 


BatioiTs. 


Cents. 














the of 18 

























I HEREBY CERTIFY, That the foregoing account ia accurate and just ; that I have not been absent -without leave during any part of the time charged for ; that I have not received pay, nor drawn rations, forage, or cloth- 
ing, iu kind, or received money in lieu of any part thereof, for any part of the time therein charged; that I actually owned, and kept in service the horses, and employed the private servants for which I charge, for the whole 
of the time charged, and that I did not, during the term so charged, or any part thereof, keep or employ a soldier as a waiter or servant; that the annexed is an accurate description of my servant; that for the whole period 
diarged for my staff appointment, I actually and legally held the appointment, and did duty in the department ; that I was the actual and only commanding ofBcer at the double ration post charged for ; and that no officer, 
Tvitbin my knowledge, has a right to claim, or does claim, for aaid services for any part of the period charged ; that for the whole time brevet pay is claimed, I had the command stated ; that I was actually in the command of a 
company for the whole time additional pay is charged ; that I have not been in the performance of any staff duty for which I claim or have received extra compensation during the time an additional ration is charged for ; that 

I have been in ___ as a commissioned ofBcer for the number of years stated in the charge for extra rations ; that I am not in arrears with on any account whatsoever ; and that the last payment 

' received was from Paymaster and to the day of , 18 

: at the same time acknowledge that I have RECEIVED of 



DESCRIPTION OF SERVANTS, 


BEOAPITULATION. 


Ni.I£3. 


COMriEXION, 


IVct. Inches. 


Etes. 


n.iiR. 


Pay 

Subsistence 

Forage 

Clothing 

Amount... $ 



















18_ 



the 



of. 



at and in full of aaid account. 



(BIGNUtl IN DUPLICATE.) 



{to foUmi) Ibrni Ko. A 



THE STAFF, 



673 



P5 



Pi 



1 




no 




W 




ti 




< 












W 




tf 


1 






•spuaod 








■^ 










o 






O 












•siaqsaa 
















< 












•ssqoai 






















g 


1 


■?9ai 






•spioo 






•spjoo ni 'qoKa 








o'; »3u«M0[i« jC[q:)uoi^ 








•p?ox 




•hin«A. 




-JOS puc sassajpanBi 








•sa^BAud 


pas 'sn^iotsnin 'saao 






-lyj paiiois'siratnoD-aoii 






•saia^iBqtig 




•snreidBO 




>^ 








o 








l-C 








H 






<J 




'S 


H 




o 


CQ 




EH 

J 



c 5 


1 i^ 






^^ 




^ 


^5. 




P 








"5: 




^ 








£ 3 


« 1 
^ 1 


£ = 


£=3 




C5 






^ 


S C/2 




CO 


a^ . 






^ 5:5 


^ ^ 



tJ 


















CS 




a 




o 




B 




0) 








;_ 




^ d 




o 




S.2 




"^ 




<^'3 


■^ 


.2 




ll 


a> 

1 


'3 




.2 © 


•a 

'!3 






c3 


-g 


> 






^ 


fo 


o 






<«-< 


CO 


St 








' 


,X3 




•s^ 




, 




► fl 




CJ 




1 "^ 




^ 












oc "5 




^ 




T-l O 












o 


^ 




%-! 














,« 


^ 










s 












O J3 












« 








.t>. 




'O 










1' 




o 


a> ^3 




HH 


w§ 






+3 




^ 







57 



2s 



674 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



t^ 



REMARKS. 




■4 
I 


•spunoj 






•S[9qsna 






8 


•saqoni 






•?&3I 






•spjoo 


























'a 

B 


-*- 

> 

a 
v 

1 


^ 


C 





s ^ 







Ss 




o 


£ 




















^ 


<a 






e3 • 


o 


.2 






o 


a 






I— < 


•-5 






f3 


•55 




-73 


s 




•» 2 


> 


2^ 




<1- 


■^ 


<a 






.Q 


^ 


> 
o 






'c3 


^ 


^ 






<u 




rt 






,£3 


a> 






C*H (^ 


73 






o o 




1 T 




- •— 1 


pO 






Is 








'-' a 


^ 


S 






n 


a 






1 


^ 


o 

rJ3 






.y 


fl 


•TS 








o 


'^, 




rd 


rf 


§ 






H 
1 




rd 


> 






t, 


O 


0^ 




f^ 


<u 


> 
o 








o 


a> 




o 




P^'T, 


^ 




,o 


fl 






OJ 







s 





THE STAFF 






^i 


^ 


•2§ 


g 


S.2 




O 'n 


(^ 


^ § 




rt 





«^ 


^ 


s " 








'3 1 




ss 








<D 




CQ 




It 




o 




w 




.2 «« 




r5 O 








p! >. 




^ ^ 



REMARKS. 




o 

1 


:§ -JO spunoj 










•JO spano^ 








1 
o 


•JO gpunoj 






1 




•JO gpatioa: 








d 


•JO gpunoj 








1 
o 

H 

11 
ft 


•jappojjo spnnoj 




■t: 






T3 


•iC^qjo spnnoj 




•S!)TOjo spanoa: 




•^apBq JO spnuoa: 




•njoo JO gpanoj 




•gnot'^'Bj JO jequinx 


•SjfTjp JO jaqnin^ 


1 
o 

O 


•si«aiinT3 JO jaqrami [b^oj, 


•naxo JO aaqnin^ 


•goxnni JO jaqninjsj 


1 


■sasjoq JO jaqranx 


1 


t 2 


•noi^jisinbaj jo a:jB(i 




a 


c 
C 


) 






.2 a 



•^1 

I— ( eS 



1-^ 



.2 » 

O c3 

-2-5 






a 

CM O 



bO 



^-^ 

rS a 
'O « 



03 q3 



04 






•5 P3 



G76 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 



15^ 

-13 



m 9 



h 


a 


«« 


a 


?n 


o 
o 


ce 




t-l 




o 




1^ 




Vi 




«s 





p^ 



M 




td 




P5 




-< 




a 




E^ 




P3 






j^ 








^ 










•spanod 














fe 




1 














•spanOfj 






w 


hM 








K. 








< 










^ 




•spunoj 






-^ 


-2 
O 










. 


^ 




•sqi f.g 






1 




•=j[^q*na 


















•spunoj 








c 
















a 


•sqi gg 
'spqsna 








>. 

S 


■spnnoj 








y 




•gparxoj 








t:^ 


O 










s£ 


d 










fi 


a 


■spunOc[ 








•sasjoq JO aaqxnn^ 






6 




a 


&^ 




























^ 


i 








W 








H 




d 


-^ 




f5 


fi 







K. g P^ 



THE STAFF. 



677 



P^ 



REMARKS. 




< 


1 






. 








1 






•s:jUBAa3g 






•sessajpuri'BT: 






•sa^BAiid 
puB 'su'Bioisnra 'sjao 
-igo paaojssiTnraoo-uo^ 






O 









, 5Si 




s^ 


^ S 


-C 




o e 




« 


?r 


O 


i- 


^^ 


m 


<s 







^ 


3 
o 

p4 


1 








n S 








^ s 






g 


S^ 






^ 


-TJ 
















l« 






W 


io 


tT 


O 




a> 




PI 






§ 






rfl 


11 




^ 


1 





a 







&4 


3 




3 






'TS 


!h 




'T3 


> 


c 


5 S 


o 




to 


c3 




CQ 






© 






ril 




3 






o 


-tJ 


a 





^ ^fl 



o 



57=*^ 



67; 



MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILTTIA 



























•jop 
•M.06. >iui JO sjadej 




•8dB^ JO S308IJ 




■XV fA. 

-SniiBas JO 83oano 




•sjaj'BAV JO saonno 




■gjimb JO .leqran^ 




•ladBd 
agpi.njBo JO s^aeqs 




-.ledBd 
dBospoj JO saim^ 




•indvd 
J9:H91 JO soam^ 









g ^ 



o c3 



OJ 



r ce tH 
2 o o 

a ^ ^ 






rs © 



5^ <D p..-. 



> c: C-i 



ai o 



(5 *- 



THE STAFF. 



G79 



^3 



^ 



01 ^ 

o 

H ^ 



a 

o 
O 



P4 
O 







O 

y. 

i 
;3 


1 




•ii«s 1 




•dBOg 1 




•ssipuwo 1 




•jB^cini^V 1 




•jcSng 1 




■S3SO0 1 




•aoUI 1 




•suBog; 1 




unoij 1 




•5[joa 1 




•jsaq qs<j.i,i | 




•snoHBi JO jaqnin^ 






•siep JO aaqinn.si 








•I«iox 






•aocaoA\ JO jaqian^ 






•uauct JO Jtaquin^j 






o 

H 
<1 
H 
02 

p5 
o 

H 
M 

o 





5 



680 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 








1 


^ 




1 




f*-t 1 


g 


« a 


^ 


B% 





•&» 


^ 


PE 


i 







m 

o 

H 

<; 

Pi 


i 




•ilBS 1 




•dBOg 1 




•seipuBQ I 




ueSaniA. | 




UBSng 1 




•88fl00 1 




•33ia 1 




•suBag; | 




unoij 1 




•3iJ0d: 1 




•jaaq qsaj.t | 




•suonBi JO jaqran^ 






•gjfep JO jeqranjvr 






•mox 






•naraoAi jo aaqran^ 






•U9ra JO jaqranjsj 






POST OK STATION. 








THE STAFF. 



681 



f^ 

J 


■siliO 


d d d d d d t-H T-. rH ,-1 CO -t «5 : r- co -ii d : : : 


1 


■s:).n!iif) 


^iiiiiiiiiiJi^-^^-^-'^^S 


•sisLi>na 


i i i i : i i ; : : i ; : : i : : ; : i'^g 


1 


•soouno 


d i-H r^ (N r: 0? -*■ uo o ffl c-i CO d : d <m' co* oi : : : 




•spnnoj 






: : : : : : : : ,-( r-i <m oi o-i co co m< o ^ o 

i ! ; : i ! i i "*5~ 


i 


•sa.nuio 


d d d o i-! rH r-i r-<" im' c^ •T^■ t- d 0-1 -+■ d co 'O CO : : 




•spnnoj 






; i i : : : : = i i ; = ^ "^ ''^ ^ ;2 § | 




■mio 


d d d -^ r-' r-; o^ oi 0^ ^; d rH* ^ : CO o .-: Ti- : ; ; ; 


•fJ4-IBllt> 1 




:;:::::: r-H ,- 0-1 oi oi CO CO :;: . 


•suoiHif) 






; i i i i : i : : : : i i : r^H 


pi 
CO 


•saoano 


&;5SS8Si:??.?5?i§Sg :??58g : : : 

i-Mco>oi-di-ic6iOrHCoddo-i Icoddoi 1 i : 




•spuno^ 






: : : : :r-<r-io^con<cot-Qoo50'Moc=o 
: : : : : r-i (of 


5 


•soonno 


d i-i d CO '^ ic d t~ CO d co" c-i d : d ro (>j d • ] ■ 




■spunoj 




: : : : : : : i-. i-i o^ co co ^ •* o X) o o o 




•SOD a no 


O 0<I OC -+ O -J O) X -l; ; : : . : ; ; ; . ; ; ; 




•spniioa 






: ; : : : ; i-i o<i co ^ o co i- cc en o o 2 o 


1 


•sillO 


-f CO 0-1 x> o -+ oo (M ro o o o o • o o o o : . : : 
d 0-1 05 .c 0-1 CO -? ^ I- ti< a; oi «3 . -* oo oi co . . . . 
d i-H r-^ ci CO CO ^ .o o d "# CO T-H ; d -H CO r-< ': ] ': ; 


■sqjiin^ 


: : : : -. ; : ; : : r-i (n co -* -* o to i- =o co ; ; 


•^pq^'ng 


M M M M M i : M M M T^l 


s 


•sajLino 


(M-^cooDOoirj* :o^-*ocoi :-*coo-i :-*oo : : : 


•spunoj 


i-l 0-1 CO -* O CO 1^ Ol O T-H 0<I CO >0 -JD I- CO O --I 0-1 lO GO 05 
^ rH <M CO -* O CD J.- Cr. O r^ -^J I- OJ 


•S1.U.1133 1 




:::::::::::::::: »^ t- CO ', 


m 


•saoano 


-*ocM :tj<coo-i :-Tt<co ::o :&o joo :c/i : : : : 


•gpuno^j 


^<^coocot,c»o-^^f^o2.oj^goi^.ogo 

t-1 i-l 1-1 CI O o 


1 


•ssounQ 


" 0^ CO ^ : 01 CO ^ : 0-1 CO ; oo : co : go : co ; : : : 


•spanoj 


;^(N00 CO rococo t^0 010t;j0 010£|0|| 




•siaaatJa | j j 


M iiii Mi i i Mi l^H 






C5 


^^i«^oco.^coa.ooooooooog|_| 

r-i" d~C 


i 

_J 



682 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



f^ 









S 



o!> 



^^ 






THE STAFF, 



68; 



REMARKS. 




•p9!a 




•qSnoiinj UQ 




•IBijidsoq i^jsaaS o'^ ;uag 




•aoiAjas rao.g paSj-eqasia 




•ps^jasaa 




•^^np <y\ paujtiijaa 




•pa:>;irapY 




M 
-Si 

o 
o 




•iln'Bdnioo 




•sdioo JO :}U8Tnt39'a: 




[•^uv^ 









684 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



H « 



^ « 



OJ O M 03 Sh .• I t^ ^1 a 









&D 



2S' K = -^ « - -^ -^ ^ 

■r- .rt .^ j2^ 2;, C — -^ 

^ d -r; .:: « '^ ^ ^ -^ =i 



^3 

o 's 






■^3 



'5 is i! :^ ^ '*'' 



= ^1^2^5-3 St: 

•^ guy. ^2^5-^ 

'^ % -^ •'^ a S -^ m ^ ^ 

:^ .5 «^ a i ^' 5 '^ o .2 

-M g Pi, bjo.H =e _o -^ •- c-i 

« ^^'^5 ii 0-1:^.2 

-" ^ „- 2 C O ^ G ^, 









w 



'3 rO ? O ■" .-e 



C3 rr^ O 



•C M § o 

- '^ .^ r^ <^ ^ '^ 'I' s- ^ 

O 






,— . >^ ^ o c: ;:^ 



=5 X ^ 
CT' © E-i 



^ 00 

« M S^ ?. 



THE STAFF, 



685 



< 


1 


6 
S 


•sis;iBnb ui 




•[Bjidsoq nj 




•paia 




•[B:)tdsoq i-BjauaS o; ;aag 




•p93jT;qosiC[ 




•X:)np 0^ paujn:j8a: 




g 


•sia^j'Bnb UI 




•I^^tdsoq UI 




■JIOIS U351T?I 




? i 


•sjo^JBnl) UI 




•pG;idsoq ui 




COMPANY. 


\ 


<! 
P 


\ 



68 



686 MANUAL F 11 VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



ARTICLE XV. 

BATTLES. 

793. A battle is a general action between two armies; if only a 
small portion of tlie forces are engaged, it is usually denominated 
a combat, an affair, a sMrmish, etc., according to the cbaracter of 
tlie engagement. Battles are of tliree kinds : 1st. Defensive battles, 
or those fought in a chosen position by an army which awaits the 
attack of an enemy. 2d. Offensive battles, or those made by an 
army which attacks the enemy drawn up in position and awaiting 
the attack. 3d. The mioced or unforeseen battles, which occur be- 
tween two armies meeting on the march. 

794. When an army awaits the attack, it takes its position and 
forms its line of battle according to the nature of the ground, and 
the supposed character and strength of the enemy's forces. When 
some important position is to be protected by an array, such as when 
a siege is to be covered, a capital to be protected, depots of supplies 
guarded, or some point important to the operations of the campaign 
is to be held, such battles are usually given. 

795. The first condition to be satisfied by a position is, that the 
openings shall be more favorable for falling on the enemy when he 
has approached to the desired point, than those which he can have 
for attacking our line. Second, the artillery should be so posted as 
to command all the avenues by which the enemy can approach. 
Third, we should, if possible, have good ground upon which to 
manoeuvre our troops unseen by the enemy. Fourth, we should 
have a full view of the enemy as he advances to the attack. Fifth, 
the flanks of our line should be well protected by natural or artificial 
obstacles. Sixth, we should have the means for effecting a retreat 
in the event of a defeat^ without exposing the army to destruction. 



BATTLES. 687 

It is seldom that all these conditions can be satisfied at the same 
time ; sometimes the very means of satisfying one may be in viola- 
tion of another. A river, a forest, or a mountain, which secures the 
flank of an army, may become an obstacle to a retreat ; again, the 
position may be difficult of attack in front, or on the wings, and at 
the same time unfavorable for retreat. 

\Ye may sometimes be obliged to make the attack at all hazards, 
to prevent the junction of two of the enemy's corps to cut off forces 
that are separated from the main body by a river, etc. As a general 
rule, the attacking force has a moral superiority over the defensive, 
but this advantage is frequently counterbalanced by other conditions. 

796. When we are acting on the offensive, the main thing is to 
seize upon the decisive point of the field. This point is determined 
by the configuration of the ground, the position of the contending 
forces, the object to be attained by the battle; or by a combination 
of these. 

797. It frequently happens that battles result from the meeting 
of armies in motion, both parties acting on the ofi'ensive. Indeed, 
an army that is acting on the defensive may, on the approach of the 
enemy, advance to meet him while on the march. Battles of this 
kind may partake of the mixed character of oiFensive and defensive 
actions, or they may be in the nature of a surprise to both armies, 

798. An order of battle is the particular disposition given to the 
troops for a determined manoeuvre on the field of battle. A line of 
battle is the general name applied to troops drawn up in their usual 
order, without any determined manoeuvre ; it may apply to defensive 
positions or to offensive operations, where no particular object has 
been decided on. Military writers lay down twelve orders of bat- 
tle, viz. : 

1st. The simple parallel order, in which the two armies occupy 
parallel lines. This is regarded as the worst possible position for a 
battle, for the two parties here fight with equal chances, and the 
combat must continue until accident, superior numbers, or mere 
physical strength decides the day; skill can have but little influence 
in such a contest. 

2d. The parallel order with a crotchet, in which one of the wings 



688 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

is thrown forward or back, giving the line this form. This order 
is sometimes used in a defensive position, and in the offensive with 
the crotchet thrown forward. Wellington, at Waterloo, formed the 
parallel order with the retired crotchet on the right flank. 

3d. The parallel order reinforced on one or both wings. This 
order may in certain cases secure the victory, but it has many ob- 
jections. The weak part of the line is too near the enemy, and may, 
notwithstanding the efforts of the general to the contrary, become 
engaged, and run the risk of defeat, thereby counterbalancing the 
advantages gained by having a strong point. Neither will the 
reinforced part of the line be able to profit by any success it may 
gain, and take the enemy's line in flank and rear, without endan- 
gering its connection with the rest of the line. 

4th. The parallel order reinforced on the centre. The same 
objections are applicable to this as to the last. 

5th. The simple oblique order, in which the two lines are oblique 
to each other. 

6th. The oblique order reinforced on the assailing wing. This 
is suited- to an inferior army attacking a superior, for it enables the 
general to carry the mass of his force on a single point of the 
enemy's line, while the weaker wing is out of reach of immediate 
attack, and holds the remainder of the enemy's line in check by 
acting as a reserve ready to be concentrated on the favorable point 
as occasion may require. 

7th. The perpendicular order on one or both wings, in which the 
attacking force occupies one or more lines perpendicular to the 
defensive, and on one or both of its flanks. A battle may begin 
with this order, but soon it must change to the oblique. An attack 
upon both wings can only be made with safety, when the attacking 
force is vastly superior. 

8th. The concave order, in which the army occupies a curve 
concave to the enemy ; in this order the wings are in advance of 
the centre. It may be used with advantage in some cases and in 
particular localities. 

9th. The convex order, in which the army is disposed in a curve 
convex to the enemy, the centre being thus thrown in advance of 



BATTLES. 689 

the wings. This order is sometimes formed to cover a defile, to 
attack a concave line, or to oppose an attack before or after the 
passage of a river. 

10th. The order by echelon on one or both wings, in which the 
army is arranged in echelon from right to left, or from left to right. 
This order on one wing may be frequently employed with advantage ; 
but if it be made on both wings, there is the same objection to its 
use as to the perpendicular order on both wings. 

11th. The order by echelon on the centre, in which the centre is 
in the advance, and the wings are disposed in echelon to the right 
and left. This order may be employed with success against an army 
formed in a thin or too extended line of battle^ for then it would 
penetrate and break the line. 

The echelon order possesses many advantages. The several corps 
composing the army may manoeuvre separately, and, consequently, 
with greater ease. Each echelon covers the flank of the one which 
precedes it; and all may be combined to effect a given object, and 
extended without weakening any part too much. 

12th, The combined orders of attack in columns on the centre 
and one wing at the same time. This is better suited than either 
of the others for attacking a strong line. 

799. No general rule can be laid down as to which of these 
orders of battle should be employed, or whether either should be 
exclusively followed throughout the battle. The question must be 
decided by the general himself on the ground, where all the circum- 
stances may be duly considered. An order well suited to one posi- 
tion might be the worst possible in another. 

Whatever the plan adopted by the attacking general, he should 
endeavor to dislodge the enemy, by piercing or turning his line. 
If he can conceal his real intentions and deceive the enemy respect- 
ing the true point of attack, success will be more certain. 

800. We will now discuss the particular manner of arranging 
the troops on the line of battle, or the manner of employing each 
arm, beginning with the infantry, as this is the most important. 

Position and formation. — On the field of battle, whether the 
object be to attack or defend, the infantry is divided into three 
58* 2t 



690 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

bodies — an advanced-guard, tlie main body, and a reserve. Their 
relative proportion will depend upon the total force, and the character 
of the position occupied. The advanced-guard must be of sufficient 
strength to hold the enemy in check, but at the same time, the 
main body, upon which the brunt of the action should fall, mu5!t 
not be left of insufficient force, by unnecessarily increasing the ad- 
vanced-guard ; and the reserve should be strong enough to repair 
any disaster that may befall the main body; or to profit by its 
success in accomplishing the complete overthrow of the enemy. 

These three bodies are separated from each other by intervah 
which will depend upon the nature of the ground. The advanced 
guard occupying the front; the main body at a distance from 150 
to 300 paces in its rear; and the reserve at a like interval in rear 
of the main body. Where the ground, for example, is undulating, 
and therefore favorable to masking the troops from the enemy's fire, 
these intervals may, if requisite, be reduced to 80 or 100 paces. 

The troops composing these three bodies will be formed either 
in columns of battalions, or be deployed, according to the circum- 
stances under which they may be placed. For an attack, for evolu- 
tion, or for defence against cavalry, the formations of columns of 
battalions is best. To repel the enemy's attack by a fire, and in 
some cases, to present a less favorable mark to his artillery, the 
battalions are deployed. The battalions, whether deployed or in 
column, preserve the proper intervals for evolutions ; these intervals 
may be increased in obstructed ground without weakening the 
defence. 

The battalions composing the main body may be drawn up in one 
or two lines. The latter usually obtains only when a large force is 
present. In this case the reserve no longer holds the position of 
a third line, as in the other ; but forms an independent body, to be 
used according to the emergency, the second line supporting the 
battalions of the first, and, for this purpose, occupying positions to 
the rear opposite to their intervals. 

801. Defence. — When the position is taken up to receive Iho 
enemy's attack, and there either to remain on the defensive, or to 
assume the offensive, as circumstances may justify, the advanced- 



BATTLES. 691 

guard will be posted on the ground most favorable to hold the enemy 
in check, and so force him, by disputing it with tenacity, to develop 
his means and plans. This is best done by a judicious combat of 
skirmishers, who, for this purpose, are thrown forward 300 or 400 
paces to feel the enemy, and are only reinforced when closely 
pressed. 

Whether the advanced-guard shall maintain its ground obsti- 
nately until reinforced by the main body, or whether it shall fall 
back, either on the flanks or to the rear of the main body, must be 
determined by the strength of the position. If this be so strong 
that the enemy's loss in carrying it must be great, then it should 
be pertinaciously maintained; in the contrary case it must, after a 
suitable show of resistance, be abandoned. 

As a general rule, troops should be placed as much out of view 
as practicable, before they go into action, by taking advantage of 
covers offered by the ground. The main body should be kept 
masked in this way until it is called to engage the enemy. If it 
advance to support the advanced-guard, it will usually attack with 
the bayonet; if the advanced-guard is called in, the main body will 
usually receive the enemy by its fire ; the battalions being deployed 
for this purpose. If the enemy is staggered by this fire, or, in 
advancing, shows, by the wavering or confusion of his line, a want 
of confidence, the fire may be followed up either by a charge of the 
troops in line, or they may be formed in columns of attack before 
charging, if the enemy perseveres in his onward movement. A 
charge by a column, when the enemy is within 50 paces, will prove 
effective, if resolutely made. 

The reserve is composed of the most reliable troops. It should 
be distinguished for cool courage ; acting under all circumstances, 
either defensive or offensive, with circumspection and determined 
resolution. 

As the object of the reserve is to infuse greater energy into the 
action of the main body, and, if necessary, to strike a last and deci- 
sive blow ; it should be kept masked from the enemy's fire and view 
until called into action. The proper moment for engaging the 
reserve is either when the enemy has been shaken in his attack by 



692 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the resistance offered by tlie main body, or when the latter is unable 
farther to resist the enemy's efforts. If engaged too soon, the 
resistance offered to the reserve may prevent its making a decisive 
blow ; if not engaged in time, the main body may be too far ex- 
hausted and disorganized to rally. 

In cases where the reserve forms a second line, to support the 
main body, it should approach the first line when it becomes en- 
gaged, to be ready to replace it when circumstances may render it 
necessary. The advanced-guard, in such cases, should retire to 
the rear, to act as a reserve. 

802. Attack. — In the attack of infantry, the same fundamental 
dispositions are made as for the defensive. The advanced-guard 
will not throw forward its skirmishers until they are near enough to 
engage the enemy. The line of skirmishers should be strongly sup- 
ported, and will press the enemy with vigor and without relaxation. 
If the force engaged be small, the main body will regulate its move- 
ments by those of the line of skirmishers ; if considerable^ the re- 
verse will obtain. 

The main body and reserve follow the advanced-guard in column, 
preserving the requisite intervals. The columns should take every 
advantage of the ground to mask their movements; getting rapidly 
over any where they are much exposed to fire. So soon as the ad- 
vanced-guard is checked, it will fall back either on the flanks of the 
columns, or to the rear; and the main body will be immediately 
brought into action, either by deploying and opening its fire, or by 
a vigorous charge with the bayonet. If the main body falters in 
its attack, or gives any signs of want of resolution, the reserve 
should advance at once through the intervals, and make a vigorous 
charge with the bayonet. 

If the attack by the main body is made with the bayonet, the in- 
terval between it and the columns of the reserve may be lessened 
to 80 or 100 paces. The flanks of the columns of attack, and 
the intervals between them, should be occupied by skirmishers. 
This is an important precaution ; as, by forcing the enemy to deliver 
his fire before the columns have reached within a destructive range, 
the main obstacle to their onward movement will be removed. 



BATTLES. 693 

803. Pursuit. — If tlie assailed retires, the pursuit may be con- 
ducted with system and in good order. The line nearest the enemy 
will throw forward a few troops in pursuit; which, in most cases, 
will be preceded by skirmishers. The line in close order will follow 
these troops until it attains a good position to receive the enemy, 
should he make an offensive movement, when it will be halted and 
formed in readiness for action. A pursuit by infantry alone cannot be 
pushed far, even should the enemy retire without any order, or show 
of resistance, as the retreating force will soon distance their pursuers. 

804. Retreat. — When, either in the defensive, or offensive, it be- 
comes necessary to retire, the first point to be attended to is to with- 
draw the troops engaged ; either to a good position to their rear, 
where they can halt and face the enemy, or else behind the line in 
their rear, which should hold the assailants in check, and allow the 
retreating troops to ftill back in good order. Having fairly got dis- 
engaged, dispositions must be promptly made to withdraw from the 
field. This may be done by the entire force moving off together, 
if the enemy shows no disposition to follow up his success with 
energy; or, in the contrary case, by retiring by successive portions; 
the line which withdraws falling some 150 paces by the rear of the 
one by which it is covered, whilst falling back, and then forming, 
to cover in turn the retreat of the latter. 

The dispositions made in the retreat will depend entirely upon the 
character of the enemy's pursuit, and the features of the ground. 
It will usually be made in columns, covered by skirmishers, if the 
pursuit is made by infantry alone ; if by cavalry, the retreat must 
be made with great circumspection ; the troops retiring slowly and 
in good order, adopting the formation against cavalry ; never hasten- 
ing the march, unless near a good position for defence, which should 
be attained as rapidly as possible, unless closely pressed by the 
cavalry. 

If it be necessary to continue the retreat for some marches, under 
the eye of the enemy, a rear-guard must be formed ; selecting from 
a fourth to a third of the entire force, for this service. The main 
duty of the rear-guard is to hinder the enemy from pressing too 
closely on the main body ; and it should therefore, under no circum- 



694 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

stances, allow itself to be forced back upon tlie main body. The 
dispositions adopted by the rear-guard will depend upon the features 
of the ground; its rear will usually be covered by a line of skir- 
mishers. The rear-guard will keep within good supporting distance 
of the main body ; and, when pressed by the enemy, the latter, 
whenever a favorable position offers, will halt and form; to cover 
the former, and force the enemy to greater circumspection. 

805. Pleasures for protracting an engagement.- — In the attack, as 
in the defence, it may frequently become an object to protract an en- 
gagement, without coming to any decisive result; either for the 
purpose of holding a position for a certain time, to favor other 
objects, as the arrival of reinforcements; or to occupy an adversary 
upon one point, whilst a decisive blow is preparing on another. This 
game can be played only upon ground favorable to alterations from 
the defensive to the offensive; and should only be intrusted to 
troops thoroughly conversant with the duties of skirmishers. The 
main body is kept some two thousand paces to the rear of the skir- 
mishers in such affairs ; taking advantage of the ground, and making 
suitable dispositions of the troops to avoid the effects of the enemy's 
artillery. Small columns are thrown forward between itself and the 
troops engaged, which take post in covered ground, to be on hand to 
support the skirmishers. The troops engaged should be promptly rein- 
forced, when the enemy presses onward ; and attempts should be 
made, by charging him in flank, to force him to retire. The troops 
in action should be frequently relieved, and the opportunity should be 
seized, when the fresh troops come up, to make an onward movement 
on the enemy, and force him from any points he may have gained. 

806. Defence against cavalry. — When infantry is threatened by 
cavalry, the proper formation to repel its charge, is that of squares. 
If but one square is formed, it must rely on its own resources to 
beat off the enemy ; but when there are several they may give 
mutual support, by bringing a flank fire from one upon a force ad- 
vancing or either of the two contiguous to it. The safety of in- 
fantry against cavalry, will depend upon the preservation of perfect 
coolness, good order, and connection in the ranks; the avoidance of 
any precipitate movements which might bring about a surprise ; and 



BATTLES. G95 

tlie husbanding of its ammunition, and reservation of its fire until 
tlie enemy is witliin a deadly range. Well-disciplined infantry, 
Tfliilst in position, and when not exposed to a fire of artillery, may 
securely trust to its own resources to repulse the best cavalry, so 
long as it adopts the proper precautions. If annoyed, as sometimes 
may happen, by the fire of a few horsemen, advanced to draw the 
fire of the squares, it will be better to throw out some skirmishers, 
ten or twelve paces from the squares, to keep off such attacks, than 
to open a fire from the squares. 

807. Defence, etc., against artillery. — Infantry may take advan- 
tage, either of covers presented by the features of the ground, or 
of occasionally shifting its position, to avoid the fire of artillery. 
Very slight undulations, obstructions, like the low banks along the 
borders of ditches, will serve to cover troops, by causing the shot 
to rise above them. If no covers are at hand, the chances of casual- 
ties, when within point-blank range, may be diminished by moving 
forward, or backward, some fifty paces ; if the fire be a ricochet, 
the position should be shifted some fifty paces to the right or left. 
The enemy's batteries may be annoyed, and sometimes be forced to 
change their position, by sending out good marksmen, who advance 
singly to within some 250 paces of them; when, lying down, they 
can pick off the officers, men and horses. 

808. Attach of artillery. — Whenever it is found necessary to 
carry a battery by the bayonet, the troops for this duty are divided 
into two detachments; one of which is charged with capturing the 
guns, and the other with attacking the supports of the battery. 

The dispositions made by the detachment which moves against 
the guns will be the usual one of skirmishers ; the line surrounding 
the battery, and opening their fire upon it when within about 250 
paces, taking advantage for "this purpose of any covers, to screen 
the men. The supports of the line of skirmishers should be kept 
well to the rear, to be ready against a flank movement on the line. 
If this manoeuvre succeeds in drawing the fire of the guns, and 
any confusion is observed among the men, then a rush must be made 
immediately upon them with the bayonet. 

The detachment against the supports of the battery will make its 



696 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

dispositions according to the kind of troops which compose the sup- 
ports. If of infantry, the detachment to seize the guns^ divided 
into two portions, will advance either in line or column^ as may be 
best, on the flanks of the line of skirmishers ', gradually getting in 
advance of it, and closing on the flanks of the battery, so as to at- 
tack the supports in flank ; or else they may keep to the rear of the 
line of skirmishers, in order to tempt the supports to move forward, 
and thus mask the fire of their guns. If the supports are of cavalry, 
the detachment, divided into two columns, will follow the line of 
skirmishers, in rear of the flanks^ to cover it against a charge of 
cavalry. 

CAVALRY. 

809, Position. — This arm is usually placed in the rear of the 
infantry, on ground favorable to its manoeuvres, and where it will be 
masked from fire until the moment arrives to bring it into action ; 
here, if acting on the defensive, the cavalry watches its opportunity 
to support the other troops, driving back the enemy, by prompt and 
vigorous charges, when these are hard pressed ; or, if on the offen- 
sive, biding its time, to rush upon the assailant, and complete his 
destruction ; when his ranks commence to waver, or show signs of 
disorganization from the assaults of the other arms. 

Formation. — The habitual formation of cavalry for the attack is 
a line of two ranks, with a reserve or support in rear. The sup- 
ports are indispensably requisite to guard against those chances of 
danger to which cavalry is particularly exposed, if attacked in turn, 
when in a state of partial disorganization, after a successful charge ; 
or when threatened by an off"ensive movement against its flanks. 
The supports off"er a safeguard against either of these dangers; for, 
if the front line is brought up by the enemy, after a successful 
charge, it can retire and rally in rear of the supports ; and if the 
enemy makes a movement against the flanks, the supports, placed 
behind them and in column, can form and anticipate the enemy's 
charge. For the foregoing reasons, cavalry should not give way to a 
headlong pursuit after a successful charge, unless its supports are 
at hand ; and, in cases where a charge is made without supports, a 



BATTLES. 697 

portion only should engage in pursuit^ tlie rest being rallied to form 
a support. 

Cavalry is seldom called on to use fire-arms. When on outpost 
service, or acting on the defensive on ground unfavorable to charg- 
ing, a portion of the force may be dispersed as flankers, to hold the 
enemy in check by their fire. In this case their movements are 
regulated in the same way as other skirmishers. 

810. Defences. — The defensive qualities of cavalry lie in the 
ofi'ensive. A body of cavalry which waits to receive a charge of 
cavalry, or is exposed to a fire of infantry, or artillery, must either 
retire, or be destroyed. This essential quality of cavalry renders 
its service invaluable in retreats when the enemy pursues ■with 
visror. In such cases it should be held in constant readiness to 
take advantage of every spot favorable to its action; and by short 
and energetic charges, force the enemy to move wdth circumspection. 

811. Attack against infantry. — So long as infantry maintains its 
position firmly, particularly if the ground is at all unfavorable to 
the movements of cavalry, the chances are against a successful 
attack by the latter. Cavalry should therefore wait patiently until 
a way is prepared for its action, by the fire of artillery on the 
enemy's infantry; or until the infantry has become crippled and 
exhausted by being kept in action for some time ; or else, watch- 
ing its opportunity, make a charge whilst the infantry is in motion, 
so as to surprise it before it can form to receive the attack. 

Cavalry should direct its charge on that point of the enemy's 
infantry where it will itself be exposed to the least column of fire. 
If the infantry is in line, the charge should be made on one of its 
flanks; if in sc^uare, on one of the angles of the square; and when 
several squares are formed, so as to afford mutual support by their 
fire, selecting the squares on the flanks as most vulnerable, from 
their position. 

The formation usually recommended for charging against squares, 
is that of three squadrons in line at double distance ; the leading 
squadron being followed by the others, either directly in its rear; 
or else the squadrons may be formed in echelon, successively over- 
lapping each other, by about the front of a platoon. The angle of 
59 



698 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

the square is charged by each squadron in succession, if the charge 
of the one preceding it fails ; the repulsed squadrons each wheeling 
to the right or left, on retiring; to leave the way clear for its suc- 
cessor. A fourth squadron in column follows those in line, to sur- 
round the square^ and make prisoners if it should be broken by the 
charge. 

To draw the fire of the infantry before charging, a few skilful 
flankers may be thrown forward, to open a fire on the square. 
Stratagem may also be tried, by moving along the front of the 
infantry, at some 400 paces, and then charging, if it is attempted 
to throw away its fire at this distance. In an attack where several 
squares are in linC; if one fires to second another it should instantly 
be changed. 

812. Attack against artillery. — In attacks against artillery, the 
detachment of cavalry should be divided into three bodies ; one- 
fourth of the detachment being charged with carrying the guns ; 
one-half to attack the supports of the battery ; and the remaining 
fourth acting as a reserve, to cover the parties in advance, from an 
oifensive movement against their flanks or rear. 

The party to secure the guns make their attack in dispersed 
order, and endeavor to gain the flanks of the battery. When the 
battery has a fair sweep over the ground along which they must 
advance, they should by manoeuvering and false attacks, try to con- 
fuse the artillerists, and draw their fire before making their charge. 

The attack against the support of the battery will be directed 
in the usual manner, the party manoeuvring to gain their flanks. 

ARTILLERY. 

813. Position.— ThQ manner of placing artillery and its employ- 
ment must be regulated by its relative importance under given 
circumstances, with respect to the action of other arms. In the 
defensive, the principal part is usually assigned to the artillery ) 
and the positions taken up by the other arms will, therefore, be 
subordinate to those of this arm. In offensive movements the 
reverse generally obtains. 

814. Defence. — In defensive positions the security of the batteries 
is of the last importance. Unless the batteries are on points which 



BATTLES, 



G99 



are inaccessible to the enemy's cavalry and infantry, tlicy must be 
placed under the protection of the other troops, and be outflanked 
by them. 

As in the defensive we should be prepared to receive the enemy 
on every point, the batteries must be distributed along the entire 
front of the position occupied, and ou those points from which 
they can obtain a good sweep over the avenues of approach to it ', 
the guns being masked, when the ground favors, from the enemy's 
view, until the proper moment arrives for opening their fire. 

The distance between the batteries should not be much over 600 
paces, so that by their fire they may cover well the ground inter- 
vening between them, and afford mutual support; the light guns 
being placed on the more salient points of the front, from their 
shorter range and greater facility of manoeuvring; the heavier 
guns on the more retired points. Guns of various calibre should not 
be placed in the same battery. A sufficient interval should also be 
left between batteries of different calibre, to prevent the enemy 
from judging, by the variations in the effect of the shot, of the 
weight of metal of the batteries. 

Those positions for batteries should be avoided from which the 
shot must pass over other troops to attain the enemy. And those 
should be sought for from which a fire can be maintained until the 
enemy has approached even within good musket-range of them. 

When the wings of a position are weak, batteries of the heaviest 
calibre should be placed to secure them. 

A sufficient number of pieces — selecting for the object in view 
horse artillery in preference to any other — should be held in reserve 
for a moment of need, to be thrown upon a point where the enemy's 
progress threatens danger, or to be used in covering the retreat. 

The collection of a large number of pieces in a single battery is 
a dangerous arrangement, particularly at the outset of an engage- 
ment. The exposure of so many guns together might present a 
strong inducement to the enemy to make an effort to carry the bat- 
tery; a feat the more likely to succeed, as it is difficult either to 
withdraw the guns or change their position promptly, after their 
fire is opened ; and one which, if successful, might entail a fatal 
disaster on the assailed^ from the loss of so many pieces at once^ 



700 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

In all defensive dispositions the ammunition sliould be most care- 
fully husbanded. A fire should never be opened until the enemy 
is within good range, and, when once opened, be continued with 
perseverance and coolness up to the last moment in which it can be 
made effective. 

815. Attack. — In the outset of offensive movements, good posi- 
tions should be selected for the heaviest pieces, from which they can 
maintain a strong fire on the enemy until the lighter pieces and the 
columns of attack are brought into action. These positions should 
be taken on the flanks of the ground occupied by the assailant, or 
on the centre, if more favorable to the end to be attained. In all 
c^aes, wide intervals should be left between the heavy batteries 
and the other troops, in order that the latter may not suffer from 
the return fire which the assailed will probably open on the batteries. 
For the same reason, care should be taken not to place other troops 
behind the point occupied by a battery, where they would be ex- 
posed to the return fire of the assailed ; when this cannot be avoided, 
the troops should be so placed as to be covered by any undulation 
of the ground, or else be deployed in time to lessen the efi'ects of 
the shot. 

The artillery which moves with the column of attack, should be 
divided into several strong batteries, as the object in this ease is to 
produce a decisive impression upon a few points of the enemy's line, 
by bringing an overwhelming fire to bear upon these points. These 
batteries should keep near enough to the other troops to be in safety 
from any attempts of the assailed to capture them. Their usual 
positions will be on the flanks, and near the heads of the columns 
of attack ; the intervals between the batteries being suflieient for the 
fire manoeuvres of the other troops, in large bodies. The manoeuvres 
of these batteries should be made with promptitude, so that no time 
may be lost for the action of their fire. They should get rapidly 
over unfavorable ground to good positions for firing, and maintain 
these as long as possible ; detaching, in such cases, a few pieces to 
accompany the column of attack. In all the movements of the 
batteries, great care should be taken not to place them so that they 
phall in the least impede the operations of the other troops. 



COURTS MARTIAL. 701 



ARTICLE XYI. 

COUETS MARTIAL. 

816. Courts Martial are military courts instituted for the in^ 
vestigation and punishment of all offences committed by officers, 
soldiers, sutlers, retainers to the camp, and persons serving loith the 
army, in violation of military law, and the custom of war. Their 
powers and duties are laid down in general terms in the Articles of 
War, from Article 64 to 91 inclusive. 

817. Commissioned officers clothed with military rank, and 
entitled to command, are the only persons in the United States 
service who are eligible as members of courts martial ; this excludes 
all paymasters, surgeons, and assistant-surgeonS; whose rank is only 
assimilated. 

818. Courts martial are of three kinds, General, Regimental, and 
Garrison. 

A general court martial is competent to take jurisdiction over 
any offence of a military nature, that can be committed by military 
persons ', and its powers to award punishments are co-extensive with 
this right. Commissioned officers are not amenable to any other 
than a general court martial, and it is provided by Article 75 of the 
Articles of War^ that they shall not be tried by officers of an infe- 
rior rank, if it can be avoided. 

819. A general court martial can only be appointed or assembled 
by the President of the United States, by the Governor of a State 
as commander-in-chief of the forces of the State, by a general com- 
manding an army, or by a general or colonel commanding a separate 
military department. The warrant for assembling the court, or the 
appointment of the members thereof, is in the form of an order, and 
issues directly from the officer to whom the law has delegated such 
power. 

59* 



702 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

820. It is provided by Article 64 of the Articles of War, tliat 
general courts martial may consist of any number of members from 
five to thirteen inclusively; but they shall not consist of less than 
thirteen when that number can be convened without manifest injury 
to the service. It is to be observed, however, that the officer em- 
powered to appoint a court, is invested with discretionary authority 
as to the number of officers which shall compose it^ and their rank 
relatively to that of the accused. 

821. The proceedings and decisions of general courts martial are 
subject to review or revision by the officer ordering the same, or 
the officer commanding the troops for the time being. In the 
United States service no sentence of a general court martial in time 
of peace, extending to the loss of life, or the dismission of a com- 
missioned officer; or which shall, either in time of peace or war, 
respect a general officer, cannot be carried into execution, until after 
the whole proceedings shall have been transmitted to the Secretary 
of War, to be laid before the President of the United States for his 
confirmation or disapproval, and orders in the case. All other sen- 
tences may be confirmed and executed by the officer ordering the 
court, or the commanding officer for the time being, as the case may 
be. Every officer authorized to order a general court martial shall 
have power to pardon or mitigate any punishment ordered by such 
court, except the sentence of death, or of cashiering an officer, 

822. Regimental and garrison courts martial take cognizance of 
and punish officers of minor degree. The regimental court martial 
is ordered by the colonel or other comm.ander of the regiment, for 
the trial of offences in the regiment; it consists of three commis- 
sioned officers. 

Garrison courts martial are in like manner composed of three 
commissioned officers, and appointed by the commanders of garri- 
sons, forts, barracks, or other places, where the troops consist of mixed 
corps. 

The proceedings of regimental and garrison courts martial are 
submitted to the officers ordering them, or to their successors in 
command, for revision, and decision on the sentences pronounced. 
The jurisdiction of these courts is very limited, and can in no case 
extend to the trial of capital cases, or commissioned officers. 



COURTS MARTIAL. 703 



THE TRIAL. 



823. A court martial having been deemed necessary to investigate 
the conduct of an officer or soldier, against whom a charge has been 
preferred, the order appointing the members and judge advocate 
to compose the same, as well as the time and place of meeting, is 
duly promulgated. 

When the hour has arrived for assembling, the members of the 
court martial take their places at the table according to rank, on the 
right and left of the president, the latter at the head of the table. 
The judge advocate is seated opposite to the president. The 
prisoner and his counsel (if he has any) have a place assigned, with 
the necessary accommodation for writing, on the right hand of the 
judge advocate. The witness stands near the judge advocate on 
his left hand. In case a third party, as prosecutor, should be per- 
mitted to appear, he will be placed to the left of the judge advocate. 
The court being seated and called to order, no member can leave 
his seat without the permission of the president. 

It is usual for the judge advocate to prepare a copy of the charges 
for the use of the court, which is placed upon the table previous to 
the arraignment. 

The court having been called to order, and any preliminary matter 
which may have required their attention being disposed of, it is 
proclaimed open. The parties are then called, and appear in court. 

The prisoner, unless there be danger of escape or rescue, must 
appear without fetters, and free from shackles of any kind ; when 
the court adjourns, the prisoner, if a soldier^ is remanded to the 
hands of the guard. 

The judge advocate now reads the order for the assembling of 
the court. It is proper also to read the charges to be investigated, 
so that the court may have before them the matter which they are 
about to swear that they will " truly try and determine.'"' 

824. The order for convening the court having been read, the 
judge advocate asks the prisoner if he has any objection to any 
member present named in the order, or any cause of challenge to 
present. 



704 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

Peremptory challenge or challenges are not permitted, but the 
prisoner must assign his reasons in writing, or if brief, the judge 
advocate will record them as stated. 

In case a member should be challenged (and only one can be 
challenged at a time), the reasons therefor, and when susceptible of 
such, the reply or explanation offered, are committed to writing as 
a part of the minutes of the court, and make a portion of the pro- 
ceedings ; and the court is cleared in order to deliberate and decide 
on the objection assigned. The member objected to always with- 
draws during the discussion which follows, and of course does not 
vote on the question, Upon the re-opening of the court, the judge 
advocate (by direction of the court), makes known the decision, 
and the challenged member resumes his seat, or withdraws alto- 
gether, as the case may be, and a member in waiting, or supernu- 
merary, if any be detailed, supplies his place. 

The judge advocate cannot be challenged on any pretence whatever. 

825. The judge advocate then proceeds to administer the pre- 
scribed oath; the members of the court, and the judge advocate 
stand ; the person or persons to be sworn lift the right hand, un- 
gloved, when the judge advocate recites in an audible voice, "You, 
Colonel A. B., Major B. C, Major D. F., and Captain a. H. (thus 
naming with his rank, each member of the court), do swear that 
you will well and truly try and determine," etc. etc. " So help you 
God." (See 69th Article of War.) 

The presiding officer then administers the oath to the judge ad- 
vocate, who observes the same form; during which time, all the 
members of the court remain standing, and observe the most decorous 
silence and attention. 

The same oath prescribed to be taken by the members of a general 
court martial, is directed to be taken by the members of a regimental 
and garrison court martial. No particular oath of secrecy is required 
of the recorder, as he is a member of the court. 

Whenever several persons are to be tried by the same court mar- 
tial, upon different charges, the court must be re-sworn at the com- 
mencement of each trial, and the record of each case made up se- 
parately, and signed by the president and judge advocate. 



COURTS MARTIAL. 705 

826. The court liaving been sworn in the presence of the prisoner, 
the judge advocate reads the charge to the prisoner in open court, 
whom the judge advocate arraigns, by addressing by his proper title 
or rank, and name. '' You have heard the charges preferred against 
you ; how say you — guilty, or not guilty V 

The prisoner may plead guilty or not guilty ; but it must be made 
simply and unqualified, as nothing exculpatory can at this time be 
received. No sj^ec/c/Z justification can be ofiered as a plea, as such 
would be an anticipation of the defence. He may stand mute, that 
is, refuse to answer ; or answer foreign to the purpose ; or may 
plead in bar of trial. 

The ordinary plea is " not guilty," upon which the trial proceeds. 
The plea being recorded, the judge advocate calls the first witness, 
and gives notice, that should there be any persons present in court 
who have been summoned as witnesses, they will retire until called 
for, as it is a rule, that the witnesses of neither party can be present 
during the examination of other witnesses. 

827. The witness is sworn by the judge advocate, and the same 
form of administering the oath is observed as was indicated for 
swearing in of the members. The words are : " You do swear (or 
affirm), that the evidence you shall give in the cause now in hear- 
ing, shall be the truth, the whole truth, and nothing but the ti-uth, 
so help you Grod." 

The name, rank, regiment, or corps, or distinctive condition of 
the witness is recorded by the judge advocate at length, so that the 
person may by the description be easily identified. 

The examination of the witnesses is always in the presence of 
every member of the court ; and the " countenance, looks, and ges- 
tures of a witness," are considered of importance as adding to, or 
taking from the weight of his testimony. The testimony is some- 
times given in the form of a narrative, but more frequently by in- 
terrogations. Narration in many cases, is the most natural and easy 
method to observe, but interrogation is the more direct and search- 
ing means of soliciting evidence, and also the more certain. All 
evidence received is recorded in the order in which it is given, and 
as nearly as may be in the very words of the witness. In case a 

2u 



706 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

witness should be too ill to attend the court, the latter may adjourn 
to the room or bedside of the former to receive his evidence. Ques- 
tions are reduced to writing by the party originating them, and 
read aloud by the judge advocate, who writes them on the proceed- 
ings. Should an objection be made to a question on examination, 
the court is cleared, and a majority of voices determines whether it 
shall be put or not. 

A question having been rejected, is not, therefore, expunged from 
the record, of which it makes a part, unless by consent of the par- 
ties before the court, but appears on the record, with the decision 
of the court. A party before the court cannot object to a question 
put by the court, though he may to a question put by a member of 
it, before the collective opinion of the court has been expressed in 
relation to it. All questions originating with members, and which 
have been received, are recorded as " hy the court," but when made 
the subject of discussion, and rejection, they are entered upon the 
record as " by a memher.'^ 

When a witness is sworn, the party who calls him commences the 
examination, which is styled the examination in chief; that being 
finished, the opposite party asks what questions he may deem neces- 
sary, and this latter interrogation is called the cross-examination. 
A re-examination of the witness, by the first party, follows the cross- 
examination, upon such points as the latter may have touched on, 
and then the court put such questions as they may deem requisite, 
to elicit the whole truth. 

The examination of the witness having been completed, his evi- 
dence, if deemed necessary by the court, or if desired by him, is 
read over previous to his leaving, to give him the opportunity of 
correcting any errors therein. Accordingly, any remark or expla- 
nation, with such a view, is entered on the proceedings ; but no 
erasure or obliteration of what has been previously stated can be 
made. 

Should either party perceive, after having concluded his case, 
that a material question has been omitted, he submits it to the 
court, who will always allow it to be put. 

The witnesses called by the prosecutor having been examined, 



COURTS MARTIAL. 707 

and all the evidence to substantiate the charges submitted to the 
court, the prisoner enters upon his defence. Should it be neces- 
sary for preparation, the court, at the request of the prisoner, would 
grant time to enable him to proceed with more certainty or pre- 
cision. 

Witnesses for the defence are examined in the same order, as 
those presented on the part of the prosecution. The prosecutor 
cross-examines, and the prisoner re-examines to the same extent 
allowed to the prosecutor. 

828. The examination of witnesses having been closed, the 
prisoner takes his time to address the court, when by argument and 
statement of facts as shown in the evidence, he presents to the 
court every consideration which may tend to weaken the force of 
the prosecution. The greatest liberty, consistent with strict pro- 
priety, especially in regard to third persons not before the court, is 
at all times allowed a prisoner ] and he therefore may impeach, by 
evidence, the character of witnesses brought against him, and 
remark on their testimony, and the motives by which they and the 
prosecutor appear to have been actuated. Coarse and insulting 
language cannot, however, be tolerated. 

Should either party, in the course of their examination of the 
witnesses, or by bringing forward new ones for that purpose, intro- 
duce new matter, the opposite one has the right of calling other 
witnesses to rebut such new matter. 

The address (or defence) of the prisoner, prepared subsequent to 
the reception of all the testimony, is read by the prisoner, or if any 
cause should prevent his so doing, it may be, at the request of the 
prisoner, read by his counsel, the judge advocate, or a mihtary 
friend. 

The judge advocate, or the prosecutor, can always claim the right 
of replying to the defence of the prisoner, and the court will gene- 
rally grant a reasonable time for the preparation of it. When the 
reply has been read, the trial is closed. Should the prisoner have 
examined witnesses as to matter not touched upon in the course of 
the prosecution -, or should he have reflected upon the credibility 
of the prosecutor's evidence, the prosecutor is allowed to examine 



708 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

witnesses to the new matter, and for the re-establishment of the 
character of his witnesses. 

FINDING. 

829. The charges having been investigated by the production 
and examination of all the evidence which the parties have deemed 
necessary, it is now the business of the court to decide upon the 
question of guilt. 

It is necessary, however, before proceeding to this stage of the 
trial, that each and every allegation made against the prisoner 
should be fully inquired into; and this, too, entirely without refer- 
ence to the proof of any one item, which might even call for the 
uttermost sentence which a court martial can award, either against 
the life, or the commission of the offender; and so, too, must a dis- 
tinct judgment be pronounced upon every specification adduced in 
support of the charges. 

Every member should fully satisfy himself of the extent and 
value of the testimony on record ; and, for this purpose, a fair copy 
of the proceedings is laid upon the table, or read over by the judge 
advocate, for the convenience of reference, and to make certain, 
while the subject or particulars of the evidence is still fresh in the 
minds of the members, that such copy is a faithful transcript of the 
same. 

This is of importance when the case is intricate, or the testimony 
voluminous ; and it is also a very useful practice for the judge 
advocate, in such cases, to prepare an index, or short notes, of the 
evidence, in order that reference to the record may be made more 
easy. 

It is competent for the court at this stage of the proceedings, to 
call back a witness for the purpose of asking any particular question 
thought necessary; but the parties must be present during such 
further examination. Indeed, before the finding, the court can 
recall a witness at any time. 

830. The court having had sufficient time for a re-examination 
of the evidence, if necessary, and for deliberation and free discus- 
sion, the president, having ascertained that every member is ready 



COURTS MARTIAL. 709 

to give his opinion, signifies to the judge advocate to proceed. The 
latter then reads, in consecutive order, the specifications to each 
charge, and addresses each member, beginning with the youngest : 
" From the evidence in the matter now before you, how say you of 
the specification, or charge — is the prisoner guilty or not guilty?" 
The vote upon each specification of the charge having been given 
and recorded, the opinion on the charge is then given — and so on 
in succession for all the specifications and charges, which have been 
the subject of investigation. In order to avoid the exposure of 
each individual opinion as his vote is given, the members write 
upon slips of paper the opinion, guilty or not guilty^ and hand them 
to the judge advocate, who, after receiving every vote, arranges 
them, and announces the verdict. As the vote of each member is 
given, the judge advocate makes a minute of the same, which should 
be carefully retained by him, to meet the possible contingency of 
proceedings in the common law courts, touching the legality of the 
acts of the court martial. 

The majority of the voices determines the conviction or acquittal 
of the prisoner, except in such cases as when (upon conviction) the 
law absolutely, and without any discretion in the court, condemns 
him to suffer death. In all such cases, a two-third vote is necessary 
to conviction, and the record must explicitly state that two-thirds 
of the court concurred in the finding. 

Should it happen, by the organization of the court, or from the 
accident of sickness or death of any of the members, that there is 
an equality of votes upon the finding, the doubt must be resolved 
in favor of the prisoner, and he must have the benefit of acquittal. 

831. The degree of guilt of which the prisoner is found, or the 
extent to which the charge is proved, ought to be well defined and 
clearly expressed; and so, likewise, the mode of declaring the 
prisoner acquitted, is a matter of some importance. Acquittals 
which are characterized by the terms, lionorably ; most JtonorahJy ; 
fully ; or most fully ; should be employed when the nature of the 
charge makes them necessary; but in general, when no circum- 
stances exist which call for emphatic opinions, a simple verdict of 
60 



710 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

acquittal is tlie better formula. To declare that the charges are not 
jyrovcd is improper. 

In the deliberation of the conrt upon the finding to be declared, 
it is proper to observe the distinctions which may be made between 
the crime as alleged in the charge, and the degree of offence proved. 
A court martial, therefore, may, in some instances, find a prisoner 
guilty of the offence in a less degree than that stated. But a court 
martial, although empowered to find him guilty in a less degree, 
cannot find a higher degree of guilt than that alleged in the charge. 

The finding declared by a majority, or specific proportion of all 
the court, when the law, in particular offences, requires such, is the 
decision of the court, and the minority are bound by it. 

OF THE SENTENCE. 

832. The court, having determined the finding of innocence or 
guilt of the prisoner, proceed to the conclusion of their labors by 
pronouncing an acquittal, or affixing the punishment, according to 
the nature and degree of the offence. 

Whatever may have been the opinion of a member as to the 
finding of the court, he must, upon a conviction being declared by 
the legal number of votes, give his opinion as to the nature and 
degree of punishment, and apportion the same according to the 
degree of crime of which the majority have found the prisoner 
guilty. The minority then acts independently of their individual 
opinions, and award punishment according, and adequate, to the 
offence of the accused. If the prisoner has been convicted of a 
particular offence, for which punishment is prescribed by law, every 
member must vote the punishment which the law has prescribed. 
In cases not provided for by special penalty, it is of importance to 
the court to consider what kinds and degrees of punishment are 
legally applicable to the case, and none should be inflicted except 
such as are in accordance with the custom of war in like cases, or 
the common law of the land. 

833. In passing sentence, courts martial should be careful to 
employ clear and unambiguous language, so that the kind and degree 



COURTS MARTIAL. 711 

of punishment shall be set forth definitely and precisely; and the 
mode of inflicting capital punishment should be designated. The 
military laws do not say how a criminal, offending against such laws, 
shall be put to death, but leave it to the custom of war. Shooting 
or hanging is the method determined by such custom. A spy is 
generally hanged ; and mutiny, accompanied with loss of life, is 
punished by the same means. Desertion, disobedience of orders, 
or other military crimes, usually by shooting. 



CONFIRMATION OF SEN T E NCE — RE VI S I N. 

834. When the proceedings of a court martial are submitted to 
the ofl&cer ordering the same, for his confirmation or disapproval 
and orders, it becomes his duty to peruse, in the most careful manner, 
the record of the court, and to ascertain any error which may have 
been admitted. Or should the record be found perfect in all its 
parts, he is to signify his decision thereon, and give his orders 
accordingly. But if any mistake or error in the conduct of the 
trial be presented to view, the proceedings of the court may be sent 
back to them for revision. The officer who directs the court to re- 
convene, to reconsider its original opinion, points out, at the same 
time, the particular cause which makes a reconsideration necessary; 
and the- court is therefore bound to re-examine, with deliberation 
and care, the reasons upon which the former opinions rested. The 
principal cause for requiring courts martial to revise their judgments 
is when an insufficient or undue weight has been given to the testi- 
mony, and is supposed to arise from inadvertence, misconception of 
the law, or the custom of war ; or where an exorbitant, inadequate, 
or illegal punishment has been awarded. 

Every officer having authority to review the proceedings of courts 
martial, has power to suspend the execution of the sentence, to 
pardon or mitigate any punishment ordered by such court. He 
cannot, however, alter or commute the punishment, even with the 
consent of the party sentenced. 



712 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

OF THE JUDGE ADVOCATE. 

835. By the laws of the United States it is made the duty of the 
judge advocate to " prosecute in the name of the United States, but 
shall so far consider himself as counsel for the prisoner, after the 
said prisoner shall have made his plea, as to object to any leading 
question to any of the witnesses, or any question to the prisoner, the 
answer to which might tend to criminate himself; and administer to 
each member of the court, before they proceed upon any trial, the 
following oath, which shall also be taken by all members of the 
regimental and garrison courts martial." 

The charges upon which a prisoner is to be tried having been 
placed in the hands of the judge advocate, he is to ascertain what 
witnesses or evidence will be necessary, both for the prosecution and 
defence, and thereupon summon every person whose testimony may 
be required. This duty should be performed at the earliest period 
possible, to avoid any delay in the proceedings. He is to furnish 
the accused party with a copy of the charges as soon as possible, or 
ascertain if such has been transmitted to him from another source ; 
and should any alteration be made in the charges, the prisoner 
should be immediately apprized of it. 

Between the adjournment of one day, and the meeting on the 
next, the judge advocate prepares a fair copy of the procedings, 
which, upon the reassembling of the court, is read over. 

The business of the court having been concluded, the record of 
the proceedings is signed by the president of the court, and coun- 
tersigned by the judge advocate. 

836. The duties of a judge advocate before a court of inquiry, 
are in many respects the same as officiating before a general court 
martial, though of limited extent. 

A court of inquiry may be composed of from one to three officers, 
with a judge advocate, or suitable person as recorder, to reduce the 
proceedings and evidence to writing; all of whom are to be sworn 
according to a prescribed oath. (See 95th Article of War.) 

The judge advocate prepares the case for investigation. He sum- 
mons the necessary witnesses, and gives notice to the parties inter- 



General Order 

No 



COURTS MARTIAL. 713 

ested, as to the place and time of meeting. He swears the witnesses 
in the same way as they are sworn before a court martial, and he 
records the testimony and keeps the proceedings from day to day. 

The business of the court having been completed, the record will 
be authenticated by the signatures of the president and the judge 
advocate, and by the latter transmitted to the authority by which 
the court was convened. 

837. Form of order for convening a general court martial. 

Adjutant- GeneraVs Offi^ce^ 
Washington, Jan. — , 18 — . 
1 Urders, | 

A general court martial will assemble at , at 10 o'clock, 

A. M., the 15th instant, or as soon thereafter as practicable, for the 
trial of ' ; and such prisoners as may be brought before it. 

Detail for the court. 

1. Colonel A. B 1st Regiment of Infantry. 

2. Colonel CD 2d " " Cavalry. 

3. Major E.F 3d " " Artillery. 

4. Major G. H 5th " " Infantry. 

5. Captain L. M 1st "• "Dragoons. 

6. Captain N. 4th " " Infantry. 

7. Etc., etc., etc 

Captain P. S., of the 2d regiment of artillery, is appointed the 
judge advocate of the court. 

Should any of the officers named in the detail be prevented from 
attending at the time and place specified, the court will nevertheless 
proceed to, and continue the business before it, provided the number 
of members present be not less than the minimum prescribed by 
law; — the above being the greatest number \_wlien the court is 
composed of less than thirteen members'] that can be convened with- 
out manifest injury to the service. 

By command of Major-General S., 

S. C, Adjutant- General. 
60* 



714 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

838. Form of the proceedings of a general court martial. 

Proceedings of a General Court martial, convened at , by 

virtue of the following order, viz. : 

(Here insert the order?) 

— o'clock, A. M., Jan. Ibfh, IS — . 
The court met pursuant to the above order. Present : 

Colonel A. B 1st Regiment of Infantry. 

Colonel C. D 2d '' " Cavalry. 

Major E.F 3d " " Artillery. 

Major G-.H 5th " " Infantry. 

Captain L. M 1st " " Dragoons. 

Etc., etc 

Etc., etc ' 

Captain P. S., of the 2d regiment of artillery, judge advocate. 

Captain T. W., 8th regiment of infantry, the accused, also present. 

The judge advocate having read the order convening the court, 
asked Captain T. W. if he had any objection to any member named 
therein, to which he replied, — 

(If any challenge is tnadcy it must he now, and to one memher at 
a time.') 

The court was then duly sworn by the judge advocate, and the 
judge advocate was duly sworn by the presiding officer of the court, 
in the presence of the accused. 

{It IS at this stage of the proceedings that the accused makes his 
request for the privilege of introducing his counsel, and ivill also, if 
he desires it, state his reasons for postponement of the trial. These 
matters heing settled, the court proceeds.') 

The charges were read aloud by the judge advocate. Judge ad- 
vocate (addressing the accused), "Captain T. W., you have heard 
the charge, or charges, preferred against you ; how say you — guilty 
or not guilty ? " 

To which the accused. Captain T. W., pleaded as follows : — (The 
judge advocate here gives notice, that should there he any persons 
present in court, who have heen summoned as ivitnesses, they viust 
retire and ivait until called for.) 



COURTS MARTIAL. 715 

Captain D. N., 2d regiment of artillery, a witness on tlie part of 
the prosecution, was duly sworn. 

Question by the judge advocate. ? 

Answer. . 

_ Question. ? 

Answer. . 

Cross-examined by the accused. ? 

Answer. ^ . 

Question, ? 

Answer. ; — . 

Question by the court. ? 

Answer. . 

Question. ? 

Answer. . 



n 

K-^-examined by the judge advocate. ? 

Answer. , 

Question. • ? 

Answer. . 

(^The examination of the witness heing completed, his testimony is 
read over to him, and corrected if necessary — when the next witness 
is called. The judge advocate having presented all the evidence for 
the prosecution, states such fact, and announces that the prosecution 
is closed — when the accused enters upon the defence.') 

Lieutenant A. B., 3d Regiment of Infantry, a witness for the de- 
fence, was duly sworn. 

Question by the accused. ? 

Answer. . 

Question. ? 

Answer. . 

Cross-examined. 

Question by judge advocate. ? 

Answer. . 

Question. ? 

Answer. .. 

Question by the court. ? 

Answer. — 



716 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 

(^The evidence on both sides having been heard, the accused asks 
for time to prepare his defence.) 

The court adjourned to meet again at 10 o'clock, A. M., on the 
■ hist. 

10 o'clock, A. M., 18 — . 

The court met pursuant to adjournment. Present, Colonel A. B. j 
Colonel C. D. -, Major E. F. ; Major Gr. H. ; Captain J. M., etc., etc 
Captain P. Gr., judge advocate, and Captain T. "VV., the accused. 
The proceedings of yesterday were read over, when the accused, 
Captain T. W., presented and read (^or which was read by his 
counsel) the written defence (A.) appended to these proceedings. 

(^Should the Judge advocate intend to reply, he would notify the 
court, and ash for the requisite time for preparation.) 

The statements of the parties being thus in possession of the 
court, the court was cleared for deliberation; and having maturely 
considered the evidence adduced, find Captain T. W., of the 8th 
Kegiment of Infantry, as follows : 

Of the first specification of 1st charge, , Guilty. 

Of the second specification of 1st charge, , Not guilty. 

Of the third specification of 1st charge, , Guilty. 

Of the First charge, , Gruilty. 

Of the first specification of 2d charge, , Not guilty. 

Of the second specification of 2d charge, , Not guilty. 

Of the Second charge, , Not guilty. 

And the court do therefore sentence the said Captain T. W. of 

the 8th Regiment of Infantry, to -. 

(Signed) A. B., 

Colonel 1st Begiment of Infantry, and President of the C. M. 
(Signed) P. S., 

Judge advocate. 
There being no farther business before them, the court adjourned 
sine die. 

(Signed) A. B., 

Colonel 1st Begiment of Infantry, and President of the C. M 

(Signed) P. S., 

Judge advocate. 



MUSIC. 



17 



ARTICLE XYII 



MUSIC 



BEATS OF THE DRUM. 



8(>=»» 



M 1. The General, 



t d t t t t r t r t r 



4 4 4 4 DC 



No, 2. The Assejiibhj. 



80-«' 



f f f 



f f f 



V— ^-s.- 



^ — ^ — ^-^ — J, — j^ — ^ — : — '^ 



ffffff rfffff f 



m-^ 



f—W=^z 



S^-jp— ^=1^— ^ 



?3 



S^EBi^i 



v-v 



^=^=F=^ 



iVb. 3. To i!^e Co/bur. 



SO^*'* Fife, 



s^^igiggr^t^ 



Drum, f t 1 1 t t f t t f f 



f r 



f f f f 






718 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



No, 4. The Long Rod, 



s-=i 



No. 5. The Reveille, 



140=». Fife. 



| PPE£ 



±-d--T 



T-- 



~i 



Drum. t r r r r r 



TIZJ 



^ 



#-=:#zt=ti^^ 



sue: 



7 7 



T~7 



7 7 



iJiii^^^^^^g^ 



r r r r r 



ife^H^^^ 



f3E 



7 3 7 7 7 



7 7 7 3 7 



^P 



^ 



SEf 



tc 



r r r r r ^ r r r_ r 



HEE:-P- 



=F=F= 



7 S 7 7 7 7 



^f 



SS^ 



MUSIC. 



719 



J 



Slow Scotch. 



gn=^ '^iow iscotcn. 



ES 



S 



i?=E£i3EE£ 



^|g^ 



120=d 



Austrian. 



3s:- 



:^^^ 



3^fc 



^ 



d d d d dddddddd rt 



fe^P^ 



140>=°« Hessian. 

\i^ 



'^^^m^m 



Double Drag. 



d d d d 



&c. 
d d il d 



13: 



az=:^ 



P 



:?=fi: 



:^ 



Drum. 



:^^i 



720 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



60 



Dutch. 






I — ^ ~\ r — 



^i; 



:?=p: 



Drum. 

r t r t 



r r r 



?^=^ 



r~ 






^^^f^^^^ 



1Q0=-.9 Quick Scotch. 



-=£^f=gF^j' 



'^=i:F=i 



^^=^='^ 



&C. 



gzzi 



f 



t 



D. C. The first oartof the Reveille. 



.Fife. 



3— _£=i: 



JVo. 6. 7%« TVofjp. 




80=». 



3? 




eP2e:e^ 



S 



:^fi 



S 



?^ 



t t ft 



&c.. 
t f d t r 



=f: 



-w~^-w- 



'f^E^^. 



-^-9>-W 



MUSIC, 



721 



Fife. 



l^^ZH^ 



No. 7. TTie Retreat. 



Dnirn. r 



"^ \ ^- 



110=* 



-±wP^- 



v- 



^i=t^- 



^^^33^ 



EJ. 



'f— »T 



m 



r\ t 


d t t 


d t 


t 


d t 


t Volri. 


m~^~^~ 


— »-|» — p-: 


—f-f~ 


— 9- 


^— »~ 


— tp-~: 




^4=^=4-^ 


-M- 




,— ^ 


r- * 




^f±l!r»-rrj. 



: z r^i — I H T~i — ! f II • 



^ 



^3=^ 



t d t t d t t^ d t__l d d 



^~^T^ 



4—4 






d t t d t t (1 t t d t d t t 



-f— t 



FT i- I ,h — r~^- — i — czJLdii:^ I L ,h 



61 



2v 



722 MANUAL FOR Volunteers and militia 



m^^^^^m 



d t t d t t (1 



^ — f^ 



^^m 



ragr ^ r 7 r?- T— ^— jgr-^e-ri- 



■^ 



Lt^IZ— -^— - 



"»' s- 



J2_^ ^ 



m. 8. 7%€ Ta.'too. 



i 
80=ff Fife. 



fc=E 



SIIZE 



-(*-=i-^ 



SEP2: 



i^^b 



Drum, d f t d t d r f 



EIS^ 



Eg=»=F: 



-^ J- 



n 



^ ggps^^fep 



J d_ 

1^1 



^ 



^ r jr_ 



Fine. 



MUSIC 



723 



110=«' Quick Time. 



After the quick time begin the doubling. 



gQ_^ Common Time. 






1 
i 



SEE 



After this repeat the doubling. 



60= 



Dutch. 



W 



as 



140=» 



Double Quick Time. 



M 



^^Ie^SI 



3F 



53E 



m 



After the three rolls repeat doubling to the fine. 



'24 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA, 



No. 9. Drummer^s Call. 




r f f r f f r f f 



-^^fop^pz^z^^ifi fp '^ \ 



a-^-i — -f-^-^ 9-^- 

44 4 



i — i_i J J — -—rz: — ' — litir 



No. 10. Come for Ordo's, 

r\ _r t_ ±_t__ _t 

First Sergeants- X^f-^: :zizpz|zgZp~f~^Zp;lFF: 



3 times over. 



Corporals. 



t 3 times over. 



Sergeants. A^-f^| ^-^4 -^-|^F^= 



^ 



mM 



3 ti;ne9 over. 



.^c^. 11. ITieBoll. 



r_ r r x 

— ^— ^ P ^ 



MUSIC. 



'25 



SOUNDS FOR THE BUGLE. 



No. 1. 2%e General. 



I4()=<d Presto. 



F~-F==F 



^^S^^ii 



^=F=.|^P^ig 



Hi: 



»: 



V"^r 



in 



S: 



?^ 



ni^iPi 



80= 



J 



iVb. 2. T/ie Assembly. 




^^=^ 



I 



:iE3z^ 



-'r-h 



P^i 



-g~a~ji~g~e- 



I I i 1^^ 



^^ 



I 



^ ^|g~ |p~»~g ~.^_C-ft: 



I I I I I r 



^:3ES: 



:o — f=: 



I 



61* 



726 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



No. 3. To the Colour^ 



80=». 



^ 



szi: 






P?==P=FF=^ 



^V^-bi^^-^-^ 



\ — ^- 



e^eIS^ 



^g£gg=|;pEE^^E^ pgg^i+fe :| 




E±:Ea^=3 



ii 



^S^feFE 



i 



2z:zs=c 



,.1 U_™_„»^ ^—EL. 



D.C. 



No. 4. 7%e i2et«7/e. 



Ii0=* 






^^ ^l^ g^t il ^^ 



3:as^ssE^^^saiffi 



i^^i 



^ 



ifzt 



I 



DC 



MUSIC. 



727 



76=J 



No. 5. 7%e Retreat, 



-m 



Sifjp^Si^iS_^ 



^Pl= 



^5=5- -*i- 



iVo. 6. 2%e Tattoo. 



90=J 



:^"=e: 



-<r 



m 



s 



SH=f 



«/^^ 



—a il -r^r^l-^l-rn-T gx: 



te 



b?+f±^ 



SJ3=ii 



Sa^a^^^fef 



igSl 



f^ 



/-fc-rP 



g?^ 



^-e"- 



4-4 



rj— r 



PfeESE^ElE 






:3?i3 



728 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA. 



No, 7. 'Come for Orders. 



First Sergeants. 



I5=: 



i^sisiiifP 



Scrsreants. 






'M~W 



^1 



Coi-pnrals, 



:iX3 



S: 



?igJ 



i\ro. 8. Deploy as Skirmishers. 



110=# Allegro. 



ilis^its^i^^SsiS 



ieo=«. 



iVb. 9. Forward March, 



i^^^^g^ 



^ 



^=«i 



1 — ^ 






:__:[- 



M, 10. Halt 



g^^_ r^ 






i=5=i-zizj: 



MUSIC. 



729 



ioa-< 



No, 11. March in Retreat. 



i^S 



-9-fi-9: 



PS 



:Fe^ 



EEe^EElfeHfefes 



:^5= 



1 



j iVb. 12. ikfa?-cA &^ /Ae /i%;?/ Flank. 

•r^ 1 — ^ 



^r^ 



i^SiiigSS 



rnci^iq: 



i\^o. 13. March by the Left Flank. 



IGO=e. 



' ^\ ]^~ j_ } J 



r^Z- _^ — g! — ^ — 



^■--W^- 



i 



lis^ 






iVb. 14. Eally by Fours. 



130=5 Allpgro. 






^E^^^ 



r^_=^,=r_r 



iVb. 15. Eally by Sections. 



13a =# Allegro. 

a4 



^sSfc^irpgp^PPIgppi 



" I — I — r-i- 



m. 16. Rally by Platoons. 



1 L0=& Allegro. 









730 MANUAL FOR VOLUNTEERS AND MILITIA 
I No. 17. Ealli/ on the Reserve. 



00=^. 



=g |EEJ g= E ^f^Fi s 



i 



p=^=^ 



f r j» 



P^fP^^ 



^ 



1 



iVb. 18. /jla/Zy on the Battalion. 



90 ©• 



S 



rr?; 



?= 



•g~ ^— g- 



f-k 



^^ 



100= « 



i^S^^^P^^i^ff 



iVo. 19. i^oo/s and Saddles. 



Allegro. t 



^ p^^^ig^ig^l 



No. 20. To iyor.se. 



Prestissimo, 






-^ 



IB 



iVb. 21. 7%e CAar^e. 



Vivace. 



No. 22. A7flJ/e Ca/7. 



Al'estro, 



T s L 






it 



l^^^^^^plpfR 



APPENDIX 



AKTICLES OF WAK. 

AN ACT FOR ESTABLISHING RULES AND ARTICLES FOR THE GOVERNMENT OF 
THE ARMIES OF THE UNITED STATES.* 

Section 1. Be it enacted, hy the Senate and House of Representatives of the 
United States of America, in Congress assembled, That, from and after the pass- 
ing of this act, the following shall be the rules and articles by which the 
armies of the United States shall be governed: 

Article 1. Every officer now in the army of the United States shall, in 
six months from the passing of this act, and every officer who shall hereafter 
be appointed shall, before he enters on the duties of his office, subscribe these 
rules and regulations. 

Art. 2. It is earnestly recommended to all officers and soldiers diligently 
to attend divine service ; and all officers who shall behave indecently or irre- 
verently at any place of divine worship shall, if commissioned officers, be 
brought before a general court martial, there to be publicly and severely re- 
primanded by the president ; if non-commissioned officers or soldiers, every 
person so offending shall, for his first offence, forfeit one-sixth of a dollar, 
to be deducted out of his next pay ; for the second offence, he shall not only 
forfeit a like sum, but be confined twenty-four hours ; and for every like 
offence, shall suffer and pay in like manner; which money, so forfeited, shall 
be applied, by the captain or senior officer of the troop or company, to the 
use of the sick soldiers of the company or troop to which the offender be- 
longs. 

Art. 3. Any non-commissioned officer or soldier who shall use any pro- 
fane oath or execration, shall incur the penalties expressed in the foregoing 
article ; and a commissioned officer shall forfeit and pay, for each and every 
such offence, one dollar, to be applied as in the preceding article. 

Art. 4. Every chaplain commissioned in the army or armies of the United 
States, who shall absent himself from the duties assigned him (excepting in 
cases of sickness or leave of absence), shall, on conviction thereof before a 
court martial, be fined not exceeding one month's pay, besides the loss of his 
pay during his absence; or be discharged, as the said court martial shall 
judge proper. 

Art 5. Any officer or soldier who shall use contemptuous or disrespectful 
words against the President of the United States, against the Vice-President 

* These rules and articles, with the exceptions indicated by the notes, annexed to articles 
20, 65, and 87, remain unaltered, and in force at present. 

(731) 



732 APPENDIX. 

thereof, against the Congress of the United States, or against the Chief 
Magistrate or Legislature of any of the United States, in which he may be 
quartered, if a commissioned officer, shall be cashiered, or otherwise pun- 
ished, as a court martial shall direct ; if a non-commissioned officer or soldiei% 
he shall suffer such punishment as shall be inflicted on him by the sentence 
of a court martial. 

Art. 6, Any officer or soldier who shall behave himself with contempt or 
disrespect towards his commanding officer, shall be punished, according to 
the nature of his offence, by the judgment of a court martial. 

Art. 7. Any officer or soldier who shall begin, excite, cause, or join in, 
any mutiny or sedition, in any troop or company in the service of the United 
States, or in any party, post, detachment, or guard, shall suffer death, or 
such other punishment as by a court martial shall be inflicted. 

Art. 8. Any officer, non-commissioned officer, or soldier, who, being pre- 
sent at any mutiny or sedition, does not use his utmost endeavor to suppress 
the same, or, coming to the knowledge of any intended mutiny, does not, 
without delay, give information thereof to his commanding officer, shall be 
punished by the sentence of a court martial with death, or otherwise, accord- 
ing to the nature of his offence. 

Art. 9. Any officer or soldier who shall strike his superior officer, or draw 
or lift up any weapon, or offer any violence against him, being in the execu- 
tion of his office, on any pretence whatsoever, or shall disobey any lawful 
command of his superior officer, shall suffer death, or such other punishment 
as shall, according to the nature of his offence, be inflicted upon him by the 
sentence of a court martial. 

Art. 10. Every non-commissioned officer or soldier, who shall enlist him- 
self in the service of the United States, shall, at the time of his so enlisting, 
or within six days afterward, have the Articles for the government of the 
armies of the United States read to him, and shall, by the officer who en- 
listed him, or by the commanding officer of the troop or companj' into which 
he was enlisted, be taken before the next justice of the peace, or chief magis- 
trate of any city or town corporate, not being an officer of the army, or 
where recourse cannot be had to the civil magistrate, before the judge ad- 
vocate, and in his presence shall take the following oath or affirmation : " I, 
A. B., do solemnly swear or affirm (as the case may be), that I will bear 
true allegiance to the United States of America, and that I will serve them 
honestly and faithfully against all their enemies or opposers whatsoever ; 
and observe and obey the orders of the President of the United States, and 
the orders of the officers appointed over me, according to the Rules and Ar- 
ticles for the government of the armies of the United States." Which jus- 
tice, magistrate, or judge advocate, is to give to the officer a certificate, sig- 
fying that the man enlisted did take the said oath or affirmation. 

Art. 11. After a non-commissioned officer or soldier shall have been duly 
enlisted and sworn, he shall not be dismissed the service without a discharge 
in writing ; and no discharge granted to him shall be sufficient which is not 
signed by a field officer of the regiment to which he belongs, or com- 
manding officer, where no field officer of the regiment is present; and no dis- 
charge shall be given to a non-commissioned officer or soldier before his term 
of service has expired, but by order of the President, the Secretary of War, 
the commanding officer of a department, or the sentence of a general court 
martial, nor shall a commissioned officer be discharged the service but by 
order of the President of the United States, or by sentence of a general court 
martial. 

Art. 12. Every colonel, or other officer commanding a regiment, troop, or 



ARTICLES OF WAR. 733 

company, and actually quartered with it, may give furloughs to non-com- 
missioned officers or soldiers, in such numbers, and for so long a time, as he 
sha'l judge to be mo<t consistent with the good of the service; and a captain, 
or other inferior officer, commanding a troop or company, or in any garrison, 
fort, or barrack of the United States (his field officer being absent), may 
give rurh)ughs to non-C(>inmis-ii)ned officers or soldiers, for a time not ex- 
ceeding twenty days in six months, but not to more than two persons to be 
absent at the same time, excepting some extraordinary occasion should re- 
quiie it. 

AiiT. 13. At every muster, the commanding officer of each regiment, 
troop, or company, there present, shall give to the commissary of musters, 
or other officer who musters the said regiment, troop or company, certificates 
signel by himself, signifying how long such officers, as shall not appear at 
tlie said muster, have been absent, and the reason of their absence. In like 
manner, the commanding officer of every troop or company sliall give certifi- 
cates, signifying the reasons of the absence of the non-commissioned officers 
and private soldiers; which reasons and time of absence shall be inserted in 
the muster rolls, opposite the names of the respective absent officers and 
soldiers. The certificates shall, together with the muster rolls, be remitted 
by the commissary of musters, or other officer mustering, to the Department 
of War, as speedily as the distance of the place will admit. 

Art, 14. Every officer who shall be convicted before a general court mar- 
tial of having signed a false certificate relating to the absence of either officer 
or private soldier, or relative to his or their pay, shall be cashiered. 

Akt. 15. Every officer who shall knowingly make a false muster of man 
or horse, and every officer or commissary of musters who shall willingly 
sign, direct, or allow the signing of muster-rolls wherein such false muster 
is contained, shall, upon proof made thereof, by two witnesses, before a 
general couit martial, be cashiered, and shall be thereby utterly disabled to 
have or hold any office or employment in the service of the United States. 

Art. 16. Any commissary of musters, or other officer, who shall be con- 
victed of having taken money, or other thing, by way of gratification, on 
mustering any regiment, troop, or company, or on signing muster-rolls, shall 
be displaced from his office, and shall be thereby utterly disabled to have or 
hold any office or employment in the service of the United States. 

Atlt. 17. Any officer who shall presume to muster a person as a soldier 
who is not a soldier, shall be deemed guilty of having made a false muster, 
and shall suffer accordingly. 

Art. 18. Every officer who shall knowingly make a false return to the 
Department of War, or to any of his superior officers, authorized to call for 
such returns, of the state of the regiment, troop, or companj' or garrison, 
under his command ; or of the arms, ammunition, clothing, or other stores 
thereunto belonging, shall, on conviction thereof before a court martial, be 
cashiered. 

Art. 19. The commanding officer of every regiment, troop, or independent 
company, or garrison of the United States, shall, in the beginning of every 
month, remit, through the proper channels, to the Department of War, an 
exact return of the regiment, troop, independent company, or garrison, 
under liis command, specifying the names of the officers then absent from 
their posts, with the leasons for and the time of their absence. And any 
officer who shall be convicted of having, through neglect or design, omitted 
.sending such returns, shall be punished, according to the nature of his crime, 
by the judgment of a general court martial. 

62 



734 APPENDIX. 

Art. 20. All officers and soldiers who have received pay, or have been 
duly enlisted in the service of the United States, and shall be convicted of 
having deserted the same, shall suffer death, or such other punishment us, 
by sentence of a court martial, shall be inflicted. i 

Art. 21. Any non-commissioned officer or soldier who shall, without leave 
from his commanding officer, absent himself from his troop, company, or 
detachment, shall, upon being convicted thereof, be punished according to 
the nature of his offence, at the discretion of a court martial. 

Art. 22. No non-commissioned officer or soldier shall enlist himself in any 
other regiment, troop, or company, without a regular discharge from the 
regiment, troop, or company in which he last served, on the penalty of being 
reputed a deserter, and suffering accordingly. And in case any officer shall 
knowingly receive and entertain such non-commissioned officer or soldier, 
or shall not, after his being discovered to be a deserter, immediately confine 
him, and give notice thereof to the corps in which he last served, the said 
officer shall, by a court martial, be cashiered. 

Art. 23. Any officer or soldier who shall be convicted of having advised 
or persuaded any other officer or soldier to desert the service of the United 
States, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be inflicted upon 
him by the sentence of a court martial. 

Art. 24. No officer or soldier shall use any reproachful or provoking 
speeches or gestures to another, upon pain, if an officer, of being put in 
arrest; if a soldier, confined, and of asking pardon of the party offended, in 
the presence of his commanding officer. 

Art. 25. No officer or soldier shall send a challenge to another officer or 
soldier, to fight a duel, or accept a challenge if sent, upon pain, if a com- 
missioned officer, of being cashiered ; if a non-commissioned officer or 
soldier, of suffering corporeal punishment, at the discretion of a court 
martial. 

Art. 26. If any commissioned or non-commissioned officer commanding a 
guard shall knowingly or willingly suffer any person whatsoever to go forth 
to fight a duel, he shall be punished as a challenger; and all seconds, pro- 
moters, and carriers of challenges, in order to duels, shall be deemed prin- 
cipals, and be punished accordingly. And it shall be the duty of every 
officer commanding an army, regiment, company, post, or detachment, who 
is knowing to a challenge being given or accepted by any officer, non-com 
missioned officer, or soldier, under his command, or has reason to believe 
the same to be the case, immediately to arrest and bring to trial such 
offenders. 

Art. 27. All officers, of what condition soever, have power to part and 
quell all quarrels, frays, and disorders, though the persons concerned should 
belong to another regiment, troop, or company; and either to order officers 
into arrest, or non-commissioned officers or soldiers into confinement, until 
their proper superior officers shall be acquainted therewith ; and whosoever 
shall refuse to obey such officer (though of an inferior rank), or shall draw 
his sword upon him, shall be punished at the discretion of a general court 
martial. 

Art. 28. Any officer or soldier who shall upbraid another for refusing a 
challenge, shall himself be punished as a challenger; and all officers and 
soldiers are hereby discharged from any disgrace or opinion of disadvantage 
which might arise from their having refused to accept of challenges, as they 

» Modified by act of 29th May, 1830. 



ARTICLES OF WAR. 735 

will only have acted in obedience to the laws, and done their duty as good 
soldiers who subject themselves to discipline. 

Art. 29. No sutler shall be permitted to sell any kind of liquors or vic- 
tuals, or to keep their houses or shops open for the entertainment of sol- 
diers, after nine at night, or before the beating of the reveille, or upon 
Sundays, during divine service or sermon, on the penalty of being dismissed 
from all future sutliug. 

Art. 80. All officers commanding in the field, forts, barracks, or garri- 
sons of the United States, are hereby required to see that the persons per- 
mitted to suttle shall supply the soldiers with good and wholesome provisions, 
or other articles, at a reasonable price, as they shall be answerable for their 
neglect. 

Art. 31. No officer commanding in any of the garrisons, forts, or barracks 
of the United States, shall exact exorbitant prices for houses or stalls, let 
out to sutlers, or connive at the like exactions in others ; nor by his own 
authority, and for his private advantage, lay any duty or imposition upon, 
or be interested in, the sale of any victuals, liquors, or other necessaries of 
life brought into the garrison, fort, or barracks, for the use of the soldiers, 
on the penalty of being discharged from the service. 

Art. 32. Every officer commanding in quarters, garrisons, or on the 
march, shall keep good order, and to the utmost of his power, redress all 
abuses or disorders which may be committed by any officer or soldier under 
his command; if, upon complaint made to him of officers or soldiers beating 
or otherwise ill-treating any person, or disturbing fairs or markets, or of 
committing any kind of riots, to the disquieting of the citizens of the United 
States, he, the said commander, who shall refuse or omit to see justice done 
to the ofi'ender or offenders, and reparation made to the party or parties 
injured, as far as part of the offender's pay shall enable him or them, shall, 
upon proof thereof, be cashiered, or otherwise punished, as a general court 
martial shall direct. 

Art. 33. When any commissioned officer or soldier shall be accused of a 
capital crime, or of having used violence, or committed any offence against 
the person or property of any citizen of any of the United States, such as is 
punishable by the known laws of the land, the comu'.anding officer and officers 
of every regiment, troop, or company, to which the person or persons so 
accused shall belong, are hereby required, upon application duly made by, 
or in behalf of the party or parties injured, to use their utmost endeavors to 
deliver over such accused person or persons to the civil magistrate, and like^ 
wise to be aiding and assisting to the officers of justice in apprehending aud 
securing the person or persons so accused, in order to bring him or them to 
trial. If any commanding officer or officers shall wilfully neglect, or shall 
refuse, upon the application aforesaid, to deliver over such accused persoa 
or persons to the civil magistrates, or to be aiding and assisting to the officeis 
of justice in apprehending such person or persons, the officer or officers so 
offending shall be cashiered. 

Art. 34, If any officer shall think himself wronged by his colonel, or the 
commanding officer of the regiment, and shall, upon due application being 
made to him, be refused redress, he may complain to the general command- 
ing in the state or territory where such regiment shall be stationed, in order 
to obtain justice; who is hereby required to examine into said complaint, 
aud take proper measures for redressing the wrong complained of, and trans- 
mit, as soon as possible, to the Department of War, a true state of such com- 
plaint, with the proceedings had thereon. 

Art. 35. If any inferior officer or soldier shall think himself wronged by 



736 APPENDIX. 

his captain or other officer, he is to complain thereof to the commaTic?in^' 
officer of the regiment, who is lierehy vequired to summon a rejiinifnttl 
coui-t martial, for the doing justice to the coiuplninatit : froni whicli regi- 
mental court martial either p;irry may. if he thinks himself still apgiivMed, 
appeal to a general court martial. But if, upon a scconii hearing, the nppeal 
ehall appe;ii* vexatious and groundless, the persdu so appealing slinll be 
punisheil at the discretion of the s^iid court martial. 

.Art. oO. Any commissioned officei-, store-l'Cceper, or comniissarv, ulm 
shall be convicted at a general coui-t martial of iiaving sold, wiiliout a pi-o- 
per order for that purpose, emhrzzled. misapplied, or wilfully, or through 
neglect, suffered any of the provisions, ftraize, arms, clothing, ammunition, 
or other military stoies belonging to the United States to be spoile<l or 
damaged, sliall, at his own expense, make good the loss oi- damage, and shall, 
moreover, forfeit all his pay, and be dismissed from the service. 

Art. 37. Any non-commissioned officer or soldier who shall be convicted 
at a regimental court martial of having sold, or designedly or through neglect, 
wasted the ammunition delivered out to him, to be employed in the service 
of tlie United States, shall be punisiied at the discretion of such court. 

Art. 38. Every non-commissioned officer or soldier who shall be convicted 
before a court martial of having sold, lost, or spoiled, through neglect, his 
horse, arnis, clothes, or accoutrements, sliall undergo such weekly stoppages 
(not exceeding the half of his pay) as such court martial shall judge suffi- 
cient, for repairing the loss or damage ; ami shall suffer confinement, or such 
other corporeal punishment as his crime shall deserve. 

Art. 39. Evei-y officer "who shall be convicted before a court martial of 
having embezzled or misapplied any money with which he may have been 
intrusted, for the payment of the men under his command, or for enlisting 
men into the service, or for other purposes, if a commissioned officer, shall 
be casliiei-ed, and compelled to refund the money; if a non-commissioned 
officer, shall be reduced to the ranks, be put under stoppages until the money 
be made good, and suffer such corporeal punishment as such court martial 
shall direct. 

Art. 40. Every captain of a troop or coinpany is charged with the arms, 
accoutrements, ammunition, clothing, or other warlike stores belonging to 
the troop or company under his command, which he is to be accountable for 
to his colonel in case of their being lost, spoiled, or damaged, not by un- 
avoidable accidents, or on actual service. 

Art. 41. All non-commissioned officers and soldiers who shall be found 
one mile from the camp without leave, in writing, from their commanding 
officer, shall suffer such punishment as shall be inflicted upon them by the 
sentence of a court martial. 

Art. 42. No officer or soldier shall lie out of his quarters, garrison, or 
camp without leave from his superior officer, upon penalty of being punished 
according to the nature of his offence, by the sentence of a court martial. 

Art. 43. Every non-commissioned officer and soldier shall retire to his 
quarters or tent at the beating of the retreat; in default of which he shall 
be punisned according to the nature of his offence. 

Art. 44. No officer, non-commissioned officer, or soldier shall fail in repair- 
ing, at the tin:ie fixed, to the place of parade, of exercise, or other rendezvous 
appointed by his commanding officer, if not prevented by sickness or some 
other evident necessity, or shall go from the said place of rendezvous without 
leave from his commanding officer, before he shall be regularly dismissed or 
relieved, on the penalty of being punished, according to the nature of hie 
offence, by the sentence of a court martial. 



ARTICLES OF WAR. 7o7 

Art. 45. Any commissioned officer who shall be found drunk on his guard, 
party, or other duty, shall be cashiered. Any non-commissioned officer or 
soldier so offending shall suffer such corporeal punishment as shall be inflicted 
by the sentence of a court martial. 

Art. 46. Any sentinel who shall be found sleeping upon his post, or shall 
leave it before he shall be regularly relieved, shall suffer death, or such 
other punishment as shall be inflicted by the sentence of a court martial. 

AuT. 47. No soldier belonging to any I'egiment, troop, or company shall 
hire another to do his duty for him, or be excused from duty but in cases of 
sickness, disability, or leave of absence; and every such soldier found guilty 
of hiring his duty, as also the party so hired to do another's duty, shall be 
punished at the discretion of a regimental court martial. 

Art. 48. And every non-commissioned officer conniving at such hiring of 
duty aforesaid, shall be reduced ; and every commissioned officer knowing 
and allowing such ill practices in the service, shall be punished by the judg- 
ment of a general court martial. 

Art. 49. Any officer belonging to the service of the United States, who, 
by discharging of firearms, drawing of swords, beating of drums, or by any 
other means whatsoever, shall occasion false alarms in. camp, garrison, or 
quarters, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be ordered 
by the sentence of a general court martial. 

Art. 50, Any officer or soldier who shall, without urgent necessity, or 
without the leave of his superior officer, quit his guard, platoon, or division, 
shall be punished, according to the nature of his offence, by the sentence of 
a court martial. 

Art. 51. No officer or soldier shall do violence to any person who brings 
provisions or other necessaries to the camp, garrison, or quarters of the 
forces of the United States, employed in any parts out of the said States, 
vipon pain of death, or such other punishment as a court-martial shall direct. 

Art. 52. Any officer or soldier who shall misbehave himself before the 
enemy, run away, or shamefully abandon any fort, post, or guard which he 
or they may be commanded to defend, or speak words inducing others to do 
the like, or shall cast away his arms and ammunition, or who shall quit his 
post or colors to plunder and pillage, every such offender, being duly convicted 
thereof, shall suffer death, or such other punishment as shall be ordered by 
the sentence of a general court martial. 

Art. 53. Any person belonging to the armies of the United States who 
shall make known the watchword to any person who is not entitled to receive 
it according to the rules and discipline of war, or shall presume to give a 
parole or watchword different from what he received, shall suffer death, or 
such other punishment as shall be ordered by the sentence of a general court 
martial. 

Art. 54. All officers and soldiers are to behave themselves orderly in 
quarters and on their march; and whoever shall commit any waste or spoil, 
either in walks of trees, parks, warrens, fish-ponds, houses, or gardens, 
corn-fields, enclosures of meadows, or shall maliciously destroy any property 
whatsoever belonging to the inhabitants of the United States, unless by 
order of the then commander-in-chief of the armies of the said States, shall 
(besides such penalties as they are hable to by law), be punished according 
to the nature and degree of the offence, by the judgment of a regimental or 
general court martial. 

Art. 55. Whosoever, belonging to the armies of the United States in 
foreign parts, shall force a safeguard, shall suffer death. 

Art. 56. Whosoever shall relieve the enemy with money, victuals, or am- 
62* 2w 



738 APPENDIX. 

munition, or shall knowingly harbor or protect an enemy, shall suffer death, 
or such other puniahinent as slmll be ordered by the sentence of a court 
martial. 

Art. 57. Whosoever shall be convicted of holding correspondence with, or 
giving intelligence to, the enemy, either directly or indirectly, shall suffer 
death, or such other puni.'shnient as shall be ordered by the sentemic of a 
court niaiti;il. 

Akt. 58. All public stores taken in the enemy's camp, towns, forts, or 
magazines, ■wh.ether of artillery, ammunitio!i, clotliitig, forage, or provisions, 
shall be secured for tlie service of the United States; fur the neglect of 
which the commanding officer is to be answerable. 

Art. 59. If any Commander of any garrison, fortress, or post shall be 
compelled, by the officers and soldiers under his command, to give up to the 
enemy, or to abandon it, the commisi-ioned officers, non-commissioned 
officers or soldiers, who shall be convicted of having so oifended, shall suffer 
death, or such other punishment as shall be inflicted upon them by the sen- 
tence of a court martial. 

Art. go. Ail sutlers and retainers to the camp, and all persons Avhatsoever, 
serving -with the armies of the United States in the field, though not 
enlisted soldiers, are to be subject to orders, according to the rules and dis- 
cipline of war. 

Art. G1. Officers having brevets or commissions of a prior date to those 
of the regiment in which they serve, may take place in courts martial and 
on detachments, when composed of different corp-, according to tlie ratdvS 
given tiiem in their brevets or dates of tlieir former commissions; but in the 
3'egiment, troop, or company to which such officers belong, the}' shall do 
duty and take rank both in courts martial and on detachments which shall 
be composed of their own corps, according to the commissions by which they 
are mustei-ed in the said corps. 

Art. G2. If, upon marches, guards, or in quarters, different corps of the 
army shall happen to join, or do duty together, the officer highest in rank 
of the line of the army, marine corps, or militia, by commission, there on 
duty or in quarters, shall command the whole, anil give orders for what is 
needful to the service, unless otherwise specially directed by the President 
of the United States, according to the nature of the case. 

Art. 63. The functions of the engineers being generally confined to the 
most elevated branch of military science, they are not to assume, nor are 
they subject to be ordered on any duty beyond the line of their immediate 
profession, except by the special order of the President of the United States; 
but they are to receive every mark of respect to which their rank in the 
army may entitle them respectively, and are liable to be transferred, at the 
discretion of the President, from one corps to another, regard being paid to 
rank. 

Abt. 64. General courts martial may consist of any number of commis- 
sioned officers, fi-om five to thirteen, inclusively: but they shall not consist 
of less than thirteen where that number can be convened without manifest 
i;ijary to the service. 

'art. 65.^ Any general officer commanding an army, or colonel command- 
ing a separate department, may appoint general courts martial whenever 
necessary. But no sentence of a court martial shall be carried into execu- 
tion until after the whole proceedings shall have been laid before the officer 



Modified by »et of 29th May, 1830. 



ARTICLES OF WAR 



'39 



ordering the same, or the officer commanding the troops for the time being; 
neither shall any sentence of a general court martial, in the time of peace, 
extemling to the loss of life, or the dismission of a commissioned officer, or 
whicli sh;.ll, either in time of peace or war, respect a general officer, be car- 
ried into execution, until after the whole proceedings shall have been trans- 
mifed to tie Secretary of War, to be laid before the President of the United 
Slates for his confirmation or dis^ppi-oval, and orders in the case. All other 
sentences may be coutivnied and executed by the officer ordering tlie court 
to assemble, or the commanding officer for the time being, as the case 
may be. 

Art. 66. Every officer commanding a regiment or corps may appoint, for 
his own regiment or corps, courts martial, to consist of three commissioned 
officers, for the trial and punishment of offences not capital, and decide 
upon their sentences. For the same purpose, all officers commanding any 
of tlie garrisons, forts, barracks, or other places where the troops consist of 
different corps, may assemble courts martial, to consist of three commis- 
sioned officers, and decide upon their sentences. 

Art. 67. No garrison or re.uimental court martial shall have the power to 
try capital cases or commissioned officers; neither shall they inflict a fine 
exceeding one month's pay, nor imprison, nor put to hard labor, any non- 
commissioned officer or soldier for a longer time than one month. 

Akt. 68. Whenever it may be found convenient and necessary to the public 
s^eivice, the officers of the marines shall be associated with the officers of the 
land forces, for the purpose of holding courts martial, and trying offenders 
belonging to either: and, in such cases, the orders of the senior officer of 
either corps who may be present and duly authorized, shall be received and 
obeyed. 

Art. 69. The judge advocate, or some person deputed by him, or by the 
general, or officer commanding the arm}', detachment, or garrison, shall pro- 
secute in the name of the United States, but shall so far consider himself as 
counsel for the prisoner, after the said prisoner shall have made his plea, as 
to object to any leading question to any of the witnesses, or any question to 
the prisoner, the answer to which might tend to criminate himself; and ad- 
minister to each member of the court, before they proceed upon any trial, 
the following oath, which shall also be taken by all members of the regimental 
and garrison courts martial : 

'•You, A. B., do swear that you will well and truly try and determine, 
according to evidence, the matter now before you, between the United States 
of America and the prisoner to be tried, and that you will duly administer 
justice, according to the provisions of 'An act establishing Rules and Articles 
for the government of the armies of the United States,' without partiality, 
favor, or affection ; and if any doubt should arise, not explained by said 
Articles, according to your conscience, the best of your understanding, and 
the custom of war in like cases ; and you do further swear that you will not 
divulge the sentence of the court until it shall be published by the proper 
authority ; neither will you disclose or discover the vote or opinion of any 
particular member of the court martial, unless required to give evidence 
thereof, as a witness, by a court of justice, in a due course of law. So help 
you God." 

And as soon as the said oath shall have been administered to the respec- 
tive members, the president of the court shall administer to the judge advo- 
cate, or person officiating as such, an oath in the following words : 

"You, A. B., do swear, that you will not disclose or discover the vote or 
opinion of any particular member of the court martial, unless required to 



740 APPENDIX. 

give evidence thereof, as a witness, by a court of justice, in due course of 
law; nor divulge the sentence of the court to any but the proper authority, 
until it shall be duly disclosed by the same. So help you God." 

Art. 70. When a prisoner, arraigned before a general court martial, shall, 
from obstinacy and deliberate design, stand mute, or answer foreign to the 
purpose, the court may proceed to trial and judgment as if the prisoner had 
regularly pleaded not guilty. 

Art. 71. When a member shall be challenged by a prisoner, he must state 
his cause of challenge, of which the court shall, after due deliberation, de- 
termine the relevancy or validity, and decide accordingly ; and no challenge 
to more than one member at a time shall be received by the court. 

Art. 72. All the members of a court martial are to behave with decency 
and calmness; and in giving their votes are to begin with the youngest in 
commission. 

Art. 73, All persons who give evidence before a court martial are to be 
examined on oath or affirmation, in the following form : 

"You swear, or affirm (as the case may be), the evidence you shall give 
in the cause now in hearing shall be the truth, the whole truth, and nothing 
but the truth. So help you God." 

Art. 74. On the trials of cases not capital, before courts martial, the de- 
position of witnesses, not in the line or staff of the army, may be taken 
before some justice of the peace, and read in evidence : provided the prose- 
cutor and person accused are present at the taking the -same, or are duly 
notified thereof. 

Art. 75. No officer shall be tried but by a general court martial, nor by 
officers of an inferior rank, if it can be avoided. Nor shall any proceedings 
of trials be carried on, excepting between the hours of eight in the morn- 
ing and three in the afternoon, excepting in cases which, in the opinion of 
the officer appointing the court martial, require immediate example. 

Art. 76. No person whatsoever shall use any menacing words, signs, or 
gestures, in presence of a court martial, or shall cause any disorder or riot, 
or disturb their proceedings, on the penalty of being punished at the discre- 
tion of the said court martial. 

Art. 77. Whenever any officer shall be charged with a crime, he shall be 
arrested and. confined in his barracks, quarters, or tent, and deprived of his 
sword by the commanding officer. And any officer who shall leave his con- 
finement before he shall be set at liberty by his commanding officer, or by a 
superior officer, shall be cashiered. 

Art. 78. Non-commissioned officers and soldiers, charged with crimes, 
shall be confined until tried by a court martial, or released by proper au- 
thority. 

Art. 79. No officer or soldier who shall be put in arrest shall continue in 
confinement more than eight days, or until such time as a court martial can 
be assembled. 

Art. 80. No officer commanding a guard, or provost-marshal, shall refuse 
to receive or keep any prisoner committed to his charge by an officer belong- 
ing to the forces of the United States ; provided the officer committing shall, 
at the same time, deliver an account in writing, signed by himself, of the 
crime with which the said prisoner is charged. 

Art. 81. No officer commanding a guard, or provost-marshal, shall pre- 
sume to release any person committed to his chargewithout proper authority 
for so doing, nor shall he suffer any person to escape, on the penalty of being 
punished for it by the sentence of a court martial. 

Art. 82. Every officer or provost-marshal, to whose charge prisoners shall 



ARTlCLEa OE WAR. 



741 



be committed, shall, within twenty-four hours after such commitment, or as 
soon ns he shall be relieved from his guard, make report in writing, to the 
commanding officer, of their names, their crimes, and the names of the offi- 
cers wlio couinii:tcd tiiem. on the penalty of being punished for disobedicuco 
or neglect, at the discretion of a court martial. 

Akt. 83 Any commis.sioned officer convicted before a general court mar- 
tial of conduct unbecoming au ofiBcer and a gentleman, shall be dismissed 
the service. 

Art. 84. In cases where a court martial may think it proper to sentence a 
commissioned officer to be suspended from command, they shall have power 
also to suspend his pay and emoluments for the same time, according to the 
nature and heinousness of the offence. 

Aet. 85. In all cases where a commissioned officer is cashiered for cow- 
ardice or fraud, it shall be added in the sentence, that the crime, name, and 
place of abode, and punishment of the delinquent, be published in the news- 
papers in and about the camp, and of the particular State from which the 
oflTender came, or where he usually resides; after which it shall be deemed 
scandalous for an officer to associate with him. 

Art. 86. The comnmnding officer of any post or detachment, in which there 
shall not be a number of officers adequate to form a general court martial, 
shall, in cases which require the cognizance of such a court, report to the 
commanding officer of the department, who shall order a court to be assem- 
bled at the nearest post or department, and the party accused, with neces- 
sary witnesses, to be transported to the place where the said court shall be 
assembled. 

Art. 87.1 No person shall be sentenced to suffer death but by the concur- 
rence of two-thirds of the members of a general court martial, nor except in 
the cases herein expressly mentioned ; nor shall more than fifty lashes be inflicted 
■on any offender, at the discretion of a court martial; and no officer, non-com- 
missioned officer, soldier, or follower of the army, shall be tried a second time 
for tiie same offence. 

ARr. 88, No person shall be liable to be tried and punished by a general 
cou'rt martial for any offence which shall appear to have been committed 
more than two years before the issuing of the order for such trial, unless the 
person, by reason of having absented himself, or some other manifest impedi- 
ment, shall not have been amenable to justice within that period. 

Art. 89. Every officer authorized to order a general court martial shall 
have power to pardon or mitigate any punishment ordered by such court, 
except the sentence of death, or of casliiering an officer; which, in the cases 
Avhere he has authority (by Article 65) to carry them into execution, he may 
suspend, until the pleasure of the President of the United States can be 
known ; wliich suspension, together with copies of the proceedings of the 
court martial, the said officer shall immediately transmit to the president for 
his determination. And the colonel or commanding officer of the regiment 
or garrison where any regimental or garrison court martial shall be held, 
may pardon or mitigate any punishment ordered by such court to be inflicted. 

Art. 90. Every judge advocate, or person officiating as such, at any 
general court martial, sliall transmit, Avith as much expedition as the oppor- 
tunity of time and distance of place can admit, the original proceedings and 

* So much of llii^se rules and artiele.s as authorizes the infliction of corporeal punishment 
by stripes and lashes, was specially repealed by act of 16th May, 1812. By act of 2d March, 
18o3, the repealing act was repealed, .^o far as it applied to the crime of desortion, which 
of course, revived the punishment by lashes for that offence. 



742 APPENDIX. 

sentence of such court martial to the Secretary of War; which said original 
proceedings and sentence shall be carefully kept and preserved in the office 
of said secretary, to the end that the persons entitled thereto may be enabled, 
upon application to the said office, to obtain copies thereof. 

The party tried by any general court martial shall, upon demand thereof, 
made by himself, or by any person or persons in his behalf, be entitled to a 
copy of the sentence and proceedings of such court martial. 

Art. 91. In cases where the general, or commanding officer may order fi 
court of inquiry to examine into the nature of any transaction, accusation, 
or imputation against any officer or soldier, the said court shall consist of 
one or more officers, not exceeding three, and a judge advocate, or other suit- 
able person as a recorder, to reduce the proceedings and evidence to writing ; 
all of whom shall be sworn to the faithful performance of their duty. This 
court shall have the same power to summon witnesses as a court martial, and. 
to examine them on oath. But they shall not give their opinion on the 
merits of the case, excepting they shall be thereto specially required. The 
parties accused shall also be permitted to cross-examine and interrogate the 
witnesses, so as to investigate fully the circumstances in the question. 

Art. 92. The proceedings of a court of inquiry must be authenticated by 
the signature of the recorder and the president, and delivered to the com- 
manding officer, and the said proceedings may be admitted as evidence by 
a court martial, in cases not capital, or extending to the dismission of an 
officer, provided that the circumstances are such that oral testimony cannot 
be obtained. But as courts of inquiry may be perverted to dishonorable 
purposes, and may be considered as engines of destruction to military merit, 
in the hands of weak and envious commandants, they are hereby prohibited, 
unless directed by the President of the United S'tates, or demanded by the 
acciised. 

Art. 93. The judge advocate or recorder shall administer to the members 
the following oath: 

"You shall well and truly examine and inquire, according to your evi- 
dence, into the matter now before you, without partiality, favor, a£Fection, 
prejudice, or hope of reward. So help you God." 

After which the president shall administer to the judge advocate or re- 
corder the following oath : 

"You, A. B., do swear that you will, according to your best abilities, ac- 
curately and impartially record the proceedings of the court, and the evi- 
dence to be given in the case in hearing. So help you God." 

The witnesses shall take the same oath as witnesses sworn before a court 
martial. 

Art. 94. When any commissioned officer shall die or be killed in the ser- 
vice of the United States, the major of the regiment, or the officer doing the 
major's duty in his absence, or in any post or garrison, the second officer in 
command, or the assistant military agent, shall immediately secure all his 
effects or equipage, then in camp or quarters, and shall make an inventory 
thereof, and forthwith transmit the same to the office of the Department of 
War, to the end that his executors or administrators may receive the same. 

Art. 95. When any non-commissioned officer or soldier shall die, or be 
killed in the service of the United States, the then commanding officer of the 
troop or company shall, in the presence of two other commissioned officers, 
take an account of what effects he died possessed of, above his arms and 
accoutrements, and transmit the same to the office of the Department of 
War, which said effects are to be accounted for, and paid to the representa- 
tives of such deceased non-commissioned officer or soldier. And in case any 



ARTICLES OF WAR. 743 

of the officers, so aiitliovized to take care of the eJffects of deceased officers 
and soldiers, should, before they ha^e accounted to their representatives for 
the same, have occasion to leave the regiment or post, by preferment or 
otherwise, they shall, before they be permitted to quit the same, deposit in 
the hands of the commanding officer, or of the assistant military agent, all 
the effects of such deceased non-commissioned officers and soldiers, in order 
that the same may be secured for, and paid to, their respective representatives. 

Art. 96. All officers, conductors, gunners, matrosses, drivers, or other 
persons whatsoever, receiving pay or hire in the service of the artillery, or 
corps of engineers of the United States, shall be governed by the aforesaid 
Kules and Articles, and shall be subject to be tried by courts martial, in like 
manner with the officers and soldiers of the other troops in the service of 
the United States. 

Art. 97. The officers and soldiers of any troops, whether militia or others, 
being mustered and in pay of the United States, shall, at all times and in all 
places, wlien joined, or acting in conjunction with the regular forces of the 
United States, be governed by these rules and articles of war, and shall be 
subject to be tried by courts martial in like manner with the officers and 
soldiers in the regular forces ; save only that such courts martial shall be 
composed entirely of militia officers. 

Art. 98. All officers serving by commission from the authority of any 
particular state, shall, on all detachments, courts martial, or other duty, 
wherein they may be employed in conjunction with the regular forces of the 
United States, take rank next after all officers of the like grade in said 
regular forces, notwithstanding the commissions of such militia or state 
officers may be older than the commissions of the officers of the regular 
forces of the United States. 

Art. 99. All crimes not capital, and all disorders and neglects which offi- 
cers and soldiers may be guilty of, to the prejudice of good order and mili- 
tary discipline, though not mentioned in the foregoing articles of war, are to 
be taken cognizance of by a general or regimental court martial, according 
to the nature and degree of the offence, and be punished at their discretion. 

Art. 100. The President of the United States shall have power to prescribe 
the uniform of the army. 

Art. 101. The foregoing articles are to be read and published, once ia 
every six months, to every garrison, regiment, troop, or company, mustered, 
or to be mustered, in the service of the United States, and are to be duly 
observed and obeyed by all officers and soldiers who are, or shall be, in said 
service. 

Sec. 2. And be it further enacted, That in time of war, all persons not 
citizens of, or owing allegiance to, the United States of America, who shall 
be found lurking as spies in or about the fortifications or encampments of 
the armies of the United States, or any of them, shall suffer death, according 
to the law and usage of nations, by sentence of a general court martial. 

Sec. 3. And be it further enacted, That the rules and regulations by which 
the armies of the United States have heretofore been governed, and the re- 
solves of Congress thereunto annexed, and respecting the same, shall hence- 
forth be void and of no effect, except so far as may relate to any transactions 
under them prior to the promulgation of this act, at the several posts and 
garrisons respectively, occupied by any part of the army of the United 
States. [Approved, April 10, 1806.] 



